GE Medical Systems Electronic Performance Support Tool (EPST)

Philips Intera NT Alignment and Calibration

Component Locations

Error Codes

Functional Checks

Logic and Block Diagrams

Preventive Maintenance

Software and Diagnostics

Theory

Troubleshooting

How to Use this EPST

Environmental Health & Safety

This program and its contents are RESTRICTED to General Electric Company and
approved licensees, i.e., for General Electric Company personnel and approved users only.
If you are not a General Electric Company employee or approved licensee, you must close Reference Materials
this application immediately. Disclosure to third parties prohibited. This document is
intended as a supplement to OEM documentation and not intended to be used in lieu of
OEM documentation. OEM documentation should be used as the primary source for Multi-Vendor Resources
service information.
© 2008 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Notes

5197921-200, Rev 1
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 5197921-200

Document Specifications
EPST Name: Philips Intera NT EPST
Part#: 5197921-200
Rev#: Rev 1
Revision History

Rev Author Initials Sections Changed Date Brief Description of Change

0 TG n/a December, 2006 New EPST

JL
1 AG Multiple October, 2008 Additions for multiple SW, amplifier,
JL and table options.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 2 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

ALIGNMENT AND CALIBRATION

General Information Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni)
Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance Frequency
Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera)
Readjust Quad Body Coil
Define Start Position
Hybrid Box Transmit Curve Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni)
Adjust Hybrid Box Resonance Frequency Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality
Adjust Quad Body Coil Quad Body Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-
Quad Head Coil Frequency Adjustment (NT Intera) Power/Master)
Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance Frequency
First Mode
Readjust Quad Body Coil
Second Mode
Orthogonality Adjustment 1 Quad Head Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-
Orthogonality Adjustment 2 Power/Master)
Final Actions Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality
Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni) System Calibration
Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance Frequency Log into System Calibration
Readjust Quad Body Coil System Calibration Menu (R7.x-R9.x)
System Calibration Menu (R10.x-R11.x)
Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni)
Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality BDAS Adjustments
Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power) Magnet (NT Intera)
Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance Frequency Light Visor Adjustments
Readjust Quad Body Coil
Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power)
Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 3 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Host Computer Data Acquisition

OCD 20" Monitors (R7.x-R9.x) RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42)
Introduction Tube Bias Adjustment
Blacklevel Adjustment Self Test (S21 Amp Only)
Phase Adjustment Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test
Power Management RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64)
OCD Monitor (19" Option) Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test
Introduction Self Test
Connecting the 19" OCD
LCD Replacement
Gradient Amplifiers
OCD Configuration Intera w/Copley 234
Blacklevel Adjustment Gradient Amplifier Check/Adjustment
Phase Adjustment Clock Verify Test
Offset Check
Cooling System Gradient Current Adjustment
Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style)
Startup
Temperature Adjustment
Calibration
Settings
Gradient Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New
Style)
Startup
Temperature Adjustment

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 4 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifiers, continued Patient Positioning

Intera w/Copley 271 NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table
Caution Table Movement - Vertical Adjustment
Start ASW Table Movement - Horizontal Adjustment
Adjustment Sequence Light Visor Adjustment
Set Gradient Amplifier Settings into the Tuned HW Pars MT (Electrical) Patient Table
Set the Tuned HW Pars into the Gradient Amplifier Table Height Adjustment
Registers Table Perpendicularity Adjustment
Adjust Gain and Offset Horizontal Timing Belt Tension Adjustment
Adjust Settling Mount the Physiology Unit (Right/Left Side)
Adjust Dual Delay Adjust Tabletop Sideways Play
Eddy Current Compensation Table Length Adjustment
Gradient Chain Verification Final Table Check
Gradient Boost Mode Adjustment
Channel Delay and Shimming
Eddy Current Analysis
Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R7.x-R9.x)
Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R10.x-R11.x)
Intera w/Copley 274
Start ASW
Offset Check
Gradient Gain (R7.x-9.x)
Gain & Offset (R10.x-R11.x)
Settling Adjustment
Dual Delay Adjustment (PT6000/Intera Master)
Eddy Current Compensation
Determine Gradient Parameters
Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R7.x-R9.x)
Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R10.x-R11.x)

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 5 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera)

Select one of the following topics: The following procedures apply to the Intera 0.5 - 1.5T
standard system.
• Define Start Position
If should be completed whenever the QBC is improperly
• Hybrid Box Transmit Curve
adjusted or outside specification. The procedure consists
• Adjust Hybrid Box Resonance Frequency of four parts.
• Adjust Quad Body Coil
Procedure Details

1. Define Start Position. n/a

2. Hybrid Box Transmit This procedure checks/adjusts
Curve the Hybrid box transmit curve.
To improve the slice selection
definition of the volume, the
coil is designed to have a flat
transmit curve.
3. Adjust Hybrid Box During this procedure, the f0 of
Resonance Frequency the 2 preamps in the hybrid
box are adjusted to the correct
frequency. The Q-factor is also
checked.
4. Orthogonality This procedure is required
Adjustment 1 when the Q-factor was not
within specification.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 6 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera), continued

Define Start Position
Hybrid Box
1. Turn the gradient amplifier OFF and lower the patient
table. MGBX7 MGBX8

2. Remove the following components:

• bridge section MGBP1

• PICU front cover L6 L7

• front cone
L11
3. Remove the top cover from the left magnet. X3 X5 L8

The Hybrid box (in front of QBC) and the gradient/RF L12
X6 X4
L9

coil assembly should now be visible.

4. In the magnet isocenter, setup the Body Coil Linear C37 C29
Flux Probe with Rotation Knob and the two linear
MGBX13
PU-Right MGBX4
X9
flux probes. X12 L2 PinchOff 2
L1

MGBX14
X13 MGBX15
• Flux probes should coincide with the Detune PU-Left
X16
X10 Body Coil
Receive
boards in the body coil. X11
X15
MGBX3
PinchOff1/

• Position the flux probe holder horizontally. X14 T-Switch

• Cables should exit the bore through the magnet C8 C23

backside. MGBX16
PU-Output
Probe in
Pos 3 & 8 MGBX1
RF-IN
MGBX2
50' Load
Probe in
Pos 7 & 15

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 7 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera), continued

Define Start Position, continued 12. In the magnet isocenter, setup the flux probe
holder with the two linear flux probes.
5. From the Hybrid box, disconnect MGBX1, MGBX3,
and MGBX4. Note Flux probes should coincide with the Detune
boards in the body coil.
Caution The cables can carry 300 V. Disconnect
them before opening the Hybrid box. 13. Mount the probes on both ends of the holder.
14. From the TRSW board (PFEI) disconnect the two
6. Remove the top plate to open the Hybrid box. tune signals MMFX2 and MMFX3.
7. To ensure you can return the coils to their original 15. Connect one of the two flux probes to tune A at
position following alignment, mark the position of connector MMFX2.
coils L6 and L7.
16. From the coilint, disconnect connector MME X5
8. Once their original positions have been marked, (QBC_receive).
remove the two coils from the Hybrid box.
17. Connect the remaining flux probe to MME X5
Note Since the body coil is electrically disconnected (coilint).
from the remainder of the system, the coil reso-
nance frequency can be adjusted. 18. Using the special tool for trimmers, release the
locking nut making it possible to adjust the trimmers.
9. Close the Hybrid box.
19. Carefully, turn all rod trimmers completely clockwise
10. Mark the position of the pickup coils and remove the and STOP when you feel resistance.
pickup coils from the QBC.
QBC resonance frequency will now be very low.
11. Reconnect MGBX1, MGBX3, and MGBX4 to the
hybrid box.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 8 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera), continued

Hybrid Box Transmit Curve 9. Select Display grid > Autoscale.
The following procedure applies to the Intera 0.5 - 1.5T The monitor displays a wave with two distinct bumps.
standard system.
10. On the front of the Hybrid Box, use trimmer C8 to
1. Position one of the linear flux probes into the make the amplitude of the two humps displayed as
rotation knob. identical as possible.
2. Place the rotation knob in the holder. 11. Move the flux probe to position #7 - #15.
3. Position the holder in the magnet isocenter. 12. Use trimmer C23 to adjust the response signal now
4. Move the flux probe to position #3 - #11. displayed, so it appears as flat and symmetrical as
possible.
5. Connect this flux probe to the pickup coil input on
13. Select Display Min./Max.
coilint board MME X8.
14. Continue adjusting C8 and C23 until you are
6. Turn the gradients ON.
satisfied with the results.
7. Select Adjust BBM Xmit.
15. Replace the probe and rotation knob with the quad
8. Click [PROCEED] four times to begin the flux probe.
measurement.
Note The quad flux probe can be mounted directly
into the holder, so the rotation knob is not
needed.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 9 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera), continued

Hybrid Box Transmit Curve, continued 19. Verify the signal is within specification.
16. Place the holder in the magnet isocenter. a. Measure and record the signal maximum (Umax).
• Place the probe into the bore from the patient b. Press <MOD DISPLAY>. Adjust the value for
support side. Vertical Minimum to (0.88 x Umax).
• Cable connector directed toward patient support. – Lowest screen values: -1dB points of curve
• Cable should exit bore via the backside. – Center frequency: 21.285 kHz
• The holder must be placed horizontally. – Transmit curve: approximately 21.285 Mhz
17. Connect the probe to MME X8. c. Use the zoom function (Offset 1) to determine the
18. Use trimmer C23 to adjust the flatness of the tune frequency offset of the left -1dB point.
curve within specification. It must appear as flat and d. Use the zoom function (Offset 2) to determine the
symmetrical as possible. frequency offset of the right -1dB point.
e. Select the lowest of the two values and multiply it
by two.
Note The found value is the -1dB bandwidth
(B-1dB). Spec: B-1dB >200 kHz.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 10 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera), continued

Hybrid Box Transmit Curve, continued 2. Setup the flux probe holder as indicated below:
20. On the console, press <STOP SCAN> to stop the • Connect one flux probe to ZDX2 on the Tune
adjustment loop once the specification has been Box.
met.
• Connect the other to MME X5 on the coilint
21. Turn the gradients OFF. (PFEI).
22. Remove the probe holder from the bore.
23. Disconnect the quad flux probe.
24. On the coilint, reconnect the pickup coil signal to the
pickup coil input.
Adjust Hybrid Box Resonance Frequency
The following procedure applies to the Intera 0.5T
standard system.
1. Before proceeding with this procedure, complete the
Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera)
procedure in Functional Checks. If not out of
specification, do not complete the adjustment.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 11 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera), continued

Adjust Hybrid Box Resonance Frequency, Adjust Quad Body Coil
continued The following procedures apply to the Intera 0.5 - 1.5T
3. In Body Coil Procedures, select Adjust BBM standard system.
Receive.
Body Coil Coarse Frequency Adjustment
4. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. The following procedure applies to the Intera 0.5T
5. Move the flux probe to position #3 - #11. Standard system.
6. Use trimmer 37 (accessed through an opening in the 1. Logon as Gyroscan.
top plate of the Hybrid box) to adjust the frequency 2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
offset to a minimum value.
3. Select Enter Service Mode using Service as the
Specification: password.
– Frequency Offset F(1): <+10 kHz 4. Select System tuning using System as the
– Q > 400 password.
7. Move the flux probe to position #7 - #15. 5. Select System tuning tools > Installation
Procedures.
8. Use trimmer 29 to adjust the frequency offset to a
minimum value. 6. Select Body Coil Procedures > Adjust Frequency
Course.
Specification:
– Frequency Offset F(2): <+10 kHz and
F(2) = F(1) +2.5 kHz.
– Q > 400
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 12 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera), continued

Adjust Quad Body Coil, continued 10. Check the frequency of the Tune top
(Offset_horizontal).
Body Coil Coarse Frequency Adjustment,
continued Note Only if the top of the tune curve is visible is
7. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. the measurement valid.
8. Turn rod trimmers #3, #7, #11, and #15 fifteen full 11. Position the flux probe holder vertically (between #1
turns counterclockwise. and #9).
9. Position the flux probe holder horizontally (between 12. Check the frequency of the Tune top
#5 and #13). (Offset_vertical).
Flux Probe Holder in QBC Note Only if the top of the tune curve is visible is
(Position #3 - #11) the measurement valid.

16
1 13. If you can not determine the Tune top voltages, turn
rod trimmers #3, #7, #11, and #15 five full turns
2

counterclockwise (while monitoring the tune-curves)

15 3

until:
14 Flux Probe 4

• the curve must be visible

13 5 • horizontal offset is about -60 kHz
• vertical offset is about -60 kHz
12 6

11 7

10 8
9

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 13 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera), continued

Adjust Quad Body Coil, continued 16. Position the flux probe vertically. Using rod
trimmers #16, #1, #2, #8, #9, and #10, adjust the
Body Coil Coarse Frequency Adjustment,
continued offset to a minimum value (<10 kHz).
14. If the offset_horizontal is greater than the Note Remember to complete step 15 if you
offset_vertical, complete step 15, then 16. already haven’t done so.
- or - Important! Turn these trimmers with the same amount of
turns in the same direction. Turning a trim-
If the offset_vertical is greater than the mer counterclockwise increases resonance
offset_horizontal, complete step 16, then 15. frequency. Each turn should change the res-
- or - onance frequency approximately 20 kHz.
If both offsets are essentially the same, complete 17. Move the flux probe to position #3 - #11. Using rod
step 15, then 16. trimmers #3 and #11, adjust the frequency offset to
a minimum.
15. Position the flux probe horizontally. Using rod
trimmers #4, #5, #6, #12, #13, and #14, adjust the 18. Move the flux probe to position #7 - #15. Using rod
offset to a minimum value (<10 kHz). trimmers #7 and #15, adjust the frequency offset to
a minimum.
Important! Turn these trimmers with the same amount of
turns in the same direction. Turning a trim- 19. Continue to Body Coil Fine Frequency
mer counterclockwise increases resonance Adjustment on the next page.
frequency. Each turn should change the res-
onance frequency approximately 20 kHz.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 14 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera), continued

Adjust Quad Body Coil, continued 6. Select Body Coil Procedures > Adjust Frequency
Fine.
Body Coil Fine Frequency Adjustment
Important! Remember to always adjust the two trimmers 7. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
of one pair equally; turning each the same 8. Move the flux probe to position #1 - #9. Using rod
amount in the same direction. trimmers #1 and #9, adjust the frequency offset to a
Note For each probe position: minimum (< +5 kHz).

– Offset < +5 kHz 9. Move the flux probe to position #8 - #16. Using rod
trimmers #8 and #16, adjust the frequency offset to a
– Q > 400 minimum (< +5 kHz).
1. Logon as Gyroscan. 10. Move the flux probe to position #2 - #10. Using rod
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. trimmers #2 and #10, adjust the frequency offset to a
minimum (< +5 kHz).
3. Select Enter Service Mode using Service as the
password. 11. Move the flux probe to position #5 - #13. Using rod
trimmers #5 and #13, adjust the frequency offset to a
4. Select System tuning using System as the minimum (< +5 kHz).
password.
12. Move the flux probe to position #6 - #14. Using rod
5. Select System tuning tools > Installation trimmers #6 and #14, adjust the frequency offset to a
procedures. minimum (< +5 kHz).

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 15 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera), continued

Adjust Quad Body Coil, continued Restore to Normal Operation
Body Coil Fine Frequency Adjustment, continued 1. Stop the tuning loop.
13. Move the flux probe to position #4 - #12. Using rod 2. Disconnect MGBX1, MGBX3, and MGBX4
trimmers #4 and #12, adjust the frequency offset to a
3. Open the Hybrid Box.
minimum (< +5 kHz).
4. In the Hybrid box, remount L6 and L7 (two 560 nH
14. Move the flux probe to position #3 - #11. Using rod
coils) in the same position as they were before
trimmers #3 and #11, adjust the frequency offset to a
beginning the body coil adjustment.
minimum (< +5 kHz).
5. Close the Hybrid box.
15. Move the flux probe to position #7 - #15. Using rod
trimmers #7 and #15, adjust the frequency offset to a 6. From the magnet bore, remove the flux probe holder.
minimum (< +5 kHz).
7. Disconnect the flux probes (2) from the holder.
16. Repeat the Body Coil Fine Frequency Adjustment
procedure until all values are within specification.
17. When no further adjustments are required, continue
to the Restore to Normal Operation procedure.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 16 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera), continued

Adjust Quad Body Coil, continued
Restore to Normal Operation, continued Hybrid Box
8. In the magnet bore, remount the pickup coils. MGBX7 MGBX8

a. Verify there is 14 mm between the edge of the

pickup coil and the body coil. See below.
b. Verify connector PU-right is connected to
MGBP1

L6 L7
MGBX13.
c. Verify PU-left is connected to MGBX14.
L11 X3 X5 L8

9. Connect the body coil receive signal (MMEX5) to the

coilint. L12 L9
X6 X4

10. Connect the tune cables (MMFX2 and MMFX3).

MGBX13 C37 C29
Body Coil PU-Right MGBX4
X9
X12 L2 PinchOff 2
L1

14 mm 14 mm MGBX14
X13 MGBX15
PU-Left
X10 Body Coil
X16
Pickup Pickup Receive
X15
Coil Coil
X11 MGBX3
PinchOff1/
X14 T-Switch

C8 C23
Hybrid Box MGBX16 Probe in Probe in
PU-Output Pos 3 & 8 MGBX1 MGBX2 Pos 7 & 15
RF-IN 50' Load

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 17 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Frequency Adjustment (NT Intera)

Select one of the following topics: 9. If the frequency is within specification, record the
Q-factor, voltage at tune top (U1), and the offset
• First Mode
frequency F(1).
• Second Mode Head Coil
• Orthogonality Adjustment 1
• Orthogonality Adjustment 2 Front Back Cover
• Final Actions
The following procedures applies to the Intera 0.5 - 1.5T
standard system.
First Mode Linear Flux Probe
1. Position the flux probe to position #L8 - #L12.
2. Remove the rear cover.
3. Remove jumper W1. Set jumper W2 to position 2.
4. Replace the rear cover.
5. Read the Coil Q-factor (Q1 > 350).
6. Read the voltage at tune top (U1).
7. Read the offset frequency. F(1). F(1) < +10 kHz.
8. Use trimmer C116 to adjust the frequency if F(1)
does not meet specification.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 18 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Frequency Adjustment (NT Intera), continued

Second Mode Orthogonality Adjustment 1
1. Position the flux probe to position #L5 - #L11. 1. Position the flux probe to position #L8 - #L12
(against the front ring of the head coil).
2. Remove the rear cover.
2. Record the voltage at center frequency (U3).
3. Remove jumper W2. Set jumper W1 to position 2.
4. Replace the rear cover. 3. Use the formula below to calculate the attenuation.

5. Read the Coil Q-factor (Q2 > 350). Att(1) = 20 log (U2/U3)

6. Read the voltage at tune top (U2). Note Typically, Att(1) > 15 dB.

7. Read the offset frequency. F(2). F(2) < +10 kHz. 4. If the value is within specification, continue to
Orthogonality Adjustment 2.
8. Use trimmer C68 to adjust the frequency if F(2) does
not meet specification. - or -

9. If the frequency is within specification, record the If the value is not within specification, continue to
Q-factor, voltage at tune top (U2), and the offset step 5.
frequency F(2). 5. Verify the probe is in position #L8 - #L12.
6. Remove jumper W2. Set jumper W1 to position 2.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 19 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Frequency Adjustment (NT Intera), continued

Orthogonality Adjustment 1, continued Orthogonality Adjustment 2
7. Turn trimmer C100 clockwise a small amount and 1. Position the flux probe to position #L5 - #L11
check if the response decreases. If not, turn C100 (against the front ring of the head coil).
counterclockwise and C132 the same amount in the
2. Remove jumper W1. Set jumper W2 to position 2.
opposite direction.
3. Record the voltage at center frequency (U4).
8. Minimize the response by turning both trimmers as
previously described until a minimum is reached. 4. Use the formula below to calculate the attenuation.
9. Record the measured voltage (U3). Att(2) = 20 log (U1/U4)
Important! Due to the mechanical construction of the Note Typically, Att(2) > 15 dB.
coil, the orthogonality measurement is not
accurate. Adjust orthogonality as much as 5. If the value is within specification, continue to Final
you can, but it is not necessary to reach the Actions.
typical value. - or -
Proper functioning of the coil is checked dur-
ing image quality performance measure- If the value is not within specification, continue to
ments. step 6.
6. Verify the probe is in position #L5 - #L11.
7. Remove jumper W1. Set jumper W2 to position 2.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 20 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Frequency Adjustment (NT Intera), continued

Orthogonality Adjustment 2, continued Final Actions
8. Turn trimmer C100 clockwise a small amount and 1. Repeat the Quad Head Coil Frequency
check if the response decreases. If not, turn C100 Adjustment (NT Intera) steps until no further
counterclockwise and C132 the same amount in the adjustments are necessary.
opposite direction.
Note Each adjustment can affect other parame-
9. Minimize the response by turning both trimmers as ters.
previously described until a minimum is reached.
2. If you have completed the procedure and no
10. Record the measured voltage (U4). adjustments were required:
Important! Due to the mechanical construction of the a. Record the measured values.
coil, the orthogonality measurement is not b. Install both jumpers in position 2.
accurate. Adjust orthogonality as much as
you can, but it is not necessary to reach the c. Replace the rear cover.
typical value. d. Remove the flux probe holder from the head coil.
Proper functioning of the coil is checked dur-
ing image quality performance measure- e. Reconnect tune coil cables MMF X2 and MMF
ments. X3.
f. Record the offset frequency F(head) and coil Q-
factor Q(head).
3. Restore the system to a normal operating condition.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 21 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni)

Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance 1. Before proceeding with this procedure, complete the
Frequency Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni)
procedure in Functional Checks. If not out of
Hybrid Box C31 and C32 (Trimmers) adjust the two
specification, do not complete the adjustment.
modes of the QBC and Hybrid Box. Remove the Hybrid
Box top plate to access both trimmers. 2. Position the linear flux probe with the rotation knob in
Hybrid Box the QBC flux probe holder, in the center of the QBC
at the 3-11 probe position.
Flux Probe Jig

C31 C32
L17 L18

L19 L20

MGBX14

MGBX13

X7

X8

MGBX16
MGBX1 MGBX2 MGBX15 MGBX3
MGBX4
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 22 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance 11. Use trimmer C31 to adjust the frequency as near as
Frequency, continued possible to the resonance frequency. Use the
3. Connect the cable to Tune A signal at MMFX2. monitor to check the offset.

Note To prevent coupling with the Hybrid Box, the Note Specification: F(1) < 10 kHz
cable should leave the magnet via the 12. Readjust the position of the flux probe to position
backside. 7-15.
TRSW

MMF 13. Use trimmer C32 to adjust the frequency as near as

possible to the resonance frequency. Use the
1 X2
16 2

monitor to check the offset.

15 3

14 4

Linear Flux Probe

13 5 Note Specification: F(2) < 10 kHz

12 Probe in position 3-11 6
14. Remove the linear flux probe.
7
11

10
9
8
15. From the backside of the magnet, mount the
4. Logon as Gyroscan. quadrature flux probe in the QBC flux probe holder.

5. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. 16. Position the holder in the center of the body coil with
the connector of the Q-flux probe pointed towards
6. Enter Service Mode. the magnet backside.
7. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools. Note The cable must be routed via the backside of
8. Select Installation Procedures. the magnet. Refer to the drawing on the
following page.
9. Select Body Coil Procedures.
10. Select Adjust QBC Receive.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 23 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance 19. Determine the frequency offset and the Q-factor.
Frequency, continued • Offset: < +10 kHz
17. Connect a 50 ohm coaxial cable between Tune A at
• Q: > 260 (Typical value Q: > 290)
connector MMFX2 and the quadrature flux probe.
1
20. If the specification cannot be reached, complete the
16 2 Readjust Quad Body Coil procedure.
VIA Backside
of Magnet 15 3

14 4

Q-Flux Probe

13 5

12
6

X2
7
11
MMF 8
10
9

TRSW

18. Select Adjust QBC Receive.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 24 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil 5. Disconnect the Hybrid Box cables.
This procedure should only be completed when: 6. Remove the top plate of the Hybrid Box.
• the Hybrid Box and Quad Body Coil could not be 7. Loosen the connector screws for the two rigid coax
adjusted within specification, and connections of the QBC.
• the QBC is replaced. Note There are 2 screws for each coax
In short, the re-adjustment includes three processes. connection.
First, the horizontal and vertical mode are adjusted to the 8. Remove the Hybrid Box.
resonance frequency. Second, the diagonal modes are
9. Remove the QBC inner top cover.
set to the resonance frequency. Finally, the complete
QBC is set to the proper frequency. Note Carefully pull out the covers, starting on one
side of the cover.
Preparation
1. Turn the gradient system OFF. 10. Mark the front and rear side of the QBC top cover, so
it can be returned to its original position.
2. Remove the lower system filter box cover.
11. Starting on one side, remove the inner lower cover.
3. Turn the FEPSU OFF.
4. Remove the following:
• bridge section
• PICU cover
• front cone cover.
The Hybrid Box and QBC should now be visible.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 25 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued
Preparation, continued
12. At the QBC rigid coax connection, mount the special
QBC adjustment tool.
Important! Do not use force to fasten the screws.
Note The adjustment tool must be connected to the
QBC connections instead of the Hybrid Box.
Extension cables must be left open on one end.
Refer to the drawing on the right. To MMFX2

PU Coil PU Coil
Left Right

To Cable MGBX15

Tool

Via BNC 1-Piece

X3
Hybrid
Box X4

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 26 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued
Preparation, continued Vertical Mode

13. Using a few screws, mount the top plate to the 1

Hybrid Box. 16 2
Mode 3-11

14. Position the Hybrid Box outside the magnet bore, so 15 3

cables MGBX3 and MGBX4 can be connected to the
Hybrid Box.
14 4
• Verify the Hybrid Box bottom does not contact the
gradient coil. Horizontal

• The Hybrid box top plate must be present to 13 5

avoid touching the 300 volts.
15. Connect the left pickup coil (as viewed from the
magnet front) to the MR response cable (MGBX15) 12
6
using a BNC I-piece.
16. Mark the present position of the pickup coils, then 7
shift both pickup coils as near as possible to the 11
QBC to get the best signal. 8
10 Mode 7-15
9

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 27 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued 22. Mount the linear flux probe via the rotation knob
in the flux probe holder.
Preparation, continued
17. Loosen the locking screws for all of the QBC 23. At MMFX2, connect the flux probe to Tune A, routing
trimmers. the cable via the backside of the magnet to the tune
box.
Note The trimmer adjustment screws are located
on the front and back side of the QBC. A sep- 24. Turn FEPSU ON.
arate tool, for both the thick and thin rods, is Adjust QBC
supplied with the system.
1. Logon as Gyroscan.
18. Mount the top QBC inner cover and verify its proper
orientation. 2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].

• Position one side of the cover in place and 3. Enter Service Mode.
manually push the other side into position. 4. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
• If necessary, use your fist to "click" the cover into 5. Select Installation Procedures.
position.
6. Select Body Coil Procedures.
Note The top inner cover must be mounted during
measurement because it creates a frequency 7. Select Adjust Frequency QBC.
shift. The bottom cover can be left out. 8. Start the measurement.
19. Remove the left magnet top cover.
20. Disconnect both tune cables (MMFX2 and MMFX3).
21. Position the QBC flux probe holder horizontal in the
center of the QBC.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 28 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued 11. Depending on the offset measured, use the following
trimmers to adjust the QBC:
Fine Adjustment - Separate Modes
1. Position the flux probe to position 7-15. • Mode 7-15: 7 & 15

2. Measure/record the frequency offset (F < +10 kHz). • Mode 3-11: 3 & 11

3. Position the flux probe to position 3-11. • Horizontal Mode:

4. Connect the right pickup coil to the receive cable – Offset > 20 kHz: 4, 5, 6 and 12, 13, 14
MGBX15 (see Hybrid Box). – Offset < 20 kHz: 5 & 13
5. Measure/record the offset (F < +10 kHz). • Vertical Mode:
6. Connect the left pickup coil. – Offset > 20 kHz: 16, 1, 2 and 8, 9, 10
7. Position the flux probe in the horizontal position. – Offset < 20 kHz: 1 & 9
8. Measure/record the offset (F < +10 kHz). Important! Turn all trimmers in the same direction,
9. Position the flux probe in the vertical position. clockwise for lower frequency, counterclock-
wise for higher frequency. For each rod, the
10. Measure /record the offset (F < +10 kHz). trimmers on the front and back side have to
be turned with the same amount in the same
direction.
12. Continue to step 13.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 29 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued QBC Receive Mode Measurement Preparation
Fine Adjustment - Separate Modes, continued 1. Turn the FEPSU OFF.
13. Start with the mode displaying the largest offset and 2. Remove the flux probe and holder from the QBC.
adjust all modes to the center frequency (+10 kHz).
3. From the Hybrid Box, disconnect cables MGBX3 and
• For 7-15, horizontal and vertical modes, use the MGBX4.
left pickup coil.
4. Remove the QBC adjustment tool, using care with
• For mode 3-11, use the right pickup coil. the coaxial connections of the QBC.
• Adjust using small steps (e.g., 1/4 turn at a time). 5. Mount the Hybrid Box in front of the QBC and
14. Check the modes until no further adjustments are connect all the cables to it.
needed. 6. Position the pickup coils back to their original
position.
15. Dismount the QBC inner covers.
Note Check the marks or position to 11 mm from
16. Lock all trimmers.
the QBC front ring. Ensure the QBC detune
17. Reinstall the QBC inner covers. cable is lead in the middle, underneath the
Hybrid Box.
18. Measure all modes.
7. Turn the FEPSU ON.
8. Complete the Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC
Resonance Frequency procedure.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 30 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued
Restore Normal Condition
1. Turn the FEPSU OFF.
2. Return all cables to their original position.
3. Remount the cone cover, PICU front cover and
bridge section.
4. Turn the FEPSU ON.
5. Complete the Check Body Coil Parameters
procedure.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 31 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni)

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality Preparation
The Quad Head Coil (QHC) is pre-adjusted at the 1. Remove the top cover from the left magnet.
factory; adjustment should only be necessary when: 2. Remove both tune coil cables (MMFX2 and
• the cable must be installed at the other side of the MMFX3).
coil, or 3. Connect the head coil to the surface coil connector 1
• image quality measurements for the head coil are (SC1).
outside specification. 4. Move the head coil slide-able part to the scanning
Important! The adjustment frequency for the QHC is (front) position.
42.576 MHz. Note This reduces the impact of the quad driver
Note The Quad Head Coil (QHC) for the 1.0T system board on the coil.
is provided with an electronic load. 5. Unscrew the rear cover of the coil.
The QHC is essentially two coils operating in different 6. Using tape, mount the cover back to the head coil.
modes, with a phase shift of 90o between both coils.
Each coil has a pre-amplifier. By disconnecting one coil Note Adjustment requires cover removal, but
(by removing a jumper on the quad pre-amp board) the measurements are only valid with the cover
resonance frequency of the other coil can be adjusted. closed.

Important! Orthogonality adjustment must be

completed to verify an exact 90o phase dif-
ference between the two coils.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 32 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality,
continued
Preparation, continued
7. Position the head coil on the table, so the rear of the L8
coil aligns with the end of the patient table (nearest
the magnet).
8. Position the head coil in the isocenter of the magnet
(via the travel-to-scan-plane) using the light visor
and marker on the coil.
9. Connect the Linear Flux Probe cable to MMFX2.
B
Important! Do not use the quadrature flux probe. L12

10. Position the linear flux probe in position 8-12.

• Position the holder against the front ring of the Viewed from Patient Support End

head coil. 11. Logon as Gyroscan.

• Do not use the 360o rotation knob. 12. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
• Verify the flux probe cable is apart from the head 13. Enter Service Mode.
coil cable, and it leaves the bore as straight as
possible.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 33 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, First Mode Frequency Check/Adjustment
continued Important! The rear cover of the head coil must be
Preparation, continued closed during measurement for the values to
14. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools. be valid. When changing jumpers, discon-
nect the head coil.
15. Select Installation Procedures.
1. Position the flux probe to position 8-12.
16. Select Head Coil Procedures.
17. To begin the measurements, click Proceed.
18. Select Autoscale. L8

B
L12

Viewed from Patient Support End

2. Remove the rear cover.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 34 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, 7. Read/record the offset frequency. F(1).
continued (F(1) < +25 kHz).
First Mode Frequency Check/Adjustment, 8. Use trimmer C116 to adjust the frequency if F(1)
continued does not meet specification.
3. Remove jumper W2. Set jumper W1 to position 2. 9. If the frequency is within specification, record the
Q-factor (Q1), voltage at tune top (U1), and the offset
frequency F(1).
Second Mode Frequency Check/Adjustment
Service C116 1. Position the flux probe to position L5-L11.
L5

W1 W2

4. Replace the rear cover.

5. Read/record the Coil Q-factor (Q1 > 250). A

6. Read/record the voltage at tune top (U1). L11

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 35 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, 5. Read/record the Coil Q-factor (Q2 > 250).
continued 6. Read/record the voltage at tune top (U2).
Second Mode Frequency Check/Adjustment,
continued 7. Read/record the offset frequency. F(2).
(F(2) < +25 kHz).
2. Remove the rear cover.
8. Use trimmer C68 to adjust the frequency if F(2) does
3. Remove jumper W1. Set jumper W2 to position 2.
not meet specification.
9. If the frequency is within specification, record the
Service C68
Q-factor (Q2), voltage at tune top (U2), and the offset
frequency F(2).

W1 W2

4. Replace the rear cover.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 36 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, 4. If the value is within specification, continue to
continued Orthogonality Adjustment 2.
Orthogonality Check/Adjustment 1 - or -
1. Position the flux probe to position 8-12 (against the If the value is not within specification, adjust the
front ring of the head coil). Tune Voltage at the marker position to a value as low
as possible. Proceed to step 5. to continue.
5. Verify the probe is in position 8-12.
L8
6. Remove jumper W1. Set jumper W2 to position 2.

T/O C100

B
L12

T/O C132

2. Record the voltage at center frequency (U3).

3. Use the formula below to calculate the attenuation.
W1 W2
Att(1) = 20 log (U2/U3)
Note Typically, Att(1) > 17 dB.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 37 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, Orthogonality Adjustment 2
continued 1. Position the flux probe to position 5-11 (against the
Orthogonality Check/Adjustment 1, continued front ring of the head coil).
7. Turn trimmer C100 clockwise a small amount and L5
check if the response decreases. If not, turn C100
counterclockwise and C132 the same amount in the
opposite direction.
8. Minimize the response by turning both trimmers as
previously described until a minimum is reached.
9. Record the measured voltage (U3).
Important! Due to the mechanical construction of the
coil, the orthogonality measurement is not
A
accurate. Adjust orthogonality as much as
you can, but it is not necessary to reach the
L11
typical value.
Proper functioning of the coil is checked
during image quality performance
measurements.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 38 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, 5. If the value is within specification, continue to Final
continued Actions.
Orthogonality Adjustment 2, continued - or -
2. Remove jumper W2. Set jumper W1 to position 2. If the value is not within specification, adjust the
Tune Voltage at the marker position to a value as low
as possible. Proceed to step 6. to continue.
T/O C100
6. Verify the probe is in position 5-11.
7. Remove jumper W2. Set jumper W1 to position 2.
8. Turn trimmer C100 clockwise a small amount and
check if the response decreases. If not, turn C100
counterclockwise and C132 the same amount in the
T/O C132

opposite direction.
9. Minimize the response by turning both trimmers as
previously described until a minimum is reached.
W1 W2
10. Record the measured voltage (U4).

3. Record the voltage at center frequency (U4). Important! Orthogonality measurement is not accurate.
Adjust as much as you can, but it is not nec-
4. Use the formula below to calculate the attenuation. essary to reach the typical value. Proper
Att(2) = 20 log (U1/U4) functioning of the coil is checked during
image quality performance measurements.
Note Typically, Att(2) > 17 dB.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 39 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality,
continued
Final Actions
1. Repeat the frequency and orthogonality steps until
no further adjustments are necessary.
Note Each adjustment can affect other
parameters.
2. If you have completed the procedure and no
adjustments were required:
a. Record the measured values.
b. Install both jumpers in position 2.
c. Replace the rear cover.
d. Remove the flux probe holder from the head coil.
e. Reconnect tune coil cables MMFX2 and
MMFX3 to the TRSW board.
f. Record the offset frequency F(head) and coil
Q-factor Q(head).
3. Restore the system to a normal operating condition.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 40 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power)

Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance 3. Connect the cable to Tune A signal at MMFX2.
Frequency Note To prevent coupling with the Hybrid Box, the
Hybrid Box C31 and C32 (Trimmers) adjust the two cable should leave the magnet via the
modes of the QBC and Hybrid Box. Remove the Hybrid backside.
Box top plate to access both trimmers. TRSW

1. Before beginning this procedure, complete the Quad

MMF

1 X2
Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power) 16 2

procedures in Functional Checks. 15 3

Note Continue with this procedure only if the results of 14 4

the functional check are out of specification. Linear Flux Probe

2. Position the Linear Flux Probe with the rotation 13 5

knob in the QBC flux probe holder, in the center of

the QBC at the 3-11 probe position. 12 Probe in position 3-11 6

7
11

8
10
9

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 41 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance 13. Use trimmer C32 (see Hybrid Box) to adjust the
Frequency, continued frequency as near as possible to the resonance
4. Logon as Gyroscan. frequency. Use the monitor to check the offset.

5. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. Note Specification: F(2) < 2 kHz

6. Enter Service Mode. 14. Remove the linear flux probe.

7. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools. 15. From the backside of the magnet, mount the
quadrature flux probe in the QBC flux probe holder.
8. Select Installation Procedures.
16. Position the holder in the center of the body coil with
9. Select Body Coil Procedures. the connector of the Q-flux probe pointed towards
the magnet backside.
10. Select Adjust QBC Receive.
Note The cable must be routed via the backside of
11. Use trimmer C31(see Hybrid Box) to adjust the
frequency as near as possible to the resonance the magnet. Refer to the drawing on the
following page.
frequency. Use the monitor to check the offset.
Note Specification: F(1) < 2 kHz
12. Readjust the position of the flux probe to position
7-15.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 42 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance 19. Determine the frequency offset and the Q-factor.
Frequency, continued • Offset: < +20 kHz
17. Connect a cable between Tune A at connector
• Q: > 250 (Typical value Q: > 290)
MMFX2 and the quadrature flux probe.
1
20. If the specification cannot be reached, complete the
16 2 Readjust Quad Body Coil procedure.
VIA Backside
of Magnet 15 3

14 4

Q-Flux Probe

13 5

12
6

X2
7
11
MMF 8
10
9

TRSW

18. Select Adjust QBC Receive.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 43 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil 5. Disconnect the Hybrid Box cables.
This procedure should only be completed when: 6. Remove the top plate of the Hybrid Box.
• the Hybrid Box and Quad Body Coil could not be 7. Loosen the connector screws for the two rigid coax
adjusted within specification, and connections of the QBC.
• the QBC is replaced. Note There are 2 screws for each coax
In short, the re-adjustment includes three processes. connection.
First, the horizontal and vertical mode are adjusted to the 8. Remove the Hybrid Box.
resonance frequency. Second, the diagonal modes are
9. Remove the QBC inner top cover.
set to the resonance frequency. Finally, the complete
QBC is set to the proper frequency. Note Carefully pull out the covers, starting on one
side of the cover.
Preparation
1. Turn the gradient system OFF. 10. Mark the front and rear side of the QBC top cover, so
it can be returned to its original position.
2. Remove the lower system filter box cover.
11. Starting on one side, remove the inner lower cover.
3. Turn the FEPSU OFF.
4. Remove the following:
• bridge section
• PICU cover
• front cone cover.
The Hybrid Box and QBC should now be visible.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 44 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued
Preparation, continued
12. At the QBC rigid coax connection, mount the special
QBC adjustment tool.
Important! Do not use force to fasten the screws.
Note The adjustment tool must be connected to the
QBC connections instead of the Hybrid Box.
Extension cables must be left open on one end.
Refer to the drawing on the right.
To MMFX2

PU Coil PU Coil
Left Right

To Cable MGBX15

Tool

Via BNC 1-Piece

X3
Hybrid
Box X4

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 45 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued
Preparation, continued Vertical Mode

13. Using a few screws, mount the top plate to the 1

Hybrid Box. 16 2
Mode 3-11

14. Position the Hybrid Box outside the magnet bore, so 15 3

cables MGBX3 and MGBX4 can be connected to the
Hybrid Box.
14 4
• Verify the Hybrid Box bottom does not contact the
gradient coil. Horizontal

• The Hybrid box top plate must be present to 13 5

avoid touching the 300 volts.
15. Connect the left pickup coil (as viewed from the
magnet front) to the MR response cable (MGBX15) 12
6
using a BNC I-piece.
16. Mark the present position of the pickup coils, then 7
shift both pickup coils as near as possible to the 11
QBC to get the best signal. 8
10 Mode 7-15
9

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 46 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued 21. Position the QBC flux probe holder horizontal in the
center of the QBC.
Preparation, continued
17. Loosen the locking screws for all of the QBC 22. Mount the linear flux probes into the rotation
trimmers. knob in the flux probe holder.

Note The trimmer adjustment screws are located 23. At MMFX2, connect the flux probe to tune A, routing
on the front and back side of the QBC. A sep- the cable via the backside of the magnet to the tune
arate tool, for both the thick and thin rods, is box.
supplied with the system. 24. Turn FEPSU ON.
18. Mount the QBC inner covers, starting with the lower Adjust QBC
cover. Verify its proper orientation.
1. Logon as Gyroscan.
• Position one side of the cover in place and
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
manually push the other side into position.
3. Enter Service Mode.
• If necessary, use your fist to "click" the cover into
position. 4. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
Note The inner covers must be mounted during 5. Select Installation Procedures.
measurement because it creates a frequency
6. Select Body Coil Procedures.
shift. The bottom cover can be left out.
7. Select Adjust Frequency QBC.
19. Remove the left magnet top cover.
8. Start the measurement.
20. Disconnect both tune cables (MMFX2 and MMFX3)
from the TRSW board (PFEI).

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 47 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued 11. Depending on the offset measured, use the following
trimmers to adjust the QBC:
Fine Adjustment - Separate Modes
1. Position the flux probe to position 7-15. • Mode 7-15: 7 & 15

2. Measure/record the frequency offset (F < +13 kHz). • Mode 3-11: 3 & 11

3. Position the flux probe to position 3-11. • Horizontal Mode:

4. Connect the right pickup coil to the receive cable – Offset > 20 kHz: 4, 5, 6 and 12, 13, 14
MGBX15 (see Hybrid Box). – Offset < 20 kHz: 5 & 13
5. Measure/record the offset (F < +13 kHz). • Vertical Mode:
6. Connect the left pickup coil. – Offset > 20 kHz: 16, 1, 2 and 8, 9, 10
7. Position the flux probe in the horizontal position. – Offset < 20 kHz: 1 & 9
8. Measure/record the offset (F < +13 kHz). Important! Turn all trimmers in the same direction,
9. Position the flux probe in the vertical position. clockwise for lower frequency, counterclock-
wise for higher frequency. For each rod, the
10. Measure /record the offset (F < +13 kHz). trimmers on the front and back side have to
be turned with the same amount in the same
direction.
12. Continue to step 13.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 48 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued QBC Receive Mode Measurement Preparation
Fine Adjustment - Separate Modes, continued 1. Turn the FEPSU OFF.
13. Start with the mode displaying the largest offset and 2. Remove the flux probe and holder from the QBC.
adjust all modes to the center frequency (+13 kHz).
3. From the Hybrid Box, disconnect cables MGBX3
• For 7-15, horizontal and vertical modes, use the and MGBX4.
left pickup coil.
4. Remove the QBC adjustment tool, using care with
• For mode 3-11, use the right pickup coil. the coaxial connections of the QBC.
• Adjust using small steps (e.g., 1/4 turn at a time). 5. Reconnect the Tube A and Tune B cables MMFX2
14. Check the modes until no further adjustments are and MMFX3.
needed. 6. Mount the Hybrid Box in front of the QBC and
connect all the cables to it.
15. Dismount the QBC inner covers.
7. Position the pickup coils back to their original
16. Lock all trimmers.
position.
17. Reinstall the QBC inner covers.
Note Check the marks. Ensure the computer cable
18. Measure all modes. is lead in the middle, underneath the Hybrid
Box.
8. Turn the FEPSU ON.
9. Complete the Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC
Resonance Frequency procedure.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 49 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued
Restore Normal Condition
1. Turn the FEPSU OFF.
2. Return all cables to their original position.
3. Remount the cone cover, PICU front cover and
bridge section.
4. Turn the FEPSU ON.
5. Complete the Check Body Coil Parameters
procedure.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 50 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power)

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality Preparation
The Quad Head Coil (QHC) is pre-adjusted at the 1. Remove the top cover from the left magnet.
factory; adjustment should only be necessary when: 2. From the TRSW board (PFEI), remove both tune coil
• the cable must be installed at the other side of the cables (MMFX2 and MMFX3).
coil, or 3. Connect the head coil to the surface coil connector 1
• image quality measurements for the head coil are (SC1).
outside specification. 4. Move the head coil slide-able part to the scanning
Important! The adjustment frequency for the QHC is (front) position.
42.576 MHz. Note This reduces the impact of the quad driver
Note The Quad Head Coil (QHC) for the 1.0T system board on the coil.
is provided with an electronic load. 5. Unscrew the rear cover of the coil.
The QHC is essentially two coils operating in different 6. Using tape, mount the cover back to the head coil.
modes, with a phase shift of 90o between both coils.
Each coil has a pre-amplifier. By disconnecting one coil Note Adjustment requires cover removal, but
(by removing a jumper on the quad pre-amp board) the measurements are only valid with the cover
resonance frequency of the other coil can be adjusted. closed.

Important! Orthogonality adjustment must be

completed to verify an exact 90o phase dif-
ference between the two coils.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 51 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality,
continued
Preparation, continued
7. Position the head coil on the table, so the rear of the L8
coil aligns with the end of the patient table (nearest
the magnet).
8. Position the head coil in the isocenter of the magnet
(via the travel-to-scan-plane) using the light visor
and marker on the coil.
9. Connect the linear flux probe cable to MMFX2.
B
Important! Do not use the quadrature flux probe. L12

10. Position the linear flux probe in position 8-12.

• Position the holder against the front ring of the Viewed from Patient Support End

head coil. 11. Logon as Gyroscan.

• Do not use the 360o rotation knob. 12. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
• Verify the flux probe cable is apart from the head 13. Enter Service Mode.
coil cable, and it leaves the bore as straight as
possible.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 52 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, First Mode Frequency Check/Adjustment
continued 1. Position the flux probe to position 8-12.
Preparation, continued
14. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
15. Select Installation Procedures. L8

16. Select Head Coil Procedures.

17. To begin the measurements, click Proceed.
18. Select Autoscale.

B
L12

Viewed from Patient Support End

2. Remove the rear cover.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 53 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, 7. Read/record the offset frequency. F(1).
continued (F(1) < +25 kHz).
First Mode Frequency Check/Adjustment, 8. Use trimmer C116 to adjust the frequency if F(1)
continued does not meet specification.
3. Remove jumper W2. Set jumper W1 to position 2. 9. If the frequency is within specification, record the
Q-factor (Q1), voltage at tune top (U1), and the offset
frequency F(1).
Second Mode Frequency Check/Adjustment
Service C116 1. Position the flux probe to position 5-11.
L5

W1 W2

4. Replace the rear cover.

5. Read/record the Coil Q-factor (Q1 > 250). A

6. Read/record the voltage at tune top (U1). L11

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 54 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, 5. Read/record the Coil Q-factor (Q2 > 250).
continued 6. Read/record the voltage at tune top (U2).
Second Mode Frequency Check/Adjustment,
continued 7. Read/record the offset frequency. F(2).
(F(2) < +25 kHz).
2. Remove the rear cover.
8. Use trimmer C68 to adjust the frequency if F(2) does
3. Remove jumper W1. Set jumper W2 to position 2.
not meet specification.
9. If the frequency is within specification, record the
Service C68
Q-factor (Q2), voltage at tune top (U2), and the offset
frequency F(2).

W1 W2

4. Replace the rear cover.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 55 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, 4. If the value is within specification, continue to
continued Orthogonality Adjustment 2.
Orthogonality Check/Adjustment 1 - or -
1. Position the flux probe to position 8-12 (against the If the value is not within specification, adjust the
front ring of the head coil). Tune Voltage at the marker position to a value as low
as possible. Proceed to step 5. to continue.
5. Verify the probe is in position 8-12.
L8
6. Remove jumper W1. Set jumper W2 to position 2.

T/O C100

B
L12

T/O C132

2. Record the voltage at center frequency (U3).

3. Use the formula below to calculate the attenuation.
W1 W2
Att(1) = 20 log (U2/U3)
Note Typically, Att(1) > 17 dB.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 56 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, Orthogonality Adjustment 2
continued 1. Position the flux probe to position 5-11 (against the
Orthogonality Check/Adjustment 1, continued front ring of the head coil).
7. Turn trimmer C100 clockwise a small amount and L5
check if the response decreases. If not, turn C100
counterclockwise and C132 the same amount in the
opposite direction.
8. Minimize the response by turning both trimmers as
previously described until a minimum is reached.
9. Record the measured voltage (U3).
Important! Due to the mechanical construction of the
coil, the orthogonality measurement is not A
accurate. Adjust orthogonality as much as
you can, but it is not necessary to reach the L11
typical value.
Proper functioning of the coil is checked
during image quality performance
measurements.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 57 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, 5. If the value is within specification, continue to Final
continued Actions.
Orthogonality Adjustment 2, continued - or -
2. Remove jumper W2. Set jumper W1 to position 2. If the value is not within specification, adjust the
Tune Voltage at the marker position to a value as low
as possible. Proceed to step 6. to continue.
T/O C100
6. Verify the probe is in position 5-11.
7. Remove jumper W2. Set jumper W1 to position 2.
8. Turn trimmer C100 clockwise a small amount and
check if the response decreases. If not, turn C100
counterclockwise and C132 the same amount in the
T/O C132

opposite direction.
9. Minimize the response by turning both trimmers as
previously described until a minimum is reached.
W1 W2
10. Record the measured voltage (U4).

3. Record the voltage at center frequency (U4). Important! Orthogonality measurement is not accurate.
Adjust as much as you can, but it is not nec-
4. Use the formula below to calculate the attenuation. essary to reach the typical value. Proper
Att(2) = 20 log (U1/U4) functioning of the coil is checked during
image quality performance measurements.
Note Typically, Att(2) > 17 dB.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 58 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality,
continued
Final Actions
1. Repeat the frequency and orthogonality steps until
no further adjustments are necessary.
Note Each adjustment can affect other
parameters.
2. If you have completed the procedure and no
adjustments were required:
a. Record the measured values.
b. Install both jumpers in position 2.
c. Replace the rear cover.
d. Remove the flux probe holder from the head coil.
e. Reconnect tune coil cables MMFX2 and
MMFX3 to the TRSW board.
f. Record the offset frequency F(head) and coil
Q-factor Q(head).
3. Restore the system to a normal operating condition.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 59 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni)

Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance 3. Connect the cable to tune A signal at MMFX2.
Frequency Note To prevent coupling with the Hybrid Box, the
Hybrid Box C31 and C32 (Trimmers) adjust the two cable should leave the magnet via the
modes of the QBC and Hybrid Box. Remove the Hybrid backside.
Box top plate to access both trimmers. TRSW

1. Before beginning this procedure, complete the Quad

MMF

1 X2

Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni) 16 2

procedures in Functional Checks.

15 3

Note Continue with this procedure only if the results of

14
Linear Flux Probe

the functional check are out of specification. 13 5

2. Position the linear flux probe with the rotation knob 12

in the QBC flux probe holder, in the center of the

Probe in position 3-11 6

QBC at the 3-11 probe position. 11

7

8
10
9

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 60 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance 13. Use trimmer C32 to adjust the frequency as near as
Frequency, continued possible to the resonance frequency. Use the
4. Logon as Gyroscan. monitor to check the offset.

5. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. Note Specification: F(2) < 10 kHz

6. Enter Service Mode. 14. Remove the linear flux probe.

7. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools. 15. From the backside of the magnet, mount the
quadrature flux probe in the QBC flux probe holder.
8. Select Installation Procedures.
16. Position the holder in the center of the body coil with
9. Select Body Coil Procedures. the connector of the Q-flux probe pointed towards
the magnet backside.
10. Select Adjust QBC Receive.
Note The cable must be routed via the backside of
11. Use trimmer C31 to adjust the frequency as near as
possible to the resonance frequency. Use the the magnet. Refer to the drawing on the
following page.
monitor to check the offset.
Note Specification: F(1) < 10 kHz
12. Readjust the position of the flux probe to position
7-15.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 61 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance 19. Determine the frequency offset and the Q-factor.
Frequency, continued • Offset: < +10 kHz
17. Connect a 50 ohm coaxial cable between Tune A at
• Q: > 190
connector MMFX2 and the quadrature flux probe.
1
20. If the specification cannot be reached, complete the
16 2 Readjust Quad Body Coil procedure.
VIA Backside
of Magnet 15 3

14 4

Q-Flux Probe

13 5

12
6

X2
7
11
MMF 8
10
9

TRSW

18. Select Adjust QBC Receive.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 62 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil 5. Disconnect the Hybrid Box cables.
This procedure should only be completed when: 6. Remove the top plate of the Hybrid Box.
• the Hybrid Box and Quad Body Coil could not be 7. Loosen the connector screws for the two rigid coax
adjusted within specification, and connections of the QBC.
• the QBC is replaced. Note There are 2 screws for each coax
In short, the re-adjustment includes three processes. connection.
First, the horizontal and vertical mode are adjusted to the 8. Remove the Hybrid Box.
resonance frequency. Second, the diagonal modes are
9. Remove the QBC inner top cover.
set to the resonance frequency. Finally, the complete
QBC is set to the proper frequency. Note Carefully pull out the covers, starting on one
side of the cover.
Preparation
1. Turn the gradient system OFF. Lower the table. 10. Mark the front and rear side of the QBC top cover, so
it can be returned to its original position.
2. Remove the lower system filter box cover.
11. Starting on one side, remove the inner lower cover.
3. In the system filter box, turn the FEPSU OFF.
4. Remove the following:
• bridge section
• PICU cover
• front cone cover.
The Hybrid Box and QBC should now be visible.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 63 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued
Preparation, continued
12. At the QBC rigid coax connection, mount the special
QBC adjustment tool.
Important! Do not use force to fasten the screws.
Note The adjustment tool must be connected to the
QBC connections instead of the Hybrid Box.
Extension cables must be left open on one end.
Refer to the drawing on the right. To MMFX2

PU Coil PU Coil
Left Right

To Cable MGBX15

Tool

Via BNC 1-Piece

X3
Hybrid
Box X4

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 64 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued
Preparation, continued Vertical Mode

13. Using a few screws, mount the top plate to the 1

Hybrid Box. 16 2
Mode 3-11

14. Position the Hybrid Box outside the magnet bore, so 15 3

cables MGBX3 and MGBX4 can be connected to the
Hybrid Box.
14 4
• Verify the Hybrid Box bottom does not contact the
gradient coil. Horizontal

• The Hybrid box top plate must be present to 13 5

avoid touching the 300 volts.
15. Connect the left pickup coil (as viewed from the
magnet front) to the MR response cable (MGBX15) 12
6
using a BNC I-piece.
16. Mark the present position of the pickup coils, then 7
shift both pickup coils as near as possible to the 11
QBC to get the best signal. 8
10 Mode 7-15
9

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 65 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued 21. Mount the linear flux probe via the rotation knob
in the flux probe holder.
Preparation, continued
17. Loosen the locking screws for all of the QBC 22. At MMFX2, connect the flux probe to tune A, routing
trimmers. the cable via the backside of the magnet to the tune
box.
Note The trimmer adjustment screws are located
on the front and back side of the QBC. A sep- 23. Turn FEPSU ON.
arate tool, for both the thick and thin rods, is Adjust QBC
supplied with the system.
1. Logon as Gyroscan.
18. Mount the top QBC inner cover and verify its proper
orientation. 2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].

• Position one side of the cover in place and 3. Enter Service Mode.
manually push the other side into position. 4. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
• If necessary, use your fist to "click" the cover into 5. Select Installation Procedures.
position.
6. Select Body Coil Procedures.
Note The top inner cover must be mounted during
measurement because it creates a frequency 7. Select Adjust Frequency QBC.
shift. The bottom cover can be left out. 8. Start the measurement.
19. From the TRSW board (PFEI) disconnect both tune
cables (MMFX2 and MMFX3).
20. Position the QBC flux probe holder horizontal in the
center of the QBC.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 66 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued 11. Depending on the offset measured, use the following
trimmers to adjust the QBC:
Fine Adjustment - Separate Modes
1. Position the flux probe to position 7-15. • Mode 7-15: 7 & 15

2. Measure/record the frequency offset (F < +10 kHz). • Mode 3-11: 3 & 11

3. Position the flux probe to position 3-11. • Horizontal Mode:

4. Connect the right pickup coil to the receive cable – Offset > 20 kHz: 4, 5, 6 and 12, 13, 14
MGBX15 (see Hybrid Box). – Offset < 20 kHz: 5 & 13
5. Measure/record the offset (F < +10 kHz). • Vertical Mode:
6. Connect the left pickup coil. – Offset > 20 kHz: 16, 1, 2 and 8, 9, 10
7. Position the flux probe in the horizontal position. – Offset < 20 kHz: 1 & 9
8. Measure/record the offset (F < +10 kHz). Important! Turn all trimmers in the same direction,
9. Position the flux probe in the vertical position. clockwise for lower frequency, counterclock-
wise for higher frequency. For each rod, the
10. Measure /record the offset (F < +10 kHz). trimmers on the front and back side have to
be turned with the same amount in the same
direction.
12. Continue to step 13.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 67 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued QBC Receive Mode Measurement Preparation
Fine Adjustment - Separate Modes, continued 1. Turn the FEPSU OFF.
13. Start with the mode displaying the largest offset and 2. Remove the flux probe and holder from the QBC.
adjust all modes to the center frequency (+10 kHz).
3. From the Hybrid Box, disconnect cables MGBX3 and
• For 7-15, horizontal and vertical modes, use the MGBX4.
left pickup coil.
4. Remove the QBC adjustment tool, using care with
• For mode 3-11, use the right pickup coil. the coaxial connections of the QBC.
• Adjust using small steps (e.g., 1/4 turn at a time). 5. Mount the Hybrid Box in front of the QBC and
14. Check the modes until no further adjustments are connect all the cables to it.
needed. 6. Position the pickup coils back to their original
position.
15. Dismount the QBC inner covers.
Note Check the marks or position to 6 mm from
16. Lock all trimmers.
the QBC front ring. Ensure the computer
17. Reinstall the QBC inner covers. cable is lead in the middle, underneath the
Hybrid Box.
18. Measure all modes.
7. Turn the FEPSU ON.
8. Complete the Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC
Resonance Frequency procedure.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 68 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued
Restore Normal Condition
1. Turn the FEPSU OFF.
2. Return all cables to their original position.
3. Remount the cone cover, PICU front cover and
bridge section.
4. Turn the FEPSU ON.
5. Complete the Check Body Coil Parameters
procedure.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 69 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni)

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality Preparation
The Quad Head Coil (QHC) is pre-adjusted at the 1. Remove the top cover from the left magnet.
factory; adjustment should only be necessary when: 2. From the TRSW board (PFEI) remove both tune coil
• the cable must be installed at the other side of the cables (MMFX2 and MMFX3).
coil, or 3. Connect the head coil to the surface coil connector 1
• image quality measurements for the head coil are (SC1).
outside specification. 4. Move the head coil slide-able part to the scanning
Important! The adjustment frequency for the QHC is (front) position.
64.050 MHz. Note This reduces the impact of the quad driver
Note The Quad Head Coil (QHC) for the 1.5T system board on the coil.
is provided with an electronic load. 5. Unscrew the rear cover of the coil.
The QHC is essentially two coils operating in different 6. Using tape, mount the cover back to the head coil.
modes, with a phase shift of 90o between both coils.
Each coil has a pre-amplifier. By disconnecting one coil Note Adjustment requires cover removal, but
(by removing a jumper on the quad pre-amp board) the measurements are only valid with the cover
resonance frequency of the other coil can be adjusted. closed.

Important! Orthogonality adjustment must be

completed to verify an exact 90o phase
difference between the two coils.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 70 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality,
continued
Preparation, continued
7. Position the head coil on the table, so the rear of the L8
coil aligns with the end of the patient table (nearest
the magnet).
8. Position the head coil in the isocenter of the magnet
(via the travel-to-scan-plane) using the light visor
and marker on the coil.
9. Connect the linear flux probe cable to MMFX2.
B
Important! Do not use the quadrature flux probe. L12

10. Position the linear flux probe in position 8-12.

• Position the holder against the front ring of the Viewed from Patient Support End

head coil. 11. Logon as Gyroscan.

• Do not use the 360o rotation knob. 12. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
• Verify the flux probe cable is apart from the head 13. Enter Service Mode.
coil cable, and it leaves the bore as straight as
possible.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 71 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, First Mode Frequency Check/Adjustment
continued Important! The rear cover of the head coil must be
Preparation, continued closed during measurement for the values to
14. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools. be valid. When changing jumpers, discon-
nect the head coil.
15. Select Installation Procedures.
1. Position the flux probe to position 8-12.
16. Select Head Coil Procedures.
17. To begin the measurements, click Proceed twice.
Note Ignore the message, "Difference with L8

designed frequency is more than

100 kHz".
18. Select Autoscale.
Note If the optional LCD is present, select the
magnet display with the appropriate button in
the display window. B
L12

Viewed from Patient Support End

2. Remove the rear cover.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 72 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, 7. Read/record the offset frequency. F(1).
continued (F(1) < +25 kHz).
First Mode Frequency Check/Adjustment, 8. Use trimmer C804 to adjust the frequency if F(1)
continued does not meet specification.
3. Remove jumper W2. Set jumper W1 to position 2. 9. If the frequency is within specification, record the
Q-factor (Q1), voltage at tune top (U1), and the offset
frequency F(1).
Second Mode Frequency Check/Adjustment
Service C804 1. Position the flux probe to position 5-11.
L5

W1 W2

4. Replace the rear cover.

5. Read/record the Coil Q-factor (Q1 > 90). A

6. Read/record the voltage at tune top (U1). L11

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 73 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, 5. Read/record the Coil Q-factor (Q2 > 90).
continued 6. Read/record the voltage at tune top (U2).
Second Mode Frequency Check/Adjustment,
continued 7. Read/record the offset frequency. F(2).
(F(2) < +25 kHz).
2. Remove the rear cover.
Note The frequency difference between F(1) and
3. Remove jumper W1. Set jumper W2 to position 2.
F(2) should be <25 kHz.
8. Use trimmer C504 to adjust the frequency if F(2)
Service C504
does not meet specification.
9. If the frequency is within specification, record the
Q-factor (Q2), voltage at tune top (U2), and the offset
frequency F(2).

W1 W2

4. Replace the rear cover.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 74 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, 4. If the value is within specification, continue to
continued Orthogonality Adjustment 2.
Orthogonality Check/Adjustment 1 - or -
1. Position the flux probe to position 8-12 (against the If the value is not within specification, adjust the
front ring of the head coil). Tune Voltage at the marker position to a value as low
as possible. Proceed to step 5. to continue.
5. Verify the probe is in position 8-12.
L8
6. Remove jumper W1. Set jumper W2 to position 2.

T/O C704

B
L12 T/O C904

2. Record the voltage at center frequency (U3).

3. Use the formula below to calculate the attenuation.
W1 W2
Att(1) = 20 log (U2/U3)
Note Typically, Att(1) > 15 dB.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 75 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, Orthogonality Adjustment 2
continued 1. Position the flux probe to position 5-11 (against the
Orthogonality Check/Adjustment 1, continued front ring of the head coil).
7. Turn trimmer C704 clockwise a small amount and L5
check if the response decreases. If not, turn C704
counterclockwise and C904 the same amount in the
opposite direction.
8. Minimize the response by turning both trimmers as
previously described until a minimum is reached.
9. Record the measured voltage (U3).
Important! Due to the mechanical construction of the
coil, the orthogonality measurement is not A
accurate. Adjust orthogonality as much as
you can, but it is not necessary to reach the L11
typical value.
Proper functioning of the coil is checked
during image quality performance
measurements.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 76 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, 5. If the value is within specification, continue to Final
continued Actions.
Orthogonality Adjustment 2, continued - or -
2. Remove jumper W2. Set jumper W1 to position 2. If the value is not within specification, adjust the
Tune Voltage at the marker position to a value as low
as possible. Proceed to step 6. to continue.
T/O C704

6. Verify the probe is in position 5-11.

7. Remove jumper W2. Set jumper W1 to position 2.
8. Turn trimmer C704 clockwise a small amount and
T/O C904
check if the response decreases. If not, turn C704
counterclockwise and C904 the same amount in the
opposite direction.
9. Minimize the response by turning both trimmers as
previously described until a minimum is reached.
W1 W2
10. Record the measured voltage (U4).

3. Record the voltage at center frequency (U4). Important! Orthogonality measurement is not accurate.
Adjust as much as you can, but it is not nec-
4. Use the formula below to calculate the attenuation. essary to reach the typical value. Proper
Att(2) = 20 log (U3/U4) functioning of the coil is checked during
image quality performance measurements.
Note Typically, Att(1) > 15 dB.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 77 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality,
continued
Final Actions
1. Repeat the frequency and orthogonality steps until
no further adjustments are necessary.
Note Each adjustment can affect other
parameters.
2. If you have completed the procedure and no
adjustments were required:
a. Record the measured values.
b. Install both jumpers in position 2.
c. Replace the rear cover.
d. Remove the flux probe holder from the head coil.
e. Reconnect tune coil cables MMFX2 and
MMFX3 to the TRSW board.
f. Record the offset frequency F(head) and coil
Q-factor Q(head).
3. Restore the system to a normal operating condition.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 78 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master)

Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance 3. Connect the cable to Tune A signal at MMFX2.
Frequency Note To prevent coupling with the Hybrid Box, the
Hybrid Box C31 and C32 (Trimmers) adjust the two cable should leave the magnet via the
modes of the QBC and Hybrid Box. Remove the Hybrid backside.
Box top plate to access both trimmers. TRSW

1. Before beginning this procedure, complete the Quad

MMF

1 X2

Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera) procedures in 16 2

Functional Checks. 15 3

Note Continue with this procedure only if the results of

14
Linear Flux Probe

the functional check are out of specification. 13 5

2. Position the linear flux probe via the rotation knob 12

in the QBC flux probe holder, in the center of the
Probe in position 3-11 6

QBC at the 3-11 probe position. 11

7

8
10
9

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 79 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master), continued

Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance 14. Use trimmer C32 to adjust the frequency as near as
Frequency, continued possible to the resonance frequency. Use the
4. Logon as Gyroscan. monitor to check the offset.

5. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. Note Specification: F(2) < 3 kHz

6. Enter Service Mode. 15. Remove the linear flux probe.

7. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools. 16. From the backside of the magnet, mount the
quadrature flux probe in the QBC flux probe holder.
8. Select Installation Procedures.
17. Position the holder in the center of the body coil with
9. Select Body Coil Procedures. the connector of the Q-flux probe pointed towards
the magnet backside.
10. Select Adjust QBC Receive.
Note The cable must be routed via the backside of
11. Click Proceed to start the measurement.
the magnet. Refer to the drawing on the
12. Use trimmer C31 to adjust the frequency as near as following page.
possible to the resonance frequency. Use the
monitor to check the offset.
Note Specification: F(1) < 3 kHz
13. Readjust the position of the flux probe to position
7-15.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 80 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master), continued

Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance 20. Determine the frequency offset and the Q-factor.
Frequency, continued • Offset: < +20 kHz
18. Connect a 50 ohm coaxial cable between Tune A at
• Q: > 170
connector MMFX2 and the quadrature flux probe.
1
21. If the specification cannot be reached, complete the
16 2 Readjust Quad Body Coil procedure.
VIA Backside
of Magnet 15 3

14 4

Q-Flux Probe

13 5

12
6

X2
7
11
MMF 8
10
9

TRSW

19. Select Adjust QBC Receive.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 81 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil 5. Remove the top plate of the Hybrid Box.
This procedure should only be completed when: 6. Loosen the connector screws for the two rigid coax
connections of the QBC.
• the Hybrid Box and Quad Body Coil could not be
adjusted within specification, and Note There are 2 screws for each coax
• the QBC is replaced. connection.

In short, the re-adjustment includes three processes. 7. Remove the Hybrid Box.
First, the horizontal and vertical mode are adjusted to the 8. Remove the QBC inner top cover.
resonance frequency. Second, the diagonal modes are
Note Carefully pull out the covers, starting on one
set to the resonance frequency. Finally, the complete
QBC is set to the proper frequency. side of the cover.
9. Mark the front and rear side of the QBC top cover, so
Preparation
it can be returned to its original position.
1. Turn the gradient system OFF. Lower the table.
10. Starting on one side, remove the inner lower cover.
2. Turn the FEPSU OFF.
3. Remove the following:
• bridge section
• PICU cover
• front cone cover.
The Hybrid Box and QBC should now be visible.
4. Disconnect the Hybrid Box cables.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 82 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued
Preparation, continued
11. At the QBC rigid coax connection, mount the special
QBC adjustment tool.
Important! Do not use force to fasten the screws.
Note The adjustment tool must be connected to the
QBC connections instead of the Hybrid Box.
Extension cables must be left open on one end.
Refer to the drawing on the right.
To MMFX2

PU Coil PU Coil
Left Right

To Cable MGBX15

Tool

Via BNC 1-Piece

X3
Hybrid
Box X4

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 83 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued
Preparation, continued Vertical Mode

12. Using a few screws, mount the top plate to the 1

Hybrid Box. 16 2
Mode 3-11
13. Position the Hybrid Box outside the magnet bore, so 15 3
cables MGBX3 and MGBX4 can be connected to the
Hybrid Box.
14 4
• Verify the Hybrid Box bottom does not contact the
gradient coil. Horizontal

• The Hybrid box top plate must be present to 5

13
avoid touching the 300 volts.
14. Connect the left pickup coil (as viewed from the
magnet front) to the MR response cable (MGBX15) 12
6
using a BNC I-piece.
15. Mark the present position of the pickup coils, then
7
shift both pickup coils as near as possible to the 11
QBC to get the best signal. 8
10 Mode 7-15
9

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 84 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued 20. From the TRSW board (PFEI) remove both tune
cables (MMFX2 and MMFX3).
Preparation, continued
16. Loosen the locking screws for all of the QBC 21. At MMFX2, connect the flux probe to Tune A, routing
trimmers. the cable via the backside of the magnet to the tune
box.
Note The trimmer adjustment screws are located
on the front and back side of the QBC. A sep- 22. Turn FEPSU ON.
arate tool, for both the thick and thin rods, is Adjust QBC
supplied with the system.
1. Logon as Gyroscan.
17. Mount the top QBC inner cover and verify its proper
orientation. 2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].

• Position one side of the cover in place and 3. Enter Service Mode.
manually push the other side into position. 4. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
• If necessary, use your fist to "click" the cover into 5. Select Installation Procedures.
position.
6. Select Body Coil Procedures.
Note The top inner cover must be mounted during
measurement because it creates a frequency 7. Select Adjust Frequency QBC.
shift. The bottom cover can be left out. 8. Start the measurement.
18. Position the QBC flux probe holder horizontal in the
center of the QBC.
19. Mount the linear flux probe via the rotation knob
in the flux probe holder.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 85 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued 11. Depending on the offset measured, use the following
trimmers to adjust the QBC:
Fine Adjustment - Separate Modes
1. Position the flux probe to position 7-15. • Mode 7-15: 7 & 15

2. Measure/record the frequency offset (F < +20 kHz). • Mode 3-11: 3 & 11

3. Position the flux probe to position 3-11. • Horizontal Mode:

4. Connect the right pickup coil to the receive cable – Offset > 40 kHz: 4, 5, 6 and 12, 13, 14
MGBX15 (see Hybrid Box). – Offset < 40 kHz: 5 & 13
5. Measure/record the offset (F < +20 kHz). • Vertical Mode:
6. Connect the left pickup coil. – Offset > 40 kHz: 16, 1, 2 and 8, 9, 10
7. Position the flux probe in the horizontal position. – Offset < 40 kHz: 1 & 9
8. Measure/record the offset (F < +20 kHz). Important! Turn all trimmers in the same direction,
9. Position the flux probe in the vertical position. clockwise for lower frequency, counterclock-
wise for higher frequency. For each rod, the
10. Measure /record the offset (F < +20 kHz). trimmers on the front and back side have to
be turned with the same amount in the same
direction.
12. Continue to step 13.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 86 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued QBC Receive Mode Measurement Preparation
Fine Adjustment - Separate Modes, continued 1. Turn the FEPSU OFF.
13. Start with the mode displaying the largest offset and 2. Remove the flux probe and holder from the QBC.
adjust all modes to the center frequency (+10 kHz).
3. From the Hybrid Box, disconnect cables MGBX3 and
• For 7-15, horizontal and vertical modes, use the MGBX4.
left pickup coil.
4. Remove the QBC adjustment tool, using care with
• For mode 3-11, use the right pickup coil. the coaxial connections of the QBC.
• Adjust using small steps (e.g., 1/4 turn at a time). 5. Position the pickup coils back to their original
14. Check the modes until no further adjustments are position.
needed. Note Check the marks or position to 8 mm from
the QBC front ring. Ensure the computer
15. Dismount the QBC inner covers.
cable is lead in the middle, underneath the
16. Lock all trimmers. Hybrid Box.
17. Reinstall the QBC inner covers. 6. Turn the FEPSU ON.
18. Measure all modes. 7. Complete the Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC
Resonance Frequency procedure.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 87 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master), continued

Readjust Quad Body Coil, continued
Restore Normal Condition
1. Turn the FEPSU OFF.
2. Return all cables to their original position.
3. Remount the cone cover, PICU front cover and
bridge section.
4. Turn the FEPSU ON.
5. Complete the Check Body Coil Parameters
procedure.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 88 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master)

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality Preparation
The Quad Head Coil (QHC) is pre-adjusted at the 1. Remove the top cover from the left magnet.
factory; adjustment should only be necessary when: 2. From the TRSW board (PFEI) remove both tune coil
• the cable must be installed at the other side of the cables (MMFX2 and MMFX3).
coil, or 3. Connect the head coil to the surface coil connector 1
• image quality measurements for the head coil are (SC1).
outside specification. 4. Move the head coil slide-able part to the scanning
Important! The adjustment frequency for the QHC is (front) position.
64.050 MHz. Note This reduces the impact of the quad driver
Note The Quad Head Coil (QHC) for the 1.5T system board on the coil.
is provided with an electronic load. 5. Unscrew the rear cover of the coil.
The QHC is essentially two coils operating in different 6. Using tape, mount the cover back to the head coil.
modes, with a phase shift of 90o between both coils.
Each coil has a pre-amplifier. By disconnecting one coil Note Adjustment requires cover removal, but
(by removing a jumper on the quad pre-amp board) the measurements are only valid with the cover
resonance frequency of the other coil can be adjusted. closed.

Important! Orthogonality adjustment must be

completed to verify an exact 90o phase
difference between the two coils.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 89 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality,
continued
Preparation, continued
7. Position the head coil on the table, so the rear of the L8
coil aligns with the end of the patient table (nearest
the magnet).
8. Position the head coil in the isocenter of the magnet
(via the travel-to-scan-plane) using the light visor
and marker on the coil.
9. Connect the linear flux probe cable to MMFX2.
B
Important! Do not use the quadrature flux probe. L12

10. Position the linear flux probe in position 8-12.

• Position the holder against the front ring of the Viewed from Patient Support End

head coil. 1. Logon as Gyroscan.

• Do not use the 360o rotation knob. 2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
• Verify the flux probe cable is apart from the head 3. Enter Service Mode.
coil cable, and it leaves the bore as straight as
possible.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 90 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, First Mode Frequency Check/Adjustment
continued Important! The rear cover of the head coil must be
Preparation, continued closed during measurement for the values to
4. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools. be valid. When changing jumpers, discon-
nect the head coil.
5. Select Installation Procedures.
1. Position the flux probe to position 8-12.
6. Select Head Coil Procedures.
7. To begin the measurements, click Proceed.
Note Ignore the message, "Difference with L8

designed frequency is more than

100 kHz".
8. Select Autoscale.

B
L12

Viewed from Patient Support End

2. Remove the rear cover.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 91 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, 7. Read/record the offset frequency. F(1).
continued (F(1) < +25 kHz).
First Mode Frequency Check/Adjustment, 8. Use trimmer C804 to adjust the frequency if F(1)
continued does not meet specification.
3. Remove jumper W2. Set jumper W1 to position 2. 9. If the frequency is within specification, record the
Q-factor (Q1), voltage at tune top (U1), and the offset
frequency F(1).
Second Mode Frequency Check/Adjustment
Service C804 1. Position the flux probe to position 5-11.
L5

W1 W2

4. Replace the rear cover.

5. Read/record the Coil Q-factor (Q1 > 90). A

6. Read/record the voltage at tune top (U1). L11

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 92 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, 5. Read/record the Coil Q-factor (Q2 > 90).
continued 6. Read/record the voltage at tune top (U2).
Second Mode Frequency Check/Adjustment,
continued 7. Read/record the offset frequency. F(2).
(F(2) < +25 kHz).
2. Remove the rear cover.
Note The frequency difference between F(1) and
3. Remove jumper W1. Set jumper W2 to position 2.
F(2) should be <25 kHz.
8. Use trimmer C504 to adjust the frequency if F(2)
Service C504
does not meet specification.
9. If the frequency is within specification, record the
Q-factor (Q2), voltage at tune top (U2), and the offset
frequency F(2).

W1 W2

4. Replace the rear cover.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 93 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, 4. If the value is within specification, continue to
continued Orthogonality Adjustment 2.
Orthogonality Check/Adjustment 1 - or -
1. Position the flux probe to position 8-12 (against the If the value is not within specification, adjust the
front ring of the head coil). Tune Voltage at the marker position to a value as low
as possible. Proceed to step 5. to continue.
5. Verify the probe is in position 8-12.
L8
6. Remove jumper W1. Set jumper W2 to position 2.

T/O C704

B
L12 T/O C904

2. Record the voltage at center frequency (U3).

3. Use the formula below to calculate the attenuation.
W1 W2
Att(1) = 20 log (U2/U3)
Note Typically, Att(1) > 15 dB.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 94 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, Orthogonality Adjustment 2
continued 1. Position the flux probe to position 5-11 (against the
Orthogonality Check/Adjustment 1, continued front ring of the head coil).
7. Turn trimmer C704 clockwise a small amount and L5
check if the response decreases. If not, turn C704
counterclockwise and C904 the same amount in the
opposite direction.
8. Minimize the response by turning both trimmers as
previously described until a minimum is reached.
9. Record the measured voltage (U3).
Important! Due to the mechanical construction of the
coil, the orthogonality measurement is not A
accurate. Adjust orthogonality as much as
you can, but it is not necessary to reach the L11
typical value.
Proper functioning of the coil is checked
during image quality performance
measurements.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 95 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality, 5. If the value is within specification, continue to Final
continued Actions.
Orthogonality Adjustment 2, continued - or -
2. Remove jumper W2. Set jumper W1 to position 2. If the value is not within specification, adjust the
Tune Voltage at the marker position to a value as low
as possible. Proceed to step 6. to continue.
T/O C704

6. Verify the probe is in position 5-11.

7. Remove jumper W2. Set jumper W1 to position 2.
8. Turn trimmer C704 clockwise a small amount and
T/O C904
check if the response decreases. If not, turn C704
counterclockwise and C904 the same amount in the
opposite direction.
9. Minimize the response by turning both trimmers as
previously described until a minimum is reached.
W1 W2
10. Record the measured voltage (U4).

3. Record the voltage at center frequency (U4). Important! Orthogonality measurement is not accurate.
Adjust as much as you can, but it is not nec-
4. Use the formula below to calculate the attenuation. essary to reach the typical value. Proper
Att(2) = 20 log (U1/U4) functioning of the coil is checked during
image quality performance measurements.
Note Typically, Att(1) > 15 dB.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 96 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Quad Head Coil Adjustments (New Intera 1.5T-Power/Master), continued

Adjust Frequency and Orthogonality,
continued
Final Actions
1. Repeat the frequency and orthogonality steps until
no further adjustments are necessary.
Note Each adjustment can affect other
parameters.
2. If you have completed the procedure and no
adjustments were required:
a. Record the measured values.
b. Install both jumpers in position 2.
c. Replace the rear cover.
d. Remove the flux probe holder from the head coil.
e. Reconnect tune coil cables MMFX2 and
MMFX3 to the TRSW board.
f. Record the offset frequency F(head) and coil
Q-factor Q(head).
g. Stop the measurement.
3. Restore the system to a normal operating condition.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 97 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

System Calibration
Select one of the following topics: System Calibration Menu (R7.x-R9.x)
• Log into System Calibration System Tuning Tools
• System Calibration Menu (R7.x-R9.x)
Menu Option Submenu Option(s)
• System Calibration Menu (R10.x-R11.x)
1. Installation Selftests
Log into System Calibration Procedures Magnet Monitoring Procs.
Run Automatic BDAS Procs.
Many system calibration options exist within the Body Coil Procs.
Gyroscan menu structure. RF Power Amplifier Procs.
Gradient Chain Meas.
1. For release R7.x - 9.x logon as Gyroscan. Gradient Adjustment Procs.
Otherwise, logon as MRService. Head Coil Procs.
Neck Coil Procs. (option)
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. F0 Determination
RF Power Ref. and PU Coil Meas.
3. Enter Service Mode. Use service as the password. Gradient Parameters Deter.
Eddy Current Analysis
4. Select System Tuning using system as the
password.
5. Select System Tuning Tools.
For a listing of calibration and measurement options
available under System Tuning Tools, see System
Calibration Menu in the next column.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 98 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

System Calibration, continued

System Calibration Menu (R7.x-R9.x), Menu Option Submenu Option(s)
continued
4. Expert Tools Analysis Tools:
System Tuning Tools, continued
Manual Coil tuning
Note The following menu options require access to the RF Chain Analysis
appropriate hardware key. RF Waveform Analysis
Receiver Noise Characteristics
Gradient Chain Analysis
Menu Option Submenu Option(s) Toolbox
2. Diagnostic Selftests Transceiver Characteristics
Measurement Magnet Monitoring Procs. Synco Receiver Characteristics
Tools BDAS Specific Meas. Coil-int RF-part Test Tool
RF Chain Meas. Gradient Chain Tests
Gradient Chain Meas. RF Coil Interface Test Tool
RF Amplifier Meas. Adjustment Tools:
Gradient Amplifier Meas.
Spike Search Meas. Attenuator and Gain Calibration
Coil Adjustment Procs. Max. kW Adjustment
Eddy Current Adjustment
3. Planned n/a Frequency Adjustment/Deter.
Maintenance Power Reference Deter.
PU Coil Triplevel Adjustment
Gradient Channel Delay Adjustment
5. Database Fixed STT Control Parameters
Tunable STT Control Parameters
6. Meas. View Measurement Result Lists (MRL)
Verification Delete Measurement Result Lists (MRL)
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 99 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

System Calibration, continued

System Calibration Menu (R10.x-R11.x)
System Tuning Tools

Menu Option Submenu Option(s)

1. Installation BDAS Selftests

Procedures Patient Support Selftests
Reconstructor Selftests
Magnet Monitoring Procedures
Run Automatic BDAS Procedures
Body Coil Procedures
RF Power Amplifier Procedures
Gradient Chain (274) Measurements
Gradient Adjustment Procedures
Head Coil Procedure
Neck Coil Procedures
FO Determination
RF Power Amplifier & PDU Coil Meas.
Gradient Parameters Determination

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 100 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

BDAS Adjustments
This procedure is for the Intera 0.5T, 1.0T, and 1.5T. 9. When prompted to "run all subsequent tools
successively", enter yes.
Typically, this procedure tests the transceiver and
provides attenuator and gain calibration. Characteristics of the transceiver are measured,
then the transmit/receive attenuator are calibrated.
Note If present, synergy hardware will also be tested
and calibrated during the following procedure. Note Without the presence of Synco Receivers,
this part of the procedure should take
1. Verify no surface coils are present in the magnet
approximately five minutes.
bore.
Important! An error message will appear on the screen if
2. If the system has been ON for a minimum of twenty
the measured values are outside specifica-
minutes, continue to step 3; otherwise, turn the
tion.
system ON and wait a minimum of twenty minutes
before proceeding to the next step. The following items will be tested next:
3. Logon as Gyroscan. • Transceiver Flatness
4. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. • Transceiver Level
5. Enter Service Mode. • Transceiver Noise
6. Select System Tuning. • Transceiver Linearity
7. Select System Tuning Tools > Installation • Transceiver Spurs
Procedures.
• Attenuator & Gain Calibration
8. Select Run Automatic BDAS Procedures.
• If appropriate, Synco Receiver Tests will now be run

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 101 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

BDAS Adjustments, continued

Synco Receiver Tests
The following tests for Synco Receivers are performed if
the synergy option is available/installed.
• Synco Receiver Flatness (left)
• Synco Receiver Gain (left)
• Synco Receiver Noise (left)
• Synco Receiver Spurs (left)
• Synco Receiver Flatness (right)
• Synco Receiver Gain (right)
• Synco Receiver Noise (right)
• Synco Receiver Spurs (right)

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 102 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Magnet (NT Intera)

Light Visor Adjustments 5. To adjust the transversal light visors:
The following procedure applies to: a. Use tape or paper to cover one of the transversal
• T5NT (PT1000) light visors.

• T10-NT (PT1000, PT1000A & PT3000) b. Loosen the 4 screws and adjust the other
transversal light visor. Once positioned correctly,
• ACS-NT (PT1000, PT1000A, PT3000 & PT6000) tighten the 4 screws.
1. Put the patient support to its lowest position. Note The beam must be on the upper and
lower reference points.
2. Remove the front cone cover.
c. Repeat step for the other transversal light visor.
3. Disconnect the MVPX1 connector.
6. To adjust the sagittal light visor:
4. Mount the light visor adjustment tool, using two M4
screws, to the front ring frame. a. Loosen the 4 screws.
Sagittal Light Visor
b. Adjust the sagittal light visor until the beam is on
the upper reference point.
c. Once positioned correctly, tighten the 4 screws.
Transversal Light Transversal Light
Visor Visor 7. Remove the light visor adjustment tool.

Light Visor
Adjustment Jig
Lower Reference Holes

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 103 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

OCD 20" Monitors (R7.x-R9.x)

Select one of the following topics: Introduction
• Introduction The monitor should be positioned on a stable and flat
surface that is capable of bearing the weight of at least
• Blacklevel Adjustment
three displays.
• Phase Adjustment
Using an unstable cart/stand may cause personal injury
• Power Management and/or equipment damage.

Caution When dealing with the display, the

following cautions should be observed:
• Do not restrict the air flow through the
ventilation openings of the monitor.
• To reduce potential eye strain, avoid
reflections in the display screen.
• Avoid touching the screen. It is not a
hard glass surface; pressure can
damage the crystals in the display.
• Avoid placing the monitor too close to
a heat source. If installing the monitor
in a cabinet, ensure there is plenty of
air space around the unit to provide
sufficient ventilation.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 104 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

OCD 20" Monitors (R7.x-R9.x), continued

Blacklevel Adjustment e. To cycle forward to the next test image, click the
[NEXT IMG] button.
The host computer controls the blacklevel setting of the
OCD. This helps ensure the display and hard copy are f. To cycle backward to the previous test image,
calibrated to a certain degree of similarity. click the [PREV IMG] button.
1. Verify the ambient light in the room is the same as g. To cancel the operation, click the [CANCEL]
when the system is in normal use. button.
2. Turn ON the display. It must be turned ON for a 5. To adjust blacklevel, use the Calibration slider.
minimum of thirty minutes before adjustment can
begin. 5% and 95% video patches should be visible. The
display is factory adjusted to 120 Cd/m2 (default).
3. Logon as TSW. This setting is represented by "5" on the Calibration
4. Enter tmonitor. A display adjustment popup window slider. A lower value should provide a longer lifetime
appears. for the LCD backlights.
a. To enable/disable the OSD buttons at the rear
side, click the [SUSPEND] button.
b. To restore settings to there factory defaults, click
the [DEFAULT] button.
c. To save the current settings/changes, click the
[SAVE] button.
d. To revert to previously saved settings, click the
[RESTORE] button.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 105 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

OCD 20" Monitors (R7.x-R9.x), continued

Blacklevel Adjustment, continued Phase Adjustment
6. When the display meets your requirements, click the 1. On the popup menu, click the [NEXT IMG] button
[SAVE] button on the popup menu. until the POPO image is displayed.
When Gyroscan is restarted, the application software 2. Click the [SUSPEND] button.
will use the settings saved in this step.
3. On the display rear panel, press the <ENTER OSD>
7. Click the [NEXT IMG] button until the 0/5% and the button. The On Screen Display menu will appear
95/100% picture is visible. Confirm the visibility of with contrast/brightness sliders. Do not adjust these
the 5% and 95% section on this image. sliders.
8. Continue to the Phase Adjustment procedure. 4. On the display rear panel, press the <NEXT STEP>
button. An auto-adjust selection displays.
5. To begin the auto-adjustment, press and hold the
<LEFT-MINUS> button until the "Autoadjusting
image..." message displays.
Horizontal and vertical positions and sizes are
adjusted with this selection.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 106 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

OCD 20" Monitors (R7.x-R9.x), continued

Phase Adjustment, continued 9. To proceed to the next menu entry, press the
<NEXT STEP> button on the display rear panel. A
6. Once the horizontal and vertical adjustments are
made (step 5) horizontal size/position sliders display. vertical size/position slider displays. Make no
adjustments.
Use the <RIGHT-PLUS> and <RIGHT-MINUS>
buttons to manually fine tune the image. 10. To proceed to the next menu entry, press the
<NEXT STEP> button on the display rear panel. A
The result should be a uniform image without vertical
bands. Store and Advanced selection displays. Make no
adjustments.
7. Press the <NEXT STEP> button on the display rear
panel. A Tune and Black slider displays. Note Since the display saves the most recently
adjusted settings, it is unnecessary to store
8. Use the Tune scroll bar to optimize the POPO image the values.
until it is stable/sharp:
11. To proceed to the next menu entry, press the
a. Starting with a setting of 25, use the <NEXT STEP> button on the display rear panel. A
<LEFT-PLUS> button to increase the Tune value Timing View selection displays. Use this information
until a stable and darker image appears. Record to verify the frame buffer board (inside the computer)
the setting. has been set to the proper vertical frequency.
b. Use the <LEFT-MINUS> button to decrease the 12. To proceed to the next menu entry, press the <NEXT
setting until a sable and darker image displays. STEP> button on the display rear panel. A Part
Record the setting. Information view displays.
c. To determine the optimum setting, add the two
values record in steps a and b, then divide by
two.
d. Adjust the slider to this optimum value. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 107 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

OCD 20" Monitors (R7.x-R9.x), continued

Phase Adjustment, continued
13. To exit the OSD, press the <NEXT STEP> button on
the display rear panel.
14. To lock the rear buttons, click the [SUSPEND] button
on the popup menu.
15. To exit the test, click the [CANCEL] button on the
popup menu.
16. Enter logo and click [YES] to confirm the logout.
Power Management
Important! Do not use the Power switch to turn the OCD
OFF. Frequent use of the ON/OFF switch
reduces the lifetime of the LCD backlights.
Initiated by the host computer, the OCD uses a Sleep
Mode to lengthen its service life. The unit will switch to
Sleep Mode when there are no user interactions on the
keyboard or mouse for twenty minutes. If, after entering
Sleep Mode, there continues to be no user activity for an
additional forty minutes, the LCD will switch itself OFF.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 108 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

OCD Monitor (19" Option)

Select one of the following topics: Introduction
• Introduction In order to have access to the full functionality of the 19"
OCD, Gyroscan R6.2 (or higher) must be installed.
• Connecting the 19" OCD
This operator console LCD monitor is a high resolution,
• LCD Replacement
multi sync and auto voltage LCD monitor.
• OCD Configuration
An RS232 port is used to connect the monitor to the host
• Blacklevel Adjustment computer. The connection is used for blacklevel
adjustment and default calibration settings, switching to
• Phase Adjustment
sleep mode following twenty minutes of inactivity,
unlocking/locking monitor OSD buttons, and to retrieve
operating information from the monitor.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 109 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

OCD Monitor (19" Option), continued

Connecting the 19" OCD LCD Replacement
1. Connect the Mains cable (filtered) to the power Complete the following procedure(s) if the customer has
socket extension (in the Service Storage Cabinet). purchased the OCD to replace an existing CRT monitor.
2. Connect the video/sync cables from the video board Note Optimally, the OCD operates using a vertical fre-
(inside the host computer) to the OCD. quency of 60 Hz. Therefore, the rotary frequency
switch of the frame buffer board inside the com-
Note Do not use the external 75 ohm terminators
puter must be switched to another position. Con-
on the sync signals.
sole/Slave combinations using an OCD and CRT
3. Connect the provided RS232 cable to the OCD serial monitor are not supported since both monitors
input connector (at the rear side) and the BEB-X5 operate with different vertical frequencies.
connector on the host computer.
Alpha Server 800
4. Use cable ties to secure the cables to the monitor 1. Shutdown the computer.
table, so they will not be stressed.
2. Turn the console power OFF.
5. After switching the monitor ON, the monitor may
display a black screen. If this occurs: 3. Remove the CRT monitor.
a. Switch the monitor OFF. 4. Disconnect all cables to the computer.
b. Remove the five video/sync cables from the 5. Slide the computer out from the equipment cabinet
OCD. and remove the left side panel.
c. Switch the monitor ON.
d. When the "Philips Medical Systems" logo
appears, reconnect the video/sync cables.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 110 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

OCD Monitor (19" Option), continued

LCD Replacement, continued Alpha Server 400
Alpha Server 800, continued 1. Shutdown the computer.
6. On the Frame Buffer board, set the rotary frequency 2. Turn the console power OFF.
switch to position 2 (60 Hz).
3. Remove the CRT monitor.
7. Remount the left side cover and reposition the
4. Obtain access to the rear of the computer.
console inside the cabinet.
5. Set the Frequency Resolution switch as indicated
8. Reconnect the cables.
below.
• Connect the video cables and serial RS232 cable
• SW1: 0
to the LCD monitor.
• SW2: 1
• Connect the mains cable between the LCD
monitor and the mains outlet. • SW3: 0
9. Turn the console power ON. • SW4: 0
6. Position the LCD monitor on the console.
7. Connect the mains, serial, and video cables to the
monitor and turn the monitor ON.
8. Turn the console power ON.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 111 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

OCD Monitor (19" Option), continued

LCD Replacement, continued OCD Configuration
DEC 3000-6000 1. Logon as TSW.
1. Shutdown the computer. 2. Type: conf and press <ENTER>.
2. Turn the console power OFF. 3. Type: edit and press <ENTER>.
3. Remove the CRT monitor. 4. Enter your name, system reference number and a
4. On the upper rear side of the computer, loosen the reason for editing the file into the appropriate fields.
large manual screw. 5. On line #450, delete "ICD751". Replace this entry
5. Slide the computer cover towards the front. with LCD6202.

6. Set the Frequency/Resolution switch to setting 2. Note For R7.1.2 (or higher) replace the entry with
LCD.
7. Remount and secure the cover.
6. Press <CTRL>+<Z>.
8. Connect the mains, serial, and video cables to the
monitor and turn the monitor ON. 7. To save the settings, type: exit and press <ENTER>.

9. Turn the console power ON.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 112 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

OCD Monitor (19" Option), continued

Blacklevel Adjustment
The host computer controls blacklevel, so the display
Control Details
and hard copy images are calibrated similarly. Although
never calibrated to absolute exactness, they should be Suspend Stops communication between monitor and
calibrated, so the customer is satisfied. host.

1. Verify the ambient light is similar to that for normal Default Restores default calibration settings.
system operation. Save Saves current calibration settings.
2. Verify the monitor has been on for a minimum of Restore Restores previously saved calibration
thirty minutes before beginning the adjustment. settings.

3. Logon as TSW. Next Image Cycle forward through test images.

Previous Image Cycle backward through test images.
4. Type: tmonitor and press <ENTER>. A window
appears providing the options needed to control the Cancel Exits monitor test.
display adjustments. Calibration Adjust blacklevel from 1 to 99.

5. Continue to the next page to complete the

adjustment.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 113 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

OCD Monitor (19" Option), continued

Blacklevel Adjustment, continued Phase Adjustment
6. For an AS400 computer with an OCD: 1. On the Control menu, select Next Image until the
POPO image displays.
a. In the Control menu, select Default.
2. Select Suspend.
b. In the Control menu, select Suspend.
3. On the display rear panel, press the Enter OSD
c. On the display rear panel, press the Enter OSD
button. The On Screen Display menu appears
button. The On Screen Display menu appears
providing a contrast/brightness slider adjustment.
providing a contrast/brightness slider adjustment.
4. On the display rear panel, press Next Step to
d. Press the Left-Minus button until the contrast
proceed to the next adjustment.
indicates a level of 70.
5. Press and hold the Left Minus button until an
7. Once the settings are appropriate, press Save on
"Autoadjusting image..." message displays.
the Control menu.
The horizontal/vertical positions and sizes will be
8. On the Control menu, select Next Image until the automatically adjusted.
0/5% and the 95/100% picture appears.
6. Once the adjustment is complete, horizontal size/
9. Verify the visibility of the 5% and 95% sections in the position sliders display. If needed, do a manual fine
image. tuning on the horizontal position using the Right
Plus and Right Minus buttons.
10. Continue to the Phase Adjustment procedure.
Note A uniform image (without vertical bands)
should be the final result.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 114 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

OCD Monitor (19" Option), continued

Phase Adjustment, continued 13. Press the Next Step button to leave the OSD.
7. On the display rear panel, press the Next Step 14. On the popup menu, select Suspend. The buttons
button. A tune and black slider appears. on the rear will now be locked.
8. Use the Tune Scrollbar, to optimize the POPO 15. To exit the test, select Cancel on the popup menu.
image, so it appears sharp and stable.
16. Type: logo and press <ENTER>.
Note Start with a setting of 25 and adjust the tune
17. To confirm the logout, select Yes.
value incrementally, using the Left Plus and
Left Minus buttons, until a stable image is vis-
ible.
9. On the display rear panel, press the Next Step
button. A vertical size/position slider appears.
Note No adjustment is necessary using this slider.
10. On the display rear panel, press the Next Step
button. A store/advanced selection appears.
Note It is unnecessary to store the values, since
the display stores the last adjusted settings.
11. Press the Next Step button. A timing view appears.
Verify the frame buffer board inside the computer
has been set to the correct vertical frequency.
12. Press the Next Step button. Part information
appears.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 115 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style)

Select one of the following topics: Startup
• Startup 1. Before starting the unit:
• Temperature Adjustment a. Check all electrical connections.
• Calibration b. Check all plumbing connections.
• Settings c. Verify the following components of the circulating
system have been correctly filled with distilled
water.
– heat exchanger
– component to be cooled
– connecting tubing
2. To start the pumps, turn the Power switch ON.
Note The reservoir’s low fluid level monitor will
send a signal, illuminate a light, and turn the
pumps OFF if the fluid level in the reservoir is
below a safe operating level.
3. Adjust the flow through the DEI canister to
1.0 liters/min.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 116 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style), continued

Temperature Adjustment Calibration
Cooling water supply flow rate, cooling water supply If the controller or sensor is replaced, the following
temperature, and heat load must be considered when procedure must be completed.
selecting an operating temperature.
1. Position a reference thermometer in the recirculating
1. Use the Temperature Control knob (on the control fluid line.
panel) to set the appropriate operating temperature.
2. Turn the unit ON.
Note The vendor recommends a temperature of
3. Run the unit with no heat load applied.
25o C.
Note Circulate through the load, but ensure the
The system activates a control valve that adjusts the load is turned OFF, so it is not adding to the
water flow supply to generate the appropriate heat the system generates.
operating temperature.
4. On the controller, loosen the knob set screw(s).
Indicator Lights Remove the knob.
Control valve status is indicated by the amber (Idle) and
5. Adjust the shaft of the controller knob, so the unit
green (Cool) indicator lights.
stabilizes at a 50% duty cycle.
When the valve is set for maximum cooling (fully open),
The Cool and Idle lamps are both flashing equally.
the Cool light should be lit steadily. When closed, the Idle
light should be lit steadily. 6. Reinstall the knob, so the line points to the
temperature indicated by the reference thermometer
Note The two lights will flash (with varying on-time) as
positioned in step 1.
the Control Valve moves between these two
extremes. 7. Tighten the set screw(s).

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 117 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style), continued

Settings Setting Details
Recommended settings for any adjustable devices in the
Time Delay This relay provides a four second delay from
unit include: Relay when the tank float switch drops and the low-level
lamp lights.
Setting Details Note This helps prevent false indicators that
High As viewed from the front of the unit: could result from routine turbulence in the tank.
Temperature 1. Adjust the knob for a four second delay (a
• On the left (closest to the tank) is the
Switch setting of 1.5 on the adjustment knob).
recirculating outlet switch for feed to the coil.
• On the right, is the recirculating inlet switch for Note The scale used on this device is arbitrary.
return from the coil.
Note oF is the scale on these devices.
1. Set supply to 30oF and return to 35oF.
Note Both can be adjusted to meet customer
specific requirements.
Pressure This valve, set for 95 PSI, is a safety device. It
Relief Valve does not require regular adjustment.
To set the valve to the proper setting:
1. Close the recirculating fluid outlet.
2. Loosen the lock nut on the valve.
3. Adjust the stem, so 95 PSI is indicated on the
pressure gauge of the unit.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 118 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New Style)

Startup Temperature Adjustment
1. Before starting the unit: Cooling water supply flow rate, cooling water supply
temperature, and heat load must be considered when
a. Check all electrical connections.
selecting an operating temperature.
b. Check all plumbing connections.
1. Use the Temp Control knob (on the control panel) to
c. Verify the following components of the circulating set the appropriate operating temperature.
system have been correctly filled with distilled
Note The vendor recommends a temperature of
water.
25o C.
– heat exchanger
The system activates a control valve that adjusts the
– component to be cooled water flow supply to generate the appropriate
– connecting tubing operating temperature.

2. To start the pumps, turn the Power switch ON. Indicator Lights
Control valve status is indicated by the amber (Idle) and
Note The reservoir’s low fluid level monitor will
green (Cool) indicator lights.
send a signal, illuminate a light, and turn the
pumps OFF if the fluid level in the reservoir is When the valve is set for maximum cooling (fully open),
below a safe operating level. the Cool light should be lit steadily. When closed, the Idle
light should be lit steadily.
Note The two lights will flash (with varying on-time) as
the control valve moves between these two
extremes.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 119 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42)

Select one of the following topics: Tube Bias Adjustment
• Tube Bias Adjustment This procedure applies to all T10-NT and ACS-NT
systems that include one of the following amplifiers:
• Self Test (S21 Amp Only)
• 53-S21D-64,
• Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test
• 53-S21D-42, or
• 53-S22D-42
1. Turn the amplifier OFF.
2. Since there are several static sensitive components
in the system, verify you are observing all anti-static
and grounding protocols.
3. Remove the top panel from the amplifier.
4. Loosen the two PA deck hold-down screws.
5. Slide the PA deck completely forward while ensuring
the harnesses do not get tangled at the rear of the
deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 120 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

Tube Bias Adjustment, continued "Set For: xxxMA".
6. Turn the amplifier ON.
Warning Over-driving the bias values reduces
7. On the system contoller board, press the [LOCAL] tube life.
button. The LED lights.
14. Adjustments should be set as close to the window
8. Press the [OPER] button.
value as possible, but should not exceed the
9. Wait approximately six minutes until the amplifier values.To adjust the PA bias, slide S1-6 through S1-
moves to an Operate state. 1 open/closed (in a BCD format) until the LCD reads
the lp indicated as the target lp.
10. Press the [MENU] button six times. The Set PA Bias
menu option should appear on the LCD display. 15. Exit the PA Bias Set menu.
11. Select the Set PA Bias option using the <ARROW> 16. Access the IPA Bias Set menu.
keys. Press <ENTER>.
17. Turn the IPA Bias Set: ON.
12. On the PA Control board, slide switches S1 and S2
18. To adjust the IPA bias, close switch S2-6, then S2-4,
to the OFF position.
S2-3, etc. until the LCD reads the IPA lp indicated as
13. Press <ENTER> 5 times (until the correct menu the target lp.
appears).
19. Exit the IPA Bias Set menu.
The amplifier goes to the Wait state, and the
amplifier automatically gates the PA tube. The PA 20. Slide the PA deck back into the cabinet, again taking
care not to tangle the harnesses.
tube plate current displays on the LCD menu in the
line labeled, "PA lp:". The tube’s target plate 21. Retighten the PA deck screws.
current displays on the LCD menu in the line labeled
22. Close the amplifier.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 121 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

Self Test (S21 Amp Only) Test=Command Response
To warn you when tubes are nearing the end of their
All TEST=COMMANDS w1_WARNING ♦ xx ♦ T:dd-mm-yyyy
useful life, and to assist the technician in locating system (Failures) ♦ hh:mm:ss ♦ warning description
problems, the amplifier uses a self test procedure.
Note "xx" represents the warning
To access the self test routines, the following set of number.
commands can be utilized: All TEST=COMMANDS x3_READY
TEST=< ? | AMP | LOCAL | ON | OFF | CHKSUM | FWREV | > (All TEST=COMMANDS end with this
response)
Possible responses include:
Note The amplifier only responds with the following
Test=Command Response when controlled through the parallel interface.
FWREV i1_Firmware= ♦ UPX-X###-x – l4_ON,
CHKSUM i2_CHECKSUM= ♦ hhhh – x3_READY, and
(hhhh = hex checksum)
– any w1_WARNING messages.
OFF l3_OFF
ON l4_ON
AMP t0_AMP_NOT_READY (if system not
in Operate
AMP t1_AMP_TEST_START
T2_PULSE_DATA_DONE
T3_AMP_TEST_DONE

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 122 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

Self Test (S21 Amp Only), continued A warning may be issued if any out of specification
situation is uncovered during the test. Warning
Amplifier RF Self Test
messages alert the user to a situation requiring attention.
This procedure tests the amplifier tubes and overall
system RF performance. If either the IPA or PA tube filament voltage regulator fails
during the test, a specific warning message may be
During this test, the following are checked for appropriate issued. Such a failure could permit a higher than normal
operation: voltage to be applied to the tube filament, decreasing the
• Tube bias/operating point lifetime of the filament.Warning numbers (33 & 34) help
identify the specific regulator that has failed.
• Input drive level
Important! Filament voltage is critical to performance.
• Solid state amplifier (SSA) output
A patient monitoring unit (PMU) failure could also
• System stage gain/output generate a warning message. If a discrepancy greater
• IPA & PA tube filament voltage than 3 dB exists between a plate-current based power
lookup table and the system wattmeter, fault 64 occurs.
• IPA & PA tube emission and plate current This fault, issued upon test completion, causes the
• IPA & PA power supply regulation amplifier to turn OFF after the test.

The amplifier gets its driving signal from the companion

MRI system during the test. Amplifier output must be
terminated in a suitable dummy load. The amplifier
collects data samples. Upon completion of the test, a
status report message is issued.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 123 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

Self Test (S21 Amp Only), continued If properly configured, the following response are issued:
Command Sequence • t1_AMP_TEST_START
The amplifier must be in Operate, in any mode • t2_PULSE_DATA_DONE
(though High Mode is preferred).
• t3_AMP_TEST_DONE
To begin the self tests, issue the following commands:
• t4_AMP TEST-GATE_TIMEOUT
• SETBIAS
Note No additional message is issued when all
• TEST=ON parameters are within specification.
• TEST=AMP To disable the self tests and discontinue any test(s) left
If the amplifier is not in Operate, the response will be uncompleted, issue the following command:
"t0_AMP_NOT_READY" TEST=OFF.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 124 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test (non-1.5T
Make the appropriate selection below, depending on the
Power & Master)
system installed.
Caution Before disconnecting the RF Output
• For Intera 0.5T Standard, 1.0T Omni, 1.0T Power, and cable (FRX2) always disconnect:
1.5T Omni, select Non-1.5T Power & Master.
• RF Input cable (FRX1)
• For Intera 1.5T Power and 1.5T Master, select 1.5T
Power & Master. • RF Gating cable (FRX4)
The power amplifier output can contain
hazardous voltages.

1. Logon as Gyroscan.
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
3. Enter Service Mode.
4. Select System Tuning.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 125 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test, continued Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test (1.5 Power &
Master)
Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test (non-1.5T
Power & Master), continued For 5 kW power amplifier output, this test calibrates the
5. Select System Tuning Tools > Installation Exciter Output Level.
Procedures. For an S21 amplifier, this test also determines the
appropriate transmit cable length. During the test on a
6. Select RF Power Amplifier Procedures.
S21 amplifier, you will be directed to connect an
7. Select Max. KW Adjustment (1H RF-Amp). additional cable (1/4 lambda length) in the transmit
Note This part of the procedure automatically mea- cable. One side of this cable is connected to the system
filter box (ZAX1). The other side is connected to the
sures RF drive scale, resulting in 5 kW out-
transmit cable (ZAX1) using an adapter. This is only
put.
performed once, during install.
8. Check cable and coupler attenuation settings.
During the test, the system will determine whether the
9. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen. 1/4 lambda cable is necessary. If so, a sleeve (delivered
with the system) to prevent spikes from the connector
10. Once that test has completed, select PMU Trip Test.
touching the system filter box must be used.
Note This procedure verifies if the internal PMU
turns the RF pulse power amplifier OFF Important! Use a heat gun (set to a minimum setting) to
shrink the sleeve over the 1/4 lambda con-
within thirty seconds, when the average out-
nector.
put power is 10% higher than the PMU set-
ting. It also verifies if the amplifier remains
ON when the average output power is 10%
lower than the PMU setting.
11. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 126 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test, continued 6. Select RF Power Amplifier Procedures.
Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test (1.5 Power & 7. Select Max. KW Adjustment (1H RF-Amp).
Master), continued
8. To start the test, click [PROCEED].
Caution Before disconnecting the RF Transmit 9. When prompted, enter the cable attenuation and
cable always disconnect: directional coupler output values.
• RF Input cable (FRX1) 10. When prompted to "Perform cable length tuning",
enter no.
• RF Enable cable (FRX4)
11. Follow the directions displayed on the screen.
Note A cable must be installed from FCHX51 to
FRX5. The attenuation values must be 12. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
entered into the software before the test 13. Once that test has completed, select PMU Trip Test.
begins. The needed values are located on
the cable (white and blue tag) and directly This verifies if the internal PMU turns the RF pulse
next to connector RFX5 of the RF Amp. power amplifier OFF in thirty seconds, when the
average output power is 10% higher than the PMU
1. Logon as Gyroscan. setting. It also verifies if the amplifier remains ON
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. when the average. output power is 10% lower than
the PMU setting.
3. Enter Service Mode.
• Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
4. Select System Tuning.
5. Select System Tuning Tools > Installation
Procedures.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 127 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64)
Select one of the following topics: Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test
• Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test Make the appropriate selection below, depending on the
system installed.
• Self Test
• For Intera 0.5T Standard, 1.0T Omni, 1.0T Power, and
1.5T Omni, select Non-1.5T Power & Master.
• For Intera 1.5T Power and 1.5T Master, select 1.5T
Power & Master.
Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test (non-1.5T
Power & Master)

Caution Before disconnecting the RF Output

cable (FRX2) always disconnect:
• RF Input cable (FRX1)
• RF Gating cable (FRX4)
The power amplifier output can contain
hazardous voltages.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 128 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64), continued

Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test, continued 10. Once that test has completed, select PMU Trip Test.
Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test (non-1.5T Note This procedure verifies if the internal PMU
Power & Master), continued turns the RF pulse power amplifier OFF
1. Logon as Gyroscan. within thirty seconds, when the average out-
put power is 10% higher than the PMU set-
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. ting. It also verifies if the amplifier remains
3. Enter Service Mode. ON when the average output power is 10%
lower than the PMU setting.
4. Select System Tuning.
11. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
5. Select System Tuning Tools > Installation
Procedures. Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test (1.5 Power &
Master)
6. Select RF Power Amplifier Procedures.
For 5 kW power amplifier output, this test calibrates the
7. Select Max. KW Adjustment (1H RF-Amp). Exciter Output Level.
Note This part of the procedure automatically mea-
sures RF drive scale, resulting in 5 kW out-
put.
8. Check cable and coupler attenuation settings.
9. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 129 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64), continued

Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test, continued 5. Select System Tuning Tools > Installation
Procedures.
Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test (1.5 Power &
Master), continued 6. Select RF Power Amplifier Procedures.
7. Select Max. KW Adjustment (1H RF-Amp).
Caution Before disconnecting the RF Transmit
cable always disconnect: 8. To start the test, click [PROCEED].
• RF Input cable (FRX1) 9. When prompted, enter the cable attenuation and
directional coupler output values.
• RF Enable cable (FRX4)
10. Follow the directions displayed on the screen.
Note A cable must be installed from FCHX51 to
FRX5. The attenuation values must be 11. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
entered into the software before the test 12. Once that test has completed, select PMU Trip Test.
begins. The needed values are located on
the cable (white and blue tag) and directly This verifies if the internal PMU turns the RF pulse
next to connector RFX5 of the RF Amp. power amplifier OFF in thirty seconds, when the
average output power is 10% higher than the PMU
1. Logon as Gyroscan. setting. It also verifies if the amplifier remains ON
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. when the average. output power is 10% lower than
the PMU setting.
3. Enter Service Mode.
13. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
4. Select System Tuning.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 130 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64), continued

Self Test Possible responses include:
To warn you when tubes are nearing the end of their
Test=Command Response
useful life, and to assist the technician in locating system
problems, the amplifier uses a self test procedure. FWREV i1_Firmware= ♦ UPX-X###-x
To access the self test routines, the following set of CHKSUM i2_CHECKSUM= ♦ hhhh
commands can be utilized: (hhhh = hex checksum)

TEST=< ? |AMP| |LOCAL| |ON| |OFF | |CHKSUM| |FWREV| > OFF l3_OFF
ON l4_ON
AMP t0_AMP_NOT_READY (if system not
in Operate)
AMP t1_AMP_TEST_START
t2_PULSE_DATA_DONE
t3_AMP_TEST_DONE
All TEST=COMMANDS w1_WARNING ♦ xx ♦ T:dd-mm-yyyy
(Failures) ♦ hh:mm:ss ♦ warning description
Note "xx" represents the warning
number.
All TEST=COMMANDS x3_READY
(All TEST=COMMANDS end with this
response)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 131 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64), continued

Self Test, continued The amplifier gets its driving signal from the companion
MRI system during the test. Amplifier output must be
Note The amplifier only responds with the following
when controlled through the parallel interface. terminated in a suitable dummy load. The amplifier
collects data samples. Upon completion of the test, a
– l4_ON, status report message is issued.
– x3_READY, and A warning may be issued if any out of specification
– any w1_WARNING messages. situation is uncovered during the test. Warning
messages alert the user to a situation requiring attention.
Amplifier RF Self Test
If either the IPA or PA tube filament voltage regulator fails
This procedure tests the amplifier tubes and overall during the test, a specific warning message may be
system RF performance. issued. Such a failure could permit a higher than normal
During this test, the following are checked for appropriate voltage to be applied to the tube filament, decreasing the
operation: lifetime of the filament.Warning numbers (33 & 34) help
identify the specific regulator that has failed.
• Tube bias/operating point
Important! Filament voltage is critical to performance.
• Input drive level
A patient monitoring unit (PMU) failure could also
• Solid state amplifier (SSA) output generate a warning message. If a discrepancy greater
• System stage gain/output than 3 dB exists between a plate-current based power
lookup table and the system wattmeter, fault 64 occurs.
• IPA & PA tube filament voltage This fault, issued upon test completion, causes the
• IPA & PA tube emission and plate current amplifier to turn OFF after the test.

• IPA & PA power supply regulation

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 132 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64), continued

Self Test, continued Any out-of-tolerance condition is reported with a warning
similar to the following:
Command Sequence
The amplifier must be in Operate, in any mode w1_Warning xx T:dd-mm-yy hh:mm:ss <Short Description>
(though High Mode is preferred). "xx" represents the warning number (multiple warnings
are displayed one per line).
To begin the self tests (and enable the use of the self test
commands) issue the following commands: Note The test will be aborted if a system fault occurs
during the test. The system fault will be reported
• SETBIAS
in the standard form.
• TEST=ON
To disable the self test and discontinue any test(s) left
• TEST=AMP uncompleted, issue the following command:
If the amplifier is not in Operate, the response will be • TEST=OFF.
"t0_AMP_NOT_READY"
If properly configured, the following response are issued:
• t1_AMP_TEST_START
• t2_PULSE_DATA_DONE
• t3_AMP_TEST_DONE
• t4_AMP TEST-GATE_TIMEOUT
Note No additional message is issued when all
parameters are within specification.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 133 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 234

Select one of the following topics: 2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
• Gradient Amplifier Check/Adjustment 3. Enter Service Mode. Use Service as the password.
• Clock Verify Test 4. Select System Tuning using System as the
password.
• Offset Check
5. Select System Tuning Tools > Installation
• Gradient Current Adjustment
Procedures.
The following procedures apply to the following systems:
6. Select Gradient Adjustment Procedures.
• Intera 0.5T Standard
Clock Verify Test
• Intera 1.0T Omni
• For the Intera 0.5T Standard (Copley 234_02) the
• Intera 1.5T Omni system response to this procedure should be
81000 Hz.
Gradient Amplifier Check/Adjustment
• For the Intera 1.0T Omni) the system response to this
Prerequisites procedure should be 100000 Hz.
Before starting this procedure, the following conditions
must be satisfied: 1. From the list of gradient adjustment procedures (see
the Gradient Amplifier Check/Adjustment procedure
• The gradient amplifier and BDAS should be warmed above) select Clock verify test.
up for a minimum of thirty minutes.
The jumper setting for W10 on the DIBA in the
• The RF amplifier must be turned ON. gradient interface displays.
• The RF door must be closed. 2. Click [PROCEED].
1. Logon as Gyroscan.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 134 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 234, continued

Offset Check Procedure
Important! This is not a system tuning tool. 1. From the list of gradient adjustment procedures (see
the Gradient Amplifier Check/Adjustment
Caution During this procedure, the gradient must procedure above) select Gradient Current
not be pulsed; no demand signals. Adjustment.
An information screen displays.
1. From the list of gradient adjustment procedures (see
the Gradient Amplifier Check/Adjustment 2. To begin the measurement, click [PROCEED].
procedure above) select Offset Check. Gradient current information displays on the console
monitor.
2. Use a DVM to measure the "current" monitor signal
of each amplifier (X, Y, & Z) on the BNC connectors. 3. Make the necessary adjustments, as close as
possible to 240 A.
The voltage should be < 50 mV.
Note Adjustments are on the back of the axis
Gradient Current Adjustment amplifier, below connector J3.
This procedure generates a 240 A gradient pulse for all 4. When the adjustments are within the limits, type exit.
axes simultaneously. Measured current values (for all
Press <ENTER>. A MRL displays.
channels) must be 240 A +3.5 A.
5. Verify no error messages are displayed and the
The Gain potentiometer of the Copley 234 amplifier is
adjustments are within the limits.
used to adjust the current.
6. To exit the MRL listing, click [PROCEED].
Prerequisites
The RF door must be closed during this procedure. 7. To exit the Gradient Adjustment Procedure menu,
click [CANCEL].

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 135 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271

Select one of the following topics: Caution
• Caution High voltage is present inside the gradient amplifier.
• Start ASW • Copley 271: 420 V
• Adjustment Sequence • Copley 281: 850 V
• Set Gradient Amplifier Settings into the Tuned HW High voltage is also present on the gradient coil
Pars connections, the system filter box, and in some cases at
the gradient switch.
• Set the Tuned HW Pars into the Gradient Amplifier
Registers Verify AC power has been turned OFF for a minimum of
one minute prior to starting work on the gradient chain.
• Adjust Gain and Offset
1. To verify that buffer capacitors have discharged to
• Adjust Settling less than 2 volts:
• Adjust Dual Delay a. Check the high voltage indicator on the front side
• Eddy Current Compensation of the amplifier. Green indicates output voltage
above 100 V.
• Gradient Chain Verification
b. Use a digital multi meter to measure output
• Gradient Boost Mode Adjustment voltage at the output terminals.
• Channel Delay and Shimming
• Eddy Current Analysis
• Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R7.x-R9.x)
• Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R10.x-R11.x)
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 136 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Start ASW Adjustment Sequence
1. To start ASW for R7.x to R9.x: Important! Gradient chain adjustments must be done in
the proper sequence. All adjustments are
a. Logon as Gyroscan.
influenced by previous adjustments.
2. To start ASW for R10.x and above:
Adjustment Sequence - Typical
a. Logon as MRService.
Pulsar Nova/Quasar (Dual)
b. Enter the case-sensitive password (usually
Manager or Manager1). Gain/Offset Gain/Offset
c. From the MR Boot Configuration Manager, select Settling Settling
Intera and press Start. Eddy Current Compensation Dual Delay
Gradient Chain Verification Eddy Current Compensation
Channel Delay/Shimming Gradient Chain Verification
Gradient Strength Channel Delay/Shimming
Eddy Current Analysis Gradient Strength
Eddy Current Analysis

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 137 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjustment Sequence, continued GCI1-Main Board Replacement:
Adjustment Sequence - Following Part
Pulsar Nova/Quasar (Dual)
Replacement
For Gradient Coil and Amplifier Axes Replacement: Eddy Current Compensation Eddy Current Compensation
Gradient Chain Verification Gradient Chain Verification
Pulsar Nova/Quasar (Dual) Channel Delay/Shimming Channel Delay/Shimming
Gain/Offset Gain/Offset Eddy Current Analysis Eddy Current Analysis
Settling Settling Gradient Strength Gradient Strength
Eddy Current Compensation Dual Delay
HV Power Supply Replacement:
Gradient Chain Verification Eddy Current Compensation
Channel Delay/Shimming Gradient Chain Verification Pulsar Nova/Quasar (Dual)
Eddy Current Analysis Channel Delay/Shimming
Eddy Current Analysis (Check) Eddy Current Analysis (Check)
Gradient Strength Eddy Current Analysis
Gradient Strength Gradient Strength
Gradient Strength

Important! All gradient chain adjustments must be done

in the proper sequence. All adjustments are
influenced by previous adjustments

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 138 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Set Gradient Amplifier Settings into the Tuned 4. Select Enter Service Mode.
HW Pars 5. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
Adjustable register settings can be uploaded to the tuned
6. Select Installation Procedures > Gradient
hardware parameter archive before starting the
Adjustment Procedures.
adjustment of the gradient amplifier.
7. Select Set Gradamp Settings into HW Archive.
During settling and dual mode adjustment, it’s possible to
enter values in the amplifier registers. If this happened A warning message displays.
accidentally, settings of the tuned hardware parameters
8. To upload the gradient amplifier settings, type: Yes
can be used to correct this error.
and press <ENTER>.
All register values in the gradient amplifier are directly
The new gradient amplifier tuned hardware
updated while adjusting the gradient amplifier. Gradient
amplifier register values in the tuned hardware parameters display.
parameters are updated after a successful completion of 9. To return to the menu, click [PROCEED].
an adjustment. So, if an adjustment must be restarted
with start values from the tuned hardware parameter Note The new parameters are stored in the tuned
hardware parameter file only after a successful
archive, if affects only the amplifier register values not
adjustment of the gradient amplifier.
yet adjusted.
1. Complete the Start ASW procedure.
2. For R11, to bring up the Scan Control button, from
the menu bar, select System > Scan Definition
Context > Scan List.
3. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 139 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Set the Tuned HW Pars into the Gradient Adjust Gain and Offset
Amplifier Registers Gain/offset adjustments are performed automatically.
1. Complete the Start ASW procedure.
Note For Intera Nova Dual and Quasar Dual, the
2. For R11, to bring up the Scan Control button, from adjustment is completed for both standard and
the menu bar, select System > Scan Definition parallel modes.
Context > Scan List.
1. Complete the Start ASW procedure.
3. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
2. For R11, to bring up the Scan Control button, from
4. Select Enter Service Mode. the menu bar, select System > Scan Definition
Context > Scan List.
5. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
3. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
6. Select Diagnostic Measurement Tools > Gradient
Amplifier Measurements. 4. Select Enter Service Mode.
7. Select Set HW Settings into Grad. Ampl. 5. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
A warning message displays. 6. Select Installation Procedures > Gradient
Adjustment Procedures.
8. To upload the HW settings to the gradient amplifier,
type: Yes and press <ENTER>. 7. Select Gradient Ampl. Gain/Offset Adjustment.
The new gradient amplifier tuned hardware An information message displays.
parameters display.
9. To return to the Gradient Amplifier Measurement
menu, click [PROCEED].

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 140 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjust Gain and Offset, continued 4. For R11, to bring up the Scan Control button, from
the menu bar, select System > Scan Definition
8. Follow the prompts displayed by the screen
messages. Context > Scan List.

9. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. 5. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].

10. Once the scan completes, click [PROCEED] to start 6. Select Enter Service Mode.
the measurement for parallel mode (if applicable). 7. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
An MRL displays.
8. Select Installation Procedures > Gradient
Note Gain and offset are stored automatically. Adjustment Procedures.
11. To return to the menu, click [PROCEED]. 9. Select Settling Adjustment.
Adjust Settling 10. Select Settling Adjustment X.
1. Verify the offset and gain are within specification. An information message displays.
2. Verify gradient cables are properly routed:
• from the amplifier to the system filter box, and
• from the system filter box to the gradient coil.
Note Both the positive and negative gradient
cables should be tie-wrapped/bundled
together to minimize vibration.
3. Complete the Start ASW procedure.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 141 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjust Settling, continued 13. Depending on the configuration of the system:
11. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. • See Settling Pulsar.
12. To select the adjustment start values for the amplifier • See Settling Nova or Quasar.
registers:
• See Settling Nova Dual or Quasar Dual.
a. For maintenance, select the default amp_pars.
Note During initial installation, at the Enter
User Input field, type: Initial.
b. Click [PROCEED].
Note By default, the Proportional Register is
selected. The "S-value" is only available for
Nova, Quasar and Explorer systems.
• For the Proportional Register, the Up command
causes the signal to go down; the Down
command causes the signal to go up.
• For the Integral Register, the Up command
causes the signal to go up; the Down command
causes the signal to go down.
• For the Derivative Register, the Up command
causes the signal to go down; the Down
command causes the signal to go up.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 142 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjust Settling, continued 4. Type: U (Up) or D (Down) and press <ENTER> until
the signal is similar as that displayed in the following
Settling Pulsar
sample.
Note When adjusting settling, review the real signal.
1. Hold the right mouse button down and draw a box
(left to right) selecting the top 10% of the waveform.
2. To re-scale the signal, toggle the Auto Scale button
of the difference signal.
3. If the Proportional Register is already selected,
continue to step 4.
- or -
If the Proportional Register is not already selected:
a. Type: register.
b. Press <ENTER>. 5. Continue using the U (Up) and D (Down) commands
c. Type: proportional. with a smaller step size to optimize the signal.
d. Press <ENTER>. Note This may need to be repeated several times to
get the waveform to look like the picture. It will be
approximately 99% - 101% of the signal.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 143 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjust Settling, continued 9. Continue using the U (Up) and D (Down) commands
with a smaller step size to optimize the signal for the
Settling Pulsar, continued
Derivative and Proportional Registers.
6. Type: register and press <ENTER>.
10. Repeat the previous steps until the settling signal is
7. Type: derivative and press <ENTER>. within specification.
8. Type: U (Up) and press <ENTER> until the signal is Note The values turn black.
similar as that displayed in the following sample.
11. Average the overshoot/undershoot around the 100%
axis to try and make it cross near 1 ms.
12. Exit to stop the adjustment and display the
measured output parameters.
13. To return to the Settling main menu, click
[PROCEED].
14. Repeat this procedure for the Y and Z.
Note Z-adjustment signals differ from X and Y.
Refer to the samples on the following page.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 144 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjust Settling, continued
Settling Pulsar, continued Proportional and Derivative Fine
Re-scaled Unadjusted Signal (Z) Adjusted (Z)

Proportional Adjusted (Z)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 145 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjust Settling, continued
Settling Nova or Quasar
Note When adjusting settling, review the real signal.
When adjusting a master gradient amplifier axis, the
corresponding gradient amplifier axis in the slave cabinet
is adjusted to a similar amount.
1. Use the mouse to select the part of the signal of
interest to zoom the real signal.
2. To re-scale the signal, toggle the Auto Scale button
of the difference signal.
3. If the Proportional Register is already selected,
continue to step 4. 5. Continue using the U (Up) and D (Down) commands
- or - with a smaller step size to optimize the signal.
If the Proportional Register is not already selected: 6. Type: register and press <ENTER>.
a. Type: register. 7. Type: derivative and press <ENTER>.
b. Press <ENTER>.
c. Type: proportional.
d. Press <ENTER>.
4. Type: U (Up) and press <ENTER> until the signal is
similar as that displayed in the following sample. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 146 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjust Settling, continued 11. Average the overshoot/undershoot around the 100%
axis to try and make it cross near 1 ms.
Settling Nova or Quasar, continued
8. Type: D (Up) and press <ENTER> until the signal is 12. Exit to stop the adjustment for the master axis.
similar as that displayed in the following sample. 13. Click [PROCEED].
Adjustment automatically continues with the fine
adjustment of the slave axis. "SL" is added to the
adjustment name in the Scan Window.
14. Continue using the U (Up) and D (Down) commands
with a smaller step size to optimize the signal for the
Derivative and Proportional Registers.
15. Repeat adjustment until the settling is within
specification. The values turn black.
16. Average the overshoot/undershoot around the 100%
axis to try and make it cross near 1 ms.

9. Continue using the U (Up) and D (Down) commands 17. Exit to stop the adjustment for the slave axis and
with a smaller step size to optimize the signal for the display output parameters of the master and slave
Derivative and Proportional Registers. axis.

10. Repeat the previous steps until the settling signal is 18. Repeat this procedure for the Y and Z.
within specification. Note Z-adjustment signals differ from X and Y.
Note The values turn black. Refer to the samples on the following page.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 147 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjust Settling, continued
Settling Nova or Quasar, continued Proportional and Derivative Fine
Re-scaled Unadjusted Signal (Z) Adjusted (Z)

Proportional Adjusted (Z)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 148 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjust Settling, continued 4. Type: U (Up) and press <ENTER> until the signal is
similar as that displayed in the following sample.
Settling Nova Dual or Quasar Dual
Note When adjusting settling, review the real signal.
Adjustment for Nova Dual and Quasar Dual must be
completed in Standard Mode and Parallel Mode. For
adjustment in Standard Mode, see Settling Nova or
Quasar. For adjustment in Parallel Mode, continue with
the following steps.
1. Use the mouse to select the part of the signal of
interest to zoom the real signal.
2. To re-scale the signal, toggle the Auto Scale button
of the difference signal.
3. If the Proportional Register is already selected, 5. Continue using the U (Up) and D (Down) commands
continue to step 4. with a smaller step size to optimize the signal.
- or -
If the Proportional Register is not already selected:
a. Type: register.
b. Press <ENTER>.
c. Type: proportional.
d. Press <ENTER>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 149 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjust Settling, continued 9. Continue using the U (Up) and D (Down) commands
with a smaller step size to optimize the signal for the
Settling Nova Dual or Quasar Dual, continued
Derivative and Proportional Registers.
6. Type: register and press <ENTER>.
10. Repeat the previous steps until the settling signal is
7. Type: derivative and press <ENTER>. within specification.
8. Type: U (Up) and press <ENTER> until the signal is Note The values turn black.
similar as that displayed in the following sample.
11. Average the overshoot/undershoot around the 100%
axis to try and make it cross near 1 ms.
12. Exit to stop the adjustment and display the
measured output parameters.
13. To return to the Settling main menu, click
[PROCEED].
14. Repeat this procedure for the Y and Z.
Note Z-adjustment signals differ from X and Y.
Refer to the samples on the following page.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 150 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjust Settling, continued
Settling Nova Dual or Quasar Dual, continued Proportional and Derivative Fine
Re-scaled Unadjusted Signal (Z) Adjusted (Z)

Proportional Adjusted (Z)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 151 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjust Dual Delay 2. From inside the MDE (Main Distribution
Extension), turn the gradient amplifiers OFF.
High voltage is present inside the gradient amplifier.
3. Set the DMAT offset to zero.
• Copley 271: 420 V
a. Connect the DMAT mains cable to a
• Copley 281: 850 V
220 V / 230 V mains supply that is not switched
High voltage is also present on the gradient coil OFF with the gradient amplifier. For example, use
connections, the system filter box, and in some cases at the NTDAC.
the gradient switch.
b. Position the Sensitivity switch to 200 mV/A.
Verify AC power has been turned OFF for a minimum of
c. Verify the "Gradient Cables", belonging to the
one minute prior to starting work on the gradient chain.
DMAT do not touch each other (open).
1. To verify that buffer capacitors have discharged to
d. Using a DMV, measure the voltage on the coax
less than 2 volts:
output cable.
a. Check the high voltage indicator on the front side
of the amplifier. Green indicates output voltage e. On top of the DMAT, adjust the potentiometer so
the offset value of the probe is 0 mV +2 mV
above 100 V.
(sensitivity set to 200 mV/A).
b. Use a digital multi meter to measure output
voltage at the output terminals. Caution After switching the gradient amplifiers
ON, high output voltage will be present
Setup
on the DMAT external cables.
1. On the DMAT, check the mechanical alignment of the
Sensitivity switch before starting the adjustment. f. Verify that all connections are insulated before
Note Misalignment can influence the adjustments. turning the gradient amplifier ON.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 152 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjust Dual Delay, continued • Slide the rubber sleeve over the cable marked with
the green label Master ---. Connect this cable to the
Setup, continued
gradient cable leading to the X coil (disconnected).
4. Refer to the drawing below and the following points
to connect the DMAT in the X-chain. • Slide the green sleeve across the new connection.
220 V / 230 V (E.g., NTDAC
• Position the test cables so the rear door of the master
DGAX5
GCI
cabinet can be closed, the close the rear door.
Slave

• Disconnect the gradient cables from X+ on the slave

Master
X+ X-
X+ X-

gradient amplifier.
• To X+ on the slave gradient amplifier, connect the
Power Preamp
DMAT cable marked Slave +++.
Slave +++ Master ---

• Slide the rubber sleeve over the cable marked with

Hall Det. the blue label Slave ---. Connect this cable to the
Ferrite Core gradient cable leading to the X coil (disconnected).
Master +++

• Slide the blue sleeve across the new connection.

Slave ---

DMAT

• Position the test cables so the rear door of the slave

XB XA
cabinet can be closed, the close the rear door.
Gradient Coil
• At the gradient interface controller board, connect the
DMAT output BNC cable to DGAX5.
• From X+ on the master gradient amplifier cabinet,
disconnect the gradient cables. 5. Inside the MDE (Main Distribution Extension) turn
the gradient amplifier ON. Wait 15 minutes.
• To X+ on the master gradient amplifier, connect the
DMAT cable marked Master +++. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 153 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjust Dual Delay, continued Adjustment start values for the amplifier registers must
be selected:
Adjustment
Important! After turning the gradient amplifier ON at the • AMP_PARS: Default - used at new installations.
end of the Setup procedure, it is important to Register values currently stored in the slave gradient
wait a minimum of 15 minutes before amplifier are used.
proceeding with this adjustment. • HW_TUNED_PARS: Used for corrective actions.
1. Complete the Start ASW procedure. Slave Register values currently stored in the HW
tuned archive are written into the adjustable registers
2. At the MR Boot Configuration Manager, select Intera of the slave gradient amplifier.
and click Start.
10. Click [PROCEED] to use AMP_PARS.
3. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
11. Position the DMAT Sensitivity switch to display the
4. Select Enter Service Mode. signal without clipping.
5. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools. Unadjusted Dual Delay Signal

6. Select Installation Procedures > Gradient

Adjustment Procedures.
7. Select Dual Delay Adjustment.
8. Select Dual Delay Adjustment X (Y, Z).
An information message displays.
9. Click [PROCEED].

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 154 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjust Dual Delay, continued 19. Adjust derivative to decrease the peaks at the points
labeled "3" in the sample on the preceding page.
Adjustment, continued
12. Verify an adjustment is required. Note Check the results against the following
sample.
• If no adjustment is required, exit the tool. Gain & Derivative Adjusted
- or -
• If not all the specifications are met, continue with
this procedure.
13. Select Register and press <ENTER>.
14. Select Gain and press <ENTER>.
15. If not already on, turn the grid ON in the monitor
display.
20. Select Register and press <ENTER>.
16. At the points labeled "1" in the sample on the
preceding page, adjust the gain to equalize the 21. Select Delay and press <ENTER>.
signal. 22. Adjust delay to minimize the block component in the
17. Select Register and press <ENTER>. signal at the points labeled "4" in the sample on the
preceding page.
18. Select Derivative and press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 155 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjust Dual Delay, continued 27. Exit to stop the measurement and display the
measured output parameters.
Adjustment, continued
23. Position the DMAT Sensitivity switch to 56 mV/A. 28. To return to the Dual Delay main menu, click
[PROCEED].
24. Select Proportional and press <ENTER>.
29. Inside the MDE (Main Distribution Extension) turn
25. Adjust Proportional until the gradient in the signal at the gradient amplifier OFF.
points labeled "2" is minimal.
30. Install the original situation.
Note Unadjusted Dual Delay Signal to identify
the appropriate point. 31. Connect the DMAT tool to the Y axes.
26. Repeat steps 9 through 22 until the dual delay signal 32. Repeat the Dual Delay Adjustment procedure for the
is within specification. See the sample screen below. Y axis.
Adjusted Dual Delay Signal 33. When finished with the Y axis, turn the gradient
amplifier inside the MDE (Main Distribution
Extension) to OFF.
34. Install the original situation.
35. Connect the DMAT tool to the Z axes.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 156 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Adjust Dual Delay, continued Eddy Current Compensation
Adjustment, continued Setup
36. Repeat the Dual Delay Adjustment procedure for the The eddy current compensation set
Z axis. (Pt# 8122 101 45004) is required to complete this
procedure.
37. When finished with the Z axis, turn the gradient
amplifier inside the MDE (Main Distribution Please note the following:
Extension) to OFF.
• Eddy currents are adjusted with registers on the
38. Install the original situation. gradient chain interface main board (DGA).
39. Turn the gradient amplifier inside the Mains • Use care when positioning the flux meter. Drift
Distribution Extension (MDE) to ON. depends on environmental temperature variations.
Specifications • To eliminate possible induction, keep the flux meter
• Gain Mismatch: <10 mV (Sensitivity switch: 50 mV/A) away from the gradient amplifier cabinet and gradient
cables (Min. of 1 meter).
Note Some peaks are visible. Typically, peaks
should have an amplitude <60 mV and • Use the coax cables provided with the eddy current
should be symmetrical around the baseline. compensation set for connecting the flux meter and
the gradient chain interface (GCI) to minimize the
• Slope1_Integr: 0 +20 uVs (Sens. switch: 50 mV/A) noise. Use the thicker cables for the signals and the
• Slope2_Integr: 0 +20 uVs (Sens. switch: 50 mV/A) thinner cable for the Reset signal.

• Max. Peak in Slope: <95 mV (Sens. switch: 50 mV/A)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 157 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Eddy Current Compensation, continued
Setup, continued
1. For the gradient being tested, mount the pickup coils
in the 15 cm positions.

X-Position Y-Position Z-Position

Setup for Flux Drift and Setup for Flux Drift and Setup for Flux Drift and
X-Adjustments Y-Adjustments Z-Adjustments
X X X

2
5 1
3
Y Y 1 Y
4

Z Z Z

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 158 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Eddy Current Compensation, continued
Setup, continued Input 1
Flux Meter
Reset
15 cm DGBX3
2. Position the holder and the pickup coils on the inner 15 cm
Pickup Coils Output 2
DGAX5
Output 1
bed inside the magnet. Input 2 Drift 1,2 DGAX6

Magnet
Note Position it so the pickup coils are Gradient
Amplifier

symmetrically around the isocenter. The Flux Meter (Philips) Front View
pickup coil axis must always be parallel to the
Z-direction (+5o.) Integrator 1 Integrator 2 Pre-amp

3. Turn the flux meter ON.

Remote
Input Reset Manual
/Manual

4. Wait for 30 minutes for the flux meter to stabilize.

Input 1 Input 2 Reset

Drift 1 Drift 2 Gain

5. Setup the measurement using the following

drawings.
Flux Meter (Philips) Back View
Note Place a bag of sand on the holder (with the
pickup coils) to minimize signal disturbance due
to vibrations. Manually move the table into the
bore - the pickup coils stay on the bridge section. Pre-amp Integrator 2 Integrator 1

Output Output Output

Power

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 159 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Eddy Current Compensation, continued Adjust Drift
Setup, continued To adjust the drift:
6. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. 1. Disconnect the cable from the Integrator 1 output.
7. Select Enter Service Mode. 2. Connect a DMV to the Integrator 1 output using a
BNC - to - banana adapter.
8. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
3. Set the Remote/Manual flux meter switch to Manual.
9. Select Installation Procedures > Gradient
Adjustment Procedures. 4. On the flux meter, toggle the Reset switch.
10. Select ECC Adjustment Procs. Note The value being measured is the starting
value (not necessarily 0 mV). Whatever
11. Select Drift Compensation Flux Meter. An
information message displays. value displays, it should not change during
the 5 seconds it takes to complete the mea-
12. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. surement.
13. If not already selected, select Auto Scale. 5. If the value changes:
The signal from both pickup coils displays on the a. Adjust the Integrator 1 output using the
monitor. associated potentiometer until the drift is within
specification - does not change during the 5
Important! Signal value at the start of the measurement
second measurement.
is not important. What is important is that the
value does not change during the 5 seconds b. Reset the flux meter by toggling the Reset
it takes to complete this measurement. This switch.
change is drift. Drift of both signals (during
the measurement) should be less than
+10 mV. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 160 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Eddy Current Compensation, continued Position Eddy Current Pickup Coils
Adjust Drift, continued 1. Position the pickup coil holder, with the pickup coils
mounted in the direction of the gradient being
6. If the drift is within specification:
adjusted, close to isocenter, directly on the bridge
a. Disconnect the DVM from the Integrator 1 section.
output.
Note The axis of the pickup coils is always parallel
b. Connect the cable again. to the magnet Z-axis.
7. Repeat the drift adjustment for the Integrator 2 2. Select Position Eddy Current Pickup Coils.
output.
An information message appears.
8. If the drift of both integrators are within specification:
3. Click [PROCEED].
a. Verify both signal cables are connected to the
4. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
flux meter.
5. Enter the new gradient channel (Z).
b. Set the flux meter Remote/Manual switch to
Remote. Note Actual channel must be Z for all gradient
orientations.
c. Inspect both signals on the monitor.
6. Press <ENTER>.
d. If one or both of the channels still shows drift
outside specification, repeat the Adjust Drift 7. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
procedure until drift remains within specification.
9. Enter Exit to stop the measurement.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 161 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Eddy Current Compensation, continued If the pickup coil holder is too far in the positive Z
direction, the average signal in the monitoring display
Position Eddy Current Pickup Coils, continued
shows a negative voltage. See the figure below.
8. Move the pickup coil holder until the orientation Coil Holder at +12 cm in Z-direction
displays Correct.
Note The coil holder is now within 1 cm.
• If the pickup coils are positioned for the X/Y
gradient adjustment, ignore the distance
displayed for the Z orientation.
• If the pickup coils are positioned for the Z
gradient, ignore the distance displayed for the X/
Y orientation.
It is possible to view the average signal in the monitoring
display for positioning the pickup coil holder. The signal
can be viewed from the magnet display.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 162 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Eddy Current Compensation, continued If the pickup coil holder is correctly positioned, the
average signal in the monitoring is 0 V +0.4 V.
Position Eddy Current Pickup Coils, continued
Coil Holder at Correct Position
If the pickup coil holder is too far in the negative Z
direction, the average signal in the monitoring display
shows a positive voltage. See the figure below.
Coil Holder at -11 cm in Z-direction

9. Once positioned correctly, click [EXIT].

10. Mark the position of the pickup coil holder on the
bridge section to reduce the positioning time for the
other gradient orientations.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 163 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Eddy Current Compensation, continued 8. Position the pickup coils for the Y gradient
orientation.
Adjust Eddy Current
1. Verify the magnet cold head has been operational for 9. Repeat the Eddy Current Compensation procedure
at least two days. This will ensure the time constants for the Y orientation.
of the eddy current signal stable. 10. Position the pickup coils for the Z gradient
2. Verify the gradient orientation is correct. orientation.

3. Verify the BDAS and gradient amplifier have been 11. Repeat the Eddy Current Compensation procedure
switched ON for a minimum of 30 minutes. for the Z orientation.

4. Verify the RF amplifier is switched ON. 12. Complete the Gradient Chain Verification
procedure.
5. Verify the gain, offset, settling and dual delay (if
applicable) have been adjusted. 13. Complete the Gradient Boost Mode Adjustment
procedure.
6. Verify the offset drift of the flux meter is within
specification.
7. Verify the pickup coils have been properly
positioned.
Note When completed, the eddy current signal
displays and the message "Eddy Current
Filters Calibrated Successfully"
appears in the Scan Control window.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 164 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Gradient Chain Verification 8. Select Gradient Strength and Slope Test
(Standard).
This test generates waveforms which are increased
step-by-step. An abort will occur, because the gradient An information screen displays.
strength and slope are increased to outside specification
9. To start, click [PROCEED].
during the verification process. The test does not fail as
long as the abort occurs outside the working area. 10. For Intera Nova Dual:
1. Logon as MRService. a. Select Gradient Strength and Slope Test
(Parallel).
2. In the MR Boot Configuration Manager, select
Intera. Press Start. An information screen displays.
3. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. b. To start, click [PROCEED].
4. Select Enter Service Mode.
5. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
6. Select Installation Procedures > Gradient
Adjustment Procedures.
7. Select Gradient Chain Verification.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 165 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Gradient Boost Mode Adjustment 7. Select Gradient Boost Mode Adjustment.
The following procedure copies normal mode gradient An information screen displays.
amplifier settings to boost mode.
8. Enter: yes.
Note Since the gain and offset may differ slightly from
9. Enter: exit.
the normal mode, they are both automatically
adjusted following the Copy command. For the standard mode and parallel mode, the
automatic gain and offset adjustment starts
1. Logon as MRService.
successfully. Once done, an MRL displays.
2. In the MR Boot Configuration Manager, select
10. To continue, click [PROCEED].
Intera. Press Start.
3. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
4. Select Enter Service Mode.
5. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
6. Select Installation Procedures > Gradient
Adjustment Procedures.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 166 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Channel Delay and Shimming Eddy Current Analysis
1. Verify the gradient cabinet has been switched ON for The procedure analyzes the effects of eddy current on
a minimum of 15 minutes. the linear shim currents (generated by the gradients).
2. Complete the Start ASW procedure. Note For the Nova Dual and Quasar Dual, this test is
also performed in parallel mode.
3. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
1. Verify the gradient cabinet has been switched ON for
4. Select Enter Service Mode.
a minimum of 15 minutes.
5. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
2. Complete the Start ASW procedure.
6. Select Installation Procedures > Gradient
3. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
Parameters Determination.
4. Select Enter Service Mode.
7. Select Channel Delay and Shimming.
5. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
8. Follow the prompts/instructions displayed on the
screen. 6. Select Installation Procedures > Gradient
Parameters Determination.
9. To start the measurements, click [PROCEED].
7. Select Eddy Current Analysis.
Channel delay and shimming proceed automatically.
8. Follow the prompts/instructions displayed on the
screen.
9. To start the measurements, click [PROCEED].

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 167 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R7.x-
R9.x) Sagittal Transverse

Check X & Y Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment

1. Logon as Gyroscan.
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
3. Enter Service Mode.
4. Select Perform IQP/EST Measurements >
Analysis Principle: IQP.
5. Select XX Misc > GA_XY (scan name: ADJ:XY). 7. Connect the coil to one of the surface coil
connectors.
6. Position the head performance phantom (with the
holder) for transversal scans in the head coil. 8. Move the head coil to magnet isocenter using the
light visor and pressing <Travel to Scan-plane>.
9. To start the batch, click [PROCEED] twice.
Note During the batch, SCOUT scans and
GA1:X_grad and GA2:Y_grad scans are
automatically performed.
10. Wait for the scans to complete before proceeding.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 168 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R7.x- Modify X & Y Grad. Gain Adjust Parameters
R9.x), continued If both measured values are within specification,
Evaluate X & Y Scans continue to Check Z Gradient Strength Fine
1. Once the scans have finished, select the SPT icon. Adjustment. If either are not within specification, use the
following procedure to calculate the new gradient gain
2. Select Service Mode > IQ Parameter/Data adjust parameters.
Evaluation Tools.
1. Select Scan Utilities > Enter Service Mode.
3. Select Spatial Linearity Measurements >
2. Select System Tuning > Tuned Hardware
Examination.
Parameters.
4. Select Examination GRAD_ADJ > Select Scan:
3. Use the formula below to calculate the new value
GA1:X_grad.
(1 mm = 0.66%).
5. Select Image: Slice 1 SE_M.
% New = (150 - Measured Size) x 0.66%.
6. Select Philips Quality Procedure.
4. Modify the parameters for gradient gain adjust X & Y
7. Record the value: Size Vertical. to the calculated values.
Note Specification: 149.5 mm < Size < 150.5 mm. Note Value Range: -4.10% - +4.09%
8. Select Scan: GA2:Y_grad. 5. Enter a reason for changing the parameters and
select Store to save the changes.
9. Select Image: Slide 1 SE_M.
6. Complete the Check X & Y Gradient Strength Fine
10. Select Philips Quality Procedure.
Adjustment procedure.
11. Record the value: Size Horizontal.
7. Complete the Evaluate X & Y Scans procedure.
Note Specification: 149.5 mm < Size < 150.5 mm.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 169 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R7.x- 5. Select XX Misc > GA_Z (scan name: ADJ:Z).
R9.x), continued 6. Position the head performance phantom (with the
Check Z Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment holder) for coronal scans in the head coil.
Important! Sites with an ACR phantom should use it for Coronal
the Z-gradient calibration to ensure slices
intersect the phantom at the proper location.
o
45 11
Wedges

N
o
s
e
7. Connect the coil to one of the surface coil
45
o
1
connectors.
Wedges
Chin 8. Move the head coil to magnet isocenter using the
For sites without an ACR phantom, complete the light visor and pressing <Travel to Scan-plane>.
following procedure. 9. To start the batch, click [PROCEED] twice.
1. Logon as Gyroscan. Note SCOUT scans and GA1:Z_grad scans are
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. automatically performed.
3. Enter Service Mode. 10. Wait for the scans to complete before proceeding.
4. Select Perform IQP/EST Measurements >
Analysis Principle: IQP.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 170 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R7.x- Modify Z Grad. Gain Adjust Parameters
R9.x), continued If Z gradient value is not within specification, complete
Evaluate Z Scan the following procedure.
1. Once the scans have finished, select the SPT icon. 1. Select Scan Utilities > Enter Service Mode.
2. Select Service Mode > IQ Parameter/Data 2. Select System Tuning > Tuned Hardware
Evaluation Tools. Parameters.
3. Select Spatial Linearity Measurements > 3. Use the formula below to calculate the new value
Examination. (1 mm = 0.66%).
4. Select Examination GRAD_ADJ > Select Scan: % New = (150 - Measured Size) x 0.66%.
GA1:Z_grad.
4. Modify the parameters for gradient gain adjust Z to
5. Select Image: Slice 3 SE_M. the calculated value.
6. Select Philips Quality Procedure. Note Value Range: -4.10% - +4.09%
7. Record the value: Size Vertical. 5. Enter a reason for changing the parameters and
select Store to save the changes.
Note Specification: 149.5 mm < Size < 150.5 mm.
6. Complete the Check Z Gradient Strength Fine
Adjustment procedure.
7. Complete the Evaluate Z Scan procedure.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 171 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R10.x- 11. Select the Scout from the scan list and click
R11.x) [DELETE]. Then, select the second scan from the
1. Login as MRService using Manager or Manager1 scan list that appears.
as the password. 12. Change the following parameters:
2. From the popup window, select Intera > Start. • TE: 30
3. Once the application loads, select Patient > New • TR: 500
Exam.
• Slices: 3
4. Enter a name, registration ID, date of birth, sex, and
13. Place the slices through the center of the image.
patient weight (90). Click [PROCEED].
14. Change the foldover direction to AP for the
5. From the toolbar in the upper left part of the screen,
select System. Select Scan Definition Context and X-gradient.
Scan List. 15. Change the foldover direction to LR for the
Y-gradient.
6. Select Anatomy and Phantom Studies.
7. Select the first scan (a survey). The click on Select 16. Click [PROCEED] and start the scan.
in the upper right part of the window.
8. Click [START].
9. To bring the survey image to the screen, click on the
[+] button (just below the HC Case icon.
10. At the bottom of the screen, click [HIDE].

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 172 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R10.x- 22. For the Z-gradient, place the phantom/holder in the
R11.x), continued coronal position and repeat the scan procedure with
17. When the scan completes: the foldover set to FH.

a. Click the [+] button. Note If the site has an ACR phantom, use it to cal-
ibrate the Z-gradient. Ensure that, on the
b. Click on the screen Setup button. ACR T1, scan slices one and eleven inter-
c. Select 1x1 image and Hide. sect the phantom in the appropriate place.
o
18. To display the dark image with the rows of white 45
Wedges
11
pins, use the vertical slide bar to the right of the [+]
button.
N
19. Right-click on the image. Select -Distance/Profile. o
s
20. Position the cursor over the center of the left-most e
(Y-gradient) or top pin (X-gradient) in the center row/
column and press and hold the left mouse button. o
45 1
Wedges
21. Drag the mouse over the pin farthest to the right or Chin
bottom and click the left mouse button. The distance
will be displayed.
Note The appropriate distance is 15.0 cm +0.5 cm.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 173 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R10.x- h. Use the following formula to calculate the new
R11.x), continued value: New Value = [(150 - Measured Size) *
23. To adjust the gradient size: 0.66] +current value.

a. Hide any open windows. Note An adjustment of 0.66 = 1 mm change in

phantom size.
b. Click on the dropdown arrow for Patient Name
24. Enter the new value and click [PROCEED].
and select another patient.
25. If prompted for a reason for making the change,
Note You can also select the three dots to
enter a reason and click [YES].
place the system into Viewing Mode.
26. Press <ENTER> twice and click [PROCEED].
c. In the lower left part of the screen, click [SCAN
CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. 27. Repeat the scans and verify the correct size.
d. Select Service Mode (password = Service).
e. Select System Tuning (password = System).
f. Select Tuned Hardware Parameters.
g. Page backwards until the Gradient Gain Adjust
lines are displayed. Click on the line to adjust,
then press <ENTER> to open the line.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 174 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274

Select one of the following topics: Start ASW
• Start ASW 1. To start ASW for R5.x to R9.x:
• Offset Check a. Logon as Gyroscan.
• Gradient Gain (R7.x-9.x) 2. To start ASW for R10.x and above:
• Gain & Offset (R10.x-R11.x) a. Logon as MRService and enter the case-
sensitive password.
• Settling Adjustment
b. From the MR Boot Configuration Manager, select
• Dual Delay Adjustment (PT6000/Intera Master)
Intera and press Start.
• Eddy Current Compensation
c. For R11, select System > Scan Definition
• Determine Gradient Parameters Context > Scan List.
• Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R7.x-R9.x)
• Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R10.x-R11.x)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 175 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Offset Check 7. For Intera 1.0T Power and Intera 1.5T Power,
continue to step 8.
The following procedure apply to the Intera 1.0T Power
and Intera 1.5T Power and Master systems. - or -
This procedure measures the offset values for the For Intera 1.5T Master, go to step 9.
Copley 274 amplifiers (Enabled Mode).
8. For Intera 1.0T Power and Intera 1.5T Power:
1. Logon as Gyroscan. (See R7.x-9.x or R10.x-11.x.)
a. Select Gradient controller gain/offset test. An
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. information screen displays.
3. Enter Service Mode. Use service as the password. b. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
4. Select System Tuning using system as the When the test completes, a MRL displays.
password. c. Verify the values are within limits.
5. Select System Tuning Tools > Installation d. Click [PROCEED].
Procedures.
e. Click [CANCEL] twice.
6. Select Gradient Chain (274) Procedures.
f. Troubleshoot the gradient amplifier if the results
are not within specification.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 176 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Offset Check, continued Gradient Gain (R7.x-9.x)
9. For Intera 1.5T Master: PT1000A, PT3000 & Intera Power
a. Select Master tests: Controller gain/offset. An This procedure checks/adjusts the gain setting for the
information screen displays. Copley 274 gradient amplifier(s). It uses a demand signal
that should generate a coil current of 240 A +3.6 A in
b. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. each channel. Three axis currents are measured, and
When the test completes, a MRL displays. the results displayed on the console monitor.
c. Verify the values are within limits. The RF door must be closed during this procedure.
d. Click [PROCEED]. 1. Verify the RF door is closed.
e. Select Slave tests: Controller gain/offset. 2. Logon as Gyroscan. (See R7.x-9.x or R10.x-11.x.)
f. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. 3. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
When the test completes, a MRL displays.
4. Enter Service Mode.
g. Verify the values are within limits.
5. Select System Tuning.
h. Click [PROCEED].
6. Select System Tuning Tools > Installation
i. Click [CANCEL] twice. Procedures > Gradient Adjustment Procedures.
j. Troubleshoot the gradient ampler if the results
are not within specification.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 177 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Gradient Gain (R7.x-R9.x), continued
Potentiometer Locations - Copley 274 Controller
PT1000A, PT3000 & Intera Power, continued
OFFS2
7. Select Gradient Adjustment Procedures.
HFEQ1 BW2 Current Monitor
8. Select Gradient Current Adjustment. An
BW1
information screen displays. HFEQ2
OFFS1
OFFS3
9. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. I LIM
Gradient current information displays on the console OFFS4
monitor.
10. Use the Gain1 potentiometer to adjust the currents
for the controllers. Make the adjustments, as close Up

as possible to 240 A.
11. When the adjustments are within the limits, type exit.
Press <ENTER>. Address Down

12. To exit the Gradient Adjustment Procedures menu,

click [CANCEL] twice. GAIN1

DLY1 GAIN4 Voltage Monitor

TC1
GAIN3
GAIN2 TC2
DLY2
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 178 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Gradient Gain (R7.x-R9.x), continued 8. Select Gradient Current Adjustment. An
information screen displays.
PT6000 & Intera Master
This procedure checks/adjusts the gain setting for the 9. Follow the directions (messages) displayed on the
Copley 274 gradient amplifier(s). It uses a demand signal screen.
that should generate a coil current of 240 A +3.6 A in 10. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
each channel. Six axis currents are measured, and the Gradient current information displays on the console
results displayed on the console monitor. monitor.
The RF door must be closed during this procedure. 11. Use the Gain2 potentiometer to adjust the currents to
1. Verify the RF door is closed. as close to 240 A as possible. See Potentiometer
Locations - Copley 274 Controller.
2. Logon as Gyroscan. (See R7.x-9.x or R10.x-11.x.)
12. When the adjustments are within the limits, type exit.
3. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. Press <ENTER>.
4. Enter Service Mode. 13. To exit the Gradient Adjustment Procedures menu,
5. Select System Tuning. click [CANCEL] twice.

6. Select System Tuning Tools > Installation

Procedures.
7. Select Gradient Adjustment Procedures.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 179 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Gain & Offset (R10.x-R11.x) 10. Use the Gain1 potentiometer to adjust the gain. See
Potentiometer Locations - Copley 274 Controller.
This procedure checks/adjusts the gain/offset settings of
the gradient amplifier. The offset and gain for each The gain values must be adjusted to 70 A/V +1 A/V.
channel is calculated, and the offsets measured are 11. Use the OFFS1 potentiometer to adjust the offset.
displayed. See Potentiometer Locations - Copley 274
Controller. The offset values must be adjusted to
Note During the measurement, the eddy current com-
pensation filters are turned OFF. 0 A +0.5 A.
Gain/Offset for Single-mode System
Intera Power
The RF door must be closed during this procedure.
1. Verify the RF door is closed.
2. Logon as Gyroscan. (See R7.x-9.x or R10.x-11.x.)
3. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
4. Enter Service Mode.
5. Select System Tuning.
6. Select System Tuning Tools > Installation 12. When the adjustments are within the limits, type exit.
Procedures. Press <ENTER>.
7. Select Gradient Adjustment Procedures. 13. To exit the Gradient Adjustment Procedures menu,
8. Select Gradient Ampl. Gain/Offset Adjustment. click [CANCEL] twice.
An information screen displays.
9. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 180 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Gain & Offset (R10.x-R11.x), continued Potentiometer Locations - Copley 274 Controller.
The offset values must be adjusted to 0 A +0.5 A.
Intera Master
The RF door must be closed during this procedure. Important! Adjust the output current of the master axis
and the slave axis (X, Y, Z) as close as possi-
1. Verify the RF door is closed. ble to the same level of the output current.
Logon as Gyroscan. (See R7.x-9.x or R10.x-11.x.) This makes it easier to adjust the settling and
dual delay.
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
Adjusted Gain/Offset
3. Enter Service Mode.
4. Select System Tuning.
5. Select System Tuning Tools > Installation
procedures > Gradient Adjustment Procedures.
6. Select Gradient Ampl. Gain/Offset Adjustment.
An information screen displays.
7. Click [PROCEED]. Gradient current information
displays on the console monitor.
8. Use the Gain2 potentiometer to adjust the gains in
10. When the adjustments are within the limits, type exit.
the master rack and the slave rack. See
Press <ENTER>.
Potentiometer Locations - Copley 274 Controller.
The gain values must be adjusted to 70 A/V +1 A/V. 11. To exit the Gradient Adjustment Procedures menu,
click [CANCEL] twice.
9. Use the OFFS2 potentiometer to adjust the offset in
the master rack and the slave rack. See
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 181 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Settling Adjustment
PT1000A Caution Hearing protection should be worn, since
the Copley 274 can generate significant
Check the following potentiometers on the X, Y and Z
noise.
Copley 274 controllers.
Important! For initial installation, adjust the pots as 1. For R9.x and lower:
indicated below. For typical maintenance, a. Position the monitor/LCD screen inside the
leave the pots in their current positions. Technical Room, close to the gradient amplifier.
• DLY2: Fully clockwise (20 turns pot; no end stop) b. Extend mouse/keyboard cables, so the system
• BW2: Fully clockwise (20 turns pot; no end stop) can be operated from the Technical Room.

• TC2: Fully clockwise (20 turns pot; no end stop) - or -

• HFEQ2: Fully clockwise (20 turns pot; no end stop) For R10.x and above, continue to step 2.

See Potentiometer Locations - Copley 274 2. Logon as Gyroscan.

Controller. See Philips Intera Software Logins (R7.x-R9.x) or
PT3000, Inter Power or PT6000/Intera Master Intera Software Logins (R10.x-R11.x).
This procedure monitors the gradient current, along with 3. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
the difference between the measured gradient current
4. Enter Service Mode.
value and a reference gradient current curve.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 182 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Settling Adjustment, continued 12. Verify the following options are set as indicated:
PT3000, Inter Power or PT6000/Intera Master, • Monitoring Mode: Both
continued
• Raw Data File Logging: No
5. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
• Identifier of Signal 1: Tr
6. Select Installation Procedures.
• Sig 1 - horizontal min: 0
7. Select Gradient Adjustment Procedures.
• Sig 1 - horizontal max: 2.1
8. Select Settling Adjustment. An information screen
will display. • Sig 1 - vertical min: 98.0
9. Follow the instructions on the screen. • Sig 1 - vertical max: 101.0
10. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. • Sig 1 - marker line: No
Two signals display: Note It is not possible to change settings for signal
2 at this point.
• Real Gradient Response (upper signal)
13. Click [PROCEED].
• Difference Signal (lower signal)
14. To zoom in on a part of the signal, drag the mouse to
11. Click [DISPLAY GRAD]. Click [MOD DISPLAY]. define an area over the part of the signal of interest,
toggle the [AUTOSCALE] button ON/OFF.
Note To return to the original signal, click the
[RESET] button.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 183 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Settling Adjustment, continued 3. Using potentiometers TC1 and BW1, adjust the
difference signal.
PT3000, Inter Power or PT6000/Intera Master,
continued Typical view of properly adjusted settling for all three gradients.
15. Depending on the configuration, continue to Settling
PT3000/Intera Power (below) or Settling PT6000/
Intera Master.
Settling PT3000/Intera Power
1. Set the X (Y, Z) controller potentiometers to their
initial position.
Important! For initial installation, adjust the pots as
indicated below. For typical maintenance,
leave the pots in their current positions.
Note All are 20 turns pots, no end stops.
• ILIM: Fully clockwise Note Review the adjustment information on the follow-
ing page before continuing to step 4.
• DLY1: Fully counter-clockwise
• HFEQ1: Fully clockwise, then 2 turns counter-
clockwise
• TC1: Fully clockwise
• BW1: Fully clockwise
2. To start the measurement, enter X (Y, Z).
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 184 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Settling Adjustment, continued 4. Verify the real signal is like the upper signal (more or
less). If not, use HFEQ1 to adjust the real signal like
Settling PT3000/Intera Power, continued
the upper signal (more or less).
Adjustment Information
Note Keep the difference signal within spec with
a. Turn BW1 counter-clockwise to adjust the flat line the potentiometers BW1 and TC1.
to almost 0%, while other signal parts increase.
Try to keep the negative peak in the negative 5. If X settling is now within specification, repeat this
zone. Work in half-steps and stay in the negative procedure (Settling PT3000/Intera Power) by
zone. entering "Y" or "Z".

b. Turn TC1 counter-clockwise (slightly) until the 6. Once all three axes are properly adjusted, type: exit
corresponding other part of the signal is halved. and press <ENTER>.
The "BW1-affected" part of the signal increases, 7. The final settling adjustment check will check each
but will stay below the starting value. channel successively. Press <ENTER> if an error
c. Using potentiometers BW1 and TC1, adjust the message appears.
signal further down using half-steps, until both The final check continues until the next error
signal parts are smaller than 0.10%. appears or all of the channels are done. When the
d. Try to get the signal within half-spec. If you Gradient Adjustment Procedures menu appears, the
cannot meet specification, adjust HFEQ1 one program is ready.
turn counter-clockwise and begin with step "a" 8. If no error message appears, the adjustment was
again. successfully completed and an MRL displays. If an
Note Refer to the text on the screen for the error appears, repeat the adjustment for the channel
actual values. The values display in the that failed.
line starting with "Small Spec."
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 185 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Settling Adjustment, continued 4. Using potentiometers TC2 and BW2, adjust the
difference signal.
Settling PT6000/Intera Master
1. Set the X (Y, Z) controller potentiometers to their Typical view of properly adjusted settling for all three gradients.
initial position on the master and slave cabinets.
Note All are 20 turns pots, no end stops.
• ILIM: Fully clockwise
• DLY2: Fully counter-clockwise
• HFEQ2: Fully clockwise, then 2 turns counter-
clockwise
• TC2: Fully clockwise
• BW2: Fully clockwise
2. To start the measurement, enter X (Y, Z).
Note Review the adjustment information on the follow-
3. Enter master. ing page before continuing to step 5.
Note Adjustments will now be completed on the X
Master Copley 274 Controller.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 186 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Settling Adjustment, continued 5. Verify the real signal is like the upper signal (more or
less). If not, use HFEQ2 to adjust the real signal like
Settling PT6000/Intera Master, continued
the upper signal (more or less).
Adjustment Information
Note Keep the difference signal within spec with
a. Turn BW2 counter-clockwise to adjust the flat line the potentiometers BW2 and TC2.
to almost 0%, while other signal parts increase.
Try to keep the negative peak in the negative 6. If X settling is now within specification, repeat this
zone. Work in half-steps and stay in the negative procedure (Settling PT6000/Intera Master) for the
zone. X slave cabinet controller.

b. Turn TC2 counter-clockwise (slightly) until the 7. Repeat this procedure for the Y master/slave and the
corresponding other part of the signal is halved. Z master/slave. Once all three master/slaves are
The "BW1-affected" part of the signal increases, properly adjusted, enter exit.
but will stay below the starting value. 8. The final settling adjustment check will check each
c. Using potentiometers BW2 and TC2, adjust the channel successively. Press <ENTER> if an error
signal further down using half-steps, until both message appears.
signal parts are smaller than 0.10%. The final check continues until the next error
d. Try to get the signal within half-spec. If you appears or all of the channels are done. When the
cannot meet specification, adjust HFEQ2 one Gradient Adjustment Procedures menu appears, the
turn counter-clockwise and begin with step "a" program is ready.
again. 9. If no error message appears, the adjustment was
Note Refer to the text on the screen for the successfully completed and an MRL displays. If an
actual values. The values display in the error appears, repeat the adjustment for the channel
line starting with "Small Spec." that failed.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 187 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Dual Delay Adjustment (PT6000/Intera Master) Setup
The following procedure applies only to the Intera 1.5T
system. DANGER 420 V is present inside the amplifier
cabinet(s), and on connections to the
This procedure matches slave cabinet output to master gradient coil and the system filter box.
cabinet output by measuring the difference in output
current using a Dual Mode Adjustment Tool, a very Verify AC power is turned OFF for 2
accurate dual current probe. minutes (min.) before continuing.

The current difference can be minimized by adjusting Verify the supply capacitors have
Gain2 and DLY2 potentiometers on the slave cabinet, discharged to < 2.0 V.
and on the master cabinet if necessary.
1. Place the monitor/LCD inside the Technical Room,
Prerequisites near the gradient amplifier.
• Obtain a Dual Mode Adjustment Tool (DMAT) 2. Extend the mouse/keyboard cables to the system
(Part# 8122 102 6441). Part/service available through can be operated from the Technical Room.
a third party.
• Gradient amplifier offset must be within specification. Caution Hearing protection should be worn, since
the Copley 274 can generate significant
• Adjust gradient current. noise.
• Adjust gradient settling.
• Verify gradient correction is correct.
• DMAT offset must be adjusted and stable for a
minimum of 15 minutes.
Note Keep the unit switched ON. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 188 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Dual Delay Adjustment (PT6000/Intera 9. On top of the DMAT, adjust the potentiometer until
Master), continued the offset value of the probe is 0 mV +2 mV
(sensitivity set to 200 mV/A).
Setup, continued
3. Before starting any adjustment, check the Caution 420 V is present on the DMAT external
mechanical alignment of the sensitivity switch knob cables. Verify all connections are
on the DMAT buy turning it to all possible positions. insulated before turning the gradient
4. Inside the MDE (Main Distribution Extension), turn amplifier ON.
the gradient amplifiers OFF.
5. Connect the DMAT cables to a 220 V / 230 V mains
supply that is not switched off together with the
gradient amplifier (for example, use the supply in the
NTDAC).
6. Move the sensitivity switch to position 200 mV/A.
7. Verify the gradient cables coming out of the current
probe are Open (cable ends do not touch each
other).
8. On the coax output cable, use a DVM to measure
the voltage.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 189 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Dual Delay Adjustment (PT6000/Intera 10. Using the diagram on the left, connect the current
Master), continued probe device in the X-chain.
Setup, continued a. On the master gradient amplifier, disconnect the
Dual Mode Adjustment Tool Connections gradient cables from X+.
b. Connect the cable (green, labeled master+++) to
X+ in the master gradient amplifier.
220 V / 230 V (E.g., NTDAC)

274 Slave
DIBX55
DFEC3 c. Move the rubber sleeve (delivered) over the
cable (green, labeled master---) and connect this
274 Master cable to the gradient cables, leading to x-coil
X+ X- X+ X- (cables are disconnected in step a).
d. To prevent shorts to the cabinet, shift the sleeve
across the newly made connection.
Power
Pre-amp e. Adjust the test cables, so the master gradient
Slave+++ Master---
amplifier cabinet’s rear door can be closed. Close
Hall Det.
the door.
Slave---
Ferrite Corn
Master+++
f. On the slave gradient amplifier, disconnect the
gradient cables from X+.
DMAT

XB XA

Gradient Coil

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 190 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Dual Delay Adjustment (PT6000/Intera 12. Logon as Gyroscan.
Master), continued See Philips Intera Software Logins (R7.x-R9.x) or
Setup, continued Intera Software Logins (R10.x-R11.x).
g. Connect the cable (blue, labeled slave+++) to X+ 13. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
in the slave gradient amplifier.
14. Enter Service Mode.
h. Move the rubber sleeve (delivered) over the
cable (blue, labeled slave---) and connect this 15. Select System Tuning.
cable to the gradient cables, leading to x-coil 16. Select System Tuning Tools > Installation
(cables are disconnected in step f). Procedures.
i. To prevent shorts to the cabinet, shift the sleeve 17. Select Gradient Adjustment Procedures.
across the newly made connection.
18. Select Dual Delay Adjustment. An information
j. Adjust the test cables, so the slave gradient screen will display.
amplifier cabinet’s rear door can be closed. Close
the door. 19. Click [PROCEED].

k. Connect the Dual Mode Adjustment Tool output 20. Verify GCA: channel is set to X.
BNC cable to DIBX55 at the gradient interface 21. Verify the DMAT has been switched ON for a
controller board. minimum of 15 minutes before continuing.
11. Turn ON the gradient amplifier in the MDE. After
approximately 10 seconds, the gradient amplifier
cabinets are enabled.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 191 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Dual Delay Adjustment (PT6000/Intera Signals measured at 0.5, 3.0 and 5.5 ms should have the
Master), continued same amplitude, though it is normal to see some small
differences (=gain mismatch).
Pre-adjustment Check
Check if an adjustment is required before starting to Specification:
adjust the slave amplifiers. • Gain Mismatch < 10 mV (Sens. Switch: 50 mV/A)
1. Place the DMAT Sensitivity switch to position Some peaks will be visible; peaks have a typical
50 mV/A. amplitude < 60 mV and should be symmetrical around
2. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. the baseline.

3. If not already done, switch on the grid in the monitor Specifications:

display and compare the measure signal with the • Slope1_integr: 0 +6 uVs (Sens. Switch: 50 mV/A)
sample below.
• Slope2_integr: 0 +6 uVs (Sens. Switch: 50 mV/A)
(mV)
• Max. Peak in Slope: <95 mV
100
(Sens. Switch: 50 mV/A)
50

-50

-100
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0

(ms) Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 192 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Dual Delay Adjustment (PT6000/Intera 5. Adjust the Slope1 Integr. and the Max. Peak values.
Master), continued • Try to reduce the Slope1 Integr. Ensure the
Adjustment signal is symmetrical around the baseline.
1. Place the DMAT Sensitivity switch to position • Differences are caused by slave settling
100 mV/A. behavior.
Note The gain mismatch (= amplitude at 0.5, 3.0 • Start the adjustment with the probe Sensitivity
and 5.5 ms) should be visible. Switch in a position showing the complete pulse
Important! Do not use automatic display scaling; use the (10 mV/A to 50 mV/A). The sensitivity can be
Sensitivity Switch on the current probe to increased during the adjustment.
change the amplitude of the monitor signal. Final Monitor Signal
(mV)
2. Adjust the slave cabinet Gain2 potentiometer, so the
signal has the same amplitude at 0.5, 3.0 and 100

5.5 ms.
50
Note Gain mismatch is then minimal.
3. Increase the sensitivity of the current probe and 0
continue the adjustment.
4. Repeat the adjustment until a sensitivity of 50 mV/A -50

is attained and the gain mismatch is <10 mV

(Sens. Switch 50: mV/A). -100
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0

(ms)

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 193 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Dual Delay Adjustment (PT6000/Intera 7. If this continues to be unsuccessful, return to the
Master), continued Settling Adjustment procedure, verify the adjustment
and attempt to improve the setting.
Adjustment, continued
6. Final adjustment should be done with the switch in Note Typical peak (approx.) 60 mV
position 50 mV/A. (Sens. Switch: 50 mV/A).

a. Turn the slave controller DLY2 potentiometer Specifications:

clockwise to start the adjustment. • Gain Mismatch < 10 mV (Sens. Switch: 50 mV/A)
b. If the signal cannot be optimized per the following • Slope1_integr: 0 +6 uVs (Sens. Switch: 50 mV/A)
drawing, turn the delay potentiometer fully
counter-clockwise to its start position. • Slope2_integr: 0 +6 uVs (Sens. Switch: 50 mV/A)

c. Change the setting of the HFEQ2 potentiometer • Max. Peak in Slope: <95 mV
by turning it one turn counter-clockwise. (Sens. Switch: 50 mV/A)

d. Retry optimizing the signal by turning the DLY2 8. Once the preceding specifications are within
potentiometer clockwise at the slave controller. specification, enter exit to stop the measurement.

e. If this is unsuccessful, attempt the adjustment at 9. Turn the gradient amplifier in the MDE OFF.
the master controller. 10. Disconnect the DMAT and reconnect the gradient
coil cables to the gradient amplifier.
11. Repeat the adjustment for the Y and Z gradients.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 194 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Eddy Current Compensation 9. Click [MOD DISPLAY].
Setup 10. Check/change the following values.
1. Position the pickup coil holder on the bridge section,
close to the isocenter. Value Details

Note Place the pickup coils mounted in the Monitoring Mode Both
direction of the gradient being tested. The Raw Data File Logging No
pickup coils axis is always parallel to the
Identifier of Signal 1 Tr
magnet Z-axis.
Sig 1: Horizontal Min. 1.0
2. On the flux meter, set the Remove/Manual switch to
Remote. Sig 1: Horizontal Max. 4990

Note The meter must be ON for a minimum of Sig 1: Vertical Min. -0.1
thirty minutes before adjusting the offset drift Sig 1: Vertical Max. 0.1
of the flux meter. Sig 1: Marker Line No
3. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
Note The table of values continues on the following
4. Select Enter Service Mode. page.
5. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
6. Select Installation Procedures > Gradient
Adjustment Procedures.
7. Select Drift Compensation Flux Meter. An
information message displays.
8. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 195 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Eddy Current Compensation, continued Adjust Drift
Setup, continued To adjust the drift:
1. Disconnect the cable from the Integrator 1 output.
Value Details
2. Connect a DMV to the Integrator 1 output using a
Identifier of Signal 2 Ti BNC - to - banana adapter.
Sig 2: Horizontal Min. 1.0
3. Set the Remote/Manual flux meter switch to Manual.
Sig 2: Horizontal Max. 4990
4. On the flux meter, toggle the Reset switch.
Sig 2: Vertical Min. -0.1
Note The value being measured is the starting
Sig 2: Vertical Max. 0.1 value (not necessarily 0 mV). Whatever
Sig 2: Marker Line No value displays, it should not change during
the 5 seconds it takes to complete the mea-
11. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. surement.
12. Click [DISPLAY GRID]. 5. If the value changes:
13. Click [DISPLAY MIN/MAX]. a. Adjust the Integrator 1 output using the
Important! Signal value at the start of the measurement associated potentiometer until the drift is within
specification - does not change during the 5
is not important. What is important is that the
second measurement.
value does not change during the 5 seconds
it takes to complete this measurement. This b. Reset the flux meter by toggling the Reset
change is drift. Drift of both signals (during switch.
the measurement) should be less than
+10 mV.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 196 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Eddy Current Compensation, continued Position Eddy Current Pickup Coils
Adjust Drift, continued 1. Position the pickup coil holder on the bridge section,
close to the isocenter.
6. If the drift is within specification:
Note Place the pickup coils mounted in the
a. Disconnect the DVM from the Integrator 1
output. direction of the gradient being tested. The
pickup coils axis is always parallel to the
b. Connect the cable again. magnet Z-axis.
7. Repeat the drift adjustment for the Integrator 2 2. Select Position Eddy Current Pickup Coils.
output.
An information message appears.
8. If the drift of both integrators are within specification:
3. Click [PROCEED].
a. Verify both signal cables are connected to the
4. Select gradient coil Z.
flux meter.
5. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
b. Set the flux meter Remote/Manual switch to
Automatic.
c. Inspect both signals on the monitor.
d. If one or both of the channels still shows drift
outside specification, repeat the Adjust Drift
procedure until drift remains within specification.
9. Click [STOP SCAN] to stop the measurement.
Important! Check/adjust the offset drift several times
during the eddy current adjustment,
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 197 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Eddy Current Compensation, continued Value Details
Position Eddy Current Pickup Coils, continued Sig 2: Marker Line No
6. If the pickup coils are positioned for the X or Y
gradient adjustment, click [MOD DISPLAY] and 7. Click [PROCEED].
change/check the following values:
If the pickup coils are positioned for the X or Y
gradient adjustment, move the coil holder in the
Value Details
Z-direction until the response of the two channels is
Monitoring Mode Both -50 mV < V < +50 mV.
Raw Data File Logging No - or -
Identifier of Signal 1 Tr If the pickup coils are positioned for the Z gradient
Sig 1: Horizontal Min. 1.0 adjustment, move the coil holder in the Z-direction
until the response of the two channels is two signals
Sig 1: Horizontal Max. 150
with the same amplitude.
Sig 1: Vertical Min. -0.1
8. Click [STOP SCAN].
Sig 1: Vertical Max. 0.1
9. To minimize the time required for the other gradients,
Sig 1: Marker Line No mark the position of the pickup coil holder on the
Identifier of Signal 2 Ti bridge section.
Sig 2: Horizontal Min. 1.0
Sig 2: Horizontal Max. 150
Sig 2: Vertical Min. -0.1
Sig 2: Vertical Max. 0.1
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 198 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Eddy Current Compensation, continued 5. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
Eddy Current Reference Measurement Reference measurement is performed and the
1. Verify the pickup coils are positioned symmetrically maximum gradient strength is measured. The
around the isocenter in the direction of the gradient program displays the results. The maximum gradient
being tested. strength should be >4.5 mT/m.

2. Select Eddy Current Reference Measurement. 6. To accept the condition, press <ENTER>.

An information message appears.

3. Click [PROCEED].
4. Change/check the following values.

Value Details

Measuring Type Reference

Gradient Coil Gradient under test. This
corresponds with the position
of the pickup coils.
Gradient Amplifier Faults Enabled

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 199 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Determine Gradient Parameters Gradient Parameters Determination (R10.x-R11.x)
Gradient Parameters Determination (R7.x-R9.x) 1. Verify the gradient cabinet has been switched ON for
a minimum of 15 minutes.
1. Verify the gradient cabinet has been switched ON for
a minimum of 15 minutes. 2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. 3. Select Enter Service Mode.
3. Select Enter Service Mode. 4. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
4. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools. 5. Select Installation Procedures > Gradient
Parameters Determination.
5. Select Installation Procedures > Gradient
Parameters Determination. 6. Select Channel Delay and Shimming.
6. When prompted to "Run all subsequent tools 7. When prompted to "Run all subsequent tools
successively?" select Yes. successively?" select Yes.
7. To start the measurements, click [PROCEED]. 8. Follow the prompts displayed on the screen to
complete the tests.
8. Follow the prompts displayed on the screen to
complete the tests. Note Channel delay and shimming are
subsequently performed automatically.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 200 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Determine Gradient Parameters, continued Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R7.x-
Eddy Current Analysis R9.x)
The procedure analyzes the effects of eddy current on Set Gradient Gain to Zero
the linear shim currents (generated by the gradients). 1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
With the determined parameters, the compensation for 2. Select Enter Service Mode.
eddy current irregularities in the system is calculated and
3. Select System Tuning > Tuned Hardware
used to improve image quality for EPI - diffusion
Parameters.
measurements.
4. Check the present value for the following
1. Place the 3 liter bottle vertically on the tabletop (not
parameters:
horizontally.
• Grad. Gain Adjust X.
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
• Grad. Gain Adjust Y.
3. Select Enter Service Mode.
• Grad. Gain Adjust Z.
4. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
5. Set the values to 0 (zero).
5. Select Installation Procedures > Eddy Current
Analysis. 6. To save the changes, select Store.
6. Select Eddy Current Analysis. 7. Enter a reason for changing the parameters.
7. To start the three measurements, click [PROCEED].
8. Follow the prompts displayed on the screen to
complete the tests.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 201 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R7.x-
R9.x), continued Sagittal Transverse

Check X & Y Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment

1. Logon as Gyroscan.
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
3. Enter Service Mode.
4. Select Perform IQP/EST Measurements >
Analysis Principle: IQP.
5. Select XX Misc > GA_XY (scan name: ADJ:XY). 7. Connect the coil to one of the surface coil
connectors.
6. Position the head performance phantom (with the
holder) for transversal scans in the head coil. 8. Move the head coil to magnet isocenter using the
light visor and pressing <Travel to Scan-plane>.
9. To start the batch, click [PROCEED] twice.
Note During the batch, SCOUT scans and
GA1:X_grad and GA2:Y_grad scans are
automatically performed.
10. Wait for the scans to complete before proceeding.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 202 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R7.x- 8. Select Scan: GA2:Y_grad.
R9.x), continued 9. Select Image: Slide 1 SE_M.
Evaluate X & Y Scans
10. Select Philips Quality Procedure.
1. Once the scans have finished, select the SPT icon.
11. Record the value: Size Horizontal.
2. Select Service Mode > IQ Parameter/Data
Evaluation Tools. Note Specification: 149.5 mm < Size < 150.5 mm.

3. Select Spatial Linearity Measurements >

Examination.
4. Select Examination GRAD_ADJ > Select Scan:
GA1:X_grad.
5. Select Image: Slice 1 SE_M.
6. Select Philips Quality Procedure.
7. Record the value: Size Vertical.
Note Specification: 149.5 mm < Size < 150.5 mm.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 203 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R7.x- 4. Modify the parameters for gradient gain adjust X & Y
R9.x), continued to the calculated values.
Modify X & Y Grad. Gain Adjust Parameters Note Value Range: -4.10% - +4.09%
If both measured values are within specification, 5. Enter a reason for changing the parameters and
continue to Check Z Gradient Strength Fine select Store to save the changes.
Adjustment.
6. Complete the Check X & Y Gradient Strength Fine
If either are not within specification, use the following Adjustment procedure.
procedure to calculate the new gradient gain adjust
parameters. 7. Complete the Evaluate X & Y Scans procedure.

1. Select Scan Utilities > Enter Service Mode.

2. Select System Tuning > Tuned Hardware
Parameters.
3. Use the formula below to calculate the new value
(1 mm = 0.66%).
% New = (150 - Measured Size) x 0.66%+Old Value

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 204 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R7.x- 5. Select XX Misc > GA_Z (scan name: ADJ:Z).
R9.x), continued 6. Position the head performance phantom (with the
Check Z Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment holder) for coronal scans in the head coil.
Important! Sites with an ACR phantom should use it for Coronal
the Z-gradient calibration to ensure slices
intersect the phantom at the proper location.
o
45 11
Wedges

N
o
s
e
7. Connect the coil to one of the surface coil
connectors.
o
45 1
Wedges 8. Move the head coil to magnet isocenter using the
Chin
light visor and pressing <Travel to Scan-plane>.
For sites without an ACR phantom, complete the
following procedure. 9. To start the batch, click [PROCEED] twice.
1. Logon as Gyroscan. Note SCOUT scans and GA1:Z_grad scans are
automatically performed.
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
10. Wait for the scans to complete before proceeding.
3. Enter Service Mode.
4. Select Perform IQP/EST Measurements >
Analysis Principle: IQP. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 205 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R7.x- Modify Z Grad. Gain Adjust Parameters
R9.x), continued If Z gradient value is not within specification, complete
Evaluate Z Scan the following procedure.
1. Once the scans have finished, select the SPT icon. 1. Select Scan Utilities > Enter Service Mode.
2. Select Service Mode > IQ Parameter/Data 2. Select System Tuning > Tuned Hardware
Evaluation Tools. Parameters.
3. Select Spatial Linearity Measurements > 3. Use the formula below to calculate the new value
Examination. (1 mm = 0.66%).
4. Select Examination GRAD_ADJ > Select Scan: % New = (150 - Measured Size) x 0.66%+ Old Value
GA1:Z_grad.
4. Modify the parameters for gradient gain adjust Z to
5. Select Image: Slice 3 SE_M. the calculated value.
6. Select Philips Quality Procedure. Note Value Range: -4.10% - +4.09%
7. Record the value: Size Vertical. 5. Enter a reason for changing the parameters and
select Store to save the changes.
Note Specification: 149.5 mm < Size < 150.5 mm.
6. Complete the Check Z Gradient Strength Fine
Adjustment procedure.
7. Complete the Evaluate Z Scan procedure.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 206 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R10.x- 9. To bring the survey image to the screen, click on the
R11.x) [+] button (just below the HC Case icon.
1. Login as MRService using Manager or Manager1 10. At the bottom of the screen, click [HIDE].
as the password.
11. Select the Scout from the scan list and click
2. From the popup window, select Intera > Start. [DELETE]. Then, select the second scan from the
scan list that appears.
3. Once the application loads, select Patient > New
Exam. 12. Change the following parameters:
4. Enter a name, registration ID, date of birth, sex, and • TE: 30
patient weight (90). Click [PROCEED].
• TR: 500
5. For R11.x only, from the toolbar in the upper left part
of the screen, select System. Select Scan • Slices: 3
Definition Context and Scan List. 13. Place the slices through the center of the image.
6. Select Anatomy and Phantom Studies. 14. Change the foldover direction to AP for the
X-gradient.
7. Select the first scan (a survey). The click on Select
in the upper right part of the window. 15. Change the foldover direction to LR for the
Y-gradient.
8. Click [START].
16. Click [PROCEED] and start the scan.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 207 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R10.x- 22. For the Z-gradient, place the phantom/holder in the
R11.x), continued coronal position and repeat the scan procedure with
17. When the scan completes: the foldover set to FH.

a. Click the [+] button. Note If the site has an ACR phantom, use it to cal-
ibrate the Z-gradient. Ensure that, on the
b. Click on the screen Setup button. ACR T1, scan slices one and eleven inter-
c. Select 1x1 image and Hide. sect the phantom in the appropriate place.
o
18. To display the dark image with the rows of white 45
Wedges
11
pins, use the vertical slide bar to the right of the [+]
button.
N
19. Right-click on the image. Select -Distance/Profile. o
s
20. Position the cursor over the center of the left-most e
(Y-gradient) or top pin (X-gradient) in the center row/
column and press and hold the left mouse button. o
45 1
Wedges
21. Drag the mouse over the pin farthest to the right or Chin
bottom and click the left mouse button. The distance
will be displayed.
Note The appropriate distance is 15.0 cm +0.5 cm.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 208 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Gradient Strength Fine Adjustment (R10.x- h. Use the following formula to calculate the new
R11.x), continued value: New Value = [(150 - Measured Size) *
23. To adjust the gradient size: 0.66] +current value.

a. Hide any open windows. Note An adjustment of 0.66 = 1 mm change in

phantom size.
b. Click on the dropdown arrow for Patient Name
24. Enter the new value and click [PROCEED].
and select another patient.
25. If prompted for a reason for making the change,
Note You can also select the three dots to
enter a reason and click [YES].
place the system into Viewing Mode.
26. Press <ENTER> twice and click [PROCEED].
c. In the lower left part of the screen, click [SCAN
CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. 27. Repeat the scans and verify the correct size.
d. Select Service Mode (password = Service).
e. Select System Tuning (password = System).
f. Select Tuned Hardware Parameters.
g. Page backwards until the Gradient Gain Adjust
lines are displayed. Click on the line to adjust,
then press <ENTER> to open the line.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 209 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table

Select one of the following topics: Table Movement - Vertical Adjustment
• Table Movement - Vertical Adjustment This procedure must be completed to coordinate the
physical and electrical position of the table in the vertical
• Table Movement - Horizontal Adjustment
position.
• Light Visor Adjustment
It is selectable using:
• PS Control board dipswitches (start code: 1001)
• TPAT > Run > Adjustment > Vertical_Adj
1. Adjust the table to the lowest position, 500 mm
above the floor.
2. Check the voltage between point 1 and 2 of the
position potentiometer LVX1 (see Table
Components). If not between 180 and 320 mV,
adjust the potentiometer mechanically.
3. Move the table to the highest position.
Note Voltage should be less than 8.1 V.
4. Turn the Gain (R84) counterclockwise fully.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 210 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Table Movement - Vertical Adjustment, PS Hydro Board LED Bar
continued See PS Hydro Board.
5. Set the dipswitches to position 1001, and press S2 to Top:
start the measurement.
• LED 7 \
6. Adjust the table to the lowest position.
• LED 6 |: turn potentiometer clockwise
7. Adjust the Offset (R85) so LED 3 and 4 light.
• LED 5 /
8. Adjust the table to the highest position.
• LED 4 \: adjustment correct
9. Adjust R84 so LED 3 and 4 light again.
• LED 3 /
10. Since adjustments of R84 and R85 can affect the
other, repeat steps 6 - 9 until LED 3 and 4 light after • LED 2 \
both adjustments. • LED 1 |: turn pot counterclockwise
• LED 0 /

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 211 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Table Movement - Horizontal Adjustment Light Visor Adjustment
TTS zero current adjustment is needed when the table The five halogen visor lights have to be adjusted to
does not have enough current to make the tabletop run complete the correct transport to the scan plane (with the
all the way to the scan plane, or when you use the thumb help of an aluminum plate with small holes).
wheel and the table jumps due to too much current.
It is impossible to adjust the distance between the center
If the hydraulic valves have a hysteresis, the TTS Zero of the light visor and the isocenter while this is defined as
Current Adjustment should be checked. 827 mm.
Important! This adjustment should only be completed See also Light Visor Adjustments.
when using a PS Control board - Level 4 & 5.
The table will not reach the scan plane and
the oil pump will continuously operate if this
adjustment is not completed successfully.
To address this, a zero current must be adjusted using
the dip switches, so that during normal operation the dip
switches position represents the zero current.
In Test Mode, after pressing S2, the dip switches position
represents a particular test.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 212 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table

Select one of the following topics: Table Height Adjustment
• Table Height Adjustment Note When there is no load on the table, the running
surface of the patient support must be 1 mm
• Table Perpendicularity Adjustment
above the running surface of the inner bed. Per-
• Horizontal Timing Belt Tension Adjustment pendicular alignment between the patient support
and bridge section should be less than 2 mm.
• Mount the Physiology Unit (Right/Left Side)
1. To level the patient table:
• Adjust Tabletop Sideways Play
a. Use the spirit level to level the table horizontally
• Table Length Adjustment
down the long side of the table.
• Final Table Check
b. Use the spirit level to level the table horizontally
across the width of the table (perpendicular to the
long side of the table.
c. Add a spacer to level the patient table if
appropriate.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 213 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Table Height Adjustment, continued Table Perpendicularity Adjustment
2. Install the bridge section. 1. The surface of the patient support lower bed and the
bridge section must be in line with each other.
a. Place the bridge section, so the finger protection
switch plate is towards the patient support. • Use the two yellow beams supplied with the
patient support to verify these two surfaces are
b. Align the bride section’s interface points (4)
online with each other.
above the four holes in the magnet covers.
2. Tighten the four nuts to fasten the patient support to
c. Push down on the bridge section, so the bridge
the floor.
section interlocks with the patient support.
3. Near the table’s vertical actuator, use your hand to
3. On top of the running surface of the patient support,
tighten the threaded rod.
place the two yellow beams supplied with the patient
support and a spirit level. Note In order for the patient support frame to with-
stand vertical actuator downward forces, the
4. Using insulation spacers below the patient table
threaded rod pushes against the isolation
frame, adjust the patient table height so a 1 mm gap
plate on the floor.
is maintained between the beams and running
surface of the bridge section. 4. Lock the nut to lock the threaded rod.
• The space should be measured a few
centimeters behind the sloping surface of the
bridge.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 214 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Horizontal Timing Belt Tension Adjustment Mount the Physiology Unit (Right/Left Side)
A compression spring is used to adjust the horizontal The Physiology Unit should always be mounted on the
timing belt (see Horizontal Drive). same side as the PICU. By default, it is installed at the
left side front, underneath the patient support.
Important! The magnetic field pulls the horizontal motor
assembly in the direction of the magnet, so 1. Remove the physiology cover from the physiology
the compression of the spring is different for unit.
different magnetic field strengths.
2. On the magnet side, remove the lower front cover.
1. Beneath the table stretcher, remove the bottom
3. Remove the screws holding the physiology unit to
cover.
the patient support frame.
2. Depending on the system, adjust the length of the
4. Rotate the unit downward to obtain access to the
spring.
cabling. Disconnect all of the cables.
System Spring Length 5. Un-mount the physiology unit and remount it on the
right side beneath the patient support.
Intera 0.5T 57 mm +1 mm (factor adjusted)
Intera 1.0T 52.5 mm +1 mm
6. Re-route the cables to the right side.

Intera 1.5T 42 mm +1 mm 7. Reconnect the cables and replace the covers.

3. Lock the position of the nut with the second nut and
replace the cover.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 215 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Adjust Tabletop Sideways Play Table Length Adjustment
2 mm (maximum) play is allowed between: Complete the following procedure to access the full
range of horizontal tabletop movement.
• the tabletop and table stretcher, and
Following startup of the application software and during
• the tabletop and the bridge section.
the start of each scan, the host computer compares the
To minimize the sideways play: host value with that in the patient support programmable
logic controller (PLC). If the values are not the same, the
1. Manually move the tabletop inwards and outwards
host value is written to the patient support PLC.
completely.
Note Following a power OFF/ON cycle, the PLC value
2. Remove/add spacers so the tabletop sliders are
is lost.
touching the bridge section and/or the table
stretcher. 1. Logon as TSW. For more information, see Login as
TSW (R7.x-R9.x) or Login as TSW (R10.x-R11.x).
3. Then, remove one spacer on the right/left side of the
tabletop to achieve the appropriate amount of play. 2. Select TPAT.
4. Without using a load, check the alignment by moving 3. Type: run adjustments table_length and press
the tabletop in and out with your hand. No bumping/ <ENTER>.
scraping should be detected.
4. Follow the directions displayed on the screen.
5. Using a load of approximately 100 kg, check the
The appropriate value is stored on the host and
alignment by moving the tabletop in and out with
inside the patient support programmable logic
your hand. No bumping/scraping should be
controller.
detected.
5. Type: quit and press <ENTER>. Logout of TSW.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 216 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Alignment and Calibration 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Final Table Check
1. Verify the patient support frame is separated
electrically from the RF enclosure (using an
ohmmeter) by measuring between the table frame
and the floor pads.
• The value measured must be greater that
200 KOhm.
2. Record the measured value.
3. Connect the cabling and remount any covers.
4. Verify the safety grounds to these lower covers.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 217 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

COMPONENT LOCATIONS
General Information Head Coil with Linear Flux Probe
Philips Intera Gyroscan (New Intera) Cooling System
Overview Shield Cooler IGC HC-8E
Philips Gyroscan (NT Intera) Front View
Overview Top View
Operator Room (New Intera R7.x-R9.x) Neslab Chiller HX-300
Overview Front View
Magnet Room (New Intera) Access Panel
Overview Electrical/Fuse Panel
Control Panel Neslab Chiller HX-750
Magnet Top Front View
Equipment Room (New Intera) Connections
Patient Ventilation Pump/Motor
Mains Distribution Unit Temperature Sensor
MDE (Main Distribution Extension) Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style)
Data Acquisition Cabinet Front View
Coils & Phantoms Top View
Multi-Connector & RF Trap Right Side View
Head Coil & Dual TMJ w/Holder Left Side View
Surface Coils Strainer
Knee & Quad Neck Coil Filters
Body Coil Linear Flux Probe with Rotation Knob
Body Coil with Linear Flux Probe
Body Coil with Two Linear Flux Probes
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 218 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Cooling System, continued Gradient Amplifier - Copley 274

Front View
Gradient Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New
Style) Power Section
Rear View
Front View
Gradient Power Module
Rear View (Hose Connections)
Controller Assembly
Right Side View
Left Side View Patient Support
Neslab HX-750 Chiller
NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table
Data Acquisition Table Components
RF Amplifier (53-S21D, -64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42) Circuit Boards
Patient Interface Control Unit
Front View
RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & S24A-42) MT (Electrical) Patient Table
Table Components
Front View
Horizontal Drive
Rear View
Vertical Actuator
Top View (Panel Removed)
Control Unit
Gradient Amplifiers Power Supply
Gradient Amplifier - Copley 234 Patient Support & Physiology Unit Covers
Front View Physio Connections
Power Section Power
Rear View
Top View
Power
RF Room Light & Electrical Outlet Filters
Side View
Gradient Amplifier - Copley 271
Front View

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 219 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Philips Intera Gyroscan (New Intera)

Overview

Note Speakers
MW1 and MW2 are
in the ceiling.

See:
Gradient Amplifier -
Copley 234,
Gradient Amplifier -
Copley 274, and
Gradient Amplifier -
Copley 271

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 220 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Philips Gyroscan (NT Intera)

Overview

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 221 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Operator Room (New Intera R7.x-R9.x)

Overview

Printer

Stereo

Intercom

Network Switch
(R7.x-R9.x)

Computer Cabinet

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 222 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Operator Room (New Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Overview, continued
DMCC

Computer Cabinet

DMCC Image Interface Module (IIM)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 223 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Operator Room (New Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Overview, continued
Printer Filter Panel

Stereo

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 224 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Magnet Room (New Intera)

Overview

Front End
Electronics (PFEI)

Body Coil

Control Panel (PICU)

Table

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 225 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Magnet Room (New Intera), continued

Control Panel

Table Emergency Stop Music

Control Panel Patient Lights
Table Control Volume

Stop Scan

Start Scan
Manual Mode/Reset

Quadrature
Connector Synergy
Connectors

Laser ON/OFF Travel to Scan Patient Fan Control

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 226 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Magnet Room (New Intera), continued

Magnet Top

Gradient Airflow Switch

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 227 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Magnet Room (New Intera), continued

Magnet Top, continued

Cold Head

Front End
Electronics (PFEI)
Gradient Cooling Exhaust

Quench Pipe

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 228 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Magnet Room (New Intera), continued

Magnet Top, continued

Ramp Ports
Burst Disk

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 229 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Magnet Room (New Intera), continued

Magnet Rear

Magnet Rear - Covers Removed

Gradient Cables

Gradient Coil

body coil

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 230 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Equipment Room (New Intera)

Patient Ventilation

Filter

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 231 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Equipment Room (New Intera), continued

Mains Distribution Unit

System Breaker
F6 Filter Box

F8 Heat Exchanger
See also, MDE (Main
Distribution Extension).
F10 RF Amp, except for 0.5T
systems; on 0.5T systems,
RF Amp is in the DAS.

Gradient Power
(PT1000/Omni) Only)

Magnet Ramp Supply

F3 (Data Acquisition Cabinet)
F7: Magnet monitor
power for NT Intera
Console

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 232 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Equipment Room (New Intera), continued

MDE (Main Distribution Extension)

Gradient Power System Power

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 233 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Equipment Room (New Intera), continued

Data Acquisition Cabinet

Front View - Top DAC Cable Interface Unit Front View - Bottom

Reconstructor

BDAS
LEDs

Fan Unit & Filter

(behind plate) Mains Inlet Unit

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 234 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Equipment Room (New Intera), continued

Data Acquisition Cabinet, continued
Rear View -Top

DAS Power Supply

DAC Cable Interface Unit

Reconstructor

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 235 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Equipment Room (New Intera), continued

Data Acquisition Cabinet, continued
BDAS

FCA
FCC

FCD *

FCE *

FCB FCF

FCH

Note * indicate Synergy

PCBs (optional)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 236 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Equipment Room (New Intera), continued

Data Acquisition Cabinet, continued

Mains Inlet Unit

FCB/FCC LEDs

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 237 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Coils & Phantoms

Multi-Connector & RF Trap

Coil Multi-Connector RF Trap

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 238 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Coils & Phantoms, continued

Head Coil & Dual TMJ w/Holder

Head Coil Dual TMJ w/Holder

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 239 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Coils & Phantoms, continued

Surface Coils

C4 C3 C1 E1
R1

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 240 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Coils & Phantoms, continued

Knee & Quad Neck Coil

Knee Coil Quad Neck Coil

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 241 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Coils & Phantoms, continued

Body Coil Linear Flux Probe with Rotation Body Coil with Linear Flux Probe
Knob

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 242 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Coils & Phantoms, continued

Body Coil with Two Linear Flux Probes Head Coil with Linear Flux Probe

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 243 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Shield Cooler IGC HC-8E

Front View

Front View Circuit Breaker: 20 A 250 V3~, 3 Pole

Pressure Gauge

Normal/Standalone Operation

Fuses (3): 0.63 A, 250 V

Supply Line

Return Line

Incoming/Outgoing Water

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 244 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Shield Cooler IGC HC-8E, continued

Top View

Top View Pressure Relief Valve

Compressor Assembly

Oil Separator Assembly

Gas High-Temp. Switch
Gas Equalization
Compressor Motor Terminals Solenoid Valve
& High-Temp. Switch

Absorber Assembly

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 245 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-300

Front View
Front View
Main Power

Fault Temp. Display/Indicators

Start

Fluid Level
Access Panel

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 246 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-300, continued

Access Panel

Fluid Level Access Panel

(open)

Filter Strainers (2)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 247 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-300, continued

Side Panel
Side View
(panel removed)

Pump Coupler

Note There is a
plastic key between
the pump and the
motor and beneath
the pump coupler.

Recirculating Pressure Supply/Return

(Approx. 45 psi) Recirculating Flow Control

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 248 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-300, continued

Electrical/Fuse Panel

Temperature Controls
Electrical/Fuse Panel

Compressor

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 249 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-750

Front View

Power
Cool LED Indicator

Idle LED ON/OFF

Switch
Next/Enter
Button
Start Switch
Yes Button
No Button

Cool LED: Indicates controller is cooling reservoir fluid. Flashes when operating in
proportional band; steady when unit operating at full capacity.
Idle LED: Indicates controller is not cooling reservoir fluid.
Next/Enter Button: Scroll forward/backward through menus, or to accept/save
changes.
Yes Button: Answer "Yes" to prompts, or to increment numerical values upward.
No Button: Answer "No" to prompts, or to increment numerical values downward

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 250 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-750, continued

Connections
Cryo Cooler Gauge, Switch, and
Right Side View Connections

Recirculating Pressure Loop A (Top)

& Loop B (Bottom)

Gradient Heat Exchanger Gauge, Supply/Return Lines

Switch, and Connections

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 251 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-750, continued

Pump/Motor

Gradient Heat
Exchanger Pump

Cryo Cooler Pump

Plastic Key

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 252 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-750, continued

Temperature Sensor

Temperature Sensor &

Mounting Plate

Stirrer Motors
Ground Stud & Stirrer
Motor Ground Stud

Strainer Access Cover

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 253 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style)

Front View
Power Switch
Cool/Idle Status
Indicators

Recirculating
Temperature Control Temperature/Pressure

Interface Connection High Temperature, Low

Flow & Low Level Indicators

Water Purity Indicator

De-ionization Cartridge

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 254 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style), continued

Top View
Setpoint Error
Temperature Switches

Gradient Coil Pressure

Control Valve

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 255 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style), continued

Right Side View

Flow Switch
Press. Gauge &
Temp. Gauge
Strainer Body

Temp. Sensor

Flow Meter Strainer Insert

De-ionizer Cartridge
Motor Valve

Motor Valve Indicator

(Front of Unit)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 256 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style), continued

Left Side View

Relief Valve

Tank Assembly Control Box Enclosure

Strainer (x2) &

Pump (x2) Pump Motor (x2)

Fan Motor

(Front of Unit)

Keyed Connection

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 257 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style), continued

Strainer

Gradient Coil Strainer

Flow Monitor

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 258 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style), continued

Filters

Basket Strainers (2)

Reservoir Level Indicator

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 259 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New Style)

Front View
Power Switch

Recirculating Temp.

Temp Control Recirculating Pressure

High Temperature, Low Flow

& Low Level Indicator

Fuses (4FU, 3FU & 1 FU)

Interface Connection

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 260 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New Style), continued

Rear View (Hose Connections)

To Gradient Coil

Facility Water Return Return from Gradient Coil

Facility Water Flow

Fan

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 261 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New Style), continued

Right Side View

Tank Relief Valve

Thermostat

Relief Valve

Filter
Temperature Sensor

2-way Motorized Valve

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 262 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New Style), continued

Left Side View

Filler Cap

Filters
Level Sensor

Pumps

Fan

(Front of Unit)
Pump Motors

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 263 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New Style), continued

Neslab HX-750 Chiller

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 264 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D, -64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42)

Front View
FRX5 PFWR Operate
FRX9 RS232
Standby
FRX3 Parallel
Interface
Enable
FRX1 RF In
Display Fault

F1 F2 F3 F4
1 14 1 14
5 9

1 6
13 25 13 26
F5 F6 F7 F8

Mains
ON 1
OFF 0

FRX10 3.5 A 250 V Wait

type 313
FRX4 RF Enable Off
Test Connector
FRX6 PreFL

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 265 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & S24A-42)

Front View

Front View
FRX1: RF Input FRX4: RF Enable

FRX5: Forward Power Monitor

FRX3: Parallel Interface

FRX9: RS-232 FRX6: Reflected Power Monitor

Mating Plate

Mains Breaker Intake Air Filters

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 266 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & S24A-42), continued

Rear View

Rear View

RF Output Connector &

Air Exhaust Vent Cable Support Assembly

Power Receptacle (cord installed)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 267 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & S24A-42), continued

Top View (Panel Removed)

Top View
(panel removed)

PA Plate Choke

IPA Tube
(under screen)

PA Tube

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 268 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier - Copley 234

Front View
Front View - Top
Eddy Current Compensation
(ECC) & Interconnect PCBs

X-Amplifier

Y-Amplifier

Z-Amplifier

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 269 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier - Copley 234, continued

Front View, continued

Power: +HV3 35 V, +5 V Amplifier Controls/LEDs MOD Fault LEDs: Fault

for logic available. in Power Module 1-4.
Typically a power
transistor failure.

Normal/Fault: Amplifier
operable (if enabled).
Inhibit

DC FLT: 28 V Fault: One or

more DC voltages out of Reset
range.

Overcurrent: Too much Filter

output current for too long.

Hot: Over temperature at

power module or output.

Channel ON: Amplifier channel Voltage: 1 V = 20 V Current: 1 V = 60 A

enabled and operating.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 270 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier - Copley 234, continued

Front View, continued
Eddy Current Compensation (ECC) & Interconnect PCBs
Load Temp.

Hi/Low Power Select

Digital Control

BDAS Interface

(Z) DID

(Y) DIE
(X) DIF

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 271 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier - Copley 234, continued

Power Section

Voltage Monitor Phase Loss: One

Front View - Bottom phase of mains is
missing, or Phase Loss
Board defective.
Control Failure:
Inverter Failure 1-4: Fault detected on
Fault on the A100 Control Board.
corresponding A200
Inverter Board.

Current Monitor

Overvoltage: Max. output

voltage generated. Faulty Power Supply
control system, gradient
interface or cable.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 272 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier - Copley 234, continued

Rear View
CLK Reset

X-Amp Y-Amp Z-Amp Address Switch

ON ON ON
USEL 0
Diagnostic (P10)
USEL 1

Fans
USEL 2

USEL 3
Amp Control (P1)
SYNC

Slave (J2)
Address Address Address
0 1 2

HV GND -OUT +OUT Header Terminator (J3)

28 VDC
Gain
Adjustments Offset
Curr Lim

Status (J6)
40 V - 160 VDC

Equal (J9) X X- Y Y- Z Z-
Fan
Supply
Common
Mode Filters

Amps HV Gradient Power

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 273 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier - Copley 234, continued

Rear View, continued

Rear View
Clock Signal

High Voltage IN

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 274 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier - Copley 234, continued

Top View
Filter Coils

Power Converter Assy.

Filter Assy(s).

Signal Processor Assy.

Filter Coils

Power Mod. Assy. 1 Power Mod. Assy. 3

10 1 10 1
Power Mod. Assy. 2 9
8
2
3
9
8
2
3 Power Mod. Assy. 4
7 4 7 4
6 5 6 5
5 6 5 6
4 7 4 7
3
2
8
9
3 8 Display Board Assy.
2 9
1 10 1 10

Fan Assy. Fan Assy.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 275 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier - Copley 234, continued

Side View

Amplifier Side View

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 276 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier - Copley 271

Front View

DGA GCI Main PCB

DGB GCI I/O PCB

X, Y & Z Axis Amplifiers

(top to bottom)

Capacitor Bank
Modules (2)

HV Power Supply

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 277 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier - Copley 274

Front View

Controller Assembly
Gradient Power Module

Power Section

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 278 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier - Copley 274, continued

Power Section
Phase Loss: One phase of
mains is missing, or Phase
Loss board is defective.

Inverter Failure: Fault Control Failure: Fault

indicates fault on the detected on the A100 Control
corresponding A200 Inverter Board.
Board.

Overvoltage: Max. output

voltage generated due to
control system fault.
Defective gradient interface/
cable.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 279 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier - Copley 274, continued

Rear View

Cabinet Connections
GND Bus Bar

HV Bus Bar
+ Out Bus Bar

- Out Bus Bar

Danfysik Current Feedback

Transducers

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 280 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier - Copley 274, continued

Gradient Power Module

Controller Assembly
Module 4
Module 3
Module 2
3 mm Jackscrew
Module 1

Screws Securing Module (2)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 281 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier - Copley 274, continued

Controller Assembly

Module Fault LEDs

Control Panel LEDs:

Status OK (Green): No fault in Power Module, Controller or Power supplies
Enabled (Green): No faults, externally enabled, not inhibited
LV ON (Green): 28 V power supply within tolerance (>26.5 V, <29.5 V)
No EHC (Yellow): EHC mode unavailable. Heat sink temp. too high for EHC mode
Signal Error (Red): Inaccurate signal reproduction due to clipping or load fault
Fault Memory (Red): Fault occurred while enabled and stored in memory
Fault Controller (Red): Internal low voltage power supply out of tolerance
Over-temp (Red): Power module IGBT heat sink, output filter inductor, or output clamp rectifiers too hot
Overload (Red): Too much output current for too long
Module Fault 1 - 4 (Red): IGBT failure, over temperature, overcurrent, too much current for too long or
internal power supply out of tolerance
Inhibit Button (Red): Inhibit button is active

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 282 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table

Table Components
S10 Emergency. Release LHX1
S6 In Slow S8 Out End

E1 Horizontal S5 In S7 Table Out

Encoder
S11
S9 Table Present

Overtop Center -
Locking Bar Location
Manual Valve
Travel to Scan: 827 mm
Horizontal Speed: 10-180 mm/sec. Horiz. Valve
Position: 0 - 2000 mm
Resolution: 0.5 Vert. Valve
LVX1

Interconnect
LMX1

Vert/Shipping Plug

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 283 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Table Components, continued
Interconnect
X3
X2

X4
X1

X6
2X RD

1
3
X1 S1
BK
LV

YE

VT OG

BK
3 2
RD
1 P1
S2

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 284 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Table Components, continued
Emergency Release Handle
(between Magnet and Table)
Hydraulic Motor

Oil Filter
Safety Lock Bar
(in use)

Safety Lock Bar

(in stored position)

Vertical Drive
Motor

Oil Sight
Glass

Incoming
Power

Vertical Limit
Switches & Pots Oil Reservoir

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 285 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Circuit Boards
R85: Vertical
Adj. Offset
Pot.

PS Power Board PS Hydro Board S3 PS Control Board

Dipswitch
(Avert.
Ref)
S2
Dipswitch
(Dig/Adj.)

S1
Dipswitch
(Sveltest)

R84: Vertical
Adj. Gain Pot.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 286 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Patient Interface Control Unit

Move to Isocenter Bore Lights Start Scan

Manual Table

Alignment Light

Stop Scan
Table: In/Out
Up/Down

Surface Coil 1 Surface Coil 2

Respiratory Gating
Peripheral Pulse
Synergy Coil 1 & 2
Patient Alarm Ball EKG

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 287 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table

Table Components

Side View
(covers removed)

Horizontal Drive Unit

Vertical Actuator

Vertical Brake Control Unit Power Supply

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 288 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

MT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Table Components, continued

Bridge Assembly (New Intera)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 289 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Horizontal Drive

Horizontal Drive

Slider Plate

Coupling House

Motor Reductor
Tacho

Brake House

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 290 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Vertical Actuator

Vertical Actuator

Warning: Motor is Ferrous

All-Thread: For raising table
when replacing actuator.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 291 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Control Unit

Control Unit

Down Relay

Up PLC
Relay

Servo Amplifier
PLC Extension Board

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 292 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Power Supply

LBC 12 V +
LBC 12 V -

LBA 24 V +
LBB 12 V +
LBA 24 V -
LBB 12 V -
LBD 12 V +
LBD 12 V -

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 293 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Patient Support & Physiology Unit Covers

Four Screws Holding Patient

Support Cover
Two screws holding
Physiology Unit Cover

Emergency Down Switch: Drive table

down, bypassing all safety features.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 294 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Physio Connections

Left Side
Respiratory
Patient Headset

Patient Alarm

ECG/VCG
RIght Side

Peripheral Pulse Unit

(PPU)

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 295 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Component Locations 5197921-200

Power
RF Room Light & Electrical Outlet Filters

RF Room Light &

Electrical Outlet Filters

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 296 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

ERROR CODES
General Information Cooling System
Error Log Analysis (R7.x-R9.x) Neslab Chiller HX-300
Gyroscan Operating System Error Logs TC-300 Navigating Loops
BDASDUMP.LOG TC-300 Controller Error Codes
TSW Logs
SPT Files
Data Acquisition
VMS Driver Error Logs Data Acquisition System
Error Log Analysis (R10.x-R11.x) Patient Front-end Interface (PFEI) (MM-)
Access Logfiles RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42)
Gradient Dump Log Files Reporting System Faults
Previous Daily Log Files Fault Codes
Warning Codes
Host Computer
DS10 Patient Positioning
Power-on Self-test Errors MT (Electrical) Patient Table
XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x) Log Errors
Power LED
E-Buzzer Errors
POST Errors
Additional Error Codes
OCD Monitor (19" Option) See S21 Error Codes.
Adjustment Errors Note This link opens a MS Word document.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 297 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

Error Log Analysis (R7.x-R9.x)

Select one of the following topics: Gyroscan Operating System Error Logs
• Gyroscan Operating System Error Logs There are several logs/files which can assist you in
troubleshooting problems with the system.
• BDASDUMP.LOG
Use the following procedure to view the Gyroscan
• TSW Logs
Operating System error logs.
• SPT Files
1. From the User Login screen, logon as Gyroscan.
• VMS Driver Error Logs
2. From the main menu, select System > Logging.
3. To bypass the warning message, press <ENTER>.
4. Select Examine Logfiles.
5. Select the particular log file for analysis. Click
[PROCEED]. The Examine Logfile window appears.
6. Select Set Selection Parameters.
7. Set appropriate filter criteria for the desired date,
time, and severity of error.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 298 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

Error Log Analysis (R7.x-R9.x), continued

Gyroscan Operating System Error Logs, 10. Logon as System.
continued 11. At the DCL window $ prompt, type: set def
8. To view the file: sys$specific:[000000.gyrodisk2.
a. Click [PROCEED]. gyroscan.log]. Press <ENTER>.

b. Click [PAGE PREV] or [PAGE NEXT] to view the 12. To locate the filename to view, at the prompt, type:
dir /date/size and press <ENTER>.
file contents.
13. To search page by page, at the prompt, type: type
- or -
{Filename} and press <ENTER>.
To print the file:
14. To find word strings containing the word "error", at
a. Click [PAGE FWD]. the prompt, type: search <Filename> error. Press
b. At Output Destination, select Print. Click <ENTER>.
[PROCEED].
9. Use the same commands as detailed above to set
selection parameters and view/print log file
information.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 299 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

Error Log Analysis (R7.x-R9.x), continued

BDASDUMP.LOG 1. Logon as System.
This log can be used to get additional information on 2. Type: 1 and press <ENTER>.
errors found in the logging applications program. The
3. At the DCL window $ prompt, type: set def
DCL file is in the logs directory.
sys$specific:[000000.gyrodisk2.
Important! For a complete list of commands available, gyroscan.log]. Press <ENTER>.
at the $ prompt, type: help and press
<ENTER>. 4. At the prompt, type: anal bdasdump.log; ’#’. press
<ENTER>.
Note ’#’ represents the file best associated with
the time the error occurred. Determine this
using the DIR/DATE command while in the
[***].log directory.
5. Look for an error code. This will be followed by a
general applications logging text and an error code
number (e.g., H9999ffff).

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 300 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

Error Log Analysis (R7.x-R9.x), continued

TSW Logs SPT Files
TSW logs are located in DCL, and contain the results of SPT files contain the results of the Periodic Image
diagnostic tests run on the system. Quality Test run by the local FE or Technologists.
Important! For a complete list of commands available, Important! For a complete list of commands available,
at the $ prompt, type: help and press at the $ prompt, type: help and press
<ENTER>. <ENTER>.
1. Logon as System. 1. Logon as System.
2. Type: 1 and press <ENTER>. 2. Type: 1 and press <ENTER>.
3. At the DCL window $ prompt, type: set def 3. At the DCL window $ prompt, type: set def
sys$specific:[tsw.logs]. Press <ENTER>. sys$specific:[000000.gyrodisk2.
gyroscan.spt.history]. Press <ENTER>.
4. To locate the filename to view, at the prompt, type:
dir /date/size and press <ENTER>. • PIQT.MRL contains the last test results with the
text in viewable format.
5. To open the log and display it by pages, at the
prompt, type: <Filename> /p and press <ENTER>. • PIQT.DIR contains all PIQT records in a numeric
data format.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 301 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

Error Log Analysis (R7.x-R9.x), continued

VMS Driver Error Logs
DEC VMS driver errors can be viewed in DCL.
Driver Logical Name
Important! For a complete list of commands available,
Tape Driver PTA0
at the $ prompt, type: help and press
<ENTER>. Bus Adapter PUB0

1. Logon as System. Bus Adapter PUC0

2. Type: 1 and press <ENTER>. Disk Drive DUA0

Tape Drive MUA0
3. At the DCL window $ prompt, type: sh err. Press
<ENTER>. ADAS UWA0

- or - Trackball TBA0

At the DCL window $ prompt, type: diagnose/ VDUY (video display unit) VDA0
translate. Press <ENTER>. Serial Devices 0 - 7 TXA*
Gyroview Ethernet ESA0
Site Server Ethernet XQA0

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 302 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

Error Log Analysis (R7.x-R9.x), continued

VMS Driver Error Logs, continued
Errlog.sys
This is a file which logs VMS errors. It should be less
than 8 blocks log. If the file is larger than eight blocks, it
will start to infringe on the applications system disk
allocation and resources.
To view the file size:
1. Access a DCL window.
2. Switch to the SYS$SPECIFIC:[000000.SYSERR]
directory.
3. Type: dir /full. Press <ENTER>.
4. To get an encrypted listing and the logistics of the
errors, type: anal errorlog.sys and press
<ENTER>.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 303 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

Error Log Analysis (R10.x-R11.x)

Access Logfiles Previous Daily Log Files
To access logfiles on release 10 and 11: 1. Login as MRService using Manager or Manager1
as the password.
1. Press the Windows key on keyboard.
2. Select the Windows Start button.
2. Select MR System Management > Diagnostics >
Logging Application UI. 3. Select Accessories > Windows Explorer.
3. To display the logfile, click [PROCEED]. 4. Navigate to G(Site)/LogDirectory.
Gradient Dump Log Files 5. Scroll down the list of displayed files and identify the
appropriate file.
Login as MRService using Manager or Manager1 as the
password. Note File format "logyyyymmdd0000.log". "yyyym-
1. Select the Windows Start button. mdd" represents the date the file was cre-
ated.
2. Select Accessories > Windows Explorer.
3. Navigate to G(Site)/LogDirectory.
4. From the Menu bar, select View > Details.
5. Sort the displayed files by date (the most recent file
should be at the top of the list).
6. Look for the GradDump.log file. Open the file to
review the contents.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 304 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

DS10
Power-on Self-test Errors
The Event Log file "el" resides in NVRAM and contains
messages related to the power-up sequence.

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

1 Corrupt firmware in Flash ROM. Floppy disk drive indicator lights 1. Reload firmware with latest available version.
and Host hangs. 2. Complete the Fail-Safe Loader procedure.
2 Corrupt firmware in Flash ROM. Floppy disk drive indicator lights 1. Reload firmware with latest available version.
and Host hangs. 2. Complete the Fail-Safe Loader procedure.
3 Corrupt firmware in Flash ROM. Floppy disk drive indicator lights 1. Reload firmware with latest available version.
and Host hangs. 2. Complete the Fail-Safe Loader procedure.
4 Header in ROM is invalid. The host computer does not boot. Replace the host computer.
6 Bad checksum or memory error was detected. Reconfigure memory, or reseat a memory DIMM.
7 Memory DIMMs in a memory bank do not match. Reconfigure memory, or reseat a memory DIMM.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 305 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x)
Power LED #Beeps Cause/Solution
• Green/Solid: System is ON
5 Initialization problem with PCI card.
• Yellow/Solid: System in Standby/Hibernation Mode To identify the defective card, remove them one at a
time. Reseat the problematic card. If problem
• Yellow/Flashing: System Error persists, replace the card.
• Red/Solid: System Error 6 Corrupted BIOS.
E-Buzzer Errors Complete a BIOS boot block recovery.
7 Defective motherboard.
#Beeps Cause/Solution Replace Host computer.
1 Processor missing, or incorrectly connected.
Replace Host computer.
2 Power supply in protected mode.
Replace power supply.
3 Memory module failure, or incompatibility.
Remove any recently installed RAM and reseat.
Verify modules loaded in correct order. If problem
persists, replace memory module.
4 AGP graphics card failure.
Remove graphics card and reseat. If problem
persists, replace graphics card.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 306 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

POST Errors

Error# Cause/Solution

0010 Lost, cleared or corrupted PC configuration. If PC is disconnected from the power supply for an extended
period of time, the battery providing power to the CMOS can discharge.
1. Verify the battery is properly seated.
2. If applicable, replace the battery.
3. Reconfigure the PC by running the Setup program.
0011 If PC is disconnected from the power supply for an extended period of time, the battery providing power for
maintaining the date and time can discharge.
1. Verify the battery is properly seated.
2. If applicable, replace the battery.
3. Use the Setup program to reset the date/time.
0012 PC configuration cleared or failed to initialize.
1. Reconfigure the PC by running the Setup program.
0031 Microcode for processor update not found in BIOS. BIOS version probably out of date and incompatible with
current processor.
1. Install latest BIOS.
Note Microcode update corrects some errata inside of the processor. If it fails to load, data loss/corruption may
result.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 307 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

POST Errors, continued

Error# Cause/Solution

0100 Keyboard key mistakenly pressed during Power-ON selftest.

1. Repeat the test verifying that nothing touches the keyboard during the selftest.
2. If the error persists, replace the keyboard.
0101 During selftest, keyboard reported an error.
1. Restart the PC.
2. If the error persists, replace the keyboard.
0102 System board selftest detected general failure on integrated keyboard controller.
1. Replace system board.
2. Replace Host computer.
0103 Keyboard disconnected.
1. Verify keyboard connector is securely seated.
2. If error persists, replace keyboard cable or keyboard.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 308 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

POST Errors, continued

Error# Cause/Solution

0105 Mouse detected error during selftest.

1. Verify mouse connector is securely seated.
2. If error persists, replace the mouse.
0106 Mouse not responding.
1. Verify mouse connector is securely seated.
2. If error persists, replace the mouse.
0108 System configuration determined mouse and keyboard connections are switched.
1. Turn the system OFF.
2. Switch the mouse and keyboard connectors.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 309 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

OCD Monitor (19" Option)

Adjustment Errors

Error Details

Entering "TMonitor" generates the following error 1. In the TSW, check the hardware configuration.
message: "Timeout occurred while reading reply of
2. At the Backend Miscellaneous Box, verify the RS232 cable is connected
command UC,OFF."
between the monitor and the BEB-X5 (BIB-X5) connector.
In TMonInfo, it is not possible to retrieve monitor 1. In the TSW, check the hardware configuration.
information using the Run Tools Information Console 2. In Gyrotool, verify you are authorized to use TMonInfo.
command.
Note Monitor information readout is only available for the Barco MWD321
and the LCD.
The OCD display the message "Keys Disabled" while 1. Use TSW/TMonitor and suspend the function to enable the monitor keys.
trying to access the On Screen Display menu. 2. Verify the RS232 cable is connected and the LCD chosen in the
hardware configuration file in the TSW.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 310 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-300

TC-300 Navigating Loops TC-300 Controller Error Codes
To verify the presence of a TC-300 controller:
1. Examine 12-digit unit part number on the serial tag.
2. Confirm digits nine and ten of the part number are
"16".
Operator’s Hold
Setup
Loop Loop
Next
Code Details
XX C Tune
Public Loops Er00 ROM checksum
Hold

Private Loops Er01 RAM test failure

Er02 Keyboard test failure
Er03 NOVRAM checksum
Hold
Calibration Configur-
Loop ation Loop Er04 - Er13 Interrupt error
Cal Conf
Er15 Asynchronous error
Er16 Bad calibration
Er17 RTD3 shorted
Er18 RTD3 open
Hold
Service
Loop
Serv Er19 Low temperature limit

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 311 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-300, continued

TC-300 Controller Error Codes, continued Code Details

Code Details Er36 Low pressure cutout

Er37 Unit error
Er20 Level warning
Er21 High temperature limit (variable)
Er22 High temperature limit (fixed)
Er23 RTD2 shorted
Er24 RTD2 open or not installed
Er25 RTD1 shorted
Er26 RTD1 open
Er27 Low flow
Er28 Low resistivity
Er29 High flow
Er30 High resistivity
Er31 Low level fault
Er32 Injector high temperature
Er33 Low temperature limit (fixed)
Er34 High temperature cutout
Er35 High pressure cutout

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 312 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System

Patient Front-end Interface (PFEI) (MM-) Errors on SECOER (Selected Coil Error)
PFEI Coil Status Register
Error Details Board
The PFEI Coil Status Register is located on the PFINT,
where the error and status from a selected board is PWR-F Power supply fault (1 or more PS PFINT
out of spec
displayed. Error/status signals are detected, collected
and formatted as indicated below. PICKUPF RF field exceeds limit set by COILINT
detector trip level
• Errors indicate a failure to withstand RF energy and
generate an interlock. TuneF Body coil tune fault QDD
BRCMALF Body receive coil malfunction QDD
• Status signals indicate the actual status of circuits or (RX-hybrid not secured)
functions as displayed in the Selected Coil Status
Table (SECOST). SC1MALF Surface coil 1 malfunction (not COILINT
detuned)
SC2MALF Surface coil 2 malfunction (not COILINT
detuned)
SY1MALF Synergy coil 1 malfunction (not SYNCOINT
detuned)
SY2MALF Synergy coil 2 malfunction (not SYNCOINT
detuned)
T/RS2 TxF TR switch transmit error TRSW
TRCMALF TR coil malfunction (not tuned) TRSW

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 313 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System, continued

Patient Front-end Interface (PFEI) (MM-), Status Details Board
continued
T/RSw RxF TR Switch receive fault TRSW
PFEI Coil Status Register, continued
TRCSTAT TR coil status (not connected) TRSW
Status signals on SECOST (Selected Coil Status)

Status Details Board

TRMITRB Transm_n Read back (inverted COILINT

transm)
CDISCER Coil discontinuity error (coil not COILINT/
connected or faulty CURRF1, SYNCOINT/
CURRF2, SY1NC, SY2NC, TRSW
TRCNC).
DtuneF Body coil detune fault QDD
BC RecF Body coil receive fault (RX hybrid QDD
not selected
CURRF1 Current fault 1 (less than 200 cq COILINT
400 mA)
CURRF2 Current fault 2 (less than 200 cq COILINT
400 mA)
SY1STAT Synergy coil 1 status (not SYNCOINT
connected)
SY1STAT Synergy coil 2 status (not SYNCOINT
connected)

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 314 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42)

Reporting System Faults Fault Codes
When an abnormal condition occurs, depending on the To be considered "Valid", a fault must always re-occur
type of problem encountered, the amplifier switches to when the amplifier is returned to normal operating
Standby or OFF. service and the test repeated.
Note The amplifier is continuously monitored for any If the fault does not always re-occur, it is considered to
over-drive situations and/or malfunctions. be "Intermittent".
Important! Only Valid faults warrant amplifier
component replacement.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 315 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

None Blinking front panel LEDs indicate that during power- 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
on, the System Controller detected a problem on the
2. If the problem persists, replace the RF deck.
board.
None Front panel LEDs are all on. The controller may be 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
locked in reset or power-on initialization. 2. If the problem persists, replace the RF deck.
00 During normal operation, this fault does not occur. It 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
NO FAULT can occur when the Fault=? command is issued when 2. If the problem persists, replace the amplifier.
there are no faults logged. This error could indicate a
problem with the system controller.
11 12 V supply below the specification minimum. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
12 V SUPPLY LOW 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace the amplifier.
12 +15 V system controller supply less than 12 V. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
+15 V SUPPLY 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
LOW
3. If the problem persists, replace the amplifier.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 316 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

13 +15 V system controller supply was greater than 18 V. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
+15 VOLT SUPPLY
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
HIGH
3. If the problem persists, replace the amplifier.
14 Low PA cathode bias voltage. This could be caused by 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
PA BIAS LOW a bias-supply problem, or a problem with a tube.
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace the PA tube(s) and
test.
4. If the problem continues to persist, re-install the PA
tube(s) replaced in step 3 (above) and replace the
RF deck.
15 A defect in a tube or a power supply problem could 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
PA HV LOW result in the PA voltage being unusually "loaded". 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace the PA tube(s) and
test.
4. If the problem continues to persist, re-install the PA
tube(s) replaced in step 3 (above) and replace the
amplifier.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 317 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

16 IPA high-voltage may be loaded (abnormally) by a 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

IPA HV LOW defect in the tube or a problem with the power supply.
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace the IPA tube.
4. If the problem continues to persist, reinstall original
tube and replace the amplifier.
17 24 V supply found to be below the startup threshold. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
24 V STARTUP 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
LOW
3. If the problem persists, replace the amplifier.
18 24 V supply dropped below 20 V. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
24 V SUPPLY LOW 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace the amplifier.
19 24 V supply exceeded 26.0 V. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
24 V SUPPLY HIGH 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace the amplifier.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 318 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

23 12 V supply exceeded specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

12 V SUPPLY HIGH
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace the amplifier.
24 -15 V system controller fell below -15 V. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
-15 V SUPPLY LOW
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace the amplifier.
25 -15 V system controller exceeded specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
-15 VOLTS OUT OF 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
LIMIT
3. If the problem persists, replace the amplifier.
26 IPA tube cathode bias voltage low, indicating a 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
IPA BIAS LOW problem with the tube or bias supply. 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace the IPA tube and
retest the amplifier.
4. If the problem continues to persist, reinstall original
tube. Replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 319 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

27 PA high-voltage exceeded upper limit, indicating an 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

PA HV HIGH un-regulated high-voltage supplies.
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace the amplifier.
28 IPA high-voltage exceeded hardware trip value. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
IPA HV HIGH
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace the amplifier.
29 Excessive PA plate current. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
PA PLATE 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
CURRENT HI
3. If the problem persists, verify the RF drive level to
the amplifier is not excessive, and the load
connected to the amplifier output is correct.
4. If both are within specification, replace the PA
tube(s).
5. If the problem continues to persist, reinstall original
tube(s). Replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 320 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

30 Excessive PA plate current. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

IPA PLATE
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
CURRENT HI
3. If the problem persists, verify the RF drive level to
the amplifier.
4. If within specification, replace the IPA tube.
5. If the problem continues to persist, reinstall original
IPA tube. Replace PA tube(s).
6. If the problem continues to persist, reinstall original
PA tube(s). Replace RF deck.
31 Excessive PA grid current. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
PA GRID CURRENT 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
HI
3. If the problem persists, verify the RF drive level to
the amplifier.
4. If within specification, check the load VSWR.
5. If within specification, replace PA tube(s).
6. If the problem continues to persist, reinstall original
PA tube(s). Replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 321 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

32 Excessive IPA grid current. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

IPA GRID
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
CURRENT HI
3. If the problem persists, verify the RF drive level to
the amplifier.
4. If within specification, replace the IPA tube.
5. If the problem continues to persist, reinstall original
IPA tube. Replace PA tube(s).
6. If the problem continues to persist, reinstall original
PA tube(s). Replace RF deck.
33 Possible restriction in air flow. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
PS AIR FLOW 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, check air filters.
4. If no air restriction is found, replace PS deck.
34 Possible power supply overload. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
50 V REG OVER 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
TEMP
3. If the problem persists, replace the amplifier.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 322 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

35 50 V supply below specification minimum. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

50 V SUPPLY LOW
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace the amplifier.
36 50 V supply exceeded specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
50 V SUPPLY HIGH
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace the amplifier.
39 Problem external to the amplifier. Low voltage step- n/a
LVSS RES IS TOO start resistor overheated.
HOT This error can occur if the amp has been turned ON/
OFF frequently over a short period of time.
41 Blocked/restricted cooling air flow through power 1. Clean the air filters.
PA AIR FLOW amplifier 2. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
3. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
4. If the problem persists, verify airflow around/
through amplifier is not restricted.
5. If no restrictions are found, replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 323 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

42 n/a 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

LOGIC
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
SHUTDOWN
3. If the problem persists, the problem probably exists
external to the amplifier. Verify MRI system is
supplying a logic "low" to the amplifier control line
using the parallel interface connection
(FRX3 - pin 22).
Note External amplifier logic control line must be
held "low" or the system faults.
4. If there is no problem with the logic control line,
replace the RF deck.
44 Digital Signal Processing (DSP) unit failure. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
DSP FAILURE 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 324 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

46 n/a 1. Confirm PA deck top cover panels are correctly

PA COVER OPEN placed and secure.
2. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
3. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
4. If the problem persists, there may be a damaged
microswitch beneath the top cover. Verify the
switch is working correctly.
Caution Do NOT operate the deck with the covers
removed. Proper cover placement is required for
proper tube cooling, RF shield integrity, and for the
prevention of electrical shock.
5. If the problem persists, and the switches are
functioning and the covers are properly placed/
secured, replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 325 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

47 n/a 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

PA AIR TOO HOT
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. Let amplifier idle in standby mode for several
minutes before driving it.
4. Confirm air exhaust port temperature is below
100o C.
Note Amplifier air exhaust port temperature can
withstand 110o C for 20 min. before faulting, or 120o C
for 10 min. At 150o C, the amplifier immediately faults.
5. Confirm room temperature is not exceeding 40o C.
6. Verify air intakes and exhaust ports are not
obstructed. Verify air filters are clean.
7. Check RF- and gating-on duty-cycles.
8. If the problem persists, replace RF deck.
48 n/a 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
PA AIR TEMP 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
MONITOR
3. If the problem persists, replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 326 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

50 n/a 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

NON FATAL FAULT
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
IN STBY
3. If the problem persists after amplifier successfully
transitions from OFF to Standby, replace amplifier.
59 Problem external to the amplifier. n/a
HVSS RES IS TOO
HOT Note Fault interlock protects high-voltage step-start
resistors from over heating after several high-voltage
turn-ons.
This error can occur if the amp has been cycled from
Standby to Operate frequently over a short period of
time.
61 PA tube(s) have low emission. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
PA BIAS CURRENT 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
LOW
3. If the problem persists after the amp transitions to
Standby, replace PA tube(s).
4. If the problem persists, reinstall original PA tube(s).
Replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 327 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

62 IPA tube(s) have low emission. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

IPA BIAS
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
CURRENT LOW
3. If the problem persists after the amp transitions to
Standby, replace IPA tube.
4. If the problem persists, reinstall original IPA tube.
Replace RF deck.
63 NVRAM Corrupted/lost NVRAM contents. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
FAILURE 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace RF deck.
64 Expected power output and system wattmeter do not 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
PMU FAILURE agree. 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 328 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

67 Inter-electrode arc detected within the tube. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

IPA HV ARC
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace IPA tube. Test
amplifier.
4. If the problem persists, reinstall original IPA tube.
Replace RF deck.
68 Inter-electrode arc detected within the tube. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
PA HV ARC 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace PA tube(s). Test
amplifier.
4. If the problem persists, reinstall original PA tube(s).
Replace RF deck.
71 Excessive RF drive to the amplifier. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
SSA OVERDRIVE 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, confirm RF drive level
applied to amplifier is within specification.
4. If the fault persists, replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 329 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

73 SSA reflected power exceeded 25 W., indicating IPA 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
SSA REFLECTED tube problem.
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
PWR
3. If the problem persists, replace IPA tube. Test
amplifier.
4. If the problem persists, reinstall original IPA tube.
Replace RF deck.
74 Digital Signal Processor (DSP) not communicating. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
DSP 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
COMM.FAILURE
3. If the problem persists, replace RF deck.
75 Digital Signal Processor (DSP) interrupt failure. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
DSP INTERRUPT System controller may be the problem. 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 330 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

76 Low IPA high-voltage at end of Turn-on cycle. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

IPA HV NO LOAD Possible defective tube. 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
LOW
3. If the problem persists, replace IPA tube. Test
amplifier.
4. If the problem persists, reinstall original IPA tube.
Replace amplifier.
77 IPA high-voltage below Startup threshold. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
IPA HV STARTUP 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
LOW 1
3. If the problem persists, replace IPA tube. Test
amplifier.
4. If the problem persists, reinstall original IPA tube.
Replace RF deck.
78 IPA high-voltage below startup nominal value. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
IPA HV STARTUP 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
LOW 2
3. If the problem persists, replace IPA tube. Test
amplifier.
4. If the problem persists, reinstall original IPA tube.
Replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 331 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

79 IPA high-voltage exceeded specification at end of 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

IPA HV NO LOAD Turn-on cycle.
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
HIGH
3. If the problem persists, replace IPA tube. Test
amplifier.
4. If the problem persists, reinstall original IPA tube.
Replace amplifier.
82 n/a 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
NOT TUNED THIS 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
FREQ
3. If the problem persists, amplifier commanded
(incorrectly) to shift to another operating frequency.
4. If the problem persists and the frequency is
correct, replace RF deck.
83 50 V supply below specification minimum. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
50 V STARTUP 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
LOW
3. If the problem persists, replace the amplifier.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 332 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

89 PA high-voltage low at the end of Turn-on cycle. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

PA HV NO LOAD Possible defective tube(s). 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
LOW
3. If the problem persists, replace PA tube(s). Test
amplifier.
4. If the problem persists, reinstall original PA tube(s).
Replace amplifier.
90 PA high-voltage below startup threshold. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
PA HV STARTUP 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
LOW 1
3. If the problem persists, replace PA tube(s). Test
amplifier.
4. If the problem persists, reinstall original PA tube(s).
Replace RF deck.
91 PA high-voltage below startup nominal value. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
PA HV STARTUP 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
LOW 2
3. If the problem persists, replace PA tube(s). Test
amplifier.
4. If the problem persists, reinstall original PA tube(s).
Replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 333 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

92 PA high-voltage exceeded specification at end of 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

PA HV NO LOAD Turn-on cycle.
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
HIGH
3. If the problem persists, replace amplifier.
93 Amplifier gated on in more than 250 ms or exceeded 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
AMP ENABLE LINE 50% duty cycle.
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, the amplifier is not the
problem.
94 Duty cycle or RF pulse width exceeded maximum safe 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
DUTY CYCLE value. 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists, the amplifier is not the
problem.
95 Amplifier output power greater than the level set by 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
FORWARD POWER the PWR = hhh command, or PWR = hhh command 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
HIGH set forward power trip point higher than that allowed
for the mode selected. 3. Confirm RF drive applied to amp. within spec.
4. If the problem persists, verify that trip points are
correctly set.
5. If the problem persists, replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 334 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

96 Excessive reflected power usually indicates a load 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

REFLECTED problem. 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
POWER HIGH
3. Confirm RF drive applied to amp. within spec.
Note If the problem persists, excessive drive and/or
load VSWR may be the cause.
4. If the problem persists and load conditions are
correct, replace RF deck.
97 Average forward power exceeded value set by DOSx 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
AVERAGE POWER command. 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
TRIP
3. Confirm amplifier not being over-driven, load is
correct, and pulse width and duty cycle are correct.
Note If the problem persists and conditions are cor-
rect, an incorrectly-set average power command may
be the problem.
4. If the problem persists and the average power
setting is correct, replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 335 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Fault Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

99 n/a 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

UNDEFINED
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
3. If the problem persists replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 336 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Warning Codes
The amplifier may issue warning codes after selected
tests, indicating an approaching condition that is not yet
serious enough to be considered a fault.
To be valid, the warning must be repeatable during the
selftests sequence, or the warning is only considered to
be "intermittent".
Important! Repeat and verify all selftest results before
replacing any component. If random and
intermittent warnings persist, replace the
amplifier.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 337 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Warning Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

01 PA tube plate current test level not attained. Plate 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
PA IP OUT OF LIMIT current approaching specification limit, possibly 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
indicating low emission.
3. Repeat test three times.
4. If the warning persists, replace PA tube(s). Retest.
5. If the warning persists, reinstall original PA tube(s).
Replace amplifier.
02 PA tube plate voltage out of limit during tube test. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
PA HV OUT OF 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
LIMIT
3. Repeat test three times.
4. If the warning persists, replace amplifier.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 338 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Warning Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

05 IPA tube plate current test level not attained, possibly 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
IPA IP OUT OF indicating low tube emission. 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
LIMIT
3. Confirm drive applied to amplifier is correct.
4. Repeat test three times.
5. If the warning persists, replace IPA tube. Retest
three times.
6. If the warning persists, reinstall original IPA tube.
Replace amplifier.
06 IPA tube plate voltage out of limit during tube test, 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
IPA HV OUT OF possibly indicating loss of power supply regulation. 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
LIMIT
3. Repeat test three times.
4. If the warning persists, replace amplifier.
33 Possible short in PA filament regulator. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
PA FILAMENT 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
VOLTAGE HIGH
3. Repeat test three times.
4. If the warning persists, replace PS deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 339 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Warning Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

34 Possible short in PA filament regulator. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

IPA FILAMENT
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
VOLTAGE HIGH
3. Repeat test three times.
4. If the warning persists, replace PS deck.
40 PA bias (plate) current below specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
PA BIAS CURRENT 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
LOW
3. Repeat test three times.
4. If the warning persists, replace PA tube(s). Repeat
test.
5. If the warning persists, reinstall original PA tube(s).
Replace amplifier.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 340 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Warning Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

41 PA bias (plate) current above specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

PA BIAS CURRENT
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
HIGH
3. Repeat test three times.
4. If the warning persists, replace PA tube(s). Repeat
test.
5. If the warning persists, reinstall original PA tube(s).
Replace amplifier.
42 IPA bias (plate) current below specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
IPA BIAS 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
CURRENT LOW
3. Repeat test three times.
4. If the warning persists, replace IPA tube. Repeat
test.
5. If the warning persists, reinstall original IPA tube.
Replace amplifier.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 341 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Warning Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

43 IPA bias (plate) current above specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

IPA BIAS
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
CURRENT HI
3. Repeat test three times.
4. If the warning persists, replace IPA tube. Repeat
test.
5. If the warning persists, reinstall original IPA tube.
Replace amplifier.
50 Excessive drive applied to amplifier, usually indicating 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
SSD PIN OUT OF a problem outside the amplifier. 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
LIMIT
Note SSD is the first stage. 3. Confirm drive applied to amplifier is correct.
4. Repeat test three times.
5. If the warning persists, replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 342 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Warning Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

51 Forward power output of SSD out of limit. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

SSD PFWR OUT
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
OF LIMIT
3. Confirm drive applied to amplifier is correct.
4. Repeat test three times.
5. If the warning persists, replace RF deck.
52 Power reflected back to SSD out of limit. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
SSD PREFL OUT
OF LIMIT Note IPA tube damage, or possible low emission 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
resulting in increased VSWR to the SSD. 3. Confirm drive applied to amplifier is correct.
4. Repeat test three times.
5. If the warning persists, replace IPA tube. Repeat
test.
6. If the warning persists, reinstall original IPA tube.
Replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 343 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Warning Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

53 Forward power output of the PA below specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

RF TEST: PA PFWR
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
LOW
3. Confirm drive applied to amplifier is correct.
4. Repeat test three times.
5. If the warning persists, replace PA tube(s). Repeat
test.
6. If the warning persists, reinstall original PA tube(s).
7. Replace IPA tube. Retest.
8. If the warning persists, reinstall original IPA tube.
Replace RF deck.
54 Forward power output of the PA above specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
RF TEST: PA PFWR Excessive drive often causes high amplifier forward 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
HI power.
3. Confirm drive applied to amplifier and amplifier
load are correct.
4. Repeat test three times.
5. If warning persists, replace PA tube(s). Repeat
test.
6. If the warning persists, reinstall original PA tube(s).
Replace RF deck.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 344 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Warning Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

55 Power reflected back to PA out of specification, 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

RF TEST: PA possibly caused by a mismatch between the amplifier
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
PREFL OUT OF and load.
LIMIT 3. Confirm load VSWR is at least 2:1
(optimally, 1.5:1 or less).
4. Repeat test three times.
5. If warning persists and load within specification,
replace RF deck.
56 IPA grid current out of specification, possibly caused 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
RF TEST: IPA IG by a faulty component in the IPA stage or PA input 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
OUT OF LIMIT circuitry.
3. Confirm RF drive level to amplifier is not
excessive.
4. Confirm load connected to the output of the
amplifier is correct.
5. Repeat test three times.
6. If warning persists, replace IPA tube and retest.
7. If warning persists, reinstall original IPA tube and
replace PA tube(s). Retest.
8. If warning persists, reinstall original PA tube(s).
Replace RF deck.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 345 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Warning Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

57 PA grid current out of specification, possibly caused 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

RF TEST: PA IG by a faulty component in the IPA stage and/or PA
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
OUT OF LIMIT stage.
3. Confirm RF drive level to amplifier is not
This could include all components up to and including excessive.
the RF output connector, its mate, and subsequent RF
cable and load. 4. Confirm load connected to the output of the
amplifier is correct.
5. Repeat test three times.
6. If warning persists, replace IPA tube and retest.
7. If warning persists, reinstall original IPA tube and
replace PA tube(s). Retest.
8. If warning persists, reinstall original PA tube(s).
Replace RF deck.
60 SSD gain below specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
RF TEST: SSD 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
GAIN LOW
3. Confirm RF drive applied to amplifier is correct.
4. Repeat test three times.
5. If the warning persists, replace RF deck.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 346 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Warning Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

61 SSD gain above specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

RF TEST: SSD
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
GAIN HIGH
3. Confirm RF drive applied to amplifier is correct.
4. Repeat test three times.
5. If the warning persists, confirm amplifier gain is
correct. Retest at least three times.
6. If the warning persists, replace IPA tube. Retest.
7. If the warning persists, reinstall original IPA tube.
Replace RF deck.
62 PA/IPA gain below specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
RF TEST: PA/IPA 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
GAIN LOW
3. Confirm RF drive applied to amplifier is correct.
4. Repeat test three times.
5. If the warning persists, replace IPA tube. Retest
three times.
6. If the warning persists, reinstall original IPA tube.
Replace PA tube(s). Retest.
7. If the warning persists, reinstall original PA tube(s).
Replace RF deck.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 347 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Warning Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

63 PA/IPA gain above specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

RF TEST: PA/IPA
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
GAIN HIGH
3. Confirm RF drive applied to amplifier is correct.
4. Repeat test three times.
5. If the warning persists, replace IPA tube. Retest
three times.
6. If the warning persists, reinstall original IPA tube.
Replace PA tube(s). Retest.
7. If the warning persists, reinstall original PA tube(s).
Replace amplifier.
64 PA plate voltage droop out of specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
RF TEST: PA HV 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
DROOP
3. Confirm RF drive applied to amplifier is correct.
4. Repeat test three times.
5. If the warning persists, replace PA tube(s). Retest.
6. If the warning persists, reinstall original PA tube(s).
Replace amplifier.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 348 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Warning Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

65 IPA plate voltage droop out of specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

RF TEST: IPA HV
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
DROOP
3. Confirm RF drive applied to amplifier is correct.
4. Repeat test three times.
5. If the warning persists, replace IPA tube. Retest.
6. If the warning persists, reinstall original IPA tube.
Replace amplifier.
66 PA plate current droop out of specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
RF TEST: PA IP 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
DROOP
3. Confirm RF drive applied to amplifier is correct.
4. Repeat test three times.
5. If the warning persists, confirm amplifier gain is
correct. Retest.
6. If the warning persists, replace PA tube(s). Retest.
7. If the warning persists, reinstall original PA tube(s).
Replace amplifier.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 349 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Warning Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

67 IPA plate current droop out of specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

RF TEST: IPA IP
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
DROOP
3. Confirm RF drive applied to amplifier is correct.
4. Repeat test three times.
5. If the warning persists, replace the IPA tube.
Retest.
6. If the warning persists, reinstall original IPA tube.
Replace amplifier.
68 Load VSWR exceeded expectations, possibly due to a 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.
RF TEST: OUTPUT severe mismatch between the amplifier and load. 2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
SWR HIGH
Note Load VSWR should not exceed 1.5:1 at rated 3. Confirm load is correct.
power.
4. Repeat test three times.
5. If the warning persists, retest amplifier
6. If the warning persists, retest amplifier with output
terminated in a good/guaranteed load.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 350 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Warning Codes, continued

Code Description Recommended Action(s)

69 PA plate droop out of specification. 1. Re-initialize the Amplifier.

RF TEST: OUTPUT
2. Restart the amplifier with the host MRI computer.
RF DROOP
3. Confirm RF drive level to amplifier is correct/
constant.
4. Repeat test three times.
5. If the warning persists, replace IPA and PA tube(s).
Retest
6. If the warning persists, reinstall original IPA and PA
tube(s). Replace RF deck.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 351 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table

Log Errors

PATSUP# Description Recommended Action(s)

1.0 No current through vertical brakes. Check the appropriate electrical schematic.
If output stage voltage of the PLC extension board is available
(error 1.1 not present) the error probably caused by open
connection between the vertical brake and PLC extension board.
1.1 After activation, no voltage on vertical brake. 1. Check for short circuit in vertical brake or
No PLC extension board voltage at the output stage for the cabling.
vertical brake. 2. Check for defective output stage of the PLC
extension board.
1.2 No current through vertical hold brake after activation. Check the appropriate electrical schematic.
If output stage voltage of the PLC extension board is available
(error 1.3 not present) the error probably caused by open
connection between the vertical hold brake and PLC extension
board.
1.3 After activation, no voltage on vertical hold brake. 1. Check for short circuit in vertical hold brake or
cabling.
No PLC extension board voltage at the output stage for the
vertical hold brake. 2. Check for defective output stage of the PLC
extension board.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 352 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Log Errors, continued

PATSUP# Description Recommended Action(s)

1.4 Control signal from solid state relay for upward movement after 1. Check for short circuit in solid state relay of up
activation is not available. movement or cabling.
No PLC extension board voltage at the output stage for the solid 2. Check for defective output stage of the PLC
state relay of the upward movement. extension board.
1.5 Control signal from solid state relay for downward movement after 1. Check for short circuit in solid state relay of down
activation is not available. movement or cabling.
No PLC extension board voltage at the output stage for the solid 2. Check for defective output stage of the PLC
state relay of the downward movement. extension board.
1.6 Vertical actuator motor thermal switch is active. Check the vertical actuator.
1.7 Vertical movement up time-out. 1. Check for defective Up-end switch or cabling.
Run the Table Switch Test.
Table-up movement activated. Up-end switch did not activate
within 15 seconds. 2. If no upward movement occurs after activation,
check the following parts: PLC Extension board,
solid state relay for up movement, vertical motor,
safety relay, and the cabling between these
parts.
3. Check for other error messages.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 353 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Log Errors, continued

PATSUP# Description Recommended Action(s)

1.8 Vertical movement down time-out. 1. Check for defective Down-end switch or cabling.
Run the Table Switch Test.
Table-up movement activated. Down-end switch did not activate
within 15 seconds. 2. If no downward movement occurs after
activation, check the following parts: PLC
Extension board, solid state relay for up
movement, vertical motor, safety relay, and the
cabling between these parts.
3. Check for other error messages.
1.9 Time-out Down-end switch, while moving upward. 1. Check for defective Down-end switch or cabling.
Run the Table Switch Test.
Table-up movement activated. Down-end switch did not
deactivate within 1 second. 2. If no upward movement after activation of the
upward movement, check the following parts:
PLC Extension board, solid state relay for up
movement, vertical motor, safety relay, and the
cabling between these parts.
3. Check for other error messages.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 354 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Log Errors, continued

PATSUP# Description Recommended Action(s)

1.10 While moving downward, time-out on the Up-end switch. 1. Check for defective Up-end switch or cabling.
Run the Table Switch Test.
Table downward movement activated. Up-end switch did no
deactivate within 1 second. 2. If no downward movement after activation of the
downward movement, check the following parts:
PLC Extension board, solid state relay for down
movement, vertical motor, safety relay, and the
cabling between these parts.
3. Check for other error messages.
1.11 Up-end and Down-end switches are both activated at the same 1. Check for defective switches or cabling. Run the
time. Table Switch Test.
2. Suspected parts include the Up-end switch,
Down-end switch, or cabling.
1.12 During vertical movement, the Out-end switch activates. Check the reference switch or cabling.
While the table operated in vertical mode, the reference switch
was deactivated.
1.13 After activation, no current through the horizontal brake. Check the appropriate electrical schematic.
If output stage voltage of the PLC extension board is available
(error 1.4 not present) error probably caused by open connection
between horizontal brake and PLC extension board.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 355 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Log Errors, continued

PATSUP# Description Recommended Action(s)

1.14 After activation, no voltage on the horizontal brake. 1. Check for short circuit in horizontal brake or
cabling.
No PLC extension board voltage at the output stage for activating
the horizontal brake. 2. Check for defective output stage of the PLC
extension board.
1.15 After activation, no current through the horizontal clutch. Check the appropriate electrical schematic.
If output stage voltage of the PLC extension board is available
(error 2.0 not present) error probably caused by open connection
between the clutch and PLC extension board.
2.0 After activation, no voltage on the horizontal clutch. 1. Check for short circuit in horizontal clutch or
cabling.
No PLC extension board voltage at the output stage for activating
the horizontal clutch. 2. Check for defective output stage of the PLC
extension board.
2.1 Not currently in use. n/a
2.2 While Out-end switch is active during horizontal movement, no Check Park switch an/or Reference switch. Run the
Park switch active. Table Switch Test.
Park switch indicates no table-top present, but Reference switch
is activated.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 356 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Log Errors, continued

PATSUP# Description Recommended Action(s)

2.3 Out-end switch time-out. Not deactivated after moving 5 seconds. 1. Check for defective Reference switch or cabling.
Run the Table Switch Test.
Table-in movement was active for more than 5 seconds, but
Reference switch did not deactivate. 2. If no horizontal movement occurs after activation
of horizontal movement, check the following
parts: PLC Extension board, servo amplifier,
horizontal motor, or safety relay.
3. Check for other error messages.
2.4 Host Move command time-out. Not active in 400 msec. 1. Check serial link between host computer and
patient support. Run the Communication Test.
Host computer must send a Move command to patient support
during a LTTS movement. Move command was not received. 2. The host software may be suspect.
2.5 In horizontal mode, the Up-end switch becomes inactive. Check the Up-end switch and cabling.
While the table was operating in horizontal mode, the Up-end
switch was deactivated.
2.6 Servo OK bit not active within 1.0 second. Check the servo amplifier.
While "Servo Enable" was activated, the servo amplifier did not
respond with "Servo OK".

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 357 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Log Errors, continued

PATSUP# Description Recommended Action(s)

2.7 After starting movement, no pulses received. Run the Horizontal Encoder Test.
No pulses were detected from the horizontal encoder after
activation of the horizontal movement.
2.8 LTTS positioning error. No Move command was received. Run the Horizontal Speed Test and Horizontal
Acceleration Test.
At the end of a LTTS movement, tabletop speed is zero, but the
tabletop reference point is not yet at magnet isocenter.
2.9 Initial position out of limits. 1. Check switch mechanical tolerances.
Tabletop position is compared with the reference position (zero) 2. Check for encoder missing pulses.
each time the Parking switch is activated. If difference is greater 3. Check slipping encoder.
than 5 mm., this error is generated.
2.10 +5 V detection failure. PLC extension board 5 volt missing. Check the PLC extension board.
Note A voltage regulator on the PLC extension board produces
the 5 V from 24 V.
2.11 +12 V detection failure. PLC extension board 12 volt missing. Check the PLC extension board.
Note A voltage regulator on the PLC extension board produces
the 12 V from 24 V.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 358 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Error Codes 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Log Errors, continued

PATSUP# Description Recommended Action(s)

2.12 -12 V detection failure. PLC extension board -12 volt missing. Check the PLC extension board.
Note A voltage regulator on the PLC extension board produces
the -12 V from 24 V.
2.13 Watch-dog PLC extension board reset. PLC outputs disabled. 1. Check the PLC
Watch-dog on PLC extension is inactive when it should be active. 2. Check the PLC extension board.
A continuous pulse-train from the PLC is converted into a DC 3. Check cabling between PLC and PLC extension.
level on the PLC extension board. DC level (active) not detected. Measure the pulse-train at the output of the PLC
and at the input of the PLC extension board. If
the pulse-train is present and the error remains,
replace the PLC extension board.
Note Connection between PLC extension and
PLC can also be measured by running the PLC
Output Test.
2.14 Bore light voltage not detected. 1. Check for a short in the bore light or cabling.
No PLC extension board voltage at the output stage for the bore 2. Check the PLC extension board output stage for
lights was detected. defects.
2.15 Light visor voltage not detected. 1. Check for a short in the light visor or cabling.
No PLC extension board voltage at the output stage for the light 2. Check the PLC extension board output stage for
visors was detected. defects.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 359 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

FUNCTIONAL CHECKS AND PROCEDURES

General Information Magnet
Check Boil Off
Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni)
Check Light Visor (New Intera Only)
Check Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance Freq.
Check Light Visor (NT Intera)
Check Body Coil Parameters
Helium Level Check (New Intera)
Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power)
Refill the Magnet
Check Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance Freq.
Check Body Coil Parameters Host Computer
Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni) Host Computer
Check Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance Frequency Disk Fragmentation Check (R7.x-R9.x)
Check Body Coil Parameters
DS10
Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera) Power-on Selftest
Check Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance Frequency Check DIGI Board
Check Body Coil Parameters Check Oxygen-VX1 Board (Graphics Adapter)
Coils Host Computer SMR Console Commands
Coil Identification Check Alpha Server 800
Coil Hex Value Power-on Selftest
Coil Positioning Storage Device LEDs
T10-NT Coil Identification Control Panel
ACS-NT Coil Identification
Surface Coil Connector Pin Location
Synergy Coil Connector Pin Location

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 360 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Host Computer, continued Network Hardware (R7.x-R9.x)

P2P Hardcopy (HC) Printer
XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x)
Select a P2P HC Printer
Power-on Self Test
DICOM Hardcopy (HC) Printer
Access the FRUs
Select a DICOM HC Printer
Replace System Disk Drive
Check Hardcopy Unit Function
Replace Data Hard Disk Drive
IIM CPU Power-ON Selftest
Replace Ethernet Controller (R10.3 Only)
Check P2P Test Box Interface
Update Network Controller Driver (R10.3 Only)
Print to File Option
Configure KZPBA-CC SCSI Controller
Configure On-board Adaptec SCSI Controller Network Hardware (R10.x-R11.x)
Set Date and Time Add a DICOM Printer
Edit a DICOM Printer
Reconstructor (Windows NT 4.0)
Delete a DICOM Printer
Install/Config Reconstructor Software
Check Pre-installed Reconstructor Software Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital
Reconstructor Power-ON Sequence
Connection (R7.x-R9.x)
Introduction
Reconstructor Configuration
Configure Local Host
Reconstructor (R10.x-R11.x)
Configure Domain Name
Check Reconstructor Software/Firmware Level
Configure Reconstructor
Network Configure Ethernet Switch for Full/Half Duplex Network
Connection
Ethernet Switch Configure Print Server
Retrieve MAC Address
Configure Ethernet Switch on Host
Set Network Switch to Factory Defaults
Virtual LAN Configuration on the Ethernet Switch

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 361 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Network, continued Cooling System

Network Configuration (R10.x-R11.x) Neslab Chiller HX-750
Default Settings Configuration Switches
Host (Hospital Connection) Dynamic IP Address Filling
Host (Hospital Connection) Static IP Address Start Up
Host (Hospital Connection) Speed/Duplex Settings Changing a Value
Host (Reconstructor Connection) Static IP Address Change Setpoint
Host (Reconstructor Connection) Speed/Duplex Setting Change PID Parameters
Configure Remote Nodes & TCP/IP Gateway (New/ Clean Condenser
Upgraded Intera R7.x-R9.x) Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style)
Configure EasyVision Controller Testing
Select Push-Node Sensor Testing
Configure TCP/IP Gateway Filling Procedure
Configure DICOM (New/Upgraded Intera R7.x-R9.x) Clean the Strainers
Configure Gyroscan DICOM Import/Export Start the Heat Exchanger
Configure Gyroscan RIS DICOM Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New Style)
Configure RIS DICOM with EasyLink Station Clean the Strainers
Configure DICOM HC Printer Flushing/Refilling
Delete a DICOM Node
Configure DICOM (New/Upgraded Intera R10.x-
R11.x)
Configure Non-Philips Remote DICOM Node (Without
Private Objects Support)
Configure Non-Philips Remote DICOM Node (With Private
Objects Support), continued
DICOM Verify

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 362 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Cooling System, continued Data Acquisition

Shield Cooler (SC R8) RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42)
Start the Shield Cooler Tube Bias Check
Stop the Shield Cooler Amplifier Manual Tube Test
Check Current Measurements RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42)
Check Valve Motor Field Replaceable Units
Charge Helium Gas to System Re-initialize the Amplifier
Open the valve on the adapter fitting slowly and vent until Replacement of Decks
the appropriate equalization pressure is obtained. Removal/Replacement of Tubes
Shield Cooler Gas Cleanup Removal/Replacement of Air Filters
Compressor Gas Cleanup
Gas Line Gas Cleanup Gradient Amplifiers
Leak Check Intera w/Copley 234 and 274
Leak Repair Power-ON
Outside Expander Cable Replacement Power-OFF
Compressor Shell High Temperature Switch Replacement Intera w/Copley 271
Air Cooling System (0.5T, 1.0T & 1.5T) Power-ON
Measure Air Volume Power OFF Intera w/Copley Dual Cabinet
Restart Processes (R10x and R11x Systems)
Restart Processes (R9 - VMS Systems)
Restart Processes (R10x and R11x Systems)
GCI Jumper Settings

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 363 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifiers, continued Image Quality

Intera w/Copley 274 Image Quality (All Intera R7.x-R9.x)
Pre Power-On Checks SNR - Floodfield
Power-ON SNR - Floodfield
Power-OFF Spatial Linearity Measurements
Verify Gradient Amplifier Parameters & Drivers in ASW Slice Profile Measurements
and TSW (R7.x-9.x Systems Only) Spatial Resolution Measurements
Set Internal Clock (Test Purposes) Automatic Surface Coil Scan
Configure 3 Power Modules (Test Purposes) Manual Surface Coil Scan
Check Gradient Orientation Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x)
Eddy Current Check How to Scan
Gyroscan (Omni, Power & Master) Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance Measurements
Determine System Resonance Frequency Viewing Scans
RF Power Reference & PU Coil Measurement
Determine Gradient Parameters Patient Positioning
Eddy Current Analysis NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table
Table Movement Vertical Adjustment
Table Movement Horizontal Adjustment
Light-visor Adjustment
TPAT Test Software
TSW via Dipswitches
Power-ON/Self Test

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 364 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Patient Positioning, continued

MT (Electrical) Patient Table
Synchronize Tabletop Maximum Displacement (SYNCLEN)
Power Supply Measurements
Control Unit Measurements
Communication Test
TWRAP Communication Loop-back Test
PLC Output Test
Horizontal Speed Test
Horizontal Acceleration Test
Light and Indicator Test
FPICU Switch Test
RPICU Switch Test
Table Switch Test
Tumble Wheel Test

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 365 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni)

The following procedures apply to the Intera 1.0T Omni. 6. For New Intera, from the TRSW board (PFEI)
remove both tune coil cables (MMFX2 and MMFX3).
QBC is factory adjusted. Typically, only a check of the
- or -
QBC is required to verify the MRL values as a reference.
For NT Intera, from the Tune Box in the penetration
Check Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance Freq. panel remove the ZDX2 and ZDX3.
1. Turn the gradient system OFF. Lower the table. 7. For New Intera, between MMFX2 connector Tune A
and the quadrature flux probe, connect a 50 ohm
2. Remove the following components:
coaxial cable.
• bridge section - or -
• PICU front cover For NT Intera, between ZDX2 connector Tune A and
the quadrature flux probe, connect a 50 ohm coaxial
• front cone cable.
1

The QBC and Hybrid box in front of the QBC should VIA Backside
16 2

now be visible. of Magnet 15 3

3. Remove the top cover from the left magnet. 14 4

Q-Flux Probe

4. From the backside of the magnet, mount the 13 5

quadrature flux probe in the QBC flux probe holder.

12
6

5. Position the holder in the center of the body coil with X2

the connector of the Q-flux probe pointed towards

7
11
MMF 8
the magnet backside. 10
9

Note The cable must be routed via the backside of TRSW

the magnet; holder positioned horizontally.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 366 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Check Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance Freq., 17. Determine the frequency offset and the Q-factor.
continued • Offset: < +10 kHz
8. Logon as Gyroscan.
• For New Intera, Q: > 260
See Philips Intera Software Logins (R7.x-R9.x) or (Typical value Q: > 290)
Intera Software Logins (R10.x-R11.x).
• For NT Intera, Q: > 300
9. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
18. If within specification, return the equipment to its
10. Enter Service Mode. original condition and continue to the Check Body
11. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools. Coil Parameters procedure.

12. Select Installation Procedures. 19. If either are outside specification, continue to the
Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance Frequency
13. Select Body Coil Procedures. procedure.
14. Select Adjust QBC Receive.
15. Start the measurement.
16. Select Autoscale.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 367 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Omni), continued

Check Body Coil Parameters 3. For New Intera, disconnect both Tube cables
MMFX2 and MMFX3.
Note To perform this procedure, both cone covers and
the bridge section must be mounted. - or -
For NT Intera, disconnect ZDX2 and ZDX3 at the
1. From the backside of the magnet, mount the Penetration Panel.
quadrature flux probe in the QBC flux probe holder.
4. For New Intera, connect a cable between Tune A at
2. Position the holder in the center of the body coil with connector MMFX2 and the quadrature flux probe.
the connector of the Q-flux probe pointed towards - or -
the magnet backside. For NT Intera, connect a cable between Tune A at
connector ZDX2 and the quadrature flux probe.
Note The cable must be routed via the backside of
the magnet. 5. Logon as Gyroscan.
1

VIA Backside
16 2
6. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
of Magnet 15 3
7. Enter Service Mode.
4
8. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
14

Q-Flux Probe

13 5 9. Select Installation Procedures.

10. Select Body Coil Procedures.
12
6
11. Select Determine Body Coil Parameters.
X2
7
12. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
11
MMF 8
10
9
13. Record the actual body coil frequency and Q-factor.
TRSW

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 368 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power)

The following procedures apply to the Intera 1.0T Power. 6. For New Intera, from the TRSW board (PFEI)
remove both tune coil cables (MMFX2 and MMFX3).
QBC is factory adjusted. Typically, only a check of the
- or -
QBC is required to verify the MRL values as a reference.
For NT Intera, from the Tune Box in the penetration
Check Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance Freq. panel remove the ZDX2 and ZDX3.
1. Turn the gradient system OFF. 7. For New Intera, between MMFX2 connector Tune A
and the quadrature flux probe, connect a 50 ohm
2. Remove the following components:
coaxial cable.
• bridge section - or -
• PICU front cover For NT Intera, between ZDX2 connector Tune A and
the quadrature flux probe, connect a 50 ohm coaxial
• front cone cable.
The QBC and Hybrid box in front of the QBC should 16
1
2

now be visible. VIA Backside

of Magnet 15 3

3. Remove the top cover from the left magnet. 14 4

Q-Flux Probe

4. From the backside of the magnet, mount the 13 5

quadrature flux probe in the QBC flux probe holder.

12
6

5. Position the holder in the center of the body coil with X2

7

the connector of the Q-flux probe pointed towards

11
MMF 8
10

the magnet backside.

9

TRSW

Note The cable must be routed via the backside of

the magnet; holder positioned horizontally.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 369 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Check Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance Freq., 17. Determine the frequency offset and the Q-factor.
continued • For New Intera: Q: > 250
8. Logon as Gyroscan. (Typical value Q: > 290). Offset: < +20 kHz
See Philips Intera Software Logins (R7.x-R9.x) or • For NT Intera: Q: > 250
Intera Software Logins (R10.x-R11.x). (Typical value Q: > 290). Offset: < +10 kHz
9. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. 18. If within specification, return the equipment to its
original condition and continue to the Check Body
10. Enter Service Mode.
Coil Parameters procedure.
11. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
19. If either are outside specification, continue to the
12. Select Installation Procedures. Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance Frequency
13. Select Body Coil Procedures. procedure.

14. Select Adjust QBC Receive.

15. Start the measurement.
16. Select Autoscale.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 370 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.0T-Power), continued

Check Body Coil Parameters 3. For New Intera, disconnect both Tube cables
MMFX2 and MMFX3.
Note To perform this procedure, both cone covers and
the bridge section must be mounted. - or -
For NT Intera, disconnect ZDX2 and ZDX3 at the
1. From the backside of the magnet, mount the Penetration Panel.
quadrature flux probe in the QBC flux probe holder.
4. For New Intera, connect a cable between Tune A at
2. Position the holder in the center of the body coil with connector MMFX2 and the quadrature flux probe.
the connector of the Q-flux probe pointed towards - or -
the magnet backside. For NT Intera, connect a cable between Tune A at
connector ZDX2 and the quadrature flux probe.
Note The cable must be routed via the backside of
the magnet. 5. Logon as Gyroscan.
16
1
2 6. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
VIA Backside

7. Enter Service Mode.

of Magnet 15 3

4
8. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
14

Q-Flux Probe

13 5
9. Select Installation Procedures.
12
6
10. Select Body Coil Procedures.
X2
11
7 11. Select Determine Body Coil Parameters.
MMF
12. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
8
10
9

TRSW 13. Record the actual body coil frequency and Q-factor.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 371 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni)

The following procedures apply to the Intera 1.5T Omni. 6. For New Intera, from the TRSW board (PFEI)
remove both tune coil cables (MMFX2 and MMFX3).
QBC is factory adjusted. Typically, only a check of the
- or -
QBC is required to verify the MRL values as a reference.
For NT Intera, from the Tune Box in the penetration
Check Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance panel remove the ZDX2 and ZDX3.
Frequency 7. For New Intera, between MMFX2 connector Tune A
1. Turn the gradient system OFF. Lower the table. and the quadrature flux probe, connect a 50 ohm
coaxial cable.
2. Remove the following components:
- or -
• bridge section For NT Intera, between ZDX2 connector Tune A and
the quadrature flux probe, connect a 50 ohm coaxial
• PICU front cover
cable.
• front cone 2
1
61

The QBC and Hybrid box in front of the QBC should

ediskcaB AIV
3 51 tengaM fo

now be visible. 4 41

3. From the backside of the magnet, mount the

eborP xulF -Q

quadrature flux probe in the QBC probe holder. 5 31

4. Position the holder in the center of the body coil with 6

21

the connector of the Q-flux probe pointed towards 7

11
2X

the magnet backside. 8

01
FMM
9

Note The cable must be routed via the backside of WSRT

the magnet; holder positioned horizontally.

5. Remove the left magnet top cover. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 372 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Check Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance 17. Determine the frequency offset and the Q-factor.
Frequency, continued • Offset: < +10 kHz
8. Logon as Gyroscan. (See R7.x-9.x or R10.x-11.x.)
• Q: > 190
9. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
18. If within specification, return the equipment to its
10. Enter Service Mode. original condition and continue to the Check Body
11. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools. Coil Parameters procedure.
19. If either are outside specification, continue to the
12. Select Installation Procedures.
Adjust Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance Frequency
13. Select Body Coil Procedures. procedure.
14. Select Adjust QBC Receive.
15. Click [PROCEED] to start the measurement.
16. Select Autoscale.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 373 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (Intera 1.5T-Omni), continued

Check Body Coil Parameters 3. For New Intera, disconnect both Tube cables
MMFX2 and MMFX3.
Note To perform this procedure, both cone covers and
the bridge section must be mounted. - or -
For NT Intera, disconnect ZDX2 and ZDX3 at the
1. From the backside of the magnet, mount the Penetration Panel.
quadrature flux probe in the QBC probe holder.
4. For New Intera, connect a cable between Tune A at
2. Position the holder in the center of the body coil with connector MMFX2 and the quadrature flux probe.
the connector of the Q-flux probe pointed towards - or -
the magnet backside. For NT Intera, connect a cable between Tune A at
connector ZDX2 and the quadrature flux probe.
Note The cable must be routed via the backside of
the magnet. 5. Logon as Gyroscan.
1

6. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].

16 2
VIA Backside
of Magnet 15 3
7. Enter Service Mode.
8. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
14 4

Q-Flux Probe
9. Select Installation Procedures.
13 5

10. Select Body Coil Procedures.

12
6 11. Select Determine Body Coil Parameters.
X2
11
7 12. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
MMF
10
9
8 13. Record the actual body coil frequency and Q-factor.

TRSW

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 374 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera)

The following procedures apply to the NT Intera. 6. For New Intera, from the TRSW board (PFEI)
remove both tune coil cables (MMFX2 and MMFX3).
QBC is factory adjusted. Typically, only a check of the
- or -
QBC is required to verify the MRL values as a reference.
For NT Intera, from the Tune Box in the penetration
Check Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance panel remove the ZDX2 and ZDX3.
Frequency 7. For New Intera, between MMFX2 connector Tune A
1. Turn the gradient system OFF. Lower the table. and the quadrature flux probe, connect a 50 ohm
coaxial cable.
2. Remove the following components:
- or -
• bridge section For NT Intera, between ZDX2 connector Tune A and
the quadrature flux probe, connect a 50 ohm coaxial
• PICU front cover
cable.
• front cone 16
1
2
VIA Backside

The QBC and Hybrid box in front of the QBC should of Magnet 15 3

now be visible. 14 4

Q-Flux Probe
3. From the backside of the magnet, mount the 13 5
quadrature flux probe in the QBC probe holder.
4. Position the holder in the center of the body coil with 12
6

the connector of the Q-flux probe pointed towards X2

11
7

the magnet backside. MMF

10
9
8

Note The cable must be routed via the backside of TRSW

the magnet; holder positioned horizontally.

5. Remove the left magnet top cover. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 375 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera), continued

Check Hybrid Box & QBC Resonance 17. Determine the frequency offset and the Q-factor.
Frequency, continued • For New Intera: Offset: < +10 kHz. Q: > 140
8. Logon as Gyroscan. (See R7.x-9.x or R10.x-11.x.)
• For NT Intera Power: Offset: < +10 kHz.
9. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. Q: > 190.
10. Enter Service Mode. • For NT Intera Master: Offset: < +10 kHz.
11. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools. Q: > 170.
18. If within specification, return the equipment to its
12. Select Installation Procedures.
original condition and continue to the Check Body
13. Select Body Coil Procedures. Coil Parameters procedure.
14. Select Adjust QBC Receive. 19. If either are outside specification, continue to the
Adjust Hybrid Box Resonance Frequency and
15. Click [PROCEED] to start the measurement.
procedure.
16. Select Autoscale.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 376 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil Adjustments (NT Intera), continued

Check Body Coil Parameters 3. For New Intera, disconnect both Tube cables
MMFX2 and MMFX3.
Note To perform this procedure, both cone covers and
the bridge section must be mounted. - or -
For NT Intera, disconnect ZDX2 and ZDX3 at the
1. From the backside of the magnet, mount the Penetration Panel.
quadrature flux probe in the QBC probe holder.
4. For New Intera, connect a cable between Tune A at
2. Position the holder in the center of the body coil with connector MMFX2 and the quadrature flux probe.
the connector of the Q-flux probe pointed towards - or -
the magnet backside. For NT Intera, connect a cable between Tune A at
connector ZDX2 and the quadrature flux probe.
Note The cable must be routed via the backside of
the magnet. 5. Logon as Gyroscan.
1

6. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].

16 2
VIA Backside
of Magnet 15 3
7. Enter Service Mode.
8. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
14 4

Q-Flux Probe
9. Select Installation Procedures. Select Body Coil
Procedures.
13 5

12
10. Select Determine Body Coil Parameters.
6

X2
11. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
7
11
MMF 8
12. Record the actual body coil frequency and Q-factor.
10
9
Note QBC: 63870000 (63850000 - 63890000)
TRSW Measured Q (QBC): 210 nominal (>170).

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 377 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Coils
Select one of the following topics: Coil Identification Check
• Coil Identification Check 1. Connect the surface coil to be checked.
• Coil Hex Value 2. Logon as TSW.
• Coil Positioning See Login as TSW (R7.x-R9.x) or Login as TSW
(R10.x-R11.x).
• T10-NT Coil Identification
3. Type: bdas and press <ENTER>.
• ACS-NT Coil Identification
4. Type: set paging always and press <ENTER>.
• Surface Coil Connector Pin Location
5. Type: run tools bcp frontend coilid and press
• Synergy Coil Connector Pin Location
<ENTER>.
6. Compare the result with the chart from the OEM
documentation.
7. If the coil ID is incorrect, type: run fun pfei auto and
press <ENTER>. All tests should pass without
errors.
8. If a "300 V error" appears, check the FEPSU
voltages.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 378 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Coils, continued
Coil Hex Value Coil Positioning
1. Connect the coil to be checked. For information on proper coil positioning/placement, see
the Reference Materials section.
2. Logon as TSW.
See Login as TSW (R7.x-R9.x) or Login as TSW
(R10.x-R11.x).
3. Type: run tools bcp logging and press <ENTER>.
4. Check the first page for hex numbers for connected
coils.
Note If two coils connected, two hex numbers
display.
5. Press <ENTER> until the display of information
ends.
6. To exit TBDAS, type: quit and press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 379 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Coils, continued
T10-NT Coil Identification

Hex Code (1) Hex Code (2)

Result Ident Ident Uid (1) Rid (1) Uid (2) Rid (2)
Coil NBR
ID #1 #2 (mV) (ohms) (mV) (ohms) Min. Max. Min. Max.

Pickup Coil 0 0 0 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a 09 0B 09 0B

Reserved 1 1 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Quad Body 2 2 2 2 1375 3437 1375 3437 0F 11 0F 11
Quad C-Spine 3 3 3 3 1633 4082 1633 4082 12 14 12 14
Quad Knee 4 4 4 4 1891 4727 1891 4727 15 17 15 17
Reserved 5 5 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Reserved 6 6 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Quad Head 7 27 25 21 20109 50227 13535 33838 DF F5 96 A5
Quad Neck 8 8 8 8 3266 8165 3266 8165 24 28 24 28
TMJ Left 10 10 10 10 4168 10420 4168 10420 2E 33 2E 33
TMJ Right 11 11 11 11 4684 11710 4684 11710 34 39 34 39
Endo-rectal 12 12 12 12 5242 13105 5242 13105 3A 40 3A 40
Extremity E1 13 13 13 13 5887 14718 5887 14718 41 48 41 48

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 380 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Coils, continued
T10-NT Coil Identification, continued

Hex Code (1) Hex Code (2)

Result Ident Ident Uid (1) Rid (1) Uid (2) Rid (2)
Coil NBR
ID #1 #2 (mV) (ohms) (mV) (ohms) Min. Max. Min. Max.

T-spine 14 14 14 14 6574 16435 6574 16435 49 50 49 50

Breast 15 15 15 15 7305 18263 7305 18263 51 59 51 59
Spine R1 16 16 16 16 8121 20303 8121 20303 5A 63 5A 63
Reserved 18 18 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Reserved 19 19 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Reserved 20 20 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Circular 1 21 21 21 21 13535 33838 13535 33838 96 A5 96 A5
Circular 3 23 23 23 23 14953 37383 14953 37383 B7 C9 B7 C9
Circular 4 24 24 24 24 18219 45548 18219 45548 CA DE CA DE
Reserved 25 25 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
L Spine 26 14 14 14 6574 16435 6574 16435 49 50 49 50
Neck Linear 27 8 8 8 3266 8165 3266 8165 24 28 24 28
Synergy S_CSP 36 26 25 23 20109 50227 14953 37383 DF F5 B7 C9

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 381 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Coils, continued
T10-NT Coil Identification, continued

Hex Code (1) Hex Code (2)

Result Ident Ident Uid (1) Rid (1) Uid (2) Rid (2)
Coil NBR
ID #1 #2 (mV) (ohms) (mV) (ohms) Min. Max. Min. Max.

Synergy S_C3SP 37 26 25 23 20109 50227 14953 37383 DF F5 B7 C9

Synergy S_CTSP 38 26 25 23 20109 50227 14953 37383 DF F5 B7 C9
Synergy S_TSP 39 26 25 23 20109 50227 14953 37383 DF F5 B7 C9
Synergy S_LSP 40 26 25 23 20109 50227 14953 37383 DF F5 B7 C9
Synergy S_TLSP 41 26 25 23 20109 50227 14953 37383 DF F5 B7 C9
Synergy S_TLSSP 42 26 25 23 20109 50227 14953 37383 DF F5 B7 C9
Synergy S_SSP 43 26 25 23 20109 50227 14953 37383 DF F5 B7 C9

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 382 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Coils, continued
ACS-NT Coil Identification

Hex Code (1) Hex Code (2)

Result Ident Ident Uid (1) Rid (1) Uid (2) Rid (2)
Coil NBR
ID #1 #2 (mV) (ohms) (mV) (ohms) Min. Max. Min. Max.

Pickup Coil 0 0 0 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a 09 0B 09 0B

Reserved 1 1 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Quad Body 2 2 2 2 1375 3437 1375 3437 0F 11 0F 11
Quad C-Spine 3 3 3 3 1633 4082 1633 4082 12 14 12 14
Quad Knee 4 4 4 4 1891 4727 1891 4727 15 17 15 17
Spectro H-Head 5 5 5 5 n/a n/a n/a n/a 18 1B 18 1B
Spectro P-Head 6 6 6 6 n/a n/a n/a n/a 1C 1F 1C 1F
Quad Head 7 7 7 7 2879 7197 2879 7197 20 23 20 23
Quad Neck 8 8 8 8 3266 8165 3266 8165 24 28 24 28
TMJ Left 10 10 10 10 4168 10420 4168 10420 2E 33 2E 33
TMJ Right 11 11 11 11 4684 11710 4684 11710 34 39 34 39
Endo-rectal 12 12 12 12 5242 13105 5242 13105 3A 40 3A 40
Extremity E1 13 13 13 13 5887 14718 5887 14718 41 48 41 48

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 383 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Coils, continued
ACS-NT Coil Identification, continued

Hex Code (1) Hex Code (2)

Result Ident Ident Uid (1) Rid (1) Uid (2) Rid (2)
Coil NBR
ID #1 #2 (mV) (ohms) (mV) (ohms) Min. Max. Min. Max.

Breast 15 15 15 15 7305 18263 7305 18263 51 59 51 59

Spine R1 16 16 16 16 8121 20303 8121 20303 5A 63 5A 63
Spectro P-60 18 18 18 18 10012 25030 10012 25030 6F 7A 6F 7A
Spectro P-100 19 19 19 19 11088 27720 11088 27720 7B 87 7B 87
Spectro P-140 20 20 20 20 12248 30620 12248 30620 88 95 88 95
Circular 1 21 21 21 21 13535 33838 13535 33838 96 A5 96 A5
Circular 3 23 23 23 23 14953 37383 14953 37383 B7 C9 B7 C9
Circular 4 24 24 24 24 18219 45548 18219 45548 CA DE CA DE
Reserved 25 25 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Neck Linear 27 8 8 8 3266 8165 3266 8165 24 28 24 28
Synergy S_CSP 36 26 25 23 20109 50227 14953 37383 DF F5 B7 C9
Synergy S_C3SP 37 26 25 23 20109 50227 14953 37383 DF F5 B7 C9

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 384 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Coils, continued
ACS-NT Coil Identification, continued

Hex Code (1) Hex Code (2)

Result Ident Ident Uid (1) Rid (1) Uid (2) Rid (2)
Coil NBR
ID #1 #2 (mV) (ohms) (mV) (ohms) Min. Max. Min. Max.

Synergy S_CTSP 38 26 25 23 20109 50227 14953 37383 DF F5 B7 C9

Synergy S_TSP 39 26 25 23 20109 50227 14953 37383 DF F5 B7 C9
Synergy S_LSP 40 26 25 23 20109 50227 14953 37383 DF F5 B7 C9
Synergy S_TLSP 41 26 25 23 20109 50227 14953 37383 DF F5 B7 C9
Synergy S_TLSSP 42 26 25 23 20109 50227 14953 37383 DF F5 B7 C9
Synergy S_SSP 43 26 25 23 20109 50227 14953 37383 DF F5 B7 C9
Synergy Cardiac n/a 32 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Synergy Flex-M n/a 47 47 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Synergy Body n/a 43 43 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Synergy Pediatric n/a 75 75 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Synergy Head/ n/a 85 85 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Neck

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 385 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Coils, continued
Surface Coil Connector Pin Location
Pin Description
10 9 9. SCXT1 (coil ID) See tune 1
10. Select XA See Select 1
8 7
Coax Connect. +9.9 V +0.2 V
5 1 Coax
Connection
1. Check for missing units for pins 5-8:
a. Select the correct system.
b. Refer to the correct coil id chart.
Note See T10-NT Coil Identification or ACS-
NT Coil Identification.
Pin Description

1. Detune Voltage 300 V +30 V

5. Current Supply 200/400 mA +10% at Umax > 7 V and <
13 V. After coilid software selected 200
or 400 mA for the identified coil.
7. SCXT2 Range: 0 - 28 V; Imax = 8 mA;
R > 3 k and < 64 k; I = 0.4 mA +1.5%
U < 0.8 V, 10 mA
8. Select XB U > -4 V and < 0 V; U > 7 V and < 13 V
R = 10k +5% and C = < 10 nF
R (coil switch) > 100 E and < 400 E Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 386 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Coils, continued
Synergy Coil Connector Pin Location Pin Description

8. RF8-Out (Ch 8) Centerpin Coax Conn.: +9.9 V +0.2 V

1 8 9. 0 V 0V
9
10 16 10. Sel A -10.7 V
2 7
11 17 11. +12 V +12 V
18 15
3 14 6
12. Detune Voltage 300 V +30 V
12
13
13. Ref GND 0V
4 5
14. Sel 0 -10.7 V
15. Status +12 V
16. Tune A +24 V
Pin Description 17. -5 V -5.1 V
1. RF1-Out (Ch 1) Centerpin Coax Conn.: +9.9 V +0.2 V 18. Tune B +2.0 V
2. RF5-Out (Ch 5) Centerpin Coax Conn.: +9.9 V +0.2 V
1. Check for missing units for pins 5-8:
3. RF3-Out (Ch 3) Centerpin Coax Conn.: +9.9 V +0.2 V
a. Select the correct system.
4. RF7-Out (Ch 7) Centerpin Coax Conn.: +9.9 V +0.2 V
b. Refer to the correct coil id chart.
5. RF2-Out (Ch 2) Centerpin Coax Conn.: +9.9 V +0.2 V
Note See T10-NT Coil Identification or ACS-
6. RF6-Out (Ch 6) Centerpin Coax Conn.: +9.9 V +0.2 V
NT Coil Identification.
7. RF4-Out (Ch 4) Centerpin Coax Conn.: +9.9 V +0.2 V

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 387 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Magnet
Select one of the following topics: Check Boil Off
• Check Boil Off This procedure is for the IGC F2000 0.5T, 1.0T, and 1.5T.
• Check Light Visor (New Intera Only) The following preconditions must be observed:
• Check Light Visor (NT Intera) • The cold head should have been in operation for
greater than five days.
• Helium Level Check (New Intera)
• The cold head system should run 24 hours daily
• Refill the Magnet
during the measuring period.
• During measuring period, no rampings should occur.
• During measuring period, no Helium refills should
occur.
1. Record the time, compressor hour counter, and
Helium level
2. After four weeks (minimum) record the same
information as detailed in step 1.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 388 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Magnet, continued
Check Boil Off, continued Check Light Visor (New Intera Only)
3. Calculate how many hours have passed between the This procedure is for the New Intera 0.5T, 1.0T, and 1.5T.
two readings.
Caution Observe all the appropriate safety
4. If the cold head system has been working during the
conditions when working with a laser.
entire period, check the compressor hour counter.
5. Calculate the boil off. The light visor (factory mounted/adjusted) is positioned
inside the front cone cover.
IGC F2000 0.5T, 1.0T, and 1.5T: 0.065 liters/hr. Max.
827 mm +5 mm is the specified distance between the
6. If boil off is out of spec and if the cold head has been
light visor and the isocenter point. To verify the laser
installed at least 18-24 months, a rebuild or
beam position, a cross is drawn at the bottom of the front
replacement may be needed.
cone cover. The lines have a width of 10 mm +5 mm.
• Record the magnet serial number and call
1. Remove the bridge section.
(518) 782-1122 to obtain magnet information.
2. Verify beams at the cone cover bottom are within the
• Verify if the cold head can be rebuilt in the field.
marked cross at the bottom of the cone cover.
Check Light Visor (NT Intera)
To check/adjust the light visor for NT systems, see Light
Visor Adjustments in Alignment & Calibration.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 389 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Magnet, continued
Helium Level Check (New Intera) Manual Check (New Intera Only)
Note The following procedures apply to 0.5T 1. Inside the magnet room, remove the Filter Panel
(Standard) 1.0T (Omni, Power) and covers.
1.5T (Omni, Power, Master) systems. 2. Using the RMMU red and black connector, connect a
Software Check DVM.
1. Logon as Gyroscan. 3. Verify the green Power LED is lit. In order to check
the level, the power must be ON.
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
3. Select Read Helium Level. The system displays the 4. Press and hold the [HELIUM READ] button for 30
seconds. The Probe Active LED should light.
Helium level percentage:
5. On the DVM, read the HL1 - Helium Level indicator
• For 0.5T (Standard): >30%
and record the level.
• For 1.0T (Omni, Power): >30%
• 1 mV = 1%
• For 1.5T (Omni, Power, Master): >30%
Helium Level Check (NT Intera)
Note >30% is the minimum safe operating level
See NT Helium Read.pdf for section 1.2 - 1.4.
for liquid helium in the magnet.
Access Helium History File (R9.x and Lower)
1. Logon as gyrotest.
2. At the $ prompt, type: set def gyro$site and press
<ENTER>.
3. Type: type /page helium.dat and press <ENTER>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 390 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Magnet, continued
Refill the Magnet Prerequisites
When filling the magnet with liquid Helium: Before starting the following refill procedure, ensure the
following items are readily available:
• Use positive pressure (in closed systems) to prevent
air contamination of the cryogen when storing/ • rubber stopper, 6 mm OD (a 12 mm ID elastic hose
transferring liquid helium. can be substituted)
• Do not allow liquid air, produced by condensation on • liquid Helium transfer line (Part# 43114-01)
transfer lines, to run down into the container opening. • non-magnetic high pressure Helium gas cylinder (a
It may freeze and block the release of Helium vapors. self-pressuring dewar can also be used)
• Keep pressure relief devices free and clear. • non-magnetic ladder or suitable platform
• Observe all safety warnings/cautions regarding the • non-magnetic liquid helium dewars
Helium fill procedure.
• Helium gas pressure regulator, appropriate fittings,
• Check the magnet temperature before attempting to and hose.
refill the magnet if measurements indicate the magnet
is empty. • Protective gloves and face shielding
Important! Even though it is possible to refill the • transfer line dewar end extension (Part# 43114-02)
Helium vessel while the magnet is at field, • When completing a bottom-fill, transfer line magnet-
there is a chance that warm Helium may be end extension (Part# 43114-03) or transfer line
blown down the stack into the vessel. This magnet-end extension set (Part# 43114-04).
will quench the magnet.
Note If problems arise during the transfer, see
Important! It is very important the person completing Troubleshooting Liquid Helium Transfer.
this procedure be fully trained in transferring
liquid Helium. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 391 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Magnet, continued
Refill the Magnet, continued 6. If less than 3 mbar:
Top Filling Procedure a. Turn the B0 heater ON until the pressure is higher
than 3 mbar.
Caution Only qualified personal should perform
this procedure. Quench could occur if b. Turn the B0 heater OFF.
performed incorrectly. 7. On the supply end of the liquid Helium transfer line,
screw the transfer line dewar end extension.
1. Verify all the Prerequisites for this procedure have
been met. 8. If there is no liquid Helium in the magnet, complete
the Bottom Filling Procedure.
2. Verify all safety precautions have been met.
- or -
3. Record the Helium level. Complete the Helium
Level Check (New Intera) procedure. If there is liquid Helium in the magnet, continue to
step 9 of this procedure.
4. Verify the magnet has the appropriate amount of
pressure (3 - 10 mbar): 9. Verify spare compression fittings are in position on
both sides of the transfer line.
5. If greater than 10 mbar:
a. Open the vent ball valve.
b. All the magnet to vent until 10 mbar or less is
achieved.
c. Close the vent ball valve.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 392 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Magnet, continued
Refill the Magnet, continued 15. Place the dewar in its final position.
Top Filling Procedure, continued 16. So ice or frozen air in the dewar does not obstruct
10. Before inserting the transfer line, position the liquid the line entrance, raise the transfer line 20 mm.
Helium dewar in its final location if possible. 17. Where the supply line enters the dewar, tighten the
Note If may not be possible to insert the transfer compression fittings.
line into the dewar when the dewar is located Important! Frozen material could still restrict/block the
in the magnet room, because of ceiling line. If this occurs, remove the line and
height. If so, position the dewar so the trans- warm it to room temperature.
fer line can be inserted, and move the dewar
into the magnet room after inserting the 18. On top of the magnet, open the ball valve.
transfer line. 19. Close the dewar vent valve.
11. Vent (slowly) the supply dewar to near atmospheric 20. Remove the stopper from the magnet side of the
pressure. transfer line.
12. Before inserting the transfer line into the dewar:
Caution When removing the stopper, avoid
13. Use a rubber stopper to close the exit on the magnet contact with the liquid and/or cold vapor.
side of the transfer line. Burns could result if it comes into contact
- or - with eyes or skin.

Position a rubber hose over the transfer line and 21. Increase the pressure on the supply dewar
close it by bending the hose. (Maximum: 140 mbar, 2 psig).
14. On top of the dewar, open the ball valve. Insert the
transfer line (slowly) into the dewar so it touches the
bottom. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 393 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Magnet, continued
Refill the Magnet, continued 28. Every 15 minutes, monitor the transfer by taking a
Helium level measurement, then estimate the time
Top Filling Procedure, continued
the transfer should complete.
22. Before inserting the transfer line into the magnet,
verify a slow/steady liquid Helium stream is moving Note Assume a transfer speed of between 250 -
through the transfer line. 550 liters/hour. Maximum transfer pressure is
350 mbar (5 psig).
Note Flowing liquid Helium produces a heavy
plume and distinctive appearance. The level stops increasing on the Helium indicator
when the supply dewar runs out of Helium. The
23. Remove the compression fitting to open the LHe port dewar should produce a whistle, and the dewar
on top of the magnet. supply pressure will drop.
24. Insert (slowly) the delivery end of the transfer line
until it touches the bottom.
25. Tighten the transfer line compression fitting.
26. Use the hoses, fittings, and regulator to increase the
pressure to maintain 350 mbar (5 psig) during the
transfer.
27. Calculate the estimated LHe refill level.
Note Assume an efficiency of 80%.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 394 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Magnet, continued
Refill the Magnet, continued 34. Disconnect the transfer line from the supply dewar.
Top Filling Procedure, continued 35. Cap it off.
29. Immediately open the supply dewar vent valve. 36. Ninety minutes after the transfer is complete, record
Close the valve on the Helium gas supply bottle. the Helium level measurement.

DANGER When the supply dewar empties, Note Reading levels measured earlier may not be
warm Helium gas may flush from the accurate.
high-pressure cylinder, through the 37. Check the status of the differential pressure switch to
supply dewar, and into the magnet. verify adequate pressure in the magnet
This may result in a magnet quench if 38. If the switch is closed, sufficient pressure exists to
it is at field, or it may prevent continue.
successful magnet ramping. The
magnet may quench during or shortly - or -
after ramping the magnet to field. If the switch is open:
Wait at least eight hours before a. Turn the B0 heater ON until the differential
ramping the magnet if warm gas does pressure switch remains closed
enter the magnet.
b. Continue with the refill.
30. Once the transfer is complete, retrieve the
compression fitting to close the fill port.
31. On top of the magnet, close the vent ball valve.
32. Remove the transfer line from the magnet.
33. Replace the plug in the fill port. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 395 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Magnet, continued
Refill the Magnet, continued c. Four extension tubes (one with an non-threaded
non-metallic tip) are included in the transfer line
Bottom Filling Procedure
magnet end extension set. Position all four tubes
within reach from the top of the magnet.
Caution Only qualified personal should perform
this procedure. Quench could occur if d. Insert the non-metallic tube tip partially into the
performed incorrectly. magnet. Do not let go of the tube.

1. Attach the transfer line magnet end extension to the e. Screw another extension tube onto the tube in
delivery end of the liquid Helium transfer line. the magnet and partially lower it into the magnet.

2. Remove the compression fitting to open the LHe fill f. Repeat step e for the remaining two tubes.
port on top of the magnet. g. Position the transfer line over the extension
3. Insert (slowly) the transfer line delivery end into the tubes.
magnet until it reaches the bottom. h. Screw the assembled extension tube onto the
4. On the transfer line, tighten the compression fitting. transfer line.

Note You must have a 730 mm clearance (minimum) i. Insert the transfer line the rest of the way into the
above the magnet in order to use the transfer line magnet until it hits bottom.
magnet end extension. j. Tighten the compression fitting on the transfer
5. If you do not have the 730 mm minimum clearance: line.

a. Position the transfer line magnet end within reach

from the top of the magnet.
b. Remove the compression fitting to open the LHe
fill port on the top of the magnet. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 396 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Magnet, continued
Refill the Magnet, continued 12. Where the supply line enters the dewar, tighten the
compression fittings.
Bottom Filling Procedure, continued
6. Verify spare compression fittings are in position on Important! Frozen material could still restrict/block the
both sides of the transfer line. line. If this occurs, remove the line and
warm it to room temperature.
7. Before inserting the transfer line, position the liquid
Helium dewar in its final location if possible. 13. On top of the magnet, open the ball valve.

Note If may not be possible to insert the transfer 14. Close the dewar vent valve.
line into the dewar when the dewar is located 15. Remove the stopper from the magnet side of the
in the magnet room, because of ceiling transfer line.
height. If so, position the dewar so the trans-
fer line can be inserted, and move the dewar Caution When removing the stopper, avoid
into the magnet room after inserting the contact with the liquid and/or cold vapor.
transfer line. Burns could result if it comes into contact
8. Vent (slowly) the supply dewar to near atmospheric with eyes or skin.
pressure.
16. Increase the pressure on the supply dewar
9. On top of the dewar, open the ball valve. Insert the (Maximum: 140 mbar, 2 psig).
transfer line (slowly) into the dewar so it touches the
bottom.
10. Place the dewar in its final position.
11. So ice or frozen air in the dewar does not obstruct
the line entrance, raise the transfer line 20 mm.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 397 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Magnet, continued
Refill the Magnet, continued 20. Immediately open the supply dewar vent valve.
Close the valve on the Helium gas supply bottle.
Bottom Filling Procedure, continued
17. Use the hoses, fittings, and regulator to increase the DANGER When the supply dewar empties,
pressure to maintain 350 mbar (5 psig) during the warm Helium gas may flush from the
transfer. high-pressure cylinder, through the
18. Calculate the estimated LHe refill level. supply dewar, and into the magnet.

Note Assume an efficiency of 80%. This may result in a magnet quench if

it is at field, or it may prevent
19. Every 15 minutes, monitor the transfer by taking a successful magnet ramping. The
Helium level measurement, then estimate the time magnet may quench during or shortly
the transfer should complete. after ramping the magnet to field.
Note Assume a transfer speed of between 250 - Wait at least eight hours before
550 liters/hour. Maximum transfer pressure is ramping the magnet if warm gas does
350 mbar (5 psig). enter the magnet.
The level stops increasing on the Helium indicator
when the supply dewar runs out of Helium. The 21. Once the transfer is complete, retrieve the
dewar should produce a whistle, and the dewar compression fitting to close the fill port.
supply pressure will drop.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 398 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Magnet, continued
Refill the Magnet, continued 29. If the switch is closed, sufficient pressure exists to
continue.
Bottom Filling Procedure, continued
22. On top of the magnet, close the vent ball valve. - or -

23. Remove the transfer line from the magnet. If the switch is open:

24. Replace the plug in the fill port. a. Turn the B0 heater ON until the differential
pressure switch remains closed
25. Disconnect the transfer line from the supply dewar.
b. Continue with the refill.
26. Cap it off.
27. Ninety minutes after the transfer is complete, record
the Helium level measurement.
Note Reading levels measured earlier may not be
accurate.
28. Check the status of the differential pressure switch to
verify adequate pressure in the magnet

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 399 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Host Computer
Disk Fragmentation Check (R7.x-R9.x) 3. If an error results, type: anal/disk/repair {dev name}
Note The following procedure applies to all Host and press <ENTER>.
computers. Note This should correct for any bad sectors on
the disk.
1. Open a DCL window.
- or -
a. Logon as System.
If the system responds with a "$" prompt, the disk is
b. From the pop-up menu, select 1 - Exit to DCL.
not fragmented.
2. At the DCL prompt ($), type: anal/disk {drive logical
- or -
name} and press <ENTER>.
If the system responds with a header, the disk is
Note To find drive logical names, type: sh dev.
fragmented.
Press <ENTER>. Typical disk number is
DKA0 for software and DKA100 for images.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 400 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

DS10
Select one of the following topics: Check DIGI Board
• Power-on Selftest OpenVMS must be up and running in order to complete
the following procedure and test the functionality of the
• Check DIGI Board
DIGI Board.
• Check Oxygen-VX1 Board (Graphics Adapter)
1. On the DIGI Board BHX1 connector, mount a TC420
• Host Computer SMR Console Commands loopback connector.
Power-on Selftest 2. Logon as TSW.
For details on the potential power-on selftest errors, see Note See also Test Software (TSW).
Power-on Self-test Errors in the Error Codes section.
3. Type: twrap and press <ENTER>.
4. Type: run functional termport and press
<ENTER>. A prompt appears indicating an option to
test all of the ports subsequently.
5. Type: y and press <ENTER>. A message should
appear indicating the test was successful.
6. Type: quit and press <ENTER>.
7. To end the session, type: logo and press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 401 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

DS10, continued
Check Oxygen-VX1 Board (Graphics Adapter) To show what devices are present in the system:
No jumpers or settings are available on the graphics 1. At the SRM console, type: sh dev and press
adapter. <ENTER>.
To test the graphics adapter: 2. In DCL, type: $sh dev and press <ENTER>.
1. To test the adapter, access SRM mode. Note Knowing which devices are present can assist
2. Enter the test& command. with troubleshooting. VMS results may not
appear the same, because the firmware uses dif-
All the hardware is tested on the lowest software ferent device names.
level, including the graphics adapter.
Host Computer SMR Console Commands
Field Replaceable Units
• PCI Riser Card Command Details

• CPU Fan show device List device components registered during

sh dev boot.
• Power Supply
sh |more Show environment variables with pipe to more
• CD ROM Drive (5.25" - half height 40x) (pause)

• System Hard Disk Drive (18 GB SCSI Hard Drives) alphabios Configuration of SCSI components

• Floppy Disk (1.44 Mb) sh config Problem diagnosis

more el POST list logfile
• Data Hard Disk Drive (18 GB SCSI Hard Drives)
cat el POST list logfile without pause
• Memory (RAM Memory 512 Mb - 4 x 128 Mb)

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 402 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Alpha Server 800

Select one of the following topics: Storage Device LEDs
• Power-on Selftest These indicators provide status information on the hard
drive.
• Storage Device LEDs
• Control Panel
Power-on Selftest
Note The following procedure applies to 0.5T
(Standard) 1.0T (Omni, Power) and 1.5T (Omni,
Power, Master) systems.
Disk Present
1. In the equipment room (at the Mains Distribution
Fault
Unit) use circuit breaker F5 to turn ON the mains Activity
supply to the operator console.
2. Using the Mains switch on the back of the monitor,
turn the operator console display ON.
3. Turn the host computer ON. HDD LED Details

4. In the operator equipment cabinet, turn the Mains Activity (Green) Indicates disk activity when lit.
switch on the back side of the miscellaneous box to Fault (Amber) n/a
ON.
Disk Present (Green) Indicates drive installed in slot.
Note The host computer then performs the POST
test. If successful, it then boots from its
default drive.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 403 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Alpha Server 800, continued

Control Panel Control/Indicator Details

1 2: Halt Button • In the IN position, single halt interrupt

provided to the CPU.
4 • On OpenVMS and Digital UNIX, this
2 halt interrupt causes a return to the
SRM console.
• When IN at power-up, system boots
3 with the SRM console.
3: Reset Button • Initializes system with a momentary
contact switch.
Indicator Lights • Indicate basic state of system. See
Control Panel Indicator Lights.

Control/Indicator Details

1: Power ON/OFF • Powers system ON/OFF.

• Failure conditions preventing the
system from powering-on can be
determined from the Remote
Management Console using the Status
command.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 404 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Alpha Server 800, continued

Control Panel, continued
Control Panel Indicator Lights

Yellow LED Green LED Details

OFF OFF No AC present, or system

powered-off.
ON OFF Power enabled, but system
powered-off by remote console
command, system software, fan
failure, over-temp. failure and/or
power supply failure.
OFF ON System powered-ON.
ON ON System powered-ON.
Halt button is pressed or Halt-in
command issued at the Remote
Management Console.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 405 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x)
Select one of the following topics: Power-on Self Test
• Power-on Self Test See the Reference section for the XW8000 Power-on
Self Test procedure.
• Access the FRUs
• Replace System Disk Drive
Access the FRUs
1. From the Host computer, disconnect all of the
• Replace Data Hard Disk Drive cables.
• Replace Ethernet Controller (R10.3 Only) 2. Remove the Host from the console.
• Update Network Controller Driver (R10.3 Only) 3. Open the side panel.
• Configure KZPBA-CC SCSI Controller 4. Use the three tabs on the right side to remove the
• Configure On-board Adaptec SCSI Controller front bezel.
• Set Date and Time 5. Position the Host computer on its side.
Note The system board should be facing upwards.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 406 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Replace System Disk Drive Replace Data Hard Disk Drive
1. When a backup system disk is available: 1. Click the Windows Start button. Select Run.
a. Disconnect the hospital Ethernet port connection. 2. Type: compmgmt.msc and press <ENTER>.
b. Restore the System Disk. The Computer Management window appears.
c. Reconnect the Host with the hospital LAN. 3. In the left pane, select Disk Management.
2. When a backup system disk is not available, and a 4. Right-click on Disk 1. Select New Partition.
saved ASW configuration is available:
5. On the first New Partition Wizard window, click
a. Disconnect the hospital Ethernet port connection. [NEXT].
b. Complete the initial software installation. 6. Select Primary Partition and click [NEXT].
c. Restore the ASW configuration. 7. When prompted to specify a partition size, accept the
default values and click [NEXT].
d. Reconnect the Host with the hospital LAN.
8. Select drive letter D for data disk and click [NEXT].
9. Select Perform a Quick Format. Type: data for the
Volume Label and click [NEXT].
10. To complete the New Partition Wizard, click
[FINISH].
The Computer Management window appears.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 407 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Replace Data Hard Disk Drive, continued 19. When the script(s) finish running, close the
11. From the menu bar on the Computer Management Command Box window.
window, select File > Exit. 20. Move the following files to populate the SPT
database tables:
12. Login as MRService. A startup error message
appears indicating the database server is unable to • g:\spt\spt_range_files\spt_spec_files\*.spec.
start.
• g:\spt\spt_range_files\spt_typical_files\*.typ.
13. Click [CANCEL].
• g:\spt\spt_range_files\spt_cust_spec_files\
14. Click the Windows Start button. *.cust.
15. Select Programs > MRSybase > Reinstall • g:\spt\spt_range_files\spt_to_import_files\.
Databases.
21. Click the Windows Start button.
16. Click the Windows Start button. Select Run.
22. Select MR Applications > SPT & PIQT > SPT.
17. Type: cmd and press <ENTER>.
Note It will take approximately five minutes for the
18. To initialize the SPT database, type: importation of the spec files to complete.
c:\nmr\gyroscan\commands\spt_post_install.pl
and press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 408 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Replace Ethernet Controller (R10.3 Only) 10. Login as MRService using Manager or Manager1
Important! For the BOSWXP_H version 01.14.05, the as the password.
Broadcom driver must be updated before 11. Click the Windows Start button.
completing this procedure. Later versions
(01.14.05-A and 01.14.05-B) do not require 12. Select Settings > Network Connections.
a driver update. 13. Right-click on Local Area Connection. Select
Rename.
1. Logon as MRService.
14. Change the name to Reconstructor Connection.
2. Click the Windows Start button.
3. Select Settings > Network Connections. 15. Right-click on Reconstructor Connection. Select
Properties.
4. Right-click on Reconstructor Connections. Select
16. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). Click
Properties.
[PROPERTIES].
The Reconstructor Connection Properties window
17. Select the Use the following IP Address radio
appears.
button.
5. Click [CONFIGURE]. Click [UNINSTALL].
18. Type: 192.168.71.10 (default). Press <TAB> to fill
6. To confirm the uninstall, click [OK]. the Subnet Mask field.
7. Shutdown and turn the Host OFF. Disconnect the 19. To acknowledge the entries, click [OK].
power cord.
8. Replace the Broadcom NetXtreme Ethernet adapter.
9. Reconnect the power cord and start the Host.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 409 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Update Network Controller Driver (R10.3 Only) 8. Right-click on Broadcom NetXtreme. Select
Important! This procedure does not apply to the Properties.
BOSWXP_H version 01.14.05-A and 9. Select the Drivers tab.
01.14.05-B.
10. When the driver version is 2.78.0.0, click [UPDATE
Updating the network driver (Intel) will solve the following DRIVER]. The Hardware Update Wizard window
problems/situations: appears.
• DHCP server not supported 11. Click [NEXT].
• Sybase database server crash (when hospital 12. When prompted to complete the hardware update,
connection adapter not connected click [FINISH].
• Broadcom NIC 5702 replaced with type 5782 The driver version should now display 7.15.00.
1. From TechNet, download both network drivers. 13. Click [CLOSE]. The Computer Management window
2. Expand the zip files to a floppy disk. appears.

3. Login as MRService using Manager or Manager1 14. In the left pane, select Device Manager.
as the password. 15. Right-click on Intel 8254OEM... Select Properties.
4. Insert the floppy containing the network driver file(s) 16. Select the Drivers tab.
into the appropriate drive.
5. Click the Windows Start button. Select Run.
6. Type: compmgmt.msc and press <ENTER>. The
Computer Management window appears.
7. In the left pane, select Device Manager. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 410 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Update Network Controller Driver (R10.3 4. Review the following Host adapter settings.
Only), continued • BIOS Address: D6800 (can change over time)
17. When the driver version is 6.2.33.0, click [UPDATE
• BIOS Revision: 4.15 (can change over time)
DRIVER]. The Hardware Update Wizard window
appears. • Interrupt Level: 3
18. Click [NEXT]. • Host Adapter: Enabled
19. When prompted to complete the hardware update, • Host Adapter BIOS: Enabled
click [FINISH].
• Host SCSI ID: 7
The driver version should now display 6.4.16.1.
• PCI Bus DMA Burst: Enabled
20. Click [CLOSE]. The Computer Management window
• SCSI Bus Reset: Enabled
appears.
• SCSI Bus Reset Delay: 1
Configure KZPBA-CC SCSI Controller
1. Restart the Host computer. To access the Fast!Util 5. To change a setting, use the <DOWN> arrow key to
menu, press <ALT>+<Q> during the boot process. select the item and press <ENTER>.

2. Select Configuration Settings. To continue, press 6. To exit the Host Adapter Setting menu, press
<ENTER>. <ESC>.

3. Select Host Adapter Settings. To continue, press

<ENTER>. The Host Adapter Settings menu
appears.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 411 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Configure KZPBA-CC SCSI Controller, cont. 8. Change the settings according to the following
7. Select SCSI Device Settings and press <ENTER>. information.
The SCSI Device Settings menu appears.

SCSI ID 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Enable Device No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No

Disconnects OK Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Check Parity Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Negotiate Wide Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Negotiate Sync Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Enable LUNs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Sync Offset 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Sync Period 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25

9. To change the settings: 11. To exit the Configuration Settings menu, press
<ESC>.
a. Press <TAB> and <ARROW> down to select the
Sync Offset field. Select 12. Press <ENTER>. 12. To save the changes, if applicable, press <ENTER>.
b. Press <TAB> and <ARROW> down to select the 13. Select Exit Fast!UTIL and press <ENTER>. Reboot
Sync Period field. Select 25. Press <ENTER>. the Host computer.
10. To exit the SCSI Device Setting menu, press <ESC>.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 412 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Configure On-board Adaptec SCSI Controller 3. Select Device Properties. The Device Properties
Note Located on the system board, the on-board SCSI window appears.
controller is used for the internal hard disk drives. • MB/Sec: 320
There are no jumpers for the SCSI controller on
the system board. • MT/Sec: 160

1. Restart the Host computer. To access the LSI Logic • Data Width: 16
Configuration Utility, press <CTRL>+<C> during the • Scan ID: Yes
boot process.
• SCAN LUNs: Yes
2. Select Dev/Func 28. The Adapter Properties
4. Press <ESC> twice.
window appears.
5. Select Dev/Func 29 and press <ENTER>. The
• Host SCSI ID: 7
Adapter Properties window appears.
• SCSI Bus Scan Order: Low to High (0..Max)
• Host SCSI ID: 7
• Removable Media Support: None
• SCSI Bus Scan Order: Low to High (0...Max)
• CHS Mapping: SCSI Plug and Play Mapping
• Removable Media Support: None
• Spinup Delay (Secs): 2
• CHS Mapping: SCSI Plug and Play Mapping
• Secondary Cluster Server: No
• Spinup Delay (Secs): 2
• Termination Control: Auto
• Secondary Cluster Server: No
• Termination Control: Auto

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 413 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Configure On-board Adaptec SCSI Controller, 10. To continue, press <ESC> twice.
continued 11. Select Exit the Configuration Utility and press
6. Select Device Properties. The Device Properties <ENTER>.
window appears.
Set Date and Time
• MB/Sec: 320
1. Click the Windows Start button.
• MT/Sec: 160
2. Select Control Panel > Date and Time.
• Data Width: 16
3. Select the Date and Time option.
• Scan ID: Yes
4. Set the date, time and time zone.
• SCAN LUNs: Yes
5. Click [APPLY].
7. Press <ESC> twice.
6. Click [OK].
8. Press <F2>.
9. Select Global Properties and press <ENTER>. The
Global Properties window appears.
• Pause When Boot Alert Displayed: No
• Boot Information Display Mode: Verbose
• Negotiate with Services: Supported
• Video Mode: Color
• Support Interrupt: Hook Interrupt (the default)

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 414 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Reconstructor (Windows NT 4.0)

Select one of the following topics: Install/Config Reconstructor Software
• Install/Config Reconstructor Software For release 7.1 and higher, the reconstructor system disk
contains all the software pre loaded, so only network
• Check Pre-installed Reconstructor Software
configuration needs to be completed. See
• Reconstructor Power-ON Sequence Reconstructor Configuration.
• Reconstructor Configuration Important! When new software versions are released,
it is strongly recommended that you study
Note The operating system on the reconstructor is
the Software Installation manual accompa-
Windows NT, so a unique license number is
nying the release. In addition to information
included with every system. This Microsoft on appropriate installation procedures,
license number is located in the drawer in the
options, etc. it will provide updated informa-
NTDAC.
tion on problem reporting, known problems/
options, and new features/improvements.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 415 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Reconstructor (Windows NT 4.0), continued

Check Pre-installed Reconstructor Software Reconstructor Power-ON Sequence
1. Turn ON the LCD located in the NTDAC drawer. A power-up sequence begins once the reconstructor is
switched ON. This sequence initiates power-up selftests
2. Switch the mains power OFF then ON to reboot the
to initialize the hardware, then tests the system to ensure
reconstructor.
it can perform basic functions.
3. At the AlphaBIOS Boot screen, press <F2> to
Windows NT loads automatically following successful
access AlphaBIOS setup.
completion of the selftests.
4. Select Display System Configuration.
Note For reconstructor XP1000 6/500, Windows NT is
5. At the System Board Configuration screen, verify the the only operating system used.
Alphabios version is 5.70.
6. Select SCSI Configuration.
7. Select QLOGIC STORAGE #0 for the KZPBA-CB
SCSI Controller).
8. Verify the SCSI ID of the device is ID-3.
9. To exit the AlphaBIOS Setup menu, press <ESC> a
number of times.
10. Verify the reconstructor boots automatically.
11. Verify the reconstructor starts Windows NT.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 416 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Reconstructor (Windows NT 4.0), continued

Reconstructor Configuration 2. Configure the default reconstructor TCPIP address:
Configuration on Reconstructor a. Select Start > MR Configuration > Network.
1. Configure the default host computer TCPIP address: b. Select the Identification tab.
a. Turn ON the LCD located in the NTDAC drawer. c. Click the [Change] button.
b. On the reconstructor, login using a user ID of d. If not already pre filled, enter the host name as
MRSystem and a password of manager. reconstructor, and click [OK].
c. Select Start > MR Configuration > Host e. Select the Protocol tab.
Configuration.
f. Click [Properties].
d. Enter 192.192.192.201 as the TCPIP address.
g. In the IP address box, enter the TCPIP address
Note 192.192.192.201 is the default. If the as 192.192.192.210. Click [OK].
hospital assigns the MR system a unique
address, that value should be entered. h. Click [OK].
i. Press <CTRL>+<ALT>+<Del>.
j. Select Lock Workstation.
k. Turn OFF the LCD located in the NTDAC drawer.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 417 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Reconstructor (Windows NT 4.0), continued

Reconstructor Configuration, continued
Configuration on Host
1. Logon as System.
2. Select Configure Hardware Options.
3. Select Reconstructor Management Menu.
4. Select Modify Network Configuration
Reconstructor.
5. When prompted for the host name of the
reconstructor, press <ENTER>.
6. When prompted for the internet address for the
reconstructor, enter 192.192.192.210.
7. When prompted to return to the Reconstructor
Management menu, press <ENTER>.
8. Select Exit to configure Hardware Options menu.
9. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager menu.
10. Select Logout.
11. Confirm by clicking [Yes].

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 418 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Reconstructor (R10.x-R11.x)
Check Reconstructor Software/Firmware
Level
4522 210 26725 Number
The software and firmware level should be checked prior
to performing an installation to verify the installation is ASW Installation DVD R11.1-3 4522-210-26744
required.
System Backup/Restore DVD 4522-210-27671
Note The BIOS version displays during Reconstructor XW6200 BOSWXP_R 02.01.06.01 CD 4522-132-27581
boot.
XW6000 BOSWXP_R 02.01.02.04 CD 4522-210-26751
1. Once the Reconstructor has started, select Start >
W6000 BOSWXP_R 02.01.03.03 CD 4522-132-33761
Run.
Security Fix MR_SF_FEB2005 CD 4522-210-27281
2. Type: notepad c:\bwident.dat and click [OK].
XW8200/XW8000 Diagnostics CD 4522-210-26791
3. Check the version for BOSWXP_R.
Floppy XW6200/XW6000 Diagnostics 4522-210-26811
4. Refer to the following information.
User Documents CD R11.1-3 4522-210-26832

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 419 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Ethernet Switch
Select one of the following topics: 6. Use the <ARROW> keys to select System
Information. Press <ENTER>.
• Retrieve MAC Address
7. Record the MAC address for the Compaq 5708TX
• Configure Ethernet Switch on Host
ethernet switch.
• Set Network Switch to Factory Defaults
8. To return to the main menu, press <ENTER>.
• Virtual LAN Configuration on the Ethernet Switch
9. Select Logoff.
Retrieve MAC Address 10. When prompted, "Are you sure?", use the
Compaq Netelligent 5708TX <ARROW> keys to select Yes. Press <ENTER>.
1. Logon as System. 11. To return to the Configure Switch menu, press
Note Use manager as the password. <CTRL>+<\>.

2. Select Configure Hardware Options. 12. When prompted to, "Press [Return] for main
menu", press <ENTER>.
3. Select Install Ethernet Switch.
13. Select Exit to Hardware Option Menu.
4. Select RS232 Connection to the Ethernet Switch.
The following login screen appears:
%DCL- I-ALLOC, _NTSCAN$TTBO: allocated
%REM-I-T0QUIT, connection established
Press Ctrl/ \ to quit, Ctrl /@ for
command mode
5. To open the main menu, type: admin. Press
<ENTER>. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 420 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Ethernet Switch, continued

Retrieve MAC Address, continued Configure Ethernet Switch on Host
Cisco 1548M 1. Logon as System.
1. Logon as System. Note Use manager as the password.
Note Use manager as the password. 2. Select Configure Hardware Options.
2. Select Configure Hardware Options. 3. Select Install Ethernet Switch.
3. Select Install Ethernet Switch. 4. Select Install Ethernet Switch.
4. Select RS232 Connection to the Ethernet Switch. 5. When prompted, enter the MAC-address of the
5. Press <ENTER> until the following prompt appears: switch (nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn).

Continue with configuration dialog Y/N? 6. When prompted to enter the host name of the switch.
Type: switch and press <ENTER>.
6. Type: n and press <ENTER>. The > prompt
appears. 7. When prompted to confirm the settings, press
<ENTER>.
7. Type: show version. Press <ENTER>.
8. To return to the main menu, press <ENTER>.
8. Record the Base Ethernet MAC address.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 421 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Ethernet Switch, continued

Set Network Switch to Factory Defaults 4. Select RS232 Connection to the Ethernet Switch.
The following login screen appears:
The network switch must be set to factory defaults before
it can be used. This must be completed so the switch can %DCL- I-ALLOC, _NTSCAN$TTBO: allocated
receive its IP address from the host.
%REM-I-T0QUIT, connection established
Additionally, Virtual LAN Configuration must also be
Press Ctrl/ \ to quit, Ctrl /@ for
completed for the switch. This procedure allows you to
configure the reconstructor and printer as subsystems command mode
(private) for the MR Scanner. 5. To open the main menu, type: admin. Press
To configure the switch, open an RS232 connection to <ENTER>.
the switch, and verify the serial cable is connected 6. From the main menu, select Reset. Press
between the switch and the host computer. <ENTER>. The Reset menu displays.
Compaq Netelligent 5708TX 7. Use the <ARROW> keys to select Reset EEprom to
1. Logon as System. Factory Default Value. Press <ENTER>.

Note Use manager as the password. 8. When prompted, "Are you sure?", use the
<ARROW> keys to select Yes. Press <ENTER>.
2. Select Configure Hardware Options.
The system responds indicating factory default
3. Select Install Ethernet Switch. values are being written to EEPROM.
The switch will boot again, displaying selftest results,
after a few minutes.
9. Continue with the Virtual LAN Configuration on
the Ethernet Switch procedure.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 422 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Ethernet Switch, continued

Set Network Switch to Factory Defaults, 7. At the > prompt, type: enable. Press <ENTER>. The
continued # prompt appears.
Cisco 1548M 8. Type: delete nvram. Press <ENTER>.
1. Logon as System. 9. When prompted to reset system configuration to
Note Use manager as the password. factory defaults, type: Y. Press <ENTER>. The
power-up sequence runs, then the login screen
2. Select Configure Hardware Options. displays again via the RS232 link.
3. Select Install Ethernet Switch. 10. When prompted to continue with configuration
4. Select RS232 Connection to the Ethernet Switch. dialog, type: N. Press <ENTER>.
The following login screen appears: 11. When prompted to get started, press <ENTER>.
%DCL- I-ALLOC, _NTSCAN$TTBO: allocated 12. At the > prompt, type: enable. Press <ENTER>. The
%REM-I-T0QUIT, connection established # prompt appears.

Press Ctrl/ \ to quit, Ctrl /@ for 13. Type: config. Press <ENTER>.
command mode 14. Type: ip state bootp. Press <ENTER>.
5. When prompted to continued with configuration 15. Turn the power supply OFF, wait for approximately
dialog, type: N and press <ENTER>. 30 seconds, then turn the power supply ON to reboot
6. To continue, press <ENTER>. the switch.

The system responds with a message indicating the 16. Continue with the Virtual LAN Configuration on
CLI session with the switch is open. the Ethernet Switch procedure.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 423 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Ethernet Switch, continued

Set Network Switch to Factory Defaults, 8. When prompted to delete the configuration and
continued reboot the device, type: y and press <ENTER>.
HP 2512 A message appears indicating the system is
To configure the Ethernet switch, you must open an rebooting.
RS232 connection to it. Verify the serial cable is 9. When prompted, press <ENTER> twice to continue.
connected between the Ethernet switch and the host
computer. 10. Continue to Virtual LAN Configuration on the
Ethernet Switch - HP 2512.
1. Logon as System.
Note Use manager as the password.
2. Select Configure Hardware Options.
3. Select Install Ethernet Switch.
4. Select RS232 Connection to the Ethernet Switch.
5. To synchronize the speed, press <ENTER> twice.
6. When prompted, press any key to continue.
7. At the HP ProCurve Switch 2512# prompt, type:
erase startup-config and press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 424 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Ethernet Switch, continued

Virtual LAN Configuration on the Ethernet 7. Repeat these steps until the Virtual LAN
Switch configuration is as displayed below:
Compaq Netelligent 5708TX
Port Group1 Group2 Group3-Group8
1. Following the power-up sequence, the login screen
appears, displayed via the RS232 link. At the 1 YES YES NO
password prompt, type: admin. Press <ENTER>. 2 YES NO NO
2. From the main menu, select Virtual LAN 3 YES NO NO
Configuration. 4 YES NO NO
3. Use the <ARROW> keys to select Port Grouping. 5 YES NO NO
Press <ENTER>. The Port Grouping Configuration
displays. 6 YES NO NO
7 YES NO NO
4. To assign a port to a specific group, use the
<ARROW> keys to select the group number for the 8 NO YES NO
desired port. Press <ENTER>.
8. When finished, press <CTRL>+<N> to return to the
Note Begin with configuring ports for Group2, then main menu.
continue with ports for Group1 to avoid
unnecessary error messages. 9. Use the <ARROW> keys to select Port
Configuration. Press <ENTER>
5. When prompted to join this group, use the
<ARROW> keys to change the port group entry to
Yes or No.
6. To confirm your choice, press <ENTER>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 425 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Ethernet Switch, continued

Virtual LAN Configuration on the Ethernet Cisco 1548M
Switch, continued 1. At the > prompt, type: enable. Press <ENTER>. The
Compaq Netelligent 5708TX, continued # prompt appears.
10. Use the <ARROW> keys to select the Duplex entry 2. Type: config. Press <ENTER>.
for port 1.
3. Type: interf fast 0/1. Press <ENTER>.
11. To confirm your choice, press <ENTER>.
4. Type: vlan all. Press <ENTER>.
12. Use the <ARROW> keys to change the Duplex
5. Type: duplex full. Press <ENTER>.
setting for port 1 to Full.
6. Type: exit. Press <ENTER>.
13. To confirm the choice, press <ENTER>.
7. Type: interf fast 0/8. Press <ENTER>.
14. To return to the main menu, press <CTRL>+<N>.
8. Type: vlan 1. Press <ENTER>.
15. Select Logoff.
9. Type: exit. Press <ENTER>.
16. When prompted to confirm, use the <ARROW> keys
to select Yes. Press <ENTER>. 10. Type: interf fast 0/2. Press <ENTER>.
17. To return to the Configure Switch menu, press 11. Type: vlan 2. Press <ENTER>.
<CTRL>+<\>, then press <ENTER>.
12. Type: exit. Press <ENTER>.
18. Select Exit to Hardware Option Menu.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 426 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Ethernet Switch, continued

Virtual LAN Configuration on the Ethernet 28. Type: end. Press <ENTER>.
Switch, continued 29. At the # prompt, type: show vlan. Press <ENTER>.
Cisco 1548M, continued
30. Verify the VLAN/Port information is as displayed
13. Type: interf fast 0/3. Press <ENTER>. below:
14. Type: vlan 2. Press <ENTER>. VLAN 1: Ports 1 8
15. Type: exit. Press <ENTER>. VLAN 2: Ports 1-7
16. Type: interf fast 0/4. Press <ENTER>. VLAN3: Ports 1
17. Type: vlan 2. Press <ENTER>. VLAN4: Ports 1
18. Type: exit. Press <ENTER>. 31. To exit, press <CTRL>+<\>.
19. Type: interf fast 0/5. Press <ENTER>. 32. When prompted to return to the main menu, press
20. Type: vlan 2. Press <ENTER>. <ENTER>.

21. Type: exit. Press <ENTER>.

22. Type: interf fast 0/6. Press <ENTER>.
23. Type: vlan 2. Press <ENTER>.
24. Type: exit. Press <ENTER>.
25. Type: interf fast 0/7. Press <ENTER>.
26. Type: vlan 2. Press <ENTER>.
27. Type: exit. Press <ENTER>. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 427 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Ethernet Switch, continued

Virtual LAN Configuration on the Ethernet 8. Type: interface 2 speed-duplex Auto/10-Full and
Switch, continued press <ENTER>.
HP 2512 Note For X_1000, enter "...10-Full"; for W6000 or
1. Complete the Set Network Switch to Factory AP550, enter "...Auto".
Defaults - HP 2512 procedure. 9. Type: vlan 1 and press <ENTER>.
2. At the HP ProCurve Switch 2512# prompt, type: 10. Type: no ip address and press <ENTER>.
configure and press <ENTER>.
11. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
3. Type: port-isolation and press <ENTER>.
12. Type: write memory and press <ENTER>.
A caution appears indicating that if this is not
configured correctly, connectivity problems may 13. Type: reload and press <ENTER>.
result. 14. Type: sho config and press <ENTER>.
4. When prompted to continue with enabling port The HP 2512 configuration details display.
isolation, type: y and press <ENTER>.
Note Ports 8-12 are factory default: Uplink and
5. Type: port-isolation ethernet 1 mode public and Auto speed duplex.
press <ENTER>.
15. Type: exit and press <ENTER> three times.
6. Type: port-isolation ethernet 2-7 mode local and
press <ENTER>.
7. Type: interface 1 speed-duplex 100-full and press
<ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 428 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Ethernet Switch, continued

Virtual LAN Configuration on the Ethernet
Switch, continued
HP 2512, continued
16. When prompted to log out, type: y and press
<ENTER>.
17. Press <CTRL>+<\>.
18. When prompted to return to the main menu, press
<ENTER>.
19. Select Exit to Hardware Option Menu.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 429 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Network Hardware (R7.x-R9.x)

Select one of the following topics: P2P Hardcopy (HC) Printer
• P2P Hardcopy (HC) Printer Hospital mains can provide the power for a hardcopy
printer (HC Printer. To prevent earth loops, the signal
• Select a P2P HC Printer
cables between the printer and MR system is isolated.
• DICOM Hardcopy (HC) Printer
Use the following cables to connect the system to the HC
• Select a DICOM HC Printer printer.
• Check Hardcopy Unit Function Note These can also be used as test cables for the HC
box.
• IIM CPU Power-ON Selftest
• IIM: BEX15-Image Data - BF Hardcopy Unit
• Check P2P Test Box Interface
• IIM: BEX16-Control Data - BF Hardcopy Unit
• Print to File Option
Important! Incorrectly connecting the Data and Control
cables will destroy the IIM hardcopy
interface.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 430 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Network Hardware (R7.x-R9.x), continued

P2P Hardcopy (HC) Printer, continued Select a P2P HC Printer
Power ON 1. Logon as Gyrotool.
With some HC printers, it may be necessary to have the 2. Select Modify System Configuration > Image
printer powered-ON prior to booting the Host. Interface Module.
Important! This method ensures HC printer and Gyros- 3. Select PHC or FED/PHC board.
can communication is established.
Note Selection reflects the type of IIM box
Image Data Cable hardware.
The IIM - HC data cable is configured 1:1. 4. Click [PROCEED].
Control Data Cable Pin Configuration

Signal BF BE-X16 BEIB-X2

Control Send Data - 3 22 2

Control Send Data + 21 4 1
Control Receive Data - 2 24 5
Control Receive Data + 20 6 4
Ground 7 19 3

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 431 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Network Hardware (R7.x-R9.x), continued

Select a P2P HC Printer, continued DICOM Hardcopy (HC) Printer
5. Select Console Configuration > Copy Facilities DICOM printer network connections must be made by
(printer management). the supplier of the DICOM printer.
6. Select Select a Printer/Camera. Note It can be directly connected to the hospital net-
work if it is also used in other hospital modalities.
7. From the list, select the appropriate P2P printer.
Connected to one of the network switch reserved
8. Click [PROCEED].
positions, it is a dedicated MR DICOM printer.
9. Click [CANCEL].
Select a DICOM HC Printer
10. Select Exit. 1. Logon as Gyrotool.
11. Complete a Gyrorestart. 2. Select Modify System Configuration > Console
Note Only following a restart will hardcopy be Configuration.
available in the system.
3. Select Copy Facilities (printer management).
4. Select Add a DICOM Printer Type.
5. Enter the new DICOM printer name.
6. Select an existing DICOM printer to copy the
attributes from (e.g., ISGDICOMagfa).

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 432 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Network Hardware (R7.x-R9.x), continued

Select a DICOM HC Printer, continued Check Hardcopy Unit Function
7. Select Modify DICOM Printer Attributes and select 1. Logon as Gyroscan.
the newly defined DICOM printer from the list
2. Select System > Service. Test images (3) and
provided.
clinical images (5) become available.
8. Modify the following fields: Patient name=Service.
a. Enter a unique SCU AE Title in the appropriate 3. To scroll the images, use the scroll bar or the Next/
field. Previous image options.
b. Enter the AE Title of the DICOM HC printer in the 4. To print an image, select HC Screen.
SCP AE Title field.
5. Verify the quality (brightness/contrast) of the film with
c. Enter the port number. Do not use 0 (zero). the monitor image.
d. Enter the DICOM HC printer IP address. 6. Verify the quality with the customer.
9. Click [PROCEED]. 7. To check the film processor or hardcopy unit, make a
sensitogram
10. Select Select a Printer/Camera.
Note This is the responsibility of the hospital (HCU
11. Select the newly defined printer from the list
manufacturer).
provided.
8. Select System. Select Exit.
12. Click [CANCEL] twice.
13. Select Exit. Complete a Gyrorestart.
Important! The DICOM HC printer’s IP address will not
show up in the UCX database.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 433 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Network Hardware (R7.x-R9.x), continued

IIM CPU Power-ON Selftest LED Status Codes
The IIM CPU board completes a selftest at power-up.
Action P G 3 2 1 0
LEDs display the results of the test and they are reported
to the Host. Power OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
I960 Test ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
To access the LEDs:
EPROM Test ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
1. Open the equipment cabinet front door.
Timer 0 Test ON OFF OFF ON ON ON
2. Review the Backend Miscellaneous box to check the
status of the LEDs. Timer 1 Test ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF
Timer 2 Test ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
Note The layout of the LEDs is detailed below.
RAM Test ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
SCSI Test ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON
UART A Test ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
UART B Test ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
Ready ON ON/ OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF
Green: LED P & LED G
Important! If one of the LEDs remains red following
Red: LED 0 to LED 3 power-up, corrective action may be required
Note LED P indicates power at the IIM CPU board. for the IIM in DSS.
This is a hard-wired connection. All other LEDs
are controlled by the software.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 434 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Network Hardware (R7.x-R9.x), continued

Check P2P Test Box Interface 6. In the OC Expansion Console of the IIM box, check if
the two green LEDs are ON.
The TSW TIMM test can be used to check the Gyroscan
hardcopy interface with the test box. Note If one of these are flashing, the firmware has
Important! If the test successfully runs and the unit still not yet successfully been downloaded.
fails to work, verify that the correct ASW 7. Logon as TSW.
protocol has been configured.
8. Start TIIM.
To check the system hardcopy interface:
9. To check the I/O boards detailed in the hardware
1. Turn the laser hardcopy unit OFF. configuration file are present in the IIM, type: Run
Functional Automatic and press <ENTER>.
2. Using the hardcopy unit’s cables, disconnect the
hardcopy unit and connect the test box. Note This program also downloads the software
into the CPU RAM.
3. Verify the setting of the switches on the test box.
The test results in an overview of the IIM box boards.
• For image data - Even Parity
10. Continue to the Check Serial/Parallel Hardcopy
• For Host control - RS422
Connection or Check Serial Connection Only
4. Turn the test box ON. procedure.
5. Verify the following test box default settings.
• Auto Mode is established on test box.
• Parity checks are switched ON.
• 1200 baud is the serial port setting.
• Even parity is used on the serial port. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 435 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Network Hardware (R7.x-R9.x), continued

Check P2P Test Box Interface, continued 3. Verity the test box LEDs:
Check Serial/Parallel Hardcopy Connection • DB0: Blinking
The parallel image link test: • Parity: Blinking
• Checks the parallel image link • Mode: ON
• Checks the Host control link • Host 422 IN: Blinking
• Allocates an image of 32x32 pixels and sends it to the • Host 232 IN: ON
Hardcopy Unit 100 times
• Host Out: Blinking
Note The Hardcopy Unit must be in Automatic and
Host mode during the test. Note The test ends with the request to disconnect
the hardcopy test box.
A time out is generated in the TIIM software when an
error is detected. The error cause can be retrieved from 4. On the OC, press <ENTER>. A test succeeded
the Hardcopy Unit test box. message should display.

1. On the hardcopy test box, press Host to enter Host 5. Continue to the Check Serial Connection Only
mode. procedure

2. On the OC, type: run functional iim0

phc_b0 image_link and press <ENTER>.
The number of images (up to 100) are displayed on
the test box and TSW display

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 436 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Network Hardware (R7.x-R9.x), continued

Check P2P Test Box Interface, continued Print to File Option
Check Serial Connection Only The following procedure creates a portable pixel map file
The test box will time out after a while if nothing has in a POSIX directory.
happened as a result of the previous test. 1. Logon as Gyrotool.
1. Check the text box logging. 2. Select Modify System Configuration.
a. From the main menu, press the LOG softkey. 3. Select Console Configuration > Copy Facilities.
b. The Host is functioning correctly if you see 4. Select Enable/Disable Disk Printer. "Toggle" to
commands like RQS / RES or AQI/ PRI and test enable it.
box responses like PAS / STA, or STA/ RDY
5. To move the newly created file into a Gyroscan DCL
c. If no such commands appear, the test box will directory.
display no data in the buffer. Check and/or
correct the serial connection. a. Logon as Gyrotest using the appropriate
password.
2. On the hardcopy test box, press the Host key to
enter Host mode. b. At the $ prompt, type: posix and press
<ENTER>.
3. On the OC, type: run functional iim0 phc_b0
serial_interlock and press <ENTER>. c. Type: cd /usr/tmp and press <ENTER>.

4. Follow the prompts displayed on the screen to d. Type: ls -1 and press <ENTER>. Review the
complete the check of the serial link. information displayed.
e. When finished, type: cp isg* hardcopy and
press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 437 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Network Hardware (R7.x-R9.x), continued

Print to File Option, continued
f. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
g. At the $ prompt, type: do hctmp and press
<ENTER>.
h. Type: dir and press <ENTER>. Directory
information displays.
i. Type: ren isgppm.1;1 photo1.ppm and press
<ENTER>.
j. Type: dir/size and press <ENTER>. Additional
directory information is displayed.
6. To download the PPM file use ProComm (using the
Kermit or ZModem protocol. Use binary transfer.
7. Once the transfer is complete, delete the files from
the Gyroscan system.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 438 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Network Hardware (R10.x-R11.x)

Select one of the following topics: 6. Enter the following information in the fields provided:
• Add a DICOM Printer • Printer Name: (e.g., AGFA_14x17)
• Edit a DICOM Printer • SCU AETitle
• Delete a DICOM Printer • SCP AETitle
Add a DICOM Printer • Port Number
1. On the host computer, logon as MRService. • IP Address
2. Select Start > MR System Management > Note DICOM AE Title must be unique per site; in case
Configuration > Configuration Application. of more systems, different names must be used.
3. Select Configuration > Hardcopy Facilities > Add
A-Z, a-z, 0-9 and underscores are allowed.
DICOM Printer.
4. To select an existing template for the new DICOM Spaces and special characters are not allowed.
printer:
To help avoid problems/conflicts, try to use only
a. Select the Based on an existing printer
(template) option. upper case characters.

b. Select the appropriate template from the 7. Once the fields have been entered/modified for the
new printer, click [CHECK]. Click [APPLY}.
available list.
8. Click [OK]. Click [YES].
5. Click [APPLY]. Click [NEXT].
9. Click [OK] three times.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 439 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Network Hardware (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Edit a DICOM Printer Delete a DICOM Printer
1. On the host computer, logon as MRService. 1. On the host computer, logon as MRService.
2. Select Start > MR System Management > 2. Select Start > MR System Management >
Configuration > Configuration Application. Configuration > Configuration Application.
3. Select Configuration > Hardcopy Facilities > Edit 3. Select Configuration > Hardcopy Facilities >
DICOM Printer. Delete DICOM Printer.
4. Select the DICOM printer to modify from the list 4. Select the DICOM printer to be deleted from the list
provided. provided.
5. Click [APPLY]. Click [NEXT]. 5. Click [APPLY]. Click [NEXT].
6. Make the desired/necessary changes to the DICOM 6. Click [CHECK]. Click [APPLY}.
printer configuration.
7. Click [OK]. Click [YES].
7. Once the fields have been modified, click [CHECK].
8. Click [OK] three times.
Click [APPLY}.
8. Click [OK]. Click [YES]. Print to File Option
1. From the System menu, select Print Job Control.
9. Click [OK] three times.
2. From the Destination dropdown, select file_output.
Note Images can be retrieved using Windows
Explorer from the My Documents folder.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 440 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital Connection (R7.x-R9.x)

Select one of the following topics: Introduction
• Introduction The DECnet address can be used for communication
between two or more Philips MR systems (on the same
• Configure Local Host
network only.) It allows the systems to exchange
• Configure Domain Name enhanced data not supported by DICOM. If no address is
given by the network administrator, use the default. It will
• Configure Reconstructor
have no effect on DICOM network functionality.
• Configure Ethernet Switch for Full/Half Duplex
To configure the network, complete the following in the
Network Connection
order indicated.
• Configure Print Server
1. Configure Local Host
2. Configure Domain Name
3. Configure Reconstructor
4. Configure Ethernet Switch for Full/Half Duplex
Network Connection
5. Configure Print Server
6. Connect the Intera Workgroup to the hospital
network through the Ethernet switch using the DTP
cable provided.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 441 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital Connection (R7.x-R9.x), continued

Configure Local Host Configure Domain Name
1. Logon as System. 1. Logon as System.
2. Select Network Management > Modify Local Node 2. Select Network Management > Modify Local
Name and/or Addresses. Domain.
3. When prompted for the node name, enter the node 3. When prompted for the internet domain, type the
name provided by the local administrator. new domain name and press <ENTER>. The
Network Management menu appears.
4. When prompted, enter the DECnet node address
provided by the local administrator. 4. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager Menu.
5. When prompted, enter the internet address
assigned.
6. When prompted, enter the network mask provided
by the local administrator.
7. When prompted, enter the broadcast mask
(mmm.mmm.mmm.mmm).
8. When prompted the databases can be updated,
type: yes and press <ENTER>.
9. When prompted to reboot the system to activate the
changes, type: yes and press <ENTER>. The
system will shutdown and reboot twice.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 442 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital Connection (R7.x-R9.x), continued

Configure Reconstructor 10. Click [OK].
Reconstructor Configuration on Reconstructor 11. Shutdown the Reconstructor.
1. Logon as Reconstructor (username = MRSYSTEM, 12. Restart the Reconstructor. Wait for Windows NT to
password = manager). completely start.
2. Select Start > MR Configuration. 13. Press <CTRL>+<ALT>+<DEL>.
3. Select Network. 14. Select Lock Workstation to Prevent Unauthorized
4. Select the Identification tab. Click [CHANGE]. Use.

5. Type: reconstructor and click [OK]. 15. Turn the LCD in the NTDAC drawer OFF.

6. Select the Protocol tab. Click [PROPERTIES]. 16. Return the drawer to inside the NTDAC.

7. In the IP Address field, type the IP address

(xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx).
8. At the Subnet Mask field, type the subnet mask
(xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx).
9. Click [OK].
Note No gateway is specified by default.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 443 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital Connection (R7.x-R9.x), continued

Configure Reconstructor, continued 9. When prompted for the Host name of the
Reconstructor, enter the new node name provided
Reconstructor Configuration on Host
by the local administrator.
1. Logon as System.
10. When prompted for the internet address for the
2. Select Configure Hardware (Options). Reconstructor, enter the address provided by the
3. Select Reconstructor Management Menu. local administrator.

4. Select Select Reconstructor. 11. To return to the Reconstructor Management menu,

press <ENTER>.
5. When prompted to select the Reconstructor type
(R8.x Only): 12. Select Exit to Configure Hardware (Options)
Menu.
• If Reconstructor is XP1000, type: alpha.
• If Reconstructor is AP550, type: intel.
6. Press <ENTER>. The system will verify the choice
and caution to modify the network configuration.
7. To return to the Reconstructor Management menu,
press <ENTER>.
8. Select Modify Network Configuration
Reconstructor.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 444 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital Connection (R7.x-R9.x), continued

Configure Ethernet Switch for Full/Half Duplex 5. When prompted to continue with the dialog, type: N
Network Connection and press <ENTER>.
The following details the preferred duplex settings for 6. To get started, press <ENTER>.
various hospital network types.
7. Press <ENTER> until the > prompt appears.
Speed Duplex Port 8 Switch Setting 8. Type: enable and press <ENTER>.
100 Mb/s Full Duplex Full (highest performance) 9. At the # prompt, type: configure and press
Half Duplex Half <ENTER>.
10 Mb/s Full Duplex Full 10. Type: interf fast 0/8 and press <ENTER>.
Half Duplex Half (slowest performance) 11. Type: duplex full or duplex half.
12. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
Note The local administrator can provide the
appropriate Duplex setting. 13. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
1. Logon as System. 14. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
2. Select Configure Hardware Options. 15. Press <CTRL>+<\>.
3. Select Install Ethernet Switch. 16. To return to the main menu, press <ENTER>.
4. Select RS232 Connection to the Ethernet Switch.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 445 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital Connection (R7.x-R9.x), continued

Configure Print Server 7. When prompted if the information is correct, type:
yes and press <ENTER>. The print server should
Retrieve MAC Address (JetDirect 300X)
now be installed and the TCP/IP network restarted.
1. Verify the print server is turned ON and connected to
the printer. 8. To return to the main menu, press <ENTER>.

2. On the print server, press the [TEST] button. 9. Turn the mains supply OFF/ON to reboot the
Ethernet switch.
3. Record the LAN HW Address (print server MAC
Address). 10. Turn the print server OFF/ON to reboot the print
server.
Configure Print Server on Host
11. Wait two minutes for the print server to completely
1. Verify the printer is turned ON.
reboot.
2. Logon as System.
12. To print a test page, select option 3. Print Test-Plot.
3. Select Configure Hardware Options.
Note Two test-prints are available (PCL & ASCII).
4. Select Install Network Printer (+ queue’s). The The ASCII is sufficient to test the connection.
Configure Printers menu appears.
13. Select Exit to Hardware Option Menu.
5. Select Supported HP Deskjet Printer.
14. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager Menu.
6. When prompted, enter the following:
15. Select Logout.
a. Paper Size
16. To confirm, click [YES].
b. MAC Address
c. Node Name
d. Printer Server TCP/IP Address

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 446 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Network Configuration (R10.x-R11.x)

Select one of the following topics: Default Settings
• Default Settings The DECnet address can be used for communication
between two or more Philips MR systems (on the same
• Host (Hospital Connection) Dynamic IP Address
network only.) It allows the systems to exchange
• Host (Hospital Connection) Static IP Address enhanced data not supported by DICOM. If no address is
given by the network administrator, use the default. It will
• Host (Hospital Connection) Speed/Duplex
have no effect on DICOM network functionality.
Settings
Host Settings
• Host (Reconstructor Connection) Static IP
Address • Computer Name: PMSN-GRJHTDFK

• Host (Reconstructor Connection) Speed/Duplex • Workgroup: PHILIPSMR

Setting • Hospital Connection IP Address: Automatically obtain
an IP address
• Hospital Connection Speed/Duplex: Auto/Auto
• Reconstructor Connection IP Address: 192.168.71.10
• Reconstructor Connection Speed/Duplex: Auto/Auto
• RAS Connection COM1 IP Address: 169.254.xxx.xxx
(random)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 447 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Network Configuration (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Default Settings, continued Host (Hospital Connection) Dynamic IP
Reconstructor Settings Address
• Computer Name: OEM-HJGFKHJH Complete the following procedure when the hospital has
a DHCP server that will assign an IP address to the host.
• Workgroup: WORKGROUP
1. Logon as MRService.
• Host Connection IP Address: 192.168.71.11
2. Select Start > Settings > Network Connections.
• Host Connection Speed/Duplex: AutoDetect
3. Double-click Hospital Connection.
4. Click [PROPERTIES].
5. Select the General tab.
6. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) from the list of
configuration items.
7. Click [PROPERTIES].
8. Select the General tab.
9. Select the Obtain an IP Address Automatically
option.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 448 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Network Configuration (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Host (Hospital Connection) Dynamic IP Host (Hospital Connection) Static IP Address
Address, continued Complete the following procedure when the hospital
10. When an IP address DNS server is not obtained does not have a DHCP server that will assign an IP
from the DHCP server: address to the host.
a. Select the Use the following DNS Server 1. Logon as MRService.
address option.
2. Select Start > Settings > Network Connections.
b. Enter the IP Address for the DNS server.
3. Double-click Hospital Connection.
11. Click [OK].
4. Click [PROPERTIES].
12. Click [CLOSE].
5. Select the General tab.
13. Close the Network Connections menu.
6. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) from the list of
configuration items.
7. Click [PROPERTIES].
8. Select the Use the following IP address option.
9. Enter the appropriate (assigned) IP address.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 449 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Network Configuration (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Host (Hospital Connection) Static IP Address, Host (Hospital Connection) Speed/Duplex
continued Settings
10. Enter the appropriate (assigned) subnet mask IP 1. Logon as MRService.
address.
2. Select Start > Settings > Network Connections.
Note The host may incorrectly prompt the network
3. Double-click Hospital Connection.
mask of the previous host network
configuration. 4. Click [PROPERTIES].
11. Enter the appropriate (assigned) default gateway IP 5. Select the General tab.
address.
6. Click [CONFIGURE].
Note When the hospital has no gateway, this can
7. Select the Advanced tab.
be left blank.
8. From the Property list, select Link Speed & Duplex.
12. If the hospital has a DNS server, enter the
appropriate DNS server IP address. 9. From the Value list, select AutoDetect.
13. Click [OK]. 10. Click [OK]. Click [CLOSE].
14. Click [CLOSE] twice to close the Network
Connections menu.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 450 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Network Configuration (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Host (Reconstructor Connection) Static IP Host (Reconstructor Connection) Speed/
Address Duplex Setting
1. Logon as MRService. 1. Logon as MRService.
2. Select Start > Settings > Network Connections. 2. Select Start > Settings > Network Connections.
3. Double-click Reconstructor Connection. 3. Double-click Reconstructor Connection.
4. Click [PROPERTIES]. 4. Click [PROPERTIES].
5. Select the General tab. 5. Select the General tab.
6. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) from the list of 6. Click [CONFIGURE].
configuration items.
7. Select the Advanced tab.
7. Click [PROPERTIES].
8. From the Property list, select Speed & Duplex.
8. Select the Use the following IP address option.
9. From the Value list, select Auto.
9. Enter the appropriate (assigned) IP address.
10. Click [OK].
10. Enter the appropriate (assigned) subnet mask IP
11. Close the Network Connections menu.
address.
Note The host may incorrectly prompt the network
mask of the previous host network
configuration.
11. Click [OK] twice.
12. When all adjustments are complete, reboot the host.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 451 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure Remote Nodes & TCP/IP Gateway (New/Upgraded

Intera R7.x-R9.x)
Select one of the following topics: 6. For R7.1.2 (and above) the system prompts to
confirm the station is EasyVision. Type: yes and
• Configure EasyVision
press <ENTER>.
• Select Push-Node
7. When prompted to enter the username of the Import/
• Configure TCP/IP Gateway Export Account on the remote node, press
<ENTER> to accept the default.
Configure EasyVision
8. When prompted for the DataLink task name, press
Important! Refer to the SIM provided with EasyVision
<ENTER> to accept the default.
to complete the network configuration of the
EasyVision. 9. When prompted to enable the DataLink function,
To configure the EasyVision on the local Host: press <ENTER> to accept the default.

1. Logon as System. 10. When prompted to enable Import/Export functions,

press <ENTER> to accept the default.
2. Select Network Management.
11. When prompted to allow remote access, press
3. Select Add Remote Node to Local MRNodes <ENTER> to accept the default.
Database.
12. When prompted to store the node definition, type:
4. When prompted for the node name, enter the name yes and press <ENTER>.
provided by the local administrator.
13. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager Menu.
5. When prompted for the node address, enter the
DECnet Node Address provided.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 452 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure Remote Nodes & TCP/IP Gateway (New/Upgraded

Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued
Select Push-Node Configure TCP/IP Gateway
To define the workstation as a push-node for Gyroscan Use the following procedure to configure a TCP/IP
applications: gateway if the Host must communicate (via TCP/IP) with
another unit on a different network.
1. Logon as Gyroscan.
It is important to store the routing information in the
2. Select Scan Control > Scan Utility.
permanent and dynamic databases, because during
3. Select Select Push-node. startup, TCP/IP services, host names, IP addresses and
routing tables are copied from the permanent database
4. Select the applicable push-node.
to the dynamic database.
5. Click [PROCEED].
1. Logon as System.
6. Select System > Exit.
2. Select Exit to DCL.
7. To confirm, click [PROCEED].
3. At the prompt, type: ucx and press <ENTER>.
4. Type: set route <IP address of other network>/
gateway=<IP address of default gateway>/perm
and press <ENTER>.
5. Type: set route <IP address of other network>/
gateway=<IP address of default gateway>/network
and press <ENTER>.
6. Type: show route and press <ENTER>. Information
regarding the Dynamic database appears.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 453 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure DICOM (New/Upgraded Intera R7.x-R9.x)

Select one of the following topics: Configure Gyroscan DICOM Import/Export
• Configure Gyroscan DICOM Import/Export Important! DICOM AE Titles and IP Host names are
case-sensitive and must be unique for each
• Configure Gyroscan RIS DICOM
DICOM device.
• Configure RIS DICOM with EasyLink Station
Configure DICOM AE Title
• Configure DICOM HC Printer 1. Logon as Gyrotool.
• Delete a DICOM Node 2. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM
Parameters.
3. Select DICOM AE Titles.
4. Adapt the Store export AE Title.
Note Default is MR_STORE_EXP.
5. Adapt the Store Import AE Title.
Note Default is MR_STORE_IMP.
6. Click [PROCEED].
7. To leave Figman, click <EXIT>.
8. Select Exit from Gyrotool.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 454 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure DICOM (New/Upgraded Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Configure Gyroscan DICOM Import/Export, 6. When prompted to enter a hostname:
continued • If it is a new application in the network, enter the
Define DICOM Import/Export/RIS Node remote DICOM hostname (e.g., EasyVision).
1. Logon as System. - or -
2. Select DICOM Management. • Enter the hostname of the (existing) remote host
3. Select DICOM Export Service Class User. supporting your DICOM transfer.

4. Select Add DICOM SCP/SCU. 7. When prompted for the port number, enter the port
number that the EasyVision/Hospital RIS system
The system responds with information regarding the listens to. The system displays information about the
DICOM Export Service Class User. node definition.
Note AE Title and hostname used here must 8. When prompted to verify the entries made, type: Yes
match the AE Title entered at the remote and press <ENTER>.
node. Remember, the names are case-sensi-
tive. 9. If the hostname does not exist in the TCP/IP
database, the system prompts to enter it.
5. When prompted for the DICOM application entity to
add, enter the DICOM application entity title of the a. Enter the IP address for the Host EasyVision.
remote node (e.g., EV1). b. Press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 455 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure DICOM (New/Upgraded Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Configure Gyroscan DICOM Import/Export, Define a DICOM RIS Node
continued 1. Complete the Define DICOM Import/Export/RIS
Define DICOM Import/Export/RIS Node, continued Node procedure to define a DICOM RIS node.
10. To return to the DICOM SCP/SCU menu, press • Select DICOM RIS Service Class User in step 3.
<ENTER>.
Configure DICOM RIS AE Title
11. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager Menu. 1. Logon as Gyrotool.
12. If a DICOM Import or DICOM RIS node must be 2. Select Modify System Configuration.
defined, repeat steps 2 - 11, making the appropriate
selection in step 3. 3. Select DICOM Parameters > Select DICOM AE
Titles.
13. Select Exit to DCL.
4. Adapt the RIS AE Title.
14. Before attempting to use the configured DICOM
node(s), complete a Gyrorestart. Note Default is MR_WLM_RIS.
Configure Gyroscan RIS DICOM 5. Click [PROCEED].
Default Gyroscan RIS DICOM parameters include: 6. To leave Figman, click <EXIT>.
• Application Entity Title: MR_WLM_RIS 7. Select Exit from Gyrotool.
• Work List Time Out: 20
• Remote AE Title: MR1 (RIS DICOM SCP Application
Entity)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 456 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure DICOM (New/Upgraded Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Configure Gyroscan RIS DICOM, continued Modify RIS Worklist Timeout
Select an RIS System This timeout represents the maximum amount of time
(seconds) the MR DICOM waits for a worklist response
1. Logon as Gyrotool.
from a DICOM RIS (30 seconds maximum).
2. Select Modify System Configuration.
1. Logon as Gyrotool.
3. Select DICOM Parameters > DICOM RIS
Selection. 2. Select Modify System Configuration.
3. Select DICOM Parameters > DICOM RIS
4. Select the RIS system.
Parameters.
5. Click [PROCEED].
4. Adapt the Worklist Timeout parameter (5-30).
6. To leave Figman, click <EXIT>.
5. Click [PROCEED].
7. Select Exit from Gyrotool.
6. To leave Figman, click <EXIT>.
7. Select Exit from Gyrotool.
8. Before attempting to use the configured DICOM
node(s), complete a Gyrorestart.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 457 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure DICOM (New/Upgraded Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Configure RIS DICOM with EasyLink Station 9. To return to the DICOM Service Class User menu,
press <ENTER>.
Define EasyLink DICOM RIS Node
1. Logon as System. 10. Select Exit to DICOM Management Menu.

2. Select DICOM Management > DICOM RIS Service 11. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager Menu.
Class User. Configure RIS DICOM AE Title
3. Select Add DICOM SCP/SCU. 1. Logon as Gyrotool.
4. When prompted for the application entity, type: 2. Select Modify System Configuration.
VERYEASY and press <ENTER>.
3. Select DICOM Parameters > DICOM AE Titles.
5. When prompted for the hostname, type the name
4. Configure the RIS AE Title. Enter GYRO_RIS.
provided by the network administrator and press
<ENTER>. 5. Click <PROCEED>.
6. When prompted for the port number, enter the port 6. To leave Figman, click <EXIT>.
number where EasyVision listens to. The system
7. Select Exit from Gyrotool.
displays information regarding the newly defined
node. 8. Before attempting to implement the changes,
complete a Gyrorestart.
7. When prompted if the information is correct, type:
yes and press <ENTER>.
8. If the hostname does not exist in the TCP/IP
database, the system prompts to enter it.
a. Enter the IP address for the Host EasyVision.
b. Press <ENTER>. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 458 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure DICOM (New/Upgraded Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Configure RIS DICOM with EasyLink Station, Configure DICOM HC Printer
continued Select DICOM HC Printer
Select an EasyLink RIS System 1. Logon as Gyrotool.
1. Logon as Gyrotool.
2. Select Modify System Configuration.
2. Select Modify System Configuration.
3. Select Console Configuration > Copy Facilities.
3. Select DICOM Parameters > DICOM RIS
Note Leave the point-to-point camera setting at
Selection.
"None" if a DICOM selection is made; other-
4. Select the appropriate RIS system. wise, it will not accept the selection.
5. Click <PROCEED>. 4. Select the type of DICOM camera.
6. To leave Figman, click <EXIT>. 5. Click <PROCEED>.
7. Select Exit from Gyrotool. 6. Click <CANCEL>.
8. Before attempting to implement the changes, 7. Select Exit.
complete a Gyrorestart.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 459 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure DICOM (New/Upgraded Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Configure DICOM HC Printer, continued 6. When prompted for the port number, enter the port
number the DICOM printer will be looking to.
Define DICOM HC Printer
1. Logon as System. 7. When prompted for the IP address of the DICOM
printer, enter the IP address of the DICOM printer.
2. Select DICOM Management. The system displays the information previously
3. Select Configure DICOM Printer. entered.

4. When prompted to enter 8. If all the values are correct:

ISGDICOMxxxx.scu_ae_title: a. Press <ENTER> to return to the DICOM
If a single DICOM printer is to be used on the Management menu.
network, press <ENTER> b. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager Menu.
- or - c. Select Logout.
If a DICOM printer supports more than a single user, d. To verify, click [YES].
a title should be entered on each MR system.
9. Before attempting to implement the changes,
5. When prompted to enter complete a Gyrorestart.
ISGDICOMxxxx.scp_ae_title, press <ENTER> to
accept the default or enter a new service class
provider application entity title, per the DICOM
printer setup.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 460 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure DICOM (New/Upgraded Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Delete a DICOM Node Note If the IP address for the deleted application is not
used by another network application, it must be
1. Logon as System.
manually removed from the database. It is not
2. Select DICOM Management. removed automatically.
3. Select one of the following options: 9. If you must also remove the IP address:
• DICOM Export Service Class User a. Select Exit to DCL.
• DICOM Import Service Class Provider b. Type: ucx and press <ENTER>.
• DICOM RIS Service Class User c. Type: sh host and press <ENTER>.
4. Select Delete DICOM SCP/SCU. d. Type: set nohost <hostname> and press
<ENTER>.
5. Enter the name of the DICOM application to delete
and press <ENTER>. e. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
Note DICOM application names are case-sensi- 10. Type: logout and press <ENTER>.
tive.
11. To confirm, click <YES>.
6. When prompted to continue with the deletion, type:
yes and press <ENTER>.
7. Select Exit to DICOM Management Menu.
8. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager Menu.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 461 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure DICOM (New/Upgraded Intera R10.x-R11.x)

Select one of the following topics: Configure Non-Philips Remote DICOM Node
• Configure Non-Philips Remote DICOM Node (Without Private Objects Support)
(Without Private Objects Support) The private objects and new presentation state SOP
classes are not supported by most non-Philips
• Configure Non-Philips Remote DICOM Node (With workstations, DICOM viewers and PACs.
Private Objects Support), continued
Note Use the "Other - without private objects" template
• DICOM Verify
to configure such a remote node, since is has
almost all the SOP classes configured.
1. Select Connectivity Configuration > DICOM
Network Nodes.
2. From the list of available templates, select Other -
without Private SOPs. Click [ADD].
3. Enter the following information:
• Name
• AETitle
• IP HostName
• IP Address
4. For the When Remote DICOM Node Supports
Storage Commitment option, click Yes.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 462 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure DICOM (New/Upgraded Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Configure Non-Philips Remote DICOM Node 11. If the remote DICOM node does not support MPPS,
(Without Private Objects Support), continued In the SCP SOPs section of the screen, drag
5. For the When Remote DICOM Node Does Not Modality Performed Procedure Step from the
Configured column to the Unconfigured column.
Support Storage Commitment option, click No.
12. In the Send section of the screen, select the Yes
6. If the remote DICOM node does not support the
option for Combine MR Rescale.
Grayscale Softcopy Presentation State SOP Class,
click the No option. Note The system will not export rescaling
parameters.
7. Select Advanced Settings.
13. Click [APPLY].
8. Select Select Custom at the Revert SOP Classes.
14. If this is a new IP address or IP host name, click
9. In the SCU SOPs section of the screen, drag
Grayscale Softcopy Presentation State Storage [YES].
from the Configured column to the Unconfigured 15. Click [OK]. Click [YES].
column.
16. Click [OK] three times. Click [UP].
10. If the Remote DICOM Node does not support
Secondary Capture Image Storage:
a. Select Advanced Settings.
b. Select Select Custom at the Revert SOP
Classes.
c. In the SCU SOPs section of the screen, drag
Secondary Capture Image Storage from the
Configured column to the Unconfigured column.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 463 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure DICOM (New/Upgraded Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Configure Non-Philips Remote DICOM Node Configure Non-Philips Remote DICOM Node
(Without Private Objects Support), continued (With Private Objects Support)
17. Logoff from the Configuration Application. Note Use the "Other - without private objects" template
to configure such a remote node, since is has
18. Reboot the host.
almost all the SOP classes configured.
19. Logon as MRService.
1. Select Connectivity Configuration > DICOM
20. Verify you can export images to the newly configured Network Nodes.
remote DICOM node using the Intera application.
2. From the list of available templates, select Other -
21. Use the Queue Manager to verify all queues are with Private SOPs. Click [ADD].
enabled and if the transfer passes successfully.
3. Enter the following information:
22. If a failure occurs, complete the DICOM Verify
• Name
procedure.
• AETitle
• IP HostName
• IP Address
4. For the When Remote DICOM Node Supports
Storage Commitment option, click Yes.
5. For the When Remote DICOM Node Does Not
Support Storage Commitment option, click No.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 464 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure DICOM (New/Upgraded Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Configure Non-Philips Remote DICOM Node 11. If the remote DICOM node does not support MPPS,
(With Private Objects Support), continued In the SCP SOPs section of the screen, drag
6. If the remote DICOM node does not support the Modality Performed Procedure Step from the
Configured column to the Unconfigured column.
Grayscale Softcopy Presentation State SOP Class,
click the No option. 12. In the Send section of the screen, select the Yes
option for Combine MR Rescale.
7. Select Advanced Settings.
Note The system will not export rescaling
8. Select Select Custom at the Revert SOP Classes.
parameters.
9. In the SCU SOPs section of the screen, drag
13. Click [APPLY].
Grayscale Softcopy Presentation State Storage
from the Configured column to the Unconfigured 14. If this is a new IP address or IP host name, click
column. [YES].
10. If the Remote DICOM Node does not support 15. Click [OK]. Click [YES].
Secondary Capture Image Storage:
16. Click [OK] three times. Click [UP].
a. Select Advanced Settings.
b. Select Select Custom at the Revert SOP
Classes.
c. In the SCU SOPs section of the screen, drag
Secondary Capture Image Storage from the
Configured column to the Unconfigured column.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 465 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Configure DICOM (New/Upgraded Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Configure Non-Philips Remote DICOM Node DICOM Verify
(With Private Objects Support), continued 1. Select Connectivity Configuration > DICOM
17. Logoff from the Configuration Application. Verify.
18. Reboot the host. 2. Select DICOM Network Node Test > Configured.
19. Logon as MRService. 3. Select the DICOM node to test.
20. Verify you can export images to the newly configured Note The Name, Image Bits Stored, Image Col-
remote DICOM node using the Intera application. umns, and Image Rows can be changed, but
the defaults can also be accepted.
21. Use the Queue Manager to verify all queues are
enabled and if the transfer passes successfully. 4. Select the test(s) to be completed.
22. If a failure occurs, complete the DICOM Verify Note The Network Store Query test typically fails,
procedure. so it can be better to deselect it.
5. Click [APPLY]. Click [NEXT].
6. Click [OK]. The test results displays.
Note The first three tests should pass. The store/
query capabilities of the remote DICOM node
determine the results of the fourth test.
7. Click [OK]. Click [UP] twice.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 466 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-750

Select one of the following topics: Configuration Switches
• Configuration Switches Three configuration switches are located on the top rear
of the unit.
• Filling
• Auto/Manual Start: Determines if unit restarts itself
• Start Up
following a power outage. In Auto position, unit runs
• Changing a Value when the front panel’s ON/OFF switch is in the ON
position. If power is interrupted when the unit is
• Change Setpoint
running, the unit automatically restarts once power is
• Change PID Parameters restored. In Manual position, the front panel’s Start
switch must be pressed to restart the unit.
• Clean Condenser
• ON/OFF Pump 1: Controls cryo coil loop pump.
• ON/OFF Pump 2: Controls gradient loop pump.
Important! Chiller pump switches should be set to
Auto.
Note Chiller can operate with either or both pumps
disabled.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 467 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-750, continued

Filling Start Up
Important! Verify the unit reservoir drain plug is Important! The unit must be connected to its power
securely installed before filling. source for a minimum of twelve hours
before start up. This provides sufficient time
1. Loosen the two thumbscrews and open the reservoir
for a heater in the crankcase to properly
access panel.
warm the oil in the compressor.
Note The reservoir access panel is located under
1. Verify the electrical and plumbing connections.
a hinged access panel at the left of the case
top. 2. Verify the recirculating system has been properly
filled with cooling fluid.
2. With tap water, fill the reservoir until the coils are
covered. 3. Verify the flow control valve is not fully closed.
3. To prevent lowering of the fluid level in the reservoir 4. Check the configuration switches on the rear of the
below the operating level, have extra cooling fluid unit.
available to keep the reservoir filled to just below the
5. Place the Power ON/OFF switch to the ON position.
hand guard.
6. Depress the Start button.
Note Fluid capacity of the application and the recir-
culation lines may be significant. The pump/refrigeration start and the temperature
indicator displays the temperature of the reservoir
4. When full, replace the reservoir cover and close the
fluid.
access panel.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 468 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-750, continued

Start Up, continued Changing a Value
7. To turn the unit OFF, place the Power ON/OFF 1. To increment a value, press the Yes button.
switch to the OFF position.
2. To decrement a value, press the No button.
8. After the unit is shut OFF, wait approximately five
3. Press the Next/Enter button.
minutes before restarting.
Note The new value will not be used by the
Note Five minutes allows sufficient time for
controller until the Next/Enter button is
refrigeration pressures to equalize. Failure to
pressed and the display stops flashing.
equalize the pressure results in the
compressor short-cycling. A clicking sound Important! The controller will not accept a value above
will be heard and no cooling will occur. the maximum or below the minimum
(+35o to +5o C). If an invalid value is
entered, the display reverts to its original
setting.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 469 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-750, continued

Change Setpoint Clean Condenser
When the controller is powered ON, it enters the A build up of dust or debris on the condenser fins will
Operator’s Loop where the reservoir fluid temperature is result in a loss of cooling capacity.
displayed and the setpoint (12o - 15o) can be set. 1. Remove any debris from around the condenser site.
1. To view the setpoint, press the Next/Enter button 2. Clean the condenser with a condenser cleaning
twice. solvent and rinse with water.
The display will flash between the setpoint and the 3. To restrict algae growth in the reservoir, keep the
actual setpoint number. reservoir cover in place and only use opaque
2. To change the setpoint value, use the Yes and No recirculation lines.
buttons. Note Use Chloramine-T (1 gram/3.5 liters) as an
3. Once the desired setpoint is displayed, press the algicides. Other algicides may damage the unit’s
Next/Enter button twice. internal parts.

Change PID Parameters

The Setup Loop is used to adjust the controller’s PID
parameters.
1. To enter the Setup Loop from the Operator’s Loop,
press/hold the No button while pressing the Next/
Enter button twice.
2. To adjust the values, use the Yes and No buttons.
3. To accept the new value, press the Next/Enter
button twice.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 470 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style)

Select one of the following topics: Controller Testing
• Controller Testing The following procedure checks the operation of the:
• Sensor Testing • temperature sensor,
• Filling Procedure • control board, and
• Clean the Strainers • motor valve
• Start the Heat Exchanger 1. Turn the unit OFF.
2. Remove the wrapper.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 471 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style), continued

Controller Testing, continued 5. Use the Temperature Control dial to adjust the
temperature to its coldest (minimum) temperature.
3. Identify the indicator tab (small/metallic) emerging
from the motor valve. The tab should slowly emerge and eventually be
completely revealed, indicating the valve is fully
Note Tab provides an indication of valve position. open.
When the unit is OFF, the valve should be closed.
6. Use the Temperature Control dial to adjust the
Tab Revealed temperature to its hottest (maximum) temperature.
The tab should slowly retract into the valve,
indicating the valve is fully closed.
7. If the tab responds as described in steps 5 and 6, the
motor valve, control board, and temperature sensor
should be assumed to be working correctly.

Valve Closed Valve Open

4. Turn the unit ON.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 472 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style), continued

Sensor Testing 5. To determine if the diode can block current when
reversed-biased:
By measuring the voltage drop (DC) across a diode, the
diode sensors are able to measure temperature. As the a. Connect the red probe to the black wire.
temperature increases, the voltage drop decreases.
b. Connect the black probe to the red wire. The
1. Turn the unit OFF. meter should display OL (overload) or an "infinite
reading" indicating an open circuit. This indicates
2. Disconnect the sensor from the unit.
to diode can block current when reverse-biased.
3. Configure the meter:
6. To determine if the insulation between the diode and
a. Set to Diode Test range. the shell is intact:
b. Connect the red probe to the Volt/Ohm jack. a. Connect the red probe to the red wire.
c. Connect the black probe to the Common jack. b. Touch the black probe to the shell of the sensor.
4. To determine if the sensor is responding to a The meter should display OL (overload)
indicating no path exists from the diode to the
temperature change:
shell. This indicates the insulation is in tact.
a. Connect the red probe to the red wire.
b. Connect the black probe to the black wire. The
actual voltage drop (DC) across the diode
displays on the meter. The value should be
between 0.570 and 0.630 (at room temperature).
c. Use your hands to warm the sensor. If the
reading decreases, the sensor is responding
appropriately to the temperature change.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 473 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style), continued

Filling Procedure 8. Press the Power switch to turn ON the heat
exchanger. The pump will start and the water level
The water level is monitored by a detector. When below
safe levels, the low-level indicator lights and the will drop.
exchanger turns OFF. 9. Turn OFF the heat exchanger when the reservoir is
almost empty.
1. Check the following:
10. Again, using distilled water, fill the reservoir until the
• Mains connection
bottom of the fill hole-thread is reached.
• Voltage (220 V 50/60 Hz)
11. Press the Power switch to turn ON the heat
• Hose connections exchanger.
2. In the Mains Distribution Unit (MDU) switch F7 ON. 12. Repeat steps 9 - 11 until the water level stops just
3. On the control panel, turn the Temperature Control below the top (while heat exchanger is running).
knob to 25o C. Note The water purity (red) light will be ON for a couple
of days after refilling of the coil circuit, indicating
4. Remove the reservoir cover (plate on top) from the the ion-level in the liquid is outside specification.
heat exchanger. The light should change to green within a week.
5. Locate and remove the reservoir plug.
Replace the de ionization cartridge when the light
6. With the tap-outlet above the reservoir inlet, place changes to a steady red state following normal
the fluid container on top of the heat exchanger. operation.
7. Using distilled water, fill the reservoir until the bottom 13. Continue to step 14 on the following page.
of the fill hole-thread is reached.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 474 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style), continued

Filling Procedure, continued Clean the Strainers
14. Apply teflon tape to the reservoir plug and install the This procedure should be completed:
plug.
• after one week following installation of the heat
15. After three days, check the water level again. Refill if exchanger, and
necessary.
• when the system shuts down due to low flow errors
Note It could take up to two to three days for all the caused by particles clogging the strainers.
air to be removed from the system.
1. In the Mains Distribution Unit (MDU) switch F7
16. Reinstall the top cover. OFF.
17. If you have a unit with a flow meter, check the flow 2. Remove the cover of the heat exchanger using the
(0.8 liter/min). screws located on the side covers.
3. Using a piece of plastic sheeting, cover both pumps.
4. Remove the reservoir plug.
Note High pressure in the tank may cause some
water to come out, until the pressure
decreases. This is normal.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 475 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style), continued

Clean the Strainers, continued 6. Unscrew the strainer housings to remove the
strainers.
5. Use the delivered drain hose to remove the
remaining water out of the reservoir. • Two plastic strainers: heat exchanger reservoir
a. On the floor, next to the heat exchanger, place a outlet line.
small reservoir. • One strainer (bronze lock nut): on inlet line.
b. Fill the hose with water. 7. Rinse the strainers with water to clean.
c. Use your fingers to close both ends of the hose. 8. Reinstall the newly cleaned strainers.
d. Place one end of the drain hose into the reservoir 9. Refill the reservoir with distilled water.
of the heat exchanger, and the other end into the
10. Turn the unit ON and regularly monitor the reservoir
reservoir on the floor next to the heat exchanger.
level.
e. Release the hose ends.
11. Reinstall the top cover.
Water will flow into the reservoir on the floor next
to the heat exchanger. 12. Complete the Start the Heat Exchanger procedure.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 476 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Gradient Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style), continued

Start the Heat Exchanger 3. Verify the following:
Important! The heat exchanger should always be left • Recirculation pressure: 43.5 - 79.8 psi (3 - 5.5
ON (even over weekends) to maintain an bar).
ionization level of 1 MΩ /cm in the coil • Fluctuation: 7.2 psi (0.5 bar).
water circuit.
• Recirculation temperature: approx. 25o C.
1. Verify the following conditions are met:
• Bypass flow: 0.8 liter/min.
• Temperature set to 25o C.
Note The de-ionizer loop includes a flow valve
• Facility cooling water connected: 20 liters/min. at and flow meter, accessible via the
15o C. Temperature range: 8o to 15o C. access door on the front of the unit. The
Note The amount of facility water used is regulated flow meter is adjacent to the
by the heat exchanger, based on the temper- de-ionization cartridge.
ature of the coil cooling water. • Idle light: Activated (coil water temperature
2. Use the Power switch to turn the heat exchanger approximately 25o C.
ON. • Purity light: Green (normal condition).

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 477 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New Style)

Clean the Strainers Flushing/Refilling
In line Strainers are located: Two solutions are required to treat a TNF or TNF2
gradient system with a water volume of up to 30 liters.
• on the inlet of the recirculating water coil, and
• Inhibitor (AZ8104): Bottle contains 6 ml of AZ8104
• in the tank outlet line.
inhibitor diluted to 30 ml, which results in a
The strainers keep material from being input into the concentration of 0.2 ml/l when added to a typical TNF
pump (resulting in damage to the pump vanes) and they system.
protect the flow switch.
• Biocide (NX1100): Bottle contains 2.7 ml of NX1100
How often the strainers require cleaning depends on the biocide diluted to 30 ml, which results in a
purity of the cooling water. concentration of 0.09 ml/l when added to a typical
TNF system.
Important! Before cleaning the strainer, disconnect the
power cord from the power source and 1. Using the switch on the front panel, turn the water
drain the reservoir. cooler OFF.
1. Disconnect the power cord from the power source 2. Turn the external ball valves through 90o.
and drain the reservoir.
3. Identify the short hose from the ball valve (on the
2. Unscrew the strainer and remove it. gradient side of the coolant return hose) and place it
3. Rinse the strainer with clean water. into an empty container.

4. Refill/replace the cooling fluid. 4. Identify the short hose from the ball valve (on the
water cooler side of the coolant return hose) and
place it into a full reservoir of de-mineralized water,
Inhibitor and Biocide.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 478 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New Style), continued

Flushing/Refilling, continued
5. Run the cooler.
6. When the reservoir containing the de-mineralized
water, Inhibitor and biocide is almost empty, turn the
cooler OFF.
Important! Ensure no air is drawn into the water cooler.
7. Replace the water filter element.
8. Return both ball valves to the original inline positions
and secure with wire.
9. Verify there are no system leaks by running the
cooler for a couple of minutes.
10. Turn the water cooler OFF.
11. Remove the reservoir cap and top off the reservoir to
the base of the threaded filler neck with
demineralized water.
12. Replace the cap.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 479 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8)

Select one of the following topics: Start the Shield Cooler
• Start the Shield Cooler 1. At the compressor, push the circuit breaker rocker
switch to ON.
• Stop the Shield Cooler
The compressor and components drawing their
• Check Current Measurements
power from the compressor start.
• Check Valve Motor
Restarting After Power Failure
• Charge Helium Gas to System The unit will not automatically restart. The power switch
• Open the valve on the adapter fitting slowly and must be recycled to restart the unit.
vent until the appropriate equalization pressure is Important! Troubleshooting is required if the com-
obtained. pressor stops for other reasons.
• Shield Cooler Gas Cleanup Stop the Shield Cooler
• Compressor Gas Cleanup 1. At the compressor, push the circuit breaker rocker
• Gas Line Gas Cleanup switch to OFF.

• Leak Check The compressor and components drawing their

power from the compressor stop.
• Leak Repair
• Outside Expander Cable Replacement
• Compressor Shell High Temperature Switch
Replacement

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 480 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Check Current Measurements
1. Disconnect compressor power.
Reading
Indication
2. To view the terminal block, remove the compressor’s (Amperes)
front access cover.
0 Open circuit indicated.
3. At the terminal block, identify the incoming power 10 - 14 Normal; steady state.
leads.
> 10 - 14 Possible minor problem.
Note The terminal block is located in the lower left • low supply voltage
corner of the electrical chassis box.
• loose electrical connections
4. Expose the power leads, so a clamp-on ammeter
~ 68 Indicates mechanically locked rotor.
can be used.
Full Scale If a full scale reading is accompanied by a
5. Connect the ammeter to one of the power leads. tripped circuit breaker or blown control circuit
fuse, there’s probably a short circuit in the
6. Reconnect compressor power. chassis wiring or motor.
7. Turn the compressor ON.
10. Disconnect the ammeter.
8. For each lead, read the current draw. Stop the
compressor. 11. Replace the compressor’s front access cover.

9. To interpret the results of the measurements, consult

the table on the following page.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 481 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Check Valve Motor 7. Connect one lead of the meter to pin 1. Connect the
other lead to the expander housing or pin 4.
1. Turn the compressor OFF.
• Replace the valve motor if the meter indicates
2. Disconnect compressor power.
continuity and no wires are shorted.
3. On the expander, disconnect the expander cable
from the valve motor receptacle. 8. To check pins 2 and 3 to ground, repeat step 7.

4. Across the valve motor electrical receptacle pins, 9. Connect one lead of the meter to pin 4. Connect the
other lead to the expander housing.
measure the motor windings resistance.
• Pins 1-3: 620 ohms +10% • Check the green/yellow wire for a possible loose
ground connection if the meter does not show
• Pins 1-2: 620 ohms +10% continuity.
• Pins 2-3: 620 ohms +10% 10. Reconnect the expander cable to the valve motor
• Pin 4-GND (expander housing): 0 ohms receptacle if no faults are found.

5. If resistance(s) are outside the ranges specified in 11. Reconnect compressor power.
step 4 or the meter indicates a short or open circuit,
check the wiring between the electrical receptacle
and the motor.
6. Replace the valve motor if all the wires are
connected and none is shorted.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 482 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Charge Helium Gas to System 6. Using a Helium gas cylinder with the following
characteristics, connect a charge line to the pressure
Whenever the system equalization pressure is outside
the specified range, the unit should be charged or regulator.
vented. • Purity: 99.995% Helium
Venting is also required if the component requires • Pressure: 2070 kPa (300 psig)
disassembly for repairs/maintenance. This would also
include repairs to the self-sealing couplings. • Dew Point: < -50o C (-58o F)
7. Completely purge the charge line from the regulator
DANGER Use an appropriate regulator while connecting the charge line to the adapter
whenever using compressed Helium fitting.
gas. Overpressure can result in
injuries or equipment damage. Important! Remove all air contaminants to prevent
them from entering the system.
1. Stop the compressor. 8. Adjust the regulator to the required equalization
2. On the compressor, disconnect the return gas line pressure of 285 psi.
from the return coupling. 9. Open the adapter fitting valve slowly and charge with
3. Locate an adapter fitting (Part# 255919B2). Helium to the equalization pressure.
4. Verify the valve is closed. 10. On the adapter fitting and gas cylinder, close the
valves.
5. Attach the adapter fitting to the compressor return
coupling.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 483 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Charge Helium Gas to System, continued Vent to Adjust Equalization Pressure
11. Disconnect the charge line from the adapter fitting. Whenever the system equalization pressure is outside
the specified range, the unit should be charged or
12. Remove the fitting.
vented.
Note Store the charge line to keep it clean.
Venting is also required if the component requires
13. On the compressor, reconnect the return gas line to disassembly for repairs/maintenance. This would also
the return coupling. include repairs to the self-sealing couplings.
Note The coupling should be tightened to
DANGER Use an appropriate regulator
4.85 +0.7 kgf m (35 ft. lbs. +5 ft. lbs.)
whenever using compressed Helium
14. Check the aeroquip couplings for leaks at the cold gas. Overpressure can result in
head and compressor. injuries or equipment damage.

1. Stop the compressor.

2. On the compressor, disconnect the supply gas line.
3. Verify the adapter fitting valve (Part# 255919B2) is
closed. Connect the adapter fitting on the
compressor supply coupling.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 484 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Vent to Adjust Equalization Pressure, Shield Cooler Gas Cleanup
continued Complete Cold Head Service and replace the displacer
4. Open the valve on the adapter fitting slowly and vent assembly if:
until the appropriate equalization pressure is
• shield cooler was opened to the atmosphere, or
obtained.
• charge pressure reduced to <140 kPa (20 psig).
5. Close the adapter fitting valve and remove it from the
compressor.
6. Connect the supply gas line to the compressor
supply coupling
Note The coupling should be tightened to
4.85 +0.7 kgf m (35 ft. lbs. +5 ft. lbs.)
7. Check the aeroquip couplings for leaks at the cold
head and compressor.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 485 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Compressor Gas Cleanup 7. Using a Helium gas cylinder with the following
characteristics, connect a charge line to the pressure
This procedure is required if the compressor interior was
opened to the atmosphere, or the equalization pressure regulator.
is 140 kPa (20 psig) or lower. • Purity: 99.995% Helium
Replace the compressor’s absorber if it was opened to • Pressure: 2070 kPa (300 psig)
the atmosphere, or its charge pressure is less than
140 kPa (20 psig). • Dew Point: < -50o C (-58o F)
1. Disconnect the gas lines from the compressor. 8. Adjust the cylinder pressure regulator to 35 kPa
(5 psig).
2. Cap the disconnected gas line couplings.
9. Completely purge the charge line from the regulator
Note Gas cleanup is completed while the com- while connecting the charge line to the adapter fitting
pressor is disconnected from remaining sys- on the compressor’s return coupling.
tem components.
Important! Remove all air contaminants to prevent
3. Locate two adapter fittings (Part# 255919B2). them from entering the system.
4. Verify their valves are closed.
5. Connect them to the compressor supply and return
aeroquip couplings.
6. If the absorber has been disconnected, connect
adapter fitting (Part# SK8217A2) to the supply line
from the oil separator.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 486 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Compressor Gas Cleanup, continued 18. When the pressure falls to between 35 - 70 kPa
(5 - 10 psig):
10. Adjust the pressure regulator to 1520 kPa (220 psig).
a. Close the vent valve.
11. Open the adapter fitting valve. Charge the
compressor to 1520 kPa (220 psig). b. Open the charge valve to increase the pressure
12. If the absorber is connected, increase the charge to the appropriate pressure (step 15).
pressure to 1965 kPa (285 psig). c. Close the charge valve.
13. Close the adapter fitting valve used for charging. 19. Run the compressor for approximately 45 seconds,
14. To heat the oil to operating temperature: then stop the compressor.

a. Set the unit to Stand-alone Operation. 20. Using the vent valve, vent the compressor to
between 35 - 70 kPa (5 - 10 psig) and close the
b. Run the compressor for 30 minutes (minimum). valve.
c. Stop the compressor. 21. Repeat steps 16 - 20 a minimum of 10 times before
15. If the absorber is installed, adjust the pressure proceeding to the next step.
regulator to the system equalization pressure. 22. Open the adapter fitting charge valve and charge to
equalization pressure. Close the charge valve.
- or -
If the absorber is not installed, keep the pressure at
1520 kPa (220 psig).
16. Open the compressor supply coupling vent valve.
17. Carefully monitor the pressure gauge on the
compressor.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 487 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Compressor Gas Cleanup, continued Gas Line Gas Cleanup
23. Allow the compressor to cool. 1. Identify two adapter fittings (Part# SK8217A2).
24. With the compressor at approximately 20o C (68o F) Note You may also use two alternate fittings
read the pressure gauge. (Part# 255919B2 and 257246C5).
25. Charge or vent to adjust the equalization pressure 2. Verify their valves are closed and connect an
until it conforms to specification. adapter fitting to each end of one gas line.
26. Close the cylinder valve. 3. Using a Helium gas cylinder with the following
characteristics, connect a charge line to the pressure
27. Adjust the pressure regulator to 0 psig. regulator.
28. Disconnect the charge line from the adapter fitting. • Purity: 99.995% Helium
Note Store the charge line to keep it clean. • Pressure: 2070 kPa (300 psig)
29. Disconnect both adapter fittings.
• Dew Point: < -50o C (-58o F)
30. If disconnect before gas cleanup, reconnect the
absorber. DANGER Use an appropriate regulator
whenever using compressed Helium
31. Reconnect the supply and return gas lines.
gas. Overpressure can result in
Note The couplings should be tightened to injuries or equipment damage.
4.85 +0.7 kgf m (35 ft. lbs. +5 ft. lbs.)
32. Check the aeroquip couplings for leaks at the cold
head and compressor.
33. Return the stand-alone operation switch to Normal.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 488 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Gas Line Gas Cleanup, continued 11. Repeat step 10 a minimum of five times before
proceeding to the next step.
4. Open the valve on the gas cylinder.
12. Close the valve on the adapter fitting used for
5. Completely purge the charge line from the regulator
while connecting the charge line to one of the charging.
adapter fittings. 13. Open the gas cylinder valve.
Important! Remove all air contaminants to prevent 14. Adjust the pressure regulator to the equalization
them from entering the line. pressure of the system.
6. Adjust the regulator to 690 kPa (100 psig). 15. Open the valve on the adapter fitting.
7. Open the adapter fitting and charge the line to 690 16. Charge the gas line to the equalization pressure.
kPa.
17. Close the charge valve.
8. Close the valve on the Helium cylinder.
18. Close the gas cylinder valve.
Important! Do not close the valve on the regulator.
19. Disconnect the charge line.
9. Open the gas line vent valve and monitor the
regulator pressure gauge. 20. Remove the adapter fittings.

10. When the pressure falls to between 35 - 70 kPa 21. Clean the other gas line.
(5 - 10 psig): 22. When finished, store the charge line to keep it clean.
a. Close the vent valve.
b. Open the gas cylinder valve to increase the
pressure to 690 kPa.
c. Close the charge valve. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 489 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Leak Check Whichever method of leak detection is selected, do not
assume that the first leak found is the only one. All joints
Whenever the system has been disassembled to any
degree, check the gas-charged component for Helium should be checked.
leaks. • Leaks can occur at brazed and welded joints.
If available, use a Helium mass spectrometer leak • Leaks occur most frequently at threaded joints.
detector.
In the face of the aeroquip male coupling, a flat gasket
Note Using an instrument to detect leaks can provide seals the joint. Only when a gas line is connected can a
misleading results. Large leaks or a high concen- leak at this gasket seal be detected. Leaks at this point
tration of Helium can indicate leaks at sound can be caused by:
joints.
• a damaged or missing gasket seal,
If such a detector is not available, use a commercial leak
• a loose or damaged coupling, and/or
detection solution.
• dirt on/under the gasket seal or on the female
Since small leaks may be hard to detect with the
detection solution, remember to: coupling’s mating surface.

• coat (fully) the joint being tested,

• allow time for the bubbles to form around the
suspected small leak, and
• carefully examine the joint for even the smallest
formation of bubbles.
Important! Once solution testing is complete, wash all
residues from joints/couplings with water.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 490 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Leak Repair Outside Expander Cable Replacement
Special skills are required to fix leaks at welded joints. 1. To access the electrical box, remove the
compressor’s right side cover.
Leaks at threaded joints can often be fixed simply by
tightening the coupling. If the leakage continues after 2. Using two 5/8" wrenches, remove the cap from the
tightening the coupling, repairing the coupling may be strain relief.
indicated. Installing new o-rings and/or teflon tape may
Note Hold the body of the strain relief with one
also be required.
wrench. Use the other wrench to loosen the
cap.
Caution Do not attempt to repair a leaking
coupling on an absorber. Venting the 3. In the electrical box, disconnect the expander cable
absorber can introduce contaminants to from the VLV MTR Terminal Block.
the system which can not be removed in
4. Remove the cable.
the field.
5. Feed approximately twenty inches of new cable
through the strain relief cap, then through the strain
relief.
6. From the end of each individual conductor, strip 1/4"
of insulation.
7. To prevent fraying when inserting the conductor into
the Terminal Block, twist each stranded conductor.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 491 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Outside Expander Cable Replacement, Compressor Shell High Temperature Switch
continued Replacement
8. Connect the cable to the Terminal Block: This switch is located in a depression atop the
compressor housing (under the Terminal Box cover).
• Terminal T1: wire 16 (black)
1. Disconnect compressor power and remove the
• Terminal T2: wire 17 (brown)
module’s cover.
• Terminal T3: wire 18 (blue)
2. Atop the compressor, remove the Terminal Box
• Ground: green/yellow to grounding screw cover.
(to the right of the Terminal Block)
3. From the temperature switch terminals, disconnect
9. Tighten the cap of the strain relief fitting to secure the wires 30 and 31.
cable.
4. Remove the retainer containing the temperature
Note Use two wrenches to prevent the strain relief switch.
body from turning.
5. Position the new switch and new retainer into the
Terminal Box atop the compressor. Secure them with
the retainer clips.
6. Connect wire 30 and 31 to the temperature switch
terminals.
7. Replace the Terminal Box cover.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 492 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Air Cooling System (0.5T, 1.0T & 1.5T)

Measure Air Volume Air Volume Quick Check
A pressure sensor, connected to one of the two air 1. Obtain a clear hose with a tube ID the same as the
ducts, activates when the pressure falls below 60 Pascal. nipple port and a cup of tap water.
Air volume may be checked using pressure test point in 2. Immerse one end of the tube into the cup of water.
the cooling system.
3. Connect the other end of the tube to the nipple port.
Important! The sensor does not detect insufficient air
volume. 4. Measure the water displaced into the hose:
1. Use a manometer to check the test point behind the • Standard/Omni: 900 m3/h = 1/2" water
rear cone cover. • Power/Master: 500 m3/h = 1/4" water
• Standard/Omni: Air volume = 900 +50 m3/h
Pressure = 80 +10 Pa
• Power/Master: Air volume = 500 +50 m3/h
Pressure = 50 +10 Pa
2. Use a manometer to check the test point at the rear
of the magnet (nipple on rear air duct).
• Standard/Omni: Air volume = 900 +50 m3/h
Pressure = 185 +10 Pa
• Power/Master: Air volume = 500 +50 m3/h
Pressure = 85 +10 Pa

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 493 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42)

Select one of the following topics: 4. Wait approximately six minutes until the amplifier is
in Operate mode.
• Tube Bias Check
5. Press the [MENU] button until the LCD displays the
• Amplifier Manual Tube Test
Set PA Bias menu option.
Tube Bias Check 6. Use the <ARROW> keys to select Set PA Bias.
This procedure applies to all T10-NT and ACS-NT Press <ENTER>.
systems that include one of the following amplifiers:
The amplifier enters the Wait state. The amplifier
• 53-S21D-64, automatically gates the PA tube. The "PA lp:" LCD
• 53-S21D-42, or menu displays the PA tube plate current. The target
plate current displays in line 3 (Set For: xxx MA). The
• 53-S22D-42 plate current should be near to this value. The
1. On the middle right front of the RF Amplifier (53- amplifier should indicate OK on the display for
measured bias-current.
S21D, -64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), remove the
small service panel. The local keypad is located Note Optimally, if OK is flashing ON/OFF on the
behind this panel. LCD display, the value is at the edge of the
2. On the System Controller Board, press the [LOCAL] measurement window.
button. The LED goes ON. 7. Continue with this procedure on the following page.
3. Press the [OPER] button.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 494 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

Tube Bias Check, continued Bias Currents per Tube
8. Access the IPA Bias Set menu and turn the IPA Bias Always set a new tube to a value 10% higher than those
Set option ON. indicated below. Bias drifts downward during the first few
months in use.
9. Complete the measurements as previously
described and adjust only when necessary. • S21 PA Tube (3CPX5000A47):
10. Close the IPA Bias menu. – Normal Tube: 525 mA
If OK is flashing, the bias adjustment is correct. – New Tube: 575 mA
• S21 IPA Tube (3CX800A7):
– Normal Tube: 150 mA
– New Tube: 165 mA
• S22 PA Tube (3CPX1500A7):
– Normal Tube: 130 mA
– New Tube: 145 mA
• S22 IPA Tube (3CX800A7):
– Normal Tube: 110 mA
– New Tube: 125 mA

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 495 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

Amplifier Manual Tube Test 6. Use the <ARROW> keys to select DC Test PA Tube.
The amplifier tube test is part of the automatic testing Press <ENTER>.
that occurs nightly. It checks the bias current on both The PA tube is checked and the system responds
tubes. The "window" of this test is quite large (+50%), with a message indicating a Pass or Fail.
since a low bias current does not affect amplifier
7. The operation menu can be exited by pressing
performance.
<ENTER>.
To manually complete this test:
8. For the IPA tube, select the DC Test IPA Tube
1. On the middle right front of the RF Amplifier (53- option. Press <ENTER>.
S21D, -64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), remove the
small service panel. The local keypad is located
behind this panel.
2. On the System Controller Board, press the [LOCAL]
button. The LED goes ON.
3. Press the [OPER] button.
4. Wait approximately six minutes until the amplifier is
in Operate mode.
5. Press the [MENU] button until the LCD displays the
DC Test PA Tube menu option.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 496 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42)

Select one of the following topics: Re-initialize the Amplifier
• Field Replaceable Units For many of the problems detailed in the Error Code
section concerning the RF Amplifier, re-initializing the
• Re-initialize the Amplifier
amplifier is the first step in attempting to resolve the fault.
• Replacement of Decks
To re-initialize the amplifier:
• Removal/Replacement of Tubes
1. Turn OFF the mains circuit breaker at RF Amplifier
• Removal/Replacement of Air Filters (53-S23A-64 & S24A-42).
Field Replaceable Units 2. Wait 10 seconds.
Should it become necessary, the following amplifier 3. Turn ON the mains circuit breaker.
components/subsystems can be replaced:
• PS Deck S23/S24: (Part #: ART-X143-SP)
• RF Deck-S24: (Part#: ART-X283-SP)
• RF Deck-S23: (Part#: ART-X282-SP)
• IPA Tube (1 per system): (Part#: AXT-X002-SP)
• PA Tube*: (Part#: AXT-X140-SP)
• S23 RF Amplifier (complete): (Part#: 53-S23A-64)
• S24 RF Amplifier (complete): (Part#: 53-S24A-42)
Note The 64 MHz system contains two PA tubes, the
42 MHz system contains one.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 497 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Replacement of Decks 1. Command the amplifier to OFF.
The amplifier is divided into two distinct decks: 2. Turn the mains circuit breaker on the front of the
unit to OFF.
• RF Deck (upper)
3. Confirm AM mains power is turned OFF to the
• Power Supply (lower)
amplifier.
Important! Physically and electrically separate the
decks before replacing either unit. 4. Disconnect the AC cable from the power supply
(rear).
DANGER The power supply and RF decks can 5. Disconnect all cables connecting the MRI system to
contain lethal voltages. the amplifier.
Prior to removing any covers: 6. Identify the Mating Plate securing the power supply
deck to the RF deck. Remove the screws securing
1. Turn the equipment OFF.
the plate to the unit.
2. Disconnect the AC Mains Supply
7. Place the plate and screws in a safe location; they
3. Wait for the power supplies to will be needed for installation of the new deck.
discharge completely (approx. 10
8. Remove the screws securing the front panel to the
minutes).
power supply.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 498 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Replacement of Decks, continued Removal/Replacement of Tubes
9. Disconnect all cables connecting the RF deck to the
power supply. DANGER The power supply and RF decks can
contain lethal voltages.
10. Use the handles on the front and rear of the unit to
separate the two decks. Prior to removing any covers:

Note RF connectors (bottom) are exposed, so 1. Turn the equipment OFF.

care should be used so no foreign objects 2. Disconnect the AC Mains Supply
damage the connectors.
3. Wait for the power supplies to
11. Replace the appropriate deck, following the steps in discharge completely (approx. 10
this procedure in reverse order. minutes).

Important! Before making any physical contact with

any component, use an appropriately insu-
lated screwdriver (thick-bladed) to connect
each exposed high voltage point to chassis.
Tube/component damage will result if power
is applied while any cover is removed or
interlock defeated.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 499 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Removal/Replacement of Tubes, continued 4. To allow all the high-voltage power supplies to
discharge, wait for a minimum of 10 minutes.
The following tools will be required to complete this
procedure:
Caution System components are sensitive to
• 6 mm screwdriver (blade type) static electricity. Use caution to avoid
• #2 cross-type screwdriver damage to system components.

• Thick-bladed screwdriver (for discharging high 5. Remove the RF deck top panel, closest to the
voltage) amplifier front. The cover is immediately above the
• Tube-pulling pliers (MKS-supplied) tube compartment.

Important! Tube pulling pliers should not be used for a. Remove 21 screws from the top of the panel.
installation, only for tube removal. b. Remove 4 screws from the top edge of the front
panel.
1. Turn the amplifier OFF.
c. Do not remove the front panel left-and right-top
2. Turn the mains circuit breaker on the front of the
corner screws.
unit to OFF.
The interior tube compartment cover becomes
3. Disconnect the AC cable from the power supply
(rear). visible once the tube compartment exterior panel is
removed.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 500 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Removal/Replacement of Tubes, continued PA Tube Removal and Replacement
1. High voltage moves from the PA plate choke through
DANGER Components in the interior tube a flexible braid lead to a clip attached to the PA
compartment retain high-voltage. Do tube(s) plate cap. Remove the clip.
not touch anything inside the
compartment until directed to do so. 2. Flat strapping is bent around the tube(s). A plate
choke assembly is also attached to the strapping.
6. Remove the interior tube compartment cover. a. Remove the choke.
• Release the 16 cover screws with a 1/3 counter- b. Loosen the securing hardware from the tube
clockwise turn. plate strap. Remove it.
• The screws remain in the cover. Important! Do not deform the tube plate straps. Defor-
Note Depending on the number of tubes, the layout of mation of the strapping will affect the tuning
components in the compartment will vary. characteristics of the amplifier.
7. To discharge any residual high-voltage, place a 3. Using caution to not twist the tube, use the MKS-
thick-bladed screwdriver from chassis ground to the supplied tube-pulling pliers to grip the anode cap.
top of the PA Plate Choke. The socket fit will be tight.
8. If you are replacing the PA tube, continue to PA 4. Gently pull up using a slight side-to-side rocking
Tube Removal and Replacement. motion to remove the tube from the socket.
- or -
If you are replacing the IPA tube, continue to IPA
Tube Removal and Replacement.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 501 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Removal/Replacement of Tubes, continued 9. If the IPA tube is also going to be replaced, continue
to IPA Tube Removal and Replacement.
PA Tube Removal and Replacement, continued
5. Note the size and arrangement of the pins by - or -
inspecting the tube. If the IPA tube is not going to be replaced:
6. Insert the new tube: a. Replace the interior tube compartment cover.
a. On the new tube, align the large base pin with the b. Replace the exterior tube compartment cover.
appropriate socket position.
c. Re-connect the mains power cord.
b. Place your thumbs atop the tube anode.
d. Turn the front panel circuit breaker ON.
c. Press the tube downward into the socket.
e. Complete a system test.
7. Re-attach the plate strap removed in step 2.
f. Reset the PA tube hour counter.
8. Re-connect the high voltage plate supply clip
removed in step 1.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 502 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Removal/Replacement of Tubes, continued 5. Use care in avoiding damage to the IPA tube sub-
deck mounting socket.
IPA Tube Removal and Replacement
Note Tube base pins have a space/keyway between
DANGER The IPA tube anode may retain high- pins 1 and 11. A notch at the top of the anode
voltage, since it is not powered from cooling fin shell identifies the keyway. You may
the same supply as the PA tube. Do apply a colored mark to the notch as a visible ref-
not touch the IPA tube until after the erence point.
high-voltage is discharged.
6. Insert the new IPA tube:
1. Remove the screen from above the IPA tube by a. Align the notch in the replacement IPA tube
removing the four screws attaching the screen to the anode with the keyway alignment mark on the
chassis (see Top View (Panel Removed)). tube compartment deck.
2. To discharge any residual high-voltage, place a b. Place your thumbs atop the tube anode.
thick-bladed screwdriver from chassis ground to the
exposed IPA tube anode. c. Press the tube downward into the socket.

3. Using caution to not twist the tube, use the MKS- d. When seated, verify the distance between the top
supplied tube-pulling pliers to grip the anode cap. of the anode cooling fin shell and the deck is one
The socket fit will be tight. inch.

4. Gently pull up straight upward to remove the tube

from the socket.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 503 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64 & 53-S24A-42), continued

Removal/Replacement of Tubes, continued Removal/Replacement of Air Filters
IPA Tube Removal and Replacement, continued
DANGER Before removing any panels or cover
7. Replace the screen patch. from the system, turn the amplifier
8. Replace the interior tube compartment cover. OFF and disconnect it from the mains
power source. Wait a minimum of 10
9. Replace the exterior tube compartment cover. minutes for the high-voltage supplies
10. Re-connect the mains power cord. to discharge.
11. Turn the front panel circuit breaker ON. 1. Turn the amplifier mains power OFF.
12. Complete a system test. 2. Wait for the blower to stop.
13. Reset the IPA tube hour counter. 3. Remove the four screws securing each filter bracket
to the front panel of both decks.
4. To install new filters (of the same type) reverse the
steps in this procedure.
Note If marked on the filter frame, observe the
direction of airflow into the amplifier.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 504 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 234 and 274

Power-ON Power-OFF
1. Turn ON the following breakers, located on the wall This procedure is useful when overnight power problems
in the computer room, in the following order: cause problems with the boot up of the system the
following morning.
a. S1 (System Main Switch)
1. Exit the applications software.
b. F6 (Filter Box)
2. Logon as Shutdown.
c. F5 (Computer)
3. Select Shutdown Host and Reconstructor.
d. F3 (TNDAC)
4. Wait for the system to display the ">>>" prompt.
e. F1 (Gradients)
5. Turn OFF the following breakers, located on the wall
The monitor will display various boot messages.
in the computer room, in the following order:
2. Logon as Gyroscan.
a. F1 (Gradients)
3. To check the system and warm the RF amplifier prior
b. F3 (TNDAC)
to completing a patient scan, run a test scan.
c. F5 (Computer)
d. F6 (Filter Box)
e. S1 (System Main Switch)

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 505 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271

Select one of the following topics: Power-ON
• Power-ON Before switching on the cabinets:
• Power OFF Intera w/Copley Dual Cabinet • Verify all magnet covers are properly mounted.
• Restart Processes (R10x and R11x Systems) • Verify the water-cooling is operational for the gradient
coil.
• Restart Processes (R9 - VMS Systems)
• Verify the water-cooling is operational for the gradient
• Restart Processes (R10x and R11x Systems)
amplifier.
• GCI Jumper Settings
• Verify the gradient coil temperature sensor is
connected.
• Ensure the differential pressure over the inlet and
outlet of the facility water connection of the heat
exchanger does not exceed 40.5 psi.
Note If the above pressure is exceeded, the heat
exchanger’s primary circuit servo valve will
not be able to close completely.
Important! If the gradient amplifier coolant temperature
is less than 18o C, the heat exchanger
generates an error when switched ON, and
the GCI shutdowns the gradient amplifier.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 506 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Power-ON, continued Programming Overview
1. Turn the GCI unit ON. Before working on this system, verify the AC power has
been switched OFF for a minimum of 5 minutes before
2. Turn the amplifier axes ON.
beginning work on the gradient chain.
3. If applicable, turn slave cabinet amplifier axes ON.
For system configuration, there are no jumpers or
4. Turn the HV DC power supply ON. switches that must be set for the Copley gradient
amplifier axes and DC power supplies.
5. If applicable, turn the slave cabinet HV DC power
supply ON. Restart Processes (R9 - VMS Systems)
6. In the MDE (Main Distribution Extension), turn the 1. Logout of the application software.
mains power ON.
2. To complete a restart of all background processes,
Power OFF Intera w/Copley Dual Cabinet logon as Gyrorestart.
To power OFF the Copley Dual Cabinet (master/slave)
gradient amplifier systems, use the switch in the MDU-
extension.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 507 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Restart Processes (R10x and R11x Systems) GCI Jumper Settings
Note As an alternative to the following procedure, pro- All background processes must be restarted when:
cesses can be restarted by shutting down and
• the gradient system configuration is changed in the
rebooting the system. The advantage to this is
software,
that the Reconstructor is also restarted.
• the GCI jumper settings are changed, or
1. Press <CTRL>+<ALT>+<DEL>.
• the GCI boards are exchanged.
2. Logon as MRService.
3. On the keyboard, press the <WWINDOWS> button.
GCI I/O Board (DGB)
68 P HD 15P 2 x 15P 2 x 9P BNC BNC

4. Select Programs > Accessories > Command X1 X5 X6

X7
X4
X9
X3 X2

Prompt. H1
X8

5. To display a list of the status on all background

processes, type: permproc and press <ENTER>.
6. To stop all background processes, type: permproc X100
stopall and press <ENTER>.

W20
W21
W22
W23
7. To start all background processes, type: permproc
startall and press <ENTER>.

W31
W30
W33
W32
X03 X02

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 508 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

GCI Jumper Settings, continued
GCI - 1 Main Board
Nova Quasar
Pulsar Quasar
BNC BNC
Intera Nova Dual Dual
1 x C271 2 x C271
X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 2 x C271 2 x C281
H1
W30 n/a n/a n/a n/a
W620 W610 W600
W621 W611 W601 W31 x x x x
W32 x x x x
X100 W33 x x x x
W20 x n/a n/a n/a
W3
30
31
W21 x x x x
32
33
20
W22 x x x n/a
21
22
23 W23 x x x x
W2

X02 X01

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 509 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274

Select one of the following topics: 1. Check the settings of the dip switches on the power
modules and controllers.
• Pre Power-On Checks
Note Power module dip switches are on the rear of
• Power-ON
the cabinets. See the following drawing.
• Power-OFF
Copley 274 Power Module Dip Switches
• Verify Gradient Amplifier Parameters & Drivers in Pushed to Front to Left = “1”

ASW and TSW (R7.x-9.x Systems Only)

• Set Internal Clock (Test Purposes)
ON OFF

• Configure 3 Power Modules (Test Purposes)

MSB

• Check Gradient Orientation

• Eddy Current Check
LSB
0 1

Pre Power-On Checks

Check all dip switches and jumper settings prior to
turning the cabinet(s) ON. Sliding Rail

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 510 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Pre Power On Checks, continued Copley 274 Power Module Dip Switches
Master Cabinet Address Selection
Function Master Cabinet Dip Switches (MSB-LSB)
(PT1000A,PT3000, PT6000, Intera Power & Intera
Master) Address Controller Y 14 dddduuud
Address Controller Z 15 dddduuuu
Copley 274 Power Module Dip Switches
Note The dip switches of the address selection are reversed
Function Master Cabinet Dip Switches (MSB-LSB) MSB-LSB, M1-M0 in some controllers. Always check the label
behind the controller panel hatch.
Address Power Module 1 00000001
Address Power Module 2 00000010
Address Power Module 3 00000011
Address Power Module 4 00000100
Address Power Module 5 00000101
Address Power Module 6 00000110
Address Power Module 7 00000111
Address Power Module 8 00001000
Address Power Module 9 00001001
Address Power Module 10 00001010
Address Power Module 11 00001011
Address Power Module 12 00001100
Address Controller X 13 dddduudu Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 511 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Pre Power-On Checks, continued Copley 274 Power Module Switches
Slave Cabinet Address Selection (PT6000 &
Function Slave Cabinet Dip Switches (MSB-LSB)
Intera Master
Address Controller Y 30 ddduuuud
Copley 274 Power Module Switches
Address Controller Z 31 ddduuuuu
Function Slave Cabinet Dip Switches (MSB-LSB) Note The dip switches of the address selection are reversed
MSB-LSB, M1-M0 in some controllers. Always check the label
Address Power Module 17 00010001
behind the controller panel hatch.
Address Power Module 18 00010010
Address Power Module 19 00010011
Address Power Module 20 00010100
Address Power Module 21 00010101
Address Power Module 22 00010110
Address Power Module 23 00010111
Address Power Module 24 00011000
Address Power Module 25 00011001
Address Power Module 26 00011010
Address Power Module 27 00011011
Address Power Module 28 00011100
Address Controller X 29 ddduuudu
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 512 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Pre Power-On Checks, continued Copley 274 Controller Dip Switch Locations
PT3000 & Intera Power Cabinet Coil_1 Mode &
Clock Signal Selection
Current

Copley 274 Controller Dip

Monitor

Function Power Switches M1, M0, OSC S/M,

Up
OSC ON, 3/4 MOD
Coil Controller X, Y, Z dduud
Mode(s), Down

OFF S3
Gain 3
HFEDL
BWL

M1
OFFS4

M0

¾ MOD
Gain 1

Gain 4

MSO

OSC S/M
DLY 1
1 LIM

OSC ON
OFF 5L

7C1

DLY 2

HFED 2

LSO
OFF 62

7C2
Gain 2

BW2
Address
Clock Voltage
Monitor

PT1000A, PT6000 & Intera Master (Master/Slave

Cabinets) Coil_2 Mode & Clock Signal Selection
For the majority of the controllers, the preceding drawing
Copley 274 Controller Dip
details the layout of the dip switches of the address
Function Power Switches M1, M0, OSC S/M,
OSC ON, 3/4 MOD selection.

Coil Controller X, Y, Z duuud Important! Always check the label behind the controller
Mode(s), hatch to verify the dip switches are set
Clock correctly.
Note The dip switches of the address selection are reversed
MSB-LSB, M1-M0 in some controllers.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 513 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Pre Power-On Checks, continued 2. Check the gradient interface controller (DIBA/DIBB)
jumper settings.
Copley 274 Controller Dip Switch Locations
(Reversed) DIBA DIBB

W10 W5
Current 3 0
Monitor (Not Used) 2 1
1 2
3
274 274
Up 0 0
Single 1 1 Dual
Mode 2 2 Mode
3 3

Down
M1
OFF S3

M0
Gain 3

MSO
HFEDL
BWL

OFFS4

¾ MOD
Gain 1

Gain 4

OSC S/M
DLY 1
1 LIM

OSC ON
OFF 5L

7C1

DLY 2

HFED 2
OFF 62

7C2
Gain 2

LSO
BW2

Address

Voltage DID-DIE-DIF
Monitor

In some instances, the dip switches M0 and M1 are W6

reversed, as are the dip switches for the address
selection.
Important! Always check the label behind the controller
hatch to verify the dip switches are set
correctly.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 514 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Pre Power-On Checks, continued 4. Check the grounding straps of the side panels and
doors of the cabinets.
Jumper W10 on the DIBA board is not required, because
the clock signal is directly connected from the gradient 5. Verify the power module fan assemblies are properly
interface controller daughter board to the Copley mounted.
controller through a separate coaxial cable. The clock
signal does not go through the gradient interface 6. Verify the rear doors are closed.
controller mother board and waveform boards. Note The door switch in the upper right cabinet
corner should be pushed inwards. Pull the
Important! If accidentally installed, the jumper will
switch pin outwards operate the gradient
generate signal interference, negatively
amplifier with the doors opened.
affecting image quality.
7. Verify all magnet covers are mounted.
Jumper W6 on all three WFG/ECC2 boards (DID/DIE/
DIF) for all system configurations with a Copley 274 Note If the magnet covers are not mounted or the
gradient amplifier, is not installed. RF room is not operational, temporarily over-
rule the gradient air-pressure sensor. To do
Every controller inside a Copley 274 axis has two sets of
this, short-circuit the two wires connected
potentiometers. Set 1 is used in PT3000 and Intera
Power systems. Set 2 is used in PT1000A, PT6000 and directly to the air pressure sensor.
Intera Master systems. 8. Verify the water-cooling system is operational.
Note These potentiometer sets are selected with 9. Verify the gradient coil temperature sensor is
dip switches "M1" and "M0" on each properly connected.
controller.
3. Verify the gradient system interconnections are
securely tightened.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 515 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Power-ON Power-OFF
1. Turn ON the following breakers, located on the wall 1. Exit the applications software.
in the computer room, in the following order:
2. Logon as Shutdown.
a. F1 (Mains Distribution Unit - small box)
3. Select Shutdown Host and Reconstructor.
b. F3 (TNDAC)
4. Wait for the system to display the ">>>" prompt.
c. F10 (RF Amp)
5. Turn OFF the following breakers, located on the wall
d. F6 (Filter Box) in the computer room, in the following order:
e. F5 (Back-end console - Host Computer) a. F2 (Gradients)
f. F2 (Gradients) b. F3 (TNDAC)
The monitor will display various boot messages. c. F5 (Back-end console - Host Computer)
2. From the User Login screen, logon as Gyroscan. d. F6 (Filter Box)
3. To check the system and warm the RF amplifier prior e. F10 (RF Amp)
to completing a patient scan, run a test scan.
f. F1 (Mains Distribution Unit - small box)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 516 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Verify Gradient Amplifier Parameters & 8. To check the gradient amplifier drivers in TSW,
Drivers in ASW and TSW (R7.x-9.x Systems a. From the User Login screen, login as TSW.
Only)
b. Select CONF. Select Edit.
1. Logon as Gyrotool.
c. Select line 696 (Copley-274S or Copley-274D).
2. To display the Main menu screen, press <ENTER>.
d. Press <CTRL>+<Z>.
3. Select Modify System Configuration > Scanner
Hardware Configuration. e. Click [EXIT]. Select Quit.
4. Select the gradient amplifier type (Copley-274S or 9. If the gradient amplifier type has been changed, you
Copley-274D). must complete a Gyrorestart before scanning.
5. Select the Gradient Coil Type (Water-cooled). a. Logon as Gyrorestart.
6. Click [PROCEED]. b. Click <YES>.
7. Click [EXIT].

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 517 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Set Internal Clock (Test Purposes) 2. To activate the internal clock of the Master X
Controller, set the OSC S/M and OSC ON dip
The Copley 274 gradient amplifier(s) clock is generated
on the transceiver board inside the NTDAC. It is supplied switches to Down.
to the gradient interface via the NTDAC BCP board. OSC S/M and OSC ON have to be set like "x-axes".
If clock problems occur, configure the gradient amplifier Note The Master X Controller is generating the
to internal clock for testing purposes. clock for all the master/slave controllers.
Note Operating in this mode can slightly decrease If this procedure fails to work, it is likely a problem exists
image quality. with the interconnect board. To check this:
To verify gradient amplifier behavior over a longer period 1. Disconnect the cable from DIR-X67.
of time, with the clock set to internal the system can be
2. Disconnect the cable from DIR-X68.
utilized by the customer while troubleshooting continues
at a more convenient time. 3. Using a coax I-piece or T-piece, connect these two
cables together.
1. For PT1000A, PT3000 and Intera Power, disconnect
DIB-X58 on the gradient interface controller The clock signal will now bypass the interconnect
daughter board. board.
- or -
For PT6000 and Intera Master:
a. Disconnect the coax cable from DIR-X66.
b. Disconnect the cable from DIR-X67 (clock to
master cabinet) and connect it to DIR-X66.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 518 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Configure 3 Power Modules (Test Purposes) Check Gradient Orientation
If an axis amplifier has one defective power module, the Prior to beginning this procedure:
corresponding controller can be configured for operation
• the gradient system must be functioning properly,
with three power modules.
• the shim gantry must be mounted, and
The defective power module must be removed. The
remaining good modules must be in slots 1-3 • the Tesla meter must be setup.
(4 must remain open).
Note The integrator must be warmed-up for
Important! This results in a performance reduction of 30 minutes and covered to stabilize the
the gradient orientation of 25%, resulting in temperature.
scan aborts.
1. Using the Tesla meter, measure the field strength.
1. Turn the gradient amplifiers OFF.
a. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN
2. On the affected axis amplifier, open the small front UTILITIES].
cover of the controller.
b. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning >
3. Set the 3/4 MOD dip switch from Down to Up. System Tuning Tools.
Note See Copley 274 Controller Dip Switch c. Select Installation Procedures > Gradient
Locations. Adjustment Procedures.
4. Turn the gradient amplifiers ON. d. Select Shim Probe Position.
5. After the repair has been completed, reconfigure the e. Click [PROCEED].
controller for four power modules.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 519 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Check Gradient Orientation, continued If the orientation is correct, the following are true:
2. Depending on the gradient being tested, change the • X-Gradient: (2-1) > 0; (6-5) < 0
Gradient Coil parameter to X, Y or Z.
• Y-Gradient: (11-9) > 0; (15-13) < 0
3. Measure the field strength in each position as
• Z-Gradient: (20-17) > 0; (24-21) < 0
indicated by the following.
4. If any of the gradients are incorrectly oriented,
Probe Demand Input correct.
Position 5. Repeat this procedure.
x=y=z=0 x=ON y=ON z=ON

p6, 0 deg. 1 2 n/a n/a 6. When all are properly oriented, remove the shim
gantry and Tesla meter.
p6, 180 deg. 5 6 n/a n/a
p6, 90 deg. 9 n/a 11 n/a
p6, 270 deg. 13 n/a 15 n/a
P1, 0 deg. 17 n/a n/a 20
P12, 0 deg. 21 n/a n/a 24

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 520 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Eddy Current Check Axis Steps
Check eddy currents prior to making any adjustments.
Z 1. Place 2 pickup coils in position 1 and 1 on the Z-
archive. axis. See Position Eddy Current Pickup Coils.
The following is a summary of the ECC Check. 2. Select the Z-gradient and move the holder with the
pickup coils in the Z-direction until the response of
Note The integrator must be warmed for 30 minutes, the 2 channels is equal (tolerance: 100 mV).
and covered to keep the temperature stable. 3. Complete the Final Eddy Current Measurement
procedure for the Z-gradient.
Axis Steps
1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
X 1. Place 2 pickup coils in position 2 and 4 on the X-
axis. See Position Eddy Current Pickup Coils. 2. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning >
2. Select the Z-gradient and move the holder with the System Tuning Tools.
pickup coils in the Z-direction until the response of
the 2 channels is <+50 mV. 3. Select Installation Procedures > Gradient
3. Complete the Final Eddy Current Measurement
Adjustment Procedures.
procedure for the X-gradient. 4. Select Eddy Current Final Measurement.
Y 1. Place 2 pickup coils in position 3 and 5 on the Y-
axis. See Position Eddy Current Pickup Coils.
An information screen displays.
2. Select the Z-gradient and move the holder with the
pickup coils in the Z-direction until the response of
the 2 channels is <+50 mV.
3. Complete the Final Eddy Current Measurement
procedure for the Y-gradient.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 521 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Eddy Current Check, continued ECC Adjustment Specifications (Power)
5. Click [PROCEED].
Value Power Specification
6. Change/check the following values.
3/4 Point 0.3 ms 69.0% +3.0%
Value Details EOS Point 0.4 ms 95.0% +0.5%

Gradient Coil "xxx": the gradient being tested Flatness 1 0.7 - 3.4 ms <0.15% *
Activate all filters: 1 - 6: ON Flatness 2 3.4 - 990 ms <0.1% *
Difference 1 1.0 - 5.4 ms <0.45% *
7. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. An
MRL displays, providing information on nominal and Difference 2 5.8 - 990 ms <0.42% *
specifications for Current ECC Settings. Note * [(max.value) - (min.value0]
8. If a value is outside specification, see the following
ECC Adjustment Specifications.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 522 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Eddy Current Check, continued
ECC Adjustment Specifications (Master)

Value Power Specification

3/4 Point 0.15 ms 63.0% +6.0%

EOS Point 0.224 ms 91.5% +0.5%
Flatness 1 0.5 - 3.2 ms <0.15% *
Flatness 2 3.3 - 990 ms <0.1% *
Difference 1 0.8 - 5.2 ms <0.45% *
Difference 2 5.2 - 990 ms <0.42% *
Note * [(max.value) - (min.value0]

If the system fails the flatness check, see the Adjust

Eddy Current procedure. If the flatness check is within
specification, change the position of the pickup coils for
another axis and repeat this procedure.
If the system fails the difference check, the flux meter is
probably the cause. To exclude the meter:
1. Interchange the eddy current pickup coil connections
at the front of the flux meter.
2. Check the measurement again.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 523 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Gyroscan (Omni, Power & Master)

Select one of the following topics: 4. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
• Determine System Resonance Frequency 5. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning >
System Tuning Tools.
• RF Power Reference & PU Coil Measurement
6. Select Installation Procedures > F0
• Determine Gradient Parameters
Determination.
• Eddy Current Analysis
7. Follow the prompts on the screen. Start the
Determine System Resonance Frequency measurement.
Adjusting the magnetic field to the appropriate F0 8. Check the following specifications. If within
frequency is completed in the magnet section. specification, no further action is required.
The STT menu - F0 Determination Tool option can be Specifications
used to enter the actual F0 frequency into the hardware • Intera 0.5T: 21.295 MHz +5 kHz
parameter file.
• Intera 1.0T: 42.595 MHz +5 kHz
1. Verify the Automatic BDAS procedures successfully
pass. • Intera 1.5T: 63.897 MHz +5 kHz
2. Complete the Max kW Adjustment and PMU Test. 9. Select Exit.
3. Logon as Gyroscan.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 524 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Gyroscan (Omni, Power & Master), continued

RF Power Reference & PU Coil Measurement 5. Select RF Power Reference Measurement QBC.
Power Reference Measurement 6. Follow the prompts on the screen.
Position of the pickup coils can influence the power 7. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
reference measurement. Errors are generated when the
positioning is outside specification. Value Nominal Range
• When the pickup Cal B1 value is too low, the coils are Ref RF Drive 0.9600 < 1.2500
too close to the QBC. Use 2 mm step adjustments Scale
when making the adjustment.
B1 24.22 24.00 - 24.50
• When the pickup Cal B1 value is too high, the coils Q Spec 210 n/a
are too far from the QBC. Use 2 mm step adjustment
when making this adjustment. Pickup Sens 2.33 1.82 - 2.98

1. Logon as Gyroscan.
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
3. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning >
System Tuning Tools.
4. Select Installation Procedures > RF Power Ref.
and PU Coil Measurements.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 525 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Gyroscan (Omni, Power & Master), continued

RF Power Reference & PU Coil Measurement, Determine Gradient Parameters
continued This procedure will complete gradient channel delay
Pickup (PU) Coil Measurements determination and gradient FID shimming
1. Logon as Gyroscan. measurements.

2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. 1. Place a 1 liter bottle horizontally in the isocenter.

3. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning > 2. Verify the gradient cabinet has been ON for a
System Tuning Tools. minimum of 15 minutes.

4. Select Installation Procedures > RF Power Ref. 3. Logon as Gyroscan.

and PU Coil Measurements. 4. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
5. Select PU Coil Triplevel Measurements. 5. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning >
6. Follow the prompts on the screen carefully. System Tuning Tools.

Note Depending on configuration, some upgraded 6. Select Installation Procedures > Gradient
systems must connect to the 50 E dummy Parameters Determination.
load instead of the 50E load of the body coil. 7. When prompted, run all subsequent tools
7. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. successively.

8. Record the test results in the MRL. 8. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
9. Follow the prompts on the screen.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 526 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Gyroscan (Omni, Power & Master), continued

Eddy Current Analysis Periodic Image Quality Test (IQ & PIQT)
This tool analyzes the effect of eddy current on the linear 1. Remove the head rest from the Head Coil.
shim currents.
2. Place the phantom holder (load ring) in the head coil.
1. Place the 3 liter bottle vertically on the table top.
Note Place phantom in holder with the "T" at the
2. Logon as Gyroscan. top.
3. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. 3. Press [ALIGNMENT LIGHTS] and move table thumb
switch to move table into position, to center on head
4. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning >
coil notch in alignment light.
System Tuning Tools.
4. Press the [PATIENT TRAVEL TO SCAN] button. The
5. Select Installation Procedures > Eddy Current
LED should light.
Analysis.
5. Use the thumb switch to drive the table into isocenter
6. To start the three measurements, click [PROCEED].
until the table comes to a complete stop.
7. Follow the prompts on the screen.
6. Click [SCAN CONTROL].
7. Select SPT Scanning > PIQT.
8. Click [PROCEED]. PIQT runs automatically. Three
scans will be done. The system will scan, evaluate,
and store results.
9. To return to the Gyroscan main menu, click
[CANCEL].

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 527 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R7.x-R9.x)

SNR - Floodfield 10. Select Select Scan. Select 4 QA2:H(head),MS,FE.
1. In Gyroscan applications, click the View Package Click [PROCEED].
icon. (See User Interface (R7.x-R9.x).) 11. Select Select Image. Change to slice 2. Click
[PROCEED].
2. Click the Phantom icon.
12. Select Philips Quality Procedure.
3. Select IQ Parameter Evaluation Tools.
13. Complete the Site Data Sheet and compare the
4. Select SNR and Floodfield Uniformity
information to prior results.
Measurements.
14. Select Select Scan. Select 5 QA3:B(body),2D,SE.
5. Select Select Examination. Select PIQT. Click
Click [PROCEED].
[PROCEED].
15. Select Select Image. Change slice to 1. Click
6. Select Select Scan. Select 3 QA1:H(head),MS,SE.
Click [PROCEED]. [PROCEED].

7. Select Select Image. Change to slice 3. Click 16. Check the three echoes and record the data.
[PROCEED]. 17. Select Philips Quality Procedure.
8. Select Philips Quality Procedure. 18. Complete the Site Data Sheet and compare the
information to prior results.
9. Complete the Site Data Sheet and compare the
information to prior results.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 528 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Spatial Linearity Measurements 10. Select Spatial Linearity Measurements.
1. In Gyroscan applications, click the View Package 11. Select Select Examination. Select PIQT. Click
icon. [PROCEED].
2. Click the Phantom icon. 12. Select Select Scan. Select scan 4 QA2. Click
3. Select IQ Parameter Evaluation Tools. [PROCEED].

4. Select Spatial Linearity Measurements. 13. Select Select Image. Select slice 1. Click
[PROCEED].
5. Select Select Examination. Select PIQT. Click
[PROCEED]. 14. Select Philips Quality Procedure.

6. Select Select Scan. Select scan 3 QA1. Click 15. Complete the Site Data Sheet and compare the
information to prior results.
[PROCEED].
7. Select Select Image. Select slice 2. Click
[PROCEED].
8. Select Philips Quality Procedure.
9. Complete the Site Data Sheet and compare the
information to prior results.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 529 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Slice Profile Measurements 13. Select Philips Quality Procedure.
1. In Gyroscan applications, click View Package. 14. Complete the Site Data Sheet and compare the
information to prior results.
2. Click the Phantom icon.
3. Select IQ Parameter Evaluation Tools. Spatial Resolution Measurements
1. In Gyroscan applications, click the View Package
4. Select Slice Profile Measurements.
icon.
5. Select Select Examination. Select PIQT. Click
2. Click the Phantom icon.
[PROCEED].
3. Select IQ Parameter Evaluation Tools.
6. Select Select Scan. Select scan 3 QA1. Click
[PROCEED]. 4. Select Spatial Resolution Measurements.
7. Select Select Image. Select slice 4. Click 5. Select Select Examination. Select PIQT. Click
[PROCEED]. [PROCEED].
8. Select Philips Quality Procedure. 6. Select Select Scan. Select scan 3 QA1. Click
[PROCEED].
9. Complete the Site Data Sheet and compare the
information to prior results. 7. Select Select Image. Select slice 5. Click
[PROCEED].
10. Select Select Examination. Select PIQT. Click
[PROCEED]. 8. Select Philips Quality Procedure.
11. Select Select Scan. Select scan 4 QA2. Click 9. Complete the Site Data Sheet and compare the
[PROCEED]. information to prior results.
12. Select Select Image. Select slice 3. Click
[PROCEED]. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 530 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Automatic Surface Coil Scan Manual Surface Coil Scan
1. Press the [SCAN] button. 1. From the Applications menu, select Patient > New
Exam.
2. Select Scan Control > SPT Scanning.
2. Enter the name, registration number, date of birth,
3. Logon as Service using service as the password.
weight (70 kg) and Phantom. Click <ENTER>.
4. Select IQT Scan. Select the surface coil to scan.
3. Verify the patient information. Click [PROCEED].
5. Follow the directions/prompts for coil positioning
4. Press the [SCAN] button.
displayed on the monitor.
5. Click [ANATOMY]. Click [PHANTOM STUDIES].
6. Press Alignment Lights. Use the table thumb
switch to move the table to alignment light center. 6. Click [PROCEED]. Click [SC] (Surface Coil).
7. Press the Patient Travel to Scan button. The LED 7. Click [PROCEED]. Select the coil type.
should light.
8. Follow the directions/prompts for coil positioning
8. Use the thumb switch to move the table into displayed on the monitor.
isocenter (the table comes to a stop).
9. Press Alignment Lights. Use the table thumb
9. To complete scanning, click [PROCEED]. switch to move the table to alignment light center.
10. Wait for the scan to complete. 10. Press the Patient Travel to Scan button. The LED
should light.
11. To return to the Scan Control menu, click [CANCEL]
three times.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 531 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Manual Surface Coil Scan, continued
11. Use the thumb switch to move the table into
isocenter (the table comes to a stop).
12. To complete scanning:
a. Click [PROCEED]. Click [START SCAN].
b. Click [PROCEED]. Click [PROCEED].
c. Wait for the scan to complete.
13. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [DISPLAY
PARAMETERS]. Click [PROCEED].
14. Select the new patient and click [PROCEED].
15. Click [PREPARATION PARAMETERS]. Click
[PROCEED].
16. Press <PAGE DOWN>.
17. Record the Resonance Frequency.
18. Press <PAGE DOWN> twice to RF Drive Scale.
19. Press <ENTER>. Record Factor #1.
20. To return to the Scan Control menu, click [CANCEL]
three times.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 532 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x)

Select one of the following topics: 8. Enter an exam name, exam no., date-of-birth, and
weight (70 Kg).
• How to Scan
9. Click [PROCEED].
• Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance
Measurements 10. Click the Scan Icon (patient with slices).
• Viewing Scans 11. Select Anatomy (if not displayed, click [SCAN
CONTROL].)
How to Scan
12. Select Phantom Studies.
1. Login as MRService using Manager or Manager1
as the password. 13. Select HEADT.
2. For R11.x (only), in the upper left of screen, select 14. Click [SELECT].
System > Scan Definition Context > Scan List.
15. Select Start Scan. The scan should now start.
3. Place the phantom in the Head Coil.
16. Click [PROCEED].
4. Press [ALIGNMENT LIGHTS] and move the table
thumble switch to move the table into position, to 17. Click the Scan Icon (patient with slices).
center on Head Coil notch in alignment light. 18. Select Anatomy (if not displayed, click [SCAN
CONTROL].)
5. Press the [PATIENT TRAVEL TO SCAN] button. The
LED will light and the alignment light will turn off. 19. Select Phantom Studies.
6. Use the thumble switch to drive the table to 20. Select HEADT.
isocenter. Release after the table comes to a
21. Click [SELECT].
complete stop.
22. Select Start Scan. The scan should now start.
7. At the console, select Patient > New Exam.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 533 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance 4. For head or body coil scans:
Measurements a. Select Patient > New Exam.
Any performance scans run with head or body coils can
b. Enter a Patient Name, ID, and Date of Birth into
be analyzed for IQ on R10-11 systems.
the appropriate fields.
To run scans:
Note Typically, enter a patient name reflecting
1. Login as MRService using Manager or Manager1 the coil being used.
as the password. (body trans, flex m, etc.)
2. For R11.x (only), in the upper left of screen, select c. Select Phantom/Other.
System > Scan Definition Context > Scan List.
d. Enter a Patient Weight of 90.
3. For a PIQT scan:
e. Click [PROCEED].
a. In lower left corner of the window, select Scan
Control > PIQT Scanning. f. Continue to step 5.

b. Follow the prompts to properly orient/position the 5. From the Scan Control popup window, select
Anatomy > #13 Phantom Studies. A list appears
phantom.
displaying performance scans available for various
c. Click [PROCEED]. The PIQT scan begins to run. coils and orientations (e.g., HeadT).
d. Continue to step 11.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 534 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance 8. Select Scout scan from the list. In the upper right
Measurements, continued corner of the window, click Select. Click Start Scan
6. For head studies, place the PIQT phantom in the in the lower left. Click [PROCEED] to start the scan.
phantom holder and position in the desired plane. 9. To view the scan, click on the [+] to the right of the
Scan tab (below the HC Case button).
- or -
10. To select scans to run:
For body studies:
a. Select Hide in the lower right.
a. Place the body phantom in the phantom holder.
b. Run the table, so the front edge is under the b. Select Scan List. The Scout scan previously run
appears.
alignment light. Use the Travel-to-Scan button to
put the table edge in isocenter. c. Select the Scout scan. Select Delete. A list of
available scans appears.
c. Press the table Manual button (on the Control
Panel) to put the table in Manual mode. d. Select the desired scan. Select Plan Scan.
d. Back the table out 210 mm and place the e. Position the center slice through the center of the
phantom/holder in from the back of the magnet. phantom. Click [PROCEED].
Slide it into the center of the bore until the holder
just comes in contact with the table top. f. Click on Start Scan in the lower left. Click
[PROCEED].
7. From the list of coils and orientations, select the
11. When scans are complete, click on the face graphic
proper coil/orientation.
at the top of the screen (just below the menu bar) to
put the system in viewing context.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 535 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance
Measurements, continued
Philips defines the SNR in two ways:
• SNR C = R/sd, and
• SNR B = 0.655*R/sd(B)
R = Mean pixel value of ROI (approximately 900 pixels)
at phantom center for head and body coils.
sd(B) = Standard deviation of pixel values of ROI
(approximately 400 pixels) in a ghost-free part of the
background of the image.
0.655 = Correction factor for backfolding of noise in
background. Note The Philips automatic procedure uses the quad-
rant with the lowest noise for sd(B).
12. Right-click on the displayed image and select ROI
Rectangle. Click on the image center. An ROI box
appears. Adjust the size for 900 pixels.
13. Right-click on the number directly above the ROI box
and select Statistics.The pixel count, mean, and
standard deviation values appear.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 536 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance All values for SNR ( C ) are typical values for reference.
Measurements, continued Philips does not list specs for these.
14. Create another ROI box and click in the background Values preceded by a * are typical values also.
portion of the image. Adjust the size for 400 pixels
(approximately). Head Coil Transverse

15. Right-click on the number directly above the ROI box Scan Echo SNR(B) SNR(C)
and select Statistics.The pixel count, mean, and
standard deviation values appear. QA1 1 92 103
2 68 72
16. Move the background ROI to all four quadrants and
use the lowest standard deviation value. QA2 1 64 66

Important! Please note, your results must be greater QA3 1 63 69

than the numbers listed in the following 2 55 53
tables to pass SNR.
3 44 47
H10 1 99 110
2 70 78
H11 1 92 102
2 68 73
H12 1 88 95
2 70 73

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 537 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance Head Coil Sagittal
Measurements, continued
Scan Echo SNR(B) SNR(C)
Head Coil Transverse, continued
H40 1 *121 84
Scan Echo SNR(B) SNR(C)
2 *84 70
H13 1 61 65 H41 1 *118 73
H15 1 65 67 2 *86 64
H20 1 91 96 H42 1 *107 78
2 81 78 2 *85 67
3 67 64 H45 1 *80 78
4 57 56 H50 1 *115 96
H25 1 69 72 2 *94 84
H35 1 63 71 3 *77 69
H36 1 71 77 4 *67 62
H37 1 *71 65 H55 1 *90 70
H38 1 73 69 H66 1 *84 75
H67 1 *87 42
H68 1 *81 64

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 538 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance Scan Echo SNR(B) SNR(C)
Measurements, continued
H98 1 *83 69
Head Coil Coronal
Body Coil Transverse
Scan Echo SNR(B) SNR(C)

H70 1 *125 88 Scan Echo SNR(B) SNR(C)

2 *85 70 B10 1 73 72
H71 1 *120 71 2 54 57
2 *87 59 B12 1 48 49
H72 1 *109 74 B15 1 55 56
2 *88 64 B20 1 74 81
H75 1 *84 75 2 63 67
H80 1 *115 85 3 53 53
2 *96 74 4 46 48
3 *81 66 B25 1 49 51
4 *67 53 B36 1 82 86
H85 1 *90 67 B37 1 *65 61
H96 1 *84 68 B38 1 *65 62
H97 1 *87 46
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 539 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance Body Coil Coronal
Measurements, continued
Scan Echo SNR(B) SNR(C)
Body Coil Sagittal
B70 1 *83 72
Scan Echo SNR(B) SNR(C)
2 *57 50
B40 1 *88 87 B75 1 *76 65
2 *60 56 B80 1 *85 71
B45 1 *80 67 2 *70 61
B50 1 *92 91 3 *59 45
2 *74 68 4 *50 45
3 *62 60 B85 1 *66 61
4 *53 52 B96 1 *97 79
B55 1 *69 66 B97 1 *76 66
B66 1 *107 99 B98 1 *80 72
B67 1 *87 67
B68 1 *89 83

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 540 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Viewing Scans
Once scans are completed, they must be added to the
View Application window.
1. To add the scan to the Scan window, click the [+]
button in the Scan Control area.
2. To view more pages of images, select and drag the
Image Scroll Bar.
3. To view other scan series, select and drag the Scan
Scroll Bar.
4. Select Viewing package.
5. To add scan to Viewing window, click the [+] button in
the Scan Control area.
For more information, see the Support Central website.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 541 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table

Select one of the following topics: Table Movement Vertical Adjustment
• Table Movement Vertical Adjustment 1. Position the table to its lowest position, 500 mm
above the floor.
• Table Movement Horizontal Adjustment
2. On the position potentiometer, check the voltage
• Light-visor Adjustment
between point 1 and 2. The value should be between
• TPAT Test Software 180 mV and 320 mV.
• TSW via Dipswitches 3. If the value is not between 180 mV -320 mV, adjust
the potentiometer mechanically.
• Power-ON/Self Test
4. Move the table to its highest position.
5. On the position potentiometer, check the voltage
between point 1 and 2. The voltage should be less
than 8.1 V.
6. Turn the Gain (R84) fully counter clockwise.
7. Set the dipswitches to position 1001 and press <S2>
to start the measurement.
8. Move the table to its lowest position.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 542 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Table Movement Vertical Adjustment, Use the dipswitches to adjust a Zero Current.
continued • During Normal operation, dipswitch positions stands
9. Adjust the Offset (R85) so LED 3 and LED 4 light. for zero-current.
(See Circuit Boards.)
• In Test mode, dipswitch position stands for a particular
10. Move the table to its highest position. test (after pressing <S2>.
11. Adjust the Gain (R84) so LED 3 and 4 again light. Light-visor Adjustment
12. Repeat steps 8 - 11 until LEDs 3 and 4 light in both Note See also, Light Visor Adjustments in Alignment
situations. and Calibration.
Note R84 and R85 can affect/influence each other Using an aluminum plate with small holes, the five
slightly. halogen lights of the visor have to be adjusted to perform
the correct transport to the scanplane.
Table Movement Horizontal Adjustment
Important! It is impossible to adjust the distance
The hydraulic valves have a hysteresis, but the TTS Zero
between the center of the light visor and the
Current Adjustment must be checked.
isocenter while this is defined as 827 mm.
Caution This adjustment should only be
completed when using a PS Control
board (Level 4 or Level 5).

The table will not reach the scanplane, while the oil pump
operates continuously, if this adjustment is not accurately
completed.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 543 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

TPAT Test Software TSW via Dipswitches
You can use the PS Control board to execute patient
Menu Option(s) support TSW. Use dipswitches to select a test, then
TPAT Main Menu Run Functional Automatic press <S2> to execute the test. If you press <S1> a
Interactive Power-On restart is initiated. This includes a memory
Selftest reset, CPU reset, and a selftest.
Valves
Control_Panel Note Test results can be read via a 8-bits LED bar.
Table_Sensors
Hydraulics Important! To perform the correct TTS zero-current
Light Bore adjustment, don’t forget to restore original
Tools WA1 dipswitch settings.
WA2
Adjustments Vertical_Adj

TPAT test software can be implemented on the PS

Control board PS-PROM. Only start commands are
transmitted by TXA6. Error codes are received and
translated into error messages.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 544 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

TSW via Dipswitches, continued Start Codes
Stop
Test Serial
Start Codes Dip Code
Stop Switches Link 1
Test Serial
Dip Code
Switches Link 1 PS Hydro & PS Control 1110 TOE n/a
(part of Selftest)
Light Visors Bore 0001 TO1 n/a 1
Start codes are generated by TPAT, or directly via VT320
Indicators 0010 TO2 n/a terminal.
ON/OFF Valve (manual) 0011 TO3 n/a 2 Only for use on a PS Control board (Level 4 or Level 5).
Servo Valve TV / TH 0100 TO4 n/a 3
Code to generate a echo test pattern when WA2 by TPAT was
started.
Keyboard Switch 0101 T05 *
* Abort some tests via stop code (T00 by the serial link, or by
Sensor Switches TH 0110 TO6 * resetting all dipswitches (0000). See the asterisk in the above
table. Pressing <S1> (Power-ON Selftest) also aborts the test.
Sensor Switches TV 0111 TO7 *
Tumble Poten. 1000 TO8 *
Adj. TV Poten. Pos. 1001 TO9 *

TTS Zero Current Adj. 2 1010 TOA *

Serial Link 3 n/a TOB n/a

Hydraulic System 1100 TOC *

PS Control 1101 TOD n/a
(part of Selftest)
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 545 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Power-ON/Self Test LED Bar
After the table is powered-ON (cable MDX3 on TFEI) the
four green LEDs on the PSControl should remain lit. LED
Details
Bar

PS Control Test Point (Backpanel) Details 0 Test 3 failure: Hydraulic Valve

H1 X1: A3 +12 V +5% 1 Test 4 failure: Servo Valve

H2 X1:A2 +5 V +5% 2 Test 13 failure: PSControl (part of self test)

H3 X1:A6 +24 V +10% 3 Test 14 failure: PSHydro + PSControl (part of self test)
H4 X1:A4 -12 V +5% 4 Not Used
5 Not Used
After power-ON, the table self test is performed.
6 Not Used
H1/H6 H2/H7 7 Not Used
PSHydro
Details
PSControl (Red) (Green)

0 = OFF 0 0 Failure
1 = ON 1 0 Self test OK
0 1 Failure after self test
1 1 Self test active

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 546 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table

Select one of the following topics: Synchronize Tabletop Maximum Displacement
• Synchronize Tabletop Maximum Displacement (SYNCLEN)
(SYNCLEN) All tabletops have a groove at the bottom side that
determines the maximum displacement of the tabletop.
• Power Supply Measurements
During the determination of the tabletop maximum
• Control Unit Measurements displacement, the displacement detected is stored in
• Communication Test PLC memory and in a host computer file.
• TWRAP Communication Loop-back Test If the patient support power is switched OFF (for test
purposes) the PLC memory value is lost. The value can
• PLC Output Test
be restored in PLC memory with the SYNCLEN
• Horizontal Speed Test command. This command synchronizes the maximum
displacement of the tabletop (stored on the host
• Horizontal Acceleration Test
computer) with the value stored in PLC memory.
• Light and Indicator Test
1. Logon as TSW.
• FPICU Switch Test
2. Enter TPAT.
• RPICU Switch Test 3. Enter Run Tools SYNCLEN.
• Table Switch Test The host computer value is compared to the PLC
• Tumble Wheel Test value. If not the same, the host value is overwritten
with the value stored in PLC memory.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 547 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Power Supply Measurements 3. Remove the lower front cover.
The presence of power supply voltages on the PLC 4. Remove the lower rear cover.
extension board is indicated by four green LEDs.
5. Remove the lower right cover.
Once delivered by the LBA 24 V power supply, a DC-DC
converter on the PLC extension board generates the 6. Disconnect all cables (except the DC wires) to the
+5 V, +12 V, and -12 V power required. control unit.

1. If the 24 V sense LED is not lit, check the PLC 7. Remove the control unit from the RF housing.
extension board incoming power. Note The control unit must come out on the right
2. If the 24 V sense LED is lit, yet one or more of the side of the table.
LEDs remain unlit, a defective PLC extension board 8. Place the control unit on an anti-static protective mat.
may be the cause.
Important! The PLC extension board is on the bottom
Control Unit Measurements of the control unit and is not protected.
When the patient support unit is in operation, it is Place the unit on an anti-static mat.
possible to make measurements on the: Power Supply Fuses
• PLC, • F1: LBA 0.8 A; +24 V
• PLC extension board, and • F2: LBC 1.25 A; +28 V
• Servo amplifier. • F3: LBB 1 A; +12 V (lamp voltage)
To make measurements on the control unit: • F4: LBD 1 A; +220 VAC (table power)
1. Turn OFF power to the patient support.
2. Move the middle covers upwards. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 548 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Communication Test 2. Enter TWRAP.
This test reads the status of the PLC. If a failure is
Loop-back Connector on... Possible FRU’s
detected, perform the TWRAP Communication Loop-
back Test. RS232 Cable (LCC2X3) • Fibers
1. Logon as TSW. • Host expansion RS232
interface
See Login as TSW (R7.x-R9.x) or Login as TSW • PLC extension board
(R10.x-R11.x).
• RS232 cable
2. Enter TPAT. Host BIB B11/B12 • Host expansion RS232
3. Type: run functional communication and press interface
<ENTER>. PLC extension board • Fibers
connector (LCC1X14)
TWRAP Communication Loop-back Test • Host expansion RS232
interface
This procedure checks the link between the host • PLC extension board
computer and the PLC.
Fibers LCC1 B1/B2 • Fibers,
The following items are required: • Host expansion RS232
• loop-back connector at the end of the fibers interface

• loop-back connector at the RS232 cable (between

PLC and PLC extension board)
1. Logon as TSW.
See Login as TSW (R7.x-R9.x) or Login as TSW
(R10.x-R11.x). Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 549 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

PLC Output Test Horizontal Acceleration Test
This procedure checks the operation of the PLC output This procedure should result in a reading between
stages. 100 mm/sec2 and 175 mm/sec2.
1. Logon as TSW. 1. Logon as TSW.
2. Enter TPAT. 2. Enter TPAT.
3. Enter run Functional plc_output. 3. Enter run functional acceleration _hor.
If the test fails, possible FRU’s include the PLC, PLC If the test fails, possible FRU’s include the servo
extension board, and/or the cabling between the amplifier, horizontal tacho, and/or horizontal motor
PLC and PLC extension. unit.
Horizontal Speed Test
This procedure should result in a reading between 162
mm/sec and 198 mm/sec.
1. Logon as TSW.
2. Enter TPAT.
3. Enter run functional speed_hor.
If the test fails, possible FRU’s include the servo
amplifier, horizontal tacho, and/or horizontal motor
unit.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 550 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Light and Indicator Test Possible error results include faulty:
This procedure checks the bore lights, light visors, and • Light Visor Output Stage
PICU indications.
• Bore Lights Output Stage
1. Logon as TSW.
• Light Visor Lamp
2. Enter TPAT.
• Light Bore Lamp
3. Enter run functional interactive light and
• TTS Indicator
indicator.
• Manual switching, use the <N> (Next) and <P> • Manual Indicator on PICU (Front)
(Previous) keyboard keys. • Manual Indicator on PICU (Rear)
• <Q> (Quit) aborts the test.
• <F> (Fail) operator can enter faults following the
visual inspection.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 551 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Light and Indicator Test, continued TTS Indicator
Light Visor Output Stage Following visual inspection and a negative result, the
possible causes may include a problem with the PLC
This software error indicates the possible cause as being
a fault with the PLC extension, the PLC output port, and/ output port, PLC extension, TTS indicator, and/or
cabling.
or the power supply.
Bore Lights Output Stage Manual Indicator on PICU (Front)
Following visual inspection and a negative result, the
This software error indicates the possible cause as being
possible causes may include a problem with the PLC
a fault with the PLC extension, the PLC output port, and/
output port, PLC extension, the manual indicator on the
or the power supply.
front of the PICU, and/or cabling.
Light Visor Lamp
Manual Indicator on PICU (Rear)
Following visual inspection and a negative result, the
possible causes may include a problem with the light Following visual inspection and a negative result, the
possible causes may include a problem with the PLC
visor lamp and/or the power supply.
output port, PLC extension, the manual indicator on the
Light Bore Lamp rear of the PICU, and/or cabling.
Following visual inspection and a negative result, the
possible causes may include a problem with the light
bore lamp and/or the power supply.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 552 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

FPICU Switch Test Faulty Light Visor Switch
The following procedure tests switches on the front If the error result indicates that the Light Visor switch is
control panel. faulty or not pressed, check the Light Visor switch and/or
the cabling.
Important! The test begins again if an error occurs.
The switch can be logged as faulty following Faulty TTS switch
the second test. If the error result indicates that the TTS switch is faulty or
1. Logon as TSW. not pressed, check the TTS switch and/or the cabling.

2. Enter TPAT. Faulty Manual Switch on Front PICU

If the error result indicates that the Manual switch (PICU
3. Enter run functional fpicu_sw.
front) is faulty or not pressed, check the Manual switch
Possible error results include: and/or the cabling.
• Faulty Light Visor Switch Faulty Bore Lights Up Switch
• Faulty TTS switch If the error result indicates that the Bore Lights-up switch
is faulty or not pressed, check the Bore Lights-up switch
• Faulty Manual Switch on Front PICU and/or the cabling.
• Faulty Bore Lights Up Switch Faulty Bore Lights Down Switch
• Faulty Bore Lights Down Switch If the error result indicates that the Bore Lights-down
switch is faulty or not pressed, check the Bore Lights-
down switch and/or the cablilng.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 553 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

RPICU Switch Test Table Switch Test
Important! The test begins again if an error occurs. Important! The test begins again if an error occurs.
The switch can be logged as faulty following The switch can be logged as faulty following
the second test. the second test.
1. Logon as TSW. 1. Logon as TSW.
2. Enter TPAT. 2. Enter TPAT.
3. Enter run functional rpicu_sw. 3. Enter run functional table switches.
If the error result indicates that the Manual switch on Possible error results include:
the PICU rear is faulty or not pressed, check the
• Faulty Reference Switch
Manual switch and/or the cabling.
• Faulty Park Switch
• Faulty Up-end Switch
• Faulty Down-end Switch
• Faulty Tabletop Release Switch
• Faulty Thumble-ref Switch
• Faulty Finger-plate Switch

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 554 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Functional Checks and Procedures 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

Table Switch Test, continued Faulty Tabletop Release Switch
Faulty Reference Switch If the error result indicates that the Tabletop Release
switch is faulty or not pressed, check the Tabletop
If the error result indicates that the Reference switch is
faulty or not pressed, check the Reference switch and/or Release switch and/or the cabling.
the cabling. Faulty Thumble-ref Switch
Faulty Park Switch If the error result indicates that the Thumble Reference
switch is faulty or not pressed, check the Thumble
If the error result indicates that the Park switch is faulty
Reference switch and/or the cabling.
or not pressed, check the Park switch and/or the cabling.
Faulty Up-end Switch Faulty Finger-plate Switch
If the error result indicates that the Finger Plate switch is
If the error result indicates that the Up-end switch is
faulty or not pressed, check the Finger Plate switch and/
faulty or not pressed, check the Up-end switch and/or the
cabling. or the cabling.

Faulty Down-end Switch Tumble Wheel Test

If the error result indicates that the Down-end switch is 1. Logon as TSW.
faulty or not pressed, check the Down-end switch and/or 2. Enter TPAT.
the cabling.
3. Enter run functional tumble.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 555 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

LOGIC AND BLOCK DIAGRAMS

General Information Alpha Server 800
Block Diagram
MR System Block Diagram (New Intera)
SCSI Configuration
MR System Block Diagram (NT Intera Upgrade) Connector Locations
Audio System BE - Simplified Diagram (New Intera) XW8000
Patient Ventilation System (New Intera) R10.3 Initial Block Diagram
Quad Body Coil - MGO (All Interas) R10.6 Initial Block Diagram
Simplified Diagram - Physiology (New Intera) R11.x Initial Block Diagram
PICU (NT Intera) R11.x Update Block Diagram
System Board Overview
Host Computer Connector Location Overview
Network Connections (All Interas R7.x-R9.x) Connection Locations - Disk Drives
DMCC 21164 Connection Locations - DIGI Board & Graphic Controller
Block Diagram Connection Locations - SCSI Controllers
SCSI Configuration
Connector/Board Overview
Connector Locations/Jumper Settings - BH Internal Drives
Connector Locations/Jumper Settings - Backplane & CPU
Board
DS10
Communication
Block Diagram
External System Configuration
Connector Location
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 556 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Reconstructor Data Acquisition

XP1000 Data Acquisition System - BDAS (NT Intera)
Connector Locations/Jumper Settings - Hard Drives Overview
AP550 BDAS Block Diagram
Block Diagram BDAS Digital Section
Connector Overview New Intera
Connector Locations/Jumper Settings - CD ROM Drive Data Acquisition Block Diagram
Connector Locations/Jumper Settings - System Board RF Transmit - Receive Chain
Connector Locations/Jumper Settings - Video, SCSI and RF - Transmit Chain
ARI Boards RF - Receive Chain
XW6000 RF - PU Coil Chain
Block Diagram Intera NT
Connector Overview (R11) Data Acquisition Block Diagram
Connector Locations/Jumper Settings - Hard Disk Drives RF Transmit- Receive Chain
Connector Locations/Jumper Settings & Ethernet Board RF - Transmit Chain
Cooling System RF - Receive Chain
RF - PU Coil Chain
Neslab Chiller HX-750
Bonnet Electrical Panel
Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style)
Liquid to Liquid Heat Exchanger Flow Diagram
Gradient Interface Connections
Heat Exchanger (Eaton Williams - New Style)
Wiring Diagram
Pipe Schematic
Shield Cooler (SC R8)
HC-8E1 Compressor Wiring Diagram

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 557 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifiers Patient Support

Gradient System Block Diagram (Copley 234) MT (Electrical) Patient Table
Intera 0.5T-Standard, Intera 1.0T-Omni, and Intera 1.5T- Simplified Diagram
Omni (PT1000) PLC Jumper Settings
Gradient System Block Diagram (Copley 274) NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table
Intera 1.0T-Power and Intera 1.5T-Power (PT3000) Principle Diagram Hydraulic
Gradient System Block Diagram (Copley 274 Dual Signal Block Diagram
Rack) Power Block Diagram
Intera 1.5T-Master (PT6000)
Power Supply Gradient Amplifier D (Copley 234) Power
Intera 0.5T-Standard, Intera 1.0T-Omni, and Intera 1.5T- Mains Distribution - Unit H (All Interas)
Omni (PT1000) Intera 0.5T-Standard, Intera 1.0T-Omni, and Intera 1.5T-
Power Supply Gradient Amplifier D (Copley 274) Omni
Intera 1.0T-Power and Intera 1.5T-Power (PT3000 & Mains Distribution (Unit H & Ext. HA - All Intera)
PT6000) Intera 1.0T-Power and Intera 1.5T-Power/Master
Gradient Amplifier (All Interas Copley 274) Power Conditioner
PT3000 Block Diagram PDU-MRPT Wiring
PT6000 Block Diagram
Feedback Simplified Block Diagram
Feedback Detail Block Diagram
Power Module Block Diagram
Controller Block Diagram

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 558 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

MR System Block Diagram (New Intera)

SPECTRO ‘OUT’ F DOOR
BACKPANEL
CNTR/STAT MN RF POWER
S BUS RF-IN RF-SHIELDED ROOM
C BUS BLANK
WF BUS SPECTRO RESPONSE
SPECTRO ‘OUT’ RS 232 MN RF AMPL
NX TXCVR
1.5T

REF
TUNE OUT
RF OUT
TRANSCEIVER
0.5T:1.0T:1.5T NR RESPONSE
DC-SUPPLY FROM GRADIENT AMPL. TO GRADIENT AMPL.
FEPSU
X Y Z
NTDAC -F

GRADIENT COIL

NG TEMP
SWITCH

Q U A D B O D Y C O I L - M G O
SYNCO-R1

RF-LOAD
TUNE-COIL A

SYNCO-R2 TUNE A PICK-UP COIL 1 NGO

NGO
OBC DET DET
DRIVER MT
MMG BBM BOX
NGB
2x FIBER (DATA/INTER)
KEYBOARD TUNE B
PA CONTROL/STATUS NGO PICK-UP COIL 2
MOUSE HIGH NGO
PA BLANK PROTON RF-POWER
4xPHYSIO FILTER TR-SWITCH MT TUNE-COIL B
RF POWER
MN HPF
MMC
OUTDOOR DETECT PU
SYS.FIL.INT RF POWER
MONITOR CONTROL/STATUS CRYO CONPR
NISC.INT. RECEIVE T/R DETUNE SWITCHES
MN_PA CONTROL/STAUS BRAIN STIMULATION FV TX MGO
CABLE PU
INTEFACE ADAPT.FILT.POWER/MASTER HI-BPS COILINT MT
MN_PA BLANK BOX RS 232 FILTER
DFEC IP REC RX
MR-RESPONSE
FM RS 232 POWER AMP.
RECON GRADIENT CHANNEL
MME
ARI
BCP+
SCSI
FL FR LIQUID
SYNCO RESPONSE (6)
SYNCO INT MT
TO HEAT
RF-IN EXCHANGER
RF-OUT
MMD
ERS PS RF AMPLIFIER
MN RF POWER
MULTI NUCLEI
COIL INT
SPECTRO RESPONSE
SCSI 8
DETUNE
CONE MICROPHONE
MMF

0 V, +15 V, -15 V
RF-SHIELDED ROOM GRADIENT
POWER INTERFACE
MADG SUPPLY (DI) COMB
DEDICATED 6kVA CRYO COLD- FILTER
SITE ISOLATION COMPRES HEAD DC SUPPLY
POWER LINE TRAFO AT AA AB
DISPLAY FRONT

380/220v TEMP SWITCH

GRADIENT T/R
TNS POWER TR SY1 SY2 R1 R2
AMPLIFIER MMU CONTROLLER MN
50-60Hz MASTER NOV-E
PT3008/6000 BOARD
D. 4 PHYSIC / MIC / NURSE CALL
HEATEXCH PF INT MT

PATIENT FIBERS CTRL/STATUS INTERLOCK

MDU POWER POWER MMA
SUPPORT POWER
H SUPPLY SUPPLY PFEI-NL
MODULE
15xw 15xw SYSTEM MM
OP2 CONF ZONE
OP1 OP1 FILTER
BOX -Z

FEPSU WFO
PRESS HE
CONSOLE
VIDEO SENSOR PRESS HEAD
8. CONSOLE SLAVE MC ECG PP RESP GP
RECORD INT
MONITOR SPLITTER MONITOR
ER
8M 8S
8R

BLEEDER
SENSOR BACKPANEL
MC18
PATIENT
VENTILATION

PATIENT AUDIO DC AUDIO

PRINTER 127 V START/STOP/
OBSERV. EQUIP-
TRAFO SCAN
MONITOR MENT CTRL
8L 8T X
8P 8C z
274 Unit 274 Unit 274 Unit FIBER FRONT
X-CHANNEL Y-CHANNEL Z-CHANNEL MCIA

Y
z
FINGER PROTECT.
UP/DOWN
TABLE IN/OUT
GRADIENT Z
z CTRL LIGHTS
AMPLIFIER 274 (D) TTSP
NVP LIGHT VISOR (2x) NC1K

M1H
M2H
F. 3X MICR. + NURSE CALL PICU FRONT MC1 ENERG. NAN.
NTDAC FIBER PICU FRONT

FIBER PAT SUP EL

SCSI-B SWITCHES
TABLE TABLE
UP/DOWN IN/OUT
M1L AUDIO
LOUDSPEAKDERS CTRL
START/STOP/
RF AMPL z M M
M2L SCAN
MR 521 REAR
1

FR BORE LIGHTS (2x)

LA LN LS
1

MPS PATIENT
OBSERVATION
1

MB MONITOR POWER
z SUPPLY
PLC / SERVO AMPL. / PLC-EXT. PICU FRONT MC2
(3x)
1

z DC LBA
HEAT EXCH 80
LCC LBB
z LC LBC
AH VIDEO CLAMP CONTROLLER LB
z PATIENT SUPPORT -L
MAINS DISTRIBUTION
z

Net CD AUDIO NY1 2 REAR

LOUDSPEAKER
NV1 1 FRONT

FIBER

ID1-VIDEO1
S-VHS

ETHER- SCSI-B
NET
COMP
HARD HARD
CD-ROM VIDEO
DISK DISK
VIDEO
DECODER PATIENT
COMP OBSERVATION
SCSI-A CAMERA
MP

COMP
WALL CAMERA
FOR USA
CPU PDU-MR
SCSI-C
COMP

VIDEO
ENCODER
FRAME S-VHS
BUFFER
COMM FIBER(MM1) CRYO
6kVA
COMPRESS
ISOLATION
PRINTER TRAFO AT Ho TO COLD-HEAD
8L
ETSA ID1-PCH-FED TO NAX4
RS 232
BUS INTERFACE MODULE AA
(8x)
KEYBOARD (AUDIO SWITCH AND 8
8K SERIAL LINES) MA
ID1-CPU1
MOUSE 220v
CHILLER z
COMPUTER (BH)

PHYS DISPL EXAM ROOM

AD UNIT DISPLAY
FRONT REAR
5.25
DOR
GRADIENT
H2O
INTERFACE
MY1
CONSOLE

GRADIENT
COIL MAGNET MONITORING UNIT MB
LIQUID
HEAT
EXCH TO GRADIENT
HARD VCR AUDIO AUDIO
COIL
COPY EQUIPMENT MODULE 2
UNIT 8C 8A z
8A
8F

MY2
KEBOARD
8X MONITOR RS232
8H DISPLAY UNIT M1F
SPLITTER
COMMUNICATION FIBER
MOUSE
DISPLAY UNIT M2F
ERD INT

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 559 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

MR System Block Diagram (NT Intera Upgrade)

Door

GND GND
RF Shielded Room

From Gradient Ampl.

Tune A
X Y Z To Gradient Amplifier
NTDAC (F)
BACKPANEL
S BUS Tune B Gradient Coil
Conn Panel
C BUS Tune Out MG Temp
WF BUS Transceiver
0.5T 1.5T RF Out Switch
Tune Switch RF Power
MR Response
MSI
FCH ZO Quad Body Coil (MGQ)
DC Power Supply FP

Spare +/-5 V +/-12 V +13.8 V

+24 V +30 V +300 V
FEPSU
FCF Tune Coil A
PU Coil 1
RF Load
Synco-R1 MGQ MGQ

FCE Tune Coil B

PU Coil 2
BBM Box
MGQ MGB MGQ
Synco-R2

Det
FCD QBC Det. Driver

3x Fiber (2 Data /1 InterL.) PU

DFEC 1
PA Control/Status RF Power Detune Switches
PA Blank TR Switch TX
RF Power MGQ
Control/Status 4x Physio
Sys.Fil.Int Receive T/R RX
Cable Interface Box
Misc.Int Door Detect
Tune ON/Select PU
FCC
REC
Sky-II MR Response
BCP
RS232 (N.C.)
FM RS232 Power Amp. COILINT
FCB Synco Response (2x4)
Burst Gradient Channel
FL

SCSI SCSI
RF Amplifier DC Supply
FCB FR
300/30/+12/+5/-5A/-5B
4 Physio 8xCtrl/Status Detune
RF In RF Out
SCSI Ext Pat INT
RS232 Physio Fiber

FS
System Filter
Box (Z)

TR SY1 SY2 R1 R2

5 V / +15 V / -15 V
Mains Power
Supply DIA Temp.
Ethernet BE Cntl. Bd.
Switch
DIB
(ISON)
Modem IIM
Power 28
DIF (Y)
Supply VDC
DIE (X)
BEI 15 kW Supply
DID (Z)
Fans
Printer DP 1 DP 2
DI Gradient
WFG (3x)
+HV -HV
Interface
5.25" R/W
BL
SCSI 28 VDC

Computer BHG Audio Switch &

8 Serial Lines Fiber
BI
CD Hard Hard 3.5" OD Fiber
ROM Disk Disk
SCSI * BEC
Pressure
Console 2 B Sensor
Frame X
SCSI 234 Unit 234 Unit 234 Unit Z
Buffer 8*RS 232 X-Channel Y-Channel Z-Channel

DM 1 DM 2 DM 3
Mouse HCU VCR Audio Audio He
Console 3B Y Sensor
Equip Mod. Z
BF BR BC BA Gradient Ampl. -D
KB To Gradient Coil
Monitor
Z NC ECG PP Resp. GP
BK BM Z
Physiology Fiber
RS232 Fiber PICU Front Status Fiber

Fiber PICU Rear

Cntrl Fiber
Fiber Pat Sup El.
Fiber MVI 2 Interlock Fiber Sensor Backpanel
Fiber MVI 1 MC1B
Loudspeakers

DEFC II MDI
Audio
Ctrl Front Start/Stop/Scan
Finger Protect.
MC1A
Pat. Sup Elect. MDP
PS
Hydro
Table Ctrl Up/Down
In/Out
Light Visor Lights TTSP
MC1P
(3x)
RF Shielded Room Fiber
M1H
PS Ctrl
M2H

6k VA Cryo Compressor Cold Head PS Power M3H PICU Front (MC1)

DC Supply
Compressor +5/-12/24/+12/30/13.8
TRAFO AT AA AB
Bore Lights
Dedicated Site Power (2x)
Supply

380 / 220 V Patient Support

TFEI MD
TNS
50 – 60 Hz

Audio
Gradient Amplifier Ctrl. Rear
Start / Stop / Scan

PICU Rear (MC2)

Console 1 Console Monitor Video Recorder
MVI 2 Rear
B
Loutspeaker
BM BR MVI 1 Front

Fiber

Hydro Unit Up / Down Table Movements Motor Switch Unit

MVM 1 Front
Microphone
Fiber MVM 2 Rear
Mains Patient Observ. Printer Audio Equipment
Monitor
Distribution
BP BL BC
LV LH LS
For USA
PDU-MR LM

MDU
To Cold Head

H
Cryo Compressor Helium
>
6 kVA Isolation >
TRAFO To MAX 4 M
AA > MA 220 V
AT
Patient Support (L)

Chiller 220 V
Z
Front Rear

AD
F

NTDAC Water

RM Amp. RM Amp.
MR 5002 MR S21

FR FR
MY1

MPS Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z
- or -

MB

MY2
ERDU He Level Interlock MPSC
MPS

Magnet Power Cabinet (MB)

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 560 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Audio System BE - Simplified Diagram (New Intera)

X4 X3

X10
X1 2-6
AC30 1
+12V +12V GND
4-8
TEST MMA
AC31 NOT USED
+5V +5V 5-9 PFINT-MT
AC32 GND
3-7
GND GND
AC29
MCIJ
-12V -12V X1 HEADSET
TILL
X8 X5
AUDIO HEADSET DETECT
B8 B8 HEADSET DETECT L R
PROCESSOR AMPL. X7 ZCX2 FILTER ZCX102 X9 (SEE Z1-9.2.2)

+5V 5 HEADSET L 5 5 HEADSET L 44 HEADSET L C1 C1 AIR TUBE

MIKE

+5V OK
GND
X

6 HEADSET R 6 HEADSET R 11 HEADSET R C2 C2

GND 6 AIR TUBE
2 GND 2 GND 38 GND 89 89
2
8 HEADSET MIKE 8 8 HEADSET MIKE 10 HEADSET MIKE B11 B11 AIR TUBE
7 GND 7 7 GND 9 GND B10 B10
COMPUTER X2
HEADINT 2 PPA
CONUS
BHG X10 X8
4 FRONTEND MIKE 4 FRONTEND MIKE 43 FRONTEND MIKE PREAMP
CDROM 4 CMIC3 3 3
3 GND 3 3 GND 42 GND CMICGND3 4 6
X8 1
AUDIO VIA CDROM NURSE CALL 6 FRONTEND
1 +12V +12V
(SEE Z1-9.2.2.2) 2 2 MIKE
GND GND
3 X1 MVM
TILL
OR 2 9 +5V 9 9 28 +5V X8 MAGNET
+5V
4 HARDWIRED 1 HARDWIRED NURSE CALL 1 12 HARDWIRED NURSE CALL B4 B4 HARDWIRED NURSE CALL A
1 HARDWIRED NURSE CALL NURSE CALL
STEREO EQUIPMENT NURSE CALL E BALOON
1
AUDIOL+
ZC
NURSE CALL PPH AIR TO ELECTRIC
BC 3
CONVERTER
AUDIOL- COMBI FILTER
2
AUDIOR+ X20 X2
4 TALK TO
AUDIOR- A4 A4 PATIENT
(LOCAL FOR LOCAL) +5V
X5 X2
SWITCH A2 A2
ARRAY TO MICRO 9 9
A5 A5 +5V +5V
PROCESSOR 0V
B3 B3 7 7 0V
(SEE Z1-9.2.2) 0V
TALK ON/OFF
A3 A3 3 3
TALK ON/OFF
B1 B1 1 1
START SCAN START SCAN
AUDIO B2 B2 2 2
X4 STOP SCAN
POWER AMP PROCESSOR STOP SCAN
4
9 A1 A1 4
1 AMSPEAK1 Z. MUTE MUTE
5 5
BAB 2 AMSPEAK2 10 SYSTEM B4 B4
START SCAN START SCAN
MC1B
FILTERBOX
+12V -12V PICU 3 BACKPANEL PICU FRONT MCIP MC2 PICU REAR
X1 X2
2 PREAMP B5 MICOUT 14

BAC 3 MICGND 15
A5
1
GND
BUZZER
+5V
INTERFACE
X3
OSCILL. BUZZER
H1
(Z1-9.3.2) POWER AMP
H2 AUDIO
PROCESSOR 2x12W X9 ZX3 FILTER ZX53 MW11
TALK ON/OFF LISTEN FRONT+
uPROC. H3 2-6 1 1
F14 1
LISTEN ON/OFF
MUSIC 3-7 FRONT- 2 2 2 MW1
MUSIC ON/OFF F15 FRONT
NURSE CALL 5 3
X4 CEILING
X2 MW12
1 4-8 REAR+ 3 3
SPEAKERS
+5V A2 8 F16 1
2 TALK
+5v +5v
5-9 REAR- 4 2
MW2
TALK B2 7 4
R1 GND GND F17 FRONT
VOLUME VOLUME 3
3 13 6 6
GND +12V A4 +12V
DRAIN WIRE X47 X97
12
-12V B4 -12V
1 BEA AUDIOSWITCH 2
OR ADC GND
X5
1 STATUS &
+5V CONTROL
2 LISTEN A1
LISTEN R2
RS232 TXD
VOLUME VOLUME B1 TO AUDIOSWITCH
3 INTERFACE
GND RXD

POWER-ON RESET
BOARD BAA

AUDIO MODULE 2 BA

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 561 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Patient Ventilation System (New Intera)

NTDAC
MAINS ISOLATION MOTOR DRIVER FAN MOTOR
FILTER TRANSFORMER VLT 2800 ERS65
X2 FUSE
X2
2A
L L L 91 96 U

PE PE PE 97 V
230V
N N N 92 98 W

POWER
PVF PVT MOTORCONTROL
SUPPLY PE

CONTROL CARD

95-99
50 53 55
X8

X1
PE
F1

PICU FRONT
S. F. B

X6 X110 X10 X3
4 4 4 4
2 2 2 2
5 5 5 5

PV
MC1 ZC

S. F. B.

NTDAC

100mm
MAIN
MAGNET

AIR INLET

PAT. VENT. PICU

CONTROL
KNOB

AIR FILTER
PATIENT SUPPORT

ISOLATION
R
TO

TRANSFORMER
O
M

DRIVER
MOTOR

PAT. VENT. UNIT

TECHNICAL ROOM EXAMINATION ROOM

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 562 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Quad Body Coil - MGO (All Interas)

Matching PCB (2x) Tune Probe (Right)
Detune PCB (14x)

1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

Pickup Coil Pickup Coil

Tune Probe (Left) (Left) (Right)

X7 X8
MGBX2: 50E Load

MGBX14: Pickup Coil Left

MGBX13: Pickup Coil Right

MGBX16: MMEX8 (Pickup Coil) Hybrid

BBM Box
MGBX15: MMEX5 (Body Coil – Receive)
X13
MGBX1: MMFX8 (RF Power)

MGBX3/X4: MMCX2 (RF / T/R Mode Hybrid)

X15
DET. ROD 1 – 8: X16 X1 X2 X3 X4
X14
MMCX1 (Tune/Detune
DET. ROD 9 – 16:

TUNE COIL LEFT: MMFX2 (Tune A)

TUNE COIL RIGHT: MMFX3 (Tune B)

MMCX2
MMEX8 MMFX2 50E
MMFX8
MMEX5 Load
MMFX3
MMCX1

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 563 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Simplified Diagram - Physiology (New Intera)

(LEFT SIDE POSITION)

X1- - -X8
X2 X1 X4 (X5) PP X9 MMA X3
PPU SENSOR C10 1 CMDAT0 1
FINGER CLIP ANALOG PP (ANALOG) CPP C9 18 CMDAT1 18
PP
PPFF DETECT. SWITCH
C8 35 CMDAT2 35
C7 19 CMDAT3 19 CONTROL
LATCH REGISTER
C6 3 CMDAT4 3 PICH
PPEAK C5 20 CMDAT5 20
PPU SENSOR 1 PPDET LOGIC A
PPEXT 2 H1 C4 37 CMDAT6 37
FINGER CLIP SWITCH 2 GREEN
PPPEXT 9 PPDET C3 21 CMDAT7 21
PULSE OXYMETER 3 MDAT0---7
PPTEST
INVIVO RESEARCH
PATTST
AMUX1 CONTROL
MRI4500/3109-3/3150 YELLOW A1 4 CMSTROBE_N 4
AMUX2 REGISTER
PPFF PPPEAK STROBE AMUX3
PPFP PPMALF AMUX4
PPDISC 8 PPDISC MSTA0---7 A10 5 CMSTA0 5
PPEXDISC\ 7 PPEXDISC A9 22 CMSTA1 22
A8 39 CMSTA2 39
EXTERNAL DEVICE
PERIPHERAL PULSE INTERFACE PPF A7 23 CMSTA3 23
A6 7 CMSTA4 7 LATCH
STATE
A5 24 CMSTA5 24 REGISTER
B1 X1 X2 (X7) A4 41 CMSTA6 41
NURSE CALL CORDS X3 NCAL1
A3 25 CMSTA7 25
PPHN X2 NCAL2
ZC
X4 X102 X3
C12 46 CECG 46
NURSE CALL PPH
B11 29 CECGGND 29 2 PHCH1 ECG1 2 2
C10 47 CPP 47 3 PHCH2 PPU 3 3
ECG LEADS PPEE
B10 30 CPPGND 30 4 PHCH3 RESP 4 4
CAL PULSE
X2 ANALOG PHYSIOLOGY SIGNALS
X1 X4 (X5) C14 48 CRESP 48 5 PHCH4 ECG2 5 5
2 2 B14 31 CRESPGND 31 en MUX
GREEN PATIENT SIGNAL C12 ECG1
1 1
4 LEAD FLEXIBLE CABLE RED A12 49 CJOINT 49 14 PHCH1N 14 6
LEADS ISOLATION
(VCG OPTION) 3 3
WHITE OFF PROCESS A13 32 CJOINTGND 32 15 PHCH2N 15 7
7 7 DETECT
BLACK A14 50 CGP 50 16 PHCH3N 16 8
10 A14 ECG2
PATIENT 9 ECG SIGNAL FROM OPTIONAL PATIENT MONITORING SYSTEM B9 33 CGPGND 33 17 PHCH4N 17 9
OR CABLE B12 ECG GND
5
DETECTION
PHYSIO
2 C15 15 +12V 15
GREEN MDAT0---7
3 LEAD FLEXIBLE CABLE 1 MDAT
RED CONTROL A15 14 -12V 14
(ECG OPTION) 7 YELLOW LED GREEN LED
BLACK LEADS-OFF DETECT ECG-SIGNAL DETECTED BY MR-SCANNER B16 28,27 28.27
3 C16 16 +5V
STROBE 16
CABLETYPE DETECTION 4
(IN CONNECTOR) 5 MSTA0---7
MSTAT
VCG MODULE PPE (OPTIONAL) CONTROL A2 2-6
GND
2-6
A11 8-13 8-13
A16 17-26 17-26
B1-3 34-36 34-36
B5-12 40-45 40-45
B13
B1 X4 X3 B15
RESPIRATORY AIR TUBE X1 X3 (X6)
ASSY PRESS TR. C11
MPX10G CRESP X2
PPGR ANALOG LOW PASS
SWITCH FILTER 23 CMICGND1 23 7
R22
B10 9 CMICGND1 9 8 CMIC1 24 8
X6
B11 10 CMIC1 10 5 CHDSTRIGHT 13 5
1
1 2 C2 11 CDHSTRIGHT AUDIO-INTERFACE 1 CNUCALL 9 1
2 11
X5
OSCILLATOR 10
PHYSIOLOGY UNIT AT LEFT SIDE B4
B9
12
38
CNUCALL
COSTGND
12
38
2
4
CHDSTGND
CMICGND3 12
2
4
0V 0V 0V - 42 CMICGND3 42 3 CMIC3 11 3
MC1 X2 (PICUFRONT) MMA X3 (PFINT) MVM (FEMICRO) MN X3 (PFEI_NL)
- 43 CMIC3 43 6 CHDSTLEFT 22 6
C1 44 CHDSTLEFT 44 9 +12V 6,25 9
17 1 18 -12V 18
(FIBERS)
33 18 H1 RESPDET LOGIC A 20 +5V 20
X15 X14 AUDIO
19 GND 7,8,19
X20 X10 X20
50 34 MDAT0---4 7-8
RESPTEST LATCH
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8
MDAT0---7 PFINT MMA
FILTER UNIT Z
(MAGNET SIDE) MODULE MDAT5---7
ENABLE CODING PART OF PFE1 MM
AND CONTROL LOGIC
GATE
HEAD CONF. NOT VCG PP RESP. NURSE NOT STROBE STROBE
INT ZONE USED MOD INT INT CALL USED VCC
STATUS MSTA0---7
REGISTOR MSTA0---7
X2:2
X2:1 PHRESPD
PP X21

X2:3
X11
75 OHM 0V
PP X10
RESPIRATORY INTERFACE PPG CONN D GP
STR FEMALE

PPA PPB PPC PPE PPF PPG PPH PPD CNUCALL 1

1
2
CMIC3 3
CMICGND3 4
MVM
5
P12VO 6 5 (FEMICRO)
CMICGND1 7
PICU3BP PP CM1C1 8
9
P5VO 9
GND
TRUE PP X11
PHYSIOLOGY UNIT AT RIGHT SIDE VIDEO

GND
MC1 X2 (PICUFRONT) MMA X3 (PFINT) MVM (FEMICRO) MN X3 (PFEI_NL)
PP X12 MM X3
CONN D GP
STR FEMALE
17 1
1 1
(FIBERS)
33 18 P12VO 2
1 +12V
X15 X14 P5VD 3 +5V
X20 X10 X20
50 34 M12CO 4 -12V
P5VD 5 -5V
6 5 5
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 7
8
9
GND 9 9

NOT NURSE RESP. PP VCG NOT CONF. HEAD (MAGNET SIDE) PP X20
USED CALL INT INT MOD USED ZONE INT CONN D GP
STR FEMALE
CLEDMUTE 1
PP X21
CVOLMUSIC 2
1
CSMUTE_R 3
4
X11
CONF. ZONE PPB UCC
5
MC1X2
GND PICU FRONT
75 OHM CSSTART 6 5
CSSTOP 7
CSMUTE_F 8 MM
CLDSTRT 9
9
PPD PPH PPG PPF PPE PPC PPB PPA
HEAD INT. (OPTIONAL) PPA SEE Z1-11.5.1

PP

PICU3BP PP PHYSIOLOGY UNIT

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 564 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

PICU (NT Intera)

S4
S1 S2 S3

Thumble
Switch

S5
MC1A

X1
Coil
Connection

X2
Coil
Connection X11

MC1B
X3 X6
X4 X5
T/R Nuclei T/R Proton
Synergy Coil Synergy Coil
Coil (Optional)
(Optional) (Optional)
(Optional) X10

S3
Front View
MC1P

S2

X9

S1

Thumble
Top View Switch

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 565 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Network Connections (All Interas R7.x-R9.x)

PAPER
ONLY ACCESIBLE FOR
PRINTER
GYROSCAN Intera HOST

DICOM MR
PRINT EASYVISION
RECONSTRUCTOR HC PRINTER
GYROSCAN INTERA HOST SERVER

IIM PPM FILE NETWORK

RESERVED

RESERVED

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

HC PRINTER
SWITCH

HOSPITAL NETWORK

DICOM -> P2P

EASY LINK
CONVERSION
DICOM BOX GYROSCAN
EASYVISION PACS CT SCANNER
HC PRINTER SYSTEM

ACCESIBLE ALL P2P

GYROSCAN RIS HC PRINTER
SYSTEMS
= OPTIONAL

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 566 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

DMCC 21164
Block Diagram
PCI Bus 64 Bits
33 MHZ

P2 X10
SCSI Contr.
SROM * IIM / MO Disk Drive
CPU KZPBA-CA
128 KB
CPU 21164
Initialization
P1 X2
SCSI Contr.
Reconstructor BDAS
KZPBA-CB

Bcache
2 MB P3 X5
Ethernet
Controller Ethernet
DE 500
Control I/O P7 X0
DMA Buffer and
Frame Buffer
Address Monitor
3D30
CPU P11
P4 X1
RS232 (8x)
DIGI Audio User Interface
Memory
512 MB
EISA Bus 32 Bits
8.3 MHZ
UWSE PCI to
P6 EISA
Data Disk
SCSI Control. Bridge
KXPBA-CA
System
Disk IDE Port

CD ROM
Floppy
UNSE
Disk
X7
Not Used
X14
COMB Modem
X-Bus I/O Controller
8 Bits NS 87303 X13
8.3 MHZ Service PC /
Ethernet Switch
X8
Keyboard
NVRAM *
X9
Mouse
Flash
Buffers
ROM *

* SROM: Initialization CPU/Cache/System Bus/First I6 MB Memory and for Engineering Debugging

Flash ROM: SRM Console Program

NVRAM: EISA Configuration Data & Environmental Variables, Time & Date and ENVAR OS Type

P1

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 567 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

DMCC 21164, continued

SCSI Configuration

PCI BUS 64 Bits

33 MHZ

SROM P2
CPU SCSI X10
128 KB
CPU 21164 Controller
Initialization Optical Disk
KZPBA-CA
4.1 GB

Bcache FNSE SCSI FNSE SCSI

2 MB
IIM

Expansion Console
Control I/O
DMA Buffer and
Address
CPU P11

Memory P1
512 MB SCSI X2 FWD SCSI
Controller X4 Reconstructor
KZPBA-CB
UWSE

Data Disk SCSI Contr.

KZPBA-CA
System
Disk

FWD
CD ROM SCSI

UNSE
BCPP
DMCC 21164 BH

DEC BDAS

NTDAC

Technical Room

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 568 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

DMC 21164, continued

Connector/Board Overview

Spare BHH
CD-ROM Drive BHD
Fan
BHK3

Spare BHI
Floppy Drive BHE
F1
X12

Terminator

Data Disk BHG 110/230 V

Power Supply BHA

S1
System Disk BHF

X2
P1 KZPBA-CB J13

P2 X10
KZPBA-CA (IIM/MO Disk Drive) J12
Fan
BHK1 ACT 10/100 X5
P3 DE500 Ethernet Controller J11 10/100
Backplane P1 LNK
OCP Control
P4 DIGI Board J10 and
X1
+3.3 V HDU Indication
-5 V Panel
P5 Spare J9
+5 V
P6 KZPBA-CA (Internal Hard Disks & CD-ROM) J8 P12
-12 V Temp

+12 V Fan P7 Video Board J7

X0 X15
P8 Spare J6 Fan
Fan
BHK2
ON OFF
P9 Spare J5 X13 X8 X9
Spare
P10 IO Module J3 J4
X14 X7
4xMemory Module 128 Mb
P11 CPU Board J1 J2

P16
P15
P14
P13

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 569 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

DMCC 21164, continued

Connector Locations/Jumper Settings
- BH Internal Drives
SYSTEM DISK 9 Gb

CD-ROM DRIVE

SPARE JUMPER

AUDIO OUT MODE SELECT SCSI DC INPUT

........ . . 1
...... J6
... ........ . 50 PINS
.
......
8 4 2 1

SCSI 1D
RES GND R L
POWER SUPPLY +5V GND +12V
TEST
PRV/ALW
TERM. ON/OFF
PARITY
ID4
ID2
ID1

SCSI 1D
NC
J1 8 4 2 1 DC INPUT
+5V

34 68 PINS
1 ......
68 35
......
NC J5 +5V GND +12V

GND

FLOPPY DISK DRIVE

DATA DISK 9 Gb

DC INPUT J1
J2

.... 2 . . 34
4 1
1
. 34 PINS . 33

. . . J6. . .
......
8 4 2 1

SCSI 1D
RES

SCSI ID’S

SYSTEM DISK 0

DATA DISK 1

CD-ROM 4

SCSI 1D
NC
J1 8 4 2 1 DC INPUT
+5V

34 68 PINS
1 ......
68 35
......
NC J5 +5V GND +12V

GND

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 570 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

DMCC 21164, continued

Connector Locations/Jumper Settings
- Backplane & CPU Board
J5
1
J6
PCI 7 J13 KZPBA-CB 3 1
D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
To CPU

Control Panel
J28 Operator
Fan

+3.3 V

+12 V
-12 V

+5 V
-5 V
6
D2
PCI 6 J12 KZPBA-CA (IIM/MO Drive) D3
D4
CPU
(Including Fan)
J23
PCI 5 J11 DE500 J29 2
1
Fan 4 Sense 1

J24 2 Fan 3 & 4 Power

Fan 3 Sense 1
J27 J26 J25 PCI 4 J10 DIGI
1
2
3

CPU Board LEDs (Rear Side) S0 S1 S0 S1

J22 PCI 3 J9 Spare
To IO Module
J408
1
D2: 2.5 V Status
To CPU J4
D3: 3.3 V Status
YE
4 D4: 5 V Status
PCI 2 J8 KZPBA-CA (Internal HDs & CD-ROM) To IO Module
D6: Watchdog Enable Status
WT (1)
J404 J21 D7: Overtemp Status
1
Power
Input
J18 Remote
GN 1
PCI 1 J7 Video Board Shutdown

J20 BU To IO
2 1 Memory
Module J412 Slots
1 VT J17 J16 Fan

J100 128 MB

J103 128 MB

J102 128 MB
Fan 2 Sense

J101 128 MB
ISA 2 J6 Spare GY
2 1
1&2 Power
1 CPU Board
J15
Fan 1 Sense
J19 1 2 1

J405 IO J14 Power

ISA 1 J5 Spare Module Status

To IO Module 1

J406
J8 J9 J7
PICMG SBC A J3 IO Module J4 5 3 1 5 3 1 5 3 1

6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2

PICMG SBC B J1 CPU Board J2 CPU Board D6

B1 D7
Battery
1
J4
Backplane J3

13
J2
24
1

To IO Module To IO Module
J501 J502
J1

COM Port Parallel Port

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 571 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

DMCC 21164, continued

Connector Locations/Jumper Settings,
continued
KZPBA-CA KZPBA-CB DIGI Board

4 P3 4 P3
SCSI ID SCSI ID
1 1

P2

J2 P2 J2 All Terminators
Installed
RM1 RM8

J1 J1 P2

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 572 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

DMCC 21164, continued

Connector Locations/Jumper Settings,
continued
Indication Panel
DE500 Video Board
J1

SW1 J2
1
2
J1 3
VGA Enable J3
1
J2 D2 D1
Alias

D3
SW1

D4

J2
D6 D5

D8 D7

100 LNK SW2

10/100
ACT

D9 D10

LCD Monitor CRT Monitor

C C
B D B D
A E A E

9 F 9 F

8 0 8 0

7 1 7 1

6 2 6 2
5 3 5 3
4 4
0

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 573 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

DMCC 21164, continued

Connector Locations/Jumper Settings,
continued

I/O Module
J411
J502 J501
5 3 1 J412 1 25 1 9 1
J409
Reset 2 26 2 10 2
6 4 2 Parallel Port COM B
DMA Channel
Select

Floppy
J410

IDE
J500

OCP Conn.

1
Keylock & Power
J406

LED J400
J403

1
1
Misc. Selection

Disc Act. J405

Speaker J404
11 9 7 5 3 1
J401 J402
12 10 8 6 4 2
J400 J400

COM A

Mouse

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 574 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

DS10
Communication
Gyroscan
Easy Vision CT PACS HIS/RIS DICOM
Intera
Hospital
Network
Ethernet
Operator Technical
Room Room
8

Parallel Ethernet 3 Ethernet

Paper Printer Printer Server Ethernet Switch
2

1
Serial
Ethernet Control
Reconstructor

Mouse SCSI

Burst (Parallel)
Ethernet

Host Computer
SCSI
BDAS
Keyboard

VGA
Monitor BE Misc. Box Examination Room
8 x RS232 SCSI
Optical Disk Drive
Serial
PICU
Control
Service PC/ Image Interface
Patient Support
Footswitch Module
RMMU
RS232 Fiber Converter 4 x Fiber
Not Used
Board
2 x RS232*
RS232 Loudspeaker/
Audio Module Audio Switch Microphone
Headset

* Host Computer to Audio Switch & Host Computer to Audio Module

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 575 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

DS10, continued
Block Diagram

DS10 BDAS Reconstructor

GKA500-GKA503 GKA300-GKA301
SCSI Controller
Memory
KZPBA-CB
512 Mb

Optical Disk Drive Image Interface Module

System WDB200 GKB300-GKB307
Disk 18 Gb
DKB0
SCSI Controller
KZPBA-CA
Data Disk
18 Gb Ethernet Switch
DKB100
Onboard Printer Server Printer
Ethernet
Controller
Terminator
Hospital Network

CD ROM Digi Board 8 x Fiber Converter Fiber Connection

1. PICU
40 x IDE Serial RS232 Board 2. not used
Copper Connection
DQB1 0. Patient Support
4. RMMU
Frame Buffer
VX1 Operator Console
Floppy Display (LCD) 6. Audio Switch
Drive DVA0 7. Audio Module
3. OCD
5. Service PC/ShimSwitch
Keyboard

Mouse Com 1 Ethernet Switch/

Service PC

Remote Service
Com 2 Modem

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 576 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

DS10, continued
External System Configuration
EWA0 Console 2
(twisted pair)

IIM TXA 0 Patient Control Panel

5-¼” R/W Disk

RS 232 Interface
Keyboard & GKC300 TXA 1 Control Front
Printer (MOD)
Mouse To TXA 2 Control Rear
WDC200
GKC307 TXA 3 Control Image Monitor (232)
TXA 4 RMMU
TXA 5 Service Port (232)
TXA 6 Audio Switch (232)
TXA 7 Audio Module (232)

OPA0 LRA0 PKC 0

Converts Wide to Single

Wide SCSI
PKA 0 Only < Rev 7
- or -
Network > Rev 8
System Disk Data Disk Single
Ended SCSI Host to XP1000
DKA0 DKA100

CD ROM Wide
Differential
Drive SCSI DWZZA-AA Single Ended SCSI

Floppy Drive DKA400 SCSI Signal

DVA0 PKB 0 Converter

TTB0 TTA0 SKY or Raw Data BDAS

Console 3 XP1000 GKB500 to
GKB600 NTDAC GKB503

MMJ D9 Conn Modem

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 577 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

DS10, continued
Connector Location
Rear

MOD, IIM, HDD

4 X10 KZPBA-CA

NTDAC
3 X2 KXPBA-CB

2 X1 DIGI Board
Power Supply
CPU & Fan BHA 230 V 115 V
1 X0 Graphics Adapter
COM1, Service
Ethernet Switch Mouse
1
A B
X13 2 USB

X14 Keyboard X7 X5 Ethernet

Ethernet Port B
COM2, Parallel Port Port A
Modem

P1: KZBPA-CA
(MOD, IIM, HDD)
P2: KZBPA-CB (NTDAC)
P3: DigiBoard Memory
P4: Graphics Adapter

Rear
PCI Riser Card

Motherboard

CD ROM Drive
COMPAQ Alpha Server DS10

CD ROM Optional Disk Data Disk

BHD Floppy CD ROM

Space for
Blower Unit
BHK System Disk
Floppy Drive

System Disk Data Disk

BHF BHG

Front Front

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 578 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Alpha Server 800

Block Diagram
PCI BUS
64 BITS
33MHz
X17

CPU SROM INTERNAL

* VGA
21164 128KB
INITIALIZATION
DISABLED

BCACHE IIM /
P6 X10
2MB SCSI MO DISK
CNTR. DRIVE
CONTROL I/O KZPBA-CA
AND
ADDRESS P7 X2 RECONSTR-
DMA BUFFER
SCSI CNTR. UCTOR
KZPSA TOR XP 1000
BOAS

CPU P9 P5 ETHERNET X5
CONTROLLER ETHERNET
DE 500

MEMORY
512MB X0
P8 FRAME
BUFFER MONITOR
3030

EISA BUS
DATA DISK 32BITS
UWSE 8.3MHz
P3 X1
AUDIO
PCI TO EISA RS232 (8x) INTERFACE
BRIDGE D1G1 UNIT

INTERNAL SCSI
SYSTEM
QLOGIC
DISK
ISP 1020/1040

1 ENABLE FLOPPY
UNSE INTERNAL DISK
X7
2 TERMINATION NOT USED
CD ROM
I/O X14 COM2

X-BUS CONTROLLER MODEM

8 BITS NS 87332
X16 SERV.PC/
8.3 MHZ REMOTE ETHERNET
MGMT SWITCH
NVRAM X13
CONSOLE
* NOT USED

TOY BUFFERS
NVRAM *

FLASH
ROM *

KEYBOARD
Initialization CPU/Cache/System BUS/First 16MB Memory
X8 * SDROM :
for Engineering Debugging.

Keyboard/ FLASHROM: Contains SRM Console Program

X9 Mouse
Controller 8242 NVRAM: Contains EISA Configuration Data + Environment Variables

MOUSE
TOY NVRAM Contains Time and Date and ENVAR OS-Type

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 579 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Alpha Server 800, continued

SCSI Configuration

PCI BUS 64 Bits

33 MHZ

SROM P6
CPU SCSI X10
128 KB
CPU 21164 Controller
Initialization Optical Disk
KZPBA-CA
4.1 GB

Bcache FNSE SCSI FNSE SCSI

2 MB
IIM

Expansion Console
Control I/O
DMA Buffer and
Address
CPU P9

Memory P7
512 MB SCSI X2 FWD SCSI
Controller X4 Reconstructor
FSWE (1020) KZPSA
UWSE (1040)

Data Disk Internal SCSI

Q-Logic ISP
1020/1040
System
Disk
1 FWD
J51
CD ROM 2 SCSI
FNSE (1020) Enable
UNSE (1040) Internal
Termination BCPP
DEC Alpha Server BH

DEC BDAS

NTDAC

Technical Room

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 580 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Alpha Server 800, continued

Connector Locations

Power Supply Spare BHB Bay 4

Bay 4
Bay 1

BHA Floppy Disk

Spare BHC

BHE Bay 2
CD ROM BHD

P17 Memory Module J47

P16 Memory Module
Bank 1
P15 Memory Module
P14 Memory Module
P13 Memory Module
P12 Memory Module BHN Bay 3
Bank 0 BHJ
P11 Memory Module
P10 Memory Module J33
Bay 5 Bay 6 Bay 7 Bay 8

P9 CPU J1

System Disk

Data Disk

Spare

Spare
P8 Frame Buffer 3D30
J9
P7 KZPSA SCSI Controller J10
BHF BHG BHH BHI
P6 KZPBA-CA SCSI Controller
J11 Pin 1 Fan
P5 DE500 Ethernet Controller
J12 BHM
Speaker
P4 Spare
NVRAM

J13 BHK
TOY

BHL
P3 DIGI RS232 (8x) J14

P2 Spare
J15
Motherboard P1

Left Side Front Side

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 581 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Alpha Server 800, continued

Connector Locations, continued

AC Switch
(115/220V) Key

Power Inlet

Serial Port/Terminal
Port (COM1)

Serial Port Remote Console

(COM2) Modem Port

Mouse Port Keyboard Port

VGA Port Parallel Port

Three 32-bit
PCI Slots
Two SCSI
One 64-bit Slot Breakouts

Two EISA Slots

Security
Hole

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 582 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

XW8000
R10.3 Initial Block Diagram

Optional
2x CPU 2.8 GHz
Keyboard X8
VGA MF
Memory 2x 512 MB Mouse X9 PHD2
DDR
Ethernet 1000 BaseT (Hospital) X5

DVD ROM
Printer (Parallel) X21 OEC
Adapter DVI
Floppy Drive BM OCD

X2 BEB
AGP
Graphics Contr. Back End Misc. Box
X0
NVIDIA Quadro 4
MO Drive 200 NVS

Internal SCSI Bus

SCSI Controller
AVA-2906 Terminator
System HDD

X1 FC BCPP
DIGI Board X54
Data HDD
Bulk Interface
X3
SCSI Controller X2
Terminator X4 FL Reconstructor
KZPBA-CC
X15
Ethernet Controller X25 NTDAC
10/100/1000

Graphics
Contr.GeForce4MX X27 Optional S-Video Out Signal
440 or GeForce
FX5200
BH Host Computer
XW8000 R103

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 583 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

XW8000, continued
R10.6 Initial Block Diagram

Optional
2x CPU 2.8 GHz
Keyboard X8
VGA MF
Memory 2x 512 MB Mouse X9 PHD2
DDR
Ethernet 1000 BaseT (Hospital) X5

DVD ROM
Printer (USB) X41 OEC
Adapter DVI
Floppy Drive BM OCD

X2 BEB
AGP
Graphics Contr. Back End Misc. Box
X0
NVIDIA Quadro 4
MO Drive 200 NVS

Internal SCSI Bus

SCSI Controller
AVA-2906 Terminator
System HDD

X1 FC BCPP
DIGI Board X54
Data HDD
Bulk Interface
X3
SCSI Controller X2
Terminator X4 FL Reconstructor
KZPBA-CC
X15
Ethernet Controller X25 NTDAC
10/100/1000

Graphics
Contr.GeForce4MX X27 Optional S-Video Out Signal
440 or GeForce
FX5200
BH Host Computer
XW8000 R106

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 584 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

XW8000, continued
R11.x Initial Block Diagram

Optional
2x CPU 2.8 GHz
Keyboard X8
VGA MF
Memory 6x 512 MB Mouse PS2 X9 PHD2
DDR2
Ethernet 1000 BaseT (Hospital) X5

DVD ROM
Printer (USB) X41 OEC
Adapter DVI
Floppy Drive BM OCD

Graphics Contr. MO Drive

AGP X0 External SCSI
NVIDIA Quadro 4
200 NVS
X2 BEB
Internal SCSI Bus
Back End Misc. Box
X30
SCSI Controller
System HDD AVA-2906
36 GB 15 krpm X50
X1 FC BCPP
Data HDD DIGI Board X54
36 GB 15 krpm Bulk Interface

SCSI X3
SCSI Controller X2
Terminator X15 FL Reconstructor
KZPBA-CC

Ethernet Controller X25 1000 BaseT (Control & Data) NTDAC

10/100/1000

Graphics Contr. X27 Optional S-Video Out Signal

GeForce FX5200
BH Host Computer Note: For 1000 Base-T shielded CAT5, 4 pairs,
XW8000 R11 Initial 26 AWG cable is required.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 585 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

XW8000, continued
R11.x Update Block Diagram

Optional
2x CPU 2.8 GHz
Keyboard X8
VGA MF
Memory 6x 512 MB Mouse PS2 X9 PHD2
DDR2
Ethernet 1000 BaseT (Hospital) X5

DVD ROM
Printer (USB) X41 OEC
Adapter DVI
X42 BM OCD
Floppy Drive

X2 BEB
AGP
Graphics Contr. Back End Misc. Box
X0
NVIDIA Quadro 4
MO Drive 200 NVS

Internal SCSI Bus

SCSI Controller
System HDD AVA-2906
36 GB 15 krpm X50
X1 FC BCPP
Data HDD DIGI Board X54
36 GB 15 krpm Bulk Interface
X3
SCSI Controller X2 SCSI
Terminator X15 FL Reconstructor
KZPBA-CC

Ethernet Controller X25 1000 BaseT (Control & Data) NTDAC

10/100/1000

Graphics Contr. X27 Optional S-Video Out Signal

GeForce FX5200
BH Host Computer
XW8000 R11 Upgrade

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 586 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

XW8000, continued
System Board Overview
R10.3 – R10.6 R11.x

DVD ROM Drive DVD ROM Drive

Power Supply Power Supply

Internal MOD MOD Drive
Drive (Site Dependent)

Floppy Drive Floppy Drive

6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1

Processor Processor
Empty 1
Empty
1

Fan Fan
C B A C B A
Empty Empty

Processor Processor
2 Data Hard 2 Data Hard
Disk Drive Disk Drive
Memory Boards Memory Boards
System Hard System Hard
Graphic Controller NVIDIA Quadro4 200 NVS
Disk Drive Disk Drive
Graphic Controller NVIDIA Quadro4 200 NVS

SCSI Controller AVA2906

SCSI Controller AVA2906

Digi Board
Digi Board

SCSI Controller KZPBA-CC

SCSI Controller KZPBA-CC
Battery Battery

Ethernet Controller10/100/1000 Base-T Speaker Speaker

Ethernet Controller10/100/1000 Base-T

Graphic Controller XFX GEForce FX5200

Graphic Controller XFX GEForce FX5200

Empty Empty

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 587 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

XW8000, continued
Connector Location Overview

Power
Connector DVD-ROM Drive DVD-ROM Drive

Power Supply
X12
MOD Drive MOD Drive

Floppy Drive
Floppy Drive
6 5 4 3 2 1
Keyboard Mouse

X8 X9
Processor
1
USB (4)
C B A
Power
Fan

Button
Parallel Data HDD
X21
Serial
Processor
2
System HDD Power Hard Drive Reset

Memory Baord
Ethernet to NVIDIA Quadro4 200 NVS
Hosp. (X5)
Line-Out Line-In
Audio Audio
SCSI Controller AVA 2906

Mic. X16 X17

DIGI Board

NVIDIA Quadro4 200 NVS

SCSI Controller KZPBA-CC IEE
X0 USB
Speaker 1394 Port
(2)
SCSI Controller AVA 2906 Firewire

Ethernet Controller Line

DIGI Board Mic. Out
X1

SCSI Controller KZPBA-CC XFX GEFORCE 4 MX440-SE

X2

Ethernet Controller (To Reconstructor)

X25
XFX GEFORCE 4 MX440-SE
X23

Rear View Side View Front Front View

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 588 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

XW8000, continued
Connection Locations - Disk Drives
SCSI Connector
Data Disks
Pin 1
Front DVD-ROM Drive
TP to Bus

Reserved

Reserved

Parity Disabled J2
J6
Write Protect
IDE DC INPUT
Digital Analog Mode
Motor Start Enabled Select
Audio Audio GND
1
Delay MTR Start 50 Pins
8 4 2 1 +5 V +12 V
Force Single Ended No
SCSI ID
Jumpers
RES Master
Slave

Front
Rear CSEL

NC
4.1 GB MO Disk Drive
+5 V SCSI ID DC Input
J1 8 4 2 1

34 1
GND
Front
68 Pins
68 35 No Jumpers
+5 V +12 V
SCSI ID = 0
NC J5
System Disk 18 or 36 GB
GND

SCSI Connector
Pin 1

Front Emergency
Eject Hole
TP to Bus

Reserved

Reserved

Parity Disabled J2
J6
Write Protect
Rear
Motor Start Enabled

Delay MTR Start 2 50

8 4 2 1 B 4 3 2 1
Force Single Ended No
SCSI ID
Jumpers 50 Pins
A
RES
1 12 1 49

Front Rear

Sony SMO-F551 2 – SCSI ID Sony RMO-S551 R11.x

11 – SCSI Termination F – Internal SCSI Terminator
R10.x & R11.x 12 – Power Transmission (Internal)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A B C D E F G H
1
0
NC 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
+5 V SCSI ID DC Input SCSI ID = 0
Sony SMO-F551 2 – SCSI ID
J1 8 4 2 1
12 – Power Transmission
34 1 GND R7.x, R8.x & R9.x
68 Pins 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
68 35 No Jumpers
+5 V +12 V
SCSI ID = 1
NC J5
System Disk 18 or 36 GB GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 589 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

XW8000, continued
Connection Locations - DIGI Board & Graphic
Controller
XFX GEFORCE NVIDIA Quadro 4
MX440 SE Graphics (AGP) Graphic DIGI Board
Card w/TV Out Controller (No Jumpers)
(No Jumpers) (No Jumpers)

X0 VGA X0 VGA
Connector X1
Connector

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 590 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

XW8000, continued
Connection Locations - SCSI Controllers
KZPBA-CC SCSI AVA 2906 SCSI
Controller Controller
(No Jumpers) (No Jumpers)
4

1
P3

MO Drive
Internal SCSI

SCSI Bus
J2 External Wide Terminator
Device connector Resistors
RM1 – RM8

P2 Internal Narrow
Device connector

J1 External Wide
J1 External Wide
Device Connector
Device Connector

67 1
67 1

68 2
68 2

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 591 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

XP1000
Connector Locations/Jumper Settings - Hard
Drives
RZ2CC-KA RZ2CC-KB

SPIN
ENABLE AUTO
AUTOSPIN START

TOP VIEW

TOP VIEW

1 2

TYPE MANUFAC.

KB 18M 4.3GB
KA QUANTUM 4.3GB

GND
GND +5V +12V
+5V +12V

SMA SMA

DC-INPUT
DC-INPUT

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 592 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

AP550
Block Diagram

Pentium III
1GHz
CPU1
133 MHz Memory
256 MB
Pentium III MCH (840)
1GHz
CPU2 Memory Control Optional Memory
Hub

(Not Used) AGP Slot

PC
Not Used Speaker
Hub Link
Line In (Not Used)

System AC97 Line Out (Not Used)

Disk Audio Micro In (Not Used)

Headphone Out (Not Used)

CD ROM PCI Bus

32 Bits
Video Board X6
LCD Reconstructor
ICH VAMP550

X4
USB Ports
I/O Control Hub SCSI Control Reconstructor BDAS
(Not Used) KXPBA-CB
X3
ARI Board BCPP Burst

FWD Reserved Not Used

4 MB / 8 MB X15
Internal
Ethernet UTP
Ethernet 82559
LPC Bus
Ultra 3 SCSI
Not Used
Control

X9
COM1 (Not Used)

X10
COM2 (Not Used)

X1 Parallel (Not Used)

Power Super I/O SMC
Mains Supply LPC47B38X X11
Inlet Mouse
Unit
X12
Keyboard

Floppy
Drive

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 593 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

AP550, continued
Connector Overview
X3 ARI X5 (Not Used X10
Board X6 VAMP X9 X15 Ethernet X11 Mouse
X4 X12 Keyboard X1 Mains
(Not Used) UTP
KZPBA-CB

Fan Unit
Video Board VAMP
KXPBA-CB Board

Power Supply Unit

X5
X10
ARI Board

X3
X4
Memory Channel A

X9

X6
Pentium III Pentium III
Memory Channel B

1 GHz 1 GHz X1
X11
X15

X12

CPU 1 CPU 2
Rear View

System Disk
Floppy Drive

Power ON/
OFF

CD ROM Drive

Disk

Floppy
System Drive
Disk CD ROM
Fan Unit Drive

Front Top View

Front View

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 594 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

AP550, continued
Connector Locations/Jumper Settings
- CD ROM Drive
+5 V +5 V Connected to 5 V via Polyswitch

150
J4 J6
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 1 3 5 7 9 11 13

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 2 4 6 8 10 12 14

Reserved

150
ID Bit 2 ID Bit 3
ID Bit 1 Disable Unit Attention
TI Sync Negotiation
To LED Pin 8 ID Bit 0 Disable Parity
Aux Connector
Force CE Mode Delay Start 6/12
Auto Start Delay
Floppy Disk Drive AP550 Term Power (SCSI I/F)
Enable Autospin

DC Input Data

J6 J4

CD ROM Drive AP550

GND GND
R L +5 V +12 V
CSEL Master

SCSI J1B Power

Slave DC Input
ATAPI Pin 1

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 595 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

AP550, continued
Connector Locations/Jumper Settings
- System Board
E49 P9 (7 Pins)
P120 SW50 P12 (3 Pins)

+ J24
Slot 4

CMOS ARI
J22
Slot 3

P10 KZPBA-CB
Floppy
- J21
Slot 2
Video Board VAMP550
J20
Slot 1

ACP Slot

J40
P20 P21 SEC IDE P8
P89
Primary IDE
Pan COM 1-2
Channel A (CRIMM) XMM2

P5 Channel A (MEM MOD 128 MB) XMM1

(3 Pins)

Channel B (CRIMM) XMM4

Channel B (MEM MOD 128 MB) XMM3 P30

SCSI

P2 P1
(6 Pins) (24 Pins)

Primary Processor Slot X15 Ethernet UTP

USB Connector

Secondary Processor Slot X11 Keyboard/Mouse Connector

X12

Headphone/Micro Connector
P160 P6
(2 Pins)
P7 IN/OUT Audio Connector
(4 Pins)
Audio

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 596 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

AP550, continued
Connector Locations/Jumper Settings
- Video, SCSI and ARI Boards
1
JP5
JP10 1
JP6 1
ON Contrast RT1
S1
Board & Display Configuration
J2
JP4 1 8
1

EEPROM

ARI Board
P3 F1/F2
2AT 250 V
JP14
J1 J3 1
1 F2 F1
JP11

KZPBA-CB SCSI Controller

J2

P3
P2

RM1

J1 Remove All
Terminators

RM8

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 597 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

XW6000
Block Diagram

Xeon CPU 1

400 MHz Memory

2 x 1 GB
MCH (COLUSA)
Xeon CPU 2
Memory Control Optional Memory
Hub

(Not Used) AGP Slot

PC
Not Used Speaker
Hub Link
Line In (Not Used)

System Audio Line Out (Not Used)

Disk Sound
Micro In (Not Used)
Blaster
Headphone Out (Not Used)

CD ROM PCI Bus

32 Bits
Video Board X6
LCD Reconstructor
ICH 2 VAMP550

I/O Control Hub

USB Ports Reserved Not Used
(Not Used)
X3
ARI Board BCPP Burst

FWD Reserved Not Used

4 MB / 8 MB
Ultra 3 SCSI
Not Used
Control
LPC Bus Internal X15
Ethernet UTP
Ethernet 82559

X9
COM1 (Not Used)

X10
COM2 (Not Used)

X1 Parallel (Not Used)

Power Super I/O
Mains Supply X11
Inlet Mouse
Unit
X12
Keyboard

Floppy
Drive

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 598 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

XW6000, continued
Connector Overview (R11)

X15 X11 Mouse

Ethernet UTP X12 Keyboard X1 Mains

Empty Slot
PCI Slot 1

PCI Slot 3
Ch B

Ch A
Video Board VAMP550
ARI Board

Not Used

Power Supply Unit

X5
AGP Slot

X3
Ch B

Ch A

X1

X6
X11 Mic/LI Parallel Port
Serial A X15

Serial B
USB
DIMM4

DIMM3

X12 HP/LO SCSI

Rear View
Battery
DIMM2

DIMM1

System Disk
Floppy Drive

Power ON/
OFF

SW50 CD ROM Drive

Disk
CMOS

Floppy
System Drive
Disk CD ROM
Fan Unit Drive

Front Top View

Front View

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 599 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

XW6000, continued
Connector Locations/Jumper Settings
- Hard Disk Drives

No Jumpers CN2 No Jumpers

CN2
Installed Installed

Pin 1 Pin 1

J2

Term Power to SCSI Bus

Reserved
Reserved
Disable Parity Check
Write Protect
Enable Motor Start
Delay Motor Start
Force Single Ended

15 16

No Jumpers No Jumpers
Power J1B
Pin 1
SCSI Installed Power J6 SCSI Installed

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 600 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

XW6000, continued
Connector Locations/Jumper Settings
& Ethernet Board
Video Board VAMP 550
1
JP5
JP10 1
JP6 1
ON Contrast RT1
S1
Board & Display Configuration
J2
JP4 1 8
1

EEPROM

ARI Board
P3 F1/F2
2AT 250 V
JP14
J1 J3 1
1 F2 F1
JP11

Ethernet Controller (No Jumpers)

X25/X15
1000

ACT
100

10

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 601 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-750

Bonnet Electrical Panel

1-3FU: FNQ 500 V, ½ A, Primary Control Transformer

4-6FU: Class J, 600 V, 3 A, Pump 1
2TGS 1TGS 10-11FU: Class J, 600 V, 4 A, Primary Motor Transformer
1CR 1INST
12FU: Class J, 600 V, 6 A, Secondary Motor Transformer
3TB 13FU: FNM, 250 V, 1 A, Secondary Transformer Control
14FU: FNM, 250 V, ¼ A, Primary Instrument Transformer

1LT

13FU
14FU
12FU
4TB

2INST

1CRE

10FU
11FU
1-3FU 4-6FU

2CRE

2T 1CON 2CON
3T 1MOL

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 602 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style)

Liquid to Liquid Heat Exchanger Flow
Diagram
COIL LOOP FACILITY LOOP
IN text

STRAINER

FLOWSWITCH PURALITE SENSOR

HEAT
OUT

DEIONIZATION
CARTRIDGE

HEAT EXCHANGER
RELIEF VALVE

FLOWMETER

IN

TEMP PRESSURE
MOTOR VALVE
SENSOR
PUMP (x2)
VALVE
MOTOR
VALVE

OUT
TANK

STRAINER(x2)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 603 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Neslab- Old Style), continued

Gradient Interface Connections
Heat Exchanger Gradient Interface
‘Interface’ DIB – X57

Close on any fault 1

Opens on low level 3

Close on low flow 4

Close on high temp.(out) 5

Close on high temp.(in) 6

7
Shield

Opens on any fault 9

10

11 Ground
Gradient Interface isolated from power
heat exchanger.
12 Ground

Diagnostics (interface) cable:

- 2 x 15 pin male plug, 13 Ground
- 1 to 1 connection
- 4522 150 20671
14 Ground
Dummy plug DIBX57:
- used in case of PT1000A
- shortens 1 to 15 15 Ground
- also useful for test purposes
Heat Exchanger Interface Cable

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 604 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Eaton Williams - New Style)

Wiring Diagram

Load Break Rocker Switch

10 A Bi-Metallic (15W)

Power ON
Maximum Running Current 8.5 A (7.5 A) L1 (R)
Recommended Protective Device 16 A (16A) Bi- (Neon)
Switch Metallic
1 RFC
Choke

1 5 P1 3
L

10 m FLEX 2 6 P2 4
(w/Strain Relief) N
3 4

E 1FU
375 mA

17
3 4 31
PE
115 V 0V 115 V 0V

1 3 30 VA -T1
5
0V0V 120 V
Motor Supply 24 V
1 CON 34
2 4 6 18 3FU
4FU 32 375 mA
35
750 mA
9 10 21
Remote Alarm Indication
18
42 42 42 42 42 42 42
4 5
6 7
9 10 9 9 9 9 3 19 32 35
19
19
19 19
1CR 1CR 11
2CR 3CR 4CR 5CR 12 SR5-1 SK6-1 SK6-2
1 1 11 Low Level
1 5 1 5 5 1 5 2CR PL6-1 PL6-2
5 2 I8 11 PL5-1
Time
19 Delay
48 42 42 42 42
19
43 44 45 46 47 1TDR 3 7
SK4-3
SK4-1
8 9 25 Float SW
9 1FS 0V 120 V
PL4-3 PL4-1
Circuit Broken ON Fault

11 Low Flow
Circuit Broken ON Fault

Circuit Broken ON Fault

Circuit Made ON Fault

Circuit Broken ON Fault

Circuit Broken ON Fault

Input Valve Actuator

3CR 4MTR
10 Output
18 18 18
2TAS PL5-2
T> T> 1TAS 3 7 S Return Temp
1 2 0V 20 V
12
Low Low
Low Flow
26 Level 12
Flow 12 Supply Temp High 5CR
1 FLS SK5-2 High 4CR 12
Outlet PL6-3 PL6-5 2CR 3CR
PL6-4
High
GN 11 Temp SK6-3 SK6-4 SK6-5
PL4-2
9 10 9 10 9 10 4CR
I8 I8
SK4-2 8 9 10 4 4 4 I8
3 7 41 4 I8
29 21
SK3-1 SK3-2 27 1
SK1-1 SK1-2 SK2-1 SK2-2 Time
39 40 41
Delay 47 uF
PL2-2 PL3-1 PL3-2 36 37 38
15-way ON Type PL1-1 PL1-2 PL2-1 11 Inlet High 1TDR
Temp 3
E 1 9 3 4 5 6 11 12 13 14 Interface (Female) J3 4 3 2 1
5CR 4
20 22 23 24 0V S 20 V
13 3 7
11 12 14 15 16 Controller
1INST
28
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 2 N 5 10 30 21
1 L 21
Low Flow Temp
13 13 Low Level
M M M 13 13 13 13 L3 (R) High L4
L2 (R)

1~ 1~ 1~
Inlet High
Temp 5CR
Outlet High
Temp 4CR
Low Flow
3CR
Low Level
2CR
Gen Fault
1CR
T
Time Delay
Motor
CONTR S (LED) (LED) (R) (LED)

1TDR 1CON
14 14 14 14 14 (set at min.) 14
Temp
Pump Motor 3MTR Pump Motor 2MTR Fan Motor 1MTR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3.9 A (3.5 A) 3.9 A (3.5 A) 0.12A (0.10 A) 2 Sensor 1TS
CROUZET
21 21 PC2R1 32
21 21 21 32 32

Danger 24 V 0V
230 V
24 VAC / 120 VAC
Distribution Terminal / Barrier Layout

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 605 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Eaton Williams - New Style), continued

Pipe Schematic

Chilled Chilled
Water Flow Gradient Gradient
Water Return
Coil Return Coil Flow

Temperature T2 T’Stat
Controller
T3 T’Stat

100 Mesh
Strainer
T4 Temp. Gauge

Flow Switch
P1 Press. Gauge
Set at 15 L/min.

Relief Valve
4.2 Bar
Relief Valve
Control Temperature
(5 PSI)
Valve T1 Sensor

Level Sensor
Heat
Exchanger

Drain
Header Tank
Points
Strainer Pump 1

Strainer

Pump 2

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 606 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8)

HC-8E1 Compressor Wiring Diagram
CB

1 4 L1 T1 7 U

Compressor
2 5 L2 T2 8 V Motor

3 6 L3 T3 9 W

10 Note: All fuses are

39 MC Fuse 1 rated 0.63 AT, 250 V
11
27 Fuse 2 13
12
Fuse 3
14
15

28 29 30 Power
Expander Cable L3 L2 L1
OTS GTS STS
31
1
T1
11
16
T2
PCB

SOL VOV
14 19
A2 TDR A1 17
32 15
36
T3 20
16 15 96
18 2 5
35 34 OCR CS
+ - -
13 14 33 95
3 6

MC: Motor Contactor 23 24 25

38 PCB: Printed Circuit Board 22 21
A2 MC A1 STS: Shell Temperature Switch 21
1 2
OTS: Oil Temperature Switch MC
GTS: Gas Temperature Switch
3 4 26 22
TDR: Time Delay Relay
GSV
GSV: Gas Solenoid Valve
CB: Circuit Breaker ON/OFF Switch Control
CS: Control Switch Receptacle
OCR: Overcurrent Relay

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 607 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (NT Intera)

Overview

BDAS SCSI

DFEC1 BCP Transceiver

TX RX Tune

RS232

Control/
Blank

RF PA

Fibers & MR
Interlock Response
Tune
Blank-Top
Switch

DFEC2 To QBC Tune Coil A & B

FBINT User Connector Unit

Control/Status
RFINT COILINT SC1–SC4

PU QBC

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 608 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (NT Intera), continued

BDAS Block Diagram
RS232 to Power Amp.
Trigger Out Cable Interface
Door Open Detect

PS232
Grad Cab.
Grad Coil
Host SCSI Grad. Bus Grad.INT

Parallel 8 Control / 8 Status

8 Control / 8 Status / 4 Analog Physiology
DFEC1
Burst Dual Fiber DFEC2
Sky Rec.
Fiber Interlock
BCP

PA Filter Box
RF PA Control &
ADC RF Blanking
Waveform Status
Bus Bus
Bus

RF Out RF Amp RF Out

Transceiver RF Response
Tune Out

DIGREC
BDAS

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 609 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (NT Intera), continued

BDAS Digital Section

CPU & 4- RS232 RF 4-Channel

Channel SCSI Amp via Memory DMA Memory
DMA to/from Interface RS232
8 MB Controller 8 MB AP INIT
Controller Host Box Debug
i960CA
i960CA

Burst

Bus Switch

Gradient RF ADC Input Physiology

Sector
Waveform Waveform Input
Generator
Generator Generator 16 data/-1 Address
12
ADC Bus Physiology
RF Waveform Bus Conversion
Gradient Unit
Waveform Sector RF Waveform Begin of
Generator Generator Generator ADC Input Physiology Stretch 4
Control Control Control Control Control Status Interrupt Analog Physiology
Signals

Multiplexing Serialization
Safety Circuit &
& & Clock Registers Registers Registers Buffers Buffers
Registers
Serialization Generation

8 8 1 1 1 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

Gradient Bus to/ Front End Bus Interlock Control Status Control Status Control Status Control Status Cable Spare Bus RF Bus
from Gradient Fibers to/From Fiber from to/from RF Amp Physiology Filterbox Interface Unit
Interface DFEC2 DFEC2

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 610 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

New Intera
Data Acquisition Block Diagram
PFEI MM

TRANSMIT COIL

SYNERGY COIL 1

BURST GRADIENT SYNERGY COIL 2

X3 GRADIENT CHANNEL
X54 AMPLIFIER ZFX172 ---ZFX177
DIB
X52 X-Y-Z
X50 SURFACE/HEAD COIL 1
SCSI RECONTRUCTOR

X4 X50 SURFACE/HEAD COIL 2

COMPUTER
X51 D.
Y
CABINET X Z
BCP
GRADIENT COIL
FCB FCCX50A/B
X3 / X2 COMBI FILTER
PHYSIOLOGY PICK-UP COILS
BH X50
SEE
X102 TUNE COILS
DOOR DETECT
ZC 1 2
Z1-8.1
X10 A B
X54 X10 TUNE A (TCA)

X9 TUNE SEL + TUNE OFF TUNE B (TCB)

X53 ODD
CONTROL
CABLE X2
QBC – GRADIENT COIL
INTERFACE FOR NT5 COMBINATION
BOX X1
RF AMPL. INSIDE NTDAC
MGQ QBC
MMC
DFEC1 FM
FCC X3 RS232
X9
TRSW RF RF
PA BLANK TUNE IN
X51 X4 X1 X2
PA CONTROL/STATUS X3 LOAD 50E LOAD X13 X14
X52 X3 RF POWER X7 50E X2
POWER SUPPLY RF POWER
RF X8 X1
X9 / 10 X7 0
X55 2x FIBER AMPLIFIER X6
ZK
X56 X8 50
X4 HYBRID BOX
X57
FR
X5
PU COIL REC
MGB
MMF X16
RF-OUT RF-OUT QBC REC
X57 X1 X2 X15 X3 / 4
T/R
RECEIVE DETUNE 16x
COIL INT. RF POWER REC TRANSMIT COIL
TUNE OUT X23 X26
X56 TRC CONTROL
X6
TRANS. X7 AUX
SYNERGY COIL 1
FCH X8 X24
X5 SYNERGY COIL 2
X25
RF-IN CONTROL SC1
X51 X1
CONTROL SC2 SC1 SURFACE/HEAD COIL 1
X3 X21 X21
RECEIVE SC1
X2
RF OUT RECEIVE SC2 SC2 SURFACE/HEAD COIL 2
X9 X4 X22 X22
MME
SYNCO
FCDX51-52-53 PICU
FRONT
FCD MC1
SYNCO INT.
SYNCO
FCEX51-52-53 X1-X6 SYN. COIL 1 RECEIVE
SYNCO
X7-X12 SYN. COIL 2 RECEIVE
FCE SYNCO RESPONSE
OUT X14
1...3
X15
X13 SYN. COIL 1 CNTL
X16
X17
BUS SYNCO RESPONSE
BDAS X18
SYNCO X20 SYN. COIL 2 CNTL
X19
OUT MMB
FC 4...6

(SEE Z1-7.2.1)
(SEE Z1-7.2.2)
(SEE Z1-7.2.3)
PFINT
SFB
X4 X3 PHYSIOLOGY
X5
FCDX51 CHANNEL 1
X6 SENSOR AIR
FCDX52 CHANNEL 2 X1 X7 PRESS SENSOR
CONTROL / STATUS / INTERLOCK 2xFIBER
FCDX53 CHANNEL 3 X8 ETC.
X2 X9
FILTERBOX
FCEX51 CHANNEL 4 MMA

FCEX52 CHANNEL 5 Z.
FCEX53 CHANNEL 6
RF SHIELDED ROOM

NTDAC F.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 611 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

New Intera, continued

RF Transmit - Receive Chain

PFEI
MM
Gradient
Reconstructor

BCP Amplifier X-Y-Z Pickup Coils

Computer

FCB QDD 1 2 Transmit Coil

MMC True Coils

Combi Filter
Synergy Coil
A B
Synergy Coil

ZC
Cable Int. Surface Coil
TR Load QBC
Box RF
DEFEC1 Switch AF
Head Coil

Load
FM
FCC MMF

RF
RF Power
Hybrid
Out
Box
RF Coil MGB
RF Amplifier Int.
Transceiver MME
Out FR
FCH

SYNCO SYCO

Power Supply
FCD Int.
PICU
MMB
Front

ZK
MC1
SYNCO
FCE
PFINT
MMA
BDAS
FC
Filterbox
NTDAC

RF Shielded Room

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 612 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

New Intera, continued

RF - Transmit Chain

PFEI
MM
Gradient
Reconstructor

BCP Amplifier X-Y-Z

Computer

FCB QDD Pickup Coils

Transmit Coil
MMC True Coils 1 2

Combi Filter
Synergy Coil
A B
Synergy Coil

ZC
Cable Int. Surface Coil
TR Load QBC
Box RF
DEFEC1 Switch AF
Head Coil

Load
FM
MMF RF
FCC Power

Hybrid
Box
RF RF Coil MGB
Amplifier Out Int.
Transceiver MME
FR
FCH RF
Out

SYNCO SYCO

Power Supply
Int. PICU
FCD
MMB Front

ZK
MC1

SYNCO
FCE
PFINT
MMA
BDAS
FC
Filterbox
NTDAC

RF Shielded Room

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 613 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

New Intera, continued

RF - Receive Chain

PFEI
MM
Gradient
Reconstructor

BCP Amplifier X-Y-Z Pickup Coils

Computer

FCB QDD 1 2 Transmit Coil

MMC True Coils

Combi Filter
Synergy Coil
A B
Synergy Coil

ZC
Cable Int. Surface Coil
TR Load QBC
Box RF
DEFEC1 FM Switch AF
Head Coil
FCC MMF

Hybrid
Box
RF Coil MGB
Amplifier Int.
Transceiver MME
FR
FCH

SYNCO SYCO

Power Supply
FCD Int.
PICU
MMB
Front

ZK
MC1
SYNCO
FCE
PFINT
MMA
BDAS
FC
Filterbox
NTDAC

RF Shielded Room

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 614 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

New Intera, continued

RF - PU Coil Chain

PFEI
MM
Gradient
Reconstructor

BCP Amplifier X-Y-Z Pickup Coils

Computer

FCB QDD 1 2
MMC True Coils
Transmit Coil

Combi Filter
A B
Synergy Coil

ZC
Cable Int. Synergy Coil
TR Load QBC
Box
Switch AF RF Surface Coil
DEFEC1 FM
FCC MMF Head Coil

RF
Power Hybrid
Box
RF
RF Out
Coil MGB
RF
Out Amplifier Int.
Transceiver MME
FR
FCH

SYNCO SYCO

Power Supply
FCD Int.
PICU
MMB
Front

ZK
MC1
SYNCO
FCE
PFINT
MMA
BDAS
FC
Filterbox
NTDAC

RF Shielded Room

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 615 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Intera NT
Data Acquisition Block Diagram

TRANSMIT COIL

SYNERGY COIL

BURST GRADIENT SYNERGY COIL

GRADIENT CHANNEL
SKY X54 AMPLIFIER X172 ---X177
DIB
SCSI II X52 X-Y-Z
X50 SURFACE/HEAD COIL
SCSI
COMPUTER Ext. X50 SURFACE/HEAD COIL
CABINET
X51 D.
Y
FL FS X Z
BCP
GRADIENT COIL
FCB
BHG PHYSIOLOGY X13 X63 PICK-UP COILS
X50 Physiology
TUNE COILS
DOOR DETECT
1 2
X10 A B
CON Panel
X54 X10
RECONTRUCTOR MSI
X9 TUNE SEL + TUNE OFF X9
X53 Tune Control
CABLE QBC – GRADIENT COIL
INTERFACE FOR NT5 OFF SEL COMBINATION
BOX X2 X2
RF AMPL. INSIDE NTDAC X1 MGQ QBC
X3
DFEC1 FM X3
FCC X3 RS232
X9 Tune Switch
RF RF
PA BLANK ZD
X51 X4

PA CONTROL/STATUS LOAD 50E LOAD X13 X14

X52 X3 50E X2

RF RF POWER
X1 0
X55 AMPLIFIER X7
3x FIBER
X56 RF Power X8 50
Feed-Through HYBRID BOX
X57
FR
MGB
X1 PU X16
RF-OUT RF-OUT X1 X1 RF REC
X2 X3 X15 X3 / 4
X57 X1 X2
ZA
T/R X5
Switch Detune 16X
TUNE OUT
X56 MSE X4
T/R
TRANS. X34
FCH X36
RF-IN X29 RF Out X31
X51 X29 RF POWER TRANSMIT COIL
X1 X3
QBC DET X1 X72
Coil INT X72 QDD REF
X2 Driver
MSF FILTER
X21 MSG X71 X2 X71
SYNCO
FCDX51-52-53 X21-X22-X23 X22
X21-X22-X23 SYNCO Response Detune + Select
X23
FCD (3x) X24 (4x)
X14
X24 SYNERGY COIL 1
X10/11 X4
SYNCO X12/13 SYNERGY COIL 2
X25-X26-X27 X25-X26-X27 X25 X5
FCEX51-52-53 SYNCO Response
X26 X15/32 SURFACE/HEAD COIL 1
X1
FCE (3x) X28 (4x) X27 SURFACE/HEAD COIL 2
X15/33 X2
X28

X16
BUS PICU
BDAS
FRONT
PFEI MS
FC MC1

MDI4X12/X13
DFEC2
CONTROL / STATUS / INTERLOCK 3x Fiber MDI1X1
MDI MDI5X1 Air Press. Sensor
MDI1X2
MDI1X3 MDI5X2 HE Sensor (DPS)
FILTERBOX

Z. Patient Electronics
MDP
RF SHIELDED ROOM
TFEI MD
NTDAC F.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 616 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Intera NT, continued

RF Transmit- Receive Chain

PFEI
MM
Gradient
Reconstructor

BCP Amplifier X-Y-Z Pickup Coils

Computer

FCB QDD 1 2 Transmit Coil

MMC True Coils

Combi Filter
Synergy Coil
A B
Synergy Coil

ZC
Cable Int. Surface Coil
TR Load QBC
Box RF
DEFEC1 Switch AF
Head Coil

Load
FM
FCC MMF

RF
RF Power
Hybrid
Out
Box
RF Coil MGB
RF Amplifier Int.
Transceiver MME
Out FR
FCH

SYNCO SYCO

Power Supply
FCD Int.
PICU
MMB
Front

ZK
MC1
SYNCO
FCE
PFINT
MMA
BDAS
FC
Filterbox
NTDAC

RF Shielded Room

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 617 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Intera NT, continued

RF - Transmit Chain

PFEI
MM
Gradient
Reconstructor

BCP Amplifier X-Y-Z

Computer

FCB QDD Pickup Coils

Transmit Coil
MMC True Coils 1 2

Combi Filter
Synergy Coil
A B
Synergy Coil

ZC
Cable Int. Surface Coil
TR Load QBC
Box RF
DEFEC1 Switch AF
Head Coil

Load
FM
MMF RF
FCC Power

Hybrid
Box
RF RF Coil MGB
Amplifier Out Int.
Transceiver MME
FR
FCH RF
Out

SYNCO SYCO

Power Supply
Int. PICU
FCD
MMB Front

ZK
MC1

SYNCO
FCE
PFINT
MMA
BDAS
FC
Filterbox
NTDAC

RF Shielded Room

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 618 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Intera NT, continued

RF - Receive Chain

PFEI
MM
Gradient
Reconstructor

BCP Amplifier X-Y-Z Pickup Coils

Computer

FCB QDD 1 2 Transmit Coil

MMC True Coils

Combi Filter
Synergy Coil
A B
Synergy Coil

ZC
Cable Int. Surface Coil
TR Load QBC
Box RF
DEFEC1 FM Switch AF
Head Coil
FCC MMF

Hybrid
Box
RF Coil MGB
Amplifier Int.
Transceiver MME
FR
FCH

SYNCO SYCO

Power Supply
FCD Int.
PICU
MMB
Front

ZK
MC1
SYNCO
FCE
PFINT
MMA
BDAS
FC
Filterbox
NTDAC

RF Shielded Room

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 619 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Intera NT, continued

RF - PU Coil Chain

PFEI
MM
Gradient
Reconstructor

BCP Amplifier X-Y-Z Pickup Coils

Computer

FCB QDD 1 2
MMC True Coils
Transmit Coil

Combi Filter
A B
Synergy Coil

ZC
Cable Int. Synergy Coil
TR Load QBC
Box
Switch AF RF Surface Coil
DEFEC1 FM
FCC MMF Head Coil

RF
Power Hybrid
Box
RF
RF Out
Coil MGB
RF
Out Amplifier Int.
Transceiver MME
FR
FCH

SYNCO SYCO

Power Supply
FCD Int.
PICU
MMB
Front

ZK
MC1
SYNCO
FCE
PFINT
MMA
BDAS
FC
Filterbox
NTDAC

RF Shielded Room

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 620 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Gradient System Block Diagram (Copley 234)

Intera 0.5T-Standard, Intera 1.0T-Omni, and
Intera 1.5T-Omni (PT1000)

DX1 MAIN
+160V DC
COMMON
POWER X
MODE
FROM FILTER
MDU 15kW SUPPLY COPLEY
AMPLIFIER A14X30-1
DP J2 GRADIENT COIL
X X
X-

J1 DIBX52 DIFX50
AUX
P10
DM1
DIX1
MAINS IN COMMON
Y
MODE
FILTER
INTERFACE COPLEY
RACK AMPLIFIER
GRADIENT COIL
DI. Y
Y- Y
DIEX50

FAN SUPPLY COPLEY FANS P10

28V DM1-2-3 DM2

COMMON
Z
COPLEY MODE
AMPLIFIER FILTER

CLK
Z
GRADIENT COIL
DIDX50
Z- Z
GRAD. INTERFACE
FCBX52 DIBX50 DIBX51 P10
DM3 COMMON
MODE
BDAS FC FILTER TEMP S
DIBX53

SYSTEM
GRADIENT AMPLIFIER D. FILTER BOX Z. MAGNET MA

NTDAC F.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 621 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Gradient System Block Diagram (Copley 274)

Intera 1.0T-Power and Intera 1.5T-Power
(PT3000)

20kW SUPPLY +HV

DP1 -HV

(MASTER)J2

MAINS
ON J1
POWER DX1 CB1
FROM
MDU COPLEY
AMPLIFIER
20kW SUPPLY X
X
DP2 CURRENT
(SLAVE) SENSOR
CB2 J2 J6
A14X30-1.3 GRADIENT COIL
J13 J19 X- X
DEMAND
J1 DIBX52 DIFX50 J9
DM1
J10

DIX1
COPLEY Y
AMPLIFIER CURRENT
INTERFACE Y SENSOR
28V SUPPLY RACK J6
(3x) GRADIENT COIL
DI. J13 J19 Y- Y
DEMAND
DIEX50 J9
D1
HV ON J10
DOOR

20 sec
CONTACT DM2
F1 DEL.CIRCUIT
COPLEY
0.4A AMPLIFIER
5MHz Z
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT DS CLOCK Z
CURRENT
DIBX58 J6
SENSOR
J13
GRADIENT COIL
BDAS GRAD. INTERFACE J19
FCBX52 DIDX50
DEMAND
J9 Z- Z
DIBX50
FC DIAGNOSTIC
DIBX51 J10
DM3 TEMP S
NTDAC F. DIBX53
TEMP.

SYSTEM
DIDX59 ADAPTIVE ECG FILTERING GRADIENT AMPLIFIER D. FILTER BOX Z. MAGNET MA
ONLY FOR Intera FOR Intera POWER AND MASTER
POWER AND MASTER
DIBX57
HEAT EXCHANGER AH

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 622 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Gradient System Block Diagram (Copley 274 Dual Rack)

Intera 1.5T-Master (PT6000)
+HV
20kW SUPPLY -HV
(MASTER)
1000A
J2
MAINS +19V / -19V
ON DP1 J1 J1
POWER DX1 CB1
FROM 100A COPLEY
MDU AMPLIFIER
20kW SUPPLY
EXTENDED
(SLAVE) X
J2 J19 XA
J6
DANFYSIC
J13
DEMAND GRADIENT COIL
J9
DP2 J1 X63 X65 XA- XA
CB2 X62 DEMAND
DIBX52 X52 X55 J10
DIFX50 DM1
X64
DIR X58
DUAL MODE INT. BOARD COPLEY
DIX1 AMPLIFIER
Y J19 YA
J6
CONTROLLER
AND DANFYSIC
WFG BOARD’S J13
28V SUPPLY DEMAND GRADIENT COIL
X51 X54 DEMAND
(3x) DIEX50 J9
YA- YA
X57
J10

CLOCK DRIVER
DM2
D1 HV 5MHz 5MHz
DOOR CLOCK
ON CLOCK X66 X67
CONTACT DIBX58

20 sec X68 COPLEY

F1 DEL.CIRCUIT AMPLIFIER
Z ZA
0.4A DEMAND J19
X50 X53
DIDX50 CURRENT
J6 SENSOR
X56
GRADIENT COIL
J13
ZA- ZA
DEMAND
HEAT EXCHANGER AH DIBX57
DIBX51
DIAGNOSTIC
X59 X61 J9
DIAGNOSTIC
25x X60 J10
DM3
GRAD. INTERFACE
TEMP S
FCBX52 TEMP.
BDAS FC DIBX50 DIBX53

NTDAC F. INTERFACE RACK DI. MASTER GRADIENT AMPLIFIER D.

SYSTEM
FILTER BOX Z. MAGNET MA
+HV
20kW SUPPLY 1000A -HV
(MASTER)

J2
MAINS
ON DP1 J1
POWER DX1 CB1
FROM 100A COPLEY
MDU AMPLIFIER
20kW SUPPLY
EXTENDED
(SLAVE) X
J19 XB
J2 J6
CURRENT
J13 SENSOR
DEMAND GRADIENT COIL
J9
DP2 J1 XB- XB
CB2
J10
DM1

COPLEY
AMPLIFIER
Y J19 YB
J6
CURRENT
SENSOR
J13
28V SUPPLY DEMAND
GRADIENT COIL
(3x) J9 YB
YB-
J10
DM2
D1 HV
DOOR
ON
CONTACT

20 sec COPLEY
F1 DEL.CIRCUIT AMPLIFIER
Z
0.4A J19 ZB
5MHz
CLOCK CURRENT
J6 SENSOR
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT DS
J13 GRADIENT COIL
DEMAND ZB- ZB
J9
DIAGNOSTIC
J10
DM3

SLAVE GRADIENT AMPLIFIER D.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 623 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Power Supply Gradient Amplifier D (Copley 234)

Intera 0.5T-Standard, Intera 1.0T-Omni, and
Intera 1.5T-Omni (PT1000)
160V
COMMON
+HV OUT+ X MODE
POS
X FILTER
+160V DC COPLEY X
AMPLIFIER GRADIENT
GND OUT- X- COIL

MAIN

FAN SUPPLY AND

DX1 CONTROL SIGNAL
15kW SUPPLY
L1 DM1
L1
COMMON
L2 MODE
+HV OUT+ Y
L2 FILTER
Y
L3 COPLEY
FROM L3 Y
MDU AMPLIFIER
DX1 GRADIENT
N GND OUT- Y-- COIL
N

PE
PE
FAN SUPPLY AND
CONTROL SIGNAL
DOOR DP1 DM2
DOOR
COMMON
+HV OUT+ Z MODE
DOOR FILTER
DOOR
Z
COPLEY Z
AMPLIFIER GRADIENT
EARTH GND COIL
OUT- Z-
NEG

FAN SUPPLY AND

CONTROL SIGNAL
SYSTEM
DM3
FILTER BOX Z. MAGNET MA
FAN SUPPLY
AUX

FAN SUPPLY
28V

DP2

S1 X1 X2 X3 X5 X50
X1 X5 X3
X4 Z1 PE 1917/15
F1 2 18 18 6
L L 28 28 +/-15V
1 4 3 5 5 -15V
N N 2A FILTER FILTER +5V 3 16 16 3
30 30 +15V
2 5 1 4 3
3 2 5-6 8-10 8-10 1-4
PE PE 32 32 F1001
1 +5V
1-4 12-14 12-14 2-5
X2 0V
X3 X6 X4 1.6A SB 7-8
L
N POWER SUPPLY DIA BACKPANEL DIG
PE
GRADIENT INTERFACE TNB DI

GRADIENT AMPLIFIER D.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 624 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Power Supply Gradient Amplifier D (Copley 274)

Intera 1.0T-Power and Intera 1.5T-Power
(PT3000 & PT6000)
LP1
POWER ON

CB1
100A +HV

+HV OUT+ CURRENT

TB1 POS
SENSOR
100A X
1A 1B T1 L1 L1 1 -HV X
L1 COPLEY
GRADIENT
AMPLIFIER
1 20kW SUPPLY COIL
2A 2B T2 L2 L2 2 -HV OUT-
L2 (MASTER)

2 J19
FROM 3A 3B T3 L3 L3 3 J13
L3
MDU 28V
A1---A4 3 SUPPLY
B1---B4 N 4
N
DM1
4 NEG
1---4 PE 5
PE
+HV OUT+ CURRENT
5 SENSOR
Y
CB2 DP1 COPLEY Y
AMPLIFIER GRADIENT
15A S1
X1 X5 X3 X1 X2 X3 X5 X50 -HV COIL
X4 Z1 OUT-
F1 PE 1917/15 6
AUX1/2 AUX1/1 L 28 28 2 18 18
1 4 3 5 5 +/-15V J19
-15V TB1
2A FILTER FILTER +5V 3 16 16 3 POS J13
N 30 30
2 5 1 4 3 +15V 1 100A
3 2 5-6 8-10 8-10 1-4
PE 32 32 F1001 L1 1 28V
1 +5V
1-4 12-14 12-14 2-5 SUPPLY
X2 0V 2 20kW SUPPLY
X3 X6 X4 1.6A SB 7-8 DM2
L2 2 (SLAVE)
L
3 +HV OUT+ CURRENT
N POWER SUPPLY DIA BACKPANEL DIG SENSOR
L3 3 Z
PE
GRADIENT INTERFACE TNB DI 4 COPLEY Z
N 4 AMPLIFIER GRADIENT
5 -HV
OUT-
COIL
NEG
PE 5 J19
J13
J/P9 X J/P6 J2
DP2 28V
AUX2/2 AUX2/1 2 220V 1 2 28V SUPPLY
SYSTEM
1 28VDC 2 1
DM3 FILTER BOX Z. MAGNET MA
J/P8 Y J/P5

2 220V 1 5 28V
1 28VDC 2 3

J/P7 Z J/P4

2 220V 1 7 28V
1 28VDC 2 6

J/P3

1
FAN
2

J/P10 P2 DOOR
F1 CONTACT (CABINET)
T2 1 2
1 8
0.4A 2 1
K-POW D1
2 HV ON
K-DIS
3 L2
1
4 9
10 DELAY
5 10sec. T2

6
2 3 R1
1 10

7 11 L4 15E 14
300W
T4
L3
11
T3 R2
3 15

15E
300W

GRADIENT AMPLIFIER D.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 625 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier (All Interas Copley 274)

PT3000 Block Diagram
20 kW PS +HV -HV System Magnet MA
J5
Master Filter Box
1 MHz
J6

J2 J13 X DANFYSIC Grad. Coil

CB1
Mains J1 X
from
MDU
DP1 DIFX50 Demand J9

J10
DX1
20 kW PS DM1
Slave DIBX52

J5
CB2

J6
J2
J1 J13
DP2 Y DANFYSIC Grad. Coil
Controller Y
DIEX50 Demand J9
& WFG
DX1 Boards
J10
Mains IN
Supply
28 VDC DM2

Door
Contact DIBX58 5 MHz J5

J6

20 S Delay
Circuit J13
DANFYSIC Grad. Coil
Z
Z
F1 DIDX50 J9
Demand

J10

DM3
DIBX57
Heat Exchanger DIDX51
Diagn
AH Diagnostics

Temp. Sensor
DIBX50 DIBX53
BDAS FC Grad. Coil
Temp.

Interface Rack DI
NTDAC F Gradient Amplifier Cabinet

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 626 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier (All Intera Copley 274), continued

PT6000 Block Diagram
20 kW PS +HV -HV System Magnet MA
J1 J5
Master Filter Box
1 MHz
+19 V / -19 V
J6

J2 J13 X DANFYSIC Grad. Coil

CB1 X65
Mains J1 X
from
MDU
DP1 DIFX50 Demand
X52 X55 J9

X58 J10
DX1
20 kW PS DM1
Slave DIBX52
X63
X62
J5
CB2 X64

J6
J2 Controller
& WFG
J1 Boards J13
DP2 Y DANFYSIC Grad. Coil
Y
X51 X54 J9
DIEX50 Demand

DX1
X57 J10
Mains IN
Supply
28 VDC DM2
Clock
Driver
Door X66 X67
Contact DIBX58 5 MHz J5

J6
X68

20 S Delay
Circuit J13
DANFYSIC Grad. Coil
Z
Z
F1 DIDX50
X50 X53
J9
Demand

X56 J10

DM3
DIBX57
X59 X60
Heat Exchanger DIDX51
Diagn
AH Diagnostics
X61
Temp. Sensor
DIBX50 DIBX53
BDAS FC Grad. Coil
Temp.
Interface
Rack DI
NTDAC F Gradient Amplifier Cabinet
To Slave Cabinet
To/From Slave Cabinet

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 627 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier (All Intera Copley 274), continued

Feedback Simplified Block Diagram

Voltage Feedback + Output

Power Module 1

Power Module 2

Demand Gradient
Signal Coil
Current Controller Voltage Controller

Power Module 3

Current
Sensor
Power Module 4

- Output

Note: Power Module 4 can be swapped if it

Current Feedback
is bad, but cannot do maximum power.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 628 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier (All Intera Copley 274), continued

Feedback Detail Block Diagram
HV
HV+ GND Module
Fault

Controller

Power Module 1
Diagn. Int. MUX

Gradient
Coil
I & Pulse Ctrl + HV+
HV
GND Module
+ Feedback Fault
Avg. Voltage
Feedback
Ctrl -
I & Pulse
- Feedback Power Module 2
1 V / 50 V
Monitor Voltage
Voltage Contr.
HV
HV+ GND Module
Fault
Settling Circuit
Demand
from WFG
Diff.
Amp. Power Module 3
LEDs
Enable

Status OK

LV ON
Offset Delay HFEQ TC GAIN BW HV
HV+ GND
No EHC Module
Fault
Signal
Current
Fault Ctrl.
Monitor Curr.
Overload
1 V / 60 A Sens. Current Control
Overtemp Power Module 4 DANFYSIK

Fault Mem.

Current Feedback

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 629 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier (All Intera Copley 274), continued

Power Module Block Diagram
Module Clock 25 KHz
To Controller
Pulse Volt Feedback
Tri-wave
Generator
Feedback
- + -+
To Controller
+ Current Feedback
Enable

+ Current
420
+ Control Error VDC

Bridge
+

Half
M
+ Control + Out
-
EPLD
MOD Output Hall
Driver
Logic Filter Sensors
- Control Error 420
VDC

Bridge
+

Half
- Out
M

- Control
- Comparators
DIFFAMPS

- Current Desaturation
Circuit
To Controller
- Current Feedback
Control +
Error + Analog
NV VFB + MUX
+16 V RAM IFB +

+5 V
SMPS Diag INT
+15 V DP EPLD
uP
- 15 V
Temp. Sensors
Output Current 16 CH RAM I/O Module
Faults
IGBT Failure PS
Voltages
MUX

333 KHz
29 MHz
PLL

1 HMz
Clock

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 630 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifier (All Intera Copley 274), continued

Controller Block Diagram

Average + Current
Avg. Volt Feedback
Feedback +HFFB + Integrating +HV
Follower
From AMUX
Power
Module +
Avg. Volt
Feedback -HFFB + Control +

AMUX

Average + Pulse Feedback To

DIFF Power
Average - Current
AMUX
AMUX VMON Feedback
Module
+ Integrating +HV
EF Follower
Clipper
HQ Clip Detector -1 AMUX

12 DB/OCT AMUX +
+ Control -

AMUX

Voltage Controller Analog Signal Path

Average - Pulse Feedback

6DB/OCT
HF
+ Input EQ
Soft 16 KHz Input Scale Delay Diff
- Input DIFF Start Filter Limiter Offset Adj. + +
-
+
-
+
-
AMUX
AMUX

Curr Mon Curr. Integ. Curr.

Curr. BW
Sense
AMUX DANFYSIK
Output
Current Sensor
Shunt
Current Controller Analog Signal Path From Power Module

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 631 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table

Simplified Diagram
OVERRULE 24V
BORE DIM
BORE LIGHT X1 X5
LIGHT VISOR V_BRAKE
SYSTEM X2 X13 V BRAKE
5 6 5 1 VBRAKE_H CLAMP
FILTER X14 X3 OUTPUT_09 WR_ADDR_REG 11 H BRAKE U_BRAKE
B11 BOX OUTPUT_0A WR_CONTR_REG 12 OUT H CLUTCH BRAKE
RXD B2 23 TXD 2 START UP
FIBER B1
OUTPUT_0B SEL_DATA_3 13 INDICATORS/LIGHTS
24 RXD 3 RESET INTEGRATOR 6 2 VBRAKE_L CLAMP
TXD OUTPUT_0C SEL_DATA_2 14
RS232 SERVO END SWITCH I_BRAKE
Z. OUTPUT_0D SEL_DATA_1 15 SERVO ENABLE
B12 B1 25 GND 7 ADC SELECT
X52A X9 OUTPUT_0E SEL_DATA_0 16 STANDBY
HOST MAINS FILTER 4 OVERRULE 24V
3 3 L1 F1 L2 OUTPUT_04 MOVE EN 6 PAL
220V LOAD 1 220V
CABINET 6.25A 5 5V SENSE
1 1 N -12V SENSE V_BRAKE 13 3
LCA 54 53 VBRAKE2_H CLAMP
BIB N LOAD2 N X1 X12 +12V SENSE
2 2 INPUT_04 STATUS_3 6 DRIVER U U_BRAKE
ADC (7 --- 0) BRAKE
INPUT_05 STATUS_2 7 IN U CLUTCH B2
INPUT_06 STATUS_1 8 I CLUTCH 4
X40 6mm2 LX1 3mm2 X1 U BRAKE 14 VBRAKE2_L CLAMP
INPUT_07 STATUS_0 9 I BRAKE I_BRAKE
X2 SENSE SWITCH PLATE
U-SSUP X5
N 3
U-SSDOWN 1 GND
THERMO SWITCH
220V 1 WATCHDOG SENSE 3 UPENDSWITCH_NC S7
INPUT_13 UP END SWITCH 21 4 UPENDSWITCH_ND UPENDSWITCH
E 2 S6
INPUT_14 DOWN END SWITCH 22 5 DOWNENDSWITCH
DOWNENDSWITCH
2 THERMOSWITCH V2 U2
THERMO SWITCH
E X1 100 oC
X1 X3
1-2-3-4 X2 X13 U-SSUP o
24V 5V 7 SS-UP 4 N 2 W2 120 C
OUTPUT_06 SS_UP 8 LCH
X2 24V THR
-12V WATCHDOG SENSE
220V 1A1 5V OVERRULE 3 UP
OUTPUT_05 WATCHDOC EN 7 SS_UP/
1B1 -12V +12V EN 1 2 1 2 VMOTOR_UP 4 L_UP V1 MOTOR W1
SS_DOWN 220V
1B2 5 +12V CIRCUIT 8 CAPAC_1
U-SSDOWN 5 C1
2B1 6 OUTPUT_00 SS_DOWN 10 WATCHDOG SS-DOWN 4
5V SENSE
2B2 7
24V LCG
LED 6 CAPAC_2
SENSE -12V SENSE 25 +5V 3
8 +5V
1 2 VMOTOR_DOWN 3 L_DOWN LA
+12V SENSE 24V 1 EARTH
N 2A1 VERTICAL ACTUATOR
3B1 FAN FAN
OUTPUT_24V 19 X3 LHX3 LHX4
3B2 9 24V H_BRAKE
3 44 43 2 HBRAKE_H 2 1
POWER STATUS CIRCUIT OUTPUT_GND 20
4B1 10
OUTPUT U_BRAKE
4B2 11 MOTOR
12 X3 X3 COMMON_1 1 BRAKE
+5V
9 F1 1 POWER SUPPLY 7 5 COMMON_2
L 24V + +24V 4 3 HBRAKE_L 3 2
0.BA E HLS24-3.6 COMMON_3 I_BRAKE
1 8 8
5 4 - 24V GND COMMON_4
N LBA COMMON_5
24V
COMMON_6
10 F2 F POWER SUPPLY 5 1 LHX6 TTR LHX6 LHX10 TTR LHX10
L 28V + +28V COMMON_7
H_CLUTCH MSW1 MSW2 3
1.25A E 6 4 15 4 HCLUTCH-H 4 1 2 1 2
2 HLS28-4 COMMON_8 +12 V 1
6 4 - 28V GND COMMON_9 U_CLUTCH COM NC COM NC
N LBC S2 S5 CLUTCH
2
F3 1 POWER SUPPLY 1 3 16 5 HCLUTCH_L 5 4
11
L 12V + LIGHT 12V I_CLUTCH
1A E HLS12-6.8 OUTPUT_00 SPEED 3 2 -12 V
3 2 6
7 4
- LIGHT 12V GND OUTPUT_01 SPEED 2 3 ANALOG X14 X2
X1
MUX ADC SELECT 3 ISERVO 9
N LBB OUTPUT_02 SPEED 1 4 7
ADC AD 4 U TACHO 8
OUTPUT_03 SPEED 0 5 28V 8 LHX4
<0---7) CONVERTOR
4 3 HMOTOR_H 3
POWER SUPPLY LB 2 VSERVO 7 5 LCCX4 6 6
4 H
6 LCCX8 7 HMOTOR_L 7
RESET INTEGRATOR 6 SERVO ES 12 MOTOR
SERVO END SWITCH
13 9 9
X1 X12 8 SERVO EN 6
SREVO ENABLE
INPUT_11 SERVO OK 19 10 SERVO OK 14
13 11 1 LCCX6
STANDBY 28V 28V
1-5 GND 3-7 EN LCCX1
2
10 +12V DC
X1 -12V DC
EACH INPUT 11
11
AND OUTPUT
HAS LED
X1 X4 12 10 6.3A
INPUT
6 24V 6
24V
COMMON_1 24V 1
24V SERVO AMPLIFIER LCC3 TACHO
COMMON_2 LHX2 LHX4 CONNECTOR
MANUAL X2
1 MANUAL SWITCH 1 COMMON_3 9 TACHO 9 TACHO 5 1 1
7 GND 7 1 GND 1 6 2 2 TACHO

4 MANUAL INDICATOR 4 MANUAL OVERRULE

OVERRULE
UP SWITCH
SI
10 MAN_OVER_CM 10 MAN_OVER_CM COM NO
PICU REAR MC2 11 MAN_OVER_ND 11 MAN_OVER_ND
S5
LHX10 LHX10
MSWI
4 NO NC 3
E2 PROM
INPUT+0F TTR SENSE 17 7 TTR SENSE 7
X1 X3 S2
LHX6 LHX6
24 24 MSW2
24V X1 4 NO NC 3
S2 X12 LHX8
LVI LVI SWITCH INPUT_09
3 3 11 INPUT_00 HOR_ENC_A 2 3 HOR_ENC_A 3 4
S5 HOR_ENC_B 4 ENCODER
INPUT_01 HOR_ENC_B 3 4 3
LBDOWN 4 4 14 INPUT_0C
LBDOWN SWITCH
S4 14 24V 14 2
+24V
H3 LBUP INPUT_0B 2 GND 2 1
5 LBUP SWITCH 5 13
S3
LHX7
TTS 9 TTS SWITCH 9 12 INPUT_0A INPUT_0E TTOP PRK SWITCH 16 5 TTOP END (REFERENCE SWITCH) 5 TTOP PARK 2
H2 OUT LED 1 S3
S1 TABLE TOP
+V REFERENCE SWITCH
MANUAL MANUAL SWITCH 17 18 INPUT_10
17 0V 3
1-2 GND 1-2 LHX9
INPUT_0D TTOP END SWITCH 15 6 TTOP PARK 6 TTOP END 2
8 TTS INDICATOR 8 OUT LED 1 S4
INDICATORS 8 TABLE TOP
NC +V
7 MANUAL INDICATOR 7 PARK SWITCH
INDICATORS 15 +5V 15
+5V +5V 0V 3
X3
A1 25 +5V 25
+5V OPTO SWITCHES
TUMBLE A2 10 TUMBLEENCA 10 4 TUMBLE CUP INPUT_02 X1
ENCODER INPUT_12 20 EMER_SENSE 21 22
ENCODER A3 11 TUMBLEENCB 11 5 TUMBLE CDN INPUT_03 EMER SENSE 12
CONTROL
2 GND
TUMBLE SWITCH B2 12 TUMBLE SWITCH 12 10 INPUT_08
B1
B3
PLC LCC2
LIGHT 12V

X4 M1L
+12V 1
U X11 1
LIGHT 12V
3 LIGHT - ACT LCCX5 2 BLIGHT 2 LIGHT BORE RIGHT

5 LCCX3 M2L
24V 24V 3 +12V 1
6 LCCX2 4 BLIGHT 2 LIGHT BORE LEFT
BORE LIGHT 24V GND
BORE DIM 5
LCCX1
4 GND LIGHT 12V GND
X8
3
+5V
18 LVI - ACT LCCX7 4 LIGHT VISOR
U
9

LIGHT VISOR 24V

X1
FINGER PROTECTION
23 LIGHT 12V
LIGHT 12V MVPX1 S1 S2 S3
17 2 SWITCHPLATE 1
SENSE SWITCHPLATE
1 1 GND 2

EMERGENCY
STOP X4
H1 15 EMERGENCY STOP 15
2
3 16 16 10 EMER_L A2 A1
11 EMER_HOLD_H 14 13
6 EMERGENCY INDICATOR 6 24V
INDICATORS 9 EMER_H

PICU FRONT MC1 PLC EXTENSION LCC1

24V

CONTROL UNIT PATIENT SUPPORT LC

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 632 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

PLC Jumper Settings

Battery X2

+ F.G - 1 3 5 7 COM COM COM

B
COM
C
COM
D
COM
E
COM COM
24 VDC COM (+ / -) 8 9 A F
CN7 . 0 2 4 6
Run
Min. Max.

Down End
Watchdog

SS_Down

WR Contr
WR Addr
Speed 3

Speed 2

Speed 1

Speed 0

SS_Up
Enable

Enable

Data 3

Data 2

Data 1

Data 0

Switch
Prog

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare
Servo

MOD
Reg

Reg

Sel

Sel

Sel

Sel
V0 X2

Y
Err

Tr. PNP
Output
X3
Run Min. Max. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 4 5 6 7

Alarm Remote
9 Prog.
V1

15x
Min. Max.

1
V2
5 7
SW2

(12 – 24 VDC)
2 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 4 5 6 7
CN6 Min. Max.

X
X1

LB Down
Input

Status 3

Status 2

Status 1

Status 0

OutEnd
ENC_A

ENC_B

Tumble

Tumble

Tumble

Manual

UpEnd
1

Switch

Switch

Switch

Switch

Switch

Switch

Switch

Switch

Switch

Emerg
Switch

Switch
LB Up

InEnd

Servo
HOR

HOR

CDN

Park
TTS
Cup
6 V3

LVI

OK
3

0 2 4 6 8 A C E 0 2 4 6
COM (+ / -) COM (+ / -) COM (+ / -)
1 3 5 7 9 B D F 1 3 5 7

00 02 04 06 08 0A 0C 0E 10 12 14 16

X1

C1 01 03 05 07 C2 09 0B 0D 0F C3 11 13 15 17

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 633 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table

Principle Diagram Hydraulic

22 24 25

23

1
B

26

F
21 20

18 19

27 27
28

10 A B
9 A B 9 A B

P T
4
X

P T P T

7 29
X

8
83 +2 BAR
6 1
11
2 M 5

12

X 3
1

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 634 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Signal Block Diagram

E 1 E n c o d e r
M D
P e n e tr a tio n T o T R F In te rfa c e
E n c o d e r L o g ic X 2 4
P a n e l
C 2 1 C 2 2 C 2 0 C 1 9
X 1 X 1
O P T O
O P T O
F ib e r o p tic
S y s te m C lo c k E n a b le d
R S 2 3 2 A T
V A X T X A 6 C P U
X 1
2 0 A c tiv ity S ig n a l
1 9 to T R F IN T
E P R O M
C lo c k
R e s e t
P R O M
S 1
R e s e t
P S C o n tro l S R A M X 1 2
P a tie n t
S a fe ty S w itc h
F ro n t P a n e l
2 0
S w itc h e s
X 1 X 1
T r o lle y
1 9
X 1 0 X 2
O ffs e t
R 8 5
X 1 E n d L im it 9 X
9 T a b le
H 6 T a b le V e r t ic a l 7 V e r tic a l
L E D
S w itc h S p e e d In d ic a to r 8 P o s it io n
S e lf
C o n tro l
T e s t H 7 7
6
R 8 4 5
S p e e d G a in
M o to r 3
a n d R e la y D r iv e 2 H y d r a u lic R e s e v o ir
P o s it io n 2 2 0 V
1 H y d r a u lic L in e s
P S H y d ro R e tu rn
X 1 0
Z 1 -5 .3
V a lv e D r iv e s 7 2 2 0 V
M o to r
9
X 1 X 1 0 X 6
H 1
X 2 7
H 2 7
9
A V E R T
O P T O X 8 V e r t ic a l V a lv e
C o u p le r
A D G
H O R Z
B H o r iz o n ta l V a lv e
C
B y p a s s
D M a n u a l V a lv e
E
B E H F L ig h t V is o r
G L ig h t S o u r c e L e ft
H L ig h t S o u r c e R ig h t

X 7
C F I I

P S P o w e r

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 635 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Power Block Diagram
V 1
M D 1 M a n u a l
M D P B a c k P a n e l M D P 3 X 1 X 8 X 7 2 V a lv e
1 7 1 2 8
2 9 V 2
M a in T D A C P e n e tr a tio n M D P 1 M D P 2 A 9 4 1 1 V e rt
D is tr ib u tio n Z 9 5 2 2 V a lv e
+ 2 4 V D C P a n e l P P P A 1 1 7 3
U n it X 1 2 X 1 4 + 1 2 V D C X 3
1 3 .8
X 8 S S S C 1 1 8 4 V 3
-1 2 V D C X 6 X 8
3 H o r iz
+ 5 V D C X 5 6 X 3 X 9 C H P 4 V a lv e
X 9
1 1 F 1 5 V o y o
4 4 F 2 1 2 V n d w
X 2 2 ,X 2 3
3 3 F 3 2 4 V t r e
2 L ig h tv is o r
2 2 F 4 -1 2 V r o r M D A X 1
X 7 X 7 5 H a lo g e n 5 X
6 6 F 4 1 3 .8 V o 9 ,1 0
8 4 ,5 ,6 X 2 0
7 7 l X 2 1 5 , 7 , 8 2 L ig h tb o r e R ig h t
1 9 1 0 7 5 H a lo g e n 1 X
6 1 1 ,2 ,3 X 2 1
2 L ig h tb o r e L e ft
X 1 0 2 8 1 2
5 H a lo g e n 1 X

X 6 7 9 X 2 7 5 1

X 7 7 9

M P

2 2 0 V A C
X 1 1 X 6 1 X 2 X 3 M o to r

X 4 1 3

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 636 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Mains Distribution - Unit H (All Interas)

Intera 0.5T-Standard, Intera 1.0T-Omni, and
Intera 1.5T-Omni

F1
S 63A 40A
S
N RAIL
L1
X0 1
X1
2 L1
L2 3 4 L2 L1 RAIL
Hospital Facility L3 5 6 L3
N
Power N
L2 RAIL
PE PE

F2 L3 RAIL
25A

X2
1 2 L1
X
3 4 L2
5 6 L3
N F1
PE

F3
25A

X3 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 -- -- -- -- F10
1 2 L1
3 4 L2
5 6 L3
N
PE
X0 X1 -- -- -- TERMINALS -- -- -- X12

F4 25A
PE RAIL
X4
1 2 L1
3 4 L2
5 6 L3
CABLE ANCHORING RAIL
N
PE

F5 16A

1 2
3 4
X5 FRONT VIEW
5 6 L2
N
PE

F6 16A
X6
SWITCH
L3 FUSE USED FOR FUSE (A) TERMINAL
N
PE
n/a
S SYSTEM 63
F7 16A
X7
L1 F1 GRADUEBT ANOKUFUER STABDARD/OMNI 40 X1

N
PE F2 (SPACE) 25 X2

F3 DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM 25 X3

F8 16A
X8
L2 F4 MAGNET POWER SUPPLY / RAMP TOOL 25 X4

N
PE F5 CONSOLE 16 X5

F6 FILTER BOX (PATIENT TABLE) 16 X6

F9 16A
X9
L3 F7 SPARE 16 X7
N
PE F8 SPARE 16 X8

F9 SPARE 16 X9
F10 32A
X10
L1 F10 RF AMPL. S23/S24 32 X10
N
PE

PRINCIPLE DIAGRAM SERVICE KEY.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 637 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Mains Distribution (Unit H & Ext. HA - All Intera)

Intera 1.0T-Power and Intera 1.5T-Power/
Master

F1 F1
32A S 63A 40A
S
X0 X1 N RAIL
L1 L1
X0 1
X1
1 2 2 L1
L1
4 L2 L2 3 4
Hospital L2
3
6 5 6
L2 L1 RAIL
5 L3 L3 L3
Facility L3
N N N
N L2 RAIL
Power PE
PE PE PE

F2 L3 RAIL
25A

X2
1 2 L1
F2 X
3 4 L2
100A
5 6 L3
X2 N F1
1 2 L1
PE
3 4 L2
5 6 L3 GRADIENT F3
25A
N AMPLIFIER
PE
X3 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 -- -- -- -- F10
1 2 L1
3 4 L2
5 6 L3
N
PE
X0 X1 -- -- -- TERMINALS -- -- -- X12

X2 F4 25A
L1
PE RAIL
L2 GRADIENT X4
AMPLIFIER 1 2 L1
L3
MASTER 3 4 L2
N
5 6
PE DUAL MODE L3
CABLE ANCHORING RAIL
N
PE
PRINCIPLE DIAGRAM
MAINS DISTRIBUTION EXTENDED HA F5 16A

1 2
3 4
X5 FRONT VIEW MDU H.
5 6 L2
1 2 N
PE
F2
100A
F1 F6 16A
32A X6
SWITCH
L3 FUSE USED FOR FUSE (A) TERMINAL
N
PE

S SYSTEM 63 n/a
F7 16A
X7
L1 F1 SPARE 40 X1
X0 X1 X2 X2
N
PE F2 (SPACE) 25 X2
PE RAIL

F3 DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM 25 X3

F8 16A
X8
L2 F4 MAGNET POWER SUPPLY / RAMP TOOL 25 X4
CABLE ANCHORING RAIL
N
PE F5 CONSOLE 16 X5

F6 FILTER BOX (PATIENT TABLE) 16 X6

F9 16A
X9
L3 F7 SPARE 16 X7
FRONT VIEW MDU EXTENDED HA N
PE F8 SPARE 16 X8

F9 SPARE 16 X9
F10 32A
X10
L1 F10 RF AMPL. S23/S24 32 X10
N
PE
PRINCIPLE DIAGRAM SERVICE KEY MDU H.
MAINS DISTRIBUTION UNIT H.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 638 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Power Conditioner
PDU-MRPT Wiring
Load Line
Bottom Top 43 26
MOV1

52
H H
FL1 Load Line
27
H H 29

13
MOV2

53
H H Load Line

22
FL2 28
H H 64 MOV3

H H

14
23
FL3
H H
L1 1
T1
CB1 150 Amp
27 3-Pole Breaker
L2 2 S
T Top
Bottom

V
L3 3 X X
40

22
22

15
24
0
V
V
Y Y
41

-1

12
7
12

7
SE
Ph

B
as
Z

e
Z

0
e
42

as
V
A

Ph
V
I- 1

V
0

0
A

V
PR

48 04
45 0 V
e

Ph
as

V
0V
6

as
Ph

e
11 V

B
1
I-2

Phase C
PR

0 127 V TB3

V
1
45 0 V

11
6

21 N
48 4 V

V
50

V
0 220 V
30 G

V
456 V

24
504 V
480 V
111 V
0V

0V

-2
C
Cyro-cooler

SE
CB2 15 Amp Output
Phase C 3-Pole Breaker TB4

0
V
39 31 X X
34 L1
Y Y
32 35 L2
Grounding Electrode Z Z L3
33 36
TB5 Bottom Top

55 G
Customer-supplied
N.O. Switch
44

S/T TB6
Line Load
37 38 1
TH1
46 2
F1 48

Line Load
47

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 639 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Logic and Block Diagrams 5197921-200

Power Conditioner, continued

PDU-MRPT Wiring (New Style)
TB4
WR47
Cryo L3
Cooler WR46
Filter L2
Assembly WR37
N

L1
WR45

1 Amp
WR18 F5 TB3
Fuse WR19 601 C
260 V Relay
CB1 J2
20 Amp 602 N Output
15 Amps
1 Amp Max.
F6 WR55 WR12 603 G
J3
Fuse 101 A
WR56 WR11 Cryo Cooler
20 Amp WR8 102 B Compressor Output
WR57 WR10 103 C Unswitched
F7
220 V / 120 3
Fuse 20 Amp 104 N 15 Amps
5-15R TB5
F8 Duplex WR9 R 105

WR20
G
120 J4
Fuse Auxiliary WR48 301 B
Filter 220 Auxiliary Output
CB2 120 V
Assembly J5 302 N
10 Amp 5 Amps FEC1 5 Amps
F9 WR58 N WR39 303 G
J7 J6

WR58
Fuse 220 WR49 201 B Auxiliary System
WR13
WR15
WR14

Output
202 N 220 V 1
203 G 30 Amps

WR17

40 Amp
F4 WR7

WR32

WR29
Fuse
PDU-MR:

WR36
lA

440 / 460 / 480 / 500

C

TB6
oi

oi
l

Volts Delta
C
B

L3 WR35
WR16

Gyroscan

WR31
Filter L2 WR34
PDU-MR-208: Assembly
Coil C

198 / 208 / 218 N WR28

WR21

Volts Delta
L1 WR33

PDU-MR-240:
230 / 240 / 250 50 Amp
Volts Delta WR2 F1 WR6 TB2
Fuse WR6 X1 R
WR5
A
C

50 Amp
oi

l
oi

X2 S Gyroscan Mains Distribution Unit

lB

WR3 F2 WR5
WR4 380 V / 220
WR24
Fuse WR4 X3 T 40 Amps (Continuous)
L1 300 A, 1 Sec., 1% Max.
Coil C

TB1
48 00

WR27 WR27 N
5

N
46 0
44 0

R H1 50 Amp
0

J1
44 0

G G
0

S H2 WR25 F3
46

WR1
48 0
0
50

T H3 Fuse
L2
G
500

G
480
460
440

L3
WR23
lA
oi
C
l A
oi
C

WR22 WR26

Case Ground

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 640 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Preventive Maintenance 5197921-200

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
For specific PM information, check the MRI Support
Central Website
General Requirements (NT Intera)
Three Months
Twelve Months
Eighteen Months
Patient Handling
NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table
Clean Patient Support Table
Check Finger Protection Switch Plate
Check Stop Function
Check Manual Decoupling Device
Check Manual Decoupling Switch
Check Oil Level And Leakage
Check All Moving Cables

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 641 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Preventive Maintenance 5197921-200

Three Months
The following procedures should be completed every Chiller:
three months:
• HX300 Chiller: Clean Strainer
Software:
Heat Exchanger (PT3000 & PT6000):
• Gyrotool Daily Cleanup (R7.x-R9.x)
• Clean the Strainers
• Complete System Calibration
• Complete Software Backups
Filters:
• Clean Filters: RF, Gradient, Host, BDAS
Coils:
• Check Coils (pins/connectors)
NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table:
• Clean Patient Support Table
• Check Finger Protection Switch Plate
• Check Stop Function
• Check Manual Decoupling Device
• Check Manual Decoupling Switch

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 642 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Preventive Maintenance 5197921-200

Twelve Months
The following procedures should be completed every
twelve months:
NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table:
• Check Oil Level And Leakage
• Check All Moving Cables

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 643 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Preventive Maintenance 5197921-200

Eighteen Months
The following procedures should be completed every
eighteen months:
Shield Cooler (SC R8):
• Check Compressor Absorber
• Check Shield Cooler Displacer Assembly
• Check Shield Cooler Valve Disk, Stem, and
Slack Piston Stem
• Check Equalization Capillary

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 644 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Preventive Maintenance 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table

Clean Patient Support Table Check Stop Function
1. Remove the table top from the patient support table. 1. Start any scan using a system phantom.
2. Use a mild detergent or spray cleaner to clean: 2. While the system is scanning, press the [STOP]
button on the operator console. The system should
• table top pad
stop scanning.
• underside of the table top
3. Restore the system to normal operating conditions.
• patient support top
Check Manual Decoupling Device
• exterior panels Note Before beginning this procedure, be sure the
3. Install the table top on the patient support. patient support is in good working condition.
Check Finger Protection Switch Plate 1. Operate the red handle located on the magnet side
of the patient support table.
Note Before beginning this procedure, be sure the
patient support is in good working condition. 2. Manually move the tabletop horizontally. The
tabletop should move with no resistance.
1. While moving the table into the bore, activate the
finger protection plate on the left, middle, and right. 3. Reset the red handle.
The table and motor should come to a complete
stop.
2. While moving the table downward, activate the finger
protection plate on the left middle, and right. The
table and motor should come to a complete stop.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 645 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Preventive Maintenance 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Check Manual Decoupling Switch Check Oil Level And Leakage
Note Before beginning this procedure, be sure the Note Before beginning this procedure, be sure the
patient support is in good working condition. patient support is in good working condition.
1. Operate the manual decoupling switch on the control 1. Move the patient support to its highest vertical
panel. position.
2. Manually move the tabletop horizontally. The 2. Remove patient support covers.
tabletop should move with no resistance.
3. Check the Oil Sight Glass. If oil cannot be seen,
3. De-activate the manual decoupling switch on the add oil to reservoir.
control panel and restore patient support to normal
4. Check the floor under the patient support for oil.
operating conditions.
5. Check all hydraulic lines for leaks and damage.

DANGER If any work is required on the patient

support, install the red transport safety
bracket on the gearwheels.

6. Restore patient support to normal operating

conditions.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 646 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Preventive Maintenance 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Check All Moving Cables
Note Before beginning this procedure, be sure the
patient support is in good working condition.
1. Move the patient support to its highest vertical
position.
2. Remove patient support covers.
3. While moving the table horizontally and vertically,
check all moving cables for damage and binding.

DANGER If any work is required on the patient

support, install the red transport safety
bracket on the gearwheels.

4. Restore patient support to normal operating

conditions.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 647 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

SOFTWARE AND DIAGNOSTICS

General Information Backup and Restore
Philips Intera Site Backup (R7.x-R9.x)
General Information
Philips Intera Site Restore (R7.x-R9.x)
Philips Intera Software Logins (R7.x-R9.x)
Philips Intera Config Backup (R10.x-R11.x)
How to Gyroscan (R7.x-R9.x)
Philips Intera Config Restore (R10.x-R11.x)
How to Gyrorestart (R7.x-R9.x)
Philips Intera Total Backup (R7.x-R9.x)
How to Gyrotool (R7.x-R9.x)
Philips Intera Total Restore (R7.x-R9.x)
How to Gyrotest (R7.x-R9.x)
Backup and Restore (R10.x-R11.x)
Intera Software Logins (R10.x-R11.x)
Backup and Restore ASW Configuration (R10.x-R11.x)
Login as TSW (R7.x-R9.x)
Login as TSW (R10.x-R11.x) Monthly Software Cleanup (All Intera R7.x-9.x)
User Interface (R7.x-R9.x) Gyroscan
Scan Surface Coil for Image Quality (R7.x-R9.x) Gyrotool
Set the Host Clock (R7.x-R9.x) Gyrotest
Set the Host Clock (R10.x-R11.x) System
Retrieve Hardcopy Test Images (R7.x-R9.x) Gyrotool
DICOM (R7.x-R9.x) Shutdown
Initdor and Initialize new MOD (R7.x-R9.x) Film Queue Cleanup
System Tuning Tools Menu Structure Delete Temporary Files
VMS Toolbox (R7.x-R9.x) Delete Queue Files
VMS Toolbox (R10.x-R11.x) Analyze/Repair Disk
Delete Annie Files

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 648 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Gyroscan R7.5.1 Gyroscan R8.1.1

Hosts: AS800 & DMCC 21164 Hosts: AS800, DMCC 21164 & DS10
Reconstructor: XP1000 Reconstructor: XP1000, AP550 & W6000
Software Upgrade - Gyroscan R7.5.1 Software Installation - Gyroscan R8.1.1
Important Retrieve MAC Address - Cisco 1548M
OC Preparation Configure Ethernet Switch on Host - Cisco 1548M
Install MRVMS Set Network Switch to Factory Defaults - Cisco 1548M
Install MRSybase Virtual LAN Configuration - Cisco 1548M
Install TSW Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital - Gyroscan
Install ASW R8.1.1
Configure Network Settings Configure Local Host
OC Customization Configure Domain Name
Protocol Filtering Configure Reconstructor
Configure Reconstructor on Host
Configure Ethernet Switch - Cisco 1548M
Configure Print Server
Configure Remote Node & TCP/IP Gateway
Configure TCP/IP Gateway
Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R8.1.1
Introduction
Configure Gyroscan DICOM Import/Export
Configure Gyroscan DICOM RIS
Configure RIS DICOM with Easylink Station
Configure DICOM HC-Printer on Host
Delete a DICOM Node

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 649 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Gyroscan R9.5.2 Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System

Hosts: AS800, DEC DS10 & DMCC 21164 Reset Ethernet Switch to Factory Defaults
Reconstructors: AP550, W6000 & XP1000 Vlan and Port Configuration
Default Setup - Reconstructor Type, Name and IP Address
Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2 on Host
Upgrade Preparation (R8.x to R9.5-2) Default Setup - Printer Server on Host
Software Installation for Host Platforms - Overview Gyrotool Configuration
DEC DS10 Software Installation Restore Site-specific Settings (From Previous Release)
DMCC 21164 Software Installation Setup TSW
AS800 Software Installation Update Patient Support PLC Firmware
Install MRVMS Protocol Filtering
Install MRSybase Adapt Intera to Connect to the Hospital LAN -
Install TSW Gyroscan R9.5-2 System
Install ASW Adapt Network Settings Following SW Installation
Operating System Installation/Reinstallation - Adapt Network Settings After Upgrade Installation
Gyroscan R9.5-2 Reconstructors Rebuild MR Nodes Database
Introduction Check the IQ and Network Applications
Upgrade W6000/AP550 from R8 to R9 Software Extensions/Modifications - Gyroscan
W6000/AP550 Initial Installation R9.5-2 System
Upgrade XP1000 from R8 to R9 Add New Coils
XP1000 Initial Installation Add Clinical Packages on a Running System
Software Changes (For HW Upgrade)
Remote DECnet EasyVision Nodes - Gyroscan R9.5-
2 System
Add a Remote DECnet EasyVision Node

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 650 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Gyroscan R9.5.2, continued Intera MR R10.6.2

Hosts: AS800, DEC DS10 & DMCC 21164 Hosts: XW8000 & W8000
Reconstructors: AP550, W6000 & XP1000 Reconstructors: XW6000 & W6000
Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R9.5-2 Software Installation - Intera MR R10.6.2
System Check Software Levels
Introduction Firmware Installation & PMS BIOS Settings
Configure Intera DICOM Import/Export Reconstructor (XW6000 or W6000) Software Installation
Configure Intera DICOM RIS Host (XW8000 or W8000) Software Installation
Configure RIS DICOM with Easylink Station Keyboard Layout/Language Configuration
Configure DICOM HC-Printer on Host Set Host Date/Time
Delete a DICOM Node Virus Scanner Setup
Gyrotool User Account - R9.5-2 Defrag Host C-partition
Overview Configure ASW - Intera MR R10.6.2
Daily Tool Configuration Options
Backup Parameters to MO Disk Start Configuration Application
Restore Single File from Saveset Set System Reference Number
Restore Site-specific Parameters Set System Type
Set System Parameters
Configure Network - Intera MR R10.6.2
Introduction
Hospital Connection Settings
Configure DICOM Connectivity - Intera MR R10.6.2
Introduction
DICOM Basic Configuration
DICOM Network Nodes

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 651 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Intera MR R10.6.2, continued Cooling System

Hosts: XW8000 & W8000 Neslab Chiller HX-300
Reconstructors: XW6000 & W6000 Display Software Version
MR User Management - Intera MR R10.6.2 Neslab Chiller HX-750
Introduction Display Software Version
Language Setup Patient Positioning
Language Setup
Unlock MR User
MT (Electrical) Patient Table
Thumble Wheel Test
System Backup/Restore - Intera MR R10.6.2
TPAT Tools
Check Available Disk Space
Backup/Restore System Disk
Finalize Restore System Disk
Remote Service - Intera MR R10.6.2
Enable Remote User
Setup Incoming Connection
Data Acquisition
RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42)
Amplifier Tools (KWA)
TSW Tests
Amplifier Communication
RF Amplifier (53-S23D-64, -42)
Amplifier Tools (KWA)

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 652 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information
Select one of the following topics: • Retrieve Hardcopy Test Images (R7.x-R9.x)
• Philips Intera Software Logins (R7.x-R9.x) • DICOM (R7.x-R9.x)
• How to Gyroscan (R7.x-R9.x) • Initdor and Initialize new MOD (R7.x-R9.x)
• How to Gyrorestart (R7.x-R9.x) • System Tuning Tools Menu Structure
• How to Gyrotool (R7.x-R9.x) • VMS Toolbox (R7.x-R9.x)
• How to Gyrotest (R7.x-R9.x) • VMS Toolbox (R10.x-R11.x)
• Intera Software Logins (R10.x-R11.x)
• Login as TSW (R7.x-R9.x)
• Login as TSW (R10.x-R11.x)
• User Interface (R7.x-R9.x)
• Scan Surface Coil for Image Quality (R7.x-R9.x)
• Set the Host Clock (R7.x-R9.x)
• Set the Host Clock (R10.x-R11.x)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 653 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

Philips Intera Software Logins (R7.x-R9.x) System access is then determined by the Username
used to log into the system.
Following a system automatic boot or a "b" issued at the
monitor prompt, the system boots the Open VMS,
POSIX, X windows, then presents the Login screen.

Username Password Description Additional Instructions

System "manager" Root access & system tools Select 1 for VMS file access. Type Help for commands.
TSW n/a Test SW access. Review test TBDAS test transmit/receive chain. LOGF inspects result
logs.
Settime n/a Set system clock After answering menu questions/prompts, answer "Yes" at
the end of the procedure.
Gyrotool n/a System maintenance menus n/a
Initdor n/a Initialize optical disk n/a
Gyrorestart n/a Restart all background process. Use after TSW or Gyrotool configuration.
Shutdown n/a Shut down the system Answer "Yes" to the first question, select "Yes" or "No" to
auto-reboot.
Gyrotest gyrotest VMS access limited privilege "gyrotest" is typically used as the password, but not
always. The password is usually written in the location
software installation manual.
Gyroscan n/a Application startup n/a

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 654 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

Philips Intera Software Logins (R7.x-R9.x),
continued

Username Password Description Additional Instructions

Gyroscan/Scan "service" Enter service level applications n/a

Control/Scan software
Utilities/Service
Gyroscan/Scan "system" Enter system level calibration Software prompts are available for most procedures.
Control/Scan procedures
Utilities/Service/
System
>>> n/a IPL low level console mode. >>>help
To enter, type: ctrl P or >>>show config
shutdown. >>>test
>>>t (device) to test subsystems
ASIC, MEM, SCICS, ISDN, SCC, etc.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 655 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

How to Gyroscan (R7.x-R9.x) 3. To restore the Applications window:
"Gyroscan" is the username used to start applications a. Wait for the system to complete the boot process.
software for scanning.
b. Double-click the Gyroview icon to restore the
1. Logon as Gyroscan. applications window.
Applications start and various screens display. At the 4. To open Command Terminal with applications open:
top of the screen, a progress bar displays booting
a. Press <ALT>+<F9> twice to minimize windows to
status in blue. If a problem occurs during booting, the
view the actual command window.
bar will turn red and a splash screen may appear
and display the problem occurrence. b. Select terminal menu Test-Terminal and Test-
2. To view system boot progress in actual system Terminal.
loading:
a. Start Gyroscan.
b. After the initial window opens, press
<ALT>+<F9> twice to minimize some windows in
order to view the actual command window.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 656 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

How to Gyrorestart (R7.x-R9.x) Gyrorestart must be run when:
The Gyrorestart user account allows application • application processes have been lost,
processes to be restarted. Processes include:
• after TSW is used to re-download application to
• logging, subsystems, and
• viewing, and • Daily Cleanup (R7.x-R9.x) has run and all processes
• hardware loading of software. are stopped.
Note Gyrorestart also automatically runs upon initial
Hardware loading involves:
reboot of the system in background.
• Array Processor,
• Data Acquisition,
• System,
• Audio, and
• Patient Communication.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 657 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

How to Gyrorestart (R7.x-R9.x), continued Procedure
Gyrorestart starts the following application software 1. Logon as Gyrorestart.
functions/processes: 2. When prompted to restart the logging facility, select
Yes. All facilities are restarted.
Function Process Description
Note After the processes are started, there may be a 4
Logging Logging Log Files opened to 10 minute delay while downloads proceed to
Acquisition Scanner Scanner communication with the various devices.
BDAS, TFEI, CPU, and Patient
Support
Recon Recon Computer
BatchQ Enables Scanqueue.idx,
Scanqueue_data.idx,
Exam.idx
Planview Planview Enables MIP, MPR, and FSR
reconstructions
Archive Gcomserver Enables network option
Datalink
SPT SPT Enables PIQT

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 658 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

How to Gyrotool (R7.x-R9.x) • Logging Applications: This option allows you to
view and maintain log files.
The Gyrotool user account allows for:
• Backup Directories and Files: Site (saveinfo)
• system configuration,
backup.
• cleanup, and
• DOR (MOD) Database Maintenance: n/a
• administration of the coils, DICOM and the camera.
• Acquisition Simulator: Option for R&D only
Procedure
• Restore Hardcopy Test Images: Hardcopy test
1. Logon as Gyrotool. images stored on the hard disk are restored in the
2. To display the Main menu screen, press <ENTER>. ".hardcopy" directory. They must be imported through
application administration software. Images include
The Gyrotool Main menu provides the following options: SMPTE, and can be hard copied and archived.
• Exiting from Gyroscan • List Volume Database: Patient, DOR archive list.
• Daily Cleanup (R7.x-R9.x): Customer should run this
daily to ensure minimum OS cleanup, file
optimization, and log file pruning.
• Modify System Configuration: This option allows
you to configure language, date format, system and
service passwords, software/option keys, coil
administration, console configuration, printer and
camera configuration, and scanner hardware
configuration.
• Database Management: Option locked out.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 659 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

How to Gyrotest (R7.x-R9.x)
Gyrotest is a user account optimized for remote use.
Facility Command
The Gyrotest user account allows you to start:
Scan Acquisition startacq
• applications (text menu), Administration startadm
• SPT, PPAdmin startspp
• Gyrotool, or SPT startspt
• TSW Gyrotool tool

Important! Gyrotest also allows you to archive patients if TSW TSW

the software needs to be reloaded and appli-
cations cannot be started normally.
Procedure
1. Logon as Gyrotest.
2. At the prompt ($), enter the command appropriate to
the facility you want to use. See the following table.
3. When prompted to enter the name of the patch,
press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 660 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

Intera Software Logins (R10.x-R11.x)
Note <CTRL>+<ALT>+<DEL> will recall the login
screen.

Username Password Description Additional Instructions

Administrator n/a System Administration Typically used only to install or modify site.
Intera "Philips" Application login Standard method for technician to login and scan system.
MRService "Manager" or Service login Password can changed. Default is manager
"Manager1"
MRService "Manager" or TSW Test Software See below.
"Manager1"
Remote "Manager" or Remote login n/a
"Manager1"
Shutdown n/a Shutdown or Reboot <CTRL>+<ALT>+<DEL>, Shutdown, or Shutdown/Restart.

For R11.x systems only: to access the scan control

functions, perform the following actions.
• Select System > Scan Definition Context >
Scan List. The scan control button appears on
the UI screen

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 661 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

Intera Software Logins (R10.x-R11.x), View Previous Log Files
continued Complete the following procedure to view past daily log
Logging files.
Complete the following procedure to view the current 1. Open Windows Explorer.
daily log file. See View Previous Log Files in the
2. Navigate to G(site):log drive.
following column.
Note The current daily log file is "logcurrent.log."
1. Logon as MRService.
Previous files are saved in the following
Note Use Manager or Manager1 as a password. format: logyyymmdd0000.log.
2. Press the Windows key. Login as TSW (R7.x-R9.x)
3. From the Start Menu, select MR System 1. At the Username screen, type: TSW and press
Management > Diagnostics > Logging <ENTER>. twice.
Application UI > Changing Logging Levels.
Login as TSW (R10.x-R11.x)
4. Select Configuration.
1. At the Login screen, press <CTRL>+<ALT>+DEL>.
5. Select Set Severity Level and change the level to The Username screen appears.
the desired option.
2. Login as MRService using Manager or Manager1
6. Click [PROCEED]. as the password.
7. Select Configuration. 3. On the keyboard, press the <Windows> button.
8. Select New Current Log File. 4. Select MR Applications > Test Software.
9. When prompted to start a new log file, click [OK]. 5. Select the desired subsystem.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 662 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

User Interface (R7.x-R9.x)

Scan Control is used

for many of the
service functions.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 663 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

User Interface (R7.x-R9.x), continued
Function Keys Keyboard Key Function

Keyboard Key Function F16 Proceed

F1 New Examination F17 Start Scan

F2 Select Examination F18 Travel to Scanplane

F3 Administration F19 Autosurvey

F4 Delete Examination F20 Stop Scan

F5 Add Next Scan Mouse Functions

F6 ODR
Mouse Button Function
F7 Network
F8 Annotate Left Activate function selected

F9 Camera Control Right Proceed (accept default)

In Image Area, activate Image Menu
F10 n/a
Middle + Right Zoom Image
F11 Autoview
Middle + Left Pan Image
F12 n/a
F13 Preset Proto Admin
F14 Clear Input
F15 Cancel
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 664 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

Scan Surface Coil for Image Quality (R7.x- 9. Drive the table back out 210 mm. Press the table
R9.x) Manual button.
Note Image quality scans can also be performed using 10. Place the phantom in the holder in the bore from the
the quad body coil. backside of the magnet. Slide it IN until it just
touches the end of the tabletop. The phantom/holder
1. From the Applications menu, select Patient. Select
are now at isocenter.
New Exam.
11. Click [PROCEED]. Select Start Scan.
2. Enter a Name, Registration Number, Date of Birth,
Weight (70 Kg), and Phantom. Click [ENTER]. 12. To complete scanning, click [PROCEED].
3. Verify that the patient just entered is the one 13. Use ROI to check S/N and compare to
selected. Click [PROCEED]. specifications.
4. Click the [SCAN] button. 14. After the scan completes, click [SCAN CONTROL].
5. Select Anatomy > Phantom Studies. Click Select Display Parameters. Click [PROCEED].
[PROCEED]. 15. Select (highlight) the new patient. Click [PROCEED].
6. Select SC (surface coil). Click [PROCEED]. 16. Select (highlight) the series. Click [PROCEED].
7. Select the coil type. 17. Select Preparation Parameters. Click [PROCEED].
Note Select Phantom and Coil placement in the 18. Page down and record the resonance frequency.
Reference Materials section for correct
phantom positioning. 19. Page down to RF Drive Scale. Press <ENTER>.

8. Align the front edge of the tabletop to the light visor 20. Record factor #1 on the data sheet.
and press the Travel to Scanplane button. Drive the 21. Click [CANCEL] three times.
tabletop IN until it stops at isocenter. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 665 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

Set the Host Clock (R7.x-R9.x) Set the Host Clock (R10.x-R11.x)
1. If you are within applications: 1. Logon as MRService.
a. From the Main menu, select System. Select 2. Double-click the Time in the lower right corner of the
Exit. window.
b. Click [PROCEED] to reach the User Login 3. Change the time. Click [APPLY].
screen.
4. Close the window.
The system will check for background processes and
exit applications. Retrieve Hardcopy Test Images (R7.x-R9.x)
1. Logon as Gyrotool.
2. Logon as Settime without using a password. Settime
logs in and displays the current time. 2. Select option 9-Restore Hardcopy Test images into
import directory.
3. When prompted to change the date, month, year,
and time, select Yes. 3. Exit and logout.
4. Change the date, month, year, and/or time as 4. From the User Login screen, logon as Gyroscan
needed. without using a password.
5. When prompted to change the system time, select 5. Select Admin > Administration > Import/Export.
Yes. Settime will log out. 6. Select Patient Service. Click [PROCEED].
6. Logon as Gyrorestart to reboot the system using the 7. At the Main menu toolbar (at top of applications
new time.
window), select Patient > Select Exam > Service.
Images can now be printed or save to MOD.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 666 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

DICOM (R7.x-R9.x) Initdor and Initialize new MOD (R7.x-R9.x)
DICOM Send/Print was an option purchased on the NT. The Initdor user account allows you to wipe previously
Intera has DICOM Send built in. used MOD clean and re initialize them for use in patient
archiving.
To add a DICOM Node
1. Logon as System. Note The following procedure also completely erases
all information from the disk.
2. Select DICOM Management.
1. From the Applications Main Menu, select System >
3. Select DICOM Export Service Class User. Exit. Click [PROCEED]. The system checks for
4. Select Add DICOM SCP/SCU. background processes and exits applications.

5. Enter the new DICOM application name. 2. Logon as Initdor.

6. Enter the appropriate host name. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen to erase either
or both sides. Exit.
7. Enter the appropriate port number.
4. Logon as Gyroscan.
8. When prompted whether the information is correct,
select Yes. 5. Insert the MOD to initialize.
6. From the File menu, select Admin > Optical Disk >
Initialize. Click [PROCEED].
7. Enter the new volume label.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 667 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

System Tuning Tools Menu Structure

Login: TSW
Automatic Automatic Functional Tests
Interactive Not Available
Enter: TBDAS BCP BCP Functional Test Menu
DFEC1 DFEC1 Functional Test Menu
Functional SYNCO1RX SYNCO Receiver 1 Functional Test
Run Diagnostics SYNCO2RX SYNCO Receiver 2 Functional Test
Tools Transceiver Transceiver Functional Test Menu
Fiber Fiber Functional Test Menu
PFEI PFEI Functional Test Menu
PICU_PHYS PICU-Physiology Functional Test
Gradient Gradient Functional Test Menu
RF Amp RF Amplifier Functional Test Menu

Note Note
Access is not typically available for the This applies to r7.x-9.x. To access TSW R10.x-11.x,
Diagnostics or Tools menu. select Start>MR Applicatoins>Test Software. Then
select the subsystems to be tested.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 668 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

VMS Toolbox (R7.x-R9.x) System Commands
When working with VMS, certain terms should be Following is information on some of the more common
understood: VMS commands.
• VMS: Virtual Memory System Command Description
• Open VMS: VMS with the added POSIX (Unix) analyze /disk <desired disk> Tool similar to fsck.
support
analyze /error Check system error log.
• VAX: Virtual Address Extension
copy <filename> Copy filename to the DOR for
To access a VMS command prompt ($): gyro_dor:[000000] storage.

1. Logon as System. diagnose /translate/ Check system error log

since=<date> (000000.syserr) errlog.sys.
2. To access a VMS command prompt ($), exit to DCL.
dismount gyro_dor Dismount the DOR (MOD)
3. To review a complete list of available commands, at edit <filename> VMS editor. Use <CTRL>+<Z>
the prompt, type: Help and press <ENTER>. to exit to save and quit.
init gyro_dor <desired name> Initialize new DOR with a label.
logout Exit VMS Terminal program.
mount/override=id gyro_dor Mount DOR (MOD) for use.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 669 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

VMS Toolbox (R7.x-R9.x), continued UCX - TCP/IP Networking
System Commands, continued Commands can be issued in one of two ways, from the
command prompt, or from the UCX Suite.
Command Description For example, from the command prompt ($):
run <filename> Execute file. 1. Type: ucx ping <TCP/IP address>. Press
show device Devices loaded in system and <ENTER>.
# of errors for each device
since booting. For example, from the UCX suite:
show network /full Basic network information. 1. Type: ucx. Press <ENTER> to enter the program
suite.
show process /all Display all background
processes running. 2. At the UCX prompt, type: ping <TCP/IP address>.
show quota /disk= <desired Disk size quota for specific Press <ENTER>.
disk> user.
3. To exit, type: exit. Press <ENTER>.
show time Display current system time.
4. To review a complete list of available UCX
show user /full Display users logged-in. commands, type: help and press <ENTER>.
type <filename> Display the contents of a text
(ASCII) type file.
To review a complete list of available commands, type: help at
the prompt and press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 670 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

VMS Toolbox (R7.x-R9.x), continued Directory
UCX - TCP/IP Networking, continued
Command Description
Following is information on some of the more common
UCX commands. copy Copy files
create <filename> Create file
Command Description
delete Delete files
ping <TCP/IP address> Ping hardware connection to
desired node. dir /size/date List DIR with file size and date
created
show arp Show ARP table on host.
dir /size/date/ List all files created <today>
show host Show all configured nodes on since=<today> [*...]*
host.
down <directory> System user command to jump to
show interface Show network interfaces. lower child DIR

show route Show route table (gateways) print <filename> Gyrotest user print command, file
on host. to paper printer if available
purge Purge same named files and
leave latest version only.
To purge the entire system disk:
1. Set def [000000].
2. purge[…]*.*;*

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 671 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

VMS Toolbox (R7.x-R9.x), continued Gyroscan Directory Structure Overview
Directory, continued VMS commands changing directories can become quite
long, given the structure of the directory.
Command Description This problem can be magnified with a two-disk drive
rename Rename or move files configuration. The second disk drive is not mounted with
the first as a single volume, but it is used as a separate
search <filename> <search string> Search files for specific
text
data disk, making the use of logical names a good
alternative.
set define <directory> Show ARP table on host.
Gyroscan related logical names include:
set define sys$specific:[000000] CD to root DIR
set def CD to Log DIR • GYRO$AN1E • GYRO$SCRATCH
sys$specific:[000000.gyrodisk2.
gyroscan.log • GYRO$ARCHIVE • GYRO$SITE
show define Show current DIR • GYRO$METH • GYRO$EXAMS
show logical(s) Show user logon and • GYRO$SPECCOM • GYRO$QUEUE
logical name information.
• GYRO$LOG • GYRO$TEMP
Note Different user
logons have different • GYRO$MAIN • GYRO$COM
logical names they have • GYRO$SITE_ORIGIN • GYRO$PROG
privileges for.
• GYRO$IMAGE • GYRO$SPT
up System user command to
jump to parent DIR

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 672 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

General Information, continued

VMS Toolbox (R10.x-R11.x)
For VMS Toolbox (R10.x - R11.x), the commands
detailed in VMS Toolbox (R7.x-R9.x) are completed
through Windows or DOS commands.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 673 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Backup and Restore

Select one of the following topics: Directory File saved to DOR
• Philips Intera Site Backup (R7.x-R9.x) gyro$site site.bck
• Philips Intera Site Restore (R7.x-R9.x) gyro$spt spt.bck
• Philips Intera Config Backup (R10.x-R11.x)
1. Clean the hard disk of any unneeded data to
• Philips Intera Config Restore (R10.x-R11.x) reduce the backup time and amount of MO usage.
• Philips Intera Total Backup (R7.x-R9.x) 2. After turning off the write-protect, insert a new/empty
• Philips Intera Total Restore (R7.x-R9.x) MOD in the appropriate drive.

• Backup and Restore (R10.x-R11.x) 3. Logon as Gyrotool.

• Backup and Restore ASW Configuration (R10.x- 4. Select Backup directories and/or files.
R11.x) 5. When prompted to backup all directories from the
system, select Yes.
Philips Intera Site Backup (R7.x-R9.x)
Site parameter backup involves recording existing site- 6. When there are no additional directories/files to
specific parameters. Depending on the level of hardware backup, select No.
at the site, this procedure should take approximately 10 7. When prompted to dismount the MOD, select Yes.
to 30 minutes.
8. Remove the MOD disk. Label and date the disk.
Accepting the defaults (answering Yes to the various
system prompts) will backup the following directories: 9. To exit Gyrotool, type: 1. Press <ENTER>.

Directory File saved to DOR

gyro$log log.bck Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 674 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Backup and Restore, continued

Philips Intera Site Restore (R7.x-R9.x) 5. Type: backup/log gyro_backup:[000000]log.bck/
save/select=[sys0.gyrodisk2.gyroscan.log...]*.*
Before you can restore site parameters, specific
directories, and files, you must know: [...]/new.

• the name of the set to be restored, and 6. To change to the site directory, type: set def
gyro$site. Press <ENTER>.
• the location of the directory to restore the data to.
7. To verify you are in the correct directory
(sys0.gyrodisk2.Gyroscan.site) type: dir. Press
Directory File saved to DOR
<ENTER>.
gyro$log log.bck
8. Type: backup/log gyro_backup:[000000]site.bck/
gyro$site site.bck save/select=[sys0.gyrodisk2.gyroscan.site...]*.*
gyro$spt spt.bck [...]/new.
9. To change to the SPT directory, type: set def
1. Logon as Gyrotest. gyro$spt. Press <ENTER>.
2. At the prompt, type: mount/over=id gyro_backup:. 10. To verify you are in the correct directory
Press <ENTER>. (sys0.gyrodisk2.Gyroscan.spt) type: dir. Press
3. To change to the log directory, type: set def <ENTER>.
gyro$site. Press <ENTER>. 11. Type: backup/log gyro_backup:[000000]spt.bck/
4. To verify you are in the correct directory save/select=[sys0.gyrodisk2.gyroscan.spt...]*.*
(sys0.gyrodisk2.Gyroscan.site) type: dir. Press [...]/new.
<ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 675 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Backup and Restore, continued

Philips Intera Site Restore (R7.x-R9.x), Philips Intera Config Backup (R10.x-R11.x)
continued Note On release 10 - 11.1.3, backups are made on a
12. Type: dismount gyro_backup. Press <ENTER>. MOD. For release 11.1.4 and higher, backups are
made on a DVD.
13. Type: logout. Press <ENTER>.
1. Logon as MRService.
14. Double-click the ManagerNTScan icon.
2. Select Start > System Management.
15. Select Session > End-Session. Click [YES].
3. Select Configuration > Save Configuration.
16. Remove the MOD disk.
4. To continue, press <ENTER>.
17. Logon as Shutdown. Continue the shutdown
process. 5. Insert the DVD +RW into the appropriate drive.
18. For NT: 6. To continue, press <ENTER>.
a. When prompted to automatically reboot, select 7. When prompted to exit, press <ENTER>.
Yes.
8. To check the backup:
b. For other prompts, press <ENTER>.
a. Open Windows Explorer.
19. For Intera:
b. Open the g:\log directory.
a. Select Shutdown Host.
c. Open the save_actions_yyyymmddjjmmss.log
b. When prompted to automatically reboot, select file.
Yes.
d. If errors are found, contact Online Support.
20. To test the system, logon as Gyroscan.
9. Remove the DVD from the drive.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 676 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Backup and Restore, continued

Philips Intera Config Restore (R10.x-R11.x) 9. If the configuration is read from the DVD PC:
Note On release 10 - 11.1.3, backups are made on a a. Type: 1 and press <ENTER>.
MOD. For release 11.1.4 and higher, backups are
b. Insert the DVD +RW containing the saved
made on a DVD.
configuration into the DVD PC.
Prior to completing this procedure:
10. If the configuration is read from the MO drive:
• Verify the System Reference number is set.
a. Type: 2 and press <ENTER>.
• Verify the software release "r" and "v" are the same as
b. Insert the MO disk containing the saved
the configuration to be restored.
configuration into the MO drive.
1. Logon as MRService. Open Windows Explorer.
c. Wait for the Busy LED turns green.
2. Open the g:\site\ecdatabase\ppdb.dat directory.
11. When ready, press <ENTER>.
3. Right-click the Hospital folder. Select Delete.
12. Type: y and press <ENTER>.
4. When prompted to confirm the deletion, click [YES]/
13. If prompted the system is unable to change the
5. Select Start > MR System Management. directory to H:\, press <ENTER> to exit.
6. Select Configuration > Restore Configuration. 14. Open Windows Explorer.
7. Press <ENTER>. 15. Open the g:\log directory.
8. If the configuration is read from the DVD ROM: 16. Open Logfile.
a. Type: 0 and press <ENTER>.
b. Insert the DVD +RW containing the saved
configuration into the DVD ROM drive. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 677 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Backup and Restore, continued

Philips Intera Site Restore (R10.x-R11.x), Philips Intera Total Backup (R7.x-R9.x)
continued Note Refer to the Philips Software Installation Manual
17. If errors are found, contact the Online Support (white).
Center.
Completing this procedure creates a complete backup of
18. Remove the backup disk from the appropriate drive. the system hard disk.
19. Select Start > Shutdown. Important! Patient images are not stored during a total
backup.
20. Select Restart.
Depending on the level of hardware at the site, this
procedure could take anywhere from 1 to 2 hours.
1. Verify your CD ROM is configured as a data CD.
2. Purge the system disk.
3. Clean the hard disk of any unneeded data to
reduce the backup time and amount of MO usage.
4. Shutdown the application software, select System >
Exit.
5. Logon as Shutdown to shutdown the host computer
without rebooting.
6. Insert the current release of the Computer System
Software CD-ROM.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 678 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Backup and Restore, continued

Philips Intera Total Backup (R7.x-R9.x), 13. Enter the appropriate device name of the system
continued disk. The backup process begins.
7. For an AS400 or DMCC, type: boot dka400. Press • For DMCC: dka0
<ENTER>.
• For DS10: dqb1
- or -
• For AS 800: dka0
For a DS10, type: boot dkb1. Press <ENTER>.
14. To increase the speed of the backup, disable the
The boot process takes approximately 5 minutes. screen display by pressing <CTRL>+<O>.
After boot is complete, a menu of options appears.
15. If prompted for a new disk, remove the existing disk
8. If the computer immediately finds "No Data CD", and insert a new disk.
use System Manager to configure the CD as a data
CD. 16. Wait for the new disk to be recognized and the drive
stops accessing the disk.
a. From the System Manager main menu, select
17. Select Yes. The procedure is complete when the
Hardware Options.
message, "Dismounting MO disk and System disk"
b. Select Configure CD Player. appears and the menu displays.
9. After turning off the write-protect, insert a new/empty 18. Select option 6 Shutdown the System. The >>>
MOD in the appropriate drive. prompt appears.
10. Select Total-Backup System Disk to MO disk. 19. Remove the MOD disk, label as "Total Backup", and
date.
11. When prompted to confirm, select Yes.
20. Power-OFF or type: boot and press <ENTER>.
12. When prompted to mount the MO disk in the device,
select Yes.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 679 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Backup and Restore, continued

Philips Intera Total Restore (R7.x-R9.x) 9. Logon as Shutdown. Continue the shutdown
process.
Note Refer to the Philips Software Installation Manual
(white). 10. For NT:
Completing this procedure restores the system to what it a. When prompted to automatically reboot, select
was when the last backup was completed. It includes the No.
operating system, applications, and test software.
b. For other prompts, press <ENTER>.
Note This restore process may also speed system
11. For Intera:
response, because the restored files are copied
in contiguous order. a. Select Shutdown Host.
Important! Patient data not archived prior to this proce- b. When prompted to automatically reboot, select
dure will be lost. No.
1. Logon as Gyrotool. 12. When the >>> prompt appears, insert the current
release of the Computer System Software CD-
2. To display the menu, press <ENTER>.
ROM.
3. Select 3 Modify System Configuration.
4. Select 2 System Parameters.
5. Select 2 Examination Number and record the
current exam number.
6. Select Cancel.
7. To exit the menu, select Exit.
8. To exit Gyrotool, type: 1. Press <ENTER>. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 680 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Backup and Restore, continued

Philips Intera Total Restore (R7.x-R9.x), 19. To continue, select Yes. Total restore now begins,
continued and will take from approximately 25 to 90 minutes.
13. For an AS800 or DMCC, type: boot dka400. Press 20. When prompted to unload the MO disk, remove the
<ENTER>. disk.
- or - 21. To continue, press <ENTER>.
For a DS10, type: boot dqb1. Press <ENTER>. 22. Leave the CD-ROM and MO disk in their drives and
select option 6 Shutdown.
The boot process takes approximately 5 minutes.
After boot is complete, a menu of options appears. 23. When the >>> prompt appears, remove the CD and
MO disks.
14. Select 4 Restore Backup System Disk from MO
disk. 24. Type: boot and press <ENTER> to boot the system.
15. When prompted to confirm, select Yes. The content of the backup was restored to the
system disk. During the boot process, the patient
16. Insert MOD to restore from disk into drive.
database (data disk) is rebuilt.
17. To continue, select Yes.
25. To test the system, logon as Gyroscan.
18. Enter the appropriate device name of the system
disk. The backup process begins.
• For DMCC: dka0
• For DS10: dkb1
• For AS 800: dka0

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 681 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Backup and Restore, continued

Backup and Restore (R10.x-R11.x) 6. Calculate the result of subtracting the
Total Size - Free Space for the C:, D:, and G: drives.
Note On release 10 - 11.1.3, backups are made on a
MOD. For release 11.1.4 and higher, backups are Note DVD +RWs have a backup capacity of
made on a DVD. +8 GB; an MO disk has a backup capacity of
+4 GB (per side).
A system backup is critical when a DVD software
installation/configuration fails, or a system disk 7. If you are performing long term storage to DVD or
replacement is undertaken. short term storage to HDD, and the results of step 6
indicate the sum > 2x (free space on D:) - 1, space
Preparation
needs to be freed-up on the D: drive.
Preparations include calculating the quantity of files to
backup, then checking the available disk space on the D: 8. From the MR Boot Configuration window, select
drive. Application Software and click Start.

Note The D: drive is used by long term storage to DVD 9. Archive patient data and remove archived patients.
(temporary storage of ghost images) and short 10. Logoff as the MRService user.
term storage to HDD (permanent storage of
ghost images. 11. Continue to Backup/Restore the System Disk on
the following page.
1. Login as MRService using Manager or Manager1
as the password.
2. Select Start > Programs.
3. Select Accessories > Windows Explorer.
4. Select My Computer.
5. From the menu bar, select View. Select Details.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 682 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Backup and Restore, continued

Backup and Restore (R10.x-R11.x), continued 3. Insert the system backup/restore DVD into the
internal DVD ROM drive.
Backup/Restore the System Disk
1. When backing up the system disk, complete the The host boots from the system backup/restore DVD
Preparation procedure on the preceding page and the System Backup/Restore Tool menu appears.
before continuing to step 2 of this procedure. 4. Remove the system backup/restore DVD from the
Important! After restoring the system disk, the following internal DVD ROM drive.
items are lost: 5. If an MO drive is used:
• patient data, a. Click [ADVANCED].
• user-defined preset procedures and exam cards, b. Select the MOD radio button. Click [OK].
• application software configuration and Windows 6. Continue to one of the following steps/procedures.
XPE settings created or modified since long term
storage to DVD or Save Configuration, and – Long-term storage to DVD via HDD.
possibly – Restore System Disk from DVD.
• new hard disk drive letter assignments. – Long-term storage to MOD.
2. Power-on or reboot the host. – Restore System Disk from MOD.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 683 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Backup and Restore, continued

Backup and Restore (R10.x-R11.x), continued 8. To restore the system disk from DVD:
Backup/Restore the System Disk, continued a. Insert the backup DVD into the appropriate drive.
7. For long-term storage to DVD via HDD: b. From the System Backup/Restore Tool menu,
a. Click [LONG-TERM STORAGE TO DVD VIA click [RESTORE FROM DVD BACKUP MADE
HDD]. ON nnnnnn].

b. Click [OK]. Note "nnnnnn" represents the date the backup

was made.
c. Login as MRService using Manager or
Manager1 as the password. The Copy Backup to c. When prompted the "...system disk will invalidate
DVD window appears. the patient data..." click [OK].

d. Insert a blank DVD +RW disk into the external d. When prompted, insert the next backup DVD and
DVD-PC. click [OK].

e. Enter Y to start the transfer. e. When prompted the restore completed

successfully, click [OK]. The host automatically
Note When burning is finished, the DVD-PC reboots.
will automatically eject the DVD.
f. Remove the backup DVD and continue to the
f. When prompted, insert another blank DVD +RW. Finalize Restore System Disk procedure.
g. Enter Y to confirm no errors occurred during the
copy to the DVD +RW.
h. Press <ENTER> The temporary backup files are
removed.
i. Store the DVD in a safe/secure place.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 684 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Backup and Restore, continued

Backup and Restore (R10.x-R11.x), continued f. Click [LONG-TERM STORAGE to MOD].
Backup/Restore the System Disk, continued g. When prompted, insert the next disk and click
9. For long-term storage to MOD: [OK].

a. Insert the MO Disk into the drive and wait for the h. When prompted the backup was completed
Busy LED to turn green. successfully, click [OK].
b. From the System Backup/Restore Tool menu, i. To reboot the host, click [REBOOT].
click [FORMAT MOD]. j. Remove the MO disk(s) and return them to a safe
c. When prompted the format is complete, click storage location.
[OK]. The disk automatically ejects.
d. Repeat the previous steps to format the
necessary number of MODs.
e. Insert MO disk Volume 1 into the MO drive.
Note When completing this procedure, use
the Busy LED to determine when a write-
process to the MO disk has stopped.
Messages and progress are not syn-
chronous with write-processes to the MO
disk.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 685 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Backup and Restore, continued

Backup and Restore (R10.x-R11.x), continued Finalize Restore System Disk
Backup/Restore the System Disk, continued 1. On the host, logon as MRService.
10. To restore the system disk from MOD: A mismatch between the patient database on the
data disk and transaction logging on the system disk
a. Insert the first MO backup disk into the drive.
prevents the database server (along with other
b. From the System Backup/Restore Tool menu, processes) to start.
click [REFRESH DATES].
2. Click [CANCEL].
c. From the System Backup/Restore Tool menu,
click [RESTORE FROM MOD BACKUP MADE 3. Select Start > Programs.
ON nnnnnn]. 4. Select MRSybase > Reinstall Database.
Note "nnnnnn" represents the date the backup 5. When the MRSybase setup warning appears, click
was made. [OK] and wait for the installation to complete.
d. When prompted the "...system disk will invalidate 6. Select Start > Shutdown > Restart.
the patient data..." click [OK].
7. Logon as MRService and wait for the background
e. When prompted, insert the next backup MOD processes to start.
and click [OK].
8. Select Start > MR Applications.
f. When prompted the restore completed
9. Select SPT & PIQT > SPT.
successfully, click [OK].
10. Resize/drag the window to unhide the Import of
g. To reboot the host, click [REBOOT].
Spec. icon on the Taskbar.
h. Remove the backup MOD and continue to the
Finalize Restore System Disk procedure.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 686 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Backup and Restore, continued

Backup and Restore (R10.x-R11.x), continued g. Using Windows Explorer, open
G:\log\Save_Actions_yyyymmddhhmmss.log.
Finalize Restore System Disk, continued
11. Wait for the Import of Spec. icon to disappear. Note "yyyymmddhhmmss" represents the
timestamp for the newly saved
12. Select File > Exit. configuration file.
13. Logoff of MRService. h. Check the log for errors.
Backup and Restore ASW Configuration 2. To restore the ASW configuration:
(R10.x-R11.x)
a. Using Windows Explorer, open
1. To save the ASW configuration: G:\site\ecdatabase\ppdb.dat.
a. Logon as MRService. b. Right-click Hospital and select Delete.
b. Select Start > MR System Management. c. To confirm the deletion, click [YES].
c. Select Configuration > Save Configuration. d. Select Start > MR System Management.
d. When ready, press <ENTER>. e. Select Configuration > Restore Configuration.
e. Insert a DVD +RW into the appropriate drive. f. When ready, press <ENTER>.
When ready, press <ENTER>.
f. When prompted, press <ENTER> to exit.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 687 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Backup and Restore, continued

Backup and Restore ASW Configuration j. Using Windows Explorer, open
(R10.x-R11.x), continued G:\log\Restore_Actions_yyyymmddhhmmss.
g. To restore the configuration from DVD ROM, log.
enter 0. Insert the backup DVD into the Note "yyyymmddhhmmss" represents the
appropriate drive. timestamp for the newly restored
- or - configuration file.
To restore the configuration from DVD PC,
k. Check the log for errors.
enter 1. Insert the backup DVD into the
appropriate drive. l. Remove the backup disk.
- or -
m. Select Start > Shutdown > Restart.
To restore the configuration from MO disk
enter 2. Insert the backup MOD into the
appropriate drive. Wait for the Busy LED to turn
green.
h. When ready, press <ENTER>.
i. When prompted, type: Y and press <ENTER> to
exit.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 688 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Monthly Software Cleanup (All Intera R7.x-9.x)

Select one of the following topics: Gyroscan
• Gyroscan Important! Direct the customer to archive all patient
data. Inform the customer that all patient
• Gyrotool
exams will be deleted from the disk.
• Gyrotest
1. Logon as Gyroscan.
• System
2. Select Administration.
• Gyrotool
3. Select Patients to Archive. Using the Archive
• Shutdown column on the screen, select all the records that
have not been archived.
• Film Queue Cleanup
4. To start the archive, click <OPTICAL DISK>.
• Delete Temporary Files
5. To exit Gyroscan, select System > Exit.
• Delete Queue Files
• Analyze/Repair Disk
• Delete Annie Files

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 689 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Monthly Software Cleanup (All Intera R7.x-9.x), continued

Gyrotool 11. Select the open volumes, and modify the archive
type to Close. Enter a close date.
1. Logon as Gyrotool.
12. To return to the previous menu, click [CANCEL].
2. Select Logging Application > Examine Log Files.
13. Select Event Database > Get Event Records.
3. Select Start New Log File > Delete Log Files.
• Check for DOR drive errors.
4. Delete all of the files listed.
• If the file becomes too large, delete the entire
5. Click [CANCEL] twice. Select Exit.
event database.
6. Select DOR Maintenance.
14. Click [CANCEL] twice. Select Exit.
7. Select SPI / DOR Database Management.
15. Exit Gyrotool.
8. Select DOR Volume Database.
9. Select Update DOR Volumes.
• Verify all volumes are closed out if over 90%.
10. Select List According to DOR Volume Label.
• Press <ENTER> on search screen.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 690 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Monthly Software Cleanup (All Intera R7.x-9.x), continued

Gyrotest 10. If only a single retrieval pointer is found, go to
step 11.
1. Logon as Gyrotest.
- or -
2. Type: set def gyro$exams and press <ENTER>.
If more than a single retrieval point is found:
3. Type: dir/date and press <ENTER>.
a. Type: copy/contiguous ppdb.idx ppdb.new
4. Record the directory name for all orphan patient files.
and press <ENTER>.
Note Use "System" option to delete patient files.
b. Type: dump/header/blocks=end:0 ppdb.new
5. At the prompt, type: set def gyro$anie and press and press <ENTER>. Verify there is only one
<ENTER>. stack pointer in this file.
6. Type: dir and press <ENTER>. c. Verify a PPDB.New directory is present, then
type: del ppdb.idx;1 and press <ENTER>.
7. Archive then delete patient files.
d. Type: ren ppdb.new ppdb.idx and press
8. At the prompt, type: set def gyro$site and press
<ENTER>. <ENTER>.

9. Type: dump/header/blocks=end:0 ppdb.idx and 11. At the prompt, type: set def gyro$log and press
<ENTER>.
press <ENTER>.
This command looks for contiguous blocks within the
patient protocols, looking for a retrieval pointer at the
end of the file.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 691 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Monthly Software Cleanup (All Intera R7.x-9.x), continued

Gyrotest, continued 7. Type: up and press <ENTER> to move back to the
root directory.
12. Type: dir /size/date and press <ENTER>.
8. Type: pu/log [...]*.* and press <ENTER>. This
• Check for files with old dates and large blocks.
command purges subdirectories/files and displays
• Delete all old files with large blocks. them on the screen.
Note The /page option can also be used. 9. Check the disk structure for fragments.
13. If no reoccurring problems exist, delete all the zip Note The Show Device option can be used to dis-
files. play information on all the SCSI devices.
14. Logout. 10. Type: anal/disk dkb200: and press <ENTER>.
System 11. Type: anal/disk dkb300: and press <ENTER>.
Important! "manager" is the password. 12. If a problem appears with the header:
1. Logon as System. a. At the MR Menu, select System Management.
2. Exit to DCL. b. Select Repair Disk Devices.
3. Type: up and press <ENTER>. This opens the root c. Select Repairs Disks Automatically.
directory.
13. Logout.
4. Type: do syserr and press <ENTER>.
5. Type: dir/size and press <ENTER>.
6. If errlog.sys is larger than 8 blocks, type: del
errlog.sys;1 and press <ENTER>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 692 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Monthly Software Cleanup (All Intera R7.x-9.x), continued

Gyrotool Film Queue Cleanup
1. Logon as Gyrotool. If the customer will not be rebooting, the permanent
processes will have to be stopped and restarted using
2. Select Daily Cleanup.
"Permproc stop".
3. Respond Yes to the prompts that appear until
Note Customer must not be scanning.
prompted to restart process.
If you will have the customer reboot, the files deleted in
4. When prompted to restart processes, respond No.
the following steps will be marked for deletion, then
5. Exit Gyrotool. deleted by the customer reboot. They will be rebuilt upon
reboot.
Shutdown
1. Exit to DCL.
This procedure performs a shutdown followed by an
automatic reboot. 2. Logon as Gyroscan (to get to Gyrotest).
1. Logon as Shutdown. 3. Type: set def gyro$hctmp and press <ENTER>.
2. When prompted to shutdown, respond Yes. 4. Type: del hc*.*;* and press <ENTER>.
3. Press <ENTER> for other prompts. 5. If the permanent processes were stopped, type:
permproc start and press <ENTER> to restart the
processes.
Note If the customer will reboot there is no need to
restart permproc.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 693 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Monthly Software Cleanup (All Intera R7.x-9.x), continued

Film Queue Cleanup, continued Delete Temporary Files
6. When you are done, instruct the customer to do a 1. Exit to DCL.
HC Screen Print (instead of a HC Case Print) for the
2. Logon as Gyroscan (to get to Gyrotest).
corrupt patient.
3. Type: set def gyro$gyroview and press <ENTER>.
7. If the customer is in applications and customer
cannot be scanning or printing, run Daily Cleanup. 4. Type: Down tmp and press <ENTER> to move you
to the Tmp directory.
a. Exit to DCL.
5. Type: del job*.;* and press <ENTER>.
b. Logon as Gyroscan (to get to Gyrotest).
c. Select Tool. Select #2 Daily Cleanup. Delete Queue Files
The following procedure can be useful if MIP and MPR
d. Restart all permanent processes to recreate HC
processes crash, or fail to start during boot up of the host
files. computer (for R7.x, R8.x, and R9.x).
1. Type: $set def gyro$queue and press <ENTER>.
2. To see if any files start with "qminfo.mip, *.mpr, or
*.adc, type: dir and press <ENTER>.
3. To delete these files, type: $del qminfo.*;* and
press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 694 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Monthly Software Cleanup (All Intera R7.x-9.x), continued

Analyze/Repair Disk VMS Commands
1. Type: set def [-] and press <ENTER>. 1. To analyze and repair the system disk, type:
analyze/disk/repair dka0 and press <ENTER>.
2. Type: show device and press <ENTER>.
Note The disk may differ on the system being
3. Look for the system disk and data disk-dka0, repaired.
dka100, or dkb0, dkb100. The device manager
scrolls all device available on system. 2. To analyze and repair the data disk, type: analyze/
disk/repair dka100 and press <ENTER>.
4. When scrolling stops, use scroll bar at monitor right
and move towards top of Device Manager. The Note The disk may differ on the system being
following will display. repaired.
For Alpha Server 800 and DMCC FOR DS10 3. If the above command does not work, type: anal/
disk_structure dk*0: /repair and press <ENTER>.
NTSCAN$DKA0 or NTSCAN$DKB0:
Note * = drive designation of A or B.
NTSCAN$DKA100 or NTSCAN$DKB100:
Menu Commands in Gyrotest
NTSCAN$DVA0 or NTSCAN$DVB0:
1. From the Gyroscan Manager menu, select #6
NTSCAN$WDC200 or NTSCAN$WDC200: System Management.
Note We are interested in the first two lines to put 2. Select #9 repair disk.
into the following command. Use what is pre-
sented at show device.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 695 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Monthly Software Cleanup (All Intera R7.x-9.x), continued

Delete Annie Files
1. Type: set def gyro$anie and press <ENTER>.
2. Type: del *.ani;* and press <ENTER>.
3. Type: set def gyro$queue and press <ENTER>.
4. Type: del qm*.*;* and press <ENTER>.
5. Type: set def gyro$gyroview_tmp and press
<ENTER>.
6. Type: del job*.*;* and press <ENTER>.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 696 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Upgrade - Gyroscan R7.5.1

Select one of the following topics: Important
• Important The following procedures detail how to upgrade a
Gyroscan (NT) Intera Host computer from R7.1.2 to
• OC Preparation
R7.5.1.
• Install MRVMS
Since the default network settings may conflict with the
• Install MRSybase hospital network, the hospital network must be
disconnected while completing this upgrade. Before re-
• Install TSW
configuring and reconnecting to the hospital network, the
• Install ASW upgrade should be completed and scanning verified.
• Configure Network Settings
Caution All patient data will be deleted when
• OC Customization loading this software.
• Protocol Filtering
Prerequisites
Before the software is upgraded to R7.5.1, the following
conditions must be met.
• SW release on R7.1.2,
• complete backup of SW R7.1.2, and
• complete backup/archive of all patient data.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 697 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Upgrade - Gyroscan R7.5.1, continued

OC Preparation 10. Select Console Configuration > Copy Facilities.
1. Logon as Gyrotest. 11. Select Modify Printer. Select the configured printer
and record the values.
2. Type: create/dir [.save] and press <ENTER>.
12. Click [CANCEL] twice.
3. Type: copy
gyro$disk3:[gyroscan.gyroview.protocol...]*.* 13. To leave the menu, select Exit.
[.save...] and press <ENTER>.
14. To exit from Gyrotool, type: 1 and press <ENTER>.
This save the hardcopy protocols, sort protocols, etc.
15. Continue to the Install MRVMS procedure.
4. When ready, type: logout and press <ENTER>.
5. Double-click the ManagerNTScan icon.
6. Select Session-End > End Session.
7. To confirm, click [YES].
8. Logon as Gyrotool.
9. Type: 3 (Modify System Configuration) and press
<ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 698 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Upgrade - Gyroscan R7.5.1, continued

Install MRVMS 10. When prompted to modify local node name and/or
addresses, type: no and press <ENTER>.
1. Insert the CD containing MRVMS, MRSybase and
TSW into the appropriate drive. 11. When prompted for the system reference number,
2. Logon as System. type all five digits of the system reference number
and press <ENTER>.
3. From the main menu, type: 3 (Install SW Product)
12. When prompted whether the number is correct, type:
and press <ENTER>.
yes and press <ENTER>.
4. When prompted to continue, type: yes and press
Note Ignore any messages that display, including
<ENTER>.
one regarding the ECOkit.
5. When prompted for the CD ROM as an installation
The software loads, and is followed by a double/
medium, type: yes and press <ENTER>.
automatic reboot after about 15 minutes. When the
6. When prompted if the CD is in the drive, type: yes DEC Windows Login screen displays, the MRVMS
and press <ENTER>. software installation is complete.
7. When prompted for the SW to install, select MRVMS. 13. Wait until the normal login screen appears before
8. When prompted to continue, type: yes and press continuing.
<ENTER>. 14. Continue to the Install MRSybase procedure.
Note The MRVMS software will now be loaded.
Ignore any messages that display.
9. When prompted to initialize the network
configuration, type: no and press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 699 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Upgrade - Gyroscan R7.5.1, continued

Install MRSybase 8. When prompted that all patient data will be lost
during installation, type: yes and press <ENTER>.
1. Logon as System.
Note Ignore the message regarding MRSybase
2. From the main menu, type: 3 (Install SW Product)
and press <ENTER>. release R8.1.1 check. The software loads,
after about 25 minutes.
3. When prompted to continue, type: yes and press
9. When prompted to press Return to continue, press
<ENTER>.
<ENTER>.
4. When prompted for the CD ROM as an installation
10. When prompted to restart all stopped gyroscan
medium, type: yes and press <ENTER>.
processes, type: no and press <ENTER>.
5. When prompted if the CD is in the drive, type: yes
11. When prompted to press Return to continue, press
and press <ENTER>.
<ENTER>.
6. When prompted for the SW to install, select
MRSybase. 12. Continue to the Install TSW procedure.

Installation procedure are retrieved and a

confirmation appears that MRSybase is the product
to be installed.
7. When prompted to continue, type: yes and press
<ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 700 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Upgrade - Gyroscan R7.5.1, continued

Install TSW 7. When prompted to make a backup copy, type: no
and press <ENTER>.
1. From the Main menu, type: 3 (Install SW Product)
and press <ENTER>. A message appears indicating file are being deleted
2. When prompted to continue, type: Yes and press and saved. The software loads after about 7
minutes.
<ENTER>.
8. When prompted to press Return to exit, press
3. When prompted for the CD ROM as an installation
<ENTER>.
medium, type: yes and press <ENTER>.
9. When prompted to restart all stopped gyroscan
4. When prompted if the CD is in the drive, type: Yes
processes, type: no and press <ENTER>.
and press <ENTER>.
10. When prompted to press Return to continue, press
5. When prompted for the SW to install, select TSW.
<ENTER>.
Installation procedure are retrieved and a
confirmation appears that TSW is the product to be 11. When the main menu displays, remove the CD from
the drive.
installed.
6. When prompted to continue, type: yes and press
<ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 701 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Upgrade - Gyroscan R7.5.1, continued

Install ASW 9. Once "ASW_Install" appears with a choice of 1/2/
Exit, type: 2 and press <ENTER>.
1. Insert the CD containing ASW into the appropriate
drive. 10. When prompted that you have not chosen to update
2. From the Main menu, type: 3 (Install SW Product) any files, type: yes and press <ENTER>.
and press <ENTER>. 11. When prompted archive directories and preset
procedures will not be deleted, type: yes and press
3. When prompted to continue, type: yes and press
<ENTER>.
<ENTER>.
The system prompts that no further input will be
4. When prompted for the CD ROM as an installation
required until the backup is complete. The software
medium, type: yes and press <ENTER>.
load will take approximately 15 minutes.
5. When prompted if the CD is in the drive, type: yes
and press <ENTER>. 12. When prompted to press Return to exit, press
<ENTER>.
6. When prompted for the SW to install, select ASW.
13. When prompted to restart all stopped Gyroscan
The system retrieves the installation procedure and processes, press <ENTER>.
displays the product to install as ASW.
14. When prompted, press <ENTER> to continue.
7. When prompted to continue, type: yes and press
15. Remove the CD from the drive.
<ENTER>.
8. When prompted to update ASW, press <ENTER>.
Note Information relating to hardware parameters
appears. Ignore any information related to
release 7.1 messages.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 702 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Upgrade - Gyroscan R7.5.1, continued

Configure Network Settings 6. To confirm the selection, press <ENTER>.
Select one of the following depending on the type of 7. Press the Left or Right Arrow key to change the
switch in use, then continue to the Connection Type - Duplex setting for Port 2 to Full.
Reconstructor XP1000.
8. To confirm the choice, press <ENTER>.
• Compaq NetInteligent 5708TX (Below)
9. To get to the Main menu, press <CTRL>+<N>.
• Cisco 1548M
10. Select Logoff.
Compaq NetInteligent 5708TX
11. When prompted to confirm, use the Right Arrow key
1. Logon as System. to select Yes and press <ENTER>.
2. Select Configure Hardware (Options) > Install 12. To return to the Configure Switch menu, press
Ethernet Switch. <CTRL>+<\> (backslash) then press <ENTER>.
3. Select RS232 Connection to Ethernet Switch. 13. Select Exit to Hardware Option Menu.
4. To open the Main menu, type: admin (password) 14. Logout from the system.
and press <ENTER>. The Port Configuration menu
appears. 15. Complete the Connection Type - Reconstructor
XP1000 procedure.
5. Using the <ARROW> keys, select the Duplex Entry
for Port 2.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 703 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Upgrade - Gyroscan R7.5.1, continued

Configure Network Settings, continued 8. Type: end and press <ENTER>.
Cisco 1548M 9. Type: show vlan and press <ENTER>.
1. Logon as System. 10. Check the results with the following information:
2. Select Configure Hardware (Options) > Install
Ethernet Switch. VLAN Ports

3. Select RS232 Connection to Ethernet Switch. 1 1&8

4. When prompted to continue with configuration 2 1-7

dialog, type: no and press <ENTER>. The "#" 3 1
prompt should appear. 4 1
5. If the "#" prompt fails to appear, type: enable and
press <ENTER>.
6. At the "#" prompt, type: configure and press
<ENTER>.
7. Change the duplex setting from Port 2
(Reconstructor) from Auto-sense to Full-duplex.
a. Type: interf fast 0/2 and press <ENTER>.
b. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>.
c. Type: duplex full and press <ENTER>.
d. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 704 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Upgrade - Gyroscan R7.5.1, continued

Configure Network Settings, continued Connection Type - Reconstructor XP1000
Cisco 1548M, continued 1. Logon as Administrator using manager as the
password.
11. Type: show interfaces and press <ENTER>.
2. Click Network Neighborhood with the right mouse
12. To get the overview of Port 0/1, press the
<SPACEBAR>. button.

Note Port 0 appears first. Pressing the Spacebar 3. Select Properties.

once displays information for Port 1. 4. Select the Adapter tab.
13. To get the overview 0/2, press the <SPACEBAR> 2x 5. Select Properties.
and 3x.
6. Select the Connection Type dropdown list. Select
• Verify the Duplex setting is at Full. 10BaseT Full_Duplex.
• Verify the Speed setting is Auto_Negotiate. 7. Click [OK].
14. Press <CTRL>+<\> (backslash). 8. Select Close.
15. When prompted for the main menu, press 9. When prompted to restart the computer, select Yes.
<ENTER>.
16. Select Exit to Hardware Option Menu > Exit to
Gyroscan Manager Menu.
17. Logout from the system.
18. Complete the Connection Type - Reconstructor
XP1000 procedure.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 705 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Upgrade - Gyroscan R7.5.1, continued

OC Customization 10. Disable the Basic Software option by changing the
status to No.
1. Logon as Gyrotool.
11. Click [PROCEED].
2. Select Modify System Configuration.
12. Click [CANCEL].
3. Select Console Configuration > Copy Facilities.
13. Select Option (SW-keys) > View SW Options >
4. Select the value previously recorded. See Step 11
of the OC Preparation procedure. Modify Option Status.
14. Enable the Basic Software option by changing the
5. Click [CANCEL] twice.
option status to Yes.
6. Check the Host Table and Routing Table using the
UCX command. 15. Click [PROCEED].

7. Select Options > Service Function > Authorize 16. Click [CANCEL].
Service Functions for Philips Service User. 17. Exit Gyrotool.
8. If a message appears indicating that this is 18. Logon as Gyrotest using gyrotest as the password.
impossible:
Note The system will prompt for a new password.
a. Select Remove Authorization(s) of Service
Functions. 19. If prompted for a new local password, enter a new
password.
b. Type: 1 and press <ENTER>.
c. Type: response on the challenge string and your
username. Click [Proceed].
9. Select Options (SW-keys) > View SW Options >
Modify Option Status. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 706 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Upgrade - Gyroscan R7.5.1, continued

OC Customization, continued 25. Double-click the Manager NTScan icon.
20. To restore the previously saved customer protocols, 26. Select Session End > End Session.
type: copy [.save...]*.*
27. Click [Yes].
gyro$disk3:[gyroscan.gyroview.protocol...] and
press <ENTER>. 28. To restore the TSW directory structure and update
the configuration file, login under TSW.
21. Rename the SPT I.Q. spec files. For example, for an
ACS configuration: Note To avoid errors during the BDAS self test
(nightly run) the TSW configuration file must
• Type: ren
gyro$spt_spec:ACSR8V1L1_00_L01_NT.spec be updated.
ACSR7V5L1_00_L01_NT.spec and press a. Type: conf and press <ENTER>.
<ENTER>.
b. Type: edit and press <ENTER>.
22. To repair a bug in the DICOM transfer, some files
must be copied from gyro$site_origin to gyro$site. c. Enter your name, system ID and reason for
editing.
• Enter: copy gyro#site_origin:m0*.* gyro$site
d. Press <CTRL>+<Z>.
(5 files).
e. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
• Enter: copy gyro#site_origin:mrg*.* gyro$site
(1 file). f. Type: logout and press <ENTER> to exit TSW.
• Enter: copy gyro#site_origin:item*.* gyro$site g. Confirm by clicking [YES].
(10 files).
23. Complete the Protocol Filtering procedure.
24. When ready, type: logout and press <ENTER>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 707 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Upgrade - Gyroscan R7.5.1, continued

OC Customization, continued 33. If an EasyVision is connected, or a DICOM
application is on the network, complete the following
29. Logon as Shutdown. Shutdown the system with an
automatic reboot. steps to verify the network link.

30. Logon as Gyroscan. Wait for the processes to start. a. Select Admin > Administration > PIQT Scan.

31. To verify the correct scanning function, complete a b. In the Network box, select a DICOM remote
station.
PIQT scan.
c. In the Network box, select Copy to Remote
32. Check the network applications. For example, to
Station.
check hardcopy functionality:
d. Wait for a message indicating success appears.
a. Select System > Service > HC Screen. This
generates a hardcopy of the SMPTE image. e. In the Network box, select a GCOM remote
station.
b. Click [Proceed].
f. In the Network box, select Copy to Remote
c. Select Print Job.
Station.
d. Wait for the film to print.
g. Wait for a message indicating success appears.
e. Compare the SMPTE film image with the monitor
image. Verify all contrast areas are visible on h. Check the network configuration if an error
message appears.
both.
34. Complete a total backup of the system disk.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 708 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Upgrade - Gyroscan R7.5.1, continued

Protocol Filtering 3. When prompted to continue with the installation of
the protocols, type: Yes and press <ENTER>.
Important! Protocol filtering is a critical part of the soft-
ware installation process. Note Filtering begins, and will take between 10
During the filter process: and 45 minutes. When a message appears
indicating the PPInstall job has completed, fil-
• correct protocols for available options/coils are tering is done.
selected, and
4. To check for filtering correctness:
• Philips protocol states change from unlocked to
a. Type: type/page ppinstall.log. Press <ENTER>.
locked.
b. Verify no errors are present.
Note During the next filtering (upgrade, new coil,
etc.) the system will recognize the protocols Note The user-defined protocols may contain
as being correct and will not "copy" them. conflicts.
Important! SW options (keys), hardware configurations 5. To print a file containing the conflicts:
and coils must be correctly set in Gyrotool
a. Type: search gyro$log:*pp*.log conflict /
before continuing with this procedure.
Protocol conversion/filtering to SW R7.5.1 is win=(0,1) /out=conflicts.log. Press <ENTER>.
only supported for R4.7, R5.7, R6.7 and b. Type: print conflicts.log and press <ENTER>.
R7.1x protocol databases. Importing protocol
databases from older software is unreliable. When the protocol name includes a "=" or a "," a
conflict may occur. Such protocols should be
1. Logon as Gyrotest. implemented manually i the new software release, or
2. Type: @gyro$com:bsppinstall. Press <ENTER>. renamed in the original protocol database, the re-
converted and filtered to R7.5.1 again.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 709 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Upgrade - Gyroscan R7.5.1, continued

Protocol Filtering, continued 9. Provide the printouts to the hospital staff, so they can
adapt their user-defined protocols.
6. Analyze any reported conflicts.
Note Ignore any remarks regarding "duplicate
Note User-defined protocols may include missing
options. section" protocols not being imported.

7. To print a file with the missing options: 10. When ready, type: logout and press <ENTER>.

a. Type: search gyro$log:*pp*.log missing 11. Double-click the ManagerNTScan icon. Select
Session End > End Session.
/win=(0,1) /out=missing.log and press
<ENTER>. 12. To confirm your desire to quit, click [YES].
b. Type: print missing.log and press <ENTER>. 13. Perform a Periodic Image Quality Test (PIQT) to
ensure all the hardware calibrations are correct.
Note Where there are a large number of user-
defined protocols, it is possible that not all
protocols will be imported.
8. To print a file of the non imported protocols:
a. Type: search gyro$log:*.pp*.log "not
imported" /win=(0,1) /out=not_import.log and
press <ENTER>.
b. Type: print not_import.log and press
<ENTER>.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 710 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R8.1.1

Select one of the following topics: Configure Ethernet Switch on Host - Cisco
• Retrieve MAC Address - Cisco 1548M 1548M
1. Logon as System.
• Configure Ethernet Switch on Host - Cisco 1548M
2. Select Configure Hardware (Options) > Install
• Set Network Switch to Factory Defaults - Cisco
Ethernet Switch.
1548M
3. Select Install Ethernet Switch.
• Virtual LAN Configuration - Cisco 1548M
4. When prompted for the MAC address, enter the
Retrieve MAC Address - Cisco 1548M address obtained while completing the Retrieve
1. Logon as System. MAC Address - Cisco 1548M procedure.
2. Select Configure Hardware (Options) > Install 5. When prompted for the Hostname of the switch,
Ethernet Switch. verify the default name (SWITCH) and press
<ENTER>.
3. Select RS232 Connection to the Ethernet Switch
and press <ENTER>. The # prompt appears. 6. When prompted for the switch internet address,
press <ENTER>.
• If the # prompt fails to appear, type: enable and
press <ENTER> to display the prompt. Note Entry is required only if the address needs to
be changed from the default
4. Type: show version and press <ENTER>. Record
(192.192.192.212) which is typical.
the Base Ethernet MAC Address.
7. When prompted to confirm the settings, type: yes
5. Press <CTRL>+<\>.
and press <ENTER>.
6. Press <ENTER> to return to the main menu.
8. To return to the main menu, press <ENTER>.
7. Select Exit to Hardware Option Menu.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 711 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Set Network Switch to Factory Defaults - 8. To continue, press <ENTER>.
Cisco 1548M 9. At the prompt, type: enable and press <ENTER> to
1. Logon as System. display the # prompt.
2. Select Configure Hardware (Options) > Install 10. Type: config and press <ENTER>.
Ethernet Switch.
11. Type: ip state bootp and press <ENTER>.
3. Select Install Ethernet Switch.
12. Turn the power supply OFF. Wait 30 seconds.
4. Select RS232 Connection to the Ethernet Switch
13. Turn the power supply ON to reboot the switch.
and press <ENTER>. The # prompt appears.
14. When prompted to continue with the configuration
• If the # prompt fails to appear, type: enable and
dialog, type: no and press <ENTER>.
press <ENTER> to display the prompt.
15. Continue to the Virtual LAN Configuration - Cisco
5. Type: delete nvram and press <ENTER>.
1548M procedure.
6. When prompted to reset to factory defaults, type:
yes and press <ENTER>. Following power-up, the
RS232 link now displays on the logon screen.
7. When prompted to continue with the configuration
dialog, type: no and press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 712 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Virtual LAN Configuration - Cisco 1548M 12. For Reconstructor XP1000, type: duplex full and
press <ENTER>.
1. Complete the Set Network Switch to Factory
Defaults - Cisco 1548M procedure. - or -
1. At the > prompt, type: enable and press <ENTER>. For Reconstructor W6000 or AP550, type: duplex
The # prompt appears. auto and press <ENTER>.
2. Type: configure and press <ENTER>. A 13. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
(config)# prompt appears.
14. Type: interf fast 0/3 and press <ENTER>.
Note Sometimes the prompt does not appear.
15. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>.
3. Type: interf fast 0/1 and press <ENTER>.
16. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
4. Type: vlan all and press <ENTER>.
17. Type: interf fast 0/4 and press <ENTER>.
5. Type: duplex full and press <ENTER>.
18. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>.
6. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
19. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
7. Type: interf fast 0/8 and press <ENTER>.
20. Type: interf fast 0/5 and press <ENTER>.
8. Type: vlan 1 and press <ENTER>.
21. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>.
9. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
22. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
10. Type: interf fast 0/2 and press <ENTER>.
11. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 713 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Virtual LAN Configuration - Cisco 1548M, 31. Press <CTRL>+<\>.
continued 32. When prompted to return to the main menu, press
23. Type: interf fast 0/6 and press <ENTER>. <ENTER>.
24. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>. 33. Select the Exit to Hardware Option Menu.
25. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
26. Type: interf fast 0/7 and press <ENTER>.
27. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>.
28. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
29. Type: end and press <ENTER>.
30. Type: show vlan and press <ENTER>. Vlan and
port information displays.

VLAN Ports

1 1&8
2 1-7
3 1
5 1

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 714 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital - Gyroscan R8.1.1

Select one of the following topics: Configure Local Host
• Configure Local Host 1. Logon as System.
• Configure Domain Name 2. Select Network Management > Modify Local Node
Name and/or Addresses.
• Configure Reconstructor
3. Enter the node name provided by the local
• Configure Reconstructor on Host
administrator and press <ENTER>.
• Configure Ethernet Switch - Cisco 1548M
4. When prompted for the DECnet node address, type
• Configure Print Server the address and press <ENTER>.
• Configure Remote Node & TCP/IP Gateway 5. When prompted for the internet address for the
newly named node, enter the address and press
• Configure TCP/IP Gateway
<ENTER>.
Note Gyroscan does not always prompt for the
correct default network mask. It will prompt
the mask from the previous configuration.
6. When prompted for the internet network mask, enter
the correct internet network mask and press
<ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 715 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Local Host, continued Configure Domain Name
7. When prompted for the internet broadcast mask, 1. Logon as System.
enter the correct internet broadcast mask and press
2. Select Network Management > Modify Local
<ENTER>. The system displays a summary of the
Domain.
previously entered information.
3. Type the internet domain name and press
8. When prompted to update the databases, type: Yes
<ENTER>.
and press <ENTER>.
Note Name is case sensitive. Enclose lowercase
9. To reboot the system, type: Yes and press
name within quotation marks.
<ENTER>. It will take approximately ten minutes for
the system to reboot twice and display the logon 4. To return to the Network Management menu, press
screen. <ENTER>.
5. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager Menu.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 716 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Reconstructor 11. Click [CHANGE].
Configure XP1000 12. If not already completed, enter RECONSTRUCTOR
1. Slide the NTCAC drawer out (keyboard, mouse & as the host name. Click [OK].
LCD screen). 13. Select the Protocol tab.
2. Turn the NTDAC LCD ON. 14. Click [PROPERTIES].
3. Logon as Administrator using manager as the 15. In the IP Address field, enter the Reconstructor TCP/
password. IP address.
4. Right-click Network Neighborhood. 16. In the Subnet Mask field, enter the subnet mask.
5. Click [PROPERTIES]. Note The default is None.
6. Select the Adapter tab. 17. Click [OK].
7. Click [PROPERTIES]. 18. Click [OK].
8. Select 10BaseT Full_duplex from the Connection 19. Select Close.
Type dropdown list.
20. When prompted to restart the computer, select Yes.
9. Click [OK].
21. Turn the NTDAC LCD OFF and return the drawer to
10. Select the Identification tab. its closed position.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 717 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Reconstructor, continued 14. Click [OK].
Configure AP550 or W6000 15. Shutdown and restart the Reconstructor. Wait for
1. Slide the NTCAC drawer out (keyboard, mouse & Windows NT to start completely.
LCD screen). 16. Turn the NTDAC LCD OFF and return the drawer to
2. Turn the NTDAC LCD ON. its closed position.

3. Logon as MRService. Configure Reconstructor on Host

4. Select Start > MR Configuration. 1. Logon as System.

5. Select Network. 2. Select Configure Hardware (Options).

6. Select the Identification tab. 3. Select Reconstructor Management Menu.

7. Click [CHANGE]. 4. Select Modify Network Configuration

Reconstructor.
8. If not already completed, enter RECONSTRUCTOR
as the host name. Click [OK]. 5. Enter the new node name provided by the local
administrator.
9. Select the Protocol tab.
6. When prompted for the IP address, enter the IP
10. Click [PROPERTIES]. address for the Reconstructor.
11. In the IP Address field, enter the Reconstructor TCP/ 7. Select Exit to Configure Hardware (Options)
IP address. Menu.
12. In the Subnet Mask field, enter the subnet mask.
Note The default is None.
13. Click [OK]. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 718 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Ethernet Switch - Cisco 1548M Retrieve MAC Address - Cisco 1548M
Complete the following procedures in the order 1. Logon as System.
indicated. 2. Select Configure Hardware (Options) > Install
• Retrieve MAC Address - Cisco 1548M Ethernet Switch.
• Configure Ethernet Switch on Host - Cisco 1548M 3. Select RS232 Connection to the Ethernet Switch
and press <ENTER>.
• Set Network Switch to Factory Defaults - Cisco
1548M 4. When prompted to continue with configuration
dialog, type: No and press <ENTER>.
• Virtual LAN Configuration - Cisco 1548M
5. At the > prompt, type: show version and press
• Configure Switch for Full/Duplex Hospital <ENTER>. Record the Base Ethernet MAC Address.
Connection
6. Press <CTRL>+<\>.
7. When prompted, press <ENTER> to return to the
main menu.
8. Select Exit to Hardware Option Menu.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 719 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Ethernet Switch - Cisco 1548M, Set Network Switch to Factory Defaults - Cisco
continued 1548M
Configure Ethernet Switch on Host - Cisco 1548M 1. Logon as System.
1. Logon as System. 2. Select Exit to DCL.
2. Select Configure Hardware (Options) > Install 3. Type: ucx show bootp and press <ENTER>. Only
Ethernet Switch. one entry should be visible for the switch.
3. Select Install Ethernet Switch. 4. Type: ucx set bootp and press <ENTER>.
4. When prompted for the MAC address, enter the 5. When prompted, type the current IP switch address
address obtained while completing the Retrieve and press <ENTER>.
MAC Address - Cisco 1548M procedure.
Note The default is 192.192.192.212.
5. When prompted for the Hostname of the switch,
6. When prompted to remove the Host address, type:
press <ENTER>.
yes and press <ENTER>.
6. When prompted for the switch internet address, type
7. Type: logout and press <ENTER>.
the address and press <ENTER>.
8. Turn the power supply OFF. Wait 30 seconds.
7. When prompted to confirm the settings, type: yes
and press <ENTER>. 9. Turn the power supply ON to reboot the switch sos
the system receives the newly entered IP address.
8. To return to the main menu, press <ENTER>.
9. Select Exit to Hardware Option Menu.
10. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager Menu.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 720 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Ethernet Switch - Cisco 1548M, 15. For Reconstructor XP1000, type: duplex full and
continued press <ENTER>.
Virtual LAN Configuration - Cisco 1548M - or -
1. Logon as System. For Reconstructor W6000 or AP550, type: duplex
1. Select Configure Hardware (Options). auto and press <ENTER>.

2. Select Install Ethernet Switch. 16. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.

3. Select RS232 Connection to Ethernet Switch. 17. Type: interf fast 0/3 and press <ENTER>.

4. At the prompt, type: enable and press <ENTER>. 18. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>.

5. Type: configure and press <ENTER>. 19. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.

6. Type: interf fast 0/1 and press <ENTER>. 20. Type: interf fast 0/4 and press <ENTER>.

7. Type: vlan all and press <ENTER>. 21. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>.

8. Type: duplex full and press <ENTER>. 22. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.

9. Type: exit and press <ENTER>. 23. Type: interf fast 0/5 and press <ENTER>.

10. Type: interf fast 0/8 and press <ENTER>. 24. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>.

11. Type: vlan 1 and press <ENTER>. 25. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.

12. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.

13. Type: interf fast 0/2 and press <ENTER>.
14. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 721 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Ethernet Switch - Cisco 1548M, 34. Press <CTRL>+<\>.
continued 35. When prompted to return to the main menu, press
Virtual LAN Configuration - Cisco 1548M, <ENTER>.
continued
36. Select the Exit to Hardware Option Menu.
26. Type: interf fast 0/6 and press <ENTER>.
Configure Switch for Full/Duplex Hospital
27. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>. Connection
28. Type: exit and press <ENTER>. 1. Contact the local network administrator for the
proper setting for port 8.
29. Type: interf fast 0/7 and press <ENTER>.
Note Typically, a Collision Domain (Repeater/Hub)
30. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>.
hospital network connection is a network of
31. Type: exit and press <ENTER>. the Half Duplex type.
32. Type: end and press <ENTER>.
Network Type Ethernet Switch Setting (Port 8)
33. Type: show vlan and press <ENTER>. Vlan and
100 Mb/s; Full Duplex Full
port information displays. (Highest Network Performance)

VLAN Ports 100 Mb/s; Half Duplex Half

10 Mb/s; Full Duplex Full
1 1&8
2 1-7 10 Mb/s; Half Duplex Half
(Lowest Network Performance)
3 1
6 1 2. Logon as System.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 722 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Ethernet Switch - Cisco 1548M, Configure Print Server
continued This procedure retrieves the print server’s MAC address.
Configure Switch for Full/Duplex Hospital 1. Verify the following:
Connection, continued
3. Select Configure Hardware (Options). • Printer is turned ON.
4. Select Install Ethernet Switch. • Print server is turned ON.
5. Select RS232 Connection to Ethernet Switch. • Parallel cable is connected between the print
server and printer.
6. Type: enable and press <ENTER>.
2. On the print server, press the [TEST] button. A
7. At the # prompt, type: configure and press variety of information (e.g., firmware revision, port
<ENTER>. configuration, LAN HW address, etc.) appears.
8. Type: interf fast 0/8 and press <ENTER>. 3. Record the LAN HW address.
9. Type: duplex <Full or Half> and press <ENTER>. Note This is the print server’s MAC address.
Note Select the full or half duplex value. 4. Turn the printer OFF.
10. Type: exit and press <ENTER>. 5. Logon as System.
11. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
12. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
13. Press <CTRL>+<\>.
14. Select Exit to Configure Hardware (Options)
Menu.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 723 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Print Server, continued 14. To return to the main menu, press <ENTER>.
6. Select Configure Hardware (Options). 15. Switch the Ethernet switch power OFF, then ON.
7. Select Install Network Printer (+ queue’s). The 16. Switch the print server OFF, then ON.
Configure Printers menu appears on the Host.
17. Wait for two minutes to allow the print server to boot.
8. To install the HP DeskJet printer, type: 2 and press
18. To print a test page to verify the printer connection,
<ENTER>.
select 3 (print test plot).
9. When prompted to enter the paper size:
Note The ASCII test plot is adequate for a printer
For European A4 format, type: A4 and press connection test.
<ENTER>.
19. Select Exit to Hardware Options Menu.
- or -
20. Select Exit to Main Menu.
For US Qualtro format, type: Letter and press
21. To logout, type: 2 and press <ENTER. Verify your
<ENTER>.
intention to logout by clicking [YES].
10. When prompted for the MAC address, enter the LAN
HW address recorded in step 3.
11. When prompted to enter the Host-name of the Jet
Direct, press <ENTER>.
12. When prompted for the internet address enter the
address and press <ENTER>.
13. When prompted to verify the information, type: yes
and press <ENTER>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 724 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Remote Node & TCP/IP Gateway 3. Logon as System.
Important! The following procedure details how to 4. Select Network Management > Add Remote Node
configure an EasyVision. For other node to Local MRNodes Database.
types, use this procedure as a model.
5. Follow the prompts displayed on the screen to enter
Configure EasyVision the information detailed in step 2.
1. Refer to the installation manual provided with the 6. Once all of the entries have been completed and a
EasyVision for the network configuration of the prompt appears to review/store the node
EasyVision itself. information, type: yes and press <ENTER>.
2. Acquire the following information: 7. To return to the main menu, press <ENTER>.
• Node name (6 chr. max.) 8. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager Menu.
• DECnet node address 9. Continue to the Define a Push-node procedure.
• EasyVision workstation Y/N
• Import/Export account username
• Import/Export account password
• Datalink task name on remote node
• Datalink function for local node.
• Remote node Import/Export account
• Allow remote access by local node users

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 725 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera Workgroup for Hospital - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Remote Node & TCP/IP Gateway, Configure TCP/IP Gateway
continued This procedure should be completed when the Gyroscan
Define a Push-node Intera Host computer must communicate with another
When an EasyVision workstation is added to the unit via TCP/IP.
MRNodes database, it can be defined as a push-node Note The IP address of the router forwarding to other
within the Intera application. networks is referred to as the gateway.
1. Logon as Gyroscan. 1. Logon as System. Select Exit to DCL.
2. Select Scan Control > Scan Utility > Select Push- 2. At the prompt, type: ucx and press <ENTER>.
node.
3. Type: set route <Network Backbone of Other Unit>/
3. Select applicable push-node. gateway=<TCP/IP Address Default Gateway>/
4. Click [PROCEED]. perm/network and press <ENTER>.

5. Select System > Exit. 4. Type: set route <Network Backbone of Other Unit>/
gateway=<TCP/IP Address Default Gateway>/
6. Click [PROCEED] to confirm. network and press <ENTER>.
5. To check the dynamic database, type: show route
and press <ENTER>.
6. To check the host address-host name local
database, type: show host and press <ENTER>.
7. To return to DCL mode, type: exit and press
<ENTER>.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 726 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R8.1.1

Select one of the following topics: Function Details
• Introduction DICOM RIS RIS interface for retrieving patient
• Configure Gyroscan DICOM Import/Export w/EasyLink information for the next exam from the
work list to be examined.
• Configure Gyroscan DICOM RIS Note SW license key required.
• Configure RIS DICOM with Easylink Station DICOM Print User DICOM print function to move DICOM MR
images and related data to a DICOM HC
• Configure DICOM HC-Printer on Host printer.
• Delete a DICOM Node
DICOM AE Title Conventions
Introduction • For the System User, AE Titles and IP Host names
Intera system supports the following DICOM functions: are case sensitive. If mixed-case titles are to be used,
place them between quotes (e.g., "Exp_node_1").
Function Details
• For the Gyrotool User, the DICOM printer AE Titles
DICOM Export DICOM image export function for must be completed without using quotes (e.g.,
(store) User transferring DICOM MR images (and DICOM_agfa_1).
related data) from Gyroscan to remote
system. • DICOM AE Title must be unique per site; in case of
DICOM Import DICOM image import function for more systems, different names must be used.
(store) Provider transferring DICOM MR images (and
related data) from a remote system to
• A-Z, a-z, 0-9 and underscores are allowed. Spaces
Gyroscan. and special characters are not allowed.
Note To help avoid problems/conflicts, try to use only
upper case characters.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 727 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Gyroscan DICOM Import/Export Configure DICOM AE Title
Complete the following procedures, in the order 1. Logon as Gyrotool.
indicated, to activate the DICOM import/export function. 2. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM
• Configure DICOM AE Title Parameters.
• Configure DICOM Store Parameters 3. Select DICOM AE Titles.
• Define DICOM Import/Export/RIS Node a. Adapt the Store Export AE Title.
The following are the default values for the DICOM Note Use the Store Export AE Title
Import/Export. They should also be configured on the (MR_STORE_EXP).
appropriate DICOM application/workstation. b. Adapt the Store Import AE Title.
Note Listening port for the Intera DICOM Import Server Note Use the Store Export AE Title
is defined at 104. (MR_STORE_IMP).
DICOM Export DICOM Import 4. Click [PROCEED].
Host Name Gyroscan TCP/IP Gyroscan TCP/IP 5. Click [EXIT].
Hostname Hostname
6. Select Exit from Gyrotool.
AE Title MR_STORE_EXP MR_STORE_IMP
TCP/IP Gyroscn TCP/IP Gyroscan TCP/IP
Address Address
Port # n/a 104

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 728 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Gyroscan DICOM Import/Export, c. Select DICOM STORE Parameters.
continued d. Adjust the export re-scaling parameter.
Configure DICOM Store Parameters
e. Click [PROCEED]. Click [EXIT].
The following are the Intera DICOM Store parameters.
f. Select Exit from Gyrotool.
• Export Re-scaling: Yes
2. To modify DICOM Store time-out value.
• Timeout Value: 300
a. Logon as Gyrotool.
Important! Typically, these parameters do not require
modification. It is advisable to test the b. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM
DICOM Store application prior to adapting Parameters.
these parameters. c. Select DICOM STORE Parameters.
1. To modify DICOM Store export re-scaling. d. Adjust the export time-out parameter.
Note Occasionally, images moved through a DICOM e. Click [PROCEED]. Click [EXIT].
connection to a viewing application may appear
too light or too dark. Some viewing applications f. Select Exit from Gyrotool.
expect these parameters, others do not. One
solution may be to adjust this parameter and
retry.
a. Logon as Gyrotool.
b. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM
Parameters.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 729 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Gyroscan DICOM Import/Export, 6. When prompted for the port number enter the port
continued number where EasyVision listens.
Define DICOM Import/Export/RIS Node 7. Review the entries made. If the values are correct,
1. Logon as System. type: Yes and press <ENTER>.
2. Select DICOM Management. If the Hostname does not exist in the TCP/IP Host
database, the system prompts for the TCP/IP
3. Select DICOM Export Service Class User > Add address.
DICOM SCP/SCU.
8. If prompted for the address, type it and press
Note AE Title and Hostname must be the same as <ENTER>.
those entered at the remote node. It is rec-
ommended to only use upper case charac- 9. To return to the DICOM Management menu, press
ters. <ENTER>.
4. Type: EV1 (or the DICOM application entity title of 10. To return to the DICOM SCP/SCU menu, press
the remote node) and press <ENTER>. <ENTER.

5. When prompted to enter the Hostname: 11. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager menu.

If is a new application in the network, type: 12. If a DICOM Import/RIS node needs to be defined,
EasyVision (or the remote DICOM Hostname) and repeat steps 2 -12.
press <ENTER>. Note Before you can use the configured DICOM
- or - nodes, a Gyrorestart must be completed.

Type the TCP/IP Hostname of the (existing) remote

Host supporting your DICOM transfer and press
<ENTER>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 730 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Gyroscan DICOM RIS Define a DICOM RIS Node
Complete the following procedures, in the order 1. Logon as System.
indicated, to configure Intera DICOM RIS. 2. Select DICOM Management.
• Define a DICOM RIS Node 3. Select DICOM Export Service Class User > Add
• Configure the DICOM RIS AE Title DICOM SCP/SCU.
• Select a RIS System Note AE Title and Hostname must be the same as
those entered at the remote node. It is rec-
• Modify RIS Worklist Timeout ommended to only use upper case charac-
• Modify RIS Worklist Prefetch ters.
Default parameters of the Intera RIS DICOM include: 4. Type: EV1 (or the DICOM application entity title of
the remote node) and press <ENTER>.
• Application Entity Title: MR_WLM_RIS
5. When prompted to enter the Hostname:
• Work List Time-out: 20
If is a new application in the network, type:
• Work List Prefetch: No EasyVision (or the remote DICOM Hostname) and
• Remote AE Title: MR1 press <ENTER>.
- or -
Type the TCP/IP Hostname of the (existing) remote
Host supporting your DICOM transfer and press
<ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 731 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Gyroscan DICOM RIS, continued Configure the DICOM RIS AE Title
Define a DICOM RIS Node, continued 1. Logon as Gyrotool.
6. When prompted for the port number enter the port 2. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM
number where EasyVision listens. Parameters.
7. Review the entries made. If the values are correct, 3. Select DICOM AE Titles.
type: yes and press <ENTER>.
4. Adapt the RIS AE Title.
If the Hostname does not exist in the TCP/IP Host
Note The default RIS AE Title is MR_WLM_RIS.
database, the system prompts for the TCP/IP
The title must be unique per site. To avoid
address.
potential problems, only upper case charac-
8. If prompted for the address, type it and press ters should be used.
<ENTER>.
5. Click [PROCEED].
9. To return to the DICOM Management menu, press
6. Click [EXIT].
<ENTER>.
7. Select Exit From Gyrotool.
10. To return to the DICOM SCP/SCU menu, press
<ENTER.
11. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager menu.
12. If a DICOM Import/RIS node needs to be defined,
repeat steps 2 -12.
Note Before you can use the configured DICOM
nodes, a Gyrorestart must be completed.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 732 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Gyroscan DICOM RIS, continued Modify RIS Worklist Timeout
Select a RIS System This value defines the maximum time (in seconds) the
MR DICOM application waits for the worklist response
1. Logon as Gyrotool.
from a DICOM RIS. The maximum time-out for this
2. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM parameter is 360 seconds.
Parameters.
1. Logon as Gyrotool.
3. Select DICOM RIS Selection.
2. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM
4. Select the RIS system. Parameters.
5. Click [PROCEED]. 3. Select DICOM RIS Parameters.
6. Click [EXIT]. 4. Adjust the time-out value as desired.
7. Select Exit From Gyrotool. 5. Click [PROCEED].
6. Click [EXIT].
7. Select Exit From Gyrotool.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 733 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure Gyroscan DICOM RIS, continued Configure RIS DICOM with Easylink Station
Modify RIS Worklist Prefetch Complete the following procedures, in the order
This value can be set to "Yes" when slow responses are indicated, to configure RIS DICOM with Easylink station.
encountered from the RIS system; however, caution • Define the Easylink DICOM RIS Node
should be exercised. Once set to Yes, the worklist is
downloaded again. When the RIS server is used again, • Configure RIS DICOM AE Title
the previously downloaded worklist appears instead of • Select an Easylink RIS System
the newer one. This can create confusing results.
Define the Easylink DICOM RIS Node
Important! If possible, this should be set to No.
1. Logon as System.
1. Logon as Gyrotool.
2. Select DICOM Management > DICOM RIS Service
2. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM Class User.
Parameters.
3. Select Add DICOM SCP/SCU.
3. Select DICOM RIS Parameters.
4. When prompted to enter the DICOM application
4. Adjust the prefetch value as desired. entity, type: VERYEASY and press <ENTER>.
5. Click [PROCEED]. 5. When prompted to enter the Hostname, type: EL1
and press <ENTER>.
6. Click [EXIT].
6. When prompted for the port number, type: 3320 and
7. Select Exit From Gyrotool.
press <ENTER>.
Note Before you can use the configured DICOM
nodes, a Gyrorestart must be completed.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 734 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure RIS DICOM with Easylink Station, Configure RIS DICOM AE Title
continued 1. Logon as Gyrotool.
Define the Easylink DICOM RIS Node, continued 2. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM
7. Review the entries previously made. To save the Parameters.
values, type: yes and press <ENTER>.
3. Select DICOM AE Titles.
If the Hostname does not exist in the TCP/IP Host
4. Enter the RIS AE Title (GYRO_RIS).
database, the system prompts for the TCP/IP
address. Note The default title is MR_WLM_RIS. This name
must be unique within the system. To avoid
8. If prompted for the address, type it and press
<ENTER>. potential problems, only upper case
characters should be used.
9. To return to the DICOM Service Class User menu,
5. Click [PROCEED].
press <ENTER>.
6. Click [EXIT].
10. Select Exit to DICOM Management Menu.
7. Select Exit From Gyrotool.
11. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager Menu.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 735 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure RIS DICOM with Easylink Station, Configure DICOM HC-Printer on Host
continued 1. Logon as Gyrotool.
Select an Easylink RIS System 2. Select Modify System Configuration > Console
1. Logon as Gyrotool. Configuration.
2. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM 3. Select Copy Facilities (Printer Management) >
Parameters. Add a DICOM Printer Type.
3. Select DICOM RIS Selection. • DICOM AE Title must be unique per site; in case
4. Select the RIS system. of more systems, different names must be used.

5. Click [PROCEED]. • A-Z, a-z, 0-9 and underscores are allowed.

6. Click [EXIT]. • Spaces and special characters are not allowed.

7. Select Exit From Gyrotool. Note To help avoid problems/conflicts, try to use
only upper case characters.
Note Before you can use the configured DICOM
nodes, a Gyrorestart must be completed. 4. Enter a new DICOM printer name.
5. Select a DICOM printer from the list that appears.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 736 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Configure DICOM HC-Printer on Host, 12. Click [PROCEED].
continued 13. Select Select a Printer/Camera.
6. Select Modify DICOM Printer Attributes, then
14. Select the newly defined/modified DICOM printer
select the newly defined DICOM printer from the list
from the list.
presented.
15. Click [CANCEL].
Note If the DICOM hardcopy printer provides ser-
vices to more than one Gyroscan system, a 16. Click [CANCEL].
unique SCU AE Title must be defined for
17. Select Exit.
each MR system.
Note Before you can use the configured DICOM
7. At the SCU AE Title field, type a unique SCU AE Title
nodes, a Gyrorestart must be completed.
(PRINT_MR1) and press <ENTER>.
8. At the SCP AE Title field, type a definition of the AE
Title for the DICOM printer and press <ENTER>.
9. Enter the IP address for the DICOM printer.
10. Enter the correct port number.
Note Do not use 0 for the default port number.
11. Verify the listed attributes agree with the attributes
for the selected printer.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 737 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R8.1.1, continued

Delete a DICOM Node 10. If you have to remove the IP address:
1. Logon as System a. Select Exit to DCL.
2. Select DICOM Management. b. At the prompt, type: ucx and press <ENTER>.
3. Select the appropriate entry from the list provided. c. Type: show host and press <ENTER>.
4. Select Delete DICOM SCP/SCU. d. Type: set nohost <hostname> and press
<ENTER>.
5. Enter the name of the application to be deleted.
e. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
6. When prompted to confirm the deletion, type: Yes
and press <ENTER>. f. Type: logout and press <ENTER>.
7. To return to the DICOM Management menu, press g. Click [YES] to confirm.
<ENTER>.
Note The IP address of the deleted DICOM node
8. Select Exit to DICOM Management Menu. must be deleted manually, because the appli-
9. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager Menu. cation does not know if the address is used
elsewhere.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 738 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2

Select one of the following topics: Upgrade Preparation (R8.x to R9.5-2)
• Upgrade Preparation (R8.x to R9.5-2) 1. If the CD drive of the Host is configured as an audio
CD player, de-install it to enable software installation.
• Software Installation for Host Platforms -
Overview 2. Verify that no users are on the system or will try to
access the system before proceeding.
• DEC DS10 Software Installation
3. Verify all of the patient data has been archived and
• DMCC 21164 Software Installation all hard copy jobs have printed. The queue should be
• AS800 Software Installation empty.
• Install MRVMS 4. From the User Login screen, logon as Gyroscan
without using a password.
• Install MRSybase
5. Complete PIQT scans and compare the results to
• Install TSW
specification. If outside specification, the system can
• Install ASW be fixed before or after the software installation is
complete.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 739 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

Upgrade Preparation (R8.x to R9.5-2), g. Record all of the parameters/values displayed.
continued Note There are many which need to be modified
6. Check/record the site-specific parameters. for proper printing.
a. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN h. Click [CANCEL] twice.
UTILITIES].
i. To exit the menu, click [EXIT].
b. Select Enter Service Mode using service as the
j. Select Exit from Gyrotool.
password.
8. Logon as Gyrotest.
c. Select Restore Philips Factory or Site
Parameter Values. Note When the MN option is present, some
customer-modified post processing files
d. Check/record the fixed parameters.
(*.scom) in the gyro$speccom directory will
7. Check/record the site-specific hardcopy be lost during the software upgrade.
configuration parameters.
a. Logon as Gyrotool.
b. When prompted, press <ENTER>.
c. Select Modify System Configuration >
Console Configuration.
d. Select Copy Facilities.
e. Record the camera name for PtP and for DICOM.
f. Select Modify Printer. Select the configured and
used printer name. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 740 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

Upgrade Preparation (R8.x to R9.5-2), 11. Copy the command file that saves the configuration
continued from the CD.
9. Print/record the network databases. a. Insert the CD with the application software into
a. Type: @gyro$com:bslistnet/out=network.log the Host CD drive.
and press <ENTER>. b. Type: mount/over=id gyro_swload and press
<ENTER>.
b. Type: print/delete network.log and press
ENTER>. c. Type: backup/log gyro_swload: [000000]
asw_install.bck/save/
10. Stop running processes.
select=savaswconfig.com [] and press
a. Type: permproc stop and press <ENTER>. <ENTER>.
b. If a process fails to stop, type: permproc and d. Type: dismount gyro_swload and press
press <ENTER>. Identify the number "nnn" of the <ENTER>.
process that did not stop. Type: stop/id=nnn and
e. Remove the CD from the drive.
press <ENTER>. Repeat step "a" to verify all the
processes have been stopped. 12. Insert a new MO Disk in the MO drive.
13. Type: @savaswconfig and press <ENTER>.
14. When prompted if the processes have been stopped,
type: yes and press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 741 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

Upgrade Preparation (R8.x to R9.5-2), A number of *.scom files should be present. If
continued not, repeat step 19 carefully to ensure you do not
15. When prompted to verify a MO disk has been placed make any entry errors.
into the drive, press <ENTER>. 20. If no errors were encountered during the save
16. When prompted to initialize the MO disk, press procedure, continue to step 21.
<ENTER>. - or -
17. When prompted to enter a label for the MO, press If you get an warning message indicating that the
<ENTER>. "Gyro$site:release_id.dat file does not
18. Wait for the save action to finish before continuing. exist":

19. For MR systems with the MN option, copy the a. Logon as Gyrotool.
customer modified post processing files. b. Select Modify System Configuration > Options
a. Type: set def gyro$speccom and press (SW-keys) > View SW Options, Modify Option
Status.
<ENTER>.
c. Change the Basic Software option to No.
b. Type: create/dir gyro_backup:
[000000.speccom]. and press <ENTER>. d. Click [PROCEED]. Click [CANCEL].
c. Type: copy/log <filename1>.scom, e. Select Options (SW-keys) > View SW Options,
<filename2>.scom, <etc.> gyro_backup: Modify Option Status.
[000000.speccom] and press <ENTER>.
f. Change the Basic Software option to Yes.
d. To verify the files have been copied, type: dir
g. Click [PROCEED]. Click [CANCEL].
gyro_backup: [000000.speccom] and press
<ENTER>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 742 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

Upgrade Preparation (R8.x to R9.5-2), A number of *.msl files should be present. If not,
continued repeat this step and ensure you do not make any
h. Exit Gyrotool. entry errors.

i. Repeat step 19 to try and copy the post 22. Copy the TCP/IP Host and MR Nodes databases.
processing files. a. Type: create/dir gyro_backup: [000000.ucx]
and press <ENTER>.
21. Copy the shim files.
b. Type: copy/log sys$system:uxc$host.dat
a. Logon as System.
gyro_backup: [000000.ucx] and press
b. Select Exit to DCL. <ENTER>.
c. Type: mount gyro_backup upgrade and press c. Type: copy/log sys$manager:mrnodes.idx
<ENTER>. gyro_backup: [000000.ucx] and press
<ENTER>.
d. Type: set def [ -.tsw] and press <ENTER>.
d. To verify the files have been copied, type: dir
e. Type: create/dir gyro_backup: [000000.shim]
gyro_backup: [000000.ucx] and press
and press <ENTER>.
<ENTER>.
f. Type: copy/log [.shim] *.msl gyro_backup:
[000000.shim] and press <ENTER>. Two copied files should be present.

g. To verify the files have been copied, type: dir

gyro_backup: [000000.shim] and press
<ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 743 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

Upgrade Preparation (R8.x to R9.5-2),
continued
Host Platform Procedures
23. Type: dismount gyro_backup and press
<ENTER>. DEC DS10 Preparation
Software Firmware Update & Configuration Check
24. Remove the MO disk, write-protect it, and label it SCSI-Differential Settings
Installation
with configuration revision information. SCSI-SE Settings
Environmental Settings
25. To print the HW configuration file, type: print OS Installation
[.runlib] hwconf.dat and press <ENTER>.
DMCC 21164 Preparation
26. Continue to Software Installation for Host Platforms. Software Firmware Update
Installation SCSI-Differential Settings
Software Installation for Host Platforms - SCSI-SE Settings
Overview Environmental Settings
OS Installation
Select the appropriate platform for the required
AS800 Preparation
procedures. Firmware Update & Configuration Check
Software
The procedures must be completed in the order Installation Environmental Settings
SCSI-Differential Settings (KZPSA)
indicated. SCSI-SE Settings
OS Installation

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 744 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

DEC DS10 Software Installation 4. Once the UPD prompt appears, type: list and press
<ENTER>.
Preparation
1. Verify the hospital network has been disconnected 5. If the current revision level is the same as that of the
before continuing. update being applied, continue to step 10.

Note Default network settings may conflict with the - or -

hospital network. If the current revision level is not the same as that of
2. Complete the Upgrade Preparation (R8.x to R9.5- the update being applied, continue to step 6.
2) procedure. 6. At the UPD prompt, type: update and press
Firmware Update & Configuration Check <ENTER>.
Important! If the Host computer is currently at R8.1.1, 7. When prompted to confirm the update, type: Y and
skip this procedure and continue to the OS press <ENTER>.
Installation procedure.
8. Wait for the update to complete.
1. Shutdown the Host without an automatic reboot.
Note The update could take several minutes to
Type: set auto_action halt and press <ENTER>.
complete.
Note This prevents the computer from booting
9. To check the success of the update process, type:
from any device automatically, so any device list and press <ENTER>.
can be booted to manually.
10. At the UPD prompt, type exit and press <ENTER>.
2. Insert the "Firmware Update V5.8" CD ROM in
the appropriate drive.
3. Type: boot dqbl and press <ENTER>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 745 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

DEC DS10 Software Installation, continued 9. To select Enable (F)ast-10 on all devices, press <F>.
SCSI-Differential Settings 10. To confirm your selections, press <Y>.
Important! The relatively lengthy cable to the Recon- 11. To exit, press <X>.
structor requires this card be configured to
operate in Fast-10 Mode (10 MHz). SCSI-SE Settings
1. Select ISP 1020 on virtual slot 17 and press
1. Start the Host in SRM mode.
<ENTER>.
2. At the >>> prompt, type: alphabios and press
2. Select Edit EEROM (D)evice Adapter Parameters
<ENTER>.
and press <ENTER>.
3. Wait for about two minutes until the AlphaBIOS Boot
3. Change the Wide Data Transfer for devices DEV2,
screen appears.
DEV3 and DEV5 to 0 (zero).
4. At the AlphaBIOS Boot screen, press <F2>. The
AlphaBIOS Setup screen appears. 4. Press <O>. To continue, press <Y>.

5. Select Utilities/Run Maintenance Program. Press 5. Press <X> twice. Press <O>. The AlphaBios menu
reappears.
<ENTER>.
6. Remove the firmware update CD from the drive.
6. Enter the program name. Type: utility\eeromcfg.
7. Turn the Host computer OFF, wait 30 seconds, then
7. Press <TAB> and use the <ARROW> keys to
power-ON the Host again. The >>> prompt appears.
change the position to CD:. Press <ENTER>.
8. When prompted to select the ISP 1020 on
virtual slot 16, press <ENTER>.
This is the controller connected to the BDAS and
Reconstructor. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 746 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

DEC DS10 Software Installation, continued 3. When presented a menu for executing DCL
commands, type: 1 (Install Basic Operating System)
Environmental Settings
and press <ENTER>.
1. Insert the DS10 Environmental 8.1.1 floppy in
the appropriate drive. 4. When prompted to enter the device name for the
target disk, type: dkb0 and press <ENTER>. The
2. At the prompt, type: cat fat:srmenv.sh/dva0 > system will prompt that BOS is being installed.
srmenv.sh and press <ENTER>.
Note To display the progress during the installa-
3. Type: srmenv.sh and press <ENTER>. tion, press <CTRL>+<T>.
Environmental settings are applied and the >>>
should reappear. 5. When the menu reappears, type: 6 (Shut down this
system) and press <ENTER>.
4. Remove the disk from the drive.
Important! During shutdown, leave the CD in the drive.
OS Installation
6. Once the >>> prompt appears, remove the system
1. Insert the System Software R8.1-1 CD in the software CD from the drive.
Host computer’s CD-ROM drive.
7. At the prompt, type: boot and press <ENTER>.
2. At the prompt, type: boot dqbl and press <ENTER>
to boot from the CD-ROM. 8. Continue to the Install MRVMS procedure.
Note It will take approximately five minutes to boot.
If prompted to enter the date/time, enter the
date/time using the following format:
DD-MMM-YYY HH:MM.
The system should display CD-BOS version:
5.2-7.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 747 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

DMCC 21164 Software Installation Firmware Update
Preparation Important! If the Host computer is currently at R8.1.1,
skip this procedure and continue to the OS
1. Verify the hospital network has been disconnected
before continuing. Installation procedure.

Note Default network settings may conflict with the 1. Start the Host in SRM mode. Type: set auto_action
halt and press <ENTER>.
hospital network.
2. Insert the "DMCC FSL/FW-Update V5.6" floppy in
2. Complete the Upgrade Preparation (R8.x to R9.5-
the appropriate drive.
2) procedure.
3. At the >>> prompt, type: b dva0 and press
<ENTER>.
4. Once the prompt reappears, type: update -abios
and press <ENTER>.
5. Type: Y and press <ENTER>.
6. Wait for the message "powercycle system to
see changes" to appear, then remove the disk from
the drive.
7. Power the Host OFF, wait 30 seconds, then power
the Host ON.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 748 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

DMCC 21164 Software Installation, continued SCSI-SE Settings
SCSI-Differential Settings 1. Select ISP 1020 on virtual slot 13 and press
<ENTER>.
Important! The relatively lengthy cable to the Recon-
structor requires this card be configured to 2. Select Edit EEROM (D)evice Adapter Parameters
operate in Fast-10 Mode (10 MHz). and press <ENTER>.
1. During startup, press <F2>. The AlphaBIOS Setup 3. Change the Wide Data Transfer for devices DEV2,
menu appears. DEV3 and DEV5 to 0 (zero).
2. Insert the Firmware Repository V5.6 CD in the 4. Press <O>. To continue, press <Y>.
appropriate drive.
5. Press <X> twice. Press <O>. The AlphaBios menu
3. Select Utilities/Run Maintenance Program. Press reappears.
<ENTER>.
6. Remove the firmware update CD from the drive.
4. Enter the program name. Type: cd:\eeromcfg. The
7. Insert the DMCC FAT Firmware V5.6 floppy into
EEROMCFG utility starts.
the appropriate drive.
Note Ignore any message regarding location drive.
8. Select Alphabios Upgrade. The >>> prompt
5. Select ISP 1020 on virtual slot 12 and press appears.
<ENTER>.
6. Select Enable (F)ast-10 on all devices and press
<ENTER>.
7. Type: Y and press <ENTER>. Type: X and press
<ENTER> to exit.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 749 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

DMCC 21164 Software Installation, continued Environmental Settings
SCSI-SE Settings, continued 1. Insert the DMCC Environmental R8.1-1 floppy into
the appropriate drive.
9. At the prompt, type: update -srm and press
<ENTER>. 2. At the >>> prompt, type: cat fat:srmenv.sh/dva0 >
10. Wait for the process to complete and the >>> srmenv.sh and press <ENTER>.
prompt to reappear. 3. Type: srmenv.sh and press <ENTER>. The
environmental settings apply and the prompt
11. Remove the floppy from the drive.
reappears.
12. Turn the Host computer OFF, wait 30 seconds, then
4. Remove the floppy from the drive.
turn the Host ON again. The >>> prompt appears.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 750 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

DMCC 21164 Software Installation, continued 5. When the menu reappears, type: 6 (Shut down this
system) and press <ENTER>.
OS Installation
1. Insert the System Software R7.1-2 CD in the Important! During shutdown, leave the CD in the drive.
Host computer’s CD-ROM drive. 6. Once the >>> prompt appears, remove the system
2. At the prompt, type: boot dka400 and press software CD from the drive.
<ENTER> to boot from the CD-ROM. 7. At the prompt, type: boot and press <ENTER>.
Note It will take approximately five minutes to boot. 8. Continue to the Install MRVMS procedure.
If prompted to enter the date/time, enter the
date/time using the following format:
DD-MMM-YYY HH:MM.
The system should display CD-BOS version:
5.2-6.
3. When presented a menu for executing commands,
type: 1 (Install Basic Operating System) and press
<ENTER>.
4. When prompted to enter the device name for the
target disk, type: dka0 and press <ENTER>. The
system will prompt that BOS is being installed.
Note To display the progress during the installa-
tion, press <CTRL>+<T>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 751 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

AS800 Software Installation Firmware Update & Configuration Check
Preparation Important! If the Host computer is currently at R8.1.1,
skip this procedure and continue to the OS
1. Verify the hospital network has been disconnected
before continuing. Installation procedure.

Note Default network settings may conflict with the The upgrade/downgrade to these versions
hospital network. must be done even if a higher firmware
version is already loaded in the CPU.
2. Complete the Upgrade Preparation (R8.x to R9.5-
2) procedure. 1. Shutdown the Host without an automatic reboot.
2. Insert the "Firmware Update V5.6" CD ROM in
the appropriate drive.
3. Type: set auto_action halt and press <ENTER>.
4. Type: boot dka400 and press <ENTER>.
The system responds with series of release notes,
(e.g., ff.fe.fd.fc....).
5. To skip the display of release notes, press
<CTRL>+<C>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 752 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

AS800 Software Installation, continued 10. When prompted to confirm the update, type: Y and
press <ENTER>.
Firmware Update & Configuration Check,
continued 11. Wait for the update to complete.
6. At the Bootfile prompt, press <ENTER> to use Note The update could take several minutes to
the default bootfile. complete.
7. Once the UPD prompt appears, type: list and press 12. To check the success of the update process, type:
<ENTER>. list and press <ENTER>.
8. If the current revision level is the same as that of the 13. At the UPD prompt, type: exit and press <ENTER>.
update being applied, continue to the
Environmental Settings procedure.
- or -
If the current revision level is not the same as that of
the update being applied, continue to step 9.
9. At the UPD prompt, type: update and press
<ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 753 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

AS800 Software Installation, continued SCSI-Differential Settings (KZPSA)
Environmental Settings 1. At the >>> prompt, type: arc and press <ENTER>.
1. Insert the AS800 Environmental 7.1.2 floppy in 2. Wait for the memory tests to complete.
the appropriate drive.
3. Press <F2>.
2. At the UPD prompt, type: restore nvram and press
4. Wait for the initialization/tests to complete.
<ENTER>.
5. Use the <ARROW> keys to select Utilities.
3. To confirm the update, type: Y and press <ENTER>.
4. Remove the disk from the drive. 6. Select Run Maintenance Program. The system
responds with a Program Name prompt.
5. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
7. Type: cd:\utility\cnfgdiag.exe and press <ENTER>.
8. When prompted to press any key to continue, press
<ENTER>.
The system responds with KZPSA Bus/Slot
information.
9. Press <ENTER>.
10. From the Options menu, use the <ARROW> keys to
select SCSI Options.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 754 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

AS800 Software Installation, continued
SCSI-Differential Settings (KZPSA), continued
11. From the SCSI Options menu, use the <ARROW>
keys to select Configure SCSI Devices.

Device SCSI ID 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Disable Wide Negotiation No No No No No No Yes K No No No No No No No No

Z
Disable Disconnect No No No No No No No P No No No No No No No No
Disable Tagged Queuing No No No No No No Yes S No No No No No No No No
A
Disable Sync Negotiation No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

12. Compare the information that displays with the 16. Press <E> to exit the utility.
information above. If appropriate, change the
17. To save the changes and exit, press <ENTER>.
information on the screen by following the options
detailed on the screen.
13. Once the information in the table is correct, press
<S> to save any changes and exit. The SCSI
Options menu appears.
14. Verify the Set SCSI Reset on Boot option is set to
Enabled.
15. Press <S> to save and exit.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 755 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

AS800 Software Installation, continued 5. Press <O>.
SCSI-SE Settings 6. Select Edit EEROM (D)evice Adapter parameters
The KZPBA-CA SCSI controller has an option for a and press <ENTER>.
SCSI-wide interface for devices. Since this is not 7. Change the Wide Data Transfer for devices DEV2,
supported by IIM and MO drive, it must be disabled. DEV3 and DEV5 to 0 (zero).
1. Select Utilities > Run Maintenance Program. 8. Press <O>. To continue, press <Y>.
2. Type: cd:\utility\eeromcfg and press <ENTER>. 9. Press <X> twice. Press <O>. Press <ESC> twice.
The utility that displays allows SCSI controller 10. Remove the CD from the drive.
settings to be changed.
11. Turn the Host computer OFF, wait 30 seconds, then
3. If only Virtual Slot 5 is present, this controller cannot turn the Host ON.
be configured.
12. Continue to the OS Installation procedure.
a. Press <X> to exit.
b. Press <ESC> twice.
c. Remove the CD from the drive. This procedure is
now complete.
- or -
If Virtual Slot 5 is not the only slot present, continue
with the remainder of this procedure.
4. Use the <ARROW> keys to select the SCSI-
controller on Virtual Slot 13.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 756 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

AS800 Software Installation, continued 5. When the menu reappears, type: 6 (Shut down this
system) and press <ENTER>.
OS Installation
1. Insert the System Software R7.1-2 CD in the Important! During shutdown, leave the CD in the drive.
Host computer’s CD-ROM drive. 6. Once the >>> prompt appears, remove the system
2. At the prompt, type: boot dka400 and press software CD from the drive.
<ENTER> to boot from the CD-ROM. 7. At the prompt, type: boot and press <ENTER>.
Note It will take approximately five minutes to boot. 8. Continue to the Install MRVMS procedure.
If prompted to enter the date/time, enter the
date/time using the following format:
DD-MMM-YYY HH:MM.
The system should display CD-BOS version:
5.2-6.
3. When presented a menu for executing commands,
type: 1 (Install Basic Operating System) and press
<ENTER>.
4. When prompted to enter the device name for the
target disk, type: dka0 and press <ENTER>. The
system will prompt that BOS is being installed.
Note To display the progress during the
installation, press <CTRL>+<T>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 757 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

Install MRVMS b. Type: backup/log
dqb1:[000000]mrvms_install.bck/save and
1. Verify the Reconstructor IP address is set to the
default (192.192.192.210). press <ENTER>.

2. Logon as System using manager123 as the 5. Type: mrvms_install and press <ENTER>.
password. 6. When prompted for the installation CD, type: yes
and press <ENTER>.
Note "manager" becomes the password after
MRVMS installation. 7. When prompted if the CD is in the drive, type: yes
and press <ENTER>.
3. Insert the MRVMS & MRSybase & TSW CD in the
appropriate drive. Note The software begins loading. Ignore any
messages that may appear while the
4. For AS800 and DMCC 21164:
software is loading. After approximately one
a. Type: mount/over=id dka400 and press minute a prompt will appear requesting a
<ENTER>. selection of subsystem.
b. Type: backup/log 8. For initial delivered Gyroscan NT installed systems
dka400:[000000]mrvms_install.bck/save and being upgraded to R9.5-2, type: 1 and press
press <ENTER>. <ENTER>.
- or - - or -
For DS10: For initial delivered Intera systems (yellow/orange
system covers) which are installed as, or being
a. Type: mount/over=id dqb1 and press
<ENTER>. upgraded to R9.5-2, type: 2 and press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 758 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

Install MRVMS, continued 13. When the Host and Reconstructor are correctly
connected to the switch, the Host receives a
9. When prompted to modify the local node name/
address, type: no and press <ENTER>. A list of response from the Reconstructor. When the DEC
Windows Login screen appears, the MRVMS-
disks available for selection as the data disk
software installation is complete.
appears.
- or -
10. For AS800 and DMCC 21164, type: dka100 and
press <ENTER>. If there’s a problem (e.g., no switch/Reconstructor
available, incorrect Reconstructor IP address, etc.) a
- or -
warning message appears indicating the
For DS10, type: dkb100 and press <ENTER>. Reconstructor is not available. If this message
appears, continue to step 14.
11. When prompted to enter the system reference
number, type the system reference number and 14. To continue without a Reconstructor, press
press <ENTER>. <ENTER>. A message appears indicating the
system was started without a Reconstructor.
Note The system reference number can be found
inside the console and MDU on a tag 15. To continue, press <ENTER> and wait until the login
(SRN xxxx). screen appears.
12. When prompted to verify your entry in step 11, type: 16. Continue to the Install MRSybase procedure.
yes and press <ENTER>. The software loads,
followed by a double automatic reboot.
Note The entire process takes approximately ten
minutes.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 759 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

Install MRSybase 8. Verify the product to be installed is MRSybase. To
continue, type: yes and press <ENTER>.
1. Logon as System using manager as the password.
9. When prompted to continue even though patient
2. Select Install SW Product and press <ENTER>.
data will be lost, type: yes and press <ENTER>.
3. When prompted to continue, type: yes and press
<ENTER>. Note MRSybase loads after approximately
18 minutes.
4. When prompted if you have the installation medium,
10. When prompted that creation and configuration of
type: yes and press <ENTER>.
the database(s) has completed, press <ENTER>.
5. When prompted if the CD is in the drive, type: yes
11. To continue, press <ENTER>.
and press <ENTER>.
12. When prompted to restart stopped Gyroscan
6. When prompted to enter the type of system, type:
processes, type: no and press <ENTER>.
T5-NT, T10-NT, ACS-NT (15NT) or T30-NT
depending on the system. Then, press <ENTER>. 13. To continue, press <ENTER>.
7. When prompted to enter the number of the software 14. Continue to the Install TSW procedure.
product to be installed, type: 2 and press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 760 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

Install TSW 11. Continue to the Install ASW procedure.
1. Select Install SW Product and press <ENTER>. Install ASW
2. When prompted to continue, type: Yes and press 1. Insert the ASW CD into the appropriate drive.
<ENTER>.
2. Select Install SW Product and press <ENTER>.
3. When prompted if you have the installation medium,
3. When prompted to continue, type: yes and press
type: yes and press <ENTER>.
<ENTER>.
4. When prompted if the CD is in the drive, type: yes
4. When prompted if you have the installation medium,
and press <ENTER>.
type: yes and press <ENTER>.
5. When prompted to enter the number of the software
5. When prompted if the CD is in the drive, type: yes
product to be installed, type: 3 and press <ENTER>.
and press <ENTER>.
6. Verify the product to be installed is TSW. To
6. When prompted to enter the number of the software
continue, type: yes and press <ENTER>.
product to be installed, type: 1 and press <ENTER>.
Note TSW loads after approximately four minutes.
7. Verify the product to be installed is ASW. To
7. When prompted to press Return to exit, press continue, type: yes and press <ENTER>.
<ENTER>.
Note TSW loads after approximately ten minutes.
8. When prompted to restart stopped Gyroscan
processes, type: no and press <ENTER>.
9. To continue, press <ENTER>.
10. When the Main menu displays, remove the CD from
the CD ROM drive in the Host computer.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 761 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Gyroscan R9.5-2, continued

Install ASW, continued
8. When prompted to press Return to continue, press
<ENTER>.
9. When prompted for the name of the patch file, press
<ENTER>.
10. When prompted for the hospital name, press
<ENTER>.
Note The hospital name will be entered later.
11. Exit the configuration menu by pressing <F20>.
Note Ignore any messages related to missing
colons.
12. When prompted to press Return to exit, press
<ENTER>.
13. When prompted to restart stopped Gyroscan
processes, type: yes and press <ENTER>.
14. Wait for approximately ten minutes for the process to
complete. When prompted to press Return to
continue, press <ENTER>.
15. When the Main Menu displays, remove the CD from
the CD ROM drive in the Host computer.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 762 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Operating System Installation/Reinstallation - Gyroscan R9.5-2

Reconstructors
Select one of the following topics: Introduction
• Introduction Reconstructor software is initially installed at the factory,
so the following procedures should only be needed when
• Upgrade W6000/AP550 from R8 to R9
there are major problems with the system, or the hard
• W6000/AP550 Initial Installation disk requires replacement.
• Upgrade XP1000 from R8 to R9 Important! Since the Host will be verifying the presence
of the Reconstructor, the Reconstructor
• XP1000 Initial Installation should be running and connected to the
Intera Network before beginning.
Typically, application software does not have to be
installed on the Reconstructor; the Host automatically
copies it to the Reconstructor when the reconstruction
process is started on the Host.
Important! On an XP1000, Reconstructor MRWNT must
be installed. See the Install MRWNT
procedure.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 763 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Operating System Installation/Reinstallation - Gyroscan R9.5-2 Reconstructors,

continued
Upgrade W6000/AP550 from R8 to R9 W6000/AP550 Initial Installation
1. Complete the W6000/AP550 Initial Installation - Restore BIOS Settings
Restore BIOS Settings procedure. 1. Slide the drawer containing the keyboard/mouse out
2. Complete the W6000/AP550 Initial Installation - of the NTDAC.
Update Firmware procedure. 2. Turn the LCD screen and Reconstructor ON.
3. During the system boot, press <F10>. "Setup"
appears at the lower right side of the Startup screen.
4. Select English as the default language and press
<ENTER>.
5. Insert the appropriate Env/Firmware update disk into
the floppy drive.
6. In the File menu, select Restore Settings from
Diskette and press <ENTER>.
7. When prompted to insert a diskette into drive A,
press <F10>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 764 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Operating System Installation/Reinstallation - Gyroscan R9.5-2 Reconstructors,

continued
W6000/AP550 Initial Installation, continued 5. When prompted to reprogram the firmware with this
image, press <ENTER>.
Restore BIOS Settings, continued
8. When prompted the save/restore was successful, 6. When prompted to backup the existing system ROM,
press <ENTER>. press <ENTER>.

9. In the File menu, select Save Changes and Exit. 7. When the "Caution" window appears, press
Press <ENTER>. <ENTER>.

10. Press <F10>. The Reconstructor will automatically Important! Do not interrupt the reprogramming of the
reboot. firmware.

Update Firmware 8. When prompted the system ROM has be

reprogrammed, press <ENTER>.
1. Complete the Restore BIOS Settings procedure.
9. When prompted to reprogram another device, press
2. Once the Reconstructor has rebooted from the <ESC>.
floppy disk and the Welcome to Compaq window
appears, press <ENTER>. 10. Remove the floppy diskette.
3. Select Compaq System ROM and press <ENTER>. 11. Turn the Reconstructor OFF.
4. Select the version delivered on the floppy and press 12. Continue to the SCSI-Differential Settings
<ENTER>. procedure.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 765 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Operating System Installation/Reinstallation - Gyroscan R9.5-2 Reconstructors,

continued
W6000/AP550 Initial Installation, continued • Host Adapter BIOS: Enabled
SCSI-Differential Settings • HOST SCSI ID: 3
This procedure changes the SCSI ID of the controller • PCI Bus DMA Burst: Enabled
and disables the Host adapter.
• SCSI Bus Reset: Disabled
1. Turn the Reconstructor ON. During the system
startup, press <ALT>+<Q>. The Fast!Util menu • SCSI Bus Reset Delay: 1
appears. 5. To exit the Host Adapter Setting menu, press
2. Select Configuration Settings. Press <ENTER>. <ESC>.

3. Select Host Adapter Settings. Press <ENTER>. 6. Select SCSI Device Settings and press <ENTER>.

4. Change the settings as indicated below: 7. Change the settings as indicated on the following
page.
a. Select Host Adapter with the <DOWN ARROW>
key and press <ENTER>. a. Use <TAB> and <DOWN ARROW> keys until
Sync Offset is selected, press <ENTER>, then
b. Select SCSI Bus Reset with the <DOWN select 12.
ARROW> key and press <ENTER>.
b. Use <TAB> and <DOWN ARROW> keys until
• BIOS Address: CF000 Sync Period is selected, press <ENTER>, then
• BIOS Revision: 4.15 (this can change over time) select 25.

• Interrupt Level: 11
• Host Adapter: Disabled
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 766 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Operating System Installation/Reinstallation - Gyroscan R9.5-2 Reconstructors,

continued
W6000/AP550 Initial Installation, continued
SCSI-Differential Settings, continued

Device SCSI ID 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Enable Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Disconnects Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Check Parity Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Negotiate Wide Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Negotiate Sync Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Tagged Queuing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Enable LUNs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Sync Offset 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Sync Period 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25

8. When the necessary changes have been completed, 11. When prompted if the settings should be saved,
press <ENTER>. select Save Changes and press <ENTER>.
9. To exit the SCSI Device Settings menu, press 12. To exit the utility, press <ESC>.
<ESC>.
13. Continue to the Install BOSWNT_R.
10. To finish, press <ESC>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 767 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Operating System Installation/Reinstallation - Gyroscan R9.5-2 Reconstructors,

continued
W6000/AP550 Initial Installation, continued
Install BOSWNT_R
1. Insert the BOSWNT_R CD into the appropriate drive.
2. Select Reboot System and press <ENTER>. The
system boots from the CD.
3. When the Installation Menu window appears, press
<1> to install BOSWNT_R.
4. When prompted about the partition sizes, press <Y>.
5. When prompted whether the disk can be overwritten,
press <Y>.
6. When prompted if the system should be restarted:
a. Remove the CD from the drive.
b. Press <R>.
The system will boot and BOSWNT_R will be
configured.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 768 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Operating System Installation/Reinstallation - Gyroscan R9.5-2 Reconstructors,

continued
Upgrade XP1000 from R8 to R9 XP1000 Initial Installation
1. Complete the XP100 Initial Installation - SCSI- The XP1000 6/500 computer includes a GUI named
Differential Settings procedure. AlphaBIOS. It can be used to configure the
Reconstructor prior to installing an operating system. In
2. Complete the XP100 Initial Installation - Install
this instance, it is used to configure the hard disk and
Windows NT 4 Service Pack 5 procedure.
install Windows NT.
3. Complete the XP100 Initial Installation - Install
MRWNT procedure.
Check Firmware Level
1. Shutdown Windows NT.
4. Complete the XP100 Initial Installation - Configure
Network Adapter Settings procedure. 2. Restart the system. At the AlphaBIOS Boot screen,
press <F2>. The AlphaBIOS Setup menu appears.
3. Select Display System Configuration.
4. On the Systemboard Configuration screen, verify the
version is 5.70.
5. If the AlphaBIOS version is 5.70, continue to the
SCSI-Differential Settings procedure.
- or -
If the AlphaBIOS version is not 5.70, continue to the
Update Firmware procedure.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 769 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Operating System Installation/Reinstallation - Gyroscan R9.5-2 Reconstructors,

continued
XP1000 Initial Installation, continued SCSI-Differential Settings
Update Firmware 1. Turn the Reconstructor ON. During startup, press
1. Insert the Firmware Update V5.6 CD into the <F2>. The AlphaBIOS Setup menu appears.
appropriate drive. 2. At the AlphaBIOS Setup menu, select Utilities.
2. At the AlphaBIOS Setup screen, select AlphaBIOS 3. From the submenu, select Run Maintenance
Upgrade. The system will be restarted before the Program.
update procedure starts.
Note Verify the Firmware Update V5.6 CD is in the
3. At the APU prompt, type: update and press CD ROM drive.
<ENTER>.
4. Type: cd:\utility\eeromcfg and press <ENTER>.
4. When prompted if you are ready to program the The EEROMCFG program starts.
ROM device, type: Y and press <ENTER>.
5. Select the SCSI Controller on Bus 0.
5. Once programming of the ROM has been
6. Select Edit EEROM (Host)Adapter Parameters.
completed, at the APU prompt, type: exit and press
<ENTER>. 7. Change the Host Adapter Enable from 1 to 0.
6. Turn the Reconstructor OFF. 8. Change the Initiator SCSI ID from 7 to 3.
7. Wait for one minute and turn the Reconstructor ON 9. Press <O>.
again using the main switch.
10. To continue, press <Y>.
Important! While rebooting, leave the CD in the drive.
Following this, the firmware update is
complete.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 770 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Operating System Installation/Reinstallation - Gyroscan R9.5-2 Reconstructors,

continued
XP1000 Initial Installation, continued Install Windows NT 4.0
SCSI-Differential Settings, continued 1. If the Reconstructor is OFF, turn it ON.
11. Select Enable (F)ast-10 For All Devices. 2. When prompted that no operating system selections
12. To continue, press <Y>. were found, or invalid operating system selection,
press <ENTER> to continue.
13. Press <X> twice to exit.
3. Press <F2>. The AlphaBIOS menu appears.
14. Press <O>.
4. Select Hard Disk Setup.
15. Turn the Reconstructor OFF, wait 30 seconds and
turn the Reconstructor ON. 5. If a message appears indicating that no partitions
were found. Continue to step 6.
16. Remove the CD from the drive.
- or -
If a message indicating that no partitions were found
does not display:
a. Delete all the available partitions using the
<DEL> key.
b. Press <ESC> to exit the Hard Disk Setup menu.
c. Re-enter the Hard Disk Setup menu. The
message indicating that no partitions were found
should now display. Continue to step 6.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 771 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Operating System Installation/Reinstallation - Gyroscan R9.5-2 Reconstructors,

continued
XP1000 Initial Installation, continued 12. When prompted that setup could not determine the
computer type:
Install Windows NT 4.0, continued
6. To automatically create two partitions for Windows a. From the menu of computers, select Other.
NT, press <F10>. b. Insert the HAL XP1000 floppy disk in drive A:.
7. To continue, press <ENTER>. Two partitions should c. Press <ENTER>.
now be available.
d. Select Compaq Professional Workstation
8. To exit the Hard Disk Setup menu, press <ESC>. XP1000.
The AlphaBIOS Setup menu appears.
e. When prompted to insert the disk labeled
9. Insert the Windows NT Workstation 4.0 CD into the manufactured supplied hardware support, leave
appropriate drive. the HAL floppy in the drive and press <ENTER>.
10. In the AlphaBIOS Setup menu, select Install
windows NT.
11. If the system indicates that no system partition exists
and a FAT partition must be selected as a system
partition, select Disk 0, Partition 2 (6 MB FAT
partition). Setup Loader will run from the CD.
Note During the next (Setup Loader) phase, a
floppy will be used which contains the hard-
ware abstraction layer and the Adaptec
controller driver for the CD ROM device.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 772 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Operating System Installation/Reinstallation - Gyroscan R9.5-2 Reconstructors,

continued
XP1000 Initial Installation, continued 16. At the Welcome to Setup screen, press <ENTER> to
setup Windows NT.
Install Windows NT 4.0, continued
13. When prompted the system could not determine the Important! Setup should list the recognized SCSI
type of the mass storage devices: adapters - one SCSI and one IDE controller
must be displayed.
a. Press <S> to select an additional controller.
17. To continue, press <ENTER>. The license
b. Select Other. agreement appears.
Note One SCSI adapter (for the internal hard disk) 18. Page-down to the end of the text. To agree, press
is automatically found. the second must be <F8>.
configured manually.
19. Verify the displayed list of hardware/software
14. When prompted to insert a disk: components matches that of the computer.
a. Leave the HAL disk in the floppy drive and press 20. Press <ENTER>. Setup lists existing partitions.
<ENTER>.
21. Select the first, largest partition on which Windows
b. Select ATAPI (IDE). NT will be installed. Press <ENTER>.
c. To continue, press <ENTER>. 22. Select Convert the Partition to NTFS. Press <C> to
15. When prompted that setup will now load support for convert.
the following storage devices, press <ENTER. Note Converting this drive to NTFS renders it
Setup enters the Text Mode phase. inaccessible to operating systems other than
WIndows NT.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 773 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Operating System Installation/Reinstallation - Gyroscan R9.5-2 Reconstructors,

continued
XP1000 Initial Installation, continued 29. For name and organization, enter the name of the
department (MRI, Radiology, etc.) and the name of
Install Windows NT 4.0, continued
the hospital. Click [NEXT].
23. Select \WINNT (default) and press <ENTER>. Setup
examines the disk. Note Do not use the Reconstructor name for the
department name.
24. To confirm, press <ENTER>.
30. Type the CD Key attached to the Microsoft Windows
25. Wait while setup examines the disk and copies the NT booklet and click [NEXT].
required files.
31. For the computer name, type: RECONSTRUCTOR
26. When prompted that this portion of the setup has and click [NEXT].
completed, press <ENTER>. The Reconstructor
restarts. 32. Enter an administrator account password.

Note The Reconstructor will actually restart twice. Important! Do not forget this password. It is necessary
Once, for converting the first partition to to log into the station. "Manager" or
NTFS. The second reboot will start the GUI "manager" should be used.
Mode phase of the process. 33. Confirm the password and click [NEXT].
27. When the Windows NT Workstation Setup dialog 34. For the emergency repair disk, select No and click
box indicates the start of the Gathering Information [NEXT].
phase, click [NEXT].
35. Select Install Most Common Components.
28. Select Typical and click [NEXT].

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 774 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Operating System Installation/Reinstallation - Gyroscan R9.5-2 Reconstructors,

continued
XP1000 Initial Installation, continued 44. For Microsoft TCP/IP properties:
Install Windows NT 4.0, continued • IP Address: 192.192.192.210
36. When prompted you are about to begin the Installing • Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Windows NT Networking phase, click [NEXT].
• Gateway: None (default)
37. Select that this computer will participate on the
network. • Remainder of options must be left as their
defaults.
38. Select Wired to the Network and click [NEXT].
• Click [OK].
Note Do not select the remote access options.
45. When prompted to start the network, click [NEXT].
39. For the network adapter, click [START SEARCH].
Setup should find DEC PCI Fast Ethernet DECchip 46. For the Domain/Workgroup:
21142. Click [NEXT]. a. Select WORKGROUP (default).
40. For network protocols, select TCPIP. Click [NEXT]. b. Workgroup name is WORKGROUP (default).
41. When prompted ready to install networking, click c. Click [NEXT].
[NEXT].
42. For DECchip 21140 based adapter setup, select
10BaseT Full_duplex and click [CONTINUE].
43. When prompted to use DHCP, select No.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 775 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Operating System Installation/Reinstallation - Gyroscan R9.5-2 Reconstructors,

continued
XP1000 Initial Installation, continued 55. When prompted that Windows NT has been installed
successfully:
Install Windows NT 4.0, continued
47. When prompted you are about to begin finishing a. Remove the CD and floppy disks.
setup, click [FINISH]. b. Click [RESTART].
48. On the Time Zone tab, select the appropriate time Windows NT will automatically start.
zone for the location.
Configure Windows NT 4.0 Boot Sequence
49. De-select the Automatically Adjust Clock for
1. To disable the Welcome screen.
Daylight Saving Changes.
a. Logon as Administrator using manager or
50. If incorrect, set the correct date/time.
Manager as the password.
51. Click [CLOSE].
b. Click [CLOSE].
52. When prompted the system has found a VGA
adapter, click [OK]. 2. To reduce the boot time:

53. Select the following display properties: a. Select Start > Settings > Control Panel.

• Color Palette: 16 Colors b. Double-click the System icon.

• Refresh Frequency: Use Hardware Default c. Select the Startup/Shutdown tab.

Settings d. In the Show list for...seconds field, enter 0 (zero).
• Desktop Area: Resolution: 640 by 480 pixels. e. Click [OK] and close Control Panel.
54. Click [OK]. Files begin copying to the disk.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 776 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Operating System Installation/Reinstallation - Gyroscan R9.5-2 Reconstructors,

continued
XP1000 Initial Installation, continued 7. When prompted to restart the system after SP is
installed, click [RESTART].
Install Windows NT 4 Service Pack 5
1. Logon as Administrator using manager or Note Following the reboot, when the Host is not
Manager as the password. running, a message regarding a missing
drive may appear. The situation will become
2. Close (do not minimize) all applications. normal when the Host is booted.
3. Insert the CD containing the MRWNT product. Install MRWNT
4. To install the Service Pack: Note MRWNT configures the Windows NT operating
a. On the Desktop, double-click the My Computer system, so Reconstructor can be used as the
reconstructor in an MR scanner.
icon.
1. Use the Administrator account to logon the
b. Double-click the E: device (CD-ROM player).
Reconstructor computer.
c. Double-click the NT4Sp5 directory.
2. If a welcome message displays, select the option
d. Double-click sp5alpha.exe. disabling the welcome screen in the future.
A setup screen appears. 3. Click [CLOSE].
5. Select Accept the License Agreement and click 4. On the Desktop, double-click the My Computer
[INSTALL]. icon.
6. If prompted to have service pack setup replace an 5. Double-click the E: device (CD-ROM player).
existing computer vendor file, click [YES].
6. Double-click the Mrwnt directory.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 777 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Operating System Installation/Reinstallation - Gyroscan R9.5-2 Reconstructors,

continued
XP1000 Initial Installation, continued Configure Network Adapter Settings
Install MRWNT, continued 1. Logon as Administrator using manager or
7. Double-click the mwsetup installation procedure. Manager as the password.

8. When a message appears indicating the installation 2. Right-click the Network Neighborhood icon.
folder is C:\Temp\MWINST_A, click [CONTINUE]. 3. Select Properties.
The MRWNT_Welcome screen appears.
4. Select the Adapter tab.
9. Click [NEXT]. MRWNT files are copied and the
5. Select Properties.
MRWNT product installed.
6. From the Connection Type dropdown list, select
10. When prompted to enter the TCP/IP address of the
Host, type: 192.192.192.201 and press <ENTER>. 10BaseT Full_Duplex. Click [OK].

11. When prompted to restart the computer: 7. Click [CLOSE].

a. Select Yes. 8. When prompted to restart the computer, select

[YES].
b. Click [FINISH]. The system reboots.
Note Following the reboot, when the Host is not
running, a message regarding a missing
drive may appear. The situation will become
normal when the Host is booted.
12. Once the system has rebooted, remove the CD from
the drive.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 778 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System

Select one of the following topics: Reset Ethernet Switch to Factory Defaults
• Reset Ethernet Switch to Factory Defaults Before the network switch can be used:
• Vlan and Port Configuration • the switch must be reset to its factory defaults, and
• Default Setup - Reconstructor Type, Name and IP • virtual LAN configuration of the switch must be
Address on Host completed.
• Default Setup - Printer Server on Host Important! To configure the Ethernet switch, open an
RS232 connection to it. Verify the serial cable
• Gyrotool Configuration
is connected between the Host and Ethernet
• Restore Site-specific Settings (From Previous switch.
Release) Note With this software, the Ethernet switches will
• Setup TSW have no IP address.
• Update Patient Support PLC Firmware 1. Logon as System.
• Protocol Filtering 2. Select Configure Hardware (Options).
3. Select Install Ethernet Switch. The Ethernet Switch
Management menu appears.
4. Select RS232 Connection to the Ethernet Switch.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 779 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Reset Ethernet Switch to Factory Defaults, Reset Cisco 1548M to Factory Defaults
continued 1. Press <ENTER>. The # prompt appears.
5. Depending on the Ethernet switch involved, select Note If the # prompt fails to appear, type: enable
one of the following: and press <ENTER>.
• Reset HP2512 to Factory Defaults 2. At the # prompt, type: delete nvram and press
• Reset Cisco 1548M to Factory Defaults <ENTER>.
• Reset Compaq Netelligent 5708TX to Factory 3. When prompted to reset the system configuration,
Defaults type: Y and press <ENTER>.
Reset HP2512 to Factory Defaults Following the powerup, the login screen appears via
the RS232 link.
1. To synchronize speed, press <ENTER> twice.
4. When prompted to continue with configuration
2. When prompted to press any key, press <ENTER>.
dialog, type: n and press <ENTER>.
3. At the HP ProCurve Switch 2512# prompt, type:
5. When prompted to get started, press <ENTER>.
erase startup-config and press <ENTER>.
6. When prompted to end the session, type: exit and
4. When prompted the configuration will be deleted and
the device rebooted, type: Y and press <ENTER>> press <ENTER>.

5. Continue to the Vlan and Port Configuration 7. Continue to the Vlan and Port Configuration
procedure.
procedure.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 780 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Reset Ethernet Switch to Factory Defaults,
continued
Reset Compaq Netelligent 5708TX to Factory
Defaults
1. To open the main menu, enter the Ethernet switch
password.
a. Type: admin.
b. Press <ENTER>.
2. Use the cursor keys to select the Reset menu and
press <ENTER>.
3. Select Reset EEprom to Factory Default Value
and press <ENTER>.
4. When prompted to verify, use the right <ARROW>
key to select Yes. Press <ENTER>.
After a couple of minutes, the switch will reboot and
display self test results.
5. Continue to the Vlan and Port Configuration
procedure.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 781 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Vlan and Port Configuration 7. For Reconstructor XP1000, type: interface 2 speed-
duplex 10-full and press <ENTER>.
Depending on the Ethernet switch involved, select one of
the following: - or -
• HP2512 Port Configuration For Reconstructor W6000 or AP550, type: interface
• Cisco 1548 Vlan and Port Configuration 2 speed-duplex Auto and press <ENTER>.

• Compaq Netelligent 5708TX Vlan and Port 8. Type: vlan 1 and press <ENTER>.
Configuration 9. Type: no id address and press <ENTER>.
HP2512 Port Configuration 10. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
1. At the HP ProCurve Switch 2512# prompt, type: 11. Type: write memory and press <ENTER>.
configure and press <ENTER>.
12. Type: reload and press <ENTER>.
2. Type: port-isolation and press <ENTER>.
13. Type: sho config and press <ENTER>. The
3. When prompted to continue with enabling port previously entered configuration information
isolation, type: Y and press <ENTER>. displays.
4. Type: port-isolation ethernet 1 mode public and Note Unmentioned ports 8-12 are factory default:
press <ENTER>. Uplink and Auto speed-duplex.
5. Type: port-isolation ethernet 2-7 mode local and
press <ENTER>.
6. Type: interface 1 speed-duplex 100-full and press
<ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 782 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Vlan and Port Configuration, continued Cisco 1548 Vlan and Port Configuration
HP2512 Port Configuration, continued 1. Type: enable and press <ENTER>.
14. Type: exit and press <ENTER>. 2. At the # prompt, type: configure and press
<ENTER>.
15. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
3. Type: ip state user and press <ENTER>.
16. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
4. Type: no ip address and press <ENTER>.
17. When prompted to log out, type: Y and press
<ENTER>. 5. Type: interf fast 0/1 and press <ENTER>.
18. Press <CTRL>+<\>. 6. Type: vlan all and press <ENTER>.
19. When prompted to return to the main menu, press 7. Type: duplex full and press <ENTER>.
<ENTER>.
8. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
20. Select the Exit to Hardware Option menu.
9. Type: interf fast 0/8 and press <ENTER>.
10. Type: vlan 1 and press <ENTER>.
11. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 783 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Vlan and Port Configuration, continued 24. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
Cisco 1548 Vlan and Port Configuration, 25. Type: interf fast 0/6 and press <ENTER>.
continued
26. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>.
12. Type: interf fast 0/2 and press <ENTER>.
27. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
13. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>.
28. Type: interf fast 0/7 and press <ENTER>.
14. For Reconstructor XP1000, type: duplex full and
press <ENTER>. 29. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>.
- or - 30. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
For Reconstructor W6000 or AP550, type: duplex 31. Type: end and press <ENTER>.
auto and press <ENTER>. 32. Type: show vlan and press <ENTER>. Vlan and
15. Type: exit and press <ENTER>. port information displays.
16. Type: interf fast 0/3 and press <ENTER>. 33. Type: show ip and press <ENTER>. IP, Subnet and
Gateway information displays.
17. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>.
Note The IP address should be 0.0.0.0.
18. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
34. Press <CTRL>+<\>.
19. Type: interf fast 0/4 and press <ENTER>.
35. When prompted to return to the main menu, press
20. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>. <ENTER>.
21. Type: exit and press <ENTER>. 36. Select the Exit to Hardware Option menu.
22. Type: interf fast 0/5 and press <ENTER>.
23. Type: vlan 2 and press <ENTER>. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 784 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Vlan and Port Configuration, continued Important! Start with Group2 ports before moving on to
Group1 ports. Doing so will avoid unneces-
Compaq Netelligent 5708TX Vlan and Port
Configuration sary warnings indicating that each port
should at least belong to one group.
Note At the end of the previous powerup sequence,
the login screen appears via the RS232 link. Ignore any message indicating that STA
1. To open the main menu, enter the Ethernet switch would not run due to multiple groups in the
password. switch.
a. Type: admin. 6. To assign a port to a particular port group, use the
cursor keys to highlight the group number for the
b. Press <ENTER>. desired port and press <ENTER>. The system
2. Select IP State: IP Disabled. prompts if you want to join this group.
3. Select Return to Previous Menu. 7. Use the <ARROW> keys to change the port group
entry to No.
4. From the main menu, select Virtual LAN
Configuration. 8. To confirm your selection, press <ENTER>.
5. Select Port Grouping and press <ENTER>. The
Port Grouping Configuration displays.
Note The current information reflects the results of
resetting the switch to factory defaults. The
following steps will configure the switch for
the MR system.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 785 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Vlan and Port Configuration, continued 10. At the end of the Virtual LAN Configuration, press
<CTRL>+<N>. The main menu appears.
Compaq Netelligent 5708TX Vlan and Port
Configuration, continued 11. Select the Port Configuration menu and press
9. Repeat the previous steps until the Port Grouping <ENTER>.
Configuration reflects the information detailed below. 12. Use the <ARROW> keys to select Duplex Entry for
Port 1. Press <ENTER>.
Group
Port 13. Use the left/right <ARROW> keys to change the
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 Duplex Setting for Port 1 to Full.
1 Yes Yes No No No No No No 14. Use the <ARROW> keys to select Duplex Entry for
2 Yes No No No No No No No Port 2. Press <ENTER>.
3 Yes No No No No No No No 15. For Reconstructor XP1000, use the left/right
<ARROW> keys to change the Duplex Setting for
4 Yes No No No No No No No
Port 2 to Full.
5 Yes No No No No No No No
- or -
6 Yes No No No No No No No
For Reconstructor W6000 or AP550, use the left/
7 Yes No No No No No No No
right <ARROW> buttons to change the Duplex
8 No Yes No No No No No No Setting for Port 2 to Auto.
16. To confirm the choice, press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 786 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Vlan and Port Configuration, continued Default Setup - Reconstructor Type, Name and
Compaq Netelligent 5708TX Vlan and Port IP Address on Host
Configuration, continued 1. Logon as System.
17. After completing port configuration, press 2. Select Configure Hardware (Options).
<CTRL>+<N>. The main menu appears.
3. Select Reconstructor Management Menu.
18. Select Logoff.
4. Select Select Reconstructor.
19. When prompted to confirm, use the right <ARROW>
key to select Yes and press <ENTER>. 5. For Reconstructor XP1000, type: alpha and press
<ENTER>.
20. Press <CTRL>+<\>.
- or -
21. Press <ENTER>.
For Reconstructor W6000 or AP550, type: intel and
22. At the Configure Ethernet Switch menu, select the press <ENTER>.
Exit to Hardware Option menu.
The choice is confirmed and displays a warning
regarding modifying the network configuration.
6. To return to the Reconstructor Management menu,
press <ENTER>.
7. Select Modify Network Configuration
Reconstructor.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 787 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Default Setup - Reconstructor Type, Name and Default Setup - Printer Server on Host
IP Address on Host, continued This procedure retrieves the print server’s MAC address.
8. When prompted to enter the Host name of the
1. Verify the following:
Reconstructor, press <ENTER>.
• Printer is turned ON.
9. When prompted to enter the internet address for
Reconstructor, press <ENTER>. • Print server is turned ON.
Note A warning message indicating the system • Parallel cable is connected between the print
reconstructor is not reachable will appear if server and printer.
the reconstructor is not yet configured and/or
2. On the print server, press the [TEST] button. A
switched ON.
variety of information (e.g., firmware revision, port
10. When prompted to return to the Reconstructor configuration, LAN HW address, etc.) appears.
Management menu, press <ENTER>.
3. Record the LAN HW address.
11. Select Exit to Configure Hardware (Options)
Note This is the print server’s MAC address.
menu.
4. Select Configure Hardware (Options).
5. Select Install Network Printer (+ queue’s). The
Configure Printers menu appears on the Host.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 788 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Default Setup - Printer Server on Host, 12. To return to the main menu, press <ENTER>.
continued 13. Switch the Ethernet switch power OFF, then ON.
6. To install the HP DeskJet printer, type: 2 and press
14. Switch the print server OFF, then ON.
<ENTER>.
15. Wait for two minutes to allow the print server to boot.
7. When prompted to enter the paper size:
16. To print a test page to verify the printer connection,
For European A4 format, type: A4 and press
select 3 (print test plot).
<ENTER>.
Note The ASCII test plot is adequate for a printer
- or -
connection test.
For US Qualtro format, type: Letter and press
17. Select Exit to Hardware Option.
<ENTER>.
18. Select Exit to the Gyroscan Manager menu.
8. When prompted for the MAC address, enter the LAN
HW address recorded in step 3. 19. To logout, type: 2 and press <ENTER>. Verify your
9. When prompted to enter the Host-name of the Jet intention to logout by clicking [YES].
Direct, press <ENTER>.
10. When prompted for the internet address, press
<ENTER>.
11. When prompted to verify the information, type: yes
and press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 789 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Gyrotool Configuration 5. To change the Service User password:
Important! This procedure is only for initial software a. Select Service Password.
installations.
b. Type the new password (4 chr. min.).
1. Logon as Gyrotool.
c. Press <ENTER>.
2. Select Modify System Configuration > System
6. To change the System User password:
Parameters.
a. Select System Password.
3. To change the date registration format:
a. Select Date Registration Format. b. Type the new password (4 chr. min.).

b. Select the desired format and press <ENTER>. c. Press <ENTER>.

c. Click [CANCEL].
4. To change the name of the hospital:
a. Select Installation > Hospital Name.
b. Type the name of the hospital (30 chr. max.).
c. Press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 790 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Gyrotool Configuration, continued 10. To add a camera:
7. To enter the Software Keys: a. Select Console Configuration > Graphics
Printer Driver.
a. Select Options (SW-keys).
b. Enter the specified values. Click [PROCEED].
b. Select Display/Register Permanent Key.
c. Select Copy Facilities.
c. To erase the key field, press <F14>.
Note For additional information on printer type
d. Enter the permanent key.
selection, press the <i> help button.
e. To validate the key, click [PROCEED].
d. For a P2P camera, select the type.
8. If you also have Temporary Software Keys, they
e. For a DICOM camera, add new camera, copy the
must also be re-entered.
DICOM attribute values from an existing camera
Note The temporary key must have the same lock- and validate the settings.
type as the permanent key. If not, contact the
f. Click [PROCEED].
department who authorizes the key.
g. Select Image Interface Module and enter the
a. Select Display/Register Temporary Keys.
appropriate values.
b. To erase the key field, press <F14>.
h. Click [PROCEED].
c. Enter the temporary key.
i. Click [CANCEL].
d. To validate the key, click [PROCEED].
9. To exit the Options menu, click [CANCEL]

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 791 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Gyrotool Configuration, continued 12. To select the Coil Configuration:
11. To select the Scanner HW Configuration: a. Select Coil Administration.
a. Select Hardware Configuration. b. Enter the coil configuration information.
b. Make the appropriate entries. c. To confirm the coil configuration information, click
[PROCEED].
Note For additional information on options,
press the <i> help button. Note If the incorrect version is selected, the coil
will not work with the system.
c. When the desired changes have been made,
click [PROCEED]. 13. Click [EXIT].
d. If a message appears indicating a restart of the 14. To exit Gyrotool, type: 1 and press <ENTER>.
scanner by entering Gyrorestart is required, click
[PROCEED].

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 792 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Restore Site-specific Settings (From Previous 7. Check the log file on errors:
Release) a. Type: type/p sys$login:resaswconfig.log and
Important! This procedure is only for upgrade software press <ENTER>.
installations.
– Ignore error indicating the read hard copy
1. Logon as Gyrotest. protocol file failed; file not converted.
Note During the first logon as Gyrotest user, a new – Ignore errors on "coil_other...doesn’t exist"
password should be set. conversions in the file.
2. At the prompt, type: permproc stop and press Note Coil names for other_1 -> other_6 are
<ENTER> to stop all the permanent processes. renamed to other_1h, other_31p, etc.
3. Insert the MO disk prepared during the Upgrade 8. To copy the DICOM profile files, type: copy
Preparation (R8.x to R9.5-2) procedure. gyro$site_origin:*.pro gyro$site and press
4. At the prompt, type: @gyro$com:bsresaswconfig <ENTER>.
and press <ENTER>.
5. When prompted if all the processes are stopped,
type: yes and press <ENTER>.
6. When prompted if the MO disk is in the drive, press
<ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 793 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Restore Site-specific Settings (From Previous 12. To enter the new permanent software key(s):
Release), continued a. Logon as Gyrotool.
9. For MR systems with the MN option, copy any
b. Select Modify System Configuration > Options
customer-modified post processing files.
(SW-keys).
a. Type: mount gyro_backup/over=id and press
c. Select Display/Register Permanent Key.
<ENTER>.
d. To erase the key field, press <F14>.
b. Type: set def gyro$speccom and press
<ENTER>. e. Enter the permanent key.
c. Type: copy/log gyro_backup: f. To validate the key, click [PROCEED].
[000000.speccom] and press <ENTER>.
13. To enter the new temporary software key(s):
d. Type: dismount gyro_backup and press
a. Select Display/Register Temporary Key.
<ENTER>.
b. To erase the key field, press <F14>.
10. To exit Gyrotest, type: logout and press <ENTER>.
c. Enter the temporary key.
11. If you have received a new key (temporary/
permanent) with new options, continue to step 12. d. To validate the key, click [PROCEED].
- or - 14. Click [CANCEL] to exit the Options menu.
If you have not received a new key, continue to step
15.
Note Existing SW keys have been restored from
the previous release.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 794 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Restore Site-specific Settings (From Previous Important! A Quad Knee-Foot coil is added for R9.5-2
Release), continued on Tesla systems 1.0 and 1.5.
15. Check the scanner hardware configuration. This coil needs to be enabled.

a. Select Hardware Configuration. 17. Enter the hardcopy camera settings:

b. Make the appropriate entries. a. Select Console Configuration > Copy

Facilities (Printer Management).
Note For additional information on options,
b. For a P2P camera, select the type.
press the <i> help button. New configu-
ration parameters may be present c. For a DICOM camera, add new camera, copy the
(depending on the original release). DICOM attribute values from an existing camera
and validate the settings.
c. When the desired changes have been made,
click [PROCEED]. d. Click [PROCEED].
d. If a message appears indicating a restart of the e. Click [CANCEL] twice.
scanner by entering Gyrorestart is required, click
f. Click [EXIT].
[PROCEED].
g. Type: 1 and press <ENTER> to exit Gyrotool.
16. To check the Coil Configuration:
a. Select Coil Administration.
b. Check coil configuration information.
c. To confirm coil configuration, click [PROCEED].
Note If the incorrect version is selected, the coil
will not work with the system.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 795 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Restore Site-specific Settings (From Previous Setup TSW
Release), continued Use the following procedure to inspect/adjust the TSW
18. Restore the Shim Files. configuration file.
a. Logon as System. Note During first logon, the automatic update com-
mand updates most of the configuration file, but it
b. Select Exit to DCL.
is still recommended that the file be checked.
c. Type: mount gyro_backup upgrade and press
1. Logon as TSW.
<ENTER>.
2. Once the initialization has completed, type: conf and
d. Type: set def [-.tsw] and press <ENTER>.
press <ENTER>.
e. Type: copy/log gyro_backup: [000000.shim]
3. Press <ENTER> to inspect the file.
*.msl [.shim] and press <ENTER>.
4. To continue reviewing the file, press <ENTER>.
f. Type: dismount gyro_backup and press
<ENTER>. 5. To manually edit the file:
g. Type: logout and press <ENTER>. a. Type: edit and press <ENTER>.
19. Click [SESSION]. b. Enter your name, system ID and a reason for
editing the file.
20. Click [END SESSION].
c. Edit the file as needed. When finished, press
21. Click [YES].
<CTRL>+<Z>. A * prompt appears.
d. Type: exit and press <ENTER> to save any
changes.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 796 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Update Patient Support PLC Firmware
Important! The following procedure only applies to
systems equipped with an MT or Intera
patient support.
1. Determine the patient table stroke.
a. Logon as TSW.
b. Type: TPAT and press <ENTER>.
c. Type: run adjustments table_length and press
<ENTER>.
d. Follow the prompts that appear on the screen.
2. Type: quit and press <ENTER>.
3. Type: logout and press <ENTER>.
4. Click [YES].

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 797 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Protocol Filtering 2. Logon as Gyrotest.
Important! This procedure is critical to the software Note "gyrotest" is normally the password.
installation process.
3. At the prompt, type: @gyro$com:bsppinstall and
Correct protocols for available options/coils are selected press <ENTER>.
and Philips protocol states change from "unlocked" to
4. When prompted that protocols will be installed...and
"locked", so during the next filtering (when an upgrade or
a new coil/other option is installed) the system will do you want to continue,
recognize the protocols as Philips protocols, and will a. Verify the field strength and gradient
therefore not copy them. configuration are correct.
Note Unlocked protocols are interpreted as "user- b. Type: yes and press <ENTER>.
defined".
5. If prompted that no user protocols were found, type:
yes and press <ENTER>>
Caution Protocol conversion/filtering to software
R9.5-2 is only supported for R4.7, R5.7, Note This message will appear during an initial
R6.7, R7.x and R8.x protocol databases. installation.
Import of protocol databases from older Protocols will now be filtered. The process will take
software releases and/or other scanners from 10 to 45 minutes. Filtering will be complete
is unreliable. when a message displays indicating "Job
PPInstall completed."
1. Ensure that all software option keys, hardware
configuration and coils are correctly set in Gyrotool.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 798 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Protocol Filtering, continued g. Type: copy/log gyro_backup:
[000000.upgrade] ppdb.idx [] and press
6. To check for accurate filtering:
<ENTER>.
a. Type: type/page ppinstall.log and press
<ENTER. h. Type: gyrorestart and press <ENTER>. The
application software starts.
b. Verify that no errors are present.
i. Select New Patient > Acquisition Context > PP
7. If the conversion program crashes during batch Admin.
execution, use the following to identify/remove the
j. Select Anatomy from where to remove the
problematic/old release protocol from the database:
customer protocol.
a. To identify the last converted protocol in the log
k. Select Select Subanatomy preset procedures.
file, type: type gyro$log:ppinstall_conv.log and
press <ENTER>. l. Select Subanatomy from where to remove the
b. Record the anatomy, subanatomy and protocol customer protocol.
name. m. Select Delete Procedure.
c. Type: set def gyro$site and press <ENTER>. n. Enter the number corresponding to the protocol
name being removed.
d. Delete the unfinished "newly created" database.
Type: delete ppdb.idx and press <ENTER>.
e. Insert the MO disk containing the old release
data in the MO drive.
f. Type: mount/over=id gyro_backup: and press
<ENTER>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 799 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Intera - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Protocol Filtering, continued
o. When prompted to confirm the deletion request,
type: yes and press <ENTER>.
p. Click [CANCEL].
q. To leave Intera, select System > Exit.
r. Restart protocol filtering.
8. When finished:
a. Type: logout and press <ENTER>.
b. Double-click the ManagerNTScan icon.
c. Select Session-End > End Session.
d. Click [YES].
9. Continue to the Adapt Intera to Connect to the
Hospital LAN - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System
procedures.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 800 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Adapt Intera to Connect to the Hospital LAN - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System

Select one of the following topics: Adapt Network Settings Following SW
• Adapt Network Settings Following SW Installation Installation
When the hospital network must be connected to the
• Adapt Network Settings After Upgrade Installation
Intera workgroup, all of the workgroup items must be
• Rebuild MR Nodes Database configured separately.
• Check the IQ and Network Applications Important! Direct the network administrator to exclude
the Intera workgroup IP addresses from their
pool if the hospital uses DHCP servers for
the network computers. This will help prevent
duplicate addresses from occurring.
The following must be completed (in the order indicated)
to complete network configuration for the basic system.
1. Adapt Local Host Name & IP Address on
Reconstructor
2. Adapt Reconstructor Host Name & IP Address on
Host
3. Adapt Local Host Name and IP Address on Host
4. Adapt Domain Name on Host
5. Adapt Ethernet Switch to Hospital LAN
6. Adapt Print Server on Host
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 801 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Adapt Intera to Connect to the Hospital LAN - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System,

continued
Adapt Network Settings Following SW g. In the IP Address field, enter the Reconstructor’s
Installation, continued TCP/IP address.
Adapt Local Host Name & IP Address on Note 192.192.192.212 is the default, unless
Reconstructor changed by the network administrator.
1. For W6000/AP550: h. In the Subnet Mask field, enter the Subnet Mask.
a. Slide the drawer with the keyboard, mouse and Note The Default Gateway setting is None.
LCD screen out of the NTDAC. Turn the LCD The remaining fields should be left at
ON. their default settings.
b. On the Reconstructor, logon as MRSystem using i. Click [OK].
manager as the password.
j. Click [OK].
c. Select Start > MR Configuration > Network.
k. Shutdown and restart the Reconstructor.
d. Select the Identification tab. Click [CHANGE].
l. Wait for Windows NT to start completely.
e. If not already completed, enter
RECONSTRUCTOR as the Host name. Click m. Turn the LCD in the NTDAC drawer OFF.
[OK].
f. Select the Protocol tab. Click [PROPERTIES].

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 802 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Adapt Intera to Connect to the Hospital LAN - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System,

continued
Adapt Network Settings Following SW i. Select the Protocol tab. Click [PROPERTIES].
Installation, continued j. In the IP Address field, enter the Reconstructor’s
Adapt Local Host Name & IP Address on TCP/IP address.
Reconstructor, continued
k. In the Subnet Mask field, enter the Subnet Mask.
2. For XP1000:
Note Default Gateway is None. Remaining
a. Slide the drawer containing the keyboard, mouse fields should be left at default settings.
and LCD screen out of the NTDAC. Turn the LCD
ON. l. Click [OK]. Click [OK].
b. Logon as Administrator using manager as the m. Select Close.
password. n. Restart the computer, click [YES].
c. Right-click Network Neighborhood. Select o. Wait for Windows NT to start completely.
Properties.
p. Turn the LCD in the NTDAC drawer OFF.
d. Select the Adapter tab. Select Properties.
e. Select the Connection Type dropdown list.
Select 10BaseT Full-duplex.
f. Click [OK].
g. Select the Identification tab. Click [CHANGE].
h. If not already completed, enter
RECONSTRUCTOR as the Host name. Click
[OK]. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 803 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Adapt Intera to Connect to the Hospital LAN - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System,

continued
Adapt Network Settings Following SW 6. When prompted for the new IP address, enter the
Installation, continued address and press <ENTER>.
Adapt Reconstructor Host Name & IP Address on 7. Press <ENTER> to return to the Reconstructor
Host Management menu.
1. Logon as System. 8. Select Exit to Configure Hardware (Options)
2. Select Configure Hardware (Options). Menu.
3. Select Reconstructor Management Menu. 9. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager Menu.
4. Select Modify Network Configuration
Reconstructor.
5. When prompted for the Reconstructor Host name,
enter the name (provided by the local administrator)
and press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 804 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Adapt Intera to Connect to the Hospital LAN - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System,

continued
Adapt Network Settings Following SW 4. When prompted to update the databases, type: yes
Installation, continued and press <ENTER>.
Adapt Local Host Name and IP Address on Host 5. When prompted to reboot, type: yes and press
1. Logon as System. <ENTER>.

2. Select Network Management. The system will actually reboot twice during the next
10 minutes.
3. Select Modify Local Node Name and/or
Addresses. 6. Wait for the logon screen before continuing.

The system responds with a series of prompts

requiring the entry of the following:
• New Local Node Name (6 chr. max.)
• DECnet Node Address
• Internet Address (TCP/IP)
• Network Mask
Note Intera does not always prompt the correct
default network mask according the network
class, but may prompt the network mask of
the previous Host configuration.
• Broadcast Mask
• Internet Domain Name Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 805 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Adapt Intera to Connect to the Hospital LAN - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System,

continued
Adapt Network Settings Following SW Adapt Ethernet Switch to Hospital LAN
Installation, continued 1. Complete the Reset Ethernet Switch to Factory
Adapt Domain Name on Host Defaults procedure. The following details the
preferred duplex setting for the Ethernet switch on
1. Logon as System.
the Intera workgroup for several hospital network
2. Select Network Management. types.
3. Select Modify Local Domain.
Network Type Ethernet Switch Setting (Port 8)
The system responds with a warning that domain
100 Mb/s; Full Duplex Full
names are case-sensitive, that lower case names (Highest Network Performance)
should be enclosed in quotation marks.
100 Mb/s; Half Duplex Half
4. When prompted, enter the internet domain name.
10 Mb/s; Full Duplex Full
5. To return to the Network Management menu, press
10 Mb/s; Half Duplex Half
<ENTER>. (Lowest Network Performance)
6. Select Exit to the Gyroscan Manager Menu.
2. Contact the local network administrator for proper
setting port 8.
Note Typically, a Collision Domain (Repeater/Hub)
hospital network connection is a network of
the Half Duplex type.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 806 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Adapt Intera to Connect to the Hospital LAN - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System,

continued
Adapt Network Settings Following SW 4. For Cisco 1548M Vlan and port configuration:
Installation, continued a. Type: enable and press <ENTER>.
Adapt Ethernet Switch to Hospital LAN, continued
b. At the # prompt, type: configure and press
3. For HP 2512 port configuration, at the # prompt, <ENTER>.
type: configure and press <ENTER>.
c. Type: interf fast 0/8 and press <ENTER>.
a. Type: interface 8 speed-duplex 10-full and
press <ENTER>. d. Type: duplex <Full or Half> and press
<ENTER>.
Note Consult with the network manager to
identify if 10-half, 100-half, 10-full or Note Select the full or half duplex value.
100-full should be used at the end of the e. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
command.
f. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
b. Type: write memory and press <ENTER>.
g. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
c. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
d. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
e. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
f. When prompted to logout, type: Y and press
<ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 807 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Adapt Intera to Connect to the Hospital LAN - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System,

continued
Adapt Network Settings Following SW Adapt Print Server on Host
Installation, continued 1. Complete the Default Setup - Printer Server on
Adapt Ethernet Switch to Hospital LAN, continued Host procedure.
5. For Compaq Netelligent 5708TX Vlan and Port 2. Enter the internet address for Host name JetDirect.
Configuration:
Note The JetDirect internet address reflects the
a. To open the main menu, enter the Ethernet hospital LAN sub-net.
switch password. Type: admin. Press <ENTER>.
b. From the main menu, select Port Configuration.
c. Use the <ARROW> keys to select Duplex entry
for port 8.
d. To confirm the selection, select Logoff.
e. When prompted for confirmation, use the right
<ARROW> key to select Yes. Press <ENTER>.
6. To return to the Ethernet Switch Management menu:
a. Press <CTRL>+<\>.
b. Press <ENTER>.
c. Select Exit to Hardware Option Menu.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 808 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Adapt Intera to Connect to the Hospital LAN - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System,

continued
Adapt Network Settings After Upgrade f. Type: set def sys$login and press <ENTER>
Installation g. Type: copy/log gyro_backup: [000000.ucx]
Restore the TCP/IP (UCX) Host Database mrnodes.idx [ ] /prot-w:re and press <ENTER>.
Important! This procedure only applies to software h. Type: dismount gyro_backup and press
upgrades. <ENTER>.
1. Prior to restoring the TCP/IP (UCX) Host database: Remove the Switch from the Host Table
a. The TCP/IP Host and MR Nodes databases must 1. Remove the switch from the Host table:
be saved on MOD.
a. Type: ucx and press <ENTER>.
b. Host/Reconstructor have already gotten their
original Hostname and IP Address back. b. Type: show host and press <ENTER>.

2. To restore the TCP/IP (UCX) Host database: c. If the switch is present from the previous release,
remove it from the host table. Type: set nohost
a. Logon as System. switch and press <ENTER>.
b. Select Exit to DCL. d. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
c. At the prompt, type: mount gyro_backup e. Type: logout and press <ENTER>.
upgrade and press <ENTER>.
2. Connect the Ethernet switch straight output to the
d. Type: set def sys$common: [sysexe] and press hospital network using the UTP cable.
<ENTER>.
e. Type: copy/log gyro_backup: [000000.ucx]
ucx$host.dat [ ] /prot-w:re. Press <ENTER>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 809 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Adapt Intera to Connect to the Hospital LAN - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System,

continued
Rebuild MR Nodes Database Check the IQ and Network Applications
Important! This procedure only applies to software Important! This procedure only applies to software
upgrades. upgrades.
1. Logon as System. 1. To verify image quality:
2. Select Network Management > Rebuild from a. Logon as Gyroscan and wait for the system to
Local/Remote MRNODES Database. start.
3. Select Local. b. Select SPT (scanning).
4. To return to the Network Management menu, press c. Complete the PIQT scans.
<ENTER>.
d. Compare the SNR/FFU results with the new
5. To return to the Gyroscan Manager menu, select release specifications.
Exit.
e. If the results are outside specification, there is a
6. Select Logout. problem with the system.
f. Check the adjustments performed during the
upgrade.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 810 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Adapt Intera to Connect to the Hospital LAN - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System,

continued
Check the IQ and Network Applications, 3. If Easy Vision is connected or a DICOM application
continued is available on the network, check the network link.
2. To check the hardcopy function: a. Select Admin > Administration.
a. Select System > Service. b. Select PIQT Scan.
b. To make a hardcopy of the SMPTE image, select c. Select a DICOM remote station in the Network
HC Screen. box.
c. Click [PROCEED]. d. Select Copy to Remote Station in the Network
box. A message indicating successful network
d. Select Print Job and wait for the film to print.
function appears.
e. Compare the SMPTE film image with the monitor
e. Select a GCOM remote station in the Network
image. Verify all contrast areas are visible on
both. box.
f. Select Copy to Remote Station in the Network
box. A message indicating successful network
function appears.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 811 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Extensions/Modifications - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System

Select one of the following topics: 8. Complete the Protocol Filtering procedure for the
new coil.
• Add New Coils
• Add Clinical Packages on a Running System Add Clinical Packages on a Running System
Note Clinical packages can be added to the system at
• Software Changes (For HW Upgrade)
anytime.
Add New Coils Complete the following procedure when you must install
Note New coils can be added to the system at any- an optional clinical package (e.g., Cardiac) on a running
time. system.
Coils can be designated as NT or Standard. If the Important! The software key must be loaded, and the
incorrect version is selected, the system can not use the package protocols activated to get them
coil. merged to your system protocols.
1. Logon as Gyrotool. 1. Logon as Gyrotool.
2. When prompted to return to the main menu or quit, 2. When prompted to return to the main menu or quit,
press <ENTER>. press <ENTER>.
3. Select Modify System Configuration > Coil 3. Select Modify System Configuration > Options
Administration. (SW-keys).
4. For each new coil, enter NT or Standard. 4. Select Display/Register Permanent Key.
5. To activate the coil selection, click [PROCEED]. 5. To erase the key field, press <F14>.
6. Click [EXIT].
7. To leave Gyrotool, type: 1 and press <ENTER>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 812 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Extensions/Modifications - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Add Clinical Packages on a Running System, Software Changes (For HW Upgrade)
continued 1. Install the new hardware.
6. Enter the new key into the field.
2. Logon as Gyrotool.
7. Click [PROCEED].
3. When prompted to return to the main menu or quit,
8. Click [CANCEL]. press <ENTER>.
9. Click [EXIT]. 4. Select Modify System Configuration > Scanner
Hardware Configuration.
10. To leave Gyrotool, type: 1 and press <ENTER>.
5. Adapt configuration items for exchanged hardware
11. Complete the Protocol Filtering procedure for the
items.
new software option.
6. To activate the new hardware configuration, click
[PROCEED].
7. If a message appears indicating the scanner must be
restarted, click [PROCEED] again.
8. Click [EXIT].
9. To leave Gyrotool, type: 1 and press <ENTER>.
10. Complete the Protocol Filtering procedure for the
new coil.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 813 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Remote DECnet EasyVision Nodes - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System

Add a Remote DECnet EasyVision Node 6. Once all of the entries have been completed and a
1. Refer to the installation manual provided with the prompt appears to review/store the node
information, type: yes and press <ENTER>.
EasyVision for the network configuration of the
EasyVision itself. 7. To return to the main menu, press <ENTER>.
2. Acquire the following information: 8. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager Menu.
• Node Name: (6 chr. max.) Define a Push-node
• DECnet Node Address When an EasyVision workstation is added to the
MRNodes database, it can be defined as a push-node
• EasyVision Station None: Y/N within the Intera application.
• Import/Export Account Username 1. Logon as Gyroscan.
• Import/Export Account Password 2. Select Scan Control > Scan Utility > Select Push-
• Datalink Task Name on Remote Node: Y/N node.
• Datalink Function for "Local" Node: Y/N 3. Select applicable push-node.
• Allow Remote Access by Local Node Users: Y/N 4. Click [PROCEED].
3. Logon as System. 5. Select System > Exit.
4. Select Network Management > Add Remote Node 6. Click [PROCEED] to confirm.
to Local MRNodes Database.
5. Follow the prompts displayed on the screen to enter
the information detailed in step 2.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 814 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System

Select one of the following topics: Function Details
• Introduction DICOM RIS RIS interface for retrieving patient
• Configure Intera DICOM Import/Export w/EasyLink information for the next exam from the
worklist to be examined.
• Configure Intera DICOM RIS Note SW license key required.
• Configure RIS DICOM with Easylink Station DICOM Print User DICOM print function to move DICOM MR
images and related data to a DICOM HC
• Configure DICOM HC-Printer on Host printer.
• Delete a DICOM Node
DICOM AE Title Conventions
Introduction • For the System User, AE Titles and IP Host names
Intera system supports the following DICOM functions: are case sensitive. If mixed-case titles are to be used,
place them between quotes (e.g., "Exp_node_1").
Function Details
• For the Gyrotool User, the DICOM printer AE Titles
DICOM Export DICOM image export function for must be completed without using quotes (e.g.,
(store) User transferring DICOM MR images (and DICOM_agfa_1).
related data) from Intera to remote
system. • DICOM AE Title must be unique per site; in case of
DICOM Import DICOM image import function for more systems, different names must be used.
(store) Provider transferring DICOM MR images (and
related data) from a remote system to
• A-Z, a-z, 0-9 and underscores are allowed. Spaces
Intera. and special characters are not allowed.
Note To help avoid problems/conflicts, try to use only
upper case characters.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 815 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Configure Intera DICOM Import/Export Configure Intera DICOM Import/Export AE Title
Complete the following procedures, in the order 1. Logon as Gyrotool.
indicated, to activate the DICOM import/export function. 2. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM
• Configure Intera DICOM Import/Export AE Title Parameters.
• Configure Intera DICOM Store Parameters 3. Select DICOM AE Titles.
• Define DICOM Import/Export/RIS Node a. Adapt the Store Export AE Title.
The following are the default values for the DICOM Note Use the Store Export AE Title
Import/Export. They should also be configured on the (MR_STORE_EXP).
appropriate DICOM application/workstation. b. Adapt the Store Import AE Title.
Note Listening port for the Intera DICOM Import Server Note Use the Store Export AE Title
is defined at 104. (MR_STORE_IMP).
DICOM Export DICOM Import 4. Click [PROCEED].
Host Name Intera TCP/IP Intera TCP/IP 5. Click [EXIT].
Hostname Hostname
6. Select Exit from Gyrotool.
AE Title MR_STORE_EXP MR_STORE_IMP
TCP/IP Intera TCP/IP Address Intera TCP/IP Address
Port # n/a 104

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 816 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Configure Intera DICOM Import/Export, c. Select DICOM STORE Parameters.
continued d. Adjust the export re-scaling parameter.
Configure Intera DICOM Store Parameters
e. Click [PROCEED]. Click [EXIT].
The following are the Intera DICOM Store parameters.
f. Select Exit from Gyrotool.
• Export Re-scaling: Yes
2. Modify DICOM Store time-out value.
• Timeout Value: 300
a. Logon as Gyrotool.
Important! Typically, these parameters do not require
modification. It is advisable to test the b. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM
DICOM Store application prior to adapting Parameters.
these parameters. c. Select DICOM STORE Parameters.
1. Modify DICOM Store export re-scaling. d. Adjust the export time-out parameter.
Note Occasionally, images moved through a DICOM e. Click [PROCEED]. Click [EXIT].
connection to a viewing application may appear
too light or too dark. Some viewing applications f. Select Exit from Gyrotool.
expect these parameters, others do not. One
solution may be to adjust this parameter and
retry.
a. Logon as Gyrotool.
b. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM
Parameters.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 817 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Configure Intera DICOM Import/Export, 7. When prompted for the port number enter the port
continued number where EasyVision listens.
Define DICOM Import/Export/RIS Node 8. Review the entries made. If the values are correct,
1. Logon as System. type: yes and press <ENTER>.
2. Select DICOM Management. If the Hostname does not exist in the TCP/IP Host
database, the system prompts for the TCP/IP
3. Select DICOM Export Service Class User > Add address.
DICOM SCP/SCU.
9. If prompted for the address, type it and press
Note AE Title and Hostname must be the same as <ENTER>.
those entered at the remote node. It is rec-
ommended to only use upper case charac- 10. To return to the DICOM Management menu, press
ters. <ENTER>.
4. Type: EV1 (or the DICOM application entity title of 11. To return to the DICOM SCP/SCU menu, press
the remote node) and press <ENTER>. <ENTER.

5. When prompted to enter the Hostname: 12. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager menu.

6. If is a new application in the network, type: 13. If another DICOM node needs to be defined, repeat
EasyVision (or the remote DICOM Hostname) and steps 2 -12.
press <ENTER>. Note Before you can use the configured DICOM
- or - nodes, a Gyrorestart must be completed.

Type the TCP/IP Hostname of the (existing) remote

Host supporting your DICOM transfer and press
<ENTER>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 818 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Configure Intera DICOM RIS Define a DICOM RIS Node
Complete the following procedures, in the order 1. Logon as System.
indicated, to configure Intera DICOM RIS. 2. Select DICOM Management.
• Define a DICOM RIS Node 3. Select DICOM RIS Service Class User > Add
• Configure the DICOM RIS AE Title DICOM SCP/SCU.
• Select a RIS System 4. Follow the screen prompts to enter the required
information
• Modify RIS Worklist Time-out
5. When prompted to store the new values, type: yes
• Modify RIS Worklist Prefetch and press <ENTER>.
Default parameters of the Intera RIS DICOM include: 6. Press <ENTER> until the DICOM SCP/SCU menu
• Application Entity Title: MR_WLM_RIS appears.
• Work List Time-out: 20 7. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager menu.
• Work List Prefetch: No
• Remote AE Title: MR1

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 819 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Configure Intera DICOM RIS, continued Select a RIS System
Configure the DICOM RIS AE Title 1. Logon as Gyrotool.
1. Logon as Gyrotool. 2. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM
Parameters.
2. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM
Parameters. 3. Select DICOM RIS Selection.
3. Select DICOM AE Titles. 4. Select the RIS system.
4. Adapt the RIS AE Title. 5. Click [PROCEED].
Note The default RIS AE Title is MR_WLM_RIS. 6. Click [EXIT].
The title must be unique per site. To avoid
7. Select Exit From Gyrotool.
potential problems, only upper case charac-
ters should be used.
5. Click [PROCEED].
6. Click [EXIT].
7. Select Exit From Gyrotool.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 820 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Configure Intera DICOM RIS, continued Modify RIS Worklist Prefetch
Modify RIS Worklist Time-out This value can be set to "Yes" when slow responses are
encountered from the RIS system; however, caution
This value defines the maximum time (in seconds) the
MR DICOM application waits for the worklist response should be exercised. Once set to Yes, the worklist is
downloaded again. When the RIS server is used again,
from a DICOM RIS. The maximum time-out for this
the previously downloaded worklist appears instead of
parameter is 360 seconds.
the newer one. This can create confusing results.
1. Logon as Gyrotool.
1. Logon as Gyrotool.
2. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM
2. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM
Parameters.
Parameters.
3. Select DICOM RIS Parameters.
3. Select DICOM RIS Parameters.
4. Adjust the time-out value as desired.
4. Adjust the prefetch value as desired.
5. Click [PROCEED].
5. Click [PROCEED].
6. Click [EXIT].
6. Click [EXIT].
7. Select Exit From Gyrotool.
7. Select Exit From Gyrotool.
Note Before you can use the configured DICOM
nodes, a Gyrorestart must be completed.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 821 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Configure RIS DICOM with Easylink Station 7. Review the entries previously made. To save the
values, type: yes and press <ENTER>.
Complete the following procedures, in the order
indicated, to configure RIS DICOM with Easylink station. If the Hostname does not exist in the TCP/IP Host
• Define the Easylink DICOM RIS Node database, the system prompts for the TCP/IP
address.
• Configure RIS DICOM AE Title
8. If prompted for the address, type it and press
• Select an Easylink RIS System <ENTER>.
Define the Easylink DICOM RIS Node 9. To return to the DICOM Service Class User menu,
1. Logon as System. press <ENTER>.

2. Select DICOM Management > DICOM RIS Service 10. Select Exit to DICOM Management Menu.
Class User. 11. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager Menu.
3. Select Add DICOM SCP/SCU.
4. When prompted to enter the DICOM application
entity, type: VERYEASY and press <ENTER>.
5. When prompted to enter the Hostname, type: EL1
and press <ENTER>.
6. When prompted for the port number, type: 3320 and
press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 822 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Configure RIS DICOM with Easylink Station, Select an Easylink RIS System
continued 1. Logon as Gyrotool.
Configure RIS DICOM AE Title 2. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM
1. Logon as Gyrotool. Parameters.
2. Select Modify System Configuration > DICOM 3. Select DICOM RIS Selection.
Parameters.
4. Select the RIS system.
3. Select DICOM AE Titles.
5. Click [PROCEED].
4. Enter the RIS AE Title.
6. Click [EXIT].
Note The default title is MR_WLM_RIS. This name
7. Select Exit From Gyrotool.
must be unique within the system. To avoid
potential problems, only upper case charac- Note Before you can use the configured DICOM
ters should be used. nodes, a Gyrorestart must be completed.
5. Click [PROCEED].
6. Click [EXIT].
7. Select Exit From Gyrotool.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 823 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Configure DICOM HC-Printer on Host 6. Select Modify DICOM Printer Attributes, then
select the newly defined DICOM printer from the list
1. Logon as Gyrotool.
presented.
2. Select Modify System Configuration > Console
Configuration. Note If the DICOM hardcopy printer provides ser-
vices to more than one Intera system, a
3. Select Copy Facilities (Printer Management) > unique SCU AE Title must be defined for
Add a DICOM Printer Type. each MR system.
• DICOM AE Title must be unique per site; in case 7. At the SCU AE Title field, type a unique SCU AE Title
of more systems, different names must be used. (PRINT_MR1) and press <ENTER>.
• A-Z, a-z, 0-9 and underscores are allowed. 8. At the SCP AE Title field, type a definition of the AE
Title for the DICOM printer and press <ENTER>.
• Spaces and special characters are not allowed.
9. Enter the IP address for the DICOM printer.
Note To help avoid problems/conflicts, try to use
only upper case characters. 10. Enter the correct port number.
4. Enter a new DICOM printer name. Note Do not use 0 for the default port number.
5. Select a DICOM printer from the list the appears.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 824 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM on Host - Gyroscan R9.5-2 System, continued

Configure DICOM HC-Printer on Host, 6. When prompted to confirm the deletion, type: Yes
continued and press <ENTER>.
11. Verify the listed attributes agree with the attributes 7. To return to the DICOM Management menu, press
for the selected printer. <ENTER>.
12. Click [PROCEED]. 8. Select Exit to DICOM Management Menu.
13. Select Select a Printer/Camera. 9. Select Exit to Gyroscan Manager Menu.
14. select the newly defined/modified DICOM printer 10. If you have to remove the IP address:
from the list.
a. Select Exit to DCL.
15. Click [CANCEL].
b. At the prompt, type: ucx and press <ENTER>.
16. Click [CANCEL].
c. Type: show host and press <ENTER>.
17. Select Exit.
d. Type: set nohost <hostname> and press
Note Before you can use the configured DICOM <ENTER>.
nodes, a Gyrorestart must be completed.
e. Type: exit and press <ENTER>.
Delete a DICOM Node f. Type: logout and press <ENTER>.
1. Logon as System.
g. Click [YES] to confirm.
2. Select DICOM Management.
Note The IP address of the deleted DICOM node
3. Select the appropriate entry from the list provided. must be deleted manually, because the appli-
4. Select Delete DICOM SCP/SCU. cation does not know if the address is used
elsewhere.
5. Enter the name of the application to be deleted.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 825 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Gyrotool User Account - R9.5-2

Select one of the following topics: Tool/Function Details
• Overview MO Disk Database MO disk database maintenance; restore
• Daily Tool Maintenance MO disk directory and volume
databases.
• Backup Parameters to MO Disk Acquisition Simulator Tool for simulating acquisition. Only
• Restore Single File from Saveset available when option Sequence
Development is available.
• Restore Site-specific Parameters Restore Restores images to adjust or check
Overview image quality of hardcopy.

The following tools/functions are available to complete List Volume Generate a text file in Temp directory
Database (volume_overview.txt).
periodic maintenance on Intera.
Note This is a text file containing every
patient scanned and which optical disk
Tool/Function Details they are stored on.
Daily Cleanup Cleans Intera directories and optimizes
modified files.
Modify System System configuration maintenance.
Configuration
Database Patient database item manipulation.
Management
Logging Provides access to Logging Application
Program (See Gyroscan).
Directory/File Backup Stores directories and files to an MO
disk.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 826 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Gyrotool User Account - R9.5-2, continued

Daily Tool Note Additional directories/files can be similarly
archived, but the specific filename/location and
This option provides for cleaning Gyroscan directories,
optimizing files and cleaning the obsolete optimized file. saveset name must be detailed.

The cleaning of Gyroscan directories occurs 1. Insert a clean, empty and write-enabled MO disk in
the drive.
automatically every morning at 3:00 AM when the
computer is ON. If the computer is turned OFF at night, 2. Logon as Gyrotool.
the cleaning occurs when the first user logs on in the
3. Press <ENTER>. Select Backup Directories and/
morning.
or Files.
Note This tool can also be activated manually, on an
4. Enter a name for the volume and respond to any
as needed basis. Prompts are provided to select
prompts that appear on the screen.
the desired options.
5. When prompted to initialize DOR, type: yes and
Important! Manual start must be done as single user in
the software. All permanent processes will be press <ENTER>.
stopped. 6. Wait for the backup to complete. When prompted to
dismount the MO disk, type: yes and press
Backup Parameters to MO Disk <ENTER>.
This is the site or save information backup. The following
directories below can be archived using this procedure. 7. Remove the MO disk from the drive, label it and set
the disk to write-protect.
• gyro$log: log.bck
8. To exit Gyrotool, type: 1 and press <ENTER>.
• gyro$site: site.bck
• gyro$spt: spt.bck

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 827 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Gyrotool User Account - R9.5-2, continued

Restore Single File from Saveset 7. Type: set file ppdb.idx/owner=gyroscan and press
<ENTER>>
Important! In order to successfully complete this proce-
dure, you must know the exact name used to 8. Type: logout and press <ENTER>.
save the file and the location where it should
9. Remove the disk from the drive.
be restored.
1. Insert the MO disk containing the file to be restored Restore Site-specific Parameters
in the MO drive. 1. Insert the MO disk containing the file to be restored
in the MO drive.
2. Logon as System.
2. Logon as Gyrotest and press <ENTER>.
3. Type: set default gyro_disk2:[gyroscan.site] and
press <ENTER>. 3. Type: set default gyro$site and press <ENTER>.
4. Type: mount/over=id gyro_backup and press 4. Type: mount/over=id gyro_backup and press
<ENTER>. <ENTER>.
5. Type: backup/log 5. Type: backup/log gyro_backup:[000000]site.bck/
gyro_backup:[000000]<Date>_dka0_tot.bck/ save/select=[sys0.gyrodisk2.gyroscan.site...]
save/select=[sys0.gyrodisk2.gyroscan.site] *.*[...]/new and press <ENTER>.
ppdb.idx[]/new and press <ENTER>.
6. Type: dismount gyro_backup and press
Note <Date> in the above command represents <ENTER>.
the date of the actual backup. Use
7. Type: logout and press <ENTER>.
"ddmmmyy" for the date format.
8. Remove the disk from the drive.
6. Type: dismount gyro_backup and press
<ENTER>.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 828 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Intera MR R10.6.2

Select one of the following topics: 3. During BIOS boot phase, identify the firmware levels.
• Check Software Levels
System Firmware/BOS Level
• Firmware Installation & PMS BIOS Settings
XW8000 2.0 (Firmware)
• Reconstructor (XW6000 or W6000) Software W8000 1.29 (Firmware)
Installation
XW6000 02.02.02.01 (BOS)
• Host (XW8000 or W8000) Software Installation
1.22 (Firmware)
• Keyboard Layout/Language Configuration W6000 02.02.03.01 (BOSWXP_R)
• Set Host Date/Time 1.29 (Firmware)
• Virus Scanner Setup
4. Logon as MRService.
• Defrag Host C-partition
Note For the password, use manager for DVD-
Check Software Levels installed Host. Use MRService for factory-
1. Verify the Reconstructor is ON. installed Host.

2. Verify the Ethernet Host Reconstructor cable is 5. Select Start > MR System Management >
Diagnostics > About. The version/release details
connected.
are displayed for the application software.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 829 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

Firmware Installation & PMS BIOS Settings XW8000 Host & XW6000 Reconstructor
W8000 Host 1. Insert the floppy containing the updated firmware
and PMS BIOS setting information into the
Important! Do not attempt to reboot the computer during
the update process. appropriate drive.

1. Insert the floppy containing the updated firmware 2. Restart the computer.
and PMS BIOS setting information into the 3. At the Welcome to ROMPAQ window, press
appropriate drive. <ENTER>.
2. Restart the computer. 4. Select HP System Bios and press <ENTER>.
3. To update the firmware level, select Flash BIOS. 5. Select the most recent version listed and press
<ENTER>.
4. Wait for an audible sound from the computer, then
press any key to continue. The computer will reboot 6. If prompted to reprogram your firmware with this
from the floppy. image, press <ENTER>.
5. Select Exit Without Flashing. 7. When prompted to create a backup image of the
6. To restore PMS BIOS settings, type: bset16 -w current system ROM, press <ENTER>.
bios.bin and press <ENTER>. 8. When prompted to reprogram the firmware, press
<ENTER>.
7. Remove the floppy and restart the computer.
Important! Do not attempt to reboot the computer during
the update process.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 830 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

Firmware Installation & PMS BIOS Settings, 18. When prompted to insert a save/restore diskette,
continued press <F10>.
XW8000 Host & XW6000 Reconstructor, continued 19. When prompted the save was successful, press
9. When prompted the ROM was successfully <ENTER>.
reprogrammed, press <ENTER>. 20. To change the boot order on the Reconstructor,
10. When prompted to reprogram another device, press select the Storage tab. Select Boot Order.
<ESC>. • Diskette Drive A:
11. Turn the computer OFF, wait for approximately 30 • IDE CD ROM Drive
seconds, then turn the computer back ON.
• Hard Drive C:
12. During the boot process, press <F10>. Setup
appears in the lower right corner of the Startup • etc.
screen. 21. In the File menu, select Save Changes and Exit.
13. When prompted for the default language, select Press <ENTER>.
English and press <ENTER>. 22. When prompted to confirm the changes/edits, press
14. In the File menu, select Set Date and Time. To <F10>.
continue, press <ENTER>. 23. Remove the floppy from the system.
15. Verify the time/date settings are correct. 24. Restart the computer.
16. To accept the settings, press <F10>.
17. In the File menu, select Restore from Diskette.
Press <ENTER>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 831 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

Reconstructor (XW6000 or W6000) Software 7. Once the installation has completed, remove the CD
Installation and press <CTRL>+<ALT>+<DEL> to reboot the
1. Power ON the Reconstructor. Reconstructor.

2. Insert the CD into the appropriate drive. 8. Click [YES]. to reboot the Reconstructor.

3. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. The 9. Turn the LCD screen OFF or disconnect the monitor.
computer boots from the CD and the Installation
menu appears.
4. To install the operating system, type: 1 and press
<ENTER>.
5. To start installing the Reconstructor operating
system, type: Y and press <ENTER>. The Ghost
application will start.
6. Wait for approximately two minutes for the
installation to complete.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 832 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

Host (XW8000 or W8000) Software Installation 7. If an external MO drive is present, verify the drive
has SCSI termination enabled (Dipswitch F only).
The following procedure(s) are only required when the
software requires upgrading, when the system disk has 8. Power ON or reboot the Host.
corrupted software or the system disk requires
9. Insert the Preinstallation DVD (4522 210 27971) into
replacement.
the internal DVD ROM drive. The Host boots from
Note It will take approximately an hour to complete the the DVD. The Software Installation Tool menu
installation of this software. appears.
1. Verify the Host is disconnected from the hospital Note If a blue screen appears and/or the Host
network. crashes, verify the firmware level for the DVD
2. Verify the USB slots have no memory cards, sticks, ROM and repeat this procedure.
etc. connected to them. Important! Do not interfere with the software loading
process, even if prompts display indicating
3. Verify the Reconstructor is powered ON and is
user interaction is required or the system
connected (via Ethernet) to the Host.
appears hung. The load is complete when
4. Verify the paper printer is disconnected. the yellow splash screen appears and the fol-
lowing displays:
Note This will avoid "new hardware" detection
acknowledgements. MR Systems ZZZZZZ
Release XX.Y YYYY-MM-DD
5. Verify the external/internal MO drive is ON and has
10. When prompted, remove the DVD from the drive and
no disk inside it.
insert the Application Software DVD. Click [YES].
6. Verify the external/internal MO drive is connected
(via PCI SCSI adapter) on Host.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 833 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

Host (XW8000 or W8000) Software Installation, 2. When the Windows Security Alert window appears,
continued click [UNBLOCK].
11. Click [SOFTWARE INSTALLATION]. 3. Select Start > Settings > Control Panel.
12. When prompted that system and data disks will be 4. Double-click Regional and Language Options
overwritten, click [YES] to continue. icon.
The Host reboots a couple of times during the 5. Select the Language tab. Click [DETAILS].
installation, and occasionally the Host may appear
6. At the Text Services and Input Languages window,
"frozen". This is normal.
click [ADD].
When the MR System Login screen appears, the
installation is complete. 7. Click the Keyboard Layout/IME dropdown list
button.
13. Remove the Application Software DVD from the
8. Select the appropriate input language and click [OK].
drive.
9. To select a default input language:
Important! Any error messages that may appear are
related to the Host’s lack of configuration. a. Select the desired language from the list of
languages on the Settings tab.
Keyboard Layout/Language Configuration
Important! This procedure should be completed for each b. Click [APPLY].
interactive user. c. Click [OK].
1. Logon as MRService. 10. Close Control Panel.
Note For the password, use manager for DVD- 11. Repeat this procedure for all of the interactive users.
installed Host. Use MRService for factory-
installed Host. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 834 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

Set Host Date/Time Virus Scanner Setup
1. Logon as MRService. The following procedure can be used if the hospital
requests installation of a preferred virus scanning
2. On the Taskbar, double-click the Time icon.
software.
3. Make the necessary adjustments on the Date &
Note McAfee Virus Scan Enterprise v7.1.0 and V8.0.0
Time tab.
were installed on the R10.6.2 Host during devel-
4. On the Time Zone tab: opment.
a. Use the dropdown list to select the appropriate To ensure a proper installation, you should have hospital-
time zone for the hospital. approved installation/update configuration instructions
for virus scanner and a virus scanner installation CD.
b. If applicable, select the Automatically
Adjust...option for daylight saving time. Cautions:
5. When finished, click [OK]. Please adhere to the following cautions.
• Activate on access scan.
• Do not activate full scans.
• Do not install another/additional firewall on the
R10.6.2 Host. It will conflict with the existing firewall.
• Only manually update the virus scanner signature
files via Hospital/Admin user when no scanning is
occurring.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 835 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Software Installation - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

Virus Scanner Setup, continued Defrag Host C-partition
1. Logon as MRService. 1. Logon as MRService.
2. On the Taskbar, right-click on the McAfee icon. 2. Select Start > Programs > Accessories.
3. Select VirusScan Console.... 3. Select System Tools > Disk Defragmenter.
4. On the Virus Scan Console window, right-click on 4. On the Disk Defragmenter window:
Buffer Overflow Protection in the left pane.
a. Select System (C:) from the list.
5. Select Disable.
b. Click [DEFRAGMENT].
Note Virus scanning slows down the storing of R11.1,
5. If a message appears regarding a lack of free space,
R10.3 and R10.4 Spectro DICOM data.
click [YES].
6. Wait for the defragmentation to complete
(approximately 10 minutes).
7. When finished, close the Disk Defragmenter window.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 836 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure ASW - Intera MR R10.6.2

Select one of the following topics: Folder Option(s)
• Configuration Options Coil Administration n/a
• Start Configuration Application DICOM Image Number n/a
Direction
• Set System Reference Number
Hardcopy Facilities Add DICOM Printer
• Set System Type Edit DICOM Printer
• Set System Parameters Scanner Hardware Edit Hardware Configuration
Edit Advanced Hardware
Configuration Options Configuration
The following details Configuration/System options SPT Configuration n/a
available under MR System Management.
Factory Configuration n/a
Folder Option(s) Change Service Mode n/a

System System Reference Number Connectivity n/a

Edit System Parameters Configuration
Patient Name Format System Information Survey Links
DVD Burning Options View Service Log Book
Edit System Type FPR Utility
Software Options Register Permanent Key Modify Service Log Book
Edit Temporary Keys Application Logging
Edit Software Options
Show Enabled Software Options
Show Keys
Show Software Options
Service Functions (Folder)
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 837 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure ASW - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

Start Configuration Application Set System Reference Number
1. Select Start > MR System Management. 1. Select Start > MR System Management.
2. Logon as MRService. 2. Select Configuration > System.
Note Ignore any error messages regarding the 3. Select System Reference Number.
Host not being configured.
4. Enter the appropriate System Reference Number.
3. Select Start > MR System Management.
Note The number can be found on a sticker in the
4. Select Configuration > Configuration Application. MDU cabinet. 5 digits must be entered. If the
system has only a 4 digit number, use a 0
5. At the Welcome screen, enter the appropriate
(zero) as the first digit entered.
username and general remarks. Click [OK].
5. Click [CHECK]. Click [APPLY].
6. At the System Service Mode window:
6. Click [OK]. Click [YES].
a. Select the appropriate Type of Action.
7. Click [OK] three times.
b. Enter a reason and description of the action.
c. Click [OK].
7. Click [OK].

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 838 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure ASW - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

Set System Type Set System Parameters
1. Select Configuration > System. 1. Select Configuration > System.
2. Select Edit System Type. 2. Select Edit System Parameters.
3. At the Main System Type field, use the list to select 3. At the System Parameters window:
Txx.
a. Enter the appropriate institution and department
4. At the System Type field, use the list to select names.
Scanner.
b. Select the Date Registration Format.
5. Click [CHECK]. Click [APPLY].
c. For Video-out, select None or PAL/NTSC.
6. Click [OK]. Click [YES].
d. For Magnet Display, select None or PHD.
7. Click [OK] three times.
4. Click [CHECK]. Click [APPLY].
5. Click [OK]. Click [YES].
6. Click [OK] three times.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 839 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Network - Intera MR R10.6.2

Introduction Default Network Settings (R10.6.2 Reconstructor)
The following details the default network settings. These
will be present following a software load or for the factory Option Details
pre-installed software. The procedures that follow detail Computer Name OEM-HJGFKHJH
how to change the defaults to site-specific requirements.
Workgroup WORKGROUP
Default Network Settings (R10.6.2 Host) Host Connection IP Address: 192.168.71.11
Speed/Duplex: AutoDetect
Option Details
Computer Name PMSN-GRJHTDFK Hospital Connection Settings
Workgroup PHILIPSMR Host Dynamic IP Address
Hospital Connection IP Address: Obtain automatically 1. Logon as MRService.
Speed/Duplex: Auto/Auto 2. Select Start > Settings > Network Connections.
Loopback Connection IP Address: 192.168.70.10 3. Double-click Hospital Connection.
Reconstructor Connection IP Address: 192.168.71.10
4. Click [PROPERTIES]. The Hospital Connection
Speed/Duplex: Auto/Auto Properties window appears.
RAS Connection COM1 IP Address: 169.254.xxx.xxx
(random)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 840 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Network - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

Hospital Connection Settings, continued Host Static IP Address
Host Dynamic IP Address, continued 1. Logon as MRService.
5. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) from the list. Click 2. Select Start > Settings > Network Connections.
[PROPERTIES]. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
3. Double-click Hospital Connection.
Properties window appears.
4. Click [PROPERTIES]. The Hospital Connection
6. Select the Obtain an IP Address Automatically
Properties window appears.
option. Click [OK].
5. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) from the list. Click
- or -
[PROPERTIES]. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
When IP address DNS server is not obtained from Properties window appears.
the DHCP server:
6. Select the Use the Following IP Address option.
a. Select the Use the following DNS Server
Address option. 7. Enter the appropriate IP, subnet mask, and default
gateway IP address information.
b. Enter the IP address for the preferred DNS/
8. If available, enter the IP address information for the
Alternate server. Click [OK].
DNS server.
7. Click [CLOSE] twice.
9. Click [OK].Click [CLOSE] twice.
8. Close the Network Connections menu.
10. Close the Network Connections menu.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 841 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure Network - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

Hospital Connection Settings, continued Host Computer and Workgroup Name
Host Hospital Connection Speed/Duplex 1. Logon as MRService.
1. Logon as MRService. 2. Select Start > Settings > Control Panel.
2. Select Start > Settings > Network Connections. 3. Double-click System.
3. Double-click Hospital Connection. 4. At the Computer Name field, enter the appropriate
computer name.
4. Click [PROPERTIES]. The Hospital Connection
Properties window appears. 5. Select Workgroup radio button option.
5. Click [CONFIGURE]. 6. Enter the workgroup name.
6. Select the Advanced tab. 7. To restart the computer, click [OK] three times, the
click [YES].
7. In the Property list, select Link Speed & Duplex.
8. In the Value list, select Auto Detect.
9. Click [OK]. Click [CLOSE].

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 842 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM Connectivity - Intera MR R10.6.2

Select one of the following topics:
• Introduction
• DICOM Basic Configuration
• DICOM Network Nodes
Introduction
DICOM Interoperability

Intera Intera View Easy Easy

Service Easy Link Easy Web
R10.6.2 R10 Forum Vision Access
MR Image Storage SCU SCU SCU SCU SCU SCP
SCP SCP SCP SCP No SCP
Secondary Capture Storage SCU SCU SCU SCU SCU
SCP SCP SCP SCP No SCP SCP
Query / Retrieve SCU SCU
SCU SCU SCP SCP SCU SCP SCU
Modality Work List SCU
SCU SCU No No SCP No SCU
Storage Commitment SCU
SCU SCU SCU (R5) No No No

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 843 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM Connectivity - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

Introduction, continued
DICOM Interoperability, continued

Intera Intera View Easy Easy

Service Easy Link Easy Web
R10.6.2 R10 Forum Vision Access

Modality Performed Procedure Step SCU SCU No No No No No

Study Content Notification No No No No No n/a No
Gray Scale Print SCU SCU SCU SCU No SCU No
Verification SCU SCU SCU SCU SCU SCU
SCP
SCP SCP SCP SCP SCP SCP
Queue Management No No No n/a n/a n/a No
Structured Reporting No No No No No n/a SCP
Basic Structured Reporting No No No No No n/a SCP
Gray Scale Softcopy Presentation SCU SCU SCU
State SCP SCP SCP No No n/a No

Security Enhancement No No No No No n/a n/a

Media Service and File Format R+W R+W No R+W No R+W No

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 844 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM Connectivity - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

DICOM Basic Configuration 7. Click [ADVANCED SETTINGS].
DICOM Local System 8. Set SecureNode Yes/No to Yes.
1. Logon as MRService. 9. Set Encryption Yes/No to No.
2. Select Start > MR System Management > 10. Set Default Certificate Yes/No to Yes.
Configuration.
11. If needed, make the necessary selections for
3. Select Configuration Application. Certificate Pair(s).
4. Start the Configuration Application. 12. Click [CHECK].
5. Select Configuration > Connectivity 13. Click [APPLY]. Click [OK].
Configuration > Local System.
14. When prompted to activate the changes, click [YES].
6. At the Basic Settings window:
15. Click [OK] three times. Click [UP].
a. Enter the AE Title for the Host.
b. When the Host offers SCP functionality, enter the
appropriate Port Number.
c. Verify the Allow Incoming Queries option is set to
No.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 845 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM Connectivity - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

DICOM Basic Configuration, continued Add DICOM Printer
DICOM Image Numbering Direction 1. Logon as MRService.
Note This option is used to set the sort of images in a 2. Select Start > MR System Management >
DICOM viewer or PACS. This setting only applies Configuration.
to slice order.
3. Select Configuration Application.
1. Logon as MRService.
4. Start the Configuration Application.
2. Select Start > MR System Management >
5. Select Configuration > Hardcopy Facilities > Add
Configuration.
DICOM Printer.
3. Select Configuration Application.
6. When prompted to create a new DICOM printer,
4. Start the Configuration Application. select the Based on an Existing Printer (template)
option.
5. Select Configuration > DICOM Image Number
Direction. 7. Select a template for the new DICOM printer.
6. Select the direction(s) for Transversal, Sagittal and 8. Click [APPLY]. Click [NEXT].
Coronal scans.
7. Click [CHECK].
8. Click [APPLY]. Click [OK].
9. When prompted to activate the changes, click [YES].
10. Click [OK] three times.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 846 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM Connectivity - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

DICOM Basic Configuration, continued 10. Other fields for the selected printed can be modified
as needed.
Add DICOM Printer, continued
9. Make the appropriate entries in the following fields. Important! If problems occur with the printed, these
parameters should be checked first.
• Printer Name (30 chr. max.)
11. Click [CHECK].
• SCU AE Title (a-z, A-Z and 0-9 are allowed)
12. Click [APPLY]. Click [OK].
• SCP AE Title (a-z, A-Z and 0-9 are allowed)
13. When prompted to activate the changes, click [YES].
• Port Number
14. Click [OK] three times.
• IP Address
Note DICOM print defines the R10.6.2 Host as
Service Class User (SCU) and the hardcopy
printer as Service Class Provider (SCP). If
the DICOM hardcopy printer provides print
services to more than on MR Host, a unique
SCU AE Title must be defined for each MR
Host.
The AE Title must be unique for every
DICOM node at the hospital.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 847 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM Connectivity - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

DICOM Network Nodes 7. Make the appropriate entries in the following fields.
Add ViewForum DICOM Node • Name
Important! The ViewForum DICOM node must be con- • AE Title
nected to the network and turned ON before
beginning this procedure. • IP Hostname

1. Logon as MRService. • IP Address

2. Select Start > MR System Management > • IP Address

Configuration. Note When the hospital has a DNS Server, the
3. Select Configuration Application. appropriate IP address (associated to the IP
Hostname) automatically fills when [CHECK]
4. Start the Configuration Application. or [APPLY] is clicked.
5. Select Configuration > Connectivity 8. Click [APPLY]. Click [OK].
Configuration > DICOM Network Nodes.
9. If prompted to enter the new IP Address/IP
6. From the list of available templates, select Hostname combination into the NT host file, click
ViewForum. Click [ADD]. [YES].
10. Click [OK]. Click [YES].
11. Click [OK] three times. Click [UP].
12. Logoff of Configuration Application.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 848 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM Connectivity - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

DICOM Network Nodes, continued Add EasyVision DICOM Node
Add ViewForum DICOM Node, continued Follow the procedure for the ViewForum DICOM Node,
but select the Remote Intera template in step 6.
13. Restart the R10.6.2 Host.
Note This template includes private attributes for the
14. Verify it is possible to export images to the newly
configured remote DICOM node. SOP classes Private MR Spectrum and Private
MR Series Blob Set.
15. Use Queue Manager to verify all the queues are
enabled and transfers pass with a "Success" status. Add RIS Node
Follow the procedure for the ViewForum DICOM Node,
• If a status of "Failed" appears, continue to the but select the RIS template in step 6.
DICOM Network Node Advanced Settings
procedure or DICOM Verification procedure. Important! Only 1 Worklist Management and only 1
MPPS node should be configured. These
Add EasyVision DICOM Node may be the RIS Node, but the MPPS node
Follow the procedure for the ViewForum DICOM Node, can also be a PACS. If this is the case, the
but select the EasyVision R4 or EasyVision R5 applicable SOP classes should be unconfig-
template in step 6. ured in the applicable nodes using Advanced
Settings.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 849 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM Connectivity - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

DICOM Network Nodes, continued • Automatic Association Time-out (60 sec. default):
Allowed period of inactivity (in seconds) for an
DICOM Network Node Advanced Settings
open association.
1. Logon as MRService.
Note If the association is released after the
2. Select Start > MR System Management > time-out period, a virtual association still
Configuration. exists on the SCU side.
3. Select Configuration Application. • Transfer Syntaxes: Configured/Unconfigured
4. Start the Configuration Application. • SCU & SCP SOP Classes: Select Custom to
5. Click [CONNECTIVITY CONFIGURATION]. unconfigure individual SOP classes. The Full
option contains the same SOP classes as
6. Click [DICOM NETWORK NODES]. Custom - only in Custom the unconfigured SOP
7. From the list of configured network nodes, select classes can be made visual. Standard DICOM is
Other-Without Private SOPs. Click [MODIFY]. the same as Full, except the private objects
Spectro data and Series Data (Blob) Sets are
8. Click [ADVANCED SETTINGS]. The DICOM removed.
Network Node Advanced Settings information
appears. • DICOM node can be set as SecureNode: This
enables other entries. Do not use Encryption.
• ArtiTimeout (60 sec. default): Determines time-
out between establishment of TCP/IP connection
and associated request.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 850 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM Connectivity - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

DICOM Network Nodes, continued DICOM Verification
DICOM Network Node Advanced Settings, Important! This procedure requires a hardware key.
continued The following procedure verifies a variety of items.
9. Click [APPLY]. Checks are completed in the ordered specified.
10. If prompted to enter the new IP Address/IP • Completes TCP/IP ping to the remote DICOM node.
Hostname combination into the NT host file, click
[YES]. • Checks what DICOM services are supported by the
Intera Host and Remote DICOM node.
Note If the hospital has a DNS server, click [NO].
• Creates DICOM association with remote DICOM node
11. Click [OK]. Click [YES]. through the DICOM Verification Service Class.
12. Click [OK] three times. Click [UP]. • Checks if Remote DICOM node accepts a DICOM
13. If changes to the configuration are complete, logoff secondary capture image. If so, verifies the storage of
of Configuration Application. the image via the query SOP class.
1. Verify the DICOM node is connected to the network
and is turned ON.
2. Logon as MRService.
3. Select Start > MR System Management >
Configuration.
4. Select Configuration Application.
5. Start the Configuration Application.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 851 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Configure DICOM Connectivity - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

DICOM Network Nodes, continued
DICOM Verification, continued
6. Click [CONFIGURATION].
7. Click [CONNECTIVITY CONFIGURATION].
8. Click [DICOM NETWORK NODES].
9. Click [CONNECTIVITY CONFIGURATION]. Click
[DICOM VERIFY].
10. Click [DICOM NETWORK NODE TEST]. Click
[CONFIGURED].
11. Select the DICOM node to test.
12. Select the tests to execute.
Note Typically, the Network Store Query test fails,
so it is best to deselect this option.
13. Click [APPLY]. Click [NEXT]. Click [OK]. The results
of the test(s) display.
14. Click [OK]. Click [UP] twice.
15. Logoff from the Configuration Application.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 852 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

MR User Management - Intera MR R10.6.2

Select one of the following topics:
• Introduction
• Language Setup
• Language Setup
• Unlock MR User
Introduction
Host User (R10.6.2)

Username Group Initial Password Details

MRService SystemAdmins Manager, MRService or Local Service Engineer. (M)

Manager1
HospitalAdmin HospitalAdmins Hospital Hospital user to manage MR User Accounts. (M)
Remote SystemAdmins Manager Remote Service Engineer. (A & D)
Export NetworkUsers scandata User, to share data only with external systems. (N)
MRUser MRUsers Philips Standard Application User. (M)
Note Passwords are case sensitive and expire (by default) after 42 days. Additional settings include:
M: User must change password at first logon. C: User cannot change password. N: Password never expires. A: Account disabled.
D: Dial-in permission granted.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 853 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

MR User Management - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

Introduction, continued
Reconstructor User (R10.6.2)

User Default User Privileges Default Password Enabled at the Target

MRSystem X Administrator manager Yes

Create MR User on Host 6. When the required entries have been completed,
click [ADD].
1. Logon as HospitalAdmin on the Host using
Hospital as the password. 7. Click [OK].
2. Select Start > MR System Management. 8. To logoff HospitalAdmin, press
3. Select System Management > User Management. <CTRL>+<ALT>+<DEL>.
The MR User Manager window appears.
4. From the User menu, select New User.
5. At the New User window, make the following entries:
• User Name
• Full Name (optional)
• Description (optional)
• Password
• Confirm Password
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 854 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

MR User Management - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

Language Setup Unlock MR User
1. Select Start > MR System Management. An account will become locked-out following five
unsuccessful logon attempts. To unlock the account,
2. Logon the Host with your MR Username and
complete the following procedure or wait 30 minutes
password.
before attempting the logon again.
3. Select Start > Settings > Control Panel.
1. Select Start > MR System Management.
4. Double-click the Regional and Language Options
2. Logon as HospitalAdmin on the Host using
icon.
Hospital as the password.
5. At the Language Used in Menus and Dialogs list,
3. Select Start > MR System Management.
select the desired language.
4. Select System Management > User Management.
6. Click [APPLY]. Click [OK].
The MR User Manager window appears.
7. When prompted the changes will not take affect until
5. Select the user with the locked account from the list.
after your next logon, click [OK].
6. From the User menu, select Properties.
8. Logoff.
7. De-select the Account is Locked Out option.
8. Click [OK].

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 855 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

System Backup/Restore - Intera MR R10.6.2

Select one of the following topics: 7. To open additional free space on Drive D:
• Check Available Disk Space a. Start the Application Software.
• Backup/Restore System Disk b. Archive patient data and delete archived patients.
• Finalize Restore System Disk 8. Logoff as MRService.
Check Available Disk Space Backup/Restore System Disk
1. Logon as MRService. Important! Only user-defined preset procedures made
since the date of the last backup will be lost.
2. Select Start > Programs
1. Insert the System Backup/Restore DVD (4522 210
3. Select Accessories > Windows Explorer.
27672) into the appropriate drive.
4. In the left pane, select My Computer.
2. Boot or reboot the Host.
5. From the menu bar, select View. Select Details.
3. When prompted, press any key to boot to the DVD.
6. Check the Total Size and Free Space information for The Host boots from the DVD and the System/
Drive C:, Drive E: and Drive G:. Backup/Restore Tool menu appears.
SUM=(Total Size - Free Space) for Drive C, Drive D Note If the Windows blue screen appears or the
and Drive G:. Host crashes, check the firmware level on
Total SUM for all three drives > 2 times Drive D: Free Space
the DVD and repeat this procedure.
4. Remove the System Backup/Restore DVD from the
drive.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 856 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

System Backup/Restore - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

Backup/Restore System Disk, continued d. Follow the prompts (Click [OK]) to continue the
backup.
5. To format the MO Disk:
e. On the System Backup/Restore Tool, click
a. Insert the unformatted MO disk into the
appropriate drive. Format the B side before the A [REBOOT]
side. 7. To restore the System Disk from the MOD:
Note The B side cannot be formatted once the a. Insert the backup MO DISK into the drive.
backup procedure starts. The disk will
b. On the System Backup/Restore Tool, click
need to be flipped over part way through
the backup. Do not click the [OK] button [REFRESH DATES].
until the light on the MOD is green. c. Click [RESTORE FROM MOD BACKUP MADE
ON XXXX.XX.XX].
b. Wait for the green LED (Busy) to light.
d. When prompted that restoring the system disk
c. Click [FORMAT MOD].
will invalidate patient data and configuration
d. When prompted the format is complete, click information, click [OK].
[OK] and the MO disk automatically ejects.
e. Follow the prompts (Click [OK]) to continue the
6. For long term storage to an MOD: restore.
a. Insert a formatted MO DISK into the drive. f. On the System Backup/Restore Tool, click
[REBOOT]
b. On the System Backup/Restore Tool, click
[LONG-TERM STORAGE TO MOD]. 8. Complete the Finalize Restore System Disk
c. When prompted to insert a MO-volume into the procedure.
drive, click [OK].
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 857 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

System Backup/Restore - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

Finalize Restore System Disk 11. Select SPT & PIQT > SPT. The System Performance
Tool window appears.
1. Logon as MRService.
12. Resize/drag the window to display the Taskbar icons.
2. When prompted the system is unable to start
background processes, click [CANCEL]. The icon displayed to represent the selected process
(Import of Spec Files) appears.
Note Due to the mismatch between the patient
Note When the "Import of Spec Files icon disap-
database on the data disk and transaction
pears, the process has completed.
logging on the system disk, the processes
are unable to start. 13. When the process has completed, select File from
the System Performance Tool window menu bar.
3. Select Start > Programs.
Select Exit.
4. Select MRSybase > Reinstall Databases.
14. If available, check for any service packs or security
5. When prompted to install new databases, click [OK]. fixes applicable for this release.
Note All patient images will be lost. 15. Logoff as MRService.
6. Wait for the process to complete.
7. Select Start > Shutdown. Click [RESTART].
8. Logon as MRService.
9. Wait for background processes to start.
10. Select Start > MR Applications.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 858 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Remote Service - Intera MR R10.6.2

Enable Remote User Setup Incoming Connection
1. Logon as MRService. 1. Logon as MRService.
2. Select Start > Run. 2. On port COM1, connect the plug & play modem.
3. Type: compmgmt.msc and press <ENTER>. The 3. Restart the Host.
Computer Management window appears.
4. Logon as MRService on the Host using the
4. In the left pane, double-click Local Users and appropriate password.
Groups.
5. Select Start > Control Panel.
5. Click the Users folder.
6. Double-click the System icon.
6. Double-click the remote user to enable.
7. Select the Hardware tab. Click [DEVICE
7. On the Remote Properties window, de-select the MANAGER].
Account Disabled option.
8. Verify the presence of the modem.
8. Click [APPLY]. Click [OK].
9. On Control Panel, double-click the Phone and
Modem Options icon.
10. Click [COUNTRY/REGION]. Enter the appropriate
area code information.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 859 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Remote Service - Intera MR R10.6.2, continued

Setup Incoming Connection, continued 21. From the list of networking software, select Internet
Protocol. Click [PROPERTIES].
11. Click [OK].
22. Select the Specify TCP/IP Addresses radio option.
12. Select the Modems tab. Click [OK].
23. In the From field, type the address provided by the
13. Select Start > Settings > Network Connections.
network administrator.
14. Open the New Connection Wizard.
24. In the To field, type the address provided by the
15. Click [NEXT]. network administrator.
16. Select the Set Up an Advanced Connection option. 25. Click [OK]. Click [FINISH].
Click [NEXT].
26. Verify the presence of the incoming connection.
17. Select the Accept Incoming Connection option.
Click [NEXT].
18. Select the Modem Connected with COM1 option.
Click [NEXT].
19. Select the Do Not Allow Virtual Private
Connection option. Click [NEXT].
20. Verify the remote user is enabled. Click [NEXT].

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 860 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42)

Select one of the following topics: Nominal RF drive scale values/ranges
• Amplifier Tools (KWA)
Amp Mode Range Nominal
• TSW Tests
S21-42 Mid 0.324 - 0.548 0.422
• Amplifier Communication High 0.186 - 0.316 0.243
Amplifier Tools (KWA) S22-42 Mid 0.324 - 0.548 0.422
The following information involves a variety of tests/ High 0.186 - 0.316 0.243
adjustments available in the MR system software tuning
S21-64 Mid 0.327 - 0.553 0.426
tools (STT) for upgraded NT to Intera systems.
High 0.146 - 0.247 0.190
Max kW Adjustment
S21-64 + 1H BPF Low 1.305 - 2.207 1.698
This 5 kW adjustment calibrates the BDAS RF-output
signal level. The calibration is completed in both Mid and Mid 0.463 - 0.783 0.602
High modes. High 0.206 - 0.349 0.269
The resulting rf-drive-cal-scales are stored in the
following output parameters:
• Mid RF drive cal scale
• High RF drive cal scale.
Important! The transceiver’s receiver and transmit atten-
uators, along with the BDAS receiver gain,
must be calibrated.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 861 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

Amplifier Tools (KWA), continued Average Power Trip Level Test
PMU Trip Level Test The required average power for this test is 50 W.
This test checks the operation of the power monitoring To determine the PMU trip point, the trip point is varied
unit (PMU). from 100 W to 25 W while RF pulses of 50 W are
transmitted continuously.
Once the PMU is set to a pre-defined level, the system
checks whether the RF amplifier shuts down when an • 100 W is twice the required average power.
excessive amount of RF power is generated.
• 25 W is half the required average power.
Note The test is done for average and peak power.
While the power is being varied, RF amplifier status is
Important! The required peak power must be calibrated read and the sweep ceases once the amplifier shuts
before completing the PMU tests. down. The trip point is stored in the Average PMU Trip
Nominal PMU trip level values/ranges Point output parameter.
Note The PMU is reset for each PMU trip level in the
Amp Level Range
Nominal Trip sweep. If prompted to perform cable length tun-
Level (W) ing, select No and continue.
S21-42 Average 35 - 71 50
Peak 880 - 1765 1250
S21-64 Average 35 - 71 50
Peak 880 - 1765 1250
S22-42 Average 35 - 71 50
Peak 880 - 1765 1250
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 862 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

Amplifier Tools (KWA), continued Linearity & Gain Test
Peak Power Trip Level Test Important! The 5 kW calibration must be completed
Important! The 5 kW calibration must be completed before beginning this procedure.
before beginning this procedure. If prompted During this test, the following RF amplifier values are
to perform cable length tuning, select No and measured using a triangular RF pulse varying between
continue. 10 W to 5 kW:
The required peak power for this test is 1250 W. • gain,
To determine the PMU peak trip point, the peak trip point • gain-linearity, and
is varied from 1875 W to 625 W while RF pulses with a
• phase-linearity.
peak power of 1250 W are transmitted continuously.
A 50 ohm dummy load or the body coil can be used for
• 625 W is half the required peak power.
this procedure. When using the body coil, the High mode
While the power is being varied, RF amplifier status is is used; the gain measured is the High mode gain.
read and the sweep ceases once the amplifier shuts
down. The peak trip point is stored in the Peak PMU Trip To calculate the gain, a reference measurement is
completed to measure the BDAS RF output signal.
Point output parameter.
Note The PMU is reset for each PMU trip level in the
sweep.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 863 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

Amplifier Tools (KWA), continued
Linearity & Gain Test, continued
Nominal gain and linearity values/ranges

Spec. Gain Range Spec. Gain Spec Phase

Amp Mode Nominal Gain (dB)
(dB) Linearity (dB) * Linearity (deg) *

S21-42 Mid n/a 67.0 n/a n/a

High 70.4 - 73.2 71.8 < 2.0 < 15.0
S22-42 Mid n/a 67.0 n/a n/a
High 70.4 - 73.2 71.8 < 2.0 < 15.0
S21-64 Mid 65.6 - 68.4 67.0 < 2.0 < 15.0
High 71.9 - 76.1 74.0 < 2.0 < 15.0
S21-64 + 1H BPF Low 56.6 - 59.4 58.0 < 3.0 < 15.0
Mid 65.6 - 68.4 67.0 < 2.0 < 15.0
High 71.9 - 76.1 74.0 < 2.0 < 15.0
Note * These values refer to Pmax (15 kW or 25 kW) even though the test is completed at 5 kW.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 864 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

TSW Tests 1. Logon as TSW.
Automatic RF Amplifier Test 2. At the prompt, type: tbdas. Press <ENTER>.
Important! It is impossible to complete an automatic RF 3. Select Run > Functional > RF Amp.
Amp test in TSW if the amplifier is in Local
mode. The result will be a time-out. A list of test options appears.

Test Description

Automatic Automatic test sequence

Interactive Interactive test sequence
Link Communication Link Test: During this test, an ASCII string of "No Sense" is sent to the amplifier and the response
analyzed. The amplifier should recognize the string as an illegal command and return "e1_SYNTAX ERROR".
Note Date/time is set in the amplifier to check the communication link when sending a valid command.
Control Amplifier Control Test: During the test, the amplifier is set to the following conditions. First, the Power Mode is set to
Mid, the Power Set to Hex 4B (5515 Watt), and the Operation State is set to OFF.
Once the above conditions are established, different controller settings are tried and the results read back using the
serial control link. Legal commands are followed by "x3_READY". Current status is requested for each setting; after the
test, the original setting is restored.
Next, the parallel interface is used to repeat the same process of setting several settings and reading back the results.
Note Messages display to specify which part of the test is being executed.
Self Test The amplifier has the capability to find faults within itself and report the problem to the operator via a self test.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 865 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

TSW Tests, continued
Automatic RF Amplifier Test, continued

Test Description

Logging Display Logging: The amplifier uses non-volatile RAM to store faults and warnings which can be displayed/read.
Display Display Variables: The amplifier can measure and return many system variables. Using this option, a set of values
regarding amplifier operation can be displayed on the screen. Variable information includes:
• Forward Peak Power & System Frequency
• Average Power Trip Point (low, mid, and high mode)
• Peak Power Trip Point (low, mid, and high mode)
• Current Amplifier Mode & State
• Automatic Testing & Internal 50 Ohm Load ON/OFF
Warmup This option switches the operating state of the amplifier from OFF to Standby. This directs the amplifier to begin its
warmup routine. If functioning properly, the following messages should be sent by the amplifier:
1. * x1_WORKING
2. * m1_STATE CHANGE IN PROGRESS
3. * m2_FREQUENCY/MODE CHANGE IN PROGRESS
4. * x2_DONE
5. * s2 STBY
6. * x3_READY
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 866 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

TSW Tests, continued
Automatic RF Amplifier Test, continued

Test Description

Loopback Loopback Test: This test actually involves two parts, the Local Loopback Test and the External Loopback Test.
Local Loopback Test: The serial link controller is tested by switching it to local loopback mode and sending a string
through the controller. The received string should be identical to the transmitted string.
External Loopback Test: This test requires the operator to place a RS232 loopback connector on FM:X3. Again, a pre-
determined string is sent to the controller. The received string should be identical to the transmitted string.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 867 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

Amplifier Communication
1. Logon as TSW.
Test Description
2. At the prompt, type: tbdas. Press <ENTER>.
Open Opens the RF amplifier communication driver
3. Select Run > Tools > BCP > RF Amp. A list of test Close Closes RF amplifier communication driver
options appears.
Reset Resets RF amplifier communication driver
Communicate Communicates with the RF amplifier
DateTime Get the date/time of the RF amplifier
WriteLog Write operator information into the RF amplifier
ReadLog Read operator information in the RF amplifier

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 868 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

Amplifier Communication, continued 7. Enter a valid amplifier command. A response should
be immediately available from the RF amplifier.
Send Messages to the RF Amplifier
It is possible to send messages to the amplifier using the Note See valid commands for the amplifier in both
Tools / BCP / RFAMP menu structure. The amplifier remote and local modes.
responds by generating a screen message. 8. To cease communication:
To send a message to the RF amplifier: a. At the prompt, type: q. Press <ENTER>.
1. Logon as TSW. b. To close the driver, type: close. Press <ENTER>.
2. At the prompt, type: tbdas. Press <ENTER>.
3. Select Run > Tools > BCP > RF Amp.
4. To open the communication driver, type: open. Press
<ENTER>.
5. At the prompt, type: communicate and press
<ENTER>.
6. To send a message, type: s. Press <ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 869 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

Amplifier Communication, continued Command Response
Amplifier Commands - Remote Mode IDENT=? id_IDENT=53-S21D-64 Fyywwnbr
Note The following commands can be executed from {yy=year, ww=week, and
the console; BDAS controls the amplifier. nbr=amplifier serial number}
MEMR=hhhh,nn n/a
Command Response
MEMW-hhhh,c n/a
APWR=? r5_APWR=<average power in Watts> MODE=? n0_SSA, n1_LOW, n2_MID, n3_HIGH
ATEST=<ON | OFF \?> {IF ?} o5_A_TEST=ON (or OFF) OPER=? s1_OFF, s2_STBY, s3_ON
AVEP=? r5_AVEP=<average power in Watts> TEST=<FWREV | i1_FIRMWARE=UPX-X###-x
DATE=? d1_DATE=<day-month-year> CHKSUM | i2_CHECKSUM=hhhh, i3_53-S21
AMPTYPE>
FAULT=<? | 0-255> f1_FAULT <fault number, amp. mode,
amp. state, date, time, description TIME=? t1_TIME=hh:mm:ss
when fault occurred> WARN=? x3_WARNING <warning#, date/time
FREQ=? r1_FREQ=63.87 MHz stamp, description warning>
(or 42.576 MHz)
PWRX=? <x=H(igh), p5_PWRH=xxxxx, p6_PWRM=xxxxx,
FPWR=? r3_FWPR=<forward power in Watts> M(id), L(ow)> p7_PWRL=xxxxx (xxxxx in Watts)

HOURS=<? | AMP | PA h1_AMPHOURS=123456 (0-199999)

| IPA | SITE> {HOURS=? OR AMP}
h2_PAHOURS=123456 {HOURS=PA}
h3_IPAHOURS=123456
{HOURS=IPA}
h4_SITEHOURS=123456
{HOURS=SITE}
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 870 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42), continued

Amplifier Communication, continued
Amplifier Commands - Local Mode
Important! It is impossible to complete an automatic RF
Amp test in TSW if the amplifier is in Local
mode. The result will be a time-out.
1. To generate commands in Local mode, open the
panel behind which you’ll find the keypad.
2. Press the <LOCAL> button. The green LED lights.
Note In addition to the following, all commands
detailed under Amplifier Commands - Remote
Mode are also valid in Local mode.

Command Response

MODE=<SSA | LOW | n0_SSA, n1_LOW, n2_MID, N4_HIGH

MID | HIGH>
OPER=<OFF | STBY | s1_OFF, s2_STBY, s3_ON OR
ON> x1_WORKING, x3_READY
TEST=<TUBES | x3_READY (no test failures occurred)
PATUBE | IPATUBE | w1_WARNING xxT:dd-mm-yyy
RF | SSARF | IPARF | hh:mm:ss (warning description
AMPRF>
This cmd can only be
issued after OPER=ON

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 871 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23D-64, -42)

Amplifier Tools (KWA) Nominal RF drive scale values/ranges
The following information involves a variety of tests/
Amp Mode Range Nominal
adjustments available in the MR system software tuning
tools (STT). S23-42 Low 0.1300 - 0.2780 0.1900
Max kW Adjustment Mid 0.3270 - .05530 0.426
This 5 kW adjustment calibrates the BDAS RF-output High 0.9230 - 1.5600 1.200
signal level. The calibration is completed in Low, Mid, S23-64 Low 0.1300 - 0.2789 0.1900
and High modes.
Mid 0.3270 - .05530 0.426
The resulting rf-drive-cal-scales are stored in the
following output parameters: High 0.9230 - 1.5600 1.200

• Low RF drive cal scale,

• Mid RF drive cal scale, and
• High RF drive cal scale.
Important! The transceiver’s receiver and transmit
attenuators, along with the BDAS receiver
gain, must be calibrated.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 872 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23D-64, -42), continued

Amplifier Tools (KWA), continued Average Power Trip Level Test
PMU Trip Level Test The required average power for this test is 50 W.
This test checks the operation of the power monitoring To determine the PMU trip point, the trip point is varied
unit (PMU). from 100 W to 25 W while RF pulses of 50 W are
transmitted continuously.
Once the PMU is set to a pre-defined level, the system
checks whether the RF amplifier shuts down when an • 100 W is twice the required average power.
excessive amount of RF power is generated.
• 25 W is half the required average power.
Note The test is done for average and peak power.
While the power is being varied, RF amplifier status is
Important! The required peak power must be calibrated read and the sweep ceases once the amplifier shuts
before completing the PMU tests. down. The trip point is stored in the Average PMU Trip
Nominal PMU trip level values/ranges Point output parameter.
Note The PMU is reset for each PMU trip level in the
Amp Level Range
Nominal Trip sweep.
Level (W)

S23-42 Average 35 - 71 50
Peak 880 - 1765 1250
S23-64 Average 35 - 71 50
Peak 880 - 1765 1250

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 873 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23D-64, -42), continued

Amplifier Tools (KWA), continued Linearity & Gain Test
Peak Power Trip Level Test Important! The 5 kW calibration must be completed
Important! The 5 kW calibration must be completed before beginning this procedure.
before beginning this procedure. During this test, the following RF amplifier values are
measured using a triangular RF pulse varying between
The required peak power for this test is 1250 W.
10 W to 5 kW:
To determine the PMU peak trip point, the peak trip point
• gain,
is varied from 1875 W to 625 W while RF pulses with a
peak power of 1250 W are transmitted continuously. • gain-linearity, and
• 625 W is half the required peak power. • phase-linearity.
While the power is being varied, RF amplifier status is A 50 ohm dummy load or the body coil can be used for
read and the sweep ceases once the amplifier shuts this procedure. When using the body coil, the High mode
down. The peak trip point is stored in the Peak PMU Trip is used; the gain measured is the High mode gain.
Point output parameter.
To calculate the gain, a reference measurement is
Note The PMU is reset for each PMU trip level in the completed to measure the BDAS RF output signal.
sweep.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 874 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-300

Display Software Version
Complete this procedure to display the software version
number on the unit display.
Note The software version and checksum is also
printed on the microprocessor chip label, if the
unit is non-operational.
For illustrative purposes only, assume the software
version for the available unit is 000705.48c.
1. Start in the Operator’s Loop, displaying temperature
(i.e., 20.3o C).
2. Press/hold [NO] for a minimum of 10 seconds.
Software version digits to the left of the decimal point
display (0705).
Note Leading two zeros do not display.
3. Press [NEXT]. Software version digits to the right of
the decimal point display (48).
4. Press [NEXT]. Software version letter displays as the
equivalent number (1=A, 2=B, 3=C, etc.)
5. Press [NEXT]. The checksum displays.
6. To return to the Operator’s Loop, press [NEXT].

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 875 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-750

Display Software Version
Complete this procedure to display the software version
number on the unit display of the Neslab Chiller HX-
750.
Note The software version and checksum is also
printed on the microprocessor chip label, if the
unit is non-operational.
For illustrative purposes only, assume the software
version for the available unit is 000507.49b.
1. Start in the Operator’s Loop, displaying temperature
(i.e., 20.3o C).
2. Press/hold [NO] for a minimum of 10 seconds.
Software version digits to the left of the decimal point
display (0507).
Note Leading two zeros do not display.
3. Press [NEXT]. Software version digits to the right of
the decimal point display (49).
4. Press [NEXT]. Software version letter displays as the
equivalent number (1=A, 2=B, 3=C, etc.)
5. Press [NEXT]. The checksum displays.
6. To return to the Operator’s Loop, press [NEXT].

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 876 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table

Thumble Wheel Test Command Mode Commands
1. Logon as TSW. 1. Logon as TSW.
2. At the prompt, type: tpat. Press <ENTER>. 2. At the prompt, type: tpat. Press <ENTER>.
3. Type: run functional thumble. Press <ENTER>. 3. Enter Run Tools Command Mode.
TPAT Tools The following commands become available:
• Command Mode Commands • Status: Displays PLC and PLC extension board
status.
• Display Encoder Horizontal Value
• Reset: Resets active PLC error bits.
• Application Test Mode
• Travel-Dist: Stores a tabletop travel distance in
• Display PLC Configuration
the PLC.
• Download PLC Firmware
• Move: Tabletop moves horizontally over the
• Monitor Command distance set via the Travel-Dist command.
• TTS-Status: Displays Travel to Scanplane
status.
• Position: Displays tabletop position (actual).
• Length: Displays tabletop length.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 877 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

TPAT Tools, continued 4. To display active table status and errors as text
strings, press <V> (Verbose Mode).
Display Encoder Horizontal Value
The encoder position can be continuously displayed - or -
using the Horizontal Encoder test. This enables the To reset PLC logged errors, press <R>.
operator to view changes while the tabletop is in motion.
- or -
1. From the User Login screen, logon as TSW without
using a password. To enter Bit Mode, press <B>.

2. At the prompt, type: tpat. Press <ENTER>. • The first bit pattern displays patient support
status. "1" represents a status of "Active"
3. Enter Run Tools Encoder_HOR.
• The second pattern represent errors. "1"
Application Test Mode represents detected error.
Application Test mode allows the operator to monitor
5. To display more error information:
status and errors logged in the PLC during patient
support operation. a. Enter the error number.
1. Logon as TSW. b. Enter the I command.
2. At the prompt, type: tpat. Press <ENTER>.
3. Enter Run Tools Application Test Mode.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 878 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

TPAT Tools, continued Download PLC Firmware
Display PLC Configuration The latest version of PLC firmware is archived on the
host computer and must be downloaded to the PLC
Completing this procedure allows you to review the
following PLC information: memory during TSW software installation.

• extension identification, It can also be downloaded to PLC memory using the

following procedure. To download PLC firmware to PLC
• extension software version, memory:
• firmware version, and Important! To verify the identification of the old/new PLC
software, run the configuration report before
• hardware type.
and after this procedure.
To display PLC configuration information:
1. Logon as TSW.
1. From the User Login screen, logon as TSW without
using a password. 2. At the prompt, type: tpat. Press <ENTER>.

2. At the prompt, type: tpat. Press <ENTER>. 3. Enter Run Tools Download.

3. Enter Run Tools Configuration. Note After a download has been completed, the
tabletop length is automatically synchronized.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 879 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Software and Diagnostics 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table, continued

TPAT Tools, continued
Monitor Command
To display various horizontal movement parameters:
1. Logon as TSW.
2. At the prompt, type: tpat. Press <ENTER>.
3. Enter Run Tools Monitor. The Monitor menu
appears providing access to the following
commands:
• Voltage: monitors servo amplifier output voltage.
– Step-size: 2.5 V
– Range: -10 V to +10 V
• Current: monitors horizontal motor current.
– Step-size: 1 A
– Range: -4 A to +4 A
• RPM: monitors the horizontal tacho generator for
rotations per minute.
– Step-size: 500 rpm
– Range: -3000 rpm to +3000 rpm

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 880 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

THEORY
General Information Network
Initial System Configurations Network (New Intera R7.x-R9.x)
Intera 0.5T General Configuration
Intera 1.0T Gyroscan Intera Workgroup - Not Connected to Hospital
Intera 1.5 T Network
Gyroscan Intera Workgroup - Connected to UTP-Based
Host Computer Hospital Network
DS10 Computer Standalone LAN Defaults
Motherboard Features Cooling System
OCD Display (R7.x-R9.x)
Neslab Chiller HX-300
Video Timing Specification
Fluids
Alpha Server 800 Main Electrical Enclosure
SCSI Configuration
Neslab Chiller HX-750
SCSI Standard
Specifications
Boards
Fluids
DMCC 21164
Refrigeration Control
SCSI Configuration
SCSI Standard
XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x)
Hardware Configurations

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 881 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Cooling System, continued Receive Circuit

Power Supplies
Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style) BDAS Cooling
Overview NTDAC Cable Interface Box (FM)
Specifications System Filter Box
DEI Operation T5 Front End Interface (TFEI)
Monitoring Systems
Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera)
Fault Interlock Contact
Overview
Fuses
Functional Blocks
Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New Style) RF Transmit
Specifications RF Receive Path
Facility Water Requirements Cable Interface Box (FM)
Monitoring Systems BDAS (FC) Hardware
Fault Interlock Contact BCP+ & DFEC1
Fuses Transceiver
Pressure Relief Valve Synco Receiver Boards (Synergy Coil Option)
Shield Cooler (SC R8) BDAS Power Supplies
Overview Reconstructor XP1000, AP550 and (X)W6000
Specifications System Filter Box
Operating Modes Patient Front-end Interface (PFEI) (MM-)
Data Acquisition RF Amplifier - 53-S23A-64 & S24A-42 (New Intera)
Specification Summary
Data Acquisition System - BDAS (Intera NT)
Overview
Functional Blocks
Power Rack (FP)
BDAS (FC) Hardware
Digital Hardware (BCP & DFEC1)
Analog Circuit
Transmit Circuit Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 882 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifiers Image Quality

Intera w/Copley 234/274 Perform IQ Procedures
Configurations Image Quality
Gradient Specifications - NT Corduroy Artifacts
Gradient Specifications - Intera Ghosting Theory
Gradient Coil Characteristics Low SNR - Noise Theory
Intera w/Copley 234 Geometric Distortion - Shading Theory
Power Flow Patient Support
Inverter Module
Signal Flow NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table
Reference Generation Overview
Mode Detect Circuit Boards
Supervisory Functions Table Movement
Error Amplifiers Light Visor
Remote Turn-on Circuit Hydraulics
Pulse Width Modulator Bore Lighting
Inrush Current Limiting Circuit Safety Devices
Thermal Shutdown Computer Interface
Phase Loss Circuit Power
Intera w/Copley 274 Control Panels
Cabinet Configurations MT (Electric) Patient Table
Intera w/Copley 271 Overview
Copley 271 PICU
Copley 281 Power Supply
Modes Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
Pre-conditions for Horizontal Movement
Safety Circuits

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 883 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Initial System Configurations

Intera 0.5T HW Configuration Detail
The following details typical values for a new Intera (not
ECG Option Available
upgraded).
PPU Option Available
Hardware Configuration
Respiratory Option Available
HW Configuration Detail Headset xxxx

Parameter Standard Audio Switch Version Version 2

RF Amplifier MR5002 FEPSU Type In_SFB

MN RF Amplifier n/a
Coil Configuration
B1 field n/a
MN Transceiver Board n/a Coil Configuration Detail

Auxiliary Connector n/a Parameter Standard

Synergy Boards xxxx QBC Standard

Gradient Coil Type Air-cooled QHC Standard

Gradient Amplifier Type Copley_234_02 Quad Knee Standard

Magnet Type NT_RMMU Neck Quad/Linear Standard

Acquisition System Plus

BDAS Backpanel (32 bit) Available
Patient Support MT
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 884 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Initial System Configurations, continued

Intera 1.0T HW Configuration Detail
Hardware Configuration ECG Option Available

HW Configuration Detail PPU Option Available

Respiratory Option Available
Parameter Omni & Power
RF Amplifier Ehrhorn_S2x_42 Headset xxxx
Audio Switch Version Version 2
MN RF Amplifier n/a
FEPSU Type In_SFB
B1 field n/a
MN Transceiver Board n/a Coil Configuration
Auxiliary Connector n/a
Coil Configuration Detail
Synergy Boards xxxx
Parameter Omni & Power
Gradient Coil Type Omni: Air-cooled
Power: Water-cooled QBC NT

Gradient Amplifier Type Omni: Copley_234P4 QHC NT

Power: Copley_274S Quad Knee NT
Magnet Type NT_RMMU Neck Quad/Linear NT
Acquisition System Plus
BDAS Backpanel (32 bit) Available
Patient Support MT
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 885 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Initial System Configurations, continued

Intera 1.5 T HW Configuration Detail
Hardware Configuration BDAS Backpanel (32 bit) Available

HW Configuration Detail Patient Support MT

ECG Option Available
Parameter Omni & Power & Master
RF Amplifier Ehrhorn_S2x_64 PPU Option Available
Respiratory Option Available
MN RF Amplifier xxxx
Headset xxxx
B1 field Omni: Low
Power: High Audio Switch Version Version 2
Master: High FEPSU Type In_SFB
MN Transceiver Board xxxx
Coil Configuration
Auxiliary Connector xxxx
Synergy Boards Available Coil Configuration Detail

Gradient Coil Type Omni: Air-cooled Parameter Omni & Power & Master
Power & Master: Water-cooled QBC Omni: Standard
Gradient Amplifier Type Omni: Copley_234P4 Power & Master: NT
Power: Copley_274S QHC NT
Master: Copley_274D Quad Knee NT
Magnet Type NT_RMMU Neck Quad/Linear NT
Acquisition System Plus

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 886 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

DS10 Computer
Motherboard Features
The Motherboard for the DS10 alpha server is based on
the Alpha CPU 21264 (600 MHz) and includes the
following:
• 2 Mb ECC cache chips (second level cache)
• Flash ROM
– Alpha BIOS console code
– SRM Console code
– NVRAM data
– Onboard: 2 ethernet ports & 2 IDE Controllers
• On the riser card:
– Serial port COM1: Serial port with full duplex
asynch. model to ethernet switch, service PC
– Serial port COM2: RMC dedicated serial port with
full duplex asynch. modem control.
• PCI Riser card slot
• RMC processor (for remote management console)

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 887 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

OCD Display (R7.x-R9.x)

The following information relates to Intera 0.5T, 1.0T, and Scan Parameters
1.5T systems.
Parameter Pixels/Lines Interval
Video Timing Specification
• Aspect Ratio: 5 : 4 Blanked lines/frame 32 0.51
Blanked pixels/line 428 3.96
• Dimensions monitor (mm): H 473, W 507, D 225
Clock frequency n/a 108.21 MHz
• Display resolution: 1280 x 1024
Displayed lines/frame 1024 16.17
• Horizontal frequency: 63.3 kHz; Range: 29 - 82 kHz
Displayed pixels/line 1280 11.83
• Picture Dimensions (mm): 399 +2 x 319 +2
Horizontal back porch 222 1.85
• Power Consumption: 70 W; Standby: 5 W Horizontal front porch 49 0.41
• Power Supply: 100-120/220-240 Veff AC -50/60 Hz Horizontal scan line 1708 pixels 15.79 microsec.
(automatic selection)
Horizontal sync pulse 204 1.70
• Vertical Frequency: 60 Hz; Range: 50 - 76 Hz
Vertical back porch 26 0.41
Vertical front porch 3 0.047
Vertical lines/frame 1056 lines 16.76 ms
Vertical sync pulse 3 0.047

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 888 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

OCD Display, (R7.x-R9.x) continued

Video Timing Specification, continued Next Menu:
OSD Settings • Part: 4522 131 59341
The following monitor settings can be reviewed via the • Serial: xxxxx
OSD menu.
• Software: P270P11B
Timing:
• Temp: Max xxx; Actual xxx
• V: 60 Hz
• Backlight: BLS xxx BLL xxx
• H: 63.4 kHz
Max: maximum internal temperature
• SXGA
Act: actual internal monitor temperature
• H/V Sync
BLS: backlight lamp driver output setting
• V sync: NEG
BLL: backlight lamp luminance
• H sync: NEG
Note The BLS setting slowly increases automatically
(to a maximum of 255) during the lifetime of the
backlights. When this occurs, the BLL setting
(normally 100%) decreases slowly. Display
luminance also decreases slowly.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 889 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Alpha Server 800

SCSI Configuration Name/ Bus Max Max Bus Length
Standard
Version Width Speed (m)
Console Mode After Booting
Device Ultra I Ultra 8 20 Single-ended: 1.5
(VMS not loaded) (VMS loaded)
or SCSI Differential: 25
System Disk DKA 0 DKA 0 SCSI III

Data Disk DKA 100 DKA 100

Boards
CD ROM DKA 400 DKA 400
MO Disk Drive DKC 200 WDC 200 Location on Slot
Board Name
Motherboard (in SH Config.)
IIM JKC 300-307 GKC 300-307
BHG: P1 Motherboard n/a n/a
BDAS (w/BCP+) JKB 400-407 GKB 400-403
JKB 500-507 GKB 500-503 BHG: P2 Spare J15 n/a
Reconstructor JKB 300-307 GKB 300-301 BHG: P3 DIGI J14 Slot 02
BHG: P4 Spare J13 n/a
SCSI Standard
BHG: P5 DE500 J12 Slot 14
Name/ Bus Max Max Bus Length BHG: P6 KZPBA-CA J11 Slot 13
Standard
Version Width Speed (m)
BHG: P7 KZPSA J10 Slot 12
SCSI II Fast 8 10 MB/s Single-ended: 3
BHG: P8 3D30 J9 Slot 11
SCSI Differential: 25
BHG: P9 CPU J1 n/a
Fast 16 20 MB/s Single-ended: 3
Wide Differential: A+BC25
SCSI

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 890 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

DMCC 21164
SCSI Configuration SCSI Standard

Console Mode After Booting Name/ Bus Max Max Bus Length
Device Standard
(VMS not loaded) (VMS loaded) Version Width Speed (m)

System Disk DKA 0 DKA 0 SCSI II Fast 8 10 MB/s Single-ended: 3

SCSI Differential: 25
Data Disk DKA 100 DKA 100
Fast 16 20 MB/s Single-ended: 3
CD ROM DKA 400 DKA 400 Wide Differential: A+BC25
MO Disk Drive DKC 200 WDC 200 SCSI

IIM JKC 300-307 GKC 300-307 Ultra I Ultra 8 20 MB/s Single-ended: 1.5
or SCSI Differential: 25
BDAS (w/BCP+) JKB 400-407 GKB 400-403 SCSI III
JKB 500-507 GKB 500-503
Reconstructor JKB 300-307 GKB 300-301

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 891 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x)
Hardware Configurations Component Details
R10.3 Initial, R10.3 Upgrades & R10.6 Upgrades SCSI Controller KZPBA-CC; Part of link to the
Reconstructor and BDAS.
Component Details
Main Ethernet Optional Ethernet link to Hospital Network.
System Board Dual Pentium Zeon 2.8 HHz, with Controller
integrated SCSI controller. Used for hard (Internal)
disk drives.
Secondary Ethernet link to Reconstructor.
1 GB DRR 2x 512 MB DDR Ethernet Controller
Memory Modules
:
System Hard Disk 18 GB or 36 GB 15 krpm Ultra3 SCSI
Drive
Data Hard Disk 18 GB or 36 GB 15 krpm Ultra3 SCSI
Drive
DVD ROM Drive 5.25"
Floppy Drive 3.5", 1.44 MB
Internal MOD Drive Sony MO Drive, 4.1 GB, 512 B/sector
Main Graphic NVIDIA Quadro4 200NVS AGP
Controller
Secondary GEForce4 MX440 PCI or GEForce
Graphic Controller FX5200 PCI
SCSI Controller Adaptec AVA2906; SCSI link to MO Drive

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 892 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11x), continued

Hardware Configurations, continued Component Details
R11.x Initial Main Ethernet Optional Ethernet link to Hospital Network.
Controller
Component Details (Internal)

System Board Dual Pentium Zeon 2.8 HHz, with Secondary Ethernet link to Reconstructor.
integrated SCSI controller. Used for hard Ethernet Controller
disk drives.
3 GB DRR 6x 512 MB DDR
Memory Modules
System Hard Disk 36 GB 15 krpm Ultra3 SCSI
Drive
Data Hard Disk 36 GB 15 krpm Ultra3 SCSI
Drive
DVD ROM Drive 5.25"
Floppy Drive 3.5", 1.44 MB
Internal MOD Drive Sony MO Drive, 4.1 GB, 512 B/sector
Main Graphic NVIDIA Quadro4 200NVS AGP
Controller
Secondary GEForce FX5200 PCI
Graphic Controller
SCSI Controller Adaptec AVA2906; SCSI link to MO Drive.
SCSI Controller KZPBA-CC; Part of link to the BDAS.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 893 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11x), continued

Hardware Configurations, continued Component Details
R11.x Upgrades SCSI Controller KZPBA-CC; Part of link to the
Reconstructor and BDAS.
Component Details
Main Ethernet Optional Ethernet link to Hospital Network.
System Board Dual Pentium Zeon 2.8 MHz, with Controller
integrated SCSI controller. Used for hard (Internal)
disk drives.
Secondary Ethernet link to Reconstructor.
3 GB DRR 6x 512 MB DDR Ethernet Controller
Memory Modules
System Hard Disk 18 GB or 36 GB 15 krpm Ultra3 SCSI
Drive
Data Hard Disk 18 GB or 36 GB 15 krpm Ultra3 SCSI
Drive
DVD ROM Drive 5.25"
Floppy Drive 3.5", 1.44 MB
Internal MOD Drive Sony MO Drive, 4.1 GB, 512 B/sector
Main Graphic NVIDIA Quadro4 200NVS AGP
Controller
Secondary GEForce4 MX440 PCI or GEForce
Graphic Controller FX5200 PCI
SCSI Controller Adaptec AVA2906; SCSI link to MO Drive.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 894 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Network (New Intera R7.x-R9.x)

Select one of the following topics: Default IP/DECnet Addresses
• General Configuration • Host: IP: 192.192.192.201; DECnet: 1.201
• Gyroscan Intera Workgroup - Not Connected to • Reconstructor: IP: 192.192.192.210; DECnet: n/a
Hospital Network • Print Server: IP: 192.192.192.211; DECnet: n/a
• Gyroscan Intera Workgroup - Connected to UTP- • Ethernet Switch: IP: 192.192.192.212; DECnet: n/a
Based Hospital Network
Gyroscan Intera Workgroup - Not Connected
• Standalone LAN Defaults to Hospital Network
General Configuration Paper
Printer
An Ethernet switch (communication link between Host Gyroscan Intera Host

and Reconstructor) is included with the Gyroscan Intera. Reconstructor

Print
Server
EasyVision
DICOM MR HC
Printer
To perform it’s function, the switch must be programmed.
IIM File Network

The Host, Print Server, and Reconstructor units are

connected to the switch.

(optional)
(optional)

Additional/optional equipment may also be connected. (optional)

These include a DICOM unit/printer, and EasyVision

workstation, or some similar piece of equipment.
Reserved
HC Printer

Reserved

Note If an EasyVision or DICOM unit must be shared

with other modalities, it must be connected out- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

side the switch (separately on the hospital net-

Switch

work).
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 895 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Network (New Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Gyroscan Intera Workgroup - Not Connected Gyroscan Intera Workgroup - Connected to
to Hospital Network, continued UTP-Based Hospital Network
One (or more) of the following computers must be Paper
Printer
present to use a 100 Mb/s Ethernet connection. Gyroscan Intera Host

Print DICOM MR HC
• Gyroscan Intera: AS800, DMCC, or DS10 II
M
Networ
k
Reconstructor
Server
EasyVision
Printer

• EasyVision (R4): Ultra 1, Ultra 2, Ultra 5, Ultra 10,

Ultra 60 or Sparc-5 (w/installed 100 BaseT board

(optional)
option) (optional)

(optional)

HC Reserved
Printer
Reserved

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Switch
Hospital
8
Network

DICOM P2P
EasyLink
Conversion
DICOM Box
Gyroscan CT
EasyVision PACS HC
System Scanner
Printer
RIS P2P HC
Printer

A media converter (translator) is needed to connect a

Gyroscan Intera workgroup to a 10Base5 network. See
the next page for additional information.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 896 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Network (New Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Gyroscan Intera Workgroup - Connected to Standalone LAN Defaults
UTP-Based Hospital Network, continued Network Switch
Connect a Media Converter • Node Name: SWITCH
The basic Ethernet switch only accommodates UTP and
• MAC Address: nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn
STP connections. If a 10Base5 network is in place, a
media converter is required. • IP Address: 192.192.192.212
Host Computer (Network Switch #1)
Hospital
Network • Node Name: NTSCAN
Transceiver
• DECnet Address: 1.201

AUI Cable
• IP Address: 192.192.192.201
• Network Mask: 255.255.255.0
Media Converter • Broadcast Mask: 192.192.192.255
• Internet Domain: MR
UTB Cable

Switch

Gyroscan Intera

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 897 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Network (New Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Standalone LAN Defaults, continued DICOM HC Print Unit (Network Switch #5)
Reconstructor (Network Switch #2) • DICOM AE_Title: TBD
• Node Name: RECONSTRUCTOR • IP Address: TBD
• IP Address: 192.192.192.210 • Port Number: TBD
• Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 DICOM RIS Unit (Network Switch #6)
• Workgroup: WORKGROUP • Node Name: TBD
Print Server (Network Switch #3) • DICOM RIS AE_Title: TBD
• Node Name: JETDIRECT • IP Address: TBD
• MAC Address: nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn • Port Number: TBD
• IP Address: 192.192.192.211
EasyVision (Network Switch #4)
• Node Name: TBD
• DECnet Address: TBD
• IP Address: TBD
• DICOM Export AE_Title: TBD
• DICOM Import AE_Title: TBD

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 898 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-300

Fluids Main Electrical Enclosure
Neslab recommends distilled/deionized water with a 0.05 Located on the rear of the unit, the main electrical
to 0.10 megohm-cm reading. enclosure is behind a hinged access panel.
If this is not available, use filtered tap water. Important! Before opening the main electrical enclosure,
disconnect the unit’s power source.
Important! A non-freezing solution is required below
+8o C. The fluid selected must have a vis- Pump O/L (units w/3∅ pump motor)
cosity of 50 centistokes or less. For this, a When the pump motor shuts down because of an
50/50 mixture (by volume) of distilled/deion- overload condition, the pump O/L indicator lights.
ized water and laboratory grade ethylene
glycol is recommended. Before restarting the unit, manually reset the fault
condition by pressing the grey reset switch on the 1MOL
Caution Never use flammable/corrosive fluids. overload relay.

Never use automotive anti-freeze, since Bypass/Normal Switch

they contain silicates that can damage The position of this switch determines the unit’s
pump seals and will void the response following a loss of power.
manufacturer’s warranty. • Bypass Position: When the power is restored, the unit
Highly distilled/deionized water (over 3 will start.
megohm-cm) is not recommended for • Normal Position: When the power is restored, the unit
units with wetted parts other than will have to be manually restarted with the Start
stainless steel. switch.
Distilled/deionized water in the 15
megohm-cm range should not be used.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 899 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-300, continued

Main Electrical Enclosure, continued Muted/Alarm Switch
Run/Off Switch This switch mutes the audible alarm.
This switch affects operation of the unit’s pump.
• Run Position: Pump continues to operate, regardless
of compressor status.
• Off Position: When the compressor is not operating,
the pump stops.
Remote/Local Switch
The position of this switch allows you to select the source
when starting/stopping the unit.
• Remote Position: Control derives from the input
connected to the Control receptacle
(right side of temperature controller.) For the unit to
operate, the Controller’s ON/OFF switch must be ON.
To complete the circuit and start the unit, an external
switch is required.
• Local Position: Control derives from the Start switch.
Note If the Controller’s ON/OFF switch is OFF, and the
toggle switch is set to Remote, external switches
cannot start the unit. This provides the opportu-
nity to override the external controls and shut
down the unit.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 900 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-750

Specifications Fluids
This chiller provides a continuous flow of a cooling fluid This unit utilizes 40 gallons (151.0 liters) of R134A
at a constant temperature and volume. It includes the refrigerant.
following components:
Important! Never use flammable/corrosive fluids with
• air-cooled refrigeration system, this unit. Do not use automotive anti-freeze,
since it typically contains silicates that will
• fluid reservoir (stainless steel),
damage pump seals.
• fluid recirculation pumps, and
Refrigeration Control
• microprocessor temperature controller.
The compressor runs continuously; a hot-gas bypass
The HX-750 chiller operates with the following system is used to maintain a constant temperature.
conditions: • Idle Indicator: Lit when unit is in the hot-gas bypass
• Temperature Range: +12o C to +15o C. mode.
• Cool Indicator: Lit when refrigeration system is
• Temperature Stability: +1.0o. This unit may exceed
removing heat from the cooling fluid.
specification (+0.3o C) under partial loads. During
situations of low ambient or low remote plumbing As the fluid temperature nears the temperature setpoint,
pressure drop, stability may exceed specification to the indicators cycle ON/OFF to indicate the system’s
duty cycle. The unit can be in the Cool or Idle mode, but
+1.0o C.
never both at the same time.
• Cooling Capacity: 28,000 Watts; 95,625 BTU/hr.
Note Circulating water at 20o C, at 20o C ambient
under full or no load. Operating on 60 Hz power
supply.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 901 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style)

Select one of the following topics: Even when a chiller is present, it would be useful to have
a tap water supply/drain available.
• Overview
• Specifications Specifications
• DEI Operation • Inlet temperature - cooling water: 5 - 15oC (59o F)

• Monitoring Systems • Outlet temperature - cooling water: <25o C

• Fault Interlock Contact • Pressure: 200 - 550 kPa
• Fuses • Flow: > 20.1 liter/min (5.28 g/mm)
Overview • Pressure drop (minimal flow): 80 kPa
The heat exchanger cools water flowing through the • Cooling capacity: 12 kW
gradient coil for PowerTrak 3000 and 6000 gradient
Coolant Requirements
systems (TNF or UFI coils). It is composed of two fluid
(water) circuits: • Primary Circuit: Potable tap water, with a PH between
6.0 and 8.0, and a calcium carbonate concentration
• Primary Circuit: This "facility water loop" connects to a less than 75 ppm.
chiller or hospital cooling system (closed loops) or a
tap water supply and drain (open loop). • Secondary Circuit: Contains 20 liters of distilled water.
• Secondary Circuit: Also referred to as a coil loop, this
circuit is connected to the gradient coil.
When a chiller is used, an external relief valve should be
present, in the event the secondary circuit becomes
blocked.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 902 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style), continued

DEI Operation If a low fluid level fault occurs:
At the top of the de-ionizer, a small lamp provides an • the fault light lights,
indication of when the water leaving the de-ionizer is
• the fault contact for the remote signal closes, and
pure enough for the unit.
• the pump shuts down.
When the water is of acceptable quality the lamp glows
green; when the cartridge should be cleaned or replaced High Temperature Monitor
the lamp glows red. There are two high temperature monitors connected to
Note When a new system is started or when a sensors monitoring the temperature of the recirculating
system’s water has not deionized, the lamp will fluid:
be red for some time. This is a normal situation. • recirculating coil inlet
Monitoring Systems • recirculating coil outlet
A signal is sent to the host when a fault condition occurs.
When the temperature of the fluid exceeds the
If the inlet/outlet high temperature or low fluid flow temperature set limit, the monitors signal the host.
conditions occur:
The set temperature limit for the coil supply is 31o C and
• the fault light lights, 36o C for the coil return.
• the fault contact for the remote signal closes, and
• the unit continues to operate.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 903 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style), continued

Monitoring Systems, continued Fuses
Low Fluid Flow Monitor
Fuse Specifications
Located between the return line strainer and the plate
exchanger, the low flow switch activates when the flow 1 FU 3/8 A, 250 VAC GDL/MDL. Part# 010667.
rate drops below approximately 15 liters/min. Protects primary of 230 VAC transformer,
controller, and motor valve.
Low Fluid Level Monitor
2 FU 3/8 A, 250 VAC GDL/MDL. Part# 010667.
On a float switch within the reservoir, a low fluid level
monitor is connected. This fault occurs when the cooling Protects primary of 230 VAC transformer,
controller, and motor valve.
fluid within the reservoir drops below it’s normal
operating level. 3 FU 3/8 A, 250 VAC GDL/MDL. Part# 010667
Protects 120 VAC circuit and motor valve.
Fault Interlock Contact
4 FU 3/8 A, 250 VAC GDL/MDL. Part# 010666.
This 15 pin D-type connector is found on the control
panel. It is neither a power inlet nor power outlet; it is Protects 24 VAC circuit and control logic.
isolated from the power circuit.

Caution The safety of the system could be

compromised when using Accessory 15
pin D-type connector with equipment not
in compliance with the unit’s equivalent
safety requirements.
The contacts are to be used only on
circuits with 50 V RMS and lower, with a
maximum current rating of 3 A.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 904 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New Style)

Select one of the following topics: Specifications
• Specifications • Temperature Range: 5 - 40oC
• Facility Water Requirements • Setpoint: 25o C
• Monitoring Systems
• Temperature Stability: +1o C
• Fault Interlock Contact
• Cooling capacity: 15 kW
• Fuses
Note Listed specifications refer to a standard unit +20o
• Pressure Relief Valve C fluid temperature with tap water used as the
cooling fluid.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 905 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New Style), continued

Facility Water Requirements Monitoring Systems
Located in the facility water inlet line is a control valve A signal is sent to the host when a fault condition occurs.
which regulates the cooling water supply flow rate as it
If the inlet/outlet high temperature or low fluid flow
enters the unit. The heat load determines the rate of flow.
conditions occur:
As the heat load increases, the required cooling water
supply flow rate increases. Flow automatically stops • the fault light lights,
when the unit is turned OFF.
• the fault contact for the remote signal closes, and
• the unit continues to operate.
If a low fluid level fault occurs:
• the fault light lights,
• the fault contact for the remote signal closes, and
• the pump shuts down.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 906 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New Style), continued

Monitoring Systems, continued Fault Interlock Contact
High Temperature Monitor This 15 pin D-type connector is found on the control
There are two high temperature monitors connected to panel. It is neither a power inlet nor power outlet; it is
sensors monitoring the temperature of the recirculating isolated from the power circuit.
fluid:
Caution The safety of the system could be
• recirculating coil inlet compromised when using Accessory 15
• recirculating coil outlet pin D-type connector with equipment not
in compliance with the unit’s equivalent
When the temperature of the fluid exceeds the safety requirements.
temperature set limit, the monitors signal the host.
The contacts are to be used only on
o circuits with 50 V RMS and lower, with a
The set temperature limit for the coil supply is 30 C and
35o C for the coil return. maximum current rating of 3 A.

Low Fluid Flow Monitor

Located between the return line strainer and the plate
exchanger, the low flow switch activates when the flow
rate drops below approximately 15 liters/min.
Low Fluid Level Monitor
On a float switch within the reservoir, a low fluid level
monitor is connected. This fault occurs when the cooling
fluid within the reservoir drops below it’s normal
operating level.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 907 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New Style), continued

Fuses Pressure Relief Valve
Specific electrical requirements of the unit are detailed A pressure relief valve is located on the pump discharge
on the serial number label located on the rear of the unit. line; it establishes the maximum operating pressure of
the unit.
Fuse Specifications
When pressure of the fluid leaving the pump exceeds the
1 FU 375 mA MDL time delay fuse valve setting, the valve will bypass the fluid within the
3 FU 375 mA MDL time delay fuse
unit to relieve the pressure.

4 FU 750 mA MDL time delay fuse Note Actual operating pressure is determined by the
pressure drop through the instrument being
cooled.
Caution Never remove the green/yellow ground
wire.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 908 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8)

Select one of the following topics: Overview
• Overview This two-stage refrigeration system mates with the
cryostat interface and the manufacturer’s shields, and is
• Specifications
designed for continuous operation. The system:
• Operating Modes
• cools (by conduction) the warm (80o K) and cold 20o
K MRI Cryostat radiation shields.
• maintains the shields at cryogenic temperatures, thus
reducing the loss of liquid Helium.
The system includes the Helium compressor,
interconnecting gas lines, and a shield cooler.
For refrigerant, the rotary water cooled compressor uses
high purity Helium. The Helium refrigerant and cryostat
Helium do not co-mix. The only utilities required are
electricity and cooling water for the compressor.
Note Pressures indicated by the unit’s gauges are not
absolute. Psig represents pounds per square
inch gauge. kPa represents Kilopascals gauge.
kPa = 6.895 x Psig

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 909 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Specifications Component Specification
Electrical Characteristics Expander Power Supply Running from the compressor
to the RF filter and on to the
Component Specification expander valve motor are two
expander cables (connected in
Electrical Service Delta-connected 3-phase plus series).
ground.
200/230 V +10% V3~, 60 Hz, Power to the valve motor is
or 220 V +10% V3~, 50 Hz. fused at 0.63 A. The cable
connection at the compressor
Power 4.5 kW, 12.5 A. is permanent.
Full load at 220 V V3~, 60 Hz.
Note Power should be pro- Starting current: 58 A; Control Logic This provides a single ON/OFF
vided through a separately locked-rotor current: 64 A switch for operating the
fused safety switch with 20 A compressor and shield cooler.
fuses. Following a power interruption,
it also provides the means for
Compressor Field Wiring Required an auto-restart.
Stand-alone Operation Switch The HC-8E1 compressor is
equipped with a switch for
operating the internal gas
solenoid by-pass valve, to
permit compressor stand-
alone operation.
Expander Control Receptacle Powers relays for shutting
down expander power and
opening the gas solenoid
valve.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 910 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Specifications, continued Cooling Requirements
Environmental Conditions
Component Specification
Note Operating under conditions outside the equip-
ment specification may void existing warranties. Water inlet temperature 4o C - 21o C; 40o F - 70o F
Water outlet temperature Maximum: 40o C; 104o F
Condition Specification
Cooling water pressures Minimum: 205 kPa; 30 psig
Ambient Temperature Operating: 4o C - 40o C
Maximum: 690 kPa; 100 psig
40o F - 104o F
Cooling water flow 5.7 - 9.5 liters/min; 1.5 - 2.5 gpm
Storage: -23o C - 65o C
Pressure drop (min. flow) 100 kPa; 15 psid
-10o F - 149o F
Water chiller cooling cap. 5.1 kW; 17,500 BTU/hr
Atmospheric Pressure Operating: 52 kPa - 110 kPa
7.5 psia - 16.0 psia
Storage: 52 kPa - 110 kPa
7.5 psia - 16.0 psia
Magnetic Field Limits Compressor: < 150 gauss
Shield Cooler: < 800 gauss
Relative Humidity Operating: 30% - 70%
Storage: 10% - 90%

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 911 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Specifications, continued Equalization Pressures/Ambient Temperatures
System Helium Gas Pressure
Press.
Temp. (oC) Press. (kPa) Temp. (oF) (psig)
Component Specification
4 1830 - 1860 40 265 - 270
Equalization pressure @ 20o C; 68o F: 1930 - 1965 kPa;
280 - 285 psig 10 1865 - 1900 50 270 - 275

Operating Pressures (typ.) Supply: 2135 - 2410 kPa; 15.6 1900 - 1935 60 275 - 280
310 - 350 psig 20.0 1930 - 1965 68 280 - 285
Return: 690 - 965 kPa
100 - 140 psig 26.7 1975 - 2010 80 286 - 291
37.8 2050 - 2085 100 297 - 302
40 2060 - 2100 104 299 - 304

Refrigerant Quality
• Helium Gas: 99.995% purity
• Dew Point: < -50o C; -58o F, at 2070 kPa (300 psig)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 912 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Specifications, continued Weights
Color Codes
Component Specification
• Red Supply Line: Helium gas supply from compressor
to shield cooler. Compressor 75 kg; 165 lbs

• Green Return Line: Helium gas return from the shield Gas Lines 16 kg; 35 lbs
cooler to the compressor. Shield Cooler 19 kg; 42 lbs
Compressor Mounting System Weight (total) 110 kg; 242 lbs
• Mount: Base down
Part Numbers
o
• Level: To within 5 of horizontal
Component APD Part#
Space Requirements
SC-R8 Shield Cooler, 50/60 Hz, Right Angle, 264325D
• Front: Allow two feet (24") in front of compressor, so Welded Lip Interface, 2 8M Gas Couplings
the water, gas, and electrical connections can be
accessed. HC-8E1 Compressor, (2) 8M Gas Couplings, 264302D20J-T
Water cooled, with 15 m long expander
• Left: Allow two feet (24") on the left of the compressor cable attached, 220 V V3~ full load A,
(when facing the front) so the absorber can be 50/60 Hz
maintained. Note When ordering parts, refer to the Philips parts manual.
GE parts are cross-referenced to Philips numbers.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 913 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Specifications, continued Operating Modes
Part Numbers, continued Normal Operating Mode
In this mode:
Component APD Part#
• compressor and expander valve motor are running,
Gas line, soft copper, 20 m long, 8F 260450C66
couplings • compressor bypass solenoid valve is closed, and
RF gas feed through 263062B • compressor stand-alone switch (front panel) is in
Expander cable, inside, 10 m long, RF 264522B33 Normal position.
Shield to SC-R8 valve motor Stand-alone Operating Mode
Waterline Kit: 262696A In this mode:
• 40 ft of 1/2" OD nylon tubing 60760
• compressor is running,
• (2) front ferrules, brass 12307
• compressor expander receptacle is energized,
• (2) rear ferrules, brass 12308
• bypass solenoid valve is open, and
• (2) nuts, brass 12306
• compressor stand-alone switch (front panel) is in
• (2) adapters, brass. 02702
1/2" OD tube x 1/2" ID hose
Stand-alone position.

Note When ordering parts, refer to the Philips parts manual.

GE parts are cross-referenced to Philips numbers.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 914 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC R8), continued

Operating Modes, continued
3.5 VDC Operating Mode
In this mode:
• compressor is running,
• expander valve motor is stopped, and
• bypass valve is open.
Note As the compressor initiates this mode, a 3.5 VDC
signal from the control system is applied across
sockets 1(+) and 2(-) of the expander control
receptacle. Once this signal stops, the valve
motor starts, and the bypass solenoid valve
closes.
Control Receptacle Sockets
When the compressor is not running, control receptacle
sockets 2 and 4 connect to contacts that are closed.
These contacts are rated up to 2 A at 250 V, and are
open when the compressor is running.
Note Socket 3 is grounded.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 915 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (Intera NT)

Select one of the following topics: Overview
• Overview The core of the T5 data acquisition system is the ADAS
II, also referred to as the BDAS. The BDAS is organized
• Functional Blocks
inside a rack mounted on the inside of the NTDAC. The
• Power Rack (FP) BDAS includes the following components:
• BDAS (FC) Hardware
Component Details
• Digital Hardware (BCP & DFEC1)
BDAS Backpanel Includes all of the boards (BCP, DIGREC,
• Analog Circuit Transceiver). It also includes 3 buses.
• RF Bus: RF channel control/status
• Transmit Circuit signals
• Receive Circuit • RF WFG Bus: Transports RF
waveforms (90o/180o pulse)
• Power Supplies
• ADC Bus: 16 data sources (max.)
• BDAS Cooling delivering information to the BCP

• NTDAC Cable Interface Box (FM) BDAS Control Control measurement and the following
Processor Board BCP devices (16 max.):
• System Filter Box • RF Devices
• T5 Front End Interface (TFEI) • Gradient Devices
• Front-end Devices (DFEC1 & DFEC2)
Note DFEC2 is in Magnet Room.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 916 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (Intera NT), continued

Overview, continued Functional Blocks

Component Details Block Components

DFEC1 BCP daughter board controlling devices T5 Data Acq. Control Front End PSupp (FEPSU) (FP)
outside the RF Room. Interfaces include: (TNDAC) (F-) BDAS (FC)
Fan
• RF power amplifier control/status
Reconstructor
• RF power amplifier blanking NTDAC Cable Interface Box (FM)
• System filter box interface (Blanking Sensor Display Unit (SDU) (FK)
Box and Tune Switch) Mains Inlet

• Cable interface unit (Door Open RF Power Amplifier 5002 n/a

Switch/Service - Sync Signal) (with Intera for 0.5T only)
• Fiber Interface to DFEC2 - Transmit/ System Filter Box (Z-) Blanktop (ZA)
Receive/Interlock Data Tune Switch (ZD)
• DEFC2: Controls devices inside RF Patient Support Computer
Room. It includes the Fiber, RF, and Interface (ZB)
Coil Interfaces Gradient Filter Plate

• Physiology Signals (ECG, PPU, Resp. T5 Front End Interface Front-end Controller (DFEC2)
Gating, Reserved) (TFEI) (MDI)
Patient Support Electronics (MDP)
0.5T Transceiver • RF Transmitter & Receiver
Coil Interface Box (MS-) n/a
• Clock generation
• 500 kHz, 16-bits ADC on board Control Panel Front (MC1) n/a
RF Coils (Body SC1 & n/a
SC2)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 917 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (Intera NT), continued

Power Rack (FP) These power supply units deliver DC voltage for:
Front End Power Supply Units (FEPSU) distribute device • T5 Front-end Interface (TFEI) for patient support
power for devices not in the TNDAC. They include: electronics (MDP) (+12 V, +5 V, +24 V, & +13.8 V) and
• DC Power Supply Units (8) DFEC2 (MDI) (+12 V, +5 V, +24 V, & +30 V)

• 220 V Fans (2) FPH & FPK to cool the power rack • Coil Interface Box (+5 V, +12 V, +300 V, & +30 V)

• Front-end Power Supply Unit LED Board (FEPSU • System Filter Box (Z-) for patient support computer
interface (ZB) (+5 V), TC Switch (Tune box ZD)
LED) indicating the presence of each voltage.
(+5 V & +12 V) and Blanking Box (ZA) (+5 V, +12 V
• 220 V Line Filter Unit & Load & 300 V)
DC Power Supplies BDAS (FC) Hardware
The BDAS system includes:
DC Power Supplies Details
• Digital Mother Board - BDAS Control Processor (BCP)
PE1920/00 (FPG) -5 V / 20 A
• DFEC1 Daughter Board
PE1911/00 (FPC) +12 V / 5 A
PE1911/00 (FPD) -12 V / 5 A • Transceiver Board (0.5T)
PE1922/00 (FPF) +24 V / 4.5 A • Switch Mode
PE1941/00V (FPA) +13.8 V / 20 A • Linear Power Supplies
PE1912/00 (FPB) +30 V / 2 A
PE1920/00 (FPH) +5 V / 20 A
PCB 300 V Supply (FPE) 0.05 A
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 918 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (Intera NT), continued

Digital Hardware (BCP & DFEC1) The other section is accessible by the DMA960 and the
main i960. It is used for the scan data block. It includes
Direct Memory Access (DMA)
data transport from ADC, data transport to the
The BCP digital motherboard includes two i960CA Reconstructor and physiology data. One DMA channel
processors. Each is equipped with four onboard DMA remains for additional/future expansion.
controllers.
Note Bus access is based on priorities. CPU960 >
• One i960 processor is used as the CPU (CPU960). DMA960 > ADC > AP > Physiology.
• One i960 processor is used as a DMA controller Gradient Waveform Generator
(DMA960).
The waveform generator sends RF samples to the
The SCSI link to the Host (8-bits) includes its own DMA transceiver. Synchronization is controlled by the sector
controller. To satisfy bandwidth requirements, when all of generator which defines sampling start/stop.
the DMAs are running, the memory and Bus are split into
two sections. Sector Generator
The control of transfers from the address and control
One section can only be accessed by the main CPU960. data FIFO to the devices, and from the devices to the
It’s used for the stretch block (sector control/status, status data FIFO is done by the sector generator
gradient waveform definitions, RF waveform definitions, sequencer. Both actions are specifically timed and under
RS232 interface for RF amplifier, and communication to/ software control.
from the Host via SCSI).
Note Bus access between DMA channels and other
Bus masters (CPU & SCSI) is based on priorities.
SCSI > CPU > Gradient Waveform > RF Wave-
form > Sector Control Data > Sector Status Data.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 919 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (Intera NT), continued

Digital Hardware (BCP & DFEC1), continued Interface to Reconstructor (Burst)
Byte Serialized Device Busses Parallel interface, 32-bit wide, transfer rate of 9 MB/s
(10 MB/s max). Transfer rate matches maximum ADC
A byte-serialized bus connects all devices to the BDAS.
The bus is an address (11-bits) and data 16-bits) rate.
connection. It utilizes a protocol which supports exact System Clock
timing for all instrument settings. A single clock runs the complete BDAS system (digital/
Busses include: analog). Operations are synchronous. The Transceiver
generates the clock, which is distributed on the
• RF Bus (through backpanel connection) backpanel as a 10, 20, 30 and 40 MHz clock.
• Gradient Bus through balanced shielded connection For test/development purposes:
• Front-end Bus through fiber optic connection, • If no Transceiver is present, the digital BCP board
manchester encoded protocol. The clock is sent over generates its own clock. The CPU then operates on a
the fiber optics with the serial control/status clock of 20 MHz.
information (remote clock extraction).
During normal operation, the BCP requires three
• Spare Bus (balanced shielded connection) external clocks, supplied from the backpanel (10, 30 and
ADC Bus 40 MHz).
The backpanel ADC Bus transports sampled data from
the analog board (transceiver) to the digital motherboard
through the DIGREC board.
Note 16-bit data, 4-bit address, transfer rate - 8 MB/s
(max.)
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 920 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (Intera NT), continued

Digital Hardware (BCP & DFEC1), continued Analog Circuit
Watchdog Timer The BDAS analog section is on the Transceiver board.
The Watchdog Timer is used to reset the BDAS when the The board is composed of three parts:
software crashes, because the SCSI interface does not • Transmitter
support a direct reset.
• Frequency Generator (including system clock)
Note When no communication has been occurring for
ten seconds, the Host is assumed to be down • Receiver (including ADC)
and BDAS aborts all activity and reboots. Important! A yellow Okay LED on the Transceiver Board
Daughterboard (DFEC1) is OFF during power ON. It is set by the soft-
ware once all the self tests have passed.
DFEC1 is a part of the communication link between the Only in diagnostic mode; not normal opera-
BDAS and the RF front-end functions inside/outside the tion mode.
RF shielded room.
BCP Front View DFEC1 Front View
X50 Physiology to
Host 26p Sensor Display Unit
X50 (Sky)
50p SCSI
X51 RF Amp Blanking

X51 Power Amp & Spare X52

Parallel Interface RF Amp
25p RS232 via Interface Box 26p

X53 System Filterbox

X52 Gradient Bus 26p
58p (Digital)
X54 Cable Interface Unit
26p
X53 Spare
68p

X55 DFEC2 Output Fiber

X54 AP Sky
X56 DFEC2 Input Fiber
58p Burst-PCB
X57 DFEC2 Interlock Fiber
Reset Switch
DIAGN. LED S
DIAGN. LED S
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 921 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (Intera NT), continued

Analog Circuit, continued The processor interface controls (for each independent
DDS):
The BCP controls the transceiver via several buses
located on the BDAS backpanel: • frequency setup,
• Waveform Bus (RFW) • phase setup, and
• Control Bus (RFC) • phase jump.
• Status Bus (RFS) Receive Circuit
• DIGREC Data Bus The MR signal (received) enters via connector X3. In
order to reduce any noise present, the signal is passed
Transmit Circuit through a band pass filter. The signal then moves on to
Complex RF waveform data comes over the RF the receive attenuator before going to a mixer (DDS2)
waveform bus, and is provided to the digital single side where it is mixed with the 30 MHz clock.
band modulator. This modulator then generates the data
This combined signal is send through a band pass filter
for the complete waveform which is then sent to the
where the signal is mixed with the received, filtered and
DAC. From the DAC, the signal moves to a low pass filter
(2.5 MHz) then onto a mixer. attenuated.

The frequency generator includes dual independent Note The same routing (Transmit/Received) is used
for the Tune signal for RF coil tuning.
Direct Digital Synthesizers (DDS). Each is controlled by
a common microprocessor interface.
• DDS1: Transmit side
• DDS2: Receive Side

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 922 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (Intera NT), continued

Power Supplies NTDAC Cable Interface Box (FM)
The BDAS contains its own power supplies. The NTDAC has a connection going to the DFEC1
(8 status / 8 control through a 26-pin high density
PE1937/03 (switch mode power supply) delivers
connector) and an RS232 going to the BCP board.
5 V / 30 A, +15V / 3A, and -15 V / 3A. These are used by
the digital boards (BCP, DFEC1) along with the digital On the other side, the cable box has the following
part of the analog board. Two linear power supplies connections:
(+15V & -15 V) are used for the analog board
• RS232 to the power amplifier
(transceiver).
• Door detection connection
LEDs can be used to monitor all of the power supplies.
• Service connector (for trigger pulses)
• 5 V, +15 V &-15 V: switch mode power supplies
• Connections for tune off, tune select, RFUNBL-N and
• +15 V & -15 V: linear power supplies on the
RFBLFAIL via a parallel line.
transceiver board.
Note DFEC PCB connects to the BCP PCB and has
BDAS Cooling no direct backpanel connections.
Nine ETRI fans are used for cooling the BDAS unit. 220
VAC powers the fans. System Filter Box
The System Filter Box is tasked with moving signals to/
from the Technical Room and the Examination Room
(RF shielded).
Note Signals are filtered, so high frequencies are
blocked to ground, and original LF signals pass
through.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 923 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (Intera NT), continued

T5 Front End Interface (TFEI) DFEC2
The T5 Front End Interface is composed of three DFEC2 is composed of four parts:
components:
Component Details
• DFEC2 (w/FBINT, RFINT, CI Unit & BMDS)
Fiber Part of communication between DFEC1 and
• Power & Signal Cabling Rack Interface DFEC2. Includes the data fiber interface,
(FBINT) interlock fiber interface and internal FE_CSbus
• Patient Support Electronics interface and registers.

Backpanel Front End Bus

RF Interface RF functions in the RF room are connected
DFEC2
(RFINT) through front panel connectors to the
DFEC2_RFINT. Functions include control/status
of COILINT/Cold Driver, Interlock support for
Power & Patient Support COILINT/Cold Driver, Coil ID and peripheral
Signal Cabling Electronics
BMDS C.I. Unit
RF
Interface
Fiber
Interface
control/status signal connections.
Connector Connections to He pressure sensor to measure
Interface magnet gas over-pressure, and an airflow
(CI) sensor to measure gradient coil airflow.
cable from cables to/from fibers to/from Body Motion For monitoring patient respiration.
Helium level, COIL INT Box, DFEC1
airflow C.I Unit Detection
System
(BMDS)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 924 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (Intera NT), continued

T5 Front End Interface (TFEI), continued
Power & Signal Cabling Rack
This component of the T5 Front End Interface provides
power/signal cabling to/from the TFEI, patient support
control, physiology and light beams and bore lighting
going to/from the System Filter Box.
Note The patient support manual motor switch can
also be found here.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 925 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera)

Select one of the following topics: Overview
• Overview The core of the Gyroscan Intera data acquisition system
is the ADAS II, also referred to as the BDAS. The BDAS
• Functional Blocks
is organized inside a rack mounted on the inside of the
• RF Transmit NTDAC. The BDAS includes the following components:
• RF Receive Path
Component Details
• Cable Interface Box (FM)
BDAS Backpanel Includes all of the boards (BCP+,
• BDAS (FC) Hardware Transceiver, and 2 Synco-receivers). It
also includes 3 buses.
• BCP+ & DFEC1 • RF Bus: RF channel control/status
signals
• Transceiver
• RF WFG Bus: Transports digital RF
• Synco Receiver Boards (Synergy Coil Option) waveforms
• BDAS Power Supplies • ADC Bus: 16 data sources (max.)
delivering information to the BCP
• Reconstructor XP1000, AP550 and (X)W6000 • Clock signals (from Transceiver board
are moved to the right BDAS boards
• System Filter Box
• Patient Front-end Interface (PFEI) (MM-)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 926 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

Overview, continued Component Details

Component Details Synergy Coils (2) • Synergy coils RF receiver boards

for 0.5T and 1.0T • 3 receive channels per Syncorx board
BDAS+ Control Control measurement and the following
Processor Board BCP devices (16 max.): • Each receive channel has a 20 MHz
12-bit ADC
• RF Devices
• Each Synco board has 1 test circuit to
• Gradient Devices test each receive channel separately.
Controls Front-end Devices (DFEC1 &
PFEI).
DFEC1 BCP+ daughter board controlling devices
outside the RF Room. Interfaces include:
• RF power amplifier control/status
• RF power amplifier blanking
• Cable interface box (Door Open
Switch/Service - Sync Signal)
• Fiber Interface to PFEI - Transmit/
Receive/Interlock Data
Transceiver • RF Transmitter & Receiver
• Clock generation
• 20 MHz, 12-bits ADC on board
• Circuit for limiting data stream (via
filtering) and digital quadrature
detection.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 927 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

Functional Blocks • Patient Front End Interface (PFEI) (MM):
• New technology Data Acquisition Control Cabinet (F-) – Physiology Fiber Interface (PFint) (MMA)
including:
– COILINT (MME)
– Cable Interface Box (FM)
– TR Switch (Transmit/Receive (MMF)
– BDAS (FC)
– QBC Detune Drive (MMC)
– Fan (FCL)
– Syncoint (MMB)
– Reconstructor (XP1000, AP550 and (X)W6000)
• Patient Interface Connection (PICU): Front (MC1) and
– Space available for MR5002 Power Amplifier (FR) - Rear (MC2)
for 0.5T systems, or MR5003 Power Amplifier for
31P MN-option. • Physiology Unit (left or right of patient support):
– Nurse Call/Respiratory/ Peripheral Pulse Interfaces
– Mains Inlet Unit (FI)
– Headset and Comfort Zone Interfaces
• RF Power Amplifier: MR5002 for 0.5T systems, or
Ehrhorn Type S2x for 1.0T and 1.5 T systems. • RF Coils:
• System Filter Box (Z-): – Quadrature Body Coil and Surface Coils
– Front-end Power Supply Unit (ZK) – Transmit/Receive Coils
– Gradient Signal Filter Plate – Synergy Coils (2 connectors)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 928 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

RF Transmit RF Receive Path
The excitation signal is generated on the BDAS The MR signal is picked up by the -in the scan
Transceiver Board. parameters - selected receive coil.
• 0.5T: approximately 21.3 MHz; with a maximum • 0.5 T: 21.3 MHz
bandwidth of 470 kHz
• 1.0T: 42.6 MHz
• 1.0T: approximate 42.58 MHz; maximum bandwidth of
• 1.5T: 63.9 MHz
590 kHz.
The operator can select between the following receiving
• 1.5T: approximate 63.9 MHz; maximum bandwidth of
coils:
590 kHz.
• Quadrature Body Coil
Factory adjusted attenuators allow you to adapt the
output signal to 8 dBm (maximum). In practice it is • Surface Coils
adapted to 0 dBm, which is also specified for both RF
• Synergy Coils
amplifiers.
Note Once the MR signal is pre-amplified at the RF
Important! The signal leads (through the Transmit and
coil, it moves to the Coil Interface Board for nor-
Receive Switch) to the Quadrature Body Coil.
mal receive coils, and the Synco-INT for synergy
This is the only transmit coil in the Gyroscan
coils.
system for completing normal imaging scans.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 929 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

Cable Interface Box (FM) BDAS (FC) Hardware
The cable box has a connection going to the DFEC1 The BDAS system includes:
(8 status / 8 control through a 26-pin high density
• Digital Mother Board - BDAS Control Processor
connector) and an RS232 going to the BCP+ board.
(BCP+)
On the other side, the cable box has the following
• DFEC1 Daughter Board
connections:
• Transceiver Board
• RS232 to the power amplifier
• Optional Syncoreceiver Boards
– X3 for normal imaging
• Switch Mode
– X2 for spectro imaging
• Linear Power Supplies
• Door detection connection (shielded room)
• Service connector X6 (for external trigger pulses)
• Shutdown control signal for the cryocooler (X11)
• Neuro stimulator trigger signal (X7)
• X8 (dummy connector) to bypass blanking box failure
signal. Used in R1.x - R3.x only.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 930 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

BCP+ & DFEC1 The other section is accessible by the DMA960 and the
main i960. It is used for the scan data block. It includes
Direct Memory Access (DMA)
data transport from ADC, data transport to Reconstructor
The BCP+ digital motherboard includes two i960CA XP1000 and physiology data. One DMA channel remains
processors. Each is equipped with four onboard DMA for additional/future expansion.
controllers.
Note Bus access is based on priorities. CPU960 >
• One i960 processor is used as the CPU (CPU960). DMA960 > ADC > AP > Physiology.
• One i960 processor is used as a DMA controller Gradient Waveform Generator
(DMA960).
Gradient samples are sent to the gradient interface by
The SCSI link to the Host (8-bits) includes its own DMA the gradient waveform generator. At the gradient
controller. To satisfy bandwidth requirements, when all of interface, the samples are converted in analog gradient
the DMAs are running, the memory and Bus are split into demand signals (via the DACs). This action is exactly
two sections. timed. The sector generator, which defines sampling
start/stop, controls synchronization with the rest of the
One section can only be accessed by the main CPU960.
system.
It’s used for the stretch block (sector control/status,
gradient waveform definitions, RF waveform definitions, Sector Generator
RS232 interface for RF amplifier, and communication to/ The control of transfers from the address and control
from the Host via SCSI). data FIFO to the devices, and from the devices to the
Note Bus access between DMA channels and other status data FIFO is done by the sector generator
Bus masters (CPU & SCSI) is based on priorities. sequencer. Both actions are specifically timed and under
SCSI > CPU > Gradient Waveform > RF Wave- software control.
form > Sector Control Data > Sector Status Data.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 931 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

BCP+ & DFEC1, continued Interface to Reconstructor (Burst)
Byte Serialized Device Busses Parallel interface, 32-bit wide, transfer rate of 9 MB/s
(10 MB/s max). Transfer rate matches maximum ADC
A byte-serialized bus connects all devices to the BDAS.
The bus is an address (11-bits) and data 16-bits) rate.
connection. It utilizes a protocol which supports exact System Clock
timing for all instrument settings. A single clock runs the complete BDAS system (digital/
Busses include: analog). Operations are synchronous. The Transceiver
generates the clock, which is distributed on the
• RF Bus (through backpanel connection) backpanel as a 10, 20, 30 and 40 MHz clock.
• Gradient Bus through balanced shielded connection For test/development purposes:
• Front-end Bus through fiber optic connection, • If no Transceiver is present, the digital BCP board
manchester encoded protocol. The clock is sent over generates its own clock. The CPU then operates on a
the fiber optics with the serial control/status clock of 20 MHz.
information (remote clock extraction).
During normal operation, the BCP requires three
• Spare Bus (balanced shielded connection) external clocks, supplied from the backpanel (10, 30 and
ADC Bus 40 MHz.
The backpanel ADC Bus transports sampled data from
the analog board (transceiver) to the digital motherboard
through the DIGREC board.
Note 16-bit data, 4-bit address, transfer rate - 8 MB/s
(max.)
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 932 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

BCP+ & DFEC1, continued Interfaces with equipment outside the RF Room:
Watchdog Timer • Power Amplifier parallel interface and blanking
The Watchdog Timer is used to reset the BDAS when the • Miscellaneous interface (Cable Box)
software crashes, because the SCSI interface does not
support a direct reset. Each includes identical 26-pin high density connectors
with 8 parallel outputs and 8 parallel inputs.
Note When no communication has been occurring for
ten seconds, the Host is assumed to be down Note Power amplifier blanking only has a small coaxial
and BDAS aborts all activity and reboots. connection (mini-bnc).

Daughterboard (DFEC1) Interface (fiber - 40 MHz) with equipment inside the RF

Room. Includes two fibers for data communication.
DFEC1 is a part of the communication link between the
BDAS and the RF front-end functions inside/outside the • 1 control fiber - data rate of 20 Mbits/sec.
RF shielded room.
• 1 status fiber - data rate of 20 Mbits/sec.
BCP Front View DFEC1 Front View
X50 Physiology to Note This link is quiet when no data communication is
X50
50p
Host
SCSI
(Sky)
26p Sensor Display Unit

RF Amp Blanking
present, and disabled during RF transmission.
X51

X51 Power Amp & Spare X52

Interlock data is also handled through these 2
fibers (Interlock - transmit mode error).
Parallel Interface RF Amp
25p RS232 via Interface Box 26p

X53 System Filterbox

X52 Gradient Bus 26p
58p (Digital)
X54 Cable Interface Unit
26p
X53 Spare
68p

X55 DFEC2 Output Fiber

X54 AP Sky
X56 DFEC2 Input Fiber
58p Burst-PCB
X57 DFEC2 Interlock Fiber
Reset Switch
DIAGN. LED S
DIAGN. LED S
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 933 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

BCP+ & DFEC1, continued Transceiver
Daughterboard (DFEC1), continued The generation of excitation signals and de-modulation/
Physiology interface digitizes 4 physiology signals digitalization of received MR signals is performed by the
simultaneously, with a fixed sample frequency of 1 KHz. transceiver.
Signals synchronize MR experiment and patient • For the 0.5T system, a transceiver board is designed
physiology - heart rate and respiratory gating. to work around an excitation frequency of 21.285
An interlock function protects hardware and patients MHz.
against front-end hardware faults: • For the 1.0T system, a transceiver board is designed
• PFEI interlock signal (reported via fibers) to work around an excitation frequency of 42.576
MHz.
• Power amplifier interlock signal
• For the 1.5T system, a transceiver board is designed
• Physiology chain interlock signal to work around an excitation frequency of 63.870
• Miscellaneous Unit Bus (door detection) interlock MHz.
signal Important! Each board works in essentially the same
manner. Components differ slightly in the fre-
quency part of the board (DDs, frequency
mixers/filters, etc.)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 934 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

Transceiver, continued Each board includes three receive channels; each
channel receives an MR signal coming from one of the
The transceiver board is basically composed of four
distinct parts: synergy coil elements. The MR signals of each coil
element are then amplified in two steps.
• Receiver (including ADC)
• pre-amplifiers of 23 dB +-2dB on board each coil
• Frequency generator (including system clock) element
• Transmitter • a 13.4 dB amplification at the Syncoint board
• Digital interface/signal processing Signals are converted from the system (RF) frequency to
an intermediate frequency in the Syncorx. The
An "OK" LED is located on the transceiver board. At
power-on, it is OFF by default. It is set by the software intermediate frequency signals are then converted into
digital data by an ADC.
once all the self tests have passed (in diagnostic mode,
not in normal operation mode). Note The Syncorx board also contains a test genera-
tor. In test mode, this generator supplies a test
Synco Receiver Boards (Synergy Coil Option) signal (frequency independent voltage level) to
Two Synco-Receiver boards are present when the each receiver channel.
Synergy Coil option is available for 0.5T and 1.0T
systems.
Note For a 1.5T system, the Synergy Coils are a stan-
dard component.
The boards are positioned to the right of the DFEC1 PCB
in the BDAS data acquisition system. There are three
versions of SYNCORX, one version for each the 0.5T,
1.0T and 1.5T systems. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 935 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

BDAS Power Supplies System Filter Box
• Switch mode power supply (PE 1937/03) delivering The System Filter Box:
+5 V / 30 A, +15 V / 3 A and -15V / 3A for BCP+ and
• passes signals to/from the Technical Room to the RF
DFEC I digital boards, and the digital component of
Examination Room,
the analog board. 5 V for Transceiver.
• contains power supply box (ZK) (+30 V, +5 V, +12 V)
• Linear power supplies (2), +15 V and -15 V for the
(FEPSU), and
analog board (Transceiver).
• includes the +300 V supply PCB.
LEDs are provided to monitor the power supplies.
+5 V, +15 V and -15 V LEDs on the switch mode power
Front-end Power Supply Unit (FEPSU)
supply unit. For R6.2 (and above) the FEPSU is placed as power
supply unit (ZK) inside the System Filter Box. It provides
+15 V and -15 V linear power supplies LEDs on the two LED indicators, one for AC is OK and one for DC is
Transceiver Board. OK. Input is 220 VAC, which is also used for the new
Reconstructor XP1000, AP550 and (X)W6000 patient support (MT-type) and Remote Magnet
Monitoring Unit (RMMU).
Measurement raw data is sent through the ADC Bus to
the reconstructor. The reconstructor completes "Fast A separate +300 V supply board (ZL) (also in the System
Fourier Transforms" on the raw data to generate a Filter Box) is used for blocking the selection pin diodes.
reconstructed image available at the monitor.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 936 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

System Filter Box, continued Patient Front-end Interface (PFEI) (MM-)
Gradient Filter Plate Six boards comprise the Patient Front-end Interface
The Gradient Filter Plate includes: (PFEI):
• PFINT: Physiology / Fiber Interface (MMA)
Component Details
• COILINT: Coil Interface (MME)
RF 2nd order low pass 3-sets for Omni & Power systems,
pipe filters used for gradient signal feed through. • TRSW: Transmit/Receive Switch (MMF)
6-sets for Master systems, used for • QDD: QBC Detune Drive (MMC)
gradient signal feed through.
• SYNCOINT: Synergy Coil Interface
Terminated BNC feed- Used for service purposes.
throughs • MN COILINT: Multi-Nuclei Interface (only for 1.5T
50 Ohm terminated = RF block
systems with MN option).
Two wave pipes For fiber feed through.
(length = 5 x diameter) • Two fibers used for DFEC I and
PFEI (PFINT) communication
• Fiber patient support electronics
• Fiber PICU front & fiber PICU rear
• Fibers for RMMU
• Fibers for patient intercom

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 937 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

Patient Front-end Interface (PFEI) (MM-), Component Details
continued
System Interlock An interlock signal is generated when an
PFINT (Physiology/Fiber Interface) Control error is detected when transmitting RF
The PFINT board is located in the PFEI unit, atop the power. RF power transmission is
inhibited when the interlock is active by
magnet. It is essentially the "Bus Master" for the other blanking the RF power amplifier output.
boards in the PFEI rack.
Power Supply Fault All of the front-end power supplies are
Detection checked for voltage level correctness.
Component Details
RF Coil Tuning/ Supports RF coil identification and
Fiber Interface Supports optical data link between Identification tuning of tuneable RF coils.
backend (DFEC1) and PFEI modules.
Generates the PFEI_FE_CS Bus (front- Two fiber connections exist between DFEC1 and PFEI.
end control and status bus) for
communication to other PFEI modules. • One transmit fiber for data towards DFEC1
PFINT Control/ Link to FE_CS Bus • One receive fiber for data from DFEC1
Status Bus Interface
External Control/ Supports some external connections for
Status Support control/status signals to/from front-end
peripheral devices.
Physiology Interface Supports analog and digital data to/from
the physiology modules inside the
Physiology Unit.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 938 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

Patient Front-end Interface (PFEI) (MM-),
continued
PFINT (Physiology/Fiber Interface), continued
Power Supply CS Bus

TRSW
Voltage Level Monitoring

Fibers
Fiber Interface
DFEC1 FE_CS Bus SYNCOINT

CS-PFINT

ILK-Control
Grad. Air Cooling COILINT

Peripheral CS

Helium Overpressure
MNCOILINT
Tuning & Identification

Physiology Data Physiology QDD

Analog Control/Status
MUX
Audio
PFINT
Interlocks & Board Conn.

VTune & Identification

Physiology Unit
Audio
Unit
Reserved
Fiber PPU
Technical Room Unit Resp RF Shielded Room
ECG

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 939 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

Patient Front-end Interface (PFEI) (MM-), Physiology Interface
continued The PFINT interfaces the analog physiology signals,
System Interlock measured by sensor-specific hardware, to the MR
The PFINT is master of the interlock system. system backend.

The "or" function is made of all interlock sources Note Housed in plugin modules, the sensor specific
hardware is located in the Physiology Unit at the
(6 maximum) from the interlock bus if:
patient support.
• the corresponding boards are connected, and
Typical plugin units may include:
• the interlock of the PFINT for both channels
• PP Module: Blood pulsation measured on the
(ILK1 & ILK2).
patient’s finger.
– ILK1: general interlock signal from regular imaging
• ECG Module: Electrocardiograph signal measured on
coilint
the patient’s chest.
– ILK2: general interlock signal from MN coilint
• RESP Module: Respiration movement of the patient’s
These interlock signals are latched with the body.
corresponding latch interlock signals, then coded and
Four analog differential inputs are available on the
transported to DFEC1 via the data fiber.
DFEC1. The signals are sampled by an ADC on the
PFINT generates an interlock in the following situations: DFEC1.
• when a power supply is (or was not) within
specification, and
• when a board interconnect fault or interlock is present.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 940 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

Patient Front-end Interface (PFEI) (MM-),
continued
Nominal Supply
Peripheral Control/Status Voltage
Time Constant Detection Level
A separate peripheral bus is connected on the front
panel of the PFINT. It supports control/status monitoring -5 V (A) 0.1 ms -4.4 V
of the following peripherals. -5 V (B) 0.1 ms -4.4 V
+5 V (Vcc) Immediate +4.65 V
Connector Details
+12 V 1 ms +11 V
X5 Gradient cooling air flow
-12 V 1 ms -11 V
X6 He overpressure detect (magnet-DPS)
+30 V 1 ms +28 V
X7 Reserved
+300 V 0.1 ms +284 V
X8 FED (Front)
Note The minimal time for a power dip detection is 100 us
X9 FED (Rear) (nominally) for the -5 V and +300 V supplies. For others, the
minimal time for a power dip detection is 1 ms (nominal).
Power Supply Fault Detection
PFINT monitors the power supplies from the PFEI.
Defective hardware can result if a power supply is
outside specification. An interlock interrupt should be
generated, since this can lead to a potentially hazardous
situation.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 941 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

Patient Front-end Interface (PFEI) (MM-), RF Coil Identification
continued By measuring the DC input resistance on the Tune-input
RF Coil Tuning of the RF coils, the various RF coils can be identified.
In Tune Mode, DAC output is connected to the PFEI mid- Note The switch is open and the DAC is used in a sim-
panel VTune line (switch is closed). ulated ADC Loop.
Three registers are available for storing tune voltages A certain identification voltage is applied on one side of
(Connections 1 & 2, and one general purpose). the comparator by driving a constant current (0.4 mA)
into the coil identification resistor of the relating coil.
Note The VTune line has a fixed voltage of 2 V when
Somewhere along the DAC output sweep, the
no register is selected. For RF coil tuning, the
VTune line voltage can vary from 2 V to 22 V. comparator output changes state and the counter value
latches. This value can be read from the coil
identification register.
COSEL / COIDSEL COSEL / COIDSEL
PFINT COILINT PFINT COILINT
COIDSEL Receive COIDSEL Receive
DAC-reg. Coil
DAC-reg. VTune Coil VTune
SC1 DAC Line QBC Sel.
SC1 DAC Line QBC Sel.

PCI Sel.
DAC-reg.
PCI Sel.
SC2
DAC-reg. COMP.

SC2 COMP. PC2 Sel.

RID 1 & 2
PC2 Sel. DAC-reg.
GP
DAC-reg.
GP
Counter
Latch COILID.
Currents
Start
Sources
Count 400 uA
ID. Reg.
Status
ID2SEL

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 942 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

Patient Front-end Interface (PFEI) (MM-),
continued Control

COILINT Board (MME) QBC RF QDD CS Bus

This board serves as a control interface for the surface Control CS Bus
coils and as an RF interface for all (non synergy) SC1
RF

receiving coils. It is composed of the following parts:

Control RF Out

• RF Signals: All RF sections are processed SC2

RF

• Coil Control Section: All coil interfaces are handled COILINT CH1-ILK

RF
PU Coil
• Trip Level Check Aux
RF
CH2-ILK

• Interlock: Error and status handling

RF
• MN Control Interface: For multi-nuclei coilint MNINT

RF

T/R Coil TRSW CS Bus

Control

Control

Control

MN Coil MN MN Out
RF COILINT

Control
CS Bus
Syn Coil RF SYNCOINT
Synco Out

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 943 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

Patient Front-end Interface (PFEI) (MM-), COILINT Board (MME) - Coil Control Section
continued This part generates control signals for the coils. Error/
COILINT Board (MME) - RF Section status signals are generated, detected or collected and
The COILINT provides: processed for proper action (interlock) and PFINT
readout.
• RF input selection
Note Algorithms for processing are programmed in a
• RF amplification of the selected receive coil, and if programmable logic device (PLD).
applicable
COILINT Board (MME) - Trip Level Check
• power supplies to the coil’s pre-amplifiers. A trip level control circuit is available to set the digitally
The COILINT supports standard single RF channel coils. controlled potentiometer. This pot sets an upper limit for
It includes the following inputs. the maximum allowable RF field strength. An error signal
(PU-coil fault, Maximum RF Power Exceeded) is
Input Details generated when this level is exceeded.
Quad Body Coil 10 VDC supply, superimposed
on the input to power (coil pre-
amplifier)
Surface Coils (2) Include 10 VDC supply on the
inputs
Transmit/Receive Coil Pre-amplified by the TRSW
Pickup Coil Input has attenuator to scale
the input level
Auxiliary Input For example, for an external
directional coupler Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 944 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

Patient Front-end Interface (PFEI) (MM-), The TRSW is an RF power interface between the
continued transmit/receive coils and the 1H power amplifier. The
receive signal from the T/R coil is amplified, then
COILINT Board (MME) - Interlock, Error/Status
Handling supplied to the COILINT. Control signals for the T/R coil
are generated on the TRSW.
During any situation where RF energy could be harmful,
the interlock signal disables the RF power amplifier. Two If the hardware is incapable of withstanding the RF
interlock lines are provided in the PFEI. power, a transmit fault generates. If the TRSW receive
section is malfunctioning, a status signal is generated.
• CH1-ILK: 1H proton imaging channel
• CH2-ILK: Multi-nuclei spectroscopy channel RF Power Switches
swTCA

COILINT Board (MME) - MN Control Interface

TX from P.A. TX QBC TCA
Tune-signal ~21 dB
swA IN

The MNINT function is added to the COILINT; it enables

swTCB

TCB
the use of an existing MN-Coilint while adding minimal
circuitry. QLL
swTS tst

Transmit/Receive Switch (TRSW & MMF) Atten.

Important! Only used on 1.5T systems.

~37.5 dB
swC swD

The TRSW is composed of four sections. ~21 dB

swB swE
• RF Power Switches Tune Switch

• Tune Circuitry COILINT

TX T/R Coil

• TRC Pre-amplifier
RX T/R Coil

• Digital Interface/Control Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 945 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Data Acquisition System - BDAS (New Intera), continued

Patient Front-end Interface (PFEI) (MM-), The SYNCOINT is controlled by the FE_CS Bus.
continued Amplified RF signals are sent to the Synco-receivers in
the NTDAC.
Quad body Coil Detune Driver Board (QDD)
This board selects the transmit/receive state of the body Specification Details
coil.
Frequencies 21.29 Mhz, 42.58 MHz and 63.87 Mhz
It tunes the body coil during transmit/receive with body
coil and detunes the body coil during receiving with other Bandwidth +500 kHz at center frequency
RF coils. Gain 13.4 dB +0.5 dB
Note Body coil error detection is also done on the QDD
board.
Important! This PCB is not frequency dependant. FE
Coil Coil Control
Digital Interface Control Signals
CSBUS
Synergy Coil Interface (SYNCOINT)
Note This is an option for the 0.5T and 1.0T systems.
To/From
Synergy Coil
The SYNCOINT is composed of an RF section, coil
control section and a digital interface. RF 6 RF channels 1
6 RF
Section
The interface for the SYNCOINT controls the synergy Channels Out
6 RF Channels 2

coil. It provides power and control signals, and it detects

malfunctions generated by the coil. It can amplify up to
six RF signals coming from the synergy coils.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 946 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

RF Amplifier - 53-S23A-64 & S24A-42 (New Intera)

Specification Summary Pulse Droop:
S23 • 3 mS rectangular pulse mode High < 0.5 dB
Mode Low: Max. Power 625 W; Gain 58 +0.5 dB; • 50 mS rectangular pulse modes Mid & High < 1.0
Pulse < 500 mS; Duty <50% dB
Mode Mid: Max. Power 5.0 kW; Gain 67 +0.5 dB; • 500 mS rectangular pulse mode Low < 0.25 dB
Pulse < 15 mS; Duty <10% (measured from 5 to 500 mS)
Mode High: Max. Power 25.0 kW; Gain 74 +0.5 dB; Operating Frequency Range: 63.870 +0.305 MHz
Pulse < 3 mS; Duty <5%
Load Impedance: 50 ohms
Gain Stability: Over 15 min. period <0.5 dB; over 5,000
hours < 1.0 dB Operating Environmental Conditions:

Phase Linearity: Pout = (Pmax - 40 dB) to Pmax < 5o over • Ambient temp. range: +10 to +40o C
any 20 dB interval • Humidity: 20% - 90% relative, non-condensing
Phase Stability: over a 15 min. period < 3o • Air Pressure: 70 kPa - 110 kPa
Maximum Pulse Energy: • Magnetic Field Max.: 5 mT
• Low Mode: Pout = 100 - 625 W, single pulse
energy < 312.5 Joules
• Mid & High Mode: Pout < Pmax, single pulse
energy < 75.0 Joules

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 947 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

RF Amplifier - 53-S23A-64 & S24A-42 (New Intera), continued

Specification Summary, continued S24
S23, continued Mode High: Max. Power 15.0 kW; Gain 71.8 +0.5 dB;
Pulse < 3 mS; Duty <5%
Storage Environmental Conditions:
Gain Stability: Over 15 min. period <0.5 dB; over 5,000
• Ambient temp. range: -25o to +70o C hours < 1.0 dB
• Humidity 5% to 95% relative, non-condensing
Phase Linearity: Pout = (Pmax - 40 dB) to Pmax < 5o over
AC Mains Supply: any 20 dB interval
• Mains voltage single phase 220/230 VAC +10%,
Phase Stability: over a 15 min. period < 3o
50 or 60 Hz
Maximum Pulse Energy: High Mode: Pout < Pmax, single
• Mains current single-phase max.: 32 A
pulse energy < 45.0 Joules
• Power Factor >0.7
Pulse Droop: 3 mS rectangular pulse mode High
< 0.5 dB
Operating Frequency Range: 42.576 +0.270 MHz
Load Impedance: 50 ohms

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 948 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

RF Amplifier - 53-S23A-64 & S24A-42 (New Intera), continued

Specification Summary, continued
S24, continued
Operating Environmental Conditions:
• Ambient temp. range: +10 to +40o C
• Humidity: 20% - 90% relative, non-condensing
• Air Pressure: 70 kPa - 110 kPa
• Magnetic Field Max.: 5 mT
Storage Environmental Conditions:
• Ambient temp. range: -25o to +70o C
• Humidity 5% to 95% relative, non-condensing
AC Mains Supply:
• Mains voltage single phase 220/230 VAC +10%,
50 or 60 Hz
• Mains current single-phase max.: 32 A
• Power Factor > 0.7

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 949 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 234/274

Select one of the following topics: Configurations
• Configurations There are two basic types of amplifiers:
• Gradient Specifications - NT • Copley 234: Available in two versions, "234/02" with
three power modules, and "234/P04" with four power
• Gradient Specifications - Intera
modules. Cables are matched for amp. Do not
• Gradient Coil Characteristics shorten. Omni gradients on an Intera NT are 234.
• Copley 274: For a new Intera.

Gyroscan System Gradient Amplifier Type Gradient Coil Type

NT Intera 234/02 234P04 274 Standard TNA UFI/TNF

PowerTrak 1000 Standard X n/a n/a X n/a

Omni n/a X n/a X n/a
PowerTrak 1000A n/a n/a n/a X X n/a
PowerTrak 3000 Power n/a n/a X n/a X
PowerTrak 6000 Master n/a n/a 2 n/a X
Explorer n/a n/a 2 n/a X

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 950 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 234/274, continued

Gradient Specifications - NT PowerTrak 6000
PowerTrak 1000 • Max. Amplitude (mT/m): 23
• Max. Amplitude (mT/m): 15 • Rise Time (ms): 0.2
• Rise Time (ms): 0.9 • Max. Slew Rate (mT/m/ms): 105
• Max. Slew Rate (mT/m/ms): 17 • System Compatibility: ACS-NT
• System Compatibility: T5-NT, T10-NT and ACS-NT
PowerTrak 1000A mT/m 30

• Max. Amplitude (mT/m): 23

25 105 mT/m/ms
PT6000
• Rise Time (ms): 1.4 PT3000
53 mT/m/ms

• Max. Slew Rate (mT/m/ms): 17 20 PT1000A

• System Compatibility: T10-NT and ACS-NT

15 PT1000

PowerTrak 3000
16.7 mT/m/ms

• Max. Amplitude (mT/m): 23 10

• Rise Time (ms): 0.4

5

• Max. Slew Rate (mT/m/ms): 53

• System Compatibility: T10-NT and ACS-NT 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6

1 (ms)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 951 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 234/274, continued

Gradient Specifications - Intera Master (Dual Mode Adjustment)
Standard • Max. Amplitude (mT/m): 23
• Max. Amplitude (mT/m): 15 • Rise Time (ms): 0.2
• Rise Time (ms): 0.9 • Max. Slew Rate (mT/m/ms): 105
• Max. Slew Rate (mT/m/ms): 17 • System Compatibility: 1.5T
• System Compatibility: 0.5T Explorer
Omni • Max. Amplitude (mT/m): 46
• Max. Amplitude (mT/m): 23 • Rise Time (ms): 0.4
• Rise Time (ms): 1.1 • Max. Slew Rate (mT/m/ms): 210
• Max. Slew Rate (mT/m/ms): 21 • System Compatibility: 1.5T
• System Compatibility: 1.0T and 1.5T
Power
• Max. Amplitude (mT/m): 23
• Rise Time (ms): 0.4
• Max. Slew Rate (mT/m/ms): 53
• System Compatibility: 1.0T and 1.5T

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 952 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 234/274, continued

Gradient Coil Characteristics
There are two types of gradient coils:
• Standard, or TNA coil: Air-cooled only
• Ultra Fast Imaging (UFI) or TNF coil: Water and air-
cooled
Standard/TNA:
• X,Y-Coil: Inductance - 150 uH; Resistance - 51 mOhm
• Z-Coil: Inductance - 165 uH; Resistance - 51 mOhm
UFI/TNF:
• Coil 1: Inductance - 185 uH; Resistance - 60 mOhm
• Coil 2: Inductance - 97.5 uH; Resistance - 35 mOhm
Note Including 10 uH gradient cable inductance, and
10 mOhm gradient cable resistance.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 953 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 234

Select one of the following topics: Power Flow
• Power Flow On the rear of the unit, AC power enters via TB1 and
passes through the A300 line filter board. The load side
• Inverter Module
of the line filter is connected to a circuit breaker. The
• Signal Flow series or parallel combination of C1 and C2 create the
raw DC Bus.
• Reference Generation
Inherent in capacitive input filters, L1 controls the peak
• Mode Detect
charging current. L1 also increases the conduction
• Supervisory Functions angle, improving the system power factor.
• Error Amplifiers Four full-bridge inverters compose the inverter board.
Inverter output is a 33 Khz PWM square wave, fed to the
• Remote Turn-on Circuit
primary of transformers T1A to T1D. Secondary of the
• Pulse Width Modulator transformers is connected to a full wave rectifier and an
LC averaging filter.
• Inrush Current Limiting Circuit
Each module is connected to the output Bus bar. The
• Thermal Shutdown output has preload resistors mounted on the heat sink
• Phase Loss Circuit assembly. Output filter includes L2A-2D, L3, & C7 - C10.
An RC snubber minimizes the voltage spike across
diodes.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 954 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 234, continued

Inverter Module L1, C13, and C14 form a bypass circuit delivering the
inverter pulse circuit, reducing the area of high frequency
The full bridge inverter includes 4 IGBTs.
pulse current.
• T1 operates so that while Q1 and Q4 simultaneously
turn ON Q2 and Q3 are turned OFF. In the event of over heating, the signal from TS1 shuts
the PWM down. To prevent saturation of T1, the A100
• T2 senses the switching of the IGBTs and the board controls steady state volt-second balance across
switching of the HF power transformer’s primary the high frequency power transformer.
current.
Signal Flow
• CR9 - CR12 rectify the T2 signal and generate a
The A100 board primarily generates +5 V, +15 V and
voltage across resistor R14. For control purposes, the
-15 V. The A100 board also provides the following
signal across R14 is connected to the A100 card.
functions:
• C5 snubs the spikes generated by the primary
• CC/CV control
leakage inductance of the HF power transformer.
• Over-current protection
• CR2, CR4, CR6, and CR8 are the anti-parallel diodes
across the switches. • PWM control
The RC snubber across the device limits the dv/dt, so • Reference generation
IGBT latching is avoided.
• Supervisory functions

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 955 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 234, continued

Reference Generation Supervisory Functions
For voltage and current channels, separate constant The supervisory circuit is composed of U11, U12, U14,
current references are provided. and their associated components. Functions include:
• Q1 collector current drives the voltage channel. • under-voltage lockout and phase loss detection,
• Q2 collector current drives the current channel. • over-voltage protection and control failure,
The current sources are referenced by a stable voltage • inrush current suppression and mode detect, and
source (U6). The current through the sources is
• over-temperature lockout.
adjustable by R6 and R8. Factory-adjusted to 1 mA, the
current sources terminate at J1-3 and J1-9 on the rear Note U12 implements inrush current implementation
panel programming connector. and mode detection, while other functions are
implemented by U14, the power supply’s
Mode Detect supervisor chip.
The second op-amp of U12 compares the voltage
channel output and current channel. Depending on the
magnitude of its input signal, the output of the
comparator switches between +15 V and -15 V.
If the output is negative, the current LED lights; if
positive, the voltage LED on the front panel lights.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 956 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 234, continued

Error Amplifiers Remote Turn-on Circuit
U7 implements constant voltage control and error This feature allows a user with a 12-24 VDC, 24-115
amplification. The reference (0 V - 5 V) is connected to VAC, or a dry contact closure to control the power supply
U7’s non-inverting terminal. An attenuated version of the from a remote location. U4 provides isolation from the
output voltage is connected to U7’s inverting terminal. 0 power supply ground.
V - 5 V across R136 is the equivalent of 0 - 100% of the
Note The power is supplied by the bias transformer,
output voltage.
rectified on the A100 board, then routed to J14,
Voltage channel amplifier output can be measured at A1. J16, and R47 when using a dry contact closure.
It should be 6 V for maximum duty cycle and-0.7 V for
the shutdown condition. Offset null is adjusted by R15.
U8 and U9 implement constant current. References are
connected to U9’s non-inverting inputs.
Shunt R12 (mounted in power supply) senses output
current. B1 can be used to measure the output of the
current channel.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 957 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 234, continued

Pulse Width Modulator Inrush Current Limiting Circuit
Four UC3825 controllers (U15 - U18) comprise the core Working in conjunction with the K1 (on the input rectifier
of the A100 board. They are synchronized by the clock assembly), the soft start is controlled by the A100 board.
consisting of U4, U20 - U23, and output drivers U22A-B,
When power is applied to the supply:
which comprise the sync necessary to control the point
at which the oscillator ramp begins. • U12 output is low.
All error amplifier of U15 - U18 have a unity gain. Their • Using a resistor to limit the inrush current, the input
inputs are tied together and receive their signal from U7 Bus capacitors are charged by K1.
and U9. To provide slope compensation for U15, U16,
• After a time, determined by R47, R49, and C42, the
U17, and U18, Q4, Q6, Q8, and Q10 isolate the clock
output of U12 switches to high which closes both
signal from the oscillators.
relays (K1).
Signals feed through diodes CR62, CR70, CR63, and
• The soft start pins of U15 - U18 go high, enabling the
CR71 to pin 7. The clock signal and the current signal
PWMs.
are combined at pin 7.
Note C54, C64, C74, and C84 block DC from Q4, Q6,
Q8, and Q10 from appearing on pin 7 of each
PWM.
PWM duty cycle is controlled by comparing error
amplifier outputs (U15 - U18) to the ramp of the oscillator
and the current sense signal of the high frequency
transformer.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 958 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 234, continued

Thermal Shutdown
Individual thermostats, wired in parallel, sense the heat
sink temperature. The thermostats close when the
temperature exceeds 70o C.
Note A closed thermostat pulls the soft start pins of
U15 - U18 low, which disables the PWMs.
Phase Loss Circuit
Except for the 220 VAC model which does not detect a
neutral loss, the phase loss circuit is similar for all
models.
220 VAC Model
Incoming AC line is rectified on the PCB A600 assembly,
and optically coupled to the control section. Opto-coupler
output is controlled by R1, R2, R3, and R7. Opto-coupler
output is connected to U14 pin 9 on the A100 board, and
compared to the 2.5 V reference on pin 8.
During normal operation pin 11 is high (15 V). When a
phase loss or a low line occurs, pin 11 switches to low.
This causes the soft start pins of U15 - U18 to also go
low. This disables the PWMs and turns the phase loss
LED ON.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 959 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271

Copley 271 Modes
601D HV DC power supply output:
Mode Details
• 40 kW power supply
Standard In single cabinet gradient amplifier systems, every
• +425 V output to ground axis amplifier drives two (serially connected)
gradient coil halves.
The Copley 271 includes the gradient chain interface
In dual cabinet gradient amplifier systems, every
(GFI) in the master cabinet, three 271 water-cooled axis axis amplifier drives only one gradient coil half.
amplifiers and one 601D water-cooled power supply.
Parallel Two gradient amplifier axes (switched in parallel)
Copley 281 together drive the two halves of the gradient coil of
the corresponding gradient orientation (switched in
601S HV DC power supply output: series).
• 40 kW power supply (2 x 20 kW).
Systems including a gradient switch can be switched
• +425 V output to ground and -425 V output to ground. between standard/parallel modes.
This results in a amplifier output of 650 V.
Note For clinical purposes, parallel mode is also
The Copley 281 includes the gradient chain interface referred to as Dual mode.
(GFI) in the master cabinet, three 281 water-cooled axis
amplifiers and one 601S water-cooled power supply.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 960 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274

Cabinet Configurations PT6000 & Intera Master
PT1000A, PT3000 & Intera Power These gradient systems consist on a master cabinet and
These gradient systems consist of one master cabinet. It a slave cabinet.
includes: The master cabinet includes:
• Gradient Interface Cabinet (DI): With the gradient • Gradient Interface Cabinet (DI): With the gradient
interface controller (mother/daughter) board, and interface controller (mother/daughter) board, and
three wave form generator WFG/ECC 2 boards. three wave form generator WFG/ECC 2 boards.
• Three Copley 274 axis amplifiers. • Three Copley 274 axis amplifiers.
• Power distribution unit (PDU). • Power distribution unit (PDU).
• Two parallel switched EMI 20 kW / 420 VDC power • Two parallel switched EMI 20 kW / 420 VDC power
supplies - a master and a slave DC power supply. supplies - a master and a slave DC power supply.
The slave cabinet includes an identical configuration as
the master cabinet, with the exception of the gradient
interface cabinet (DI).
Gradient Coils
• PT1000A: air-cooled gradient coil.
• PT3000, Intera Power, PT6000 & Intera Master:
water-cooled gradient coil.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 961 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Perform IQ Procedures
Image Quality Arcing usually happens in the Magnet Room. As long as
Select one of the following topics: the RF shield is working, any arcing outside the room
should be attenuated by the RF shield and filters. The
• Corduroy Artifacts only exceptions are the RF Transmit and Receive chains
• Ghosting Theory since the RF cables are not filtered. Although rare, it is
possible for digital data handling problems during the
• Low SNR - Noise Theory data acquisition to create corduroy. Corduroy requires
• Geometric Distortion - Shading Theory thorough troubleshooting to reduce repair time and cost.
Corduroy can appear different from image to image. It
Corduroy Artifacts may only be apparent on one image in the series or on
Corduroy, also known as Spike Noise or White Pixels, is every image. It may be just subtle fine lines that are
one of the most common artifacts in MR. hardly noticeable or it may completely envelope the
"Corduroy" refers to the parallel line patterns often seen entire image. It may even look like an SNR problem
in the affected image. These lines are caused by where the image is "grainy".
intensified or bright areas (white pixels) in raw data. The magnitude of the arc and where it happens in raw
These intensified areas are typically created by arcs data (k-space) determines how it will effect the image.
(spike noise) received by the system. Arcs or white pixels near the center of K-space have
The source of these arcs can be any current carrying more effect on the image. This is because most of the
conductor. This includes cables and electronic SNR for the image comes form the central portion of K-
components. Also, any conductor in a changing space due to the Fermi filtering. These many variations
magnetic field (i.e. gradient fields) or any conductor of corduroy artifact can lead one to believe there are
moving in a magnetic field will have eddy currents multiple problems when it is really just one source.
flowing in it. This could include the rear pedestal, magnet
enclosure frame, or any loose metal object.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 962 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Perform IQ Procedures, continued

Corduroy Artifacts, continued
Common Causes, continued
The major cause of corduroy on Philips MR systems is
improper RF grounding and cable layout. If your site has
not experienced prior corduroy artifacts then cable layout
can be eliminated. Here are some additional causes of
corduroy artifacts:
• A blown patient illumination bulb, even if patient
illumination is OFF.
• Bare Cold Head gas lines rubbing against the magnet
(metal on metal).
• A noisy gradient blower motor.
• A blown room light bulb, even with room lights OFF.
• Improperly secured gradient cables at rear of magnet.
• Any loose electrical connection, especially gradient
and RF.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 963 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Perform IQ Procedures, continued

Corduroy Artifacts, continued
Common Causes, continued

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 964 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Perform IQ Procedures, continued

Ghosting Theory There are three basic types of instability: Magnetic, RF
Ghosting or phase smearing is one of the most common Transmit, and RF Receive.
image quality complaints in Magnetic Resonance 1. Magnetic instabilities are those that affect the
Imaging. Typically, it appears as multiple replicas of the magnetic field (Bo) and/or the magnetic gradients
scanned object spread across the phase encoded axis, used for spatial encoding. Instabilities of this type
or the scanned object will appear smeared across the usually affect phase and frequency stability. Possible
phase encoded axis. sources of this type of instability are, the Gradient
System, shim supplies, shield coolers, thermal
Ghosting may also be caused by motion of tissue or
acoustic oscillation and vibration.
motion of the patient during the scan. This type of
ghosting is mostly understood by technologists and 2. RF transmit are those instabilities that affect the B1
radiologists, but in certain cases may be mistaken for a or RF field. Instabilities of this type usually affect
system failure. The root cause of hardware induced magnitude and phase stability. Some possible
ghosting in images is shifts in Echo Center, Constant sources for this type of instability are, the RF
Phase, or Magnitude instabilities of the echoes that are amplifier, the Exciter or any of the components of the
acquired to produce the image. Regardless of the source RF Transmit chain.
or type of instability, the resultant ghosting or smearing
will always appear along the phase encoded axis of the
image. Possible sources of instability in the system are
many. In fact, most subsystems have the potential to
produce instabilities that will cause ghosting in images.
Although there are many different types and sources of
instabilities, the ghosting they produce in images looks
similar.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 965 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Perform IQ Procedures, continued

Ghosting Theory, continued Common Causes
3. RF receive instabilities are those that affect the • Patient motion is the most common cause of ghosting.
received echo or signal. Instabilities of this type • Problem with Gradient amplifier. Watch amplifiers
affect magnitude stability. Some possible sources of during scanning for unlatched faults (flashing fault
this type of instability are the receiver, the LED).
preamplifier, and any of the components of the RF
Receive Chain. Note Although ghosting is demonstrated on the phase
encode axis, it is not always the phase encode
Since the appearance of ghosting in images looks similar gradient that will cause ghosting.
regardless of the source, it is inappropriate to try to
troubleshoot the problem from clinical images. • Vibration caused by patient beam (named bridge on
GE MRI) improperly installed and possibly making
contact with body coil during scanning. Center of
beam should have a slight upward bow when installed
properly. Check tightness of beam mounting
hardware, proper shimming of center beam supports,
and clearance from body coil with a loaded patient
table.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 966 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Perform IQ Procedures, continued

Ghosting Theory, continued suggesting that the disturbance had a regular frequency
(cyclical).
Common Causes, continued
• Cold Head vibration. Try scanning with the cold head The source of a cyclical disturbance can be anything that
OFF. has a regular, repeating rhythm (e.g., Cold Head, fans,
air handlers, rotating machinery, and in some cases,
• Vibration caused by unbalanced gradient blower. people with deep regular breathing).
• Mobile systems, vibration caused by air conditioner.

Ghosting artifacts due to respiratory motion in head

images. (Often seen on sedated patients, who have a
deep regular cycle in their breathing pattern.) This is
sometimes harder to detect as a motion problem. In the
figure to the right, note how the ghosts are well defined,
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 967 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Perform IQ Procedures, continued

Ghosting Theory, continued
Common Causes, continued
In the image to the right, which has light but well defined
ghosts, it appears that this sedated patient’s respiratory
cycle changed at least once during the scan. (Multiple,
distinct ghosts.)
However, notice that the small phantom in the lower right
quadrant (actually a vitamin E capsule) is completely free
of any ghosting.
If the cyclical interference had been due to anything
other that the patient, (e.g., RF, gradient, coldhead or
external vibration) then the small phantom would also be
ghosted.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 968 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Perform IQ Procedures, continued

Ghosting Theory, continued
Common Causes, continued
The ghosting in the image to the right can easily be
attributed to the respiratory motion by comparing the
abdomen, which is ghosted, to the arms which are ghost
free.
If the ghosting was due to some sort of system instability,
everything in the image would be ghosted instead of just
select areas of anatomy.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 969 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Perform IQ Procedures, continued

Low SNR - Noise Theory SNR problems are the result of multiple changes in the
Low SNR can be caused by almost anything internal or system, not just the problem that took it over the edge of
acceptability for the customer.
external to the system that lowers signal (coil de-tuning,
preamp gain, de coupling malfunction, loss of Noise can be exhibited as a single Zipper artifact (narrow
quadrature, etc.) or raises the noise floor (bad Body Coil or single frequency), several zipper artifacts (multiple
RF Cables, room noise, displaced signal, noisy preamp, narrow frequency sources), mottled or rainy image (wide
noisy T/R switching diodes, etc.). band noise.)
Reports of SNR problems from the service tests are
straightforward. The customer, however, may use
descriptions like "grainy", "mottled", "noisy", "don't jump
out at me", "just not the way they used to be", "not crisp",
etc. The customer may only report a complaint on one
type of scan, but the problem may actually be affecting
many or all scans. Zipper
Artifacts
Beware of prematurely identifying an overall system
issue as a body, head or surface coil only problem based
on the customer complaint. Remember, system SNR
problems are often first perceived in normally low SNR
scans like C-Spine or Lumbar Axials. Don't be misled into
thinking the problem only exists in these scans or on the
particular coil being used.
SNR and Image Quality are dependent on the combined
effects of hardware, tuned fields, environmental
conditions, and protocols. Many reported Image Quality/ Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 970 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Perform IQ Procedures, continued

Low SNR - Noise Theory, continued • Third Party Patient monitoring system
Common Causes • Room lighting
1. Is the complaint on one particular coil? Run the SNR • Light dimmers (NOT recommended and should
scan on that coil along with a Head and Body SNR. never be installed in magnet room)
Compare results with past SNR data.
• Leak at RF Penetration Panel (bad gradient filter,
2. If the SNR results have changed, determine if the illegal penetration, loose cover plate)
problem is the RF Transmit signal or noise. A higher
RF scale factor will indicate RF Transmit problems. • Music system

3. If the noise level is higher on all SNR scans or • Blood flow can cause zippers, swap frequency
zippers are seen in the image, look for a noise and phase in patient sequence
source/leak at the RF door. • Microwave ovens should never be located in the
Note Check and clean door fingers (The Philips equipment room
gradient cabinets are very noisy so you must • Poor incoming ground to MR (Power and Ground
have a good RF room!) See if a radio will Audit)
play in the magnet room with the door
closed. • Failed lighting or electrical filter

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 971 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Perform IQ Procedures, continued

Low SNR - Noise Theory, continued attributable to patient dependent causes (e.g., patient
implants, tattoos, make-up) or foreign material in and
Common Causes, continued
around the field of view. The filming camera or the image
4. Has the operator changed the protocol? Compare monitor can also distort images.
the problem protocol with a protocol that does not
have problems. Make sure that imaging parameters Diagnosing geometric distortion problems entails an
have not changed. initial image analysis to determine the source of the
problem. Severe failures will generally point to a failure
The coil could cause low SNR. Disassemble and check of the gradient subsystem. Symptoms with less severe
for bad connections, cold solder joints, broken items. distortions, or images that are just somewhat out of
Geometric Distortion - Shading Theory proportion may be a calibration problem or more subtle
failure of the gradient subsystem. Localized or shim
Geometric Distortion is a misrepresentation in the distortions point toward patient dependent causes, or
relative size of all or part of the image data. This may be foreign objects in the field. The filming camera and image
exhibited as a one or two dimensional distortion across monitor must also be ruled out.
the entire image, a less severe distortion that mis-shapes
the image, or a distortion that is confined to a small
localized area.
A cause of a geometric distortion can be attributed to a
failure or poor calibration in the gradient subsystem. Any
distortion or change in the expected gradient output
(stuck or missing data bits, arcing gradient filters, shorted
output wells, etc.) could potentially lead to geometric
distortion. The entire gradient data/signal path from the
gradient control to the gradient coil immediately become
suspect. Other failures of a more localized type may be Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 972 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

Perform IQ Procedures, continued

Geometric Distortion - Shading Theory,
continued
Common Causes
• Metal in patient or magnet bore. Lift magnet beam to
inspect for metal.
• Bad PIN diode in body coil.
• Gradient amplifier failure.
• Verify image size and adjustment.
• Gradient DAC board failure.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 973 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table

Select one of the following topics: Overview
• Overview The T5 patient support transports the patient to the
magnet examination area by use of the light visor. The
• Circuit Boards
table can move vertically and horizontally to assist with
• Table Movement patient comfort. A hydraulic system provides the
necessary force(s).
• Light Visor
A patient weight of 150 kg (330 lbs) can be lifted. A
• Hydraulics
patient weight of 600 kg can be supported, but not lifted.
• Bore Lighting
A potentiometer, in combination with 2 end sensors
• Safety Devices control vertical movement. In the vertical direction, only
the top and down position must be fixed, so a
• Computer Interface
potentiometer-feedback system is sufficient.
• Power
• Control Panels

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 974 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Overview, continued Electronics
Horizontal movement is controlled with an incremental Patient support electronics are primarily located at the
encoder in combination with 4 end sensors. In the top of the magnet, in the T5 Front End Interface (TFEI).
horizontal direction, it’s necessary to position the patient Major patient support electronics include:
in magnet isocenter, so a more robust system must be
used in order to get a resolution of less than 0.5 mm. • movement controllers (table mounted)
Note Between the table and the magnet, a finger pro- • light visor (magnet front cover)
tection plate is mounted. When activated, table • patient light (magnet back cover)
movement is disabled immediately. It is possible
to continue with patient positioning after deacti- • control panels
vating this switch, since the signal does not cre- • PCBs: PS Control, PS Hydro, and PS Power
ate an interrupt.
• host computer (for LLTS/ASW only)
Important! In an emergency, use the Manual Decou-
pling Device (under tabletop, magnet side) to Electronic and halogen lamp power supplies are located
manually release the tabletop and move it in the Data Acquisition Cabinet.
out of the magnet.
Note After using the Manual Decoupling Device, move
the tabletop to its end position. Then, reposition
the patient again with the light visor.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 975 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Overview, continued To monitor horizontal position, an incremental encoder
(E1) generates a pulsed signal counted within the
Electronics, continued
electronics. Seven end switches are mounted on the
A 220 VAC supply is available only for the hydraulic table for horizontal movement:
pump.
• Table-in: S05 (INENDSW)
Potentiometer P1 (TVPOS) generates a voltage of
approximately 0.2 - 8 V to monitor table vertical position/ • Table-out: S08 (OUTENDSW)
speed. Two end switches are mounted on the table for • Table-in Slow: S06 (INSLSW)
vertical movement:
• Table-out Slow: S07 (OUTSLSW)
• Table-up: S1 (UPENDSW)
• Finger Protection: Magnet Front cover (FINGERSW)
• Table-down: S2 (DNENDSW)
• Tabletop Present: S9 & S11 (TTOPSW)
These two controls perform speeds between 5 and 40
mm/sec, and a position between 500 and 900 mm. • Mechanical Decoupling Device: S10 (MDDSW)
These controls perform speeds between 10 and 180
mm/sec, and a position between 0 and 2000 mm
(Resolution: 0.5 mm).
Communications
A RS232 asynchronous link provides communication
between the patient support and the computer. Glass
fibers (to reduce RF-coupling) are used to transmit data
between the TFEI system and the PS-Computer
interface.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 976 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Circuit Boards Table Movement
All patient support electronics are located on three circuit One hydraulic motor, located in the foot end of the table
boards: base, controls both the vertical and horizontal table
movement. Table movement operation is controlled by a
• PS Hydro Board
single thumble switch on the front control panel.
– handles patient safety circuit
The table starts from its home position of 500 mm
– handles emergency bypass circuit +20 mm from the floor. At this point, 180-320 mV should
be present at pins 1 and 2 on potentiometer LVP1.
• PS Control Board
From the home position, moving the thumble switch up
– handles table movement
enables the table vertical drive cylinder signal and
– Communicates with PS Hydro via a data bus hydraulic motor drive. The table vertical drive cylinder
raises the table to its working height of 890 mm +10 mm.
• PS Power Board
At this point, less than 8.1 V should be present at pins 1
– drives valves, positioning lights, and bore lights and 2.
(when signaled by PS Hydro)
Working height is detected by the PS Hydro Board
These three boards are located in the TFEI, above the microswitch LS2. This data is sent to the PS Control
right side of the magnet. Board, which enables the table horizontal drive cylinder
signal on the PS Hydro Board.
Note If the table is not moved fully to the working
height, it will slowly drop lower over time.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 977 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Table Movement, continued The DAC contains the power supply for the lights:
The thumble switch must be released and moved up The light visor control is on the PS Hydro board.
again to move the table horizontally. The table horizontal
The lamp drivers are on the PS Power board.
movement is detected by encoder E1, connected to the
horizontal drive cable, at the head of the table under the Hydraulics
top cover.
The hydraulics are filled with Shell SHC 524 oil. The oil
When the table begins moving, encoder E1 begins to runs at 80 bars of pressure through the hydraulic lines,
count in 0.5 mm steps. The encoder signal is routed and is connected directly to the reservoir. A relief valve
directly to the PS Control Board for processing. The table opens if pressure exceeds 83 bars.
moves 827 mm (+0.5 mm) and stops at magnet
isocenter. Bore Lighting
The bore lighting has five settings:
Important! This 827 mm is not adjustable. If positioning
is incorrect, you must manually move the • one light on at 80% intensity
positioning lights. Moving the table will not • one light on at 100% intensity
change the 827 mm measurement.
• two lights on at 80% intensity
Light Visor
• two lights on at 100% intensity
The light visor includes five halogen lamps:
• all lights off
• (2) indicating the coronal plane
Note It is normal for the lights to dim slightly when the
• (2) indicating the transversal plane
positioning lights and bore lights are on
• (1) indicating the sagittal plane simultaneously.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 978 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Safety Devices Control Panels
The PS Hydro Board routes signal status to the PS With the exception of the Start and Scan keys, all the
Control Board from these safety devices: keys on the front and rear control panel are directly
connected to the patient support electronics.
• five finger protection switches on MVPX1
Note The Start and Scan keys are connected to the
• seven limit switches on LHX1
TRFINT board in the TFECE.
• two vertical limit switches and a vertical positioning
pot on LVX1
Front Panel
The front Patient Interface Control Unit includes the
Computer Interface following controls:
The computer interfaces with the patient support system • Combined thumble switch/potentiometer:
only for testing and a few specialized procedures.
– thumble switch right (Up/In, Down/out)
Power
– thumble position voltage right
Power for the patient support system comes from the
power supplies on top of the TDAC. • Travel to scan plane
• Manual switch
• Light visor switch
• Light bore up
• Light bore down

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 979 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

MT (Electric) Patient Table

Select one of the following topics: Note To maintain the correct height of the patient sup-
port, spacers are available as shims.
• Overview
In short, the MT patient support provides vertical/
• PICU
horizontal movement, control of the light visor and
• Power Supply patient alignment, the bore lights, and safety circuits.
• Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Patient support diagnostics, residing in the overall
system, provide support for the vertical actuator, scissors
• Pre-conditions for Horizontal Movement
mechanism, the horizontal drive unit, tabletop sensors,
• Safety Circuits the power supply, and control module.
Overview PICU
The patient support provides patient transport, via The PICU (Control Panel) controls:
vertical and horizontal movement, to the scan-plan of the
• the MT patient support unit,
magnet.
• the light visor, and
Note Vertical movement is primarily for assisting the
patient getting on and off the table. • the bore lights.
It is a standalone device using a programmable logic PICU indicators (LEDs) can be used to diagnose the
controller (PLC) and a fiber-optic link for communicating results of selftests. Generally, blinking LEDs indicate a
between the control unit and the host computer. selftest failure and that the patient support is not in a
ready state. This also prevents scanning from occurring.
Errors involving the patient support are stored in the
central ASW log file, and TSW is used for testing.
Manufacturer installed floorpads provide a position
reference for the table and position of the magnet. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 980 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

MT (Electric) Patient Table, continued

Power Supply Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
The Power Supply is located at the foot of the table. The The PLC generates an output pattern based on the
supply mains (220 V single-phase) connects through the combination of the logical input signals. It is unlike a
mains filter, and the system filter box to the Main CPU, because it does not have the capability to interpret
Distribution Unit (MDU). data. PLC software is just a definition of the logical
sequential functions.
The unit is based on four separate power supplies:
The PLC includes 20 inputs and 20 outputs, and an
• 12 V: Light Visor
RS232 port available for host communications.
• 12 V: Bore Light
PLC status LEDs are not immediately visible, since the
• 24 V: PLC Extension Card PLC is mounted in an RF enclosure. For testing,
extension cables are provided so input/output signals
The 24 V is divided into three different voltages to
can be checked.
supply the PLC and PLC Extension Card circuits. A
power status circuit monitors the three voltages, and Note Input connector X2 provides the 24 V supply.
a 24 V OK LED is located on the PLC Extension
Card. The 24 V also supplies a cooling fan on top of
the power supply, and a cooling fan mounted on the
RF enclosure to provide cooling for the PLC, PLC
Extension Card, and the Servo Amplifier.
• 28 V: Servo Amplifier
This supply is connected directly to the Servo
Amplifier Card. A DC/DC converter provides +12 V
and -12 V for the electronics mounted on this card. A
PLC output line (Servo_OK) enables this converter. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 981 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

MT (Electric) Patient Table, continued

Programmable Logic Controller (PLC),
continued Open Collector Principle
The "Open Collector" principle provides the basis for the 5 V (External Source)
inputs and outputs. A group inputs and outputs are Output Stage
connected to the connector. This PLC type has three The external source defines the output
Input Common Lines and 10 Output Common Lines. PLC Control level, here the output switches between
0 V and 5 V.

• The Input Common LInes are connected to the 24 V

power supply.
Output PLC
• The Output Common Lines are connected to the 5 V
supply.
Note Technically, a PLC input must be pulled to ground 24 V (External Source)
to activate this input; an active output pushes the Input Stage
output line to +5 V. An open input means a 24 V input signal
to the PLC port. Input devices must pull
the input to ground.
Input PLC

PLC Port

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 982 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

MT (Electric) Patient Table, continued

Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), Input Details
continued
E Table Top Reference Switch
X1 Connector: Inputs
F Table Top Release Sensor
Input Details 10 Manual/Reset Switch
0 Horizontal Encoder Line A 11 Servo OK
1 Horizontal Encoder Line B 12 Emergency Sensor
2 Thumble Encoder Control Up 13 Up End Switch
3 Thumble Encoder Control Down 14 Down End Switch
4 Status 3 (From PAL)
5 Status 2 (From PAL)
6 Status 1 (From PAL)
7 Status 0 (From PAL)
8 Thumble Switch
9 Light Visor Switch
A Travel-to-Scanplane Switch
B Light Bor Up Switch
C Light bore Down Switch
D Table Top Part Switch
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 983 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

MT (Electric) Patient Table, continued

Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), Input Details
continued
E Select Data 0 (To PAL)
X2 Connector: Outputs
F Spare
Input Details 14 n/a
0 Horizontal Speed Level 3 15 n/a
1 Horizontal Speed Level 2 16 Spare
2 Horizontal Speed Level 1 17 Spare
3 Horizontal Speed Level 0
Pre-conditions for Horizontal Movement
4 Move Enabled (To PAL)
The table top part switch must detect the table top
5 Watchdog Enabled presence before horizontal movement can be performed.
6 Solid State Relay Up Manually moving the table top enables the table top park
switch to engage a slot in the table top, causing a reset
7 Spare
of the encoder count in the PLC. Only then can
8 Solid State Relay Down motorized horizontal movement be completed.
9 Write Addr. Reg (To PAL)
A Read Addr. Reg (To PAL)
B Select Data 3 (To PAL)
C Select Data 2 (To PAL)
D Select Data 1 (To PAL)
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 984 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Theory 5197921-200

MT (Electric) Patient Table, continued

Safety Circuits
Safety Circuit
A relay provides the basis for the patient support safety
circuit. To activate the relay, a PLC-generated Startup Driver Vertical Brake 1 Vert. Motor Brake 1
B1
Pulse must be applied.
Emergency stops are hard-wired. Pressing the PICU Driver Vertical Brake 2
B2 Vert. Motor Brake 2

Stop button or pressing the micro-switches (mounted SS

behind the finger protection plate) interrupts the relay coil Mains (220 V)
UP

current, stopping all table movements. To deactivate the Vertical Motor

SS
relay, a Start-up pulse must be applied. DWN

Note Table top release buttons are mounted on both Driver Horizontal Brake
B
Horz. Motor Brake

sides of the stretcher. These are not part of the

Servo Amplifier
safety circuit. M Horz. Motor

PLC Input
Emergency Sense
Finger Protection
3x Microswitch
(Magnet Front Cover)

Emer. Stop
(PICU Front)

24 V

Startup

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 985 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

TROUBLESHOOTING
Host Computer PD & TU-Pump Flow
Excessive Water Temperature
Host Computer Replacement
Neslab Chiller HX-750
XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x) Fluid Not Circulating
Power Problems Inadequate Temperature Control
Thermal Problems Unit Will Not Start
SCSI Problems (BDAS Systems Only) Pump Motor Overload Protector
Miscellaneous Problems
Magnet
Diagnostics
Troubleshooting Liquid Helium Transfer
DIGI Board/Serial Line Test (R1.x)
System Status vs. Helium Level
DIGI Board/Serial Line Test
Host Computer Diagnostics (R1.x - STT) Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style)
Host Computer Diagnostics (R10.x-R11.x STT) General Troubleshooting
Replace AGP/PCI Boards Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New Style)
Replace Memory Modules General Troubleshooting
Replace Hard Disk Drive Shield Cooler (SC-8C)
Replace Battery Compressor
Replace Power Supply Unit General Troubleshooting
Shield Cooler (SC-R8)
Cooling System
Compressor
Neslab Chiller HX-300 Compressor Motor Check
Fluid Not Circulating General Troubleshooting
Inadequate Temperature Control
Unit Will Not Start
Refrigeration Flow
CP-type Pump Flow Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 986 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Data Acquisition Data Acquisition - Reconstruction

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42) Troubleshooting NT with Raw/Complex Data
Tube Replacement Reproducing Customer Used Protocol for Troubleshooting
RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64) Saving Complex Image Data
Tube Output Saving Raw Data Direct
Inverse Reconstruction
Data Acquisition - Receive Delayed Reconstruction
Logging File Set Reconstruction Parameters Back to Normal
Coil Identification Phase
Gradient Amplifiers
DC-fixed phase
TM phase Intera w/Copley 234
PU phase General Troubleshooting
PO phase Intera w/Copley 271
F0 phase Overview
AS phase Test Software (TSW)
RG phase Pulsar Gradient Cable Connections
Sample Messages Nova/Quasar Gradient Cable Connections
Nova Dual/Quasar Dual Gradient Cable Connections
Power ON Checks (First Time)
System Tuning Tools (STT)
Replace Gradient Chain Interface (GCI)
Replace Gradient Amplifier Axis
Replace HV Power Supply

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 987 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Gradient Amplifiers, continued Image Quality

Intera w/Copley 274 Daily Cleanup
Overview Daily Cleanup (R7.x-R9.x)
Test Software (ASW) Daily Cleanup (R10.x-R11.x)
PT3000 & Intera Power Cable Connections Image Quality (All Intera (R7.x-R9.x)
PT6000 & Intera Master Cable Connections Introduction
Gradient Interface (TSW) How to Scan
Power ON Checks (First Time) Viewing Scans
Analog Function Test Pre-Performance Test
Gradient Load Test Periodic Image Quality Test (PIQT)
Status Test Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance Measurements
Power Module Digitized Signals Test TSW Test Software (R7.x-R9.x)
Power Module CM Voltage, VFB Test Procedure
Power Module 60 A Current Sharing Test TSW Menu Structure
Power Module 600 A Current Sharing Test Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x)
Controller Voltages Test Pre-Performance Test
Controller Gain & Offset Test How to Scan
Controller Diagnostics Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance Measurements
Power Supply High Voltage Test Viewing Scans
Settling TSW Menu Structure
Replace WFG/ECC Board
Replace Copley 274 Power Module Patient Positioning
Replace 100 A Fuse NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table
Table Communication
MT (Electrical) Patient Table

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 988 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Host Computer Replacement

Typically, problems with a Host computer requires you to
order a replacement computer through the standard
acquisition process.
For more information, see Support Central:

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 989 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x)
Select one of the following topics: Power Problems
• Power Problems If the Host computer fails to power ON:
• Thermal Problems 1. Verify the power source is available, and that the
power cord connections are securely attached.
• SCSI Problems (BDAS Systems Only)
2. Verify the ambient room temperature is within
• Miscellaneous Problems
specification (50o - 100o F).
• Diagnostics
3. Verify the fan of the power supply is functioning
• DIGI Board/Serial Line Test (R1.x) properly.
• DIGI Board/Serial Line Test 4. Verify the fan on the enclosure is functioning
• Host Computer Diagnostics (R1.x - STT) properly.

• Host Computer Diagnostics (R10.x-R11.x STT) Note A failure with a fan can cause a POST error
message which will interrupt the normal
• Replace AGP/PCI Boards startup routine.
• Replace Memory Modules 5. Check the power ON/OFF switch on front panel.
• Replace Hard Disk Drive 6. At the system board, verify the two internal power
• Replace Battery supply cables are securely connected.

• Replace Power Supply Unit

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 990 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Power Problems, continued 4. Verify the power supply fan is operating properly.
7. Verify the CPUs and PCI boards are securely 5. Verify the enclosure fan is operating properly.
seated.
Note A failure with a fan can cause a POST error
8. If the power fails to remain ON, check for shorts and message which will interrupt the normal
over currents. startup routine.
9. After analysis, wait for a minimum of five seconds SCSI Problems (BDAS Systems Only)
after plugging the Host in before powering it ON.
The following problems/conditions can often indicate
Thermal Problems SCSI problems:
Inside the Host, two fans regulate the internal • Data corruption
temperature.
• Boot sequence problems
• Enclosure fan, for both CPUs, attached to the system
• Performance problems
board
• ASW crashes
• Power supply fan
• Periodic SCSI-related errors
When an internal fan fails, a fan-failure detector will shut
down the power following a one second delay. 1. The power-up sequence of the applicable
1. Verify the air-flow path of the fans is not obstructed. components is critical to ensure that Intera R10.x
and R11.x system operate correctly.
2. Verify the cables inside the Host are properly
Important! The Host must always be restarted whenever
secured.
the BDAS or Reconstructor has been turned
Note Dangling cables may restrict the air-flow. OFF.
3. Verify the ambient room temperature (50o - 100o F). Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 991 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

SCSI Problems (BDAS Systems Only), 4. Check if there is a SCSI Bus terminator at the hard
continued disk drive.
2. To exclude externally generated errors: 5. Verify all external drives are connected to their
a. Disconnect the Host/hospital network connection associated card.
(BH-X5). 6. Verify the cards have no internal drives connected to
them.
b. Connect a loopback connector in the hospital
NIC (BH-X5) to prevent intermittent SCSI-related 7. Check the length of the Bus.
problems.
Note Ultra-wide SCSI has strict requirements for
c. On the BCP board, verify the 5 V LED (green) is Bus length.
lit and the Reconstructor is running.
3. Before completing tests/scans on the Intera system,
reboot the Host to properly initialize the SCSI
interface link.
a. Press <CTRL>+<ALT>+<DEL>.
b. Select Shutdown > Shutdown and Restart.
c. Click [OK]. The Intera system should be
operational after the restart.
d. To logon, press <CTRL>+<ALT>+<DEL>.
e. Logon as MRService using the appropriate
password.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 992 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Miscellaneous Problems

Problem Cause/Solution

Keyboard/mouse cables Host motherboard incapable of supporting mouse or keyboard cables longer than 15 feet.
Replace existing cables with cables a maximum of nine feet in length.
Reconstructor unavailable or Following R10.3 software load, Reconstructor remains unavailable or the software crashes.
software crashes 1. An initial software load should be completed.
2. After installing BOSWXP_HY and MRWXP on the Host, but before loading MRSybase, set a
fixed IP address.
a. Select Set > Settings > Control Panel > Network Connections > Hospital Connection.
b. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) > Properties.
c. Enter an IP Address and Subnet Mask. Enter an IP address outside the range of the other
network card (Ethernet link to the Reconstructor). Do not use 192.168.71.xxx.
d. Click [OK] twice. Click [CLOSE].
Intermittent boot errors/crashes For system disk boot problems and/or corrupted data disk database:
or corrupted database 1. Verify the internal SCSI flat cable terminator (motherboard to hard disk drives) is not shorting
out.
2. Verify the SCSI flat cable is rolled-up and placed in the spare hard disk drive bay.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 993 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Miscellaneous Problems, continued

Problem Cause/Solution

Host computer fails to start Host computer fails to start and generates audible signals.
Verify all three power connectors on the motherboard are properly seated in their sockets.
Host computer fails to start and no audible signals are generated.
1. Clean the fan of the second graphic controller.
2. Clean the entire Host computer.
Host computer fails to start and no audible signals are generated.
Verify the audio cable from the DVD ROM to the motherboard is properly connected into the
socket.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 994 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Diagnostics DIGI Board/Serial Line Test (R1.x)
To use the diagnostics CD, the following (minimum) The STT application can be used to test the DIGI board.
configuration must be present.
1. Logon as MRService.
• System motherboard installed with processor and
Note Logon inputs are case-sensitive.
memory.
Important! Do not start the application software.
• DVD drive installed and connected to motherboard.
2. Select MR Applications > Scan Applications >
• AGP or PCI video board installed.
STT Application.
• Keyboard attached.
3. Select Host. Host/Port test options display.
Note Other boards/drives do not have to be connected
to the system to use the diagnostics CD. DIGI Board/Serial Line Test
1. Logon as MRService.
1. Insert the diagnostics CD into the appropriate drive.
Note Logon inputs are case-sensitive.
2. Reboot the Host computer. The Diagnostics
Application screen appears. 2. Select MR Applications > Test Software > TWRAP.
3. Select the Test tab. 3. Type: run functional automatic and press
<ENTER>. All tests will run sequentially.
4. Select the test to be completed.
4. Enter the type of test to execute.
5. To start the selected test(s), select Begin Testing.
5. To exit the TWRAP test, type: quit and press
Note The Host will automatically reboot when you <ENTER>.
exit the diagnostic application.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 995 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Host Computer Diagnostics (R1.x - STT) Host Computer Diagnostics (R10.x-R11.x STT)
To test the Reconstructor interfaces (Ethernet & IF Link) To test the Reconstructor interfaces (Ethernet & SCSI
a number of tests can be selected. Link) a number of tests can be selected.
1. Logon as MRService. 1. Logon as MRService.
Note Logon inputs are case-sensitive. Note Logon inputs are case-sensitive.
2. In the MR Boot Configuration Manager, select Intera 2. In the MR Boot Configuration Manager, select Intera
and click [START]. and click [START].
3. Select MR Applications > Scan Applications > 3. Select System > Scan Definition Context >
STT Application. Scanlist.
4. Select Diagnostics > Reconstructor. Test options 4. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
display.
5. Select 1 Enter Service Mode > 3 System Tuning >
4 System Tuning Tools.
6. Select 2 Diagnostic Measurement Tools >
3 Reconstructor Procedures. Test options dislay.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 996 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Replace AGP/PCI Boards Replace Memory Modules
Important! When working with Host computer internal Important! When working with Host computer internal
parts, always use antistatic protective parts, always use antistatic protective
measures. measures.
1. Verify any jumper settings on the new board(s). 1. Complete the Access the FRUs procedure.
2. Complete the Access the FRUs procedure. 2. Verify you are properly grounded to the frame of the
Host computer.
3. Verify you are properly grounded to the frame of the
Host computer. 3. Press both memory module latches outward to
remove the module from the slot.
4. Open the PCI card retainer strip and remove the
board. 4. Place the module on an antistatic surface.
5. Check any jumper settings. 5. Check any jumper settings.
6. Insert the new board in the correct slot. Secure the 6. Install the replacement module.
board with the screw.
7. Reinstall the Host computer.
7. Reinstall the Host computer.
Note Upon reboot, the system will recognize the
8. Test the new board using the appropriate upgraded memory modules and automatically
diagnostics. reconfigure the Host.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 997 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Replace Hard Disk Drive Replace Battery
Important! When working with Host computer internal Important! When working with Host computer internal
parts, always use antistatic protective parts, always use antistatic protective
measures. measures.
1. Complete the Access the FRUs procedure.
DANGER An explosion may occur if the battery
2. Verify you are properly grounded to the frame of the is not replaced correctly, or if a
Host computer. different type of battery is used.
3. Disconnect the power and data cables.
1. Complete the Access the FRUs procedure.
4. Squeeze (inwards) the colored release clips on the
2. Verify you are properly grounded to the frame of the
sides of the drive.
Host computer.
5. To release the drive rail latches pull the drive out
3. Remove the battery from the battery holder.
gently.
4. Install the replacement battery positive side up.
Note The drive is not secured to the drive rails, so
do not hold the drive by the rails when it is Note Replace the battery only with the same or
not installed in the bay. equivalent type.
6. Install the new drive using the rails from the defective 5. Reinstall the Host computer.
drive.
6. Restore the default BIOS setting and date/time.
7. Reinstall the Host computer.
8. Check the configuration for the new drive.
9. Test the new drive using the appropriate diagnostics.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 998 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

XW8000 (R10.x-R11.x), continued

Replace Power Supply Unit
Important! When working with Host computer internal
parts, always use antistatic protective
measures.
1. Complete the Access the FRUs procedure.
2. Verify you are properly grounded to the frame of the
Host computer.
3. Disconnect all of the power cables to all connected
devices.
4. Remove the external screws (4) securing the supply
to the back of the chassis.
5. Slide the supply toward the front of the Host
computer. Lift the drive and remove it from the
chassis.
6. Install the replacement power supply and reinstall
the Host computer.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 999 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-300

Select one of the following topics: Fluid Not Circulating
• Fluid Not Circulating 1. Check that the plastic key between the motor and
the pump is not broken.
• Inadequate Temperature Control
2. Check the tubing between the unit and other system
• Unit Will Not Start
components for obstructions. The tubing may require
• Refrigeration Flow cleaning and/or replacement.
• CP-type Pump Flow 3. If the unit has a PD or TU-type pump, the unit may
need to have the pump strainer cleaned. See the
• PD & TU-Pump Flow
Clean the Strainers procedure in Functional
• Excessive Water Temperature Checks.
Note On the electrical enclosure, check the pump
identification label to identify the pump in use
at your location.
4. If the unit has a CP-type pump, back pressure from
the component being cooled may be greater than the
pump’s maximum pressure. This would create an
inadequate flow situation. Check the tubing for
obstructions.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1000 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-300, continued

Inadequate Temperature Control 4. If you have a water-cooled unit:
1. Verify the unit was installed correctly. a. Verify the facility water is ON.
2. Verify the heat load of the component being cooled is b. Verify the cooling water supply is appropriately
less than the unit’s cooling capacity. connected to the Tap Water connection.
Unit Will Not Start 5. Check if one of the high/low pressure cutoffs
1. Verify the main power circuit is energized. requires resetting.

Note The main power light (green) on the 6. Verify the power source is providing the necessary
controller panel is lit while the unit is output voltage. Electrical requirements should be
energized. specified on the serial number label on rear of unit.

2. Verify the flow is adequate for your application.

Note The flow control valve should be slightly
open. This will allow fluid to circulate through
the flow switch monitoring the flow rate. The
flow rate should be at least 0.3 gal/min.
3. If you have a three phase unit with three phase
pump motors, verify phase rotation is not reversed.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1001 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-300, continued

Refrigeration Flow CP-type Pump Flow
Hot gas
TXV bypass Reservoir
valve
Out In

Capillary Tube
Accumulator Bypass
Solenoid Pump Check
Solenoid Valve Valve
Valve
(NC)
Compressor Flow Control
Valve
Pressure
Gauge

Reservoir
Dryer (Evaporator Coil)
Supply Return

PD & TU-Pump Flow

Condenser

Sightglass Relief
Valve Reservoir

Out In Strainer Check

Receiver
Valve

Pump
Flow Control Valve

Pressure Gauge Return

Supply

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1002 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-300, continued

Excessive Water Temperature
If the water seem unusually warm or is at its maximum
temperature (approx. 40o C):
1. Check the high pressure cutoff circuit.
2. Reset.
3. Verify that the temperature begins to slowly drop.
4. If the temperature does not begin to drop, contact
HVAC for service.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1003 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-750

Select one of the following topics: Fluid Not Circulating
• Fluid Not Circulating 1. Check that the Plastic Key between the motor and
the pump is not broken.
• Inadequate Temperature Control
2. Check the pump ON/OFF switches on the unit rear.
• Unit Will Not Start
3. Check the phase rotation of the gradient loop.
• Pump Motor Overload Protector
Note The gradient coil loop is equipped with a
phase rotation interlock. It prevents the pump
from starting if the phase rotation is wrong.
4. Check for obstructions in the tubing between the unit
and the application being cooled.
5. Check/clean the pump strainers.
Note The pump strainers are located in the
reservoir on the pump suction lines.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1004 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-750, continued

Inadequate Temperature Control Unit Will Not Start
1. Verify the unit was installed correctly. 1. Verify the main power circuit is energized.
2. Verify the heat load of the component being cooled is Note The main power light (green) on the
less than the unit’s cooling capacity. controller panel is lit while the unit is
energized.
Note After the unit is shut off, you must wait a
minimum of five minutes before restarting to 2. Verify the flow is adequate for your application.
allow time for the refrigeration pressures to
Note The flow control valve should be slightly
equalize. If the pressures are not permitted to
open. This will allow fluid to circulate through
equalize, the compressor short-cycles and no
the flow switch monitoring the flow rate. The
cooling will occur.
flow rate should be at least 10 gal/min.
3. Check the power source for the correct voltage.
• Refer to the serial number label on the rear of the
unit for the electrical requirements.
• Power source must be as specified +10%.
4. Check the pressure monitors.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1005 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Neslab Chiller HX-750, continued

Pump Motor Overload Protector
A motor overload protector is included in the gradient coil
loop pump. It prevents the pump motor fro exposure to
excessive current.
If an overload fault occurs, the overload protector will
shut off the pump motor, but the unit’s compressor will
continue to operate. The fault must be manually reset
after the cause is identified and corrected.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1006 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Magnet
Select one of the following topics:
• Troubleshooting Liquid Helium Transfer
• System Status vs. Helium Level
Troubleshooting Liquid Helium Transfer
Any of the following could cause the transfer of liquid
Helium to unexpectedly stop:

Symptom Possible Cause

Transfer line (dewar side entrance) blocked Restore Helium flow by lifting the transfer line a couple of centimeters. If this has no
by ice or the dewar’s bottom. effect, de-ice the line.
Obstructed magnet side exit of the transfer Restore Helium flow by lifting the transfer line a couple of centimeters.
line inside the magnet.
Excessive back pressure. Pressure inside the magnet is equal to the supply pressure, possibly caused by an
obstructed vent system. Verify the ball valve on the magnet is open.
Liquid Helium dewar is empty. n/a
Helium gas pressure drop. Helium gas supply empty.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1007 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Magnet, continued
System Status vs. Helium Level

DPS Mag.Field Refrig. He Level Possible Cause Actions

ON ON ON > 30% Normal Operation. n/a

~ 30% Low Helium. Refill the Magnet.
< 30% Very low Helium. Elevated risk of Refill the Magnet.
magnet quench.
OFF ON ON > 30% Possible system leak. 1. Turn B0 heater ON.
2. Check for leakage and repair.
~ 30% Possible system leak. 1. Turn B0 heater ON.
2. Check for leakage and repair.
< 30% Possible system leak and/or system 1. Helium Level Check (New Intera)
may be out of Helium. 2. If > 20%, turn B0 heater ON.
3. If < 20%, Refill the Magnet. Turn
B0 heater ON.
4. Inspect for leakage.
Note "DPS" is the vessel positive pressure sensor.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1008 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Magnet, continued
System Status vs. Helium Level, continued

DPS Mag.Field Refrig. He Level Possible Cause Actions

ON ON OFF > 30% Cooler may be OFF. Restart cooler.

~ 30% Cooler may be OFF or low Helium. 1. Refill the Magnet.
2. Restart cooler.
< 30% Cooler may be OFF or low Helium. 1. Refill the Magnet.
2. Restart cooler.
OFF ON OFF > 30% Possible system leak or system may 1. Turn B0 heater ON.
be out of Helium.
~ 30% 2. Check for leakage and repair.
Cooler may be OFF.
< 30% 3. Helium Level Check (New Intera)
4. If > 20%, turn B0 heater ON.
5. If < 20%, Refill the Magnet. Turn
B0 heater ON.
6. Check for leakage.
7. Restart cooler.
ON OFF ON > 30% n/a n/a
~ 30% n/a n/a
< 30% n/a Before ramping, Refill the Magnet.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1009 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Magnet, continued
System Status vs. Helium Level, continued

DPS Mag.Field Refrig. He Level Possible Cause Actions

OFF OFF ON > 30% Possible system leak. 1. Turn B0 heater ON.
2. Check for leakage and repair.
~ 30% Possible system leak. 1. Turn B0 heater ON.
2. Check for leakage and repair.
< 30% Possible system leak or system may 1. Helium Level Check (New Intera)
be out of Helium. 2. If > 20%, turn B0 heater ON.
3. If < 20%, Refill the Magnet. Turn
B0 heater ON.
4. Inspect for leakage.
Note Refill before ramping
ON OFF OFF > 30% Cooler may be OFF. Restart cooler.
~ 30% Cooler may be OFF or low Helium. 1. Refill the Magnet.
2. Restart cooler.
< 30% Cooler may be OFF or low Helium. 1. Refill the Magnet.
2. Restart cooler.
Note Refill before ramping.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1010 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Magnet, continued
System Status vs. Helium Level, continued

DPS Mag.Field Refrig. He Level Possible Cause Actions

OFF OFF OFF > 30% Possible system leak and/or cooler 1. Turn B0 heater ON.
may be OFF.
2. Check for leakage and repair.
3. Restart cooler.
~ 30% Possible system leak and/or cooler 1. Turn B0 heater ON.
may be OFF.
2. Check for leakage and repair.
3. Restart cooler.
< 30% Possible system leak and/or system 1. Helium Level Check (New Intera)
may be out of Helium. 2. If > 20%, turn B0 heater ON.
Cooler may be OFF.
3. If < 20%, Refill the Magnet. Turn
B0 heater ON.
4. Inspect for leakage.
5. Restart cooler.
Note Refill before ramping.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1011 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style)

General Troubleshooting

Symptom Suggested Action(s)

Unit fails to start. 1. Check reservoir fluid level. If the fluid level is below safe operating levels, the low fluid
When Power switch is pressed, the Fault level monitor indicates a fault.
light does not come ON. 2. Check power source voltage. Source voltage should be at specification, +10%.
3. Check the fuses.
Unit starts and runs, but the Fault light is Verify temperature control setting is less than the high temperature limit setting.
ON.
Note Use the High Temperature Limit knob inside the rear of the unit to set the tempera-
ture limit.
Unit starts, runs for a short time, then 1. Check reservoir fluid level. If the level is low, check for leaks.
stops. 2. Verify heat load does not exceed cooling capacity.
3. Verify cooling water supply is within specification.
4. Verify proper voltage.
Green indicator light remains lit; 1. Verify heat load does not exceed cooling capacity.
temperature does not drop. 2. Verify cooling water supply is within specification.
3. Clean pump and facility water strainers.
Amber indicator light remains lit; Very little heat load exists in the unit being cooled.
temperature does not rise.
Note Power comes directly from the PDU, not from the MDU where the rest of the system is powered from.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1012 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style), continued

General Troubleshooting, continued
Poor Temperature Stability
The heat exchanger is designed to use a minimal
amount of cooling water, yet still provide maximum heat
removal.
Instability may result under conditions of excessive
cooling capacity. This situation can be further aggravated
by factors like low facility water temperature, high
temperature set point, small heat load, and/or high
facility water pressure.
To correct this problem:
1. Limit available facility cooling water by positioning a
pressure regulator before the heat exchanger.

Caution The heat exchanger’s capacity will be

reduced by overly restricting facility
water.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1013 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Neslab - Old Style), continued

General Troubleshooting, continued

Is lamp inside
Is water purity Is high temp. Is low flow lamp
power switch Yes Yes Yes Yes Open fuse 4FU.
lamp ON? lamp ON? ON?
ON?

No No No

Open fuse 1FU. HTC1 tripped.

No power to unit.
Open fuse 2FU HTC2 tripped.
No
Open fuse 3FU.
Loose/failed Puralite transformer.

No

Is motor valve
Do cool and idle lamps
Yes operating Yes Normal Operation
cycle when setpoint
correctly?
knob is turned?

No
No

Connector P2 open/loose.
If cool lamp remains lit all the time, Motor valve 6-pin connector open/loose.
temperature sensor failed (shorted).

If idle lamp remains lit all the time,

temperature sensor failed open,
unplugged, or connected incorrectly.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1014 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New Style)

General Troubleshooting

Symptom Suggested Action(s)

Unit fails to start. 1. Check reservoir fluid level. If the fluid level is below safe operating levels, the low fluid
When Power switch is pressed, the Fault level monitor indicates a fault.
light does not come ON. 2. Check power source voltage. Source voltage should be at specification +10%.
3. Check the fuses.
Unit starts and runs, but the Fault light is 1. Check reservoir fluid level. If low, check for leaks.
ON. 2. Verify heat load is less than cooling capacity.
3. Verify cooling water meets system requirements.
Green indicator light remains lit; 1. Verify heat load does not exceed cooling capacity.
temperature does not drop. 2. Verify cooling water supply is within specification.
3. Clean pump and facility water strainers.
Amber indicator light remains lit; Very little heat load exists in the unit being cooled.
temperature does not rise.
Note Power comes directly from the PDU, not from the MDU where the rest of the system is powered from.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1015 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Heat Exchanger (Eaton-Williams - New Style), continued

General Troubleshooting, continued
Poor Temperature Stability
The heat exchanger is designed to use a minimal
amount of cooling water, yet still provide maximum heat
removal.
Instability may result under conditions of excessive
cooling capacity. This situation can be further aggravated
by factors like low facility water temperature, high
temperature set point, small heat load, and/or high
facility water pressure.
To correct this problem:
1. Limit available facility cooling water by positioning a
pressure regulator before the heat exchanger.

Caution The heat exchanger’s capacity will be

reduced by overly restricting facility
water.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1016 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-8C)

Select one of the following topics: Compressor
• Compressor If any of the following are open, the compressor will shut
down automatically:
Oil Pressure Differential Switch
• Circuit breaker or control circuit fuse
Circuit Breaker
• Compressor high temperature switch
High Temperature Switches
• Motor over-current relay
Motor Over-current Relay
• Oil differential switch
Open Fuse
• Water high temperature switch
• General Troubleshooting
Do not restart the compressor if the compressor was
shut down because of one of these interlocks. Identify
and resolve the problem before restarting.
Oil Pressure Differential Switch
1. If this switch caused the shutdown, turn the power
switch OFF, then ON again to restart the
compressor.
2. If the unit shuts down again, refer to General
Troubleshooting.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1017 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-8C), continued

Compressor, continued Motor Over-current Relay
Circuit Breaker 1. This relay resets automatically once the fault has
If open, reset the breaker by pushing the lever to the been corrected. Turn the Power switch ON to restart
the compressor.
breaker’s up position.
High Temperature Switches Open Fuse
1. Switch the compressor supply power OFF.
If either high temperature switch caused unit shut down:
2. Replace the fuse and restart the compressor.
1. Allow the compressor to cool enough so the
appropriate switch cools/closes. Note Electrical chassis box fuses are in the control
circuits and the expander valve motor. Fuses
2. After waiting for the compressor to cool, press the
mounted in the front panel are in the acces-
Power switch to restart the unit.
sory receptacle circuit.
3. If the compressor fails to restart, turn the unit OFF
and wait for a longer period of time for the unit to
cool before restarting.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1018 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-8C), continued

General Troubleshooting

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action(s)

When compressor start switch or remote No electrical power. 1. Verify power source is ON.
start switch is pushed, the compressor 2. Verify power conductors are connected.
and expander motor do not start.
Run light is not lit. Incorrect phase sequence. Except for the ground, interchange any two
incoming power leads at the terminal block.
Note The block is in lower left corner of the
electrical chassis box.
Disconnected remote ON/OFF cable. 1. Reconnect the remote ON/OFF cable.
2. Close customer’s remote switch.
Incorrect voltage. Check system specs. with electric service.
Compressor control circuit fuse blown. 1. Check for short circuit.
2. Replace fuse.
Compressor module circuit breaker 1. Check voltage.
tripped. 2. Reset breaker.
Compressor oil differential pressure Push Power switch OFF, then ON to reset the
switch open. switch.
Defective power circuit component. Check electrical components.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1019 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-8C), continued

General Troubleshooting, continued

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action(s)

Compressor runs roughly, but fails to Motor running in reverse. 1. Stop compressor and shut OFF power.
build sufficient pressure. 2. Except for the ground, interchange any two
incoming power leads at the terminal block to
check operation of reverse phase protection
relay.
Note The block is in lower left corner of the
electrical chassis box.
3. Check compressor terminal wiring.
Run light stays ON approximately 1 Failure in motor control circuit. n/a
minute, then goes OFF. Compressor does
not start. Incorrect voltage. Check system specs. with electric service.

Compressor starts, then shuts down later. Compressor has insufficient coolant. Verify coolant flow and temperature.
Circuit breaker/fuse open. 1. Replace fuse or reset breaker.
2. Check system specs. with electric service.
Power circuit component failure. 1. Check for open circuit, breaker, or fuse.
2. Reset and/or replace as needed.
3. Check for a faulty component.
Low Helium gas pressure. 1. Add Helium gas and check for leaks.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1020 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-8C), continued

General Troubleshooting, continued

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action(s)

Compressor starts, then shuts down later, Open oil differential pressure switch. See System starts, but shuts down after
continued. operating approximately 30 seconds.
Current draw incorrect. 1. Measure current.
2. Check resistances of motor windings.
Compressor overload relay opens 1. Verify utilities (water/electric) are within spec.
2. Check interlocks.
System starts. Abnormally high/low gas Incorrect equalization pressure. 1. See Charge Helium Gas to System.
pressures. 2. If pressure is low, leak check system.
Couplings for gas lines not fully Verify all gas couplings are connected and
engaged. properly torqued.
Incorrectly connected gas lines. Reconnect gas lines.
Helium gas pressure experiencing Compressor is leaking gas. 1. Leak check the compressor.
gradual loss. 2. Repair as needed.
Compressor starts. Elapsed time meter Time meter or motor contactor failure. n/a
does not start.
Caution: Elapsed time meter contains a
lithium-ion battery. Do not remove/recharge.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1021 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-8C), continued

General Troubleshooting, continued

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action(s)

System starts, but shuts down after Incorrect equalization/operating 1. See Charge Helium Gas to System.
operating approximately 30 seconds. pressure. 2. If pressure is low, leak check system.
Gas equalization solenoid valve Replace compressor solenoid valve.
failure.
Oil flow low. Check for oil leaks in compressor module.
Oil cooling line filter or orifice is Replace the orifice and filter in compressor.
blocked.
Oil differential pressure switch failure. Replace the switch.
Valve motor hums; does not start. Capacitor or resistor defective. Check Valve Motor.
Valve motor defective. Check Valve Motor.
Open circuit in expander cable. 1. Disconnect expander cable.
2. Check conductor(s) for continuity.
3. If necessary, replace the cable.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1022 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-8C), continued

General Troubleshooting, continued

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action(s)

Compressor starts, but valve motor does Disconnected expander cable. 1. Stop compressor.
not start.
2. Reconnect cable.
Expander cable open circuit. 1. Disconnect expander cable.
2. Check conductor(s) for continuity.
3. If necessary, replace cable.
Valve motor defective. Check Valve Motor.
Fuse blown in compressor electrical See Shield Cooler General Troubleshooting.
box.
Valve motor runs, but there is no cool Gas line couplings not fully engaged. Verify all gas couplings are connected and
down. properly torqued.
Incorrectly connected gas lines. Reconnect gas lines.
Inadequate compressor output. See Shield Cooler General Troubleshooting.
Intermittent operation. Compressor cycling ON/OFF. See Shield Cooler General Troubleshooting.
Temperature cycling. Contaminated gas creating expander On expander, compressor, and gas lines,
freeze/thaw cycle. complete the Compressor Gas Cleanup
procedure.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1023 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-8C), continued

General Troubleshooting, continued

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action(s)

After running for 5 - 15 minutes, operation Compressor pressures incorrect. See Shield Cooler General Troubleshooting.
is abnormally noisy
Gas contaminants On expander, compressor, and gas lines,
complete the Compressor Gas Cleanup
procedure.
Sudden loss of refrigeration capacity. Malfunctioning compressor. See Shield Cooler General Troubleshooting.
Defective capacitor, resistor, or valve Perform necessary electrical checks.
motor.
Slow loss of refrigeration. Worn seals in expander. Check for leaking seals.
Note A streaming pattern of black particles on
the displacer (near the seal rings) indicate leak-
ing seals.
Leaking expander. See Leak Check.
First and second stage shield Expander not working to full capacity, Check readings and compare to those recorded
temperature increase. internally damaged, or worn. at startup.
See Shield Cooler General Troubleshooting.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1024 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-8C), continued

General Troubleshooting, continued

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action(s)

Cryostat consuming excessive gas. Failure in expander valve motor. Verify expander cable is properly connected.
Defective valve motor. See Shield Cooler General Troubleshooting.
Low Helium pressure in SC-8C 1. Verify correct operating pressure.
system. 2. See Charge Helium Gas to System.
3. See Leak Check.
4. Verify all gas couplings are connected and
properly torqued.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1025 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-R8)

Select one of the following topics: Compressor
• Compressor If any of the following are open, the compressor will shut
down automatically:
Circuit Breaker
• Circuit breaker or ON/OFF switch
Motor Over-current Relay
• Compressor high temperature switch
High Temperature Switches
• Motor over-current relay
• Compressor Motor Check
• Oil high temperature switch
Winding Continuity, Grounding, and Resistance
• Gas high temperature switch
• General Troubleshooting
Do not restart the compressor if the compressor was
shut down because of one of these interlocks. Identify
and resolve the problem before restarting.
Circuit Breaker
If open, reset the breaker by pushing the lever to the
breaker’s ON position.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1026 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-R8), continued

Compressor, continued High Temperature Switches
Motor Over-current Relay If either high temperature switch caused unit shut down:
1. This relay resets automatically after the compressor 1. Allow the compressor to cool enough so the
shuts down and the relay cools. appropriate switch cools/closes.
2. Turn the Power switch ON to restart the compressor. 2. After waiting for the compressor to cool, press the
3. If compressor fails to restart, turn the unit OFF. Wait Power switch to restart the unit.
a longer period of time before restarting. 3. If the compressor fails to restart, turn the unit OFF
and wait for a longer period of time for the unit to
cool before restarting.
4. Check temperature and flow of cooling water.
Compare the measurements to specifications.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1027 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-R8), continued

Compressor Motor Check 4. Check resistance across pairs of compressor
terminals or across pairs of motor contactor
1. To isolate most problems, check windings for
continuity, resistance, and grounding. terminals with an ohmmeter.

2. To distinguish a locked rotor condition from other Note Resistance should be approximately 1.6
ohms. An open circuit in the motor windings
electrical problems, check current measurements.
is indicated if there is no continuity.
3. If checks indicate a faulty compressor, replace as
5. Use an ohmmeter to check continuity between one
appropriate.
of the copper tubes entering the compressor
Winding Continuity, Grounding, and Resistance housing and the motor windings.
You may make the following measurements at the Note Use one of the copper tubes from the com-
compressor terminals or at the motor contactor to check pressor and the three compressor terminals
the compressor. or the three motor contactor terminals.
1. Disconnect compressor power. If there is continuity, there is probably a short circuit
2. Remove the compressor top cover or right side to ground in the motor windings.
panel. 6. Unless current measurement is also to be
3. From the top of the compressor, remove the terminal performed, replace the terminal cover or side cover if
cover to expose three terminals (U, V, and W). the motor passes these electrical checks.

- or -
In the electrical chassis box, at the terminals at the
bottom of the motor contactor, identify (but do not
remove) wires 7, 8, and 9.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1028 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-R8), continued

General Troubleshooting

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action(s)

When compressor start switch is pushed, No electrical power. 1. Verify power source is ON.
the compressor and shield cooler do not
2. Verify power conductors are connected.
start.
Incorrect voltage. Check system specs. with electric service.
Defective power circuit component See Shield Cooler General Troubleshooting.
Compressor runs roughly, but fails to Incorrect phase sequence; motor 1. Stop compressor.
build sufficient pressure. running in reverse. 2. Except for the ground, interchange any two
incoming power leads at the compressor’s
power cord plug, or at the customer’s
disconnect switch.
3. Check for correct wiring to the compressor.
Compressor starts, then shuts down later. Compressor has insufficient coolant. Verify coolant flow and temperature.
Open circuit breaker. 1. Reset breaker.
2. Check system specs. with electric service.
Power circuit component failure. 1. Check for open circuit breaker.
2. Reset and/or replace as needed.
3. Check for a faulty component.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1029 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-R8), continued

General Troubleshooting, continued,

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action(s)

Compressor starts, then shuts down later, Open high temperature switch (oil, Verify coolant flow and temperature.
continued. gas, or compressor shell).
Current draw incorrect. 1. Measure current.
2. See Shield Cooler General
Troubleshooting.
Compressor overload relay opens 1. Verify utilities (water/electric) are within spec.
2. Check interlocks.
System starts. Abnormally high/low gas Incorrect equalization pressure. 1. See Charge Helium Gas to System.
pressures. 2. If pressure is low, leak check system.
Couplings for gas lines not fully Verify all gas couplings are connected and
engaged. properly torqued.
Incorrectly connected gas lines. Reconnect gas lines.
Helium gas pressure experiencing Compressor is leaking gas. 1. Leak check the compressor.
gradual loss. 2. Repair as needed.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1030 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-R8), continued

General Troubleshooting, continued,

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action(s)

Compressor starts, but valve motor Disconnected expander cable(s). 1. Stop compressor.
does not start.
2. Reconnect cable.
3. Check RF feed through connections.
4. Check connections at the valve motor.
Inside expander cable has open 1. Disconnect expander cable from RF feedthroughs.
circuit. 2. Disconnect expander cable from valve motor.
3. Complete continuity check on each conductor.
4. If appropriate, replace the cable.
Expander cable connected to 1. Disconnect cable from RF feedthroughs.
compressor has open circuit. 2. Disconnect compressor power.
3. Complete continuity check between PCB terminals
T1, T2, and T3 and expander power cable sockets.
Note Remove the ride side panel to expose PCB.
Compressor electrical box fuse blown. Replace fuse.
Faulty valve motor. Check Valve Motor.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1031 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-R8), continued

General Troubleshooting, continued,

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action(s)

Valve motor hums, but fails to start. Faulty valve motor. Check Valve Motor.
Expander cable open circuit. 1. Disconnect expander cable.
2. Complete continuity check for each conductor.
3. If appropriate, replace cable.
On valve stem, the valve disc stalled. See Open the valve on the adapter fitting slowly
and vent until the appropriate equalization
pressure is obtained..
Seized valve motor. 1. Check motor shaft for clockwise, smooth rotation.
2. If appropriate, replace the valve motor.
Valve motor runs, but there is no Gas line couplings not fully engaged. Verify gas couplings connected and properly torqued.
cooldown.
Incorrectly connected gas lines. Reconnect gas lines.
Inadequate compressor output. 1. See Shield Cooler General Troubleshooting.
2. Check for abnormally high/low current draw.
Gas contains contaminants. Complete the Compressor Gas Cleanup on the shield
cooler, gas lines, and compressor.
Control switch in Standalone mode. Move switch to Normal operation.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1032 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-R8), continued

General Troubleshooting, continued,

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action(s)

Intermittent operation. Compressor cycling ON/OFF. 1. Check input power.

2. Check coolant flow and temperature. Compare
measurements to specifications.
Temperature cycling. Contaminated gas creating shield On shield cooler, compressor, and gas lines, complete
cooler freeze/thaw cycle. the Compressor Gas Cleanup procedure.
Sudden loss of refrigeration Malfunctioning compressor. 1. Check input power.
capacity. 2. Check coolant flow and temperature. Compare
measurements to specifications.
Defective valve motor. 1. Check continuity of expander cable.
2. Measure resistance of valve motor windings.
Slow loss of refrigeration. Worn seals in shield cooler. Check for leaking seals.
Note A streaming pattern of black particles on the dis-
placer (near the seal rings) indicate leaking seals.
Leaking shield cooler. See Leak Check.
Helium gas pressure dropping Compressor leaking gas. See Leak Check.
gradually.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1033 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Shield Cooler (SC-R8), continued

General Troubleshooting, continued,

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action(s)

Cryostat cryogenic gas Faulty shield cooler valve motor. Verify expander cable connections.
consumption is excessive.
Faulty valve motor. Check valve motor winding resistance.
Higher than normal temperatures in
first/second stage(s). Low system Helium pressure. 1. Check specifications to verify correct operating
pressure.
2. See Leak Check.
3. Verify all gas couplings are connected and properly
torqued.
Control switch in Standalone mode. Move switch to Normal operation.
System starts. Abnormally high/low Incorrect equalization pressure. 1. See Charge Helium Gas to System.
gas pressures. 2. If pressure is low, see Leak Check.
Gas line couplings improperly Verify all gas couplings are connected and properly
connected. torqued.
Gas lines connected incorrectly. Reconnect the gas lines.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1034 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S21D-64, -42 & 53-S22D-64, -42)

Tube Replacement Tubes may be reaching the end of their operational life
ACS-NT and T10-NT amplifiers should operate for quite when:
some time before their tubes begin to degrade and • the amplifier fails the tube test,
require replacement.
• tube bias current can not be set to the normal
Important! The tubes high cost makes it prudent to com- operating point, and/or
plete some additional testing before attempt-
• the amplifier failed an RF selftest, because of low gain
ing to replace them.
in a tube stage or excessive droop on the RF output.
1. Complete the Tube Bias Check procedure.
The amplifier no long produces full RF output and
2. Reset the bias to the nominal set point. excessive droop appears on a rectangular RF output
Note Over a tube’s lifetime, the bias will drift down pulse when tubes are reaching the end of their
operational life.
a little. Resetting the bias ensures tubes are
running optimally for efficient amplifier opera-
tion.
3. Complete the Amplifier Manual Tube Test
procedure to check tube operation and the bias point
of the tube.
4. Complete the Amplifier RF Selftest to check amplifier
operation, normal gain through the RF stages of the
amplifier, and RF output droop.
If the amplifier tube bias has been reset and the amplifier
passed the tube and RF selftest, the tubes should be
working normally and do not require replacement.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1035 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

RF Amplifier (53-S23A-64)
Tube Output
1. Run the RF Amp Max. kW check.
2. If the values are outside specification, replace the
tube(s).
Note At first, only replace the IPA tube. The PA
tube typically lasts three times longer than
the IPA tube.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1036 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Logging File
Select one of the following topics: Coil Identification Phase
• Coil Identification Phase Two lists are printed during the Coil Identification phase:
• DC-fixed phase • All non-empty connectors, the coil ID code found in
each connector, and its equivalent translation to an
• TM phase
id-nr.
• PU phase
• All front end objects in use, together with the coil and
• PO phase connector with which they are associated.
• F0 phase Cl: Coil identification
Cl: conn: 0 id-code: 2 => id-nr: 2 (#1)
• AS phase Cl: conn: 1 id-code: 27 = > id-nr: 7 (#1)
Cl: fe_ix: 0 id-nr: 2 (id-code: 2) conn: 0
• RG phase Cl: fe_ix: 1 id-nr: 27 (id-code: 7) conn: 1
• Sample Messages Cl: fe_ix: 15 id-nr: 2 (id-code: 2) conn: 0

Potential error messages during this phase may include

"Wrong coil connected".

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1037 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Logging File, continued

DC-fixed phase PU phase
During this phase, the DC level for the standard receiver During the PU phase, PU gain set, load factor, and rf
and the DC levels for synergy receivers are detailed. drive scale information is presented.
DC: DC-fixed preparation phase PU: perform pick_up optimization
DC: channel 0 gain 1.000 dc_re: -0.464257 dc_im: -0.502921 PU: PU gain set at 0.00770
PU: meas. b1 = 11.46, exp. b1 = 12.17, act. scale = 0.5374
DC: channel 3 gain 1.000 dc_re: -0.470990 dc_im: -0.515743 PU: Load factor: 1.362
DC: channel 4 gain 1.000 dc_re: -0.480000 dc_im: -0.490743 PU: updated rf drive scale 0.5707
PU: b1 trip level is at rf drive scale 0.5707
Note In the example above, synergy channels 3 and 4
are to be used in the scan. Potential error messages during this phase include
PU: ERROR: No signal from pick-up coil, or pickup-up coil
TM phase improperly calibrated.
During the TM phase, peak values, frequency offsets
and coil quality factors are displayed.
TM: Perform T_F0_Q
TM: freq-sweep: overflow, coil 2, new gain 0.038
TM: freq-sweep: overflow, coil 2, new gain 0.006
TM: mid freq: 42339275 mid max.: 3638 max_index: 216
TM: right freq: 42626276 right max.: 2539 counter: 287
TM: left freq: 42481276 left max.: 2536 counter: 142
TM: coil: 2 connector: 0, peak: 3638, offset: -34000, coil Q: 302

Potential error messages during this phase include error

in tuning and matching phase errors.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1038 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Logging File, continued

PO phase

Sample Log Info. Details

PO: 55kg 20.0 yrs M Patient Information (weight, age, gender, etc.)
PO: perform power optimization PO phase begins.
PO: pulses: 9.01uT, 13.51uT, 13.51uT, 1.1412ms, shape=16 B1 amplitudes of the 3 RF pulses, the duration, and shape.
PO: Initial scale reduced by 0.800, first angle aimed at 108 degrees Reduce initial drive scale to 80% to reduce the chance of creating a
B1 trip at the first iteration. Occurs only if B1 > 20 uT.
PO: Initial drive scale: 0.4510 Used drive scale for this measurement.
PO: Gain reset to: 0.06750 Receive gain setting (1 = 0 dB, 0.1 = -20 dB, etc.)
PO: Patt = 15, LM = 0.866, gain 0.06750 Transmit attenuator (dB) and LM scale value for the SE-pulse and
the receiver gain setting.
PO: iter SE[ 65 ] F=0 STE[ 64 ] F=0 angle First measurement (iteration) SE signal, STE signal and calculated
pulse angle.
PO: 0 4402 73829.3 3876 42934.1 113.77
PO: Cor. table = 35 4285 9035 Non-linearity correction.
PO: Peak pickup coil (i,q): 0.210V 0.267V = 16.30uT (20.25uT nom) Signal measured via Pickup Coils.
PO: Next drive scale: 0.5365 (0.5207) The next iteration (#2) measurement can begin.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1039 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Logging File, continued

PO phase, continued

Sample Log Info. Details

PO: Power optimization successfully completed Status OK.

PO: Proceeding with RF drive scale = 0.5328, ref_b1 = 12.2 Final drive scale (0.5328) used to calculate the RF pulses for this
scan.
PO: (Alternate RF drive scale = 0.5106, max b1 = 20.2)
PMU: Current pmu limit: 250 watt, Pavg = 24 watt. PMU set to 50 watt. As a result of PO measurement, the PMU setting.

Potential error messages during this phase may include: F0 phase

• SE time signal not above noise threshold The F0 phase displays volume, mode, and resonance
frequency information.
• STE time signal not above noise threshold
F0: start of procedure for volume: 0, COARSE mode.
• Pickup coil signal too low
F0: power: left 37 mid 8686 right 2098 (sqrt sum)
• Flip angle cannot be determined (not enough signal)
F0: WATER peak 43, offset 103, avg -4, s/n 166.74, bg 1.184
• Cannot determine optimum RF power F0: FAT peak 163, offset -11
F0: water frequency offset is -8 Hz
F0: Volume 0, updated resonance frequency is 63865257 Hz

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1040 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Logging File, continued

AS phase FRC & Noise Phase
The AS phase displays measured shim errors, shim This phase logs frequency receiver correction and noise
offset, and F0 determination information. determination information, but not much additional
AS: Automatic shimming information.
AS: stack 1 run 1 FRC: echo 1, sign 0 stack 0
FRC: echo1, sign -1 stack 0
AS: delta_S = 18.13 uT/m, delta_G = 39.86 uT/m NOISE: stack 0 coil 2, conn 0, gain (fit): 0.556, gain_act: 0.412
AS: SHIMS 0.00 0.00 39.86
AS Shim gradient strengths in mT/m are:
AS: X = 0.003, Y = -0.011, Z = 0.040, G_used = 1.000
Note Echo-phase determination is not logged.
Sample Messages
AS: F0 determination of stack 0
The following will always appear:
RG phase Measurement aborted by MPF [MPEX]
The RG phase displays receiver gain information. UGTXT:.....Error message on screen
Measurement aborted!
RG: pack: 0, locs: 9 Scan aborted after error
RG: Overflow, gain reduced to (fit): 0.0032 Translation succeeded, check BDASDUMP.log
RG: channel 0 gain 0.069 magnitude 44
BDAS errors may be displayed as:
RG Gain set to (fit): 0.258, predicted max value: 164
Starting communication with BDAS failed
BDAS software not ready
Timeout during measurement. Measurement aborted.
Scan resources not available. Restart required.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1041 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Troubleshooting NT with Raw/Complex Data

Select one of the following topics: Reproducing Customer Used Protocol for
• Reproducing Customer Used Protocol for Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting 1. Logon as Gyroscan (Application Mode).
• Saving Complex Image Data 2. Select Image with artifact. Click [PROCEED].
• Saving Raw Data Direct 3. Select Anatomy > Any Anatomy > Any Sub
Anatomy.
• Inverse Reconstruction
4. Select Repeat.
• Delayed Reconstruction
5. If an "Incorrect Scan Plane" message appears,
• Set Reconstruction Parameters Back to Normal
click [OK] to continue.
6. Select Post Proc. Select Reconstruction Mode:
Delayed. Click [PROCEED].
7. Start the scan.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1042 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Troubleshooting NT with Raw/Complex Data, continued

Saving Complex Image Data 6. Scroll to Reconstruction Mode: Delayed. Use the
[+] or [-] keys to select Yes.
Note This data can be used later for raw data creation,
while conserving disk space. 7. Click [PROCEED]. Start the scan.
1. Logon as Gyroscan (Application Mode). 8. Complete the Delayed Reconstruction procedure.
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. Inverse Reconstruction
Select Service Mode.
Use this procedure to create raw data from complex
3. Select Control Parameters > Reconstruction image data.
Parameters.
1. Logon as Gyroscan (Application Mode).
4. Scroll to the Save complex images option. Use the
2. Select Examinations.
[+] or [-] keys to select Yes.
3. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
5. Click [PROCEED/HIDE].
4. Select Service Mode > Expert Functions > Inverse
Saving Raw Data Direct Reconstruction.
Important! A large amount of disk space is required to
5. From the list to reconstruct, select cpx scan.
save pure raw data.
Note The data is stored under current patient
1. Logon as Gyroscan (Application Mode).
name.
2. Select Patient > New Exam.
6. Complete the Delayed Reconstruction procedure.
3. Enter test patient data.
4. Click [PROCEED].
5. Select Anatomy > Preset Procedure > Post Proc.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1043 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Troubleshooting NT with Raw/Complex Data, continued

Delayed Reconstruction 13. Verify the following parameters are set as indicated:
1. Logon as Gyroscan (Application Mode). • Viewable raw data: Yes
2. Select Exams. • Selective reconstruction / selected measurement
/ phase correction: No
3. Select an image from an exam containing raw/
inverse reconstructed data. • Reconstruction matrix: 512
4. Click [PROCEED]. • Push to Gyroview: No
5. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. • Gyroview Protocol: ->.
Select Service Mode.
• Images: R,I,M
6. Select Control Parameters > Reconstruction
• Autoview: R
Parameters.
14. Click [PROCEED].
7. Change enable initial filter to No.
8. Change normalized image perc: to 0.00,100.00.
9. Click [PROCEED].
10. Click [CANCEL].
11. Click [CANCEL].
12. Select Perform Delayed Reconstruction > Raw
Data file.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1044 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Troubleshooting NT with Raw/Complex Data, continued

Set Reconstruction Parameters Back to
Normal
1. Logon as Gyroscan (Application Mode).
2. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
Select Service Mode.
3. Select Control Parameters > Reconstruction
Parameters.
4. Change enable filter to Yes.
5. Change normalized image perc: to 0.10,990.90.
6. Click [PROCEED].

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1045 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 234

General Troubleshooting Condition Cause/Action

Condition Cause/Action When unit is turned ON, the Faulty OVP pot. Possible
OVP trips. disconnected wires.
Cannot reach full output. Failure in one or two of the OVP tripping due to output
inverters. being too high, or adjusted too
Circuit breaker trips. Inverter failure or input rectifier low.
failure. Phase loss LED is ON. AC line low or phase/neutral
High ripple. Failure in one of the output disconnected.
caps. Supply not working, and Power F1 fuse blown. Bias supply
Inverter LED glowing. Inverter failure. ON LED not lit. failure or fan failure(s).

• Check output assembly Supply working and Power ON Faulty Power ON LED.
diodes. LED not lit.
• Replace inverter. Unit output goes too high; Disconnected wires to voltage
voltage and current not or current pots. Current/
No output. Control failure LED Remote ON/OFF adjustable.‘ voltage pot is faulty.
glowing. disconnected. A100 board
failure, inverter failure, or
neutral disconnected on 380,
414, 480 VAC input models, or
OVP fired.
Note Control failure will be
ON when remote is OFF. This
is a normal condition.
Overheating Fan failure or overheating
inverter.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1046 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271

Select one of the following topics: Analog Functions Test
• Overview Gradient Load Test
• Test Software (TSW) Gradient Strength & Slope Tests
Logon to TSW with R7.x - R9.x Gradient HV Power Supply Test
Logon to TSW with R10.x - R11.x Settling Test
Automatic Tests Check/Manual Adjust Gain/Offset
• Pulsar Gradient Cable Connections • Replace Gradient Chain Interface (GCI)
Gradient Cable Connections (Amplifier Rear) Caution
• Nova/Quasar Gradient Cable Connections Procedure
Gradient Cable Connections (Amplifier Rear) • Replace Gradient Amplifier Axis
• Nova Dual/Quasar Dual Gradient Cable Caution
Connections
Procedure
Gradient Chain Setup
• Replace HV Power Supply
Gradient Cable Connections (Amplifier Rear)
Caution
• Power ON Checks (First Time)
Procedure
• System Tuning Tools (STT)
Logon to ASW with R7.x to R9.x
Logon to ASW with R10.x - R11.x Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1047 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Overview Test Software (TSW)
The following tools are available for diagnosing faults in Logon to TSW with R7.x - R9.x
the Copley 271/281 gradient amplifiers. 1. To start TSW (R7.x - R9.x):
Diagnostic Tool Details a. Exit Gyroscan (if operational).
System Tuning Tools STT is a part of the application software b. Logon as TSW.
(STT) for Intera R7.x through Intera R11.x.
c. Type: tbdas and press <ENTER>.
Application Software ASW includes a logging function which
(ASW) monitors the system, including gradient d. Continue to Automatic Tests.
amplifiers. When a gradient error
occurs, a gradient dump file is logged Note The automatic command runs the entire BDAS
which contains detailed error chain, not just the gradients.
information.
Logon to TSW with R10.x - R11.x
Test Software (TSW) For Intera R7.x through Intera R11.x.
1. To start TSW (R10.x - R11.x):
TSW includes both automatic and
interactive tests for the gradient chain a. Logon as MRService.
interface unit (GCI-1).
b. Select Start > MR Applications.
Note Gradient amplifiers are not tested
using TSW; the amplifiers can be tested c. Select Test Software > TBDAS.
using the System Tuning Tools (STT).
d. Continue to Automatic Tests.
Displays Unit status is displayed on each
gradient amplifier axis and on each DC Note The automatic command runs the entire BDAS
power supply. chain, not just the gradients.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1048 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Test Software (TSW), continued g. To run the DAC Calibration Test, type:
calibration and press <ENTER>.
Automatic Tests
1. To exit the information screen and display the h. To run the ECC Timing Test, type: ecctiming and
selection menu, type: run functional gradient and press <ENTER>.
press <ENTER>. i. To run the Amplifier Mode Test, type: ampmode
2. To run the Automatic Gradient Test, type: automatic and press <ENTER>.
and press <ENTER>. j. To run the Gradient Mode Switch Test (Intera
3. To run the gradient chain interface (GCI) tests, type: Nova Dual system only) type: swboxmode and
gci and press <ENTER>. press <ENTER>.

a. To run the Analog Wrap-around Test, type: k. To run the GCI External Test, type: external and
anawrap and press <ENTER>. press <ENTER>.

b. To run the GCI Mainfault Test, type: mainfault • Using a coax cable, connect DGA-X5 on the
and press <ENTER>. GCI to DGB-X3 and press <ENTER>.

c. To run the Waveform Offset Test, type: offset and • Using a coax cable, connect DGA-X6 on the
press <ENTER>. GCI to DGB-X3 and press <ENTER>.

d. To run the Gain Adjustment Test, type: gainadj • Reconnect all connectors and press
and press <ENTER>. <ENTER>.
e. To run the Dfec1 Interface Test, type: df1int and 4. To exit the TSW tests, type: quit and press
press <ENTER>. <ENTER>.

f. To run the GCI Interpolator Test, type: interpol

and press <ENTER>.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1049 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Pulsar Gradient Cable Connections Gradient Cable Connections (Amplifier Rear)
The gradient cable connections should be checked for
shorts before turning the gradient amplifier ON. A digital
multi-meter (DMM) with an Ohms range is used to X+ X- Y+ Y- Z+ Z-

complete the check.

Use the following drawing and details when making the
following measurements:
Points Spec. (Ohms)
• Resistance of X, Y and Z gradient coils
X+ : X- <10
• Resistance between X, Y and Z gradient coils Y+ : Y- <10
• Resistance between each coil and ground Z+ : Z- <10

DANGER High voltage is present inside the X+ : Y+ >1000

gradient amplifier and at coil X+ : Z+ >1000
connections, system filter box and
Y+ : Z+ >1000
gradient switch (where present).
X+ : GND >1000 *
Important! Check the high voltage indicator on the front Y+ : GND >1000 *
side of the amplifier. Green indicates voltage
Z+ : GND >1000 *
above 100 V. Measure the output voltage at
the output terminals with a digital multi-meter Note If somewhat outside specification, re-measure using a dif-
to verify buffer capacitors have discharged to ferent DMV or disconnect the positive gradient cable and mea-
less than 2 volts. sure between the gradient cable and the ground.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1050 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Nova/Quasar Gradient Cable Connections Gradient Cable Connections (Amplifier Rear)
The gradient cable connections should be checked for Master
shorts before turning the gradient amplifier ON. A digital
multi-meter (DMM) with an Ohms range is used to
complete the check.
Use the following drawing and details when making the X+ X- Y+ Y- Z+ Z-
following measurements:
• Resistance of X, Y and Z gradient coils
• Resistance between X, Y and Z gradient coils
Slave
• Resistance between each coil and ground

DANGER High voltage is present inside the

gradient amplifier and at coil X+ X- Y+ Y- Z+ Z-
connections, system filter box and
gradient switch (where present).

Important! Check the high voltage indicator on the front

side of the amplifier. Green indicates voltage
above 100 V. Measure the output voltage at
the output terminals with a digital multi-meter
to verify buffer capacitors have discharged to
less than 2 volts.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1051 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Nova/Quasar Gradient Cable Connections, Points Spec. (Ohms)
continued
Y+ master : X+ slave >1000
Gradient Cable Connections (Amplifier Rear),
continued Y+ master : Z+ slave >1000
Z+ master : X+ slave >1000
Points Spec. (Ohms)
Z+ master : Y+ slave >1000
X+ master : X- master <10
X+ master : X+ slave >1000
Y+ master : Y- master <10
Y+ master : Y+ slave >1000
Z+ master : Z- master <10
Z+ master : Z+ slave >1000
X+ slave : X- slave <10
X+ master : GND >1000 *
Y+ slave : Y- slave <10
Y+ master : GND >1000 *
Z+ slave : Z- slave <10
Z+ master : GND >1000 *
X+ master : Y+ master >1000
X+ slave : GND >1000 *
X+ master : Z+ master >1000
Y+ slave : GND >1000 *
Y+ master : Z+ master >1000
Z+ slave : GND >1000 *
X+ slave : Y+ slave >1000
Note If somewhat outside specification, re-measure using a dif-
X+ slave : Z+ slave >1000 ferent DMV or disconnect the positive gradient cable and mea-
sure between the gradient cable and the ground.
Y+ slave : Z+ slave >1000
X+ master : Y+ slave >1000
X+ master : Z+ slave >1000 Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1052 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Nova Dual/Quasar Dual Gradient Cable A digital multi-meter (DMM) with an Ohms range is used
Connections to complete the check.
The gradient cable connections should be checked for Use the following drawing and details when making the
shorts before turning the gradient amplifier ON. following measurements:
Gradient Chain Setup • Resistance of X, Y and Z gradient coils
1. At the front side of the cabinets, switch off the • Resistance between X, Y and Z gradient coils
gradient amplifiers by turning OFF the Copley high
voltage DC power supplies. • Resistance between each coil and ground

2. In the MDE (Main Distribution Extension), turn the DANGER High voltage is present inside the
mains power ON for the gradient amplifiers. gradient amplifier and at coil
Mains power is present on the GCI, the gradient connections, system filter box and
switch and the Copley HV DC power supplies. gradient switch (where present).

Note There is no power at the output of the HV DC Important! Check the high voltage indicator on the front
power supplies and amplifier axes, because side of the amplifier. Green indicates voltage
the Copley HV DC power supplies are not above 100 V. Measure the output voltage at
ON. the output terminals with a digital multi-meter
3. From the GCI, disconnect cable DGBX5. to verify buffer capacitors have discharged to
less than 2 volts.
Note The gradient switch is set to standard mode
(each axis drives a coil half) in this condition.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1053 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Nova Dual/Quasar Dual Gradient Cable
Connections, continued
Points Spec. (Ohms)
Gradient Cable Connections (Amplifier Rear)
X+ master : X- master <10
Master
Y+ master : Y- master <10
Z+ master : Z- master <10
X+ slave : X- slave <10
X+ X- Y+ Y- Z+ Z-
Y+ slave : Y- slave <10
Z+ slave : Z- slave <10
X+ master : Y+ master >1000
Slave
X+ master : Z+ master >1000
Y+ master : Z+ master >1000
X+ slave : Y+ slave >1000
X+ X- Y+ Y- Z+ Z- X+ slave : Z+ slave >1000
Y+ slave : Z+ slave >1000
X+ master : Y+ slave >1000
X+ master : Z+ slave >1000
Y+ master : X+ slave >1000

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1054 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Nova Dual/Quasar Dual Gradient Cable Points Spec. (Ohms)
Connections, continued
Note If somewhat outside specification, re-measure using a dif-
Gradient Cable Connections (Amplifier Rear), ferent DMV or disconnect the positive gradient cable and mea-
continued sure between the gradient cable and the ground.

Points Spec. (Ohms) 4. Once the measurements are complete, turn the
mains power for the gradient amplifiers in the MDU
Y+ master : Z+ slave >1000
extension OFF.
Z+ master : X+ slave >1000
5. Reconnect cable DGBX5 from the GCI.
Z+ master : Y+ slave >1000
X+ master : X+ slave >1000
Y+ master : Y+ slave >1000
Z+ master : Z+ slave >1000
X+ master : GND >1000 *
Y+ master : GND >1000 *
Z+ master : GND >1000 *
X+ slave : GND >1000 *
Y+ slave : GND >1000 *
Z+ slave : GND >1000 *

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1055 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Power ON Checks (First Time) 3. Verify the gradient amplifier and gradient coil heat
exchangers are both ON.
Press the <Clear> button if one of the following fault
indicators on the Neslab heat exchanger lights without 4. Verify the Copley HV DC power supply in the master
an apparent reason. and slave (if applicable) cabinets are turned ON.
• Low Level 5. Turn ON the Cabinet ON/OFF switch (for all three
axes) of the master gradient amplifier cabinet and
• Low Flow
the slave cabinet (if applicable).
• High/Low Temperature
6. In the MDU extension, turn the power ON for the
Note An indicator could be the result of a previous fault gradient amplifiers.
condition that did not clear automatically.
The gradient amplifiers should now be ON. The fans
1. If the first scan in the morning aborts with an error should be running and the appropriate displays lit.
message indicating the "...gradient amplifier heat
exchanger low temperature...", direct the system
operator to press the <Clear> button.
2. Verify the NTDAC has been switched ON.
Note If OFF, the Sync_clock will be missing.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1056 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

System Tuning Tools (STT) • Analog Functions Test
Logon to ASW with R7.x to R9.x • Gradient Load Test
1. To start ASW (R7.x to R9.x): • Gradient Strength & Slope Tests
a. Logon as Gyroscan. • Gradient HV Power Supply Test
b. Follow the available prompts to continue with the • Settling Test
test desired.
• Check/Manual Adjust Gain/Offset
Note For additional details on the available
tests, see the list in the facing column.
Logon to ASW with R10.x - R11.x
1. To start ASW (R10.x - R11.x):
a. Logon as MRService.
b. In the MR Boot Configuration Manager, select
Intera. Press Start.
c. Follow the available prompts to continue with the
test desired.
Note For additional details on the available
tests, see the list in the facing column.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1057 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

System Tuning Tools (STT), continued 6. To return to the Gradient Chain Measurement menu,
click [CANCEL].
Analog Functions Test
This test includes the testing of three analog functions. Gradient Load Test
This test provides an indication of resistance and
• Subtraction
induction of the load for the gradient amplifier. The load
• Average includes:
• Amplification and LP Filter • gradient cables,
1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. • connections,
Select Enter Service Mode.
• gradient switch,
Note For R11.x systems see Intera Software Log-
ins (R10.x-R11.x). • filters, and

2. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools. • gradient coils.

3. Select Diagnostic Measurement Tools > Gradient 1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
Select Enter Service Mode.
Chain Measurements.
4. Select Analog Functions Tests. 2. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.

An information screen displays.

5. To start the test measurements, click [PROCEED].
Measurements are taken without further intervention
and the results displayed. Any parameter failing to
meet specifications will be indicated by "***".
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1058 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

System Tuning Tools (STT), continued Gradient Strength & Slope Tests
Gradient Load Test, continued Important! Before continuing with this test, gradient
amplifier adjustments (Gain/Offset, Settling,
3. Select Diagnostic Measurement Tools > Gradient
Chain Measurements. Dual Delay - Nova Dual and Quasar) and
Eddy Current Compensation must be com-
4. Select Gradient Load Tests (Master, Slave, or pleted successfully. Further, gradient ampli-
Parallel). fier and coil cooling should be working
properly.
An information screen displays.
5. To start the test measurements, click [PROCEED]. 1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
Select Enter Service Mode.
Measurements are taken without further intervention
Note For R11.x systems see Intera Software Log-
and the results displayed. Any parameter failing to
ins (R10.x-R11.x).
meet specifications will be indicated by "***".
2. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
6. To return to the Gradient Chain Measurement menu,
click [CANCEL]. 3. Select Diagnostic Measurement Tools > Gradient
7. If one of the orientations indicates a value out of Chain Measurements.
specification: 4. Select Gradient Strength Tests (Standard or
Parallel).
a. Check gradient chain connections of the load for
the affected axis. An information screen displays.
b. Attempt to identify the failure by partially
swapping the gradient cables. For example,
swap the load of X axis with y axis and verify how
the fault responds.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1059 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

System Tuning Tools (STT), continued Gradient HV Power Supply Test
Gradient Strength & Slope Tests, continued This test switches the amplifier from low to high power
mode, and measures the output voltage of the power
5. To start the test measurements, click [PROCEED].
supply during the change as a function of time.
Measurements are taken without further intervention
and the results displayed. Any parameter failing to 1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
Select Enter Service Mode.
meet specifications will be indicated by "***".
Note For R11.x systems see Intera Software Log-
6. To return to the Gradient Chain Measurement menu,
ins (R10.x-R11.x).
click [CANCEL].
2. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
7. If the test fails:
3. Select Diagnostic Measurement Tools > Gradient
a. Check Gain/Offset, Settling, Dual Delay and
Amplifier Measurements.
Eddy Current Compensation.
4. Select Power Supply High Voltage Test (Master or
Important! Using the "Integral Adjustment" during the
Settling and Dual Delay adjustments can Slave).
negatively affect the results of this test. It is An information screen displays.
strongly recommended to not use the
"Integral Register" during the adjustment Note For Nova (Dual) or Quasar systems, first
select the "Power Supply High Voltage" test
procedures. The recommended value for the
from the list of master tests, Once the test
"Integral Register" is its initial value.
has passed, select the same test from the
listing of slave tests.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1060 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

System Tuning Tools (STT), continued Settling Test
Gradient HV Power Supply Test, continued Important! Before continuing with this test, the gradient
chain must have been properly adjusted, and
5. To start the test measurements, click [PROCEED].
in the proper sequence. Adjustments can be
Measurements are taken without further intervention influenced by previous adjustments.
and the results displayed. Any parameter failing to
1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
meet specifications will be indicated by "***".
Note For R11.x systems see Intera Software Log-
6. To return to the Gradient Amplifier Measurement
ins (R10.x-R11.x).
menu, click [CANCEL].
2. Select Enter Service Mode.
7. If the test fails, either the HV power supply or one of
the system buffer capacitors is defective. 3. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
• If one of the buffer capacitors behind the side 4. Select Diagnostic Measurement Tools > Gradient
panels is defective, replace the cabinet. Amplifier Measurements.
• If one of the buffer capacitors in the cap bank 5. Select Settling (Master or Slave).
assembly is defective, replace the FRU.
An information screen displays.
• If no buffer capacitor is visibly defective, replace
Note For Nova (Dual) or Quasar systems, first
the Copley HV power supply.
select the "Settling" test from the list of
master tests, Once the test has passed,
select the same test from the listing of slave
tests.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1061 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

System Tuning Tools (STT), continued Check/Manual Adjust Gain/Offset
Settling Test, continued Important! All other gradient amplifier and chain
adjustments must be repeated if settings are
6. To start the test measurements, click [PROCEED].
changed.
Measurements are taken without further intervention
and the results displayed. Any parameter failing to This procedure checks/adjusts gradient amplifier gain
and offset.
meet specifications will be indicated by "***".
Note During the measurement eddy current
7. To return to the Gradient Amplifier Measurement
compensation filters are switched OFF. No
menu, click [CANCEL].
software compensation for gradient gain and
8. If the test fails, complete the Adjust Settling offset will be done.
procedure.
1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
Note For R11.x systems see Intera Software Log-
ins (R10.x-R11.x).
2. Select Enter Service Mode.
3. Select System Tuning > System Tuning Tools.
4. Select Diagnostic Measurement Tools > Gradient
Amplifier Measurements.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1062 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

System Tuning Tools (STT), continued 9. When the manual gain/offset is finished, type: Exit
and press <ENTER> to stop the adjustments.
Check/Manual Adjust Gain/Offset, continued
5. Select Check/Manual Adjust Gain/Offset. Results of the test/adjustment display. Once they
pass, the gain and register parameters are written
An information screen displays. into the tuned hardware parameters.
Note For Nova (Dual) or Quasar systems, first 10. To return to the Gradient Amplifier Measurement
select the "Check/Manual Adjust Gain/Offset" menu, click [CANCEL].
test from the list of master tests, Once the
test has passed, select the same test from
the listing of slave tests.
6. To start the test measurements, click [PROCEED].
Measured gain and offset display.
7. If only checking the gain/offset, type: exit and press
<ENTER> to stop the measurements.
8. If the gain or offset must be adjusted, enter the
appropriate command name and press <ENTER>.
Note Available commands are listed in the
program and vary depending on the
configuration of the gradient.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1063 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Replace Gradient Chain Interface (GCI) Procedure
When the power supply of the unit is defective, you must 1. In the MDE (Main Distribution Extension), turn the
remove the entire unit. It is unnecessary to remove the gradient amplifiers OFF.
unit from the cabinet when just removing boards. 2. Open the front door of the master cabinet.
Caution Note The GCI is the top component.
High voltage is present inside the gradient amplifier.
3. Using a screw driver, disconnect all cables
• Copley 271: 420 V connected to the GCI.
• Copley 281: 850 V 4. Disconnect the mains cable and clock cable.
High voltage is also present on the gradient coil 5. Using an 8 mm open-ended wrench, remove the four
connections, the system filter box, and in some cases at nuts securing the GCI in the cabinet.
the gradient switch.
6. Remove the GCI unit from the cabinet.
Verify AC power has been turned OFF for a minimum of
one minute prior to starting work on the gradient chain. 7. Use an ESD wrist strap to ground yourself.

1. To verify that buffer capacitors have discharged to 8. Using a screwdriver, remove the I/O board and the
main board from the new GCI unit.
less than 2 volts:
• The screws are long and should be pulled out
a. Check the high voltage indicator on the front side
almost completely.
of the amplifier. Green indicates output voltage
above 100 V. • Press the "knobs" on the left and right of the
b. Use a digital multi meter to measure output board outward and pull on the board to remove.
voltage at the output terminals.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1064 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Replace Gradient Chain Interface (GCI), 13. Complete the Copley 271/281 Adjustment
continued Sequence.
Procedure, continued Replace Gradient Amplifier Axis
9. Verify the programming on the two boards, then Caution
mount the two boards back into the new GCI unit.
High voltage is present inside the gradient amplifier.
10. Reverse the previous steps to mount the
• Copley 271: 420 V
replacement GCI into the cabinet.
• Copley 281: 850 V
Note The unit must be lifted (slightly) so the guid-
ing pins located on the rear of the cabinet High voltage is also present on the gradient coil
can catch the unit. connections, the system filter box, and in some cases at
the gradient switch.
11. Restart all background processes.
Verify AC power has been turned OFF for a minimum of
12. To check the proper function of the new GCI unit:
one minute prior to starting work on the gradient chain.
a. Run Test Software (TSW).
1. To verify that buffer capacitors have discharged to
b. Run Automatic Tests. less than 2 volts:
c. Run a test scan. a. Check the high voltage indicator on the front side
of the amplifier. Green indicates output voltage
Note Always restart all background processes
above 100 V.
whenever:
b. Use a digital multi meter to measure output
• the gradient system configuration is changed,
voltage at the output terminals.
• GCI jumper settings are changed, or
• GCI boards are exchanged. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1065 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Replace Gradient Amplifier Axis, continued 10. Slide the new axis into the rack until the safety latch
engages.
Procedure
1. In the MDE (Main Distribution Extension), turn the 11. Remove the pin from the red handle and fold the
gradient amplifiers OFF. handle down.
2. Turn the gradient amplifier heat exchanger OFF. 12. Slide the replacement axis completely into the new
rack.
3. Open the front door of the cabinet.
13. To install the axis, lift the red handle and re-install the
4. On the axis to be replaced, remove the pin from the pin.
red handle.
14. Turn the gradient amplifier heat exchanger ON.
5. To eject the axis, push the red handle down.
15. In the mains distribution extension (MDE), turn the
6. Slide the axis out until the safety latch engages. gradient amplifiers ON.
Note Pull the axis out slowly and do not lift. This 16. Complete the necessary Adjustment Sequence.
may override the safety latch.
7. Lift the red axis handle and re-install the pin.
8. Release the axis safety latch by pushing up the latch
on the underside of the axis, then slide the axis
forward a little more.
9. Remove the axis from the cabinet.
Important! The axis weighs approximately 70 kg. A hoist
tool or two or more people should be used to
safely remove the axis from the cabinet.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1066 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Replace HV Power Supply Procedure
Caution 1. In the MDE (Main Distribution Extension), turn the
gradient amplifiers OFF.
High voltage is present inside the gradient amplifier.
2. Turn the gradient amplifier heat exchanger OFF.
• Copley 271: 420 V
3. Open the front door of the cabinet.
• Copley 281: 850 V
4. On the HV power supply to be replaced, remove the
High voltage is also present on the gradient coil
pin from the red handle.
connections, the system filter box, and in some cases at
the gradient switch. 5. To eject the power supply, push the red handle
Verify AC power has been turned OFF for a minimum of down.
one minute prior to starting work on the gradient chain. 6. Slide the HV out.
1. To verify that buffer capacitors have discharged to 7. Lift the red handle and re-install the pin.
less than 2 volts:
8. Pull the HV power supply outwards and lift the unit
a. Check the high voltage indicator on the front side out of the cabinet.
of the amplifier. Green indicates output voltage
Important! The axis weighs approximately 50 kg. Two or
above 100 V.
more people should be used to safely
b. Use a digital multi meter to measure output remove it from the cabinet.
voltage at the output terminals.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1067 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 271, continued

Replace HV Power Supply, continued
Procedure, continued
9. Install the new HV power supply in the cabinet
almost completely into the rack.
10. Remove the pin from the red handle and fold the
handle down.
11. Slide the replacement power supply in until the
handle touches the latch.
12. Lift the red handle and re-install the pin.
13. Turn the gradient amplifier heat exchanger ON.
14. In the MDE (Main Distribution Extension), turn the
gradient amplifiers ON.
15. Complete the necessary Adjustment Sequence.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1068 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274

Select one of the following topics: • Power Module 600 A Current Sharing Test
• Overview • Controller Voltages Test
• Test Software (ASW) • Controller Gain & Offset Test
Logon to ASW with R7.x - R9.x • Controller Diagnostics
Logon to ASW with R10.x - R11.x • Power Supply High Voltage Test
• PT3000 & Intera Power Cable Connections • Settling
Gradient Cable Connections (Amplifier Rear) • Replace WFG/ECC Board
• PT6000 & Intera Master Cable Connections • Replace Copley 274 Power Module
Gradient Cable Connections (Amplifier Rear) • Replace 100 A Fuse
• Gradient Interface (TSW)
• Power ON Checks (First Time)
• Analog Function Test
• Gradient Load Test
• Status Test
• Power Module Digitized Signals Test
• Power Module CM Voltage, VFB Test
• Power Module 60 A Current Sharing Test
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1069 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Overview Test Software (ASW)
The following tools are available for diagnosing faults in Logon to ASW with R7.x - R9.x
the Copley 274 gradient amplifiers. 1. To start ASW (R7.x to R9.x):
Diagnostic Tool Details a. Logon as Gyroscan.
System Tuning Tools STT is a part of the application software b. Continue with the required test.
(STT) for Intera R5.x through Intera R10.x.
Logon to ASW with R10.x - R11.x
Application Software ASW includes a logging function which
(ASW) monitors the system, including gradient
1. To start ASW (R10.x to R11.x):
amplifiers. When a gradient error a. Logon as MRService.
occurs, a gradient dump file is logged
which contains detailed error b. In the MR Boot Configuration Manager, select
information. Intera and press Start.
Test Software (TSW) For Intera R7.x through Intera R11.x
c. Continue with the required test.
TSW includes both automatic and
interactive tests. d. For R11.x, select System > Scan Definition
Displays Unit status is displayed on each
Context > Scan List.
gradient amplifier axis and on each DC
power supply.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1070 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

PT3000 & Intera Power Cable Connections Gradient Cable Connections (Amplifier Rear)
The gradient cable connections should be checked for
shorts before turning the gradient amplifier ON. A digital
multi-meter (DMM) with an Ohms range is used to X+ X- Y+ Y- Z+ Z-

complete the check.

Use the following drawing and details when making the
following measurements:
Points Spec. (Ohms)
• Resistance of X, Y and Z gradient coils
X+ : X- <10
• Resistance between X, Y and Z gradient coils Y+ : Y- <10
• Resistance between each coil and ground Z+ : Z- <10

DANGER The gradient amplifier must be turned X+ : Y+ >1000

OFF for this measurement. X+ : Z+ >1000 *
Y+ : Z+ >1000 *
Important! Verify power has been turned OFF for a mini-
mum of two minutes before working on the X+ : GND >1000 *
gradient chain. Check the high voltage value Y+ : GND >1000 *
on the EMI 20 kW / 420 VDC power supply
Z+ : GND >1000 *
meters. Ensure buffer capacitors have dis-
charged to less than 2 V. Note If somewhat outside specification, re-measure using a dif-
ferent DMV or disconnect the positive gradient cable and mea-
sure between the gradient cable and the ground.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1071 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

PT6000 & Intera Master Cable Connections Gradient Cable Connections (Amplifier Rear)
The gradient cable connections should be checked for Master
shorts before turning the gradient amplifier ON. A digital
multi-meter (DMM) with an Ohms range is used to
complete the check.
Use the following drawing and details when making the X+ X- Y+ Y- Z+ Z-
following measurements:
• Resistance of X, Y and Z gradient coils
• Resistance between X, Y and Z gradient coils
Slave
• Resistance between each coil and ground

DANGER The gradient amplifier must be turned

OFF for this measurement. X+ X- Y+ Y- Z+ Z-

Important! Verify power has been turned OFF for a mini-

mum of two minutes before working on the
gradient chain. Check the high voltage value
on the EMI 20 kW / 420 VDC power supply
meters. Ensure buffer capacitors have dis-
charged to less than 2 V.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1072 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

PT6000 & Intera Master Cable Connections, Points Spec. (Ohms)
continued
Y+ master : X+ slave >1000
Gradient Cable Connections (Amplifier Rear),
continued Y+ master : Z+ slave >1000
Z+ master : X+ slave >1000
Points Spec. (Ohms)
Z+ master : Y+ slave >1000
X+ master : X- master <10
X+ master : X+ slave >1000
Y+ master : Y- master <10
Y+ master : Y+ slave >1000
Z+ master : Z- master <10
Z+ master : Z+ slave >1000
X+ slave : X- slave <10
X+ master : GND >1000 *
Y+ slave : Y- slave <10
Y+ master : GND >1000 *
Z+ slave : Z- slave <10
Z+ master : GND >1000 *
X+ master : Y+ master >1000
X+ slave : GND >1000 *
X+ master : Z+ master >1000
Y+ slave : GND >1000 *
Y+ master : Z+ master >1000
Z+ slave : GND >1000 *
X+ slave : Y+ slave >1000
Note If somewhat outside specification, re-measure using a
X+ slave : Z+ slave >1000 different DMV or disconnect the positive gradient cable and
measure between the gradient cable and the ground.
Y+ slave : Z+ slave >1000
X+ master : Y+ slave >1000
X+ master : Z+ slave >1000 Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1073 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Gradient Interface (TSW) Power ON Checks (First Time)
1. Logon as TSW. 1. Verify the NTDAC has been turned ON.
2. Select TBDAS. Note The Sync_Clock will be missing if the
NTDAC has not been turned ON.
3. Type: run functional gradient automatic and press
<ENTER>. 2. In the Mains Distribution Unit (MDU, MDE) turn the
gradient amplifier ON.
4. When the test finishes, verify no errors are
displayed. 3. Turn the Master Mains and Aux ON.
5. Type: run functional gradient interactive and 4. If present, turn the slave gradient amplifier cabinets
press <ENTER>. ON.
The message "Gradient Interactive Test Note Switches are on both PDUs in each cabinet.
Started" displays.
5. Verify the fan units on all power modules are
6. Follow the prompts on the screen to continue/ running.
complete the test.
6. In the master gradient amplifier cabinets (and the
7. To exit TBDAS test, type: quit and press <ENTER>. slave cabinets if present) turn both EMI 20 kW / 420
VDC power supplies ON.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1074 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Power ON Checks (First Time), continued Status Check Details
7. For the PT3000, Intera Power and PT6000/Intera
Idle & Cool Light These indicators show control valve status.
Master: When the valve is fully open (max. cooling)
the Cool indicator is continuously on. When
a. Turn the gradient coil heat exchanger ON. the valve is fully closed, the Idle indicator is
b. Verify the heat exchanger status using the on.
following information. As the valve moves between the fully open
and fully closed positions, the two indicators
flash with variable on times to indicate the
Status Check Details approximate position of the valve.
Temperature 25o C.
Control Dial
Recirculation Equal to the dial setting (tolerance).
Temperature
Recirculation 43.5 PSI to 79.8 PSI.
Pressure
Pressure 7.2 PSI.
Fluctuation
Water Purity Following normal operation, the cartridge
Indicator should be replace if the indicator changes to
a steady red state. If periodically changing
between red and green, purity is adequate,
but a cartridge replacement should be
anticipated.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1075 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Analog Function Test Gradient Load Test
1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. 1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
Note For R11.x systems see Intera Software Log- 2. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning >
ins (R10.x-R11.x). System Tuning Tools.
2. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning > 3. Select Diagnostic Measurement > Gradient Chain
System Tuning Tools. Measurements.
3. Select Diagnostic Measurement > Gradient Chain 4. Select Gradient Load Test (master or slave).
Measurements.
An information screen displays.
4. Select Analog Functions Test.
5. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
An information screen displays.
A Measurement Results List (MRL) displays at the
5. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. end of the test. No errors are permitted.
A Measurement Results List (MRL) displays at the 6. Click [PROCEED].
end of the test. No errors are permitted.
7. Click [CANCEL] twice.
6. Click [PROCEED].

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1076 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Status Test Power Module Digitized Signals Test
1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. 1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
Note For R11.x systems see Intera Software Log- Note For R11.x systems see Intera Software Log-
ins (R10.x-R11.x). ins (R10.x-R11.x).
2. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning > 2. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning >
System Tuning Tools. System Tuning Tools.
3. Select Diagnostic Measurement > Gradient 3. Select Diagnostic Measurement > Gradient
Amplifier Measurements. Amplifier Measurements.
4. Select Status Check (master or slave). 4. Select Pwr Mod Digitized Signals (master or
slave).
An information screen displays.
An information screen displays.
5. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
5. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
A Measurement Results List (MRL) displays at the
end of the test. No errors are permitted. A Measurement Results List (MRL) displays at the
end of the test. No errors are permitted.
6. Click [PROCEED].
6. Click [PROCEED].
7. Click [CANCEL] twice.
7. Click [CANCEL] twice.
Note MRL numbers refer to the following test points.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1077 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Power Module Digitized Signals Test, MRL# Details
continued
16 Reference Temperature
MRL# Details
Power Module CM Voltage, VFB Test
1 +16 V Supply Value
1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
2 +15 V Supply Value
Note For R11.x systems see Intera Software Log-
3 High Voltage Supply Value ins (R10.x-R11.x).
4 IGBT1 Temperature
2. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning >
5 Ambient Temperature System Tuning Tools.
6 Filter Coil Temperature of Power Module 3. Select Diagnostic Measurement > Gradient
7 RMS Current Positive Output Amplifier Measurements.
8 RMS Current Negative Output 4. Select Pwr Mod CM Voltage (master or slave).
9 -15 V Supply Value An information screen displays.
10 +5 V Supply Value 5. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
11 IGBT2 Temperature A Measurement Results List (MRL) displays at the
12 Airflow (not applicable) end of the test. No errors are permitted.
13 Output Rectifier Temperature 6. Click [PROCEED].
14 +28 V Supply Value 7. Click [CANCEL] twice.
15 Predicted Junction Temperature
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1078 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Power Module 60 A Current Sharing Test Power Module 600 A Current Sharing Test
1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. 1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
Note For R11.x systems see Intera Software Log- Note For R11.x systems see Intera Software Log-
ins (R10.x-R11.x). ins (R10.x-R11.x).
2. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning > 2. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning >
System Tuning Tools. System Tuning Tools.
3. Select Diagnostic Measurement > Gradient 3. Select Diagnostic Measurement > Gradient
Amplifier Measurements. Amplifier Measurements.
4. Select Pwr Mod 60 A Current Sharing (master or 4. Select Pwr Mod 600 A Current Sharing (master or
slave). slave).
An information screen displays. An information screen displays.
5. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. 5. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
A Measurement Results List (MRL) displays at the A Measurement Results List (MRL) displays at the
end of the test. No errors are permitted. end of the test. No errors are permitted.
6. Click [PROCEED]. 6. Click [PROCEED].
7. Click [CANCEL] twice. 7. Click [CANCEL] twice.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1079 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Controller Voltages Test Controller Gain & Offset Test
1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. 1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
Note For R11.x systems see Intera Software Log- Note For R11.x systems see Intera Software Log-
ins (R10.x-R11.x). ins (R10.x-R11.x).
2. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning > 2. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning >
System Tuning Tools. System Tuning Tools.
3. Select Diagnostic Measurement > Gradient 3. Select Diagnostic Measurement > Gradient
Amplifier Measurements. Amplifier Measurements.
4. Select Controller Voltages (master or slave). 4. Select Controller Gain/Offset (master or slave).
An information screen displays. An information screen displays.
5. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED]. 5. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
A Measurement Results List (MRL) displays at the A Measurement Results List (MRL) displays at the
end of the test. No errors are permitted. end of the test. No errors are permitted.
6. Click [PROCEED]. 6. Click [PROCEED].
7. Click [CANCEL] twice. 7. Click [CANCEL] twice.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1080 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Controller Diagnostics Power Supply High Voltage Test
1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. 1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES].
Note For R11.x systems see Intera Software Log- Note For R11.x systems see Intera Software Log-
ins (R10.x-R11.x). ins (R10.x-R11.x).
2. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning > 2. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning >
System Tuning Tools. System Tuning Tools.
3. Select Diagnostic Measurement > Gradient 3. Select Diagnostic Measurement > Gradient
Amplifier Measurements. Amplifier Measurements.
4. Select Controller Diagnostics (master or slave). 4. Select Power Supply High Voltage (master or
slave).
An information screen displays.
An information screen displays.
5. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
5. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
A Measurement Results List (MRL) displays at the
end of the test. No errors are permitted. A Measurement Results List (MRL) displays at the
end of the test. No errors are permitted.
6. Click [PROCEED].
6. Click [PROCEED].
7. Click [CANCEL] twice.
7. Click [CANCEL] twice.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1081 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Settling Replace WFG/ECC Board
1. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN UTILITIES]. 1. Once the new board has been installed, set the
potentiometers in their start position.
Note For R11.x systems see Intera Software Log-
ins (R10.x-R11.x). a. Turn the 6 amplitude potentiometers (Ax) fully
counter-clockwise.
2. Select Enter Service Mode > System Tuning >
System Tuning Tools. b. Turn each of the potentiometers 7-1/2 turns
clockwise (amplitude zero = center position).
3. Select Diagnostic Measurement > Gradient
Amplifier Measurements. c. Turn the 6 Constant potentiometers (Tx) fully
counter-clockwise.
4. Select Settling (master or slave).
2. Complete the Adjust Eddy Currents procedure.
An information screen displays.
Note You can also replicate the potentiometer settings
5. To start the measurement, click [PROCEED].
from the defective board using an ohm meter.
A Measurement Results List (MRL) displays at the You must still have to check the eddy current
end of the test. No errors are permitted. adjustment, due to hysteresis in the mechanical
part of the potentiometers. You may also have to
6. Click [PROCEED].
adjust the A2/T2 and A1/T1 filters.
7. Click [CANCEL] twice.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1082 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Replace Copley 274 Power Module 3. To insert the new power module:
1. To remove the defective module: a. Insert the new module into position, and push it
gently into the back plane.
a. Turn the main breaker of the front side of the
cabinet OFF. b. Verify the connector has securely seated into the
b. Wait for several minutes, then use a DVM to back plane.
check the output terminals to verify the internal c. Without moving the module, pull back on the
capacitor bank has completely discharged. fastener and tighten the two screws
(see step 1e).
c. If open, close the 274 controller(s) front hatch.
d. Gently turn the jackscrew until the module is
d. Disconnect the fan assembly by removing the
properly seated into the back plane.
four screws and the connector.
e. Verify the connector seating again, then tighten
e. Release the two screws securing the module.
the two M5 nuts (see step 2a).
f. Use the module to gently withdraw the module.
f. Remount the fan assembly.
2. Before inserting the new module:
g. Using the main breaker at the front of the cabinet
a. Use a 8 mm wrench to release the two M5 nuts to turn the cabinet power ON.
(positioned behind the screws removed in
4. Check system operation by repeating the previously
step 1e).
failed scan, then completing the PIQT batch.
b. Using a 3 mm allen wrench, slightly unscrew the
3 mm Jackscrew.
c. Reproduce the dip switch settings from the old
module on the new module.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1083 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Intera w/Copley 274, continued

Replace 100 A Fuse
It is not necessary to disassemble the power module to
replace the fuse. The fuse is installed on a plate,
mounted to the chassis with four screws accessible from
the outside.
1. Remove the appropriate power module.
2. Remove the four screws securing the epoxy
mounting plate.
3. Gently remove the fuse assembly.
4. Temporarily re-install the four screws.
Note This will ensure alignment of the epoxy parts.
5. Using two wrenches, remove the power connections
of the fuse by releasing the bolts.
6. Replace the fuse.
7. Re-assemble the fuse assembly.
8. Install the fuse assembly back into the power module
and re-install the power module.
9. Power ON the gradient amplifiers and complete a
PIQT to check system function.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1084 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Daily Cleanup
Daily Cleanup (R7.x-R9.x) Daily Cleanup (R10.x-R11.x)
Daily Cleanup is a Gyrotool utility. It can be used as a 1. Logout of ASW.
database, log file, and operating system clean up/
2. Shutdown and reboot the host computer. Windows
pruning utility. It should be completed:
performs the appropriate cleanup tasks.
• anytime the system is responding slowly, sluggishly,
Note Periodically, partitions C and D should be
or has a problem with a background process (e.g.,
defragmented using Windows options.
archiving), and/or
• by the customer (weekly) to ensure solid system
operation.
1. Logon as Gyrotool.
2. Ignore the warning message and press <ENTER> to
proceed.
3. Select Daily Cleanup.
4. Answer Yes to all of the system prompts.
5. When prompted to restart the process, select Y.
6. When complete, select Exit.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1085 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera (R7.x-R9.x)

Select one of the following topics: The following information applies to the 0.5T (Standard),
1.0T (Omni/Power) and 1.5T (Omni, Power & Master).
• Introduction
• How to Scan Introduction
All scans from the technical image Quality Test should be
Perform Measurements
completed in batch mode using SPT. This must be done
Create an MRL for the following reasons.
• Viewing Scans • Correct protocol parameters
• Pre-Performance Test • Image evaluation (automatic)
Artifact Measurements • Comparison to specifications
Spike Testbatch • Enable electric load
Connector Test (Optional) • Correct control parameter settings.
• Periodic Image Quality Test (PIQT) Important! For 1.0T and 1.5T systems, turn the Ehrhorn
amplifier ON and wait a minimum of twenty
• Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance minutes before beginning performance
Measurements measurements.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1086 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

How to Scan 13. Select HEADT.
1. For R7.x - R9.x, logon as Gyroscan. 14. Click [SELECT].
2. Place the phantom in the Head Coil. 15. Select Start Scan. The scan should now start.
3. Press [ALIGNMENT LIGHTS] and move the table Perform Measurements
thumble switch to move the table into position, to 1. Select Scan Control. Select SPT Scanning.
center on Head Coil notch in alignment light.
2. Select Service Mode. Select Perform IQP/EST
4. Press the [PATIENT TRAVEL TO SCAN] button. The Measurements.
LED will light and the alignment light will turn off.
3. Select Analysis Principle.
5. Use the thumble switch to drive the table to
isocenter. Release after the table comes to a 4. Select the default (IQP).
complete stop. 5. Select the coil type.
6. At the console, select Patient > New Exam. 6. If applicable, select Scan Orientation.
7. Enter an exam name, exam no., date-of-birth, and Note A list of all the available scans appears on
weight (70 Kg). the screen.
8. Click [ENTER]. 7. Select one or more of the scans.
9. Click [PROCEED]. 8. Use the screen instructions to appropriately position
10. Click the Scan Icon (patient with slices). the phantom.
11. Select Anatomy (if not displayed, click [SCAN 9. To execute the selected scans, click [PROCEED].
CONTROL].)
12. Select Phantom Studies. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1087 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

How to Scan, continued Viewing Scans
Create an MRL Once scans are completed, they must be added to the
To evaluate performance scans, two specification files View Application window.
are needed. 1. To add the scan to the Scan window, click the [+]
To view/print the automatic evaluation results: button in the Scan Control area.

1. Select the System Performance Tools icon. 2. To view more pages of images, select and drag the
Image Scroll Bar.
2. Select Service Mode > System Verification.
3. To view other scan series, select and drag the Scan
3. Select Measurement Result Lists. A list of available Scroll Bar.
data files appears.
4. Select Viewing package.
4. Select one or more of the available files.
5. To add scan to Viewing window, click the [+] button in
5. Select the MRL type. the Scan Control area.
6. Select the sections to be used. For more information on scanning, see Support Central.
7. Select the output device(s).

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1088 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Pre-Performance Test Artifact Measurements
This test ensures the image quality test indicates no Depending on the coil used, a different bottle may be
major image quality problems. The following should be required.
completed prior to completing the image quality test. • Headcoil: 250 cc bottle
• Artifact Measurements • Bodycoil: 250 cc bottle (If a message appears
• Spike Testbatch indicating the system could not determine the
optimum RF power, use the 1000 cc bottle)
• Periodic Image Quality Test (PIQT)
Artifact measurements are specified at different magnet
• Connector Test (Optional) locations. Please review the following information.

Protocol H01 H02 B01 B02 B03

Coil Type Head Body

Scan T T C S
Orientation
Bottle Axis (Z-dir) Axis Axis Axis
Orientation (Z-dir) (Y-dir) (X-dir)
Coordinates -5, -5, 0 -11, -11, 0 0, -11, -11 -11, 0, -11
of Position

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1089 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Pre-Performance Test, continued 2. For the headcoil:
Artifact Measurement, continued a. Select Scan Control > SPT Scanning.
Important! Artifact measurement should be performed b. Select Service Mode > Perform IQP/EST
under normal conditions (IQP). Measurements.
1. If using the bodycoil: c. Select Analysis Principle EST.
a. Select Scan Control > SPT Scanning. d. Select Head_Quad. A list of available scans
b. Select Service Mode > Perform IQP/EST appears.
Measurements. e. Select 2 and 4.
c. Select Analysis Principle EST. f. Position the bottle in the headcoil.
d. Select Body_Quad. g. Click [PROCEED].
e. Select the required scan orientation. A list of
available scans appears.
f. Select 2.
g. Position the bottle in the bodycoil.
h. Click [PROCEED].

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1090 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Pre-Performance Test, continued m. Where the maximum intensity ghost is visible,
measure the mean intensity (G).
Artifact Measurements, continued
3. To evaluate the artifact measurement: n. On a ghost-free part of the background, measure
the mean intensity (B) and the standard deviation
a. Select Patient > New Exam. (sd(B)).
b. Select the Bottle examination. o. Calculate the intensity of the ghost using the
c. Select the scan to be analyzed. following formula.

d. Scale the image to reveal the maximum ghost. Ghost Intensity = [(G-B)/S)] * 100%

e. Position the cursor in the image and right-click. p. Record the calculated value in the MRL.

f. Select More > ROI Settings.

g. Select the Square icon and Hide.
h. Draw a square ROI and move it over the image.
i. Use the right mouse button to select the number
above the ROI.
j. Select Statistics twice. A window appears
displaying the mean value and ROI size in pixels.
k. Rescale the ROI, so the total pixel area is
approximately 49 mm2.
l. At the center of the bottle, measure the mean
intensity (S). Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1091 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Pre-Performance Test, continued The following test performs a number of heavy scans to
help determine if the number of spikes in the system are
Spike Testbatch
within specification.
Spikes are usually caused by any of the following.
1. Change the system monitoring mode to Extended.
• Poor mechanical contacts
a. Select System > Logging.
• Electrostatic discharges
b. Select Examine Logfiles.
• Conducting objects vibrating against another
conducting object. c. Select Modify Status of Logging Type.

Note Spikes are more common in Power and Master d. Select System and change the logging type to
gradient chains because of the stronger Extended.
gradients. e. Click [PROCEED]. Click [CANCEL].
Other conditions can also result in the presence of f. Start the new logfile by entering Yes.
spikes.
g. Click [PROCEED].
• Detune boards
h. Click [HIDE].
• Hybrid box connections
2. To run the testbatch:
• Surface coil connectors
a. Prepare the quad headcoil. Position the 1 liter
• Static electricity due to gradient cable movement bottle in the middle of the coil horizontally.
• Exam room emergency light b. Position the headcoil/bottle in isocenter.
• Exam room smoke detectors

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1092 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Pre-Performance Test, continued g. Record the name of the scan found.
Spike Testbatch, continued h. Click [SEARCH NEW].
c. Logon Gyroscan. i. Type: qpi as the search string. Press <ENTER>.
d. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN j. Record the scan QPI value of the scan.
UTILITIES].
Note The value should be less than 1 (0).
e. Select Enter Service Mode > Batch Interpreter.
k. Repeat the preceding steps for the next scan
f. Select tb_sppower. name and QPI values until all scans have been
3. To analyze the results: checked.

a. Select System > Logging. l. Click [HIDE].

b. Select the logfile to analyze. 4. If one or more of the QPI values is greater than 1,
identify/correct the cause before starting actual
c. Select logcurrent.log;1. performance scans.
d. Select List Selected Entries to Output 5. Return logging to Severe.
Destination.
Note See step 1 of this procedure.
e. Click [SEARCH NEW].
f. Enter scan name as the search string. Press
<ENTER>.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1093 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Pre-Performance Test, continued g. Select Philips Quality Procedure.
Connector Test (Optional) h. Click [PROCEED]. A Flood Field Uniformity
The following procedure details how to check connector analysis is completed. Results display on the
performance for the two surface coil inputs. monitor.

1. Complete the Perform Measurements to select the i. Record the SNR(B) value.
batch files available for the Head-quad coil. j. Select the connector 2 scan.
2. Select scan 1 (CT1:CON_TEST) and connect the k. Select Philips Quality Procedure.
headcoil to connector 1.
l. Click [PROCEED]. A Flood Field Uniformity
3. To perform the scan, click [PROCEED]. analysis is completed. Results display on the
4. Connect the headcoil to connector 2. monitor.

5. To start the scan, click [PROCEED]. m. Record the SNR(B) value.

6. To check the results: n. Use the following formulas to calculate the

deviation ([n] represents the connector#)
a. Select the Sytem Performance Tools icon. compared to the average SNR(B) value.
b. Select IQ parameter Evaluation Tools. Deviation[n] = [(SNR(B)[n] - Average) / Average
c. Select SNR and Flood Field Uniformity Average = SNR(B)[1] +SNR(B)[2] / 2
measurements.
7. Record the measured values in the MRL.
d. Select Examination Connector.
e. Select the scan made using connector 1.
f. Select Slice 3.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1094 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Periodic Image Quality Test (PIQT) Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance
This test includes transversal scans (3) using the Measurements
200 mm head phantom. Technical image quality test scans should be performed
with:
• Scan 1 - 2: Headcoil used
• Perform Measurements using SPT.
• Scan 3: Bodycoil used
• Analysis Principle should be set to IQP.
1. Select Scan Control > SPT Scanning.
Note You may make a selection of the available scans
2. Select PIQT.
in the batch, after selecting the required coil and
3. Follow the directions displayed on the screen to scan orientation. Some scans cannot be exe-
position the phantom. cuted (should not be selected) depending on the
software options installed.
4. To automatically the scans, click [PROCEED].
See the table on the following page to review information
5. To create an MRL, complete the Create an MRL
regarding the available scans.
procedure.
Note The images are analyzed automatically.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1095 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R7.x-R9.x), continued

Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance 1. Logon as Gyrotool.
Measurements, continued 2. Select Modify System Configuration > Options
(SW-Keys).
Coil/
Scan Details
Orientation 3. Select View SW Options > Modify Option State.
Head T n/a Skip the Connector Test. 4. Select the desired batch.
H36 TSE available when option installed. 5. Use the instructions displayed on the screen to
H38 EPI available when RealTime installed. properly position the coil/phantom.
Head S H66 TSE available when option installed. Note Failure to properly position the phantom may
result in an error message and an abort to
H68 EPI available when RealTime installed.
further scans.
Head C H96 TSE available when option installed.
6. To complete the scan(s), click [PROCEED].
H98 EPI available when RealTime installed.
Scout scans are completed to obtain the correct
Body T B36 TSE available when option installed. values for the off center distances and angulations.
B38 EPI available when RealTime installed. Image analysis is done automatically. Results reside
Body S B66 TSE available when option installed.
in data files (SPT_HEADn (n=T, S or C depending on
the orientation).
B68 EPI available when RealTime installed.
Head S B96 TSE available when option installed.
B98 EPI available when RealTime installed.

Note Use the basic software to perform other scans.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1096 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

TSW Test Software (R7.x-R9.x)

Select one of the following topics: Procedure
• Procedure "TSW" is the username used to login to test software
facilities. It provides looping, batch, and item specific
• TSW Menu Structure
testing.
Important! After running TSW, a shutdown-reboot or
Gyrorestart must be completed before
resuming normal scanning. If either of these
are not run, the system will not boot or scan.
Error message: "Scan resources not avail-
able" or "Background processes not running"
will display.
1. Logon as TSW.
2. At the Main menu, select system to test, command to
test, and subsystem to be tested.
3. Refer to the TSW Menu Structure on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1097 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

TSW Test Software (R7.x-R9.x), continued

TSW Menu Structure

System Command Subsystem(s) System Command Subsystem(s)

TBDAS Run TBDAS, Run

Functional continued Functional
Auto BCP: Stretch, ScanData Auto PFEI: Auto, Coilint, Trswitch,
QDD, Patinit, Interlock
DFEC1: Access, Status, Reset,
Wrap, Loopback, Handshake, PICU_PHYS: ECG, PPU, Resp
Interlock, Physiology, PA Blank, Gradient: Controller, Waveform
filter box, Misc, FBB
RFAMP: Link, Control, Logging,
Syncro1: Access, Digiwrap, Display, Warmup, Loopback
Status, RxDDS2, TestDDS,
ADChand, Anawrap, Multichain, TPAT Run
FIR, Magnitude, Error Functional
Auto Selftest
Syncro2: Access, Digiwrap, Valves
Status, RxDDS2, TestDDS, Control_Panel
ADChand, Anawrap, Multichain, Table_Sensors
FIR, Magnitude, Error Hydraulics
Transceiver: Access, Digiwrap, Bore_Light
Status, RxDDS, Anawrap,
Magnitude, ADChand, FIR, Error
Fiber: Shortloop, Shortilock,
Longloop, Longilock
DFEC2: FBINT, RFINT

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1098 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

TSW Test Software (R7.x-R9.x), continued

TSW Menu Structure, continued

System Command Subsystem(s) System Command Subsystem(s)

TPATCOM Run TREC Run Reconstructor

Functional Buzzer: Rear & Front Bore, AM, Functional
Hi-Fi Auto
Button: Mute (PICU), Start, Stop, TIIM Run
Nurse Call, AM-Talk, AM-Reset Functional
LED: PICU (Front & Rear), AM, Auto IIMO: Connect, Check I/O,
AS Configure, CPU, PHC_B0,
FED_B0, Vout_BL
Volume Control: Front & Rear
Bore, AM
Powerdown: PICU (Front/Rear
volumes)
Volume: Front & Rear Bore, AM
Microphone: Front & Rear Bore,
AM

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1099 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

TSW Test Software (R7.x-R9.x), continued

TSW Menu Structure, continued

System Command Subsystem(s) System Command Subsystem(s)

Twrap Run Conf Configure

Functional HW Inspect,
Auto Term Port: Test term from CPU to: Update,
Edit,
Port 0: Patsup Quit Only for TSW purposes
Port 1: PICU2
Port 2: Spare LogH Manipulate log n/a
Port 3: Monitor files (TSW)
Port 4: F2000 • Delete <file>
Port 5: Service Foot Switch
Port 6: Pat Com Audio Switch • Dir <file>
Port 7: Pat Com Audio Module • Type <file>
Recsim n/a Test locked out • Quit
Tmonitor SMPTE n/a Logo Logout Exit TSW
Degauss
Cal. Bright
Level
Color
Settings
Tmoninfo n/a Test locked out

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1100 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x)

Select one of the following topics: Pre-Performance Test
• Pre-Performance Test This test ensures the image quality test indicates no
major image quality problems. The following should be
Artifact Measurement
completed prior to completing the image quality test.
Evaluate Artifact Measurements
• Artifact Measurement
Spike Testbatch
• Spike Testbatch
Connector Test (Optional)
• Connector Test (Optional)
Shimcheck Scans
• Shimcheck Scans
• How to Scan
Artifact Measurement
• Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance • Use the 250 cc bottle for artifact measurement with
Measurements the head coil.
• Viewing Scans • Use the 250 cc bottle for artifact measurement with
• TSW Menu Structure the body coil.
Note If the message, "Cannot determine optimum
RF power" displays when scanning with the
body coil on the 250 cc bottle, use the
1000 cc bottle instead.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1101 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Pre-performance Test, continued
Artifact Measurement, continued
The following table details bottle location in relation to
artifact measurement.

Protocol H01 H02 B01 B02 B03

X-tra Protocols for Explorer/Nova n/a n/a B04 B05 B06
Dual
Coil Type Head Body
Scan Orientation T T C S
Bottle Orientation Axis in Z-direction Axis in Z-direction Axis in X-direction Axis in Y-direction
Coordinates of Position -5, -5, 0 -11, -11, 0 0, -11, -11 -11, 0, -11

1. On the software User Interface (R7.x-R9.x), for the Note Available scans include B0x_EST and
body coil: B0x_IQT. "x" = 1 for Transversal, 2 for
Coronal, and 3 for Sagittal scans. 4 - 6 must
a. Select SPT Icon.
be executed for the Nova Dual and Quasar
b. Select Batch view. Dual configurations. The gradient chain is
used in dual mode for these batches.
c. Open the EST folder.
d. Open QBC.
e. Open Scan Orientation.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1102 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Pre-performance Test, continued 2. On the software User Interface (R7.x-R9.x), for the
head coil:
Artifact Measurement, continued
f. Select B01-IQT. a. Select SPT Icon.

Note B04_IQT scan must be selected for the Nova b. Open the EST folder.
Dual and Quasar Dual configuration. c. Open Head_Quad.
g. Using the information from the table on the Note For 3.0 Tesla, the Head_T/R coil will be
previous page, position the bottle in the body coil. used during the batch.
Click [PROCEED].
d. Select H01_IQT and H02_IQT.
h. Repeat this measurement for the sagittal and
coronal orientation. e. Using the information from the table on the
previous page, position the bottle in the head coil.
Click [PROCEED].
f. Repeat this measurement for the sagittal and
coronal orientation.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1103 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Pre-performance Test, continued 9. Position the cursor in a corner of the ROI and
rescale the ROI so the total pixel area is
Evaluate Artifact Measurements
approximately 49 square mm.
1. Select the patient/bottle containing the artifact
measurements. 10. Measure the mean intensity (S) at the center of the
bottle.
2. Select Patient > View Examination.
11. Measure the mean intensity (G) at the spot where
3. Select the "Bottle" examination.Select the scan to the maximum intensity ghost is visible.
be analyzed and scale the image, so the maximum
ghost is visible. 12. Measure the mean intensity (B) and the standard
deviation sd(B) of a ghost-free part of the image
4. Position the cursor in the image and right-click the background.
mouse button.
Note In a ghost-free part of the background, the
5. Select More and ROI Settings. value B/sd(B) should be between 1.8 and
6. Select the Rectangular Icon and Hide. 2.2.

7. Draw a square ROI. 13. Calculate the intensity of the ghost using the
following formula.
Note The ROI can be moved over the image by
putting the arrow in the middle of the ROI and Ghost-Intensity = [(G-B) / S] * 100%
pressing the left mouse button. 14. Record the measured value in the MRL.
8. Right-click the number above the ROI. Select
Statistics twice.
A window appears displaying the mean value and
the ROI size (in pixels).
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1104 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Pre-performance Test, continued The following test performs a number of heavy scans to
help determine if the number of spikes in the system are
Spike Testbatch
within specification.
Spikes are usually caused by any of the following.
1. Change the System Monitoring mode to Extended.
• Poor mechanical contacts
a. Select Start > MR System Management.
• Electrostatic discharges
b. Select Diagnostics > Logging Application UI.
• Conducting objects vibrating against another
conducting object. a. Select Configuration > Set Severity Levels.

Note Spikes are more common in Power and Master b. Set the severity level for the "system" process to
gradient chains because of the stronger Extended.
gradients. c. Click [PROCEED]. Select Configuration.
Other conditions can also result in the presence of d. Select Create New Current Logfile.
spikes.
e. When prompted the log file will be closed and if a
• Detune boards new log file should be started, select OK.
• Hybrid box connections f. Minimize the Logging Application window.
• Surface coil connectors
• Static electricity due to gradient cable movement
• Exam room emergency light
• Exam room smoke detectors

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1105 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Pre-performance Test, continued g. Select the pb_spxxx.
Spike Testbatch, continued Note xxx represents the available gradients.
2. Run the testbatch: Depending on the gradient configuration,
Stellar systems can use the Omni batch,
a. Login as MRService using Manager or the Pulsar the Power batch, the Nova/
Manager1 as the password. Quasar the Master batch, and the Nova
b. In the MR Boot Configuration Manager, select Dual/Quasar Dual the Explorer batch.
Intera. Click Start. h. Click [PROCEED].
c. Prepare the quad head coil and place the 1 liter 3. Analyze the results:
bottle horizontally in the middle of the coil.
a. On the keyboard, press the Windows key.
Note For the 3.0T system, the T/R head coil
should be used. b. From the left windows bar, select the Logging
Application window.
d. Position the head coil/bottle in the magnet
isocenter using the light-visor and Travel-to-Scan Note Click in the gray area to find the Logging
Plane button. Application window.

e. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [SCAN c. Select Search.

UTILITIES].
f. Select Enter Service Mode. Select Batch
Interpreter.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1106 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Pre-performance Test, continued Connector Test (Optional)
Spike Testbatch, continued The following procedure checks the performance of the
two surface coil connectors (inputs).
d. In the free-text window, type: jdb scan and press
<ENTER>. Note This test does not apply to 3.0T systems.
e. Print a record of the scan names found and their 1. Select the batch files available for the head-quad
times. coil.
f. Select Search. 2. Select Scan 1 (CT1).
g. Type: QPI and press <ENTER>. 3. Connect the head coil to Connector 1.
h. Record the job scan QPI value and review the 4. To perform the scout scans, click [PROCEED].
timestamp.
5. Wait until the scan has finished before continuing.
Note The value should be less than 1.
6. To start the CT1 scan on coil Connector 1, click
i. If one or more of the QPI values is greater than 1, [PROCEED].
identify the cause and resolve the problem before
beginning actual performance scans. 7. Once the scans for connector 1 have finished,
connect the head coil to Connector 2.
4. Return the monitoring mode to the Extended-IF
8. To start the CT1 scan on coil Connector 2, click
(default):
[PROCEED].
a. Select Configuration > Set Severity Levels.
b. Set the severity level for process "System" to
Extended-IF. Click [PROCEED].
c. Minimize the Logging Application window.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1107 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Pre-performance Test, continued j. Use the following formulas to calculate the
deviation of the BG SN Ration of each connector,
Connector Test (Optional), continued
compared with the average BG SN ratio value.
9. When the batch has successfully completed, select
OK. Deviation[n] = (SN Ration [n] - Average) / Average.
Average = (SN Ration [1] + SN Ration [2]) / 2.
10. To check the results of the test(s) on the User
Interface (R7.x-R9.x): Note "n" represents the connector number
used.
a. Select SPT Icon.
k. Record the measured values in the MRL.
b. Select the Image View tab.
Shimcheck Scans
c. For the Examination, select Connector.
Shimcheck scans, using a FFE sequence, should be
d. Using the timestamp as a reference, select the performed before starting performance measurements.
scan made with Connector 1.
White-to-black transitions in the resulting real images
e. Select the modules image of Slice 3, Echo 1. correspond with a homogeneity difference of 1 ppm.
In the Batch Analysis window, the measured FFU Note Shimcheck images have no specifications; they
analysis results display. are retained as a site-specific reference tool.
f. Record the S/N(b) value. 1. Position the body phantom (within 5 mm of the
system isocenter) for transversal scans.
g. Select the scan made using Connector 2.
2. Place the table in Manual mode.
h. Select the modules image of Slice 3, Echo 1.
Note This prevents the system from requesting
i. Record the S/N(b) value and the BG SN ratio. you position the patient before scanning.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1108 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Pre-performance Test, continued 12. Select the Scan List and click the right mouse button
to enable the protocol.
Shimcheck Scans, continued
3. In the MR Boot Configuration Manager, select 13. Change the slice-orientation to Transversal.
Intera. Click Start. 14. Select Start Scan.
Note The rest of this procedure is for R11.x only. Note Ignore any message indicating that patient
4. Select Patient > New Exam. support has been moved.

5. At the Patient Name field, type: shim check. 15. Click [PROCEED].

6. For the other fields, enter any (dummy) values. 16. Change the scan name to Shim Check T.
Press <ENTER>. 17. To start the scan, press <ENTER>.
7. To close the New Exam window, click [PROCEED]. 18. Wait for the scan to complete and the image
8. Click [SCAN CONTROL]. Click [PROCEED]. reconstruction.

9. Select Anatomy > Phantom Studies. Click Note The Viewing menu Select Scan and Select
[PROCEED]. Image slide bars can be used to display the
real image of the second slice.
10. Select Misc. Click [PROCEED].
11. Select Shim_Check. Click [PROCEED].

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1109 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Pre-performance Test, continued 27. Wait for the scan to complete and the image
reconstruction.
Shimcheck Scans, continued
19. Position the phantom (within 5 mm of the system Note The Viewing menu Select Scan and Select
isocenter) for sagittal scans. Image slide bars can be used to display the
real image of the second slice.
20. In the Scan Control window, select Hide.
28. Position the phantom for Coronal scans.
21. Select Scan List.
Note In the Z-direction, position the phantom
22. Select Shim_Check. Click [PROCEED].Select within +5 mm of system isocenter.
Geometry (Second Page).
29. In the Scan Control window, select Hide.
23. Change the slice orientation to Sagittal. Click
[PROCEED]. 30. Select Scan List.

24. Select Start Scan. 31. Select Shim_Check. Click [PROCEED].

Note Ignore any message indicating that patient 32. Select Geometry (Second Page).
support has been moved. 33. Change the slice orientation to Coronal. Click
25. Change the scan name to Shim Check S. [PROCEED].

26. To start the scan, press <ENTER>. 34. Select Start Scan.
Note Ignore any message indicating that patient
support has been moved.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1110 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Pre-performance Test, continued
Shimcheck Scans, continued
35. Change the scan name to Shim Check C.
36. To start the scan, press <ENTER>.
37. Wait for the scan to complete and the image
reconstruction.
Note The Viewing menu Select Scan and Select
Image slide bars can be used to display the
real image of the second slice.
38. Create a hardcopy of the relevant images.
Note As an alternative, put the examination on MO
disk for future reference.
The black-to-white transition indicates a 1 ppm difference
in the magnetic field.
The body phantom does introduce most of the non-
uniformity. For example, in the transversal direction the
body phantom does introduce a non-uniformity of 6 ppm,
where, after shimming, the typical non-uniformity of the
magnet across this volume is less than 1 ppm. So, the
images can only be used for future reference.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1111 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

How to Scan 11. Select Anatomy (if not displayed, click [SCAN
CONTROL].)
1. Login as MRService using Manager or Manager1
as the password. 12. Select Phantom Studies.
2. For R11.x (only), in the upper left of screen, select 13. Select HEADT.
System > Scan Definition Context > Scan List.
14. Click [SELECT].
3. Place the phantom in the Head Coil.
15. Select Start Scan. The scan should now start.
4. Press [ALIGNMENT LIGHTS] and move the table
16. Click [PROCEED].
thumble switch to move the table into position, to
center on Head Coil notch in alignment light. 17. Click the Scan Icon (patient with slices).
5. Press the [PATIENT TRAVEL TO SCAN] button. The 18. Select Anatomy (if not displayed, click [SCAN
LED will light and the alignment light will turn off. CONTROL].)
6. Use the thumble switch to drive the table to 19. Select Phantom Studies.
isocenter. Release after the table comes to a
20. Select HEADT.
complete stop.
21. Click [SELECT].
7. At the console, select Patient > New Exam.
22. Select Start Scan. The scan should now start.
8. Enter an exam name, exam no., date-of-birth, and
weight (70 Kg).
9. Click [PROCEED].
10. Click the Scan Icon (patient with slices).

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1112 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance 4. For head or body coil scans:
Measurements a. Select Patient > New Exam.
Any performance scans run with head or body coils can
b. Enter a Patient Name, ID, and Date of Birth into
be analyzed for IQ on R10-11 systems.
the appropriate fields.
To run scans:
Note Typically, enter a patient name reflecting
1. Login as MRService using Manager or Manager1 the coil being used.
as the password. (body trans, flex m, etc.)
2. For R11.x (only), in the upper left of screen, select c. Select Phantom/Other.
System > Scan Definition Context > Scan List.
d. Enter a Patient Weight of 90.
3. For a PIQT scan:
e. Click [PROCEED].
a. In lower left corner of the window, select Scan
Control > PIQT Scanning. f. Continue to step 5.

b. Follow the prompts to properly orient/position the 5. From the Scan Control popup window, select
Anatomy > #13 Phantom Studies. A list appears
phantom.
displaying performance scans available for various
c. Click [PROCEED]. The PIQT scan begins to run. coils and orientations (e.g., HeadT).
d. Continue to step 11.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1113 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance 8. Select Scout scan from the list. In the upper right
Measurements, continued corner of the window, click Select. Click Start Scan
6. For head studies, place the PIQT phantom in the in the lower left. Click [PROCEED] to start the scan.
phantom holder and position in the desired plane. 9. To view the scan, click on the [+] to the right of the
Scan tab (below the HC Case button).
- or -
10. To select scans to run:
For body studies:
a. Select Hide in the lower right.
a. Place the body phantom in the phantom holder.
b. Run the table, so the front edge is under the b. Select Scan List. The Scout scan previously run
appears.
alignment light. Use the Travel-to-Scan button to
put the table edge in isocenter. c. Select the Scout scan. Select Delete. A list of
available scans appears.
c. Press the table Manual button (on the Control
Panel) to put the table in Manual mode. d. Select the desired scan. Select Plan Scan.
d. Back the table out 210 mm and place the e. Position the center slice through the center of the
phantom/holder in from the back of the magnet. phantom. Click [PROCEED].
Slide it into the center of the bore until the holder
just comes in contact with the table top. f. Click on Start Scan in the lower left. Click
[PROCEED].
7. From the list of coils and orientations, select the
11. When scans are complete, click on the face graphic
proper coil/orientation.
at the top of the screen (just below the menu bar) to
put the system in viewing context.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1114 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance
Measurements, continued
Philips defines the SNR in two ways:
900 pixels

• SNR C = R/sd C

• SNR B = 0.655*R/sd(B) 0.655 * C

SNR = sd(B)
R = Mean pixel value of ROI (approximately 900 pixels)
at phantom center for head and body coils. 1
0.655 C
sd(B) = Standard deviation of pixel values of ROI 2

(approximately 400 pixels) in a ghost-free part of the 3

background of the image. B

0.655 = Correction factor for backfolding of noise in 400 pixels

background. Note The Philips automatic procedure uses the quad-

rant with the lowest noise for sd(B).
12. Right-click on the displayed image and select ROI
Rectangle. Click on the image center. An ROI box
appears. Adjust the size for 900 pixels.
13. Right-click on the number directly above the ROI box
and select Statistics.The pixel count, mean, and
standard deviation values appear.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1115 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance All values for SNR ( C ) are typical values for reference.
Measurements, continued Philips does not list specs for these.
14. Create another ROI box and click in the background Values preceded by a * are typical values also.
portion of the image. Adjust the size for 400 pixels
(approximately). Head Coil Transverse

15. Right-click on the number directly above the ROI box Scan Echo SNR(B) SNR(C)
and select Statistics.The pixel count, mean, and
standard deviation values appear. QA1 1 92 103
2 68 72
16. Move the background ROI to all four quadrants and
use the lowest standard deviation value. QA2 1 64 66

Important! Please note, your results must be greater QA3 1 63 69

than the numbers listed in the following 2 55 53
tables to pass SNR.
3 44 47
H10 1 99 110
2 70 78
H11 1 92 102
2 68 73
H12 1 88 95
2 70 73

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1116 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance Head Coil Sagittal
Measurements, continued
Scan Echo SNR(B) SNR(C)
Head Coil Transverse, continued
H40 1 *121 84
Scan Echo SNR(B) SNR(C)
2 *84 70
H13 1 61 65 H41 1 *118 73
H15 1 65 67 2 *86 64
H20 1 91 96 H42 1 *107 78
2 81 78 2 *85 67
3 67 64 H45 1 *80 78
4 57 56 H50 1 *115 96
H25 1 69 72 2 *94 84
H35 1 63 71 3 *77 69
H36 1 71 77 4 *67 62
H37 1 *71 65 H55 1 *90 70
H38 1 73 69 H66 1 *84 75
H67 1 *87 42
H68 1 *81 64

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1117 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance Scan Echo SNR(B) SNR(C)
Measurements, continued
H98 1 *83 69
Head Coil Coronal
Body Coil Transverse
Scan Echo SNR(B) SNR(C)

H70 1 *125 88 Scan Echo SNR(B) SNR(C)

2 *85 70 B10 1 73 72
H71 1 *120 71 2 54 57
2 *87 59 B12 1 48 49
H72 1 *109 74 B15 1 55 56
2 *88 64 B20 1 74 81
H75 1 *84 75 2 63 67
H80 1 *115 85 3 53 53
2 *96 74 4 46 48
3 *81 66 B25 1 49 51
4 *67 53 B36 1 82 86
H85 1 *90 67 B37 1 *65 61
H96 1 *84 68 B38 1 *65 62
H97 1 *87 46
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1118 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Head/Body & Surface Coil Performance Body Coil Coronal
Measurements, continued
Scan Echo SNR(B) SNR(C)
Body Coil Sagittal
B70 1 *83 72
Scan Echo SNR(B) SNR(C)
2 *57 50
B40 1 *88 87 B75 1 *76 65
2 *60 56 B80 1 *85 71
B45 1 *80 67 2 *70 61
B50 1 *92 91 3 *59 45
2 *74 68 4 *50 45
3 *62 60 B85 1 *66 61
4 *53 52 B96 1 *97 79
B55 1 *69 66 B97 1 *76 66
B66 1 *107 99 B98 1 *80 72
B67 1 *87 67
B68 1 *89 83

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1119 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

Viewing Scans
Once scans are completed, they must be added to the TSW Menu Structure
View Application window.
TBDAS
1. To add the scan to the Scan window, click the [+]
button in the Scan Control area. Command Option Subsystem(s)
2. To view more pages of images, select and drag the TBDAS Fun Automatic Functional Tests
Image Scroll Bar. Diag Interactive (n/a
Tools BCP Functional Test Menu
3. To view other scan series, select and drag the Scan DFEC1 Functional Test Menu
Scroll Bar. SYNCO Receiver 1 Functional Test
SYNCO Receiver 2 Functional Test
4. Select Viewing package. Transceiver Functional Test Menu
Fiber Functional Test Menu
5. To add scan to Viewing window, click the [+] button in PFEI Functional Test Menu
the Scan Control area. PICU Physiology Functional Test
Gradient Functional Test Menu
Note For additional information, see the RF Amplifier Functional Test Menu
Support Central IQ website for scanning Inspect Tests Run Tests Run - Shows all tests run.
information. Error Error - Shows any error results.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1120 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

Image Quality (All Intera R10.x-R11.x), continued

TSW Menu Structure, continued
TPAT

Command Option Subsystem(s)

Run Fun Functional Table Tests

Diag n/a
Tools n/a
Adj Table Length Adjustment
Inspect Tests Run Tests Run - Shows all tests run.
Error Error - Shows any error results.

TPAT COM (Patient Communication)

Command Option Subsystem(s)

Run Fun Functional Intercom Tests

Diag n/a
Tools n/a
Adj n/a
Inspect n/a n/a

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1121 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table

Table Communication 3. After running TSW tests, perform a GYRORESTART.
Three boards control table functions. These are located This downloads the running instructions to the DAS,
purging files that TSW put into DAS during the tests.
in the left half of the TFEI box, located above the right
side of the magnet. The boards are: 4. Perform a GYROSCAN to get back to doing
examinations.
• PS Power board
Important! Note the initial position of the dip-switches so
• PS Hydro board
you can set them back to their normal
• PS Control board operating position when you finish running
table communication tests.
Tests
Tests are performed while in TSW.
To perform these tests:
1. Set the PS Control board S1 dipswitch as
appropriate.
2. Press the [RESET] button. The results of these tests
are displayed on a bank of red LEDs near the dip-
switch panel.
A yellow LED on the PS Control board serves as a
run light. It remains illuminated during testing, and
while operating the table move thumble switch.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1122 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Table Communication, continued S1 Dip Switch Description
Dip Switch Settings
Servo Valve Test-Up/Down/In/Out:
S1 Dip Switch Description If red LED(s) illuminate, a servo valve
problem exists. If no red LED(s)
Light Sights / Light Bore Test: illuminate, the servo valves are
If red LED(s) illuminate, an electronics functioning properly.
problem exists with the lights in the Keyboard Switch Test-TRG:
bore. If no red LED(s) illuminate but a
bore light is out, there may be a bad Test each switch to illuminate the
bulb. corresponding red LED.

Table Control Panel Indicator Light

Test: Sensor Switch Test-TH:
If red LED(s) illuminate, a problem Manually move the table to illuminate
exists with the electronics to the table the corresponding red LED. Lift the
control panel switches. If no red table up and down; slide it in and out.
LED(s) illuminate, there may be a bad
bulb.
Hydraulic On/Off Test:
If red LED(s) illuminate, a
communication problem to the table
hydraulics exists. If no red LED(s)
illuminate, communication to the table
hydraulics is functioning properly.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1123 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

NT (Hydraulic) Patient Table, continued

Table Communication, continued Dip Switch Description
Dip Switch Settings, continued
Complete Hydraulic System Test:
Dip Switch Description Press and hold the thumble switch.
The table should move down, up, in,
Sensor Switch Test-TV and Trolley: and out.
There are two only LEDs used for this
test. Press the TABLE UP and TABLE PS Control Board Controller Test:
DOWN limit switches under the table. All eight LEDs illuminate. If they all go
The two LEDs should illuminate. back off, the PS Control Board
Thump Potentiometer Test: controller is functioning properly.
Move the table movement slider on
the control panel. Four LEDs PS Hydro Board Controller and PS
correspond to four table positions. Power Board:
LEDs 3 and 4 should illuminate. Controller Test
Adjustment of TV Positioning All eight LEDs illuminate. If they all go
Potentiometer: back off, the PS Hydro and PS Power
Move the table down as far as controllers are functioning properly.
possible. Red LEDs 3 and 4 should
illuminate.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1124 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Troubleshooting 5197921-200

MT (Electrical) Patient Table

Troubleshooting information for the MT patient table can
be viewed by selecting the Software and/or the
Functional Checks icon at the bottom of the page.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1125 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 How to Use this EPST 5197921-200

HOW TO USE THIS EPST

Select a topic:
Acrobat Reader 4.0 Controls
Linking and Navigation
Adding Your Personal Notes
Printing
About This EPST

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1126 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 How to Use this EPST 5197921-200

Acrobat Reader 4.0 Controls

Here are some shortcut keystrokes for
Acrobat Reader 4.0:
[HOME] takes you to the first page of the EPST.
[PAGE UP], [PAGE DOWN]. and [END] work as titled.
[CTRL][←] takes you back to the previous display.
[CTRL][N] allows you to select a specific page number.
[F5] toggles the Bookmark display. Click on a Bookmark
to go there.
[F6] toggles the Thumbnail display.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1127 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 How to Use this EPST 5197921-200

Linking and Navigation

On the bottom of every page, you will find a linking tool For additional navigation options, you may use the
bar. Click on the section’s icon to take you to that section. Acrobat Reader bookmark feature. To display
In addition to the linking toolbar on each page, you will bookmarks:
find other links throughout the EPST.
1. Press [F5] or click on the PageWithLeftMargin button
on the Acrobat tool bar to open the Bookmark
Convention Link
window.
Blue text Takes you to supplemental
2. Click on the section or page listed in the Bookmark
information about that topic.
window that you wish to view.
See logic diagram XX Takes you to the specified logic/
block diagram. 3. Press [F5] or click on the PageWithLeftMargin button
Links to another area on the same
to close the Bookmark window.
block/logic diagram.
A
Note Not all of these have an
active link; they are linked only when
you need information you cannot
see on a particular part of a diagram.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1128 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 How to Use this EPST 5197921-200

Adding Your Personal Notes

To add your personal notes:
1. Click on the Notes icon.
A Word document opens.
2. Use the [TAB] key to navigate through the tables.
3. Type in the corresponding EPST page number and
your notes.
4. When you finish making your notes, save the file and
close Word.
5. To access your Notes, simply return to the EPST
and click on the Notes icon at the bottom of any
page.
Important! Personal Notes cannot work if you move the
file; the path is hard-coded into the EPST.
Personal Notes may not work when the com-
puter is networked.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1129 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 How to Use this EPST 5197921-200

Printing
To print, perform the following actions.
1. On the Acrobat toolbar, select File, Print.
2. Select whether to print all pages, only the current
page, or a range of pages. (Default is Print All
Pages.)
3. Enable the "Shrink to Fit" option when printing the
11" x 17" block diagrams on 8.5" x 11" paper.
4. Click on OK to begin printing.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1130 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 How to Use this EPST 5197921-200

About This EPST

• The EPST is not intended to replace OEM system
documentation. It also does not cover every problem
or situation you may encounter while working on the
system. There are probably many situations in which
it may be helpful to refer to OEM system
documentation.
• The link icons located at the bottom of every page
usually take you to the first page of that section. When
a link icon takes you to a specific reference, the link
icon on the destination page will generally take you to
the first page of that section.
• The setup program will create a Word document for
your notes. The file is located at:
c:\mvdi\epst_notes\fc7003\persnote
– Personal Notes cannot work if you move the file;
the path is hard-coded into the EPST.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1131 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Environmental Health & Safety 5197921-200

ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH & SAFETY

Important! The safety instructions here are included as a Select a topic:
reminder to follow all proper Health & Safety
Bloodborne Pathogens
Guidelines. This document is intended as a
Awareness
supplement to GEMS EHS Field Service Man- Incident Response and Cleanup
ual and not intended to be used in lieu of the
Work Related Injuries/Illnesses
GEMS EHS Field Service Manual. Please Very Minor Injury/illness
thoroughly read and understand the GEMS Non-Life Threatening Injury/illness
EHS Field Service Manual it should be used Emergency - Serious or Life Threatening Injury or Illness
as the primary source for safety information. (or Fatality)
Near-Miss Reporting
Magnet Safety
References
Definitions
Safety Practices
Radiation Safety
X-Ray and CT
Nuclear
Badging
Shielding
Lock-Out Tag-Out
Awareness
Lockout/Tagout

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1132 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Environmental Health & Safety 5197921-200

Bloodborne Pathogens
Awareness Incident Response and Cleanup
• There is a legitimate safety concern for personnel that • Trained personnel will utilize proper personal
have an opportunity to encounter blood or other body protective equipment, proper decontamination and
fluids that may contain transmittable diseases. cleanup methods and waste disposal methods
pursuant to their training when encountering blood or
• Untrained personnel are discouraged from exposing
body fluids.
themselves to body fluids (other than their own).
• Personal protective equipment and proper cleanup
• Any personnel that believe that they have been
materials must always be used.
exposed to bloodborne pathogens should contact the
EHS Specialist. • All incidents must be reported promptly to an EHS
Specialist. The exposure incident report will be
• Potentially infectious waste (bandages, sharps,
forwarded to the Medical Department for follow-up
contaminated material) is to be disposed of per
actions.
Procedure 420.005 EHS.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1133 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Environmental Health & Safety 5197921-200

Work Related Injuries/Illnesses

Very Minor Injury/illness Emergency - Serious or Life Threatening
• Injured person will self-administer treatment using a Injury or Illness (or Fatality)
First Aid Kit. • Immediately obtain assistance.
Non-Life Threatening Injury/illness • The first person to respond to the injury scene will
• If treatment assistance is needed, obtain assistance render assistance by:
immediately and then report the incident to your – calling for help.
manager.
– providing medical assistance if medically trained.
• Form F4559X, entitled “Employee’s Notice of
– guiding responders to the scene.
Occupational Injury/Illness Claim,” will be filled out by
the employee, and forwarded to the EHS Specialist. – advising victim’s manager (as appropriate).
• Follow-up • Form F4559X, entitled “Employee’s Notice of
– Whenever treatment is required, the EHS Occupational Injury/Illness Claim,” must be completed
by the GE employee as soon as practical and
Specialist must contact the GEMS Nurse as soon
forwarded to the EHS Team Leader.
as possible after the occurrence in order that the
GEMS Nurse determine the following: • Report incident as soon as possible to the EHS
• Injury diagnosis Specialist so an accident investigation can be
initiated.
• OSHA recordable status
Near-Miss Reporting
• Employees are encouraged to report via e-mail to
EHS Specialist any situations where an injury “almost”
happened. If appropriate, an investigation targeted to
prevent re-occurrence will be initiated.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1134 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Environmental Health & Safety 5197921-200

Magnet Safety
References The absorption or emission of electromagnetic energy
• GEMS EHS Field Service Manual, Chapter 5A, by nuclei in a static magnetic field, after excitation by
a suitable RF magnetic field. The peak resonance
Procedure #23
frequency is proportional to the magnetic field, and is
Definitions given by the Larmor equation. Only nuclei with a non-
• CRYOGEN: zero spin exhibit NMR.
A substance for producing low temperatures. In • MR IMAGING:
general, a cryogen is a material in liquid form that Creation of images of objects such as the body by use
normally is a gas. In MR, the cryogens are liquid of the nuclear magnetic resonance phenomenon. The
helium and sometimes liquid nitrogen. Presently, the immediate practical application involves imaging the
liquid helium is required to produce the very low distribution of hydrogen nuclei (protons) in the body.
temperatures necessary for the superconducting The image brightness in a given region is usually
magnet. dependent jointly on the spin density and the
• GAUSS (G)/TESLA (T): relaxation times, with their relative importance
A unit of magnetic field strength. The internationally determined by the particular imaging technique
accepted unit is the tesla: 1 tesla = 10,000 gauss. As employed. Image brightness is also affected by
a comparison, the earth’s magnetic field is motion such as blood flow.
approximately 0.5 gauss. MR MAX has a field • QUENCH (RUNDOWN):
strength of 5000 gauss or 0.5 tesla and Signa has a Condition where a superconductive magnet boils off
field strength of 15,000 gauss or 1.5 tesla. The earth’s helium. In this condition, the static magnetic field is
magnetic field is approximately one half gauss to one removed. A very loud but brief sound results when the
gauss, depending on location. cryogens boil off. Once quenched, it can take a
• MAGNETIC RESONANCE (MR) or NUCLEAR significant amount of time and material to return to the
MAGNETIC RESONANCE (NMR): superconducting state.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1135 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Environmental Health & Safety 5197921-200

Magnet Safety, continued

Definitions, continued objects are not allowed in areas exceeding the 5
gauss level.
• QUENCHING:
Loss of superconductivity of the current carrying coil • Exposure to magnetic fields will be kept at the level
that may occur unexpectedly in a superconducting consistent with the tasks at hand.
magnet. As the magnet becomes resistive, heat will
be released that can result in rapid evaporation of • Handling of cryogens includes wearing of
nonabsorbent and insulated clothing along with safety
liquid helium in the cryostat. This may present a
glasses or face shield. Storage of the containers
hazard if not properly planned for.
includes the use of nozzle covers and chains.
• RADIO FREQUENCY (RF):
• Phantoms must be handled with care using cradles
Frequency (intermediate between audio and infrared
frequencies) used in magnetic resonance systems to provided. Any leakage must be reported to instructor
and EHS Team Leader and treated as a “hazardous
excite nuclei to resonance. The RF used in MR
material” spill.
studies is commonly in the megahertz (MHz) range.
The principal effect of RF magnetic fields on the body • Whenever a quench occurs, the magnet room and
is power deposition in the form of heating, mainly at control area will be evacuated until the atmosphere is
the surface; this is a principal area of concern for established safe.
safety limits.
• The 5 gauss level of the magnetic field produced by
Safety Practices the magnets will be outlined and readily visible.
• Magnetic field safety includes removal of all metal • Warning signs indicating the present of magnetic
objects such as watches, keys, pens, hearing aids, fields in excess of 5 gauss will be prominently
purses, magnetic credit cards, brief cases, IUD’s, displayed.
ferrous jewelry, etc. Persons with steel pins, steel
plates, artificial limbs, surgical clips, or other metal • Lockout/Tagout procedures shall be applied as
required.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1136 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Environmental Health & Safety 5197921-200

Radiation Safety
X-Ray and CT that x-ray will be generated anyway and therefore
• • The generation of x-rays shall be: attenuate the potential beam by closing the collimator
blades when provided on the equipment. If such
– At a technique that will minimize the amount of attenuating devices are not present, lead aperture
Kvp, Ma, time, and duration to complete the task at caps made of 1/8” lead sheets will be used to absorb
hand. the primary beams.
– Providing the greatest person-to-tube distance. • During the process of producing x-rays there must be
somebody present at all times watching the system
– Utilizing the most radiation protection possible
and to ensure that nobody enters into lab area where
consistent with the task at hand.
the x-rays are being produced.
• Ensure that x-rays are directed in the safest way
possible. Nuclear
• Taking x-rays of any part of a person is ABSOLUTELY
Source Use Rules
FORBIDDEN. Please refer to the GEMS EHS Field Service Manual for
information on source use.
• When making x-rays, an indication (can be audio or
visual, for example, a sign or light) must be present to • Wear your film or TLD badges.
warn visitors that x-rays are being made. • Lockout/Tagout procedures shall be applied as
• Portable x-ray equipment, such as the AMX, will be required.
operated only in areas designated. Adequate
shielding must be worn.
• During adjustment procedures, it may be necessary to
energize an x-ray tube with no intention of actually
making the x-ray. In such cases, you must assume
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1137 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Environmental Health & Safety 5197921-200

Radiation Safety, continued

Badging • During adjustment procedures, it may be necessary to
energize an x-ray tube with no intention of actually
• Always wear your radiation badges at the neck level.
making the x-ray. In such cases, you must assume
• Any person that is pregnant and is working with x-ray that x-ray will be generated anyway and therefore
or radiation sources must contact the facility Radiation attenuate the potential beam by closing the collimator
Safety Officer (RSO) about a fetal monitoring device blades when provided on the equipment. If such
or other options before they work. attenuating devices are not present, lead aperture
caps made of 1/8” lead sheets will be used to absorb
Shielding the primary beams.
• Protective aprons and gloves are provided in x-ray
rooms and will be worn during fluoroscopic or image
intensified observations when the operator is not
protected by screens or other shielding.
• Some equipment has protective devices built in, such
as the longitudinal shield in the RFX table. This
additional protection, and any other such protection
devices provided on this equipment, will be utilized
when possible.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1138 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Environmental Health & Safety 5197921-200

Lock-Out Tag-Out
Awareness maintained or serviced under LOTO, or an employee
• There is a legitimate safety concern for personnel who working in an area where the maintenance or servicing is
being performed. This could include machine operators,
service, repair, set-up and train medical equipment.
janitors or any other worker whose job requires him/her
• Defeating a locked and tagged piece of equipment is to be in the area. Affected Employees are NOT
prohibited. authorized to perform LOTO.
• Personnel authorized to apply or remove locks and Lockout/Tagout
tags receive additional training.
All energy sources for equipment on which work will be
• Questions about the locked-out devices should be performed and on which injury could occur due to
directed to the person named on the “tag” or to the unexpected energization, startup, or release of stored
EHS Team Leader. energy shall be deactivated. This includes opening
electrical circuits, closing and bleeding pressurized
• This procedure will be available to all personnel to
hydraulics and pneumatics, blocking springs or
enable compliance with OSHA requirement to train
counterweights, discharging capacitors, etc.
“affected employees” (those who work in an area
where may occur). • LOTO indicates that the energy source is Locked Out
and that an Authorized Employee is actively working
Authorized Personnel on the machine, equipment, process, or circuit. LOTO
"Authorized Personnel” is an employee who has the is limited to one shift or the amount of time the person
appropriate technical background, has completed is actively working on the system. If the job is not
Lockout/Tagout Authorized Training, has successfully finished and the system is not ready to be put back in
demonstrated that they know how to apply LOTO and use, the authorized person shall apply the Transition
who will perform the work on the system. Only LOTO or the Out of Service LOTO, whichever is
“Authorized Personnel” are allowed to apply appropriate for the situation.
unsupervised LOTO task. “Affected Personnel” is an
employee who operates equipment that is being Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1139 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Environmental Health & Safety 5197921-200

Lock-Out Tag-Out, continued

Lockout/Tagout, continued Communicate system re-energization. 7) Re-energize
and test equipment.
• Procedures must be followed: 1) Prepare for
shutdown. 2) Shutdown machine or equipment. 3) • The deactivated equipment shall be locked during the
Isolate machine or equipment. 4) Apply lockout and service work to prevent unexpected activation.
tagout device. 5) Isolate stored energy. 6) Verify
Isolation. – If LOTO cannot be applied at the level of work to
protect the authorized user, the authorized user
• Temporary removal of LOTO and re-energization of a must apply LOTO at the level that ensure their
machine or equipment may be performed when power safety, even if this means LOTO of the entire
is needed for testing or positioning. When testing you system at the wall breaker.
must: 1) Ensure the machine is operationally intact. 2)
Notify all Authorized or Affected Employees who are – Alternative methods or non-standard application of
LOTO must go through a risk assessment
working on the equipment or are in the area that the
conducted with the help of the site EHS leader
equipment is going to be tested and to move to a safe
area. 3) Verify controls are in the "off" position. 4) before it will be allowed for use.
Remove LOTO Locks and tags. 5) Energize and – Tags "Danger Do Not Operate" are used with every
proceed with testing. 6) After testing, de-energize, Personal LOTO Lock to indicate that the energy
verify system isolation, and re-apply LOTO Locks and source is Locked Out and that an Authorized
Tags. Employee is actively working on the machine,
equipment, process, or circuit. The Red “DANGER”
• When removing Lockout/Tagout the following steps
tag shown in Attachment A shall be used.
must be followed: 1) Communicate to all Affected
Employees. 2) Verify the safety of the area. 3) Ensure – Service work shall not proceed until it is verified
the safety devices and guards are in place. 4) Return that the equipment is truly deactivated.
system functions. 5) Remove your lock and tag. 6)

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1140 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Environmental Health & Safety 5197921-200

Lock-Out Tag-Out, continued

Lockout/Tagout, continued • Method One: An Authorized Employee of the
departing shift removes his/her LOTO Lock and Tag in
• When multiple personnel are servicing (or training) on
the same equipment, each person shall apply their the presence of the on coming Authorized Employee
who applies his/her LOTO Lock and Tag at the same
individual lock and tag. Multiple lock devices (hasps)
time to the same energy isolating device.
are provided with the locks and tags. Any other
lockout/tagout method is not approved. • Method Two: The departing Authorized Employee of
• All LOTO applicable equipment shall have a written the departing shift removes his/her LOTO Lock and
Tag from the machine or equipment and applies a
instruction (in English) identifying the energy sources
Transition Lock and Tag. The oncoming Authorized
to be secured and a step-by-step procedure to
Employee when he/she is preparing to work on the
accomplish a zero energy state, that includes “Try-
out” or Verification as one of the steps. equipment must re-verify zero energy, then remove
the transition LOTO Lock and Tag and apply his/her
• “Out of Service” equipment: The yellow “out of personal Lock and Tag.
service” tag and the silver Master GE XR out of
service lock is not to be used for ECPL situations, but
only for indicating unattended, idle equipment where
no persons is exposed to potential energy release.
• Transition of LOTO: Specific procedures must be
used during shift or personnel changes to ensure the
continuity of LOTO for equipment that is in an unsafe
to operate situation. This must include the orderly
transfer of LOTO Devices between off-going and on-
coming employees. There are two methods that can
be used. These two methods should never be mixed
or combined! Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1141 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Environmental Health & Safety 5197921-200

Lock-Out Tag-Out, continued

Lockout/Tagout, continued Exception
• Leaving without removing a lock: Should an • An exception is cord and plug connected electronic
Authorized Employee leave without removing his/her equipment where the cord and plug is the only means
lock. A team of at least four people, one that knows of energization AND the plug is disconnected from the
the locked out system, one that knows the receptacle AND controlled exclusively by the person
whereabouts of the person, the facility maintenance performing the service/repair work.
manager or representative, and the EHS leader or • When there is any doubt regarding “exclusive control”
representative, must be formed to investigate the of the cord and plug, a “power cord plug cover” should
situation. The team shall make every effort to contact be utilized and lock and tag applied.
the person by using email, phone/voice mail, pager,
and contacting the persons manager to have him/her Audits
return to remove their lock. Only after this has been • Periodic audits of LOTO procedures will be conducted
performed, assuring the safety of every worker by an LOTO Authorized person.
involved, can a team member remove the lock. The
team must also ensure that the employee is notified • Audit findings will be entered into the Power Audit
by use of email, phone/voice mail, pager, and Tracking system, an action plan will be developed and
notifying the persons manager before he/she resumes tracked to completion using this same method.
work at the facility that their LOTO Lock has been
removed.
• A GE employee will not apply LOTO for a contractor.
The contractor must apply their own LOTO and
perform all of the LOTO steps.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1142 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Environmental Health & Safety 5197921-200

Lock-Out Tag-Out, continued

Lockout/Tagout, continued • Out of Service locks shall have master keys available
to all employees and are the silver “Master” style of
LOTO Materials
lock that has GE XR imprinted on the bottom side of
• Each lockout device and tagout device shall be the lock by the key slot.
uniquely identified; shall be the only device(s) used for
controlling hazardous energy; shall not be used for • Red tags will have the “Danger” header and a field for
other purposes; and shall meet the following the date LOTO was applied and the name of person it
requirements. belongs to. The red tag will indicate that the
equipment is locked out and service, maintenance, or
• Lockout and tagout devices, including their means of training is actively being performed. Using a comment
attachment, shall be capable of withstanding the area on the tag can provide additional information
environment to which they are exposed for the about lockout, servicing and/or maintenance
maximum period of time that exposure is expected. conditions. A Red tag can not be used on it’s own (no
• Personalized LOTO locks shall have only a single key Tagout only processes are allowed), it must be used
for which there is no master key, be made of brass in conjunction with the LOTO Lock.
and the color of brass, and have a red colored
banding. The only tag that can be used with this lock
is the Red LOTO danger tag. NOTE: This type of lock
shall be used for LOTO only, no other lock or uses of
this type of lock is approved.
• Transition locks shall have master keys available to
LOTO authorized employees, be made of and the
color of brass, and have a yellow colored banding.
NOTE: This type of lock shall be used for Transition
only, no other lock or uses of this type of lock is
approved. Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1143 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Environmental Health & Safety 5197921-200

Lock-Out Tag-Out, continued

Lockout/Tagout, continued • The following material shall be used for ECPL
program:
LOTO Materials, continued
• Transition tags must be yellow in color and are used Material Part Number
to indicate that a machine, equipment, process or
circuit is out of service or inoperable, but no one is o Master Lock Padlock 46-194427P320
actively working on the system. The tag must state o LOTOTags 46-194427P322
“LOTO Transition” on the tag. Transition Tags are not
o Multiple Locking Devices 46-194427P313
to be used in place of Red Tags. No activity to the
machine, equipment, process or circuit may occur o Power Cord Plug Cover 46-194427P321
when a Transition Tag is placed. Transition Tags are o Transition Tags GEMS Buy T&A Industrial
to be used only when energy control is needed for Distribution Brookfield 101
servicing or maintenance. Transition Tags are not to Transition Locks 2387081
be used as general "out of service" tags and may only
be applied by Authorized Employees Transition Yellow Wrap Integra Advertising 262-544-
8800
• Out of Service tags must be yellow in color and are
LOTO lock Red Wrap Integra Advertising 262-544-
used to indicate that a machine, equipment, process 8800
or circuit is out of service or inoperable, but no one is
actively working on the system. The tag must state Out of Service Tags Electromark
(www.electromark.com)
“Out of Service” on the tag. Out of Service tags are Product # T159-V
not to be used in place of Red Tags or Transition tags.
No activity to the machine, equipment, process or Out of Service Locks Tools & Abrasives Master #
2168
circuit may occur when an Out of Service tag is
placed. Out of Service tags are not to be used as
"Transition" tags.
Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1144 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Environmental Health & Safety 5197921-200

Lock-Out Tag-Out, continued

Lockout/Tagout, continued • Retraining will be required when: There is a change in
job assignment that requires new LOTO knowledge,
LOTO Training
there is a change in energy control procedures,
• Affected Employees all will receive initial training by inspections indicate deviations in procedures, or the
completing the following training and yearly refresher employer believes employee needs retraining.
training by completing the EHS-501 training.
• Training records will be maintained and periodically
– RadSafe – Radiation Safety (via CDROM) reviewed to identify employees requiring refresher
– ElecSafe – Electrical Safety (via CDROM) training by using the training maintenance system that
GEMS has in place at that time.
– LOTOauth – Lock Out Tag Out Authorized ~OR~
ECPL – Electrical Control Power and Lockout (via
CDROM)
• Authorized Employees will receive training and
periodic re-training (yearly) at least equivalent to that
afforded by GEMS Field Service EHS Manual &
Training CD, which is modeled after the GE Corporate
Lockout/Tagout Authorized training program. This
training will require an annual demonstration to a fully
qualified authorized GE employee to show they know
how to properly apply LOTO. This training must be
completed by any newly appointed Instructor before
teaching a class where LOTO is required.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1145 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Environmental Health & Safety 5197921-200

Lock-Out Tag-Out, continued

Lockout/Tagout, continued
RED DANGER LOTO Tag
The RED Danger Tag “DO NOT OPERATE” tag is used
when ECPL procedures are in effect, i.e., someone is
actually working on a system and who is at risk by
inadvertent energy releases.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1146 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Environmental Health & Safety 5197921-200

Lock-Out Tag-Out, continued

Lockout/Tagout, continued
Yellow Transition LOTO Tag
The Yellow “Transition” tags are used to indicate that a
machine, equipment, process or circuit is out of service
or inoperable, but no one is actively working on the
system.

Continued on next page

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1147 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Environmental Health & Safety 5197921-200

Lock-Out Tag-Out, continued

Lockout/Tagout, continued
Yellow Out of Service LOTO Tag
The YELLOW “OUT OF SERVICE” tag is used when a
piece of equipment is not intended for use, but is not
personally locked out. The common GEXR padlock is
often used for this purpose.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1148 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Reference Materials 5197921-200

REFERENCE MATERIALS
Phantom and Coil Placement
Note Opens a MS Word document.
For additional support, please visit the Multi-Vendor
OEM Website List.
HP XW8000 Worstation Service Manual
S21 Error Codes
Note Opens a MS Word document.

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1149 of 1150
 EPST
GE Medical Systems Philips Intera NT MV DI Service
Rev 1 Multi-Vendor Resources 5197921-200

MULTI-VENDOR RESOURCES
If you have comments or suggestions, please email them
to: [email protected]
For more troubleshooting tips, refer to the PSDB:
Problem Solution Database
For additional support, please visit the following useful
Support Central sites:
Multi-Vendor Support Operations Portal
WLP: MV Technical Training Center
myLearning
Environment, Heath and Saftey
Multi-Vendor Remote Diagnostics
Multi-Vendor OEM Website List

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Safety Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting

PROPERTY OF GE - FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY - NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT COPY - DISCLOSURE TO or USE BY THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED Page 1150 of 1150